Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery FM 3-20.21

FM 3-20.
21
MCWP 3-12.2
Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery
September 2009
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Distribution authorized to US Government agencies and

their contractors only to protect technical or operational information that is for official
government use. This determination was made on 5 January 2007. Other requests for this
document must be referred to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat
Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E), ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G, 204 1st Cavalry
Regiment Road Ste 216, U.S. Army Armor Center, Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE. Destroy by any method that prevents disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.
Headquarters, Department of the Army
This publication is available at

Army Knowledge Online (www.us.army.mil) and
General Dennis J. Reimer Training and Doctrine
Digital Library at (www.train.army.mil).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
Change 1
Headquarters
Department of the Army
Washington, DC, 31 May 2010

1. Change FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, 3 September 2009, as follows:
Remove old pages:
Insert new pages:
7-17 and 7-18 ...................................................... 7-17 and 7-18
A-15 and A-16 ..................................................... A-15 and A-16
A-19 and A-20 ..................................................... A-19 and A-20
A-37 and A-38 ..................................................... A-37 and A-38
A-45 and A-46 ..................................................... A-45 and A-46
A-49 and A-50 ..................................................... A-49 and A-50
A-57 and A-60 ..................................................... A-57 and A-60
A-63 and A-64 ..................................................... A-63 and A-64
A-93 and A-94 ..................................................... A-93 and A-94
A-97 and A-100 ................................................... A-97 and A-100
A-123 and A-124 ................................................. A-123 and A-124
B-65 and B-66 ..................................................... B-65 and B-66
2. A star (*) marks new or changed material.
3. File this transmission sheet in front of the publication.
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution authorized to US Government agencies and their
contractors only to protect technical or operational information that is for official government use. This
determination was made on 5 January 2007. Other requests for this document must be referred to
Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E),
ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G, 204 1st Cavalry Regiment Road Ste 216, U.S. Army Armor Center, Fort Knox,
KY 40121-5123.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that prevents disclosure of contents or
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

GEORGE W. CASEY, JR.
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
1013106
DISTRIBUTION: Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in
accordance with initial distribution number (IDN) 110469, requirements for FM 3-20.21.
PIN: 085783-001
This page intentionally left blank.
*FM 3-20.21
Headquarters
Washington, DC
Field Manual
No. 3-20.21
Marine Corps Warfighting Publication
No. 3-12.2
Headquarters
Marine Corps Development Command
Department of the Navy
Headquarters
United States Marine Corps
Washington, DC
3 September 2009

Contents
Page
PREFACE ..........................................................................................................xxx
Chapter 1
Introduction ....................................................................................................... 1-1

Section I Purpose .......................................................................................... 1-1
Section II Scope ............................................................................................. 1-2
Section III General Changes ......................................................................... 1-2
Chapters ............................................................................................................. 1-3
Appendices ......................................................................................................... 1-7
Chapter 2
Platform Systems Characteristics .................................................................. 2-1

Section I Abrams Systems ........................................................................... 2-1
M1A1 Model ....................................................................................................... 2-2
M1A1 AIM Model ................................................................................................ 2-2
M1A1 AIM SA Model .......................................................................................... 2-4
M1A2 SEP Model ............................................................................................... 2-5
M1A2 SEP V2 (Version 2) Model ....................................................................... 2-7
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Distribution authorized to US Government agencies and

their contractors only to protect technical or operational information that is for official
government use. This determination was made on 5 January 2007. Other requests for this
document must be referred to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat
Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E), ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G, 204 1st Cavalry
Regiment Road Ste 216, U.S. Army Armor Center, Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE. Destroy by any method that prevents disclosure of contents or
*This publication supersedes FM 3-20.8, Scout Gunnery, 15 August 2005; FM 3-20.12, Tank
Gunnery (Abrams), 15 August 2005; FM 3-22.1 Bradley Gunnery, 28 November 2003; and
FM 17-12-7, Tank Gunnery Devices and Usage Strategies, 1 May 2000.
i
Contents
Section II Bradley Fighting Vehicle Systems .............................................. 2-9

M2A2 and M3A2 Models................................................................................... 2-10
M2A2 ODS and M3A2 ODS Models ................................................................. 2-10
M2A3 and M3A3 Models................................................................................... 2-11
M7 Bradley Fire Support Team ......................................................................... 2-14
Section III Guardian Armored Security Vehicle (M1117) .......................... 2-14
Section IV Armed HMMWV Systems .......................................................... 2-16
M1025A2/M1026A1 Armed HMMWV Model .................................................... 2-16
M1114 Up-Armored Armed HMMWV Model .................................................... 2-17
M1151 Enhanced Up-Armored Armed HMMWV Model ................................... 2-17
Section V M1064A3 Self-Propelled 120-mm Mortar Carrier ..................... 2-18
Chapter 3
Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities ......................................................... 3-1

Section I Automatic Machine Guns .............................................................. 3-1
M231 5.56-mm Firing Port Weapon .................................................................... 3-1
M249 Squad Automatic Weapon ........................................................................ 3-2
M240 Machine Gun Series ................................................................................. 3-4
M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun ........................................................................ 3-6
MK19 MOD3 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun ..................................................... 3-7
Section II M242 25-mm Automatic Gun ....................................................... 3-8
M242 25-mm Automatic Gun .............................................................................. 3-8
Enhanced 25-mm Gun ........................................................................................ 3-9
Section III M256 120-mm Smoothbore Cannon ........................................... 3-9
Functional Components of the Gun Tube and Breech ..................................... 3-10
Components of the Recoil System ................................................................... 3-12
Section IV M121 120-mm Mortar ................................................................. 3-12
Section V Smoke Grenade Launchers ....................................................... 3-14
M250 Smoke Grenade Launcher ...................................................................... 3-14
M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher ...................................................................... 3-14
Section VI TOW ............................................................................................ 3-16
Chapter 4
Ammunition ....................................................................................................... 4-1

Section I Ammunition Terminology ............................................................. 4-2
Markings and Symbols........................................................................................ 4-2
Ammunition Lot Numbers ................................................................................... 4-4
Department of Defense Codes ........................................................................... 4-6
Color Coding ....................................................................................................... 4-8
Section II Machine Gun Ammunition ......................................................... 4-10
Packaging ......................................................................................................... 4-10
M249 5.56-mm Machine Gun Ammunition ....................................................... 4-12
M240 7.62-mm Machine Gun Ammunition ....................................................... 4-15
M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun Ammunition .................................................. 4-17
Section III 25-mm Bradley Fighting Vehicle Ammunition ........................ 4-20
Classification ..................................................................................................... 4-20
Identification ...................................................................................................... 4-20
Service Ammunition .......................................................................................... 4-21
Target Practice Ammunition.............................................................................. 4-29
ii
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Safety Information ............................................................................................ 4-31

Section IV MK19 Mod 3, 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun .......................... 4-32
Service Ammunition.......................................................................................... 4-34
Training Ammunition......................................................................................... 4-35
Section V 120-mm Abrams Tank Ammunition ......................................... 4-38
Classification .................................................................................................... 4-39
Identification ..................................................................................................... 4-39
Target Practice Ammunition ............................................................................. 4-51
Section VI Mortar Ammunition ................................................................... 4-58
Classification .................................................................................................... 4-58
Authorized Cartridges ....................................................................................... 4-58
Target Practice Ammunition ............................................................................. 4-62
Fuzes ................................................................................................................ 4-63
Mortar Safety Information ................................................................................. 4-67
Section VII Smoke Grenades...................................................................... 4-68
Section VIII Missiles .................................................................................... 4-72
TOW Missile Ammunition ................................................................................. 4-72
Javelin Antitank Guided Missile........................................................................ 4-93
Section IX Planning Considerations.......................................................... 4-98
Section X Safety ........................................................................................ 4-103
Chapter 5
Detect ................................................................................................................. 5-1

Section I Engagement Process .................................................................... 5-1
Section II Detect............................................................................................. 5-2
Crew Search ....................................................................................................... 5-2
Sectors of Responsibility .................................................................................... 5-3
Target Detection ................................................................................................. 5-5
Target Location................................................................................................... 5-7
Search Techniques ............................................................................................ 5-9
Ground and Air Search Tips ............................................................................. 5-15
Chapter 6
Identify ............................................................................................................... 6-1

Section I Classification ................................................................................. 6-1
Section II Identification ................................................................................. 6-2
Ground Vehicle ................................................................................................... 6-2
Aircraft Vehicle Identification .............................................................................. 6-9
Section III Discrimination ........................................................................... 6-13
Discrimination Definitions ................................................................................. 6-13
Joint Combat Identification Marking Systems .................................................. 6-13
Chapter 7
Decide ................................................................................................................ 7-1

Section I Target Determination .................................................................... 7-1
Threat Levels ...................................................................................................... 7-2
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
iii
Contents
Target Prioritization ............................................................................................. 7-2

Weapon/Ammunition Selection ........................................................................... 7-3
Target Confirmation ............................................................................................ 7-4
Section II Immediate Range Determination ................................................. 7-5
Immediate Determination .................................................................................... 7-5
Laser Range Finder ............................................................................................ 7-5
Section III Deliberate Range Determination .............................................. 7-11
Mil Relationship Method.................................................................................... 7-11
Maps/Digital Maps Method ............................................................................... 7-17
Chapter 8
Engage Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew) ..................................................... 8-1

Section I Battlecarry ...................................................................................... 8-2
Prepare for Contact ............................................................................................. 8-2
Section II Fire Commands ............................................................................. 8-8
Fire Commands Categories .............................................................................. 8-17
Fire Command Terms ....................................................................................... 8-22
Subsequent Fire Commands ............................................................................ 8-26
Multiple Engagements ...................................................................................... 8-29
Section III Engagement Techniques .......................................................... 8-32
Employing Vehicle Machine Guns .................................................................... 8-33
Engage Soft Targets ......................................................................................... 8-33
Section IV Sample Fire Commands ........................................................... 8-43
Section V Indirect Fire ................................................................................. 8-65
Call for Fire........................................................................................................ 8-65
Adjusting Fires .................................................................................................. 8-74
Chapter 9
Engage Collective .......................................................................................... 9-1

Section I Section, Platoon, and Company Fire Control ............................. 9-2
Principles of Fire Control..................................................................................... 9-2
Fire Control Measures ........................................................................................ 9-3
Section II Direct Fire Planning and Execution .......................................... 9-13
Direct Fire Planning .......................................................................................... 9-13
Company/Platoon/Section Fire Commands...................................................... 9-14
Section III Indirect Fire Planning and Execution ...................................... 9-18
Indirect Fire Planning ........................................................................................ 9-18
Indirect Fire Team ............................................................................................. 9-19
Fire Planning ..................................................................................................... 9-19
Fire Support Planning for Offensive Operations ............................................... 9-20
Fire Support Planning for Defensive Operations .............................................. 9-21
Target Attack ..................................................................................................... 9-26
Chapter 10
Assess.............................................................................................................. 10-1
Section I Engagement Termination ............................................................ 10-2
Section II Engagement Assessment .......................................................... 10-2
Direct Fire Engagement Assessment ............................................................... 10-2
Indirect Fire Engagement Assessment ............................................................. 10-3
Section III Reports ....................................................................................... 10-4
iv
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Chapter 11
Training Devices ............................................................................................. 11-1

Section I TADSS Overview ......................................................................... 11-1
Section II Common TADSS ......................................................................... 11-3
Training Aids ..................................................................................................... 11-3
Devices ............................................................................................................. 11-8
Simulators and Simulations .............................................................................. 11-9
Section III Abrams TADSS ........................................................................ 11-16
Training Aids ................................................................................................... 11-16
Devices ........................................................................................................... 11-19
Simulators and Simulations ............................................................................ 11-20
Section IV Bradley TADSS ........................................................................ 11-23
Training Aids ................................................................................................... 11-23
Devices ........................................................................................................... 11-25
Section V Armed HMMWV TADSS ........................................................... 11-29
Training Aids ................................................................................................... 11-29
Chapter 12
Gunnery Training Program ............................................................................ 12-1

Section I Training Assessment .................................................................. 12-2
Essential Warfighting Skills .............................................................................. 12-2
Battle Focus ...................................................................................................... 12-2
Mission-Essential Task List .............................................................................. 12-3
Commanders Assessment .............................................................................. 12-3
Section II Training Strategy ........................................................................ 12-4
Gunnery Tables ................................................................................................ 12-4
Individual Gunnery Phase ................................................................................ 12-5
Crew Gunnery Phase ....................................................................................... 12-7
Collective Gunnery Phase ................................................................................ 12-8
Cross-Training Strategy ................................................................................... 12-9
Integrated Training Strategy ............................................................................. 12-9
Section III Commanders Guidance ......................................................... 12-17
Training Goals ................................................................................................ 12-17
Training Requirements ................................................................................... 12-17
Section IV Training Plans ......................................................................... 12-18
Gunnery Training ............................................................................................ 12-18
Long-Range Training Plans............................................................................ 12-20
Short-Range Training Plans ........................................................................... 12-21
Near-Term Training Plans .............................................................................. 12-22
Chapter 13
Range Operations........................................................................................... 13-1

Section I Planning Range Operations ....................................................... 13-1
Planning Gunnery Exercises ............................................................................ 13-1
Commanders Intent ......................................................................................... 13-2
Developing Scenarios for Collective Gunnery Tables .................................... 13-15
Planning for Range Operations ...................................................................... 13-20
Section II Conducting Range Operations ............................................... 13-24
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Contents
Opening the Range and Occupying the Training Site .................................... 13-24
During the Exercise ......................................................................................... 13-25
Closing the Range .......................................................................................... 13-25
Administration and Emergency Directions ...................................................... 13-26
Section III Digital Range Set Up................................................................ 13-27
Data Sets ........................................................................................................ 13-27
Range Overlay ................................................................................................ 13-27
Digital Base Station ......................................................................................... 13-28
Rehearsal ........................................................................................................ 13-28
Icon Management ........................................................................................... 13-28
Chapter 14
Individual and Crew Live-Fire Prerequisite Training ................................... 14-1

Section I Gunnery Skills Test ..................................................................... 14-1
Requirements .................................................................................................... 14-1
Safety Precautions ............................................................................................ 14-2
Evaluation Procedures ...................................................................................... 14-2
Planning Considerations ................................................................................... 14-3
Conduct of the Gunnery Skills Test .................................................................. 14-5
Test Stations ..................................................................................................... 14-6
Section II Gunnery Table I Crew Critical Skills Test ............................ 14-10
Requirements .................................................................................................. 14-10
Safety Precautions .......................................................................................... 14-10
Evaluation Procedures .................................................................................... 14-10
Planning Considerations ................................................................................. 14-12
Conduct of Gunnery Table I ............................................................................ 14-13
Test Stations ................................................................................................... 14-13
Chapter 15
Crew Evaluation .............................................................................................. 15-1

Section I Vehicle Crew Evaluators ............................................................. 15-2
Evaluator Team Composition............................................................................ 15-2
Evaluator Roles and Prerequisites ................................................................... 15-3
Duties ................................................................................................................ 15-4
Vehicle Crew Evaluators Certification............................................................... 15-5
Section II Engagement Task, Conditions, and Standards ....................... 15-6
Evaluation Terms and Concepts ....................................................................... 15-6
Section III Firing Occasion and Timing Events....................................... 15-10
Target Exposure Time .................................................................................... 15-10
Vehicle Exposure Time ................................................................................... 15-11
Offensive, Short Halt, or Retrograde Engagements ....................................... 15-11
Defensive Engagements ................................................................................. 15-12
Exposure Break Times.................................................................................... 15-14
Section IV Evaluating the Crews Duties ................................................. 15-19
Immediate DisqualificationExtremely Hazardous Conduct ......................... 15-19
Automatic Zero-Point PenaltyCritical Crew TasksNot Adhering to Task,
Conditions, and Standards.............................................................................. 15-19
30-Point PenaltySafety/Personnel Protection ............................................. 15-20
5-Point PenaltyLeader or Fundamental Crew Tasks .................................. 15-20
vi
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Section V Common Crew Scoresheet ..................................................... 15-22

Section VI Crew Qualification Standards................................................ 15-26
Individual Gunnery Phase .............................................................................. 15-26
Crew Gunnery Phase ..................................................................................... 15-26
Qualification Re-Fires ..................................................................................... 15-26
Section VII Call For Engagements ....................................................... 15-27
Section VIII After Action Reviews ............................................................ 15-27
Planning the AARs ......................................................................................... 15-27
Preparing for the AARs .................................................................................. 15-28
Conducting the AARs ..................................................................................... 15-28
Matrix Examples ............................................................................................. 15-29
Chapter 16
Stabilized Platform Gunnery ......................................................................... 16-1

Section I Requirements .............................................................................. 16-1
Gunnery Tables ................................................................................................ 16-1
Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 16-3
Engagement Tasks........................................................................................... 16-4
Minimum Proficiency Levels ............................................................................. 16-7
Digital Gunnery ................................................................................................. 16-9
Scenario Requirements .................................................................................... 16-9
Developing Scenarios for Crew Gunnery Tables ............................................. 16-9
Section II Gunnery Instruction and Live-Fire Prerequisites.................. 16-10
Common Instruction ....................................................................................... 16-10
Gunnery Table I .............................................................................................. 16-12
Gunnery Table II, Crew Practice Course ....................................................... 16-13
Section III Crew Gunnery .......................................................................... 16-15
Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun .......................................................... 16-15
Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun ................................................................ 16-17
Gunnery Table III/IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main Gun (GT 34)................. 16-19
Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice .................................................................... 16-21
Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification ............................................................ 16-23
Crew Ratings .................................................................................................. 16-23
Section IV Example Gunnery Table VI..................................................... 16-25
Chapter 17
Unstabilized Platform Gunnery ..................................................................... 17-1

Section I Gunnery Training Program......................................................... 17-2
Section II Requirements ............................................................................. 17-3
Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 17-3
Digital Gunnery ................................................................................................. 17-5
Scenario Requirements .................................................................................... 17-5
Developing Scenarios for Crew Gunnery Tables ............................................. 17-6
Section III Unstabilized Platform Gunnery ................................................ 17-9
Common Instruction ......................................................................................... 17-9
Gunnery Table I, Critical Crew Skills .............................................................. 17-11
Gunnery Table II, CPC ................................................................................... 17-13
Section IV Crew Gunnery ......................................................................... 17-15
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
vii
Contents
Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun ........................................................... 17-15

Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun ........................................ 17-18
Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice .......................................................... 17-21
Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course ................................................ 17-24
Chapter 18
Collective Gunnery ......................................................................................... 18-1

Section I Evaluation ..................................................................................... 18-1
Concept ............................................................................................................. 18-1
Collective Task Scoring Model ......................................................................... 18-2
Evaluation Team ............................................................................................... 18-6
General Requirements ...................................................................................... 18-6
Digital Requirements......................................................................................... 18-9
Call for Fire Requirements ................................................................................ 18-9
Prerequisites ................................................................................................... 18-10
Section II Section Gunnery ....................................................................... 18-11
Table VIISection Proficiency Exercise .......................................................... 18-11
Table VIIISection Practice............................................................................. 18-12
Table IXSection Qualification ........................................................................ 18-13
Section III Platoon Gunnery ...................................................................... 18-15
Table XPlatoon Proficiency Exercise ............................................................ 18-15
Table XIPlatoon Practice .............................................................................. 18-16
Table XIIPlatoon Qualification....................................................................... 18-17
Chapter 19
Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise .............................................................. 19-1

Section I Conduct of the Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise................. 19-1
Concept ............................................................................................................. 19-1
Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 19-2
Training Philosophy .......................................................................................... 19-2
Section II Planning Guidelines ................................................................... 19-2
Weapon System Considerations ...................................................................... 19-3
Personnel Requirements ................................................................................ 19-11
Section III Training ..................................................................................... 19-12
Progressive Training ....................................................................................... 19-12
Key Personnel Training ................................................................................... 19-13
Observer/Controller and Evaluator Preparation ............................................. 19-13
Section IV Execution ................................................................................. 19-13
Phase One Pre-Live-Fire ............................................................................. 19-13
Phase Two Tactical Movement, Mission Execution .................................... 19-14
Phase Three Reorganization and Reconstitution ........................................ 19-14
Section V Evaluation ................................................................................. 19-15
Standards for Evaluation................................................................................. 19-15
Scoring ............................................................................................................ 19-17
Appendix A
Abrams Live-Fire Preparation......................................................................... A-1
Appendix B
Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation ............................................ B-1
Appendix C
Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation ................................................................ C-1
viii
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Appendix D
Rifle Squad Gunnery ........................................................................................ D-1
Appendix E
Engineer Squad Qualification Tables ............................................................. E-1
Appendix F
Safety ................................................................................................................. F-1
Appendix G
Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation ..............................................................G-1
Appendix H
120-mm Mortar Gunnery .................................................................................. H-1

GLOSSARY .......................................................................................... Glossary-1
REFERENCES .................................................................................. References-1
INDEX .......................................................................................................... Index-1
Figures
Figure 2-1. M1A1 .................................................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2. Revised hull and turret network boxes................................................................. 2-2
Figure 2-3. Upgraded tank commanders panel ..................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-4. Eyesafe laser range finder ................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-5. Drivers vision enhancement ................................................................................ 2-4
Figure 2-6. Drivers vision enhancement (front display) ......................................................... 2-5
Figure 2-7. Drivers vision enhancement (rear connections) ................................................. 2-5
Figure 2-8. M1A2 SEP............................................................................................................ 2-6
Figure 2-9. Commanders independent thermal viewer ......................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-10. M2A2/M3A2 ..................................................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-11. M2A3/M3A3 ..................................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-12. M7 Bradley Fire Support Vehicle ..................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-13. Armored Security Vehicle M1117 .................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-14. M1025A2/M1026A1 ......................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-15. M1114 Up-Armored Armed HMMWV .............................................................. 2-17
Figure 2-16. M1151 Enhanced Up-Armored HMMWV ........................................................ 2-18
Figure 2-17. M1064A3 self-propelled 120-mm mortar carrier .............................................. 2-19
Figure 3-1. M231 5.56-mm firing port weapon ....................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3-2. M249 squad automatic weapon 5.56mm ............................................................. 3-3
Figure 3-3. M240 series 7.62-mm machine gun .................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-4. M240B machine gun ............................................................................................ 3-5
Figure 3-5. M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun ........................................................................... 3-6
Figure 3-6. MK19 40mm grenade launcher ........................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-7. M242 25-mm automatic gun ................................................................................ 3-8
Figure 3-8. M256 120-mm smoothbore cannon ..................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-9. Chamber area .................................................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-10. Forcing cone area ............................................................................................ 3-10
Figure 3-11. Bore.................................................................................................................. 3-11
Figure 3-12. The 120-mm mortar ......................................................................................... 3-13
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
ix
Contents
Figure 3-13. Smoke grenade launcher ................................................................................ 3-14

Figure 3-14. M257 smoke grenade launchers ..................................................................... 3-15
Figure 3-15. Tube-Launched, Optically Tracked, Wire-Guided Missile ............................... 3-16
Figure 4-1. Ammunition packaging and common markings example .................................... 4-2
Figure 4-2. Standard small arms ammunition markings ........................................................ 4-3
Figure 4-3. Lot number example ............................................................................................ 4-4
Figure 4-4. Tenth position codes ........................................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-5. National stock number example .......................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-6. Country of origin codes ....................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-7. Department of Defense Identification Code example ......................................... 4-8
Figure 4-8. Department of Defense Ammunition Code example ........................................... 4-8
Figure 4-9. Small arms color coding and packaging markings ............................................ 4-10
Figure 4-10. Bandoleer with 10 round clips, 5.56mm .......................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-11. Storage marking .............................................................................................. 4-11
Figure 4-12.Transportation marking .................................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-13. M27 clip-type open link .................................................................................... 4-12
Figure 4-14. 5.56mm crew serve common ammunition types ............................................. 4-14
Figure 4-15. 7.62mm ammunition with M13 disintegrating link ........................................... 4-15
Figure 4-16. 7.62mm crew serve common ammunition types ............................................. 4-16
Figure 4-17. M2/M9 closed loop link .................................................................................... 4-17
Figure 4-18a. Characteristics of the most common caliber .50 ammunition types .............. 4-18
Figure 4-18b. Characteristics of the most common caliber .50 ammunition types
(continued) ........................................................................................................ 4-19
Figure 4-19. Kinetic energy formula ..................................................................................... 4-21
Figure 4-20. Comparison of service ammunition for 25-mm gun ........................................ 4-22
Figure 4-21. M791 armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer .......................................... 4-23
Figure 4-22. M919 armor-piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot, with tracer .................. 4-24
Figure 4-23. M792 high-explosive incendiary with tracer .................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-24. M758 high-explosive incendiary with tracer fuze ............................................ 4-25
Figure 4-25. M758 fuze hazard classification marker .......................................................... 4-25
Figure 4-26. M758 fuze in SAFE.......................................................................................... 4-26
Figure 4-27. M758 fuze setback function............................................................................. 4-26
Figure 4-28. M758 fuze initial arming function ..................................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-29. M758 fuze arming sequence complete ........................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-30. M758 fuze direct impact functioning ................................................................ 4-28
Figure 4-31. M758 fuze grazing impact functioning ............................................................. 4-28
Figure 4-32. M758 fuze self destruct functioning ................................................................. 4-29
Figure 4-33. Frontal and grazing projectile impact zones for the M792 .............................. 4-29
Figure 4-34. Comparison of training ammunition for 25-mm gun ........................................ 4-30
Figure 4-35. M910 TPDS-T.................................................................................................. 4-30
Figure 4-36. M793 TP-T ....................................................................................................... 4-31
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Figure 4-37. 25 mm sabot petal danger area ....................................................................... 4-31

Figure 4-38. Characteristics of 40-mm grenade................................................................... 4-33
Figure 4-39. M430A1 internal components .......................................................................... 4-34
Figure 4-40. M1001 HVCC projectile and flechettes ............................................................ 4-35
Figure 4-41. M385 TP internal components ......................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4-42. M918 internal components .............................................................................. 4-36
Figure 4-43. BA30 2:1 Link ................................................................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-44. MK 281 mod 0 target practice .......................................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-45. B472 dummy linked ......................................................................................... 4-38
Figure 4-46. 40mm ammunition color codes and markings ................................................. 4-38
Figure 4-47. Aft cap markings .............................................................................................. 4-40
Figure 4-48. Case base quick reference markings for service ammunition ......................... 4-40
Figure 4-49. Case base quick reference markings for training ammunition ........................ 4-41
Figure 4-50. Components of a 120mm main gun round ...................................................... 4-42
Figure 4-51. Tank service round technical data ................................................................... 4-43
Figure 4-52. Kinetic energy formula ..................................................................................... 4-44
Figure 4-53. M829A3 APFSDS-T (120mm) ......................................................................... 4-45
Figure 4-54. M829A1/M829A2 APFSDS-T (120mm) ........................................................... 4-46
Figure 4-55. M830 HEAT-MP-T (120mm) ............................................................................ 4-46
Figure 4-56. Chemical energy ammunition effects............................................................... 4-47
Figure 4-57. M830A1 HEAT-MP-T and M908 HE-OR-T ...................................................... 4-48
Figure 4-58. M1028 canister ................................................................................................ 4-49
Figure 4-59. M1028 canister lethal danger zone (not to scale)............................................ 4-50
Figure 4-60. 120 mm target practice round technical data .................................................. 4-51
Figure 4-61. M865 TPCSDS-T ............................................................................................. 4-52
Figure 4-62. M831A1 HEAT-TP-T ........................................................................................ 4-52
Figure 4-63. M1002 TPMP-T ................................................................................................ 4-53
Figure 4-64. Discarding Sabot danger area ......................................................................... 4-55
Figure 4-65. Man-Portable Chamber Gage, NSN 5220-01-477-5455 ................................. 4-56
Figure 4-66. 120-mm mortar round technical data ............................................................... 4-59
Figure 4-67. M933A1 HE, with fuze, PD: M783 (120 mm) ................................................... 4-60
Figure 4-68. M934 HE, with fuze, multi-optional: M734A1 (120 mm) .................................. 4-60
Figure 4-69. M929 WP, with fuze, multi-optional: M734A1 (120 mm) ................................. 4-61
Figure 4-70. M930 IL, with fuze, super-quick: M776 (120 mm) ........................................... 4-61
Figure 4-71. M983 IL, with fuze, super-quick: M776 (120 mm) ........................................... 4-62
Figure 4-72. M931 FRTR, with fuze, PD: M781 (120 mm) .................................................. 4-62
Figure 4-73. M776 MTSQ fuze ............................................................................................. 4-63
Figure 4-74. M776 MTSQ fuze ............................................................................................. 4-64
Figure 4-75. M935 PD fuze .................................................................................................. 4-64
Figure 4-76. Setting the M935 PD fuze ................................................................................ 4-65
Figure 4-77. M734 multioption fuze ...................................................................................... 4-65
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xi
Contents
Figure 4-78. Setting the M734 multi-option fuze .................................................................. 4-66

Figure 4-79. M745 PD fuze .................................................................................................. 4-66
Figure 4-80. Salvo pattern for the M250 smoke grenade launcher system......................... 4-69
Figure 4-81. Salvo pattern for the M257 smoke grenade launcher system......................... 4-69
Figure 4-82. L8A1 and L8A3 smoke grenade ...................................................................... 4-70
Figure 4-83. M76 and M82 smoke grenades ....................................................................... 4-71
Figure 4-84. Smoke grenade composite hazard area ......................................................... 4-72
Figure 4-85. TOW missile sections, TOW-2A models with extended probe ....................... 4-73
Figure 4-86. TOW 2B missile sections, no extended probe ................................................ 4-73
Figure 4-87. TOW-BB sections ............................................................................................ 4-74
Figure 4-88. TOW launch container example (side, top and front views) ........................... 4-74
Figure 4-89. TOW warhead assembly with extended probe (TOW-2A) .............................. 4-75
Figure 4-90. TOW-2B warhead assembly ........................................................................... 4-76
Figure 4-91.TOW missile stencil markings .......................................................................... 4-77
Figure 4-92.TOW missile characteristics ............................................................................. 4-78
Figure 4-93. TOW-2A cut away diagram ............................................................................. 4-79
Figure 4-94. TOW missile striking ERA protected threat target........................................... 4-80
Figure 4-95. Initial detonation of precursor charge .............................................................. 4-81
Figure 4-96. Detonation of the primary warhead ................................................................. 4-81
Figure 4-97. TOW-2A, BGM-71E-4B ................................................................................... 4-82
Figure 4-98. TOW-2A characteristics and markings............................................................ 4-82
Figure 4-99. TOW-2A practice characteristics and markings .............................................. 4-83
Figure 4-100. TOW-2B Aero ................................................................................................ 4-83
Figure 4-101. TOW-2B cut away diagram ........................................................................... 4-84
Figure 4-102a. TOW-2B functioning sequence ................................................................... 4-85
Figure 4-102b. TOW-2B functioning sequence (continued) ................................................ 4-86
Figure 4-102c. TOW-2B functioning sequence (continued) ................................................ 4-86
Figure 4-103. TOW-2B characteristics and markings.......................................................... 4-87
Figure 4-104. TOW-2B Gen I characteristics and markings ................................................ 4-87
Figure 4-105. TOW-2B Aero characteristics and markings ................................................. 4-88
Figure 4-106.TOW-2B Aero RF characteristics and markings ............................................ 4-88
Figure 4-107.TOW-2B Aero Gen I characteristics and markings ........................................ 4-89
Figure 4-108. TOW-2B Aero Gen 2 characteristics and markings ...................................... 4-89
Figure 4-109. TOW-2B Aero Gen 2 RF characteristics and markings ................................ 4-90
Figure 4-110. TOW-BB basic sections ................................................................................ 4-91
Figure 4-111. TOW-BB characteristics and markings ......................................................... 4-91
Figure 4-112. TOW-BB RF characteristics and markings ................................................... 4-92
Figure 4-113. Backblast area danger zone.......................................................................... 4-93
Figure 4-114. Javelin missile ............................................................................................... 4-96
Figure 4-115. Javelin backblast safety zones ...................................................................... 4-97
Figure 4-116. Example of ammunition placards ................................................................ 4-100
xii
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Figure 4-117. HBCT common vehicle cargo capacity ........................................................ 4-102

Figure 4-118. Ammunition lot restriction flow chart ............................................................ 4-104
Figure 5-1. Engagement process (detect).............................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-2. Dead space considerations for closed hatch operations ..................................... 5-4
Figure 5-3. Abrams weapon dead space (flank) ................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-4. Bradley weapon dead space (flank) .................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-5. Rapid scans ......................................................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-6. Slow (50-meter) scan ......................................................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-7. Ground-to-rooftop and horizontal slow-scan techniques ................................... 5-11
Figure 5-8. Detailed-search technique ................................................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-9. Horizontal search and scan ............................................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-10. Vertical search and scan ................................................................................. 5-14
Figure 5-11. Estimating 20 degrees ..................................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-12. Sector overlapping ........................................................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-13. Sector divided .................................................................................................. 5-16
Figure 6-1. Engagement process (identify) ............................................................................ 6-2
Figure 6-2. Unsupported track (example one) ....................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-3. Unsupported track (example two) ........................................................................ 6-3
Figure 6-4. Supported track .................................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-5. Boat shaped hull .................................................................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-6. Boxed shaped hull ............................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-7. Trim vane ............................................................................................................. 6-5
Figure 6-8. Hydrojets .............................................................................................................. 6-6
Figure 6-9. Bore evacuator ..................................................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-10. Gun mantle......................................................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-11. Fording kit .......................................................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-12. Armored reactive tiles ........................................................................................ 6-8
Figure 6-13. Key recognition features (armored) ................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-14. Engine mounting .............................................................................................. 6-10
Figure 6-15. Rotary wing external sensors .......................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-16. Tail rotor ........................................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-17. Fenestron tail rotor ........................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-18. Rear horizontal stabilizer wings ....................................................................... 6-12
Figure 6-19. Key identification features (helicopter)............................................................. 6-12
Figure 6-20. Combat identification panel ............................................................................. 6-14
Figure 6-21. Abrams thermal identification panel placement ............................................... 6-14
Figure 6-22. Bradley thermal identification panel placement ............................................... 6-15
Figure 6-23. Thermal identification panel NSN listing .......................................................... 6-16
Figure 6-24. Phoenix Beacon ............................................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6-25. BRMS NSN listing ............................................................................................ 6-18
Figure 6-26. BRMS T-Back style .......................................................................................... 6-18
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xiii
Contents
Figure 6-27. VS-17 panel ..................................................................................................... 6-18

Figure 6-28. Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below ............................................. 6-19
Figure 7-1. Engagement process (decide) ............................................................................ 7-2
Figure 7-2. LRAS3 NFOV reticle............................................................................................ 7-6
Figure 7-3. LRAS3 WFOV reticle indicators .......................................................................... 7-6
Figure 7-4. Bradley Stadia reticle on flank target................................................................... 7-7
Figure 7-5. Bradley Stadia reticle on frontal target ................................................................ 7-8
Figure 7-6. Abrams Stadia reticle with full target .................................................................. 7-8
Figure 7-7. Abrams Stadia reticle, defilade target................................................................. 7-9
Figure 7-8. Integrated Sight Unit choke (full target) ............................................................. 7-10
Figure 7-9. Integrated Sight Unit choke (defilade target)..................................................... 7-10
Figure 7-10. Constant mil-angle relationship ....................................................................... 7-12
Figure 7-11. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions .............................................................................. 7-14
Figure 7-12. Flank BMP-2 dimensions ................................................................................ 7-14
Figure 7-13. Frontal Mi-24 Hind-D dimensions .................................................................... 7-14
Figure 7-14. Flank Mi-24 Hind-D dimensions ...................................................................... 7-15
Figure 7-15. Frontal T-72 dimensions .................................................................................. 7-15
Figure 7-16. Flank T-72 dimensions .................................................................................... 7-16
Figure 7-17. Measuring width with binoculars ..................................................................... 7-16
Figure 8-1. Engagement process (engage) ........................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8-2. Battlecarry command........................................................................................... 8-4
Figure 8-3. Concept of battlesight .......................................................................................... 8-5
Figure 8-4. Battlesight range examples, APFSDS, and AP rounds....................................... 8-6
Figure 8-5. Battlesight range examples, chemical energy rounds ........................................ 8-7
Figure 8-6. Elevation levels Alpha, Bravo, and Charlie example......................................... 8-14
Figure 8-7. Fire command concept ...................................................................................... 8-18
Figure 8-8. Standard fire command, single target example................................................. 8-20
Figure 8-9. Reduced fire command, single target ............................................................... 8-21
Figure 8-10. Rounds fired .................................................................................................... 8-24
Figure 8-11. Reduced multiple target fire command example ............................................. 8-31
Figure 8-12. Manually applied lead for a slow moving target .............................................. 8-34
Figure 8-13. Manually applied lead for a fast moving target................................................ 8-34
Figure 8-14. Aiming point for machine gun point target, stationary ..................................... 8-35
Figure 8-15. Z pattern fired from the front ............................................................................ 8-36
Figure 8-16. Z pattern .......................................................................................................... 8-37
Figure 8-17. Aiming points for engaging aircraft with vehicle machine guns ...................... 8-38
Figure 8-18. Paratrooper engagement technique ................................................................ 8-39
Figure 8-19. Sight picture for lasing on troops using last return logic ................................. 8-41
Figure 8-20. M1A1 caliber .50 aiming points ....................................................................... 8-43
Figure 8-21. Direct fire adjustment using the re-engage method ........................................ 8-44
Figure 8-22. Single target engagement example................................................................. 8-45
xiv
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Figure 8-23. Multiple target fire command example ............................................................. 8-46

Figure 8-24. Single target fire command using BATTLE SGT button example ................... 8-47
Figure 8-25. Single target fire command example without LRF/ELRF................................. 8-48
Figure 8-26. Single target fire command using the stadia reticle with adjustment
example............................................................................................................. 8-49
Figure 8-27. Multiple target fire command using the stadia reticle example ........................ 8-50
Figure 8-28. Multiple target fire command, GPS malfunction example................................ 8-51
Figure 8-29. Change of weapon system using GAS or auxiliary sight fire command
example............................................................................................................. 8-52
Figure 8-30. Fire command to dismounted squad example ................................................. 8-53
Figure 8-31. Smoke grenade fire command example .......................................................... 8-54
Figure 8-32. Simultaneous engagement fire command example ........................................ 8-55
Figure 8-33. Change of weapon system fire command example......................................... 8-56
Figure 8-34. Simultaneous targets, caliber .50 and main gun example ............................... 8-57
Figure 8-35. VC main gun fire command example............................................................... 8-58
Figure 8-36. Canister engagement using FIRE AND ADJUST ......................................... 8-59
Figure 8-37. Multiple weapon system (Bradley) fire command example ............................. 8-60
Figure 8-38. Multiple weapon system (Bradley), fire and adjust, fire command
example............................................................................................................. 8-61
Figure 8-39. Truck single target fire command example ...................................................... 8-62
Figure 8-40. Truck multiple target fire command example ................................................... 8-63
Figure 8-41. ASV change of weapon system fire command example ................................. 8-64
Figure 8-42. Standard sheaf ................................................................................................. 8-69
Figure 8-43. Converged sheaf.............................................................................................. 8-69
Figure 8-44. Open sheaf ...................................................................................................... 8-70
Figure 8-45. Special sheaf ................................................................................................... 8-70
Figure 8-46. Parallel sheaf ................................................................................................... 8-71
Figure 8-47a. Fire mission examples ................................................................................... 8-73
Figure 8-47b. Fire mission examples (continued) ................................................................ 8-74
Figure 8-48. Observer target factor calculation .................................................................... 8-75
Figure 8-49. Observer target factor ...................................................................................... 8-75
Figure 8-50. Range spotting for observer adjustments ........................................................ 8-76
Figure 8-51. Deviation spotting of 30 left.............................................................................. 8-77
Figure 8-52. Initial splash of adjustment fire ........................................................................ 8-79
Figure 8-53. First adjustment round, DROP 400 ............................................................... 8-79
Figure 8-54. Second adjustment, ADD 200 ....................................................................... 8-80
Figure 8-55. Final adjustment, DROP 100, FIRE FOR EFFECT ....................................... 8-80
Figure 8-56. Hasty bracketing, first round ............................................................................ 8-81
Figure 8-57. Hasty bracketing, second round ...................................................................... 8-82
Figure 9-1. Engagement process (engage) ........................................................................... 9-1
Figure 9-2. Examples of terrain-based quadrants .................................................................. 9-6
Figure 9-3. Example of friendly-based quadrants .................................................................. 9-6
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xv
Contents
Figure 9-4. Examples of fire patterns ..................................................................................... 9-8

Figure 9-5. Examples of target array ..................................................................................... 9-9
Figure 9-6. Sample frontal fire command ............................................................................ 9-16
Figure 9-7. Sample cross-fire command.............................................................................. 9-17
Figure 9-8. Sample depth fire command ............................................................................. 9-18
Figure 9-9. Indirect fire team ................................................................................................ 9-19
Figure 9-10. Scheduled target (TRP type) ........................................................................... 9-24
Figure 9-11. Planned targets (linear type) ........................................................................... 9-24
Figure 9-12. Linear target symbol with FPF label ................................................................ 9-25
Figure 10-1. The engagement process (assess) ................................................................. 10-1
Figure 11-1. Sample ROC-V training screen ....................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11-2. Sample basic tracking board ........................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11-3. Sample advanced tracking board .................................................................... 11-6
Figure 11-4. Advanced with swithology ............................................................................... 11-6
Figure 11-5. Components of vehicular MILES 2000 ............................................................ 11-9
Figure 11-6. Call for Fire Trainer........................................................................................ 11-11
Figure 11-7. HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer ............................................................. 11-12
Figure 11-8. EST 2000 Engagement Skills Trainer ........................................................... 11-13
Figure 11-9. Close Combat Tactical Trainer ...................................................................... 11-16
Figure 11-10. 7.62mm, caliber .50 and 120-mm dummy rounds ...................................... 11-17
Figure 11-11. Caliber .50 inbore device ............................................................................. 11-20
Figure 11-12. Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer ......................................... 11-22
Figure 11-13. 7.62mm and 25mm dummy rounds ............................................................ 11-24
Figure 11-14. Precision Gunnery System .......................................................................... 11-26
Figure 11-15. Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer ........................ 11-27
Figure 11-16. Tabletop Full-Fidelity Trainer....................................................................... 11-28
Figure 11-17. Dummy rounds ............................................................................................ 11-30
Figure 11-18. VCCT-R (configuration 1) ............................................................................ 11-32
Figure 11-19. VCCT-R (configuration 2) ............................................................................ 11-32
Figure 11-20. VCCT-L ........................................................................................................ 11-33
Figure 11-21. Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer .............................................................. 11-34
Figure 12-1. Sample six month gunnery training plan ......................................................... 12-7
Figure 12-2. Abrams training strategy ............................................................................... 12-10
Figure 12-3. Mechanized infantry training strategy ........................................................... 12-11
Figure 12-4. Reconnaissance integrated training strategy ................................................ 12-12
Figure 12-5. Combat engineer integrated training strategy ............................................... 12-13
Figure 12-6. Fire support team training strategy................................................................ 12-14
Figure 12-7. Mortar integrated training strategy ................................................................ 12-15
Figure 12-8. Sustainment training strategy ........................................................................ 12-16
Figure 12-9. Sample six month gunnery training timeline (Abrams) ................................. 12-23
Figure 13-1. Urban cluster ................................................................................................... 13-6
xvi
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Figure 13-2a. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement .................................. 13-7

Figure 13-2b. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued) ............... 13-8
Figure 13-2c. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued) ............... 13-8
Figure 13-2d. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued) ............... 13-9
Figure 13-3. Sample SDZ diagram for 25-mm M792 ammunition ..................................... 13-11
Figure 13-4. Sample SDZ diagram for 7.62-mm M80 (A131) ammunition ........................ 13-12
Figure 14-1. Test station diagram ........................................................................................ 14-4
Figure 14-2. Example of DA Form 7558-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST)
Individual Roll-Up .............................................................................................. 14-7
Figure 14-3. Example of DA Form 7662-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Platoon
Roll-Up .............................................................................................................. 14-8
Figure 14-4. DA Form 7665-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Company Roll-Up ......... 14-9
Figure 14-5. Example of DA Form 7664-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I Crew Critical
Skills Test Scoresheet .................................................................................... 14-14
Skills Test Platoon Roll-Up ............................................................................. 14-15
Skills Test Company Roll-Up .......................................................................... 14-16
Figure 15-1. Vehicle crew evaluator team example ............................................................. 15-2
Figure 15-2. Sample threat matrix ........................................................................................ 15-8
Figure 15-3. Targets not fully presented example.............................................................. 15-11
Figure 15-4. Targets fully presented and locked example ................................................. 15-12
Figure 15-5. Defense timing procedure example, turret down or defilade position ........... 15-13
Figure 15-6. Defense timing procedure example, hull down or enfilade position .............. 15-13
Figure 15-7. Obscuration example, defense ...................................................................... 15-16
Figure 15-8. Obscuration example, offense ....................................................................... 15-17
Figure 15-9. Alibi process ................................................................................................... 15-18
Figure 15-10. Engagement example .................................................................................. 15-22
Figure 15-11. Example of DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet .......................... 15-23
Figure 15-12. Directions for completions of form ............................................................... 15-24
Figure 15-13. Example of DA Form 7663-R, Crew Gunnery Roll-Up Sheet ...................... 15-25
Figure 15-14. Abrams armored defense (example) ........................................................... 15-30
Figure 16-1. Abrams and Bradley capable gunnery table example ..................................... 16-6
Figure 16-2. Basic instruction example .............................................................................. 16-11
Figure 16-3. Target scenario development tool example ................................................... 16-25
Figure 16-4. Engagement 60 example ............................................................................... 16-26
Figure 16-10. Engagement 66 example ............................................................................. 16-32
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xvii
Contents
Figure 16-11. Engagement 67 example ............................................................................ 16-33

Figure 17-1. HMMWV in the defilade position example ...................................................... 17-5
Figure 17-2. HMMWV in the enfilade position example ...................................................... 17-6
Figure 17-3. LMTV in the defilade position example ........................................................... 17-6
Figure 17-4. LMTV in the enfilade position example ........................................................... 17-6
Figure 17-5. Common instruction crew training prior to gunnery ...................................... 17-10
Figure 17-6. Example of unstabilized platform gunnery table matrix ................................ 17-12
Figure 17-7. Example of Guardian ASV gunnery table matrix ........................................... 17-13
Figure 17-8. Example of Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course ............................... 17-14
Figure 17-9. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course ...... 17-15
Figure 17-10. Example of Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun .................................... 17-17
Figure 17-11. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun ............ 17-18
Figure 17-12. Example of Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun
(scout/recon only) ........................................................................................... 17-20
Figure 17-13. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range
Machine Gun (scout/recon only) .................................................................... 17-21
Figure 17-14. Example of Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice .................................... 17-23
Figure 17-15. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice ........... 17-24
Figure 17-16. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course ............................................ 17-26
Figure 17-17. Guardian ASV Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course .................... 17-27
Figure 18-1. Example of DA Form 7659-R, Gunnery Tables VII, VIII, IX Scoresheet
(Section Qualification) ...................................................................................... 18-4
Figure 18-2. Example of Form DA 7658-R, Gunnery Table X, XI, XII Scoresheet
(Platoon Qualification) ...................................................................................... 18-5
Figure 18-3. Abrams and Bradley Crew Gunnery Tables II-VI ............................................ 18-8
Figure 18-4. Section pure (armor) ..................................................................................... 18-14
Figure 18-5. Section mixed (1 Abrams/2 Bradley with 1 rifle squad) ................................ 18-14
Figure 18-6. Combined arms section (1 Abrams/2 unstabilized weapon platforms/1
BFIST) ............................................................................................................ 18-15
Figure 18-7. Platoon pure (infantry) ................................................................................... 18-18
Figure 18-7. Platoon pure (infantry) (continued) ................................................................ 18-19
Figure 18-8. Platoon mixed (2 Abrams/2 Bradleys with 2 rifle squads)............................. 18-19
Figure 18-9. Combined Arms Platoon (2 Abrams/2 unstabilized weapon platforms/1
BFIST) ............................................................................................................ 18-20
Figure 19-1. CALFEX training strategy .............................................................................. 19-15
Figure 19-2. Example of direct-fire scoring ........................................................................ 19-18
Figure A-1. Step 1 - insert MBD ............................................................................................. A-2
Figure A-2. Step 2 - tighten MBD finger tight ......................................................................... A-3
Figure A-3. Step 3 - place a mark on the cone ...................................................................... A-3
Figure A-4. Step 4 - remove the MBD.................................................................................... A-3
Figure A-5. Step 5 - reinstall the MBD ................................................................................... A-4
xviii
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Figure A-6. Step 6 - tighten the MBD finger tight ...................................................................A-4

Figure A-7. Proper alignment of the MBD ..............................................................................A-4
Figure A-8. MBD flipped 180 degrees to the 9 oclock position .............................................A-5
Figure A-9. Target aiming point ..............................................................................................A-8
Figure A-10. Crew set up .................................................................................................... A-45
Figure A-11. Abrams combined solution board (see Table A-13 for dimensions for
the solution board) ........................................................................................... A-52
Figure A-12. Sample AAC data sheet for Checks 4 and 5 .................................................. A-56
Figure A-13. Sample M1A2 SEP data worksheet for the M1A2 SEP special input
check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check ................................................. A-67
Figure A-14a. M1A2 SEP ballistic solution chart for check 5 (4.0 version) ......................... A-69
Figure A-14b. M1A2 SEP ballistic solution chart for check 1 (4.2-4.3 version)
(continued) ....................................................................................................... A-70
Figure A-15. Checking position of recoil piston sleeve ....................................................... A-72
Figure A-16. Feeler gauge .................................................................................................. A-73
Figure A-17. Depiction of faulty piston sleeve ..................................................................... A-73
Figure A-18. Piston seating gauge, 120 mm ....................................................................... A-74
Figure A-19a. Starting position for anti-rotation key tolerance check ................................. A-75
Figure A-19b. Checking distance between the anti-rotation key and the side of the
keyway ............................................................................................................. A-75
Figure A-20. Checking the distance between the ramp and the breech ............................. A-76
Figure A-21a. Starting position for breech alignment block check ...................................... A-76
Figure A-21b. Position for breech alignment block check ................................................... A-77
Figure A-22a. Top view of main gun and elevation mechanism ......................................... A-78
Figure A-22b. Side view of rod end pin ............................................................................... A-78
Figure A-23. Lower elevation mechanism, yoke, and support bracket ............................... A-79
Figure A-24a. Rear elevation mechanism support strut ...................................................... A-79
Figure A-24b. Rear elevation mechanism support strut (continued) .................................. A-80
Figure A-25a. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment ..................................................... A-83
Figure A-25b. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued) ................................. A-84
Figure A-25c. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued) .................................. A-84
Figure A-25d. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued) ................................. A-85
Figure A-26. Screening test target (ST-5) ........................................................................... A-86
Figure A-27. Flow chart for screening test procedures ....................................................... A-87
Figure A-28. Sample discrete CCF worksheet (DA Form 7556-R) ..................................... A-93
Figure A-29. Target ............................................................................................................. A-94
Figure A-30. Targetmark 1/2 way ...................................................................................... A-94
Figure A-31. Targetmark 1/3 way ...................................................................................... A-95
Figure A-32. Screening test target (ST-5) with dimension A ............................................... A-96
Figure A-33. Gunners quadrant (M1A1 shown) ................................................................. A-99
Figure A-34. Day refraction (exaggerated view) ............................................................... A-116
Figure A-35. Night refraction (exaggerated view) ............................................................. A-116
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xix
Contents
Figure A-36. CITV stadia reticle ......................................................................................... A-119

Figure A-37. GAS stadia reticle ......................................................................................... A-119
Figure A-38a. GAS stadia reticle, displaying target ........................................................... A-120
Figure A-38b. GAS stadia reticle, displaying target (continued) ........................................ A-120
Figure A-39. Gunners primary sight (daylight reticle) ....................................................... A-121
Figure A-40. Abrams gunners auxiliary sight reticles (MPAT/HEAT) .............................. A-122
Figure A-41. Abrams gunners auxiliary sight reticles (MPAT/HEAT) lead pattern .......... A-122
Figure A-42. Abrams gunners auxiliary sight reticles (KE/STAFF) example ................... A-123
Figure A-43. Abrams gunners auxiliary sight reticles (KE/STAFF) ................................... A-123
Figure A-44. Commanders weapon station sight reticle ................................................... A-124
Figure A-45. Constant mil-angle relationship..................................................................... A-125
Figure A-46. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions ............................................................................ A-127
Figure A-47. Flank BMP-2 dimensions .............................................................................. A-127
Figure A-48. Frontal Hind-D dimensions ........................................................................... A-127
Figure A-49. Flank Hind-D dimensions .............................................................................. A-128
Figure A-50. Frontal T-72 dimensions ............................................................................... A-128
Figure A-51. Flank T-72 dimensions .................................................................................. A-128
Figure A-52. Measuring width with binoculars ................................................................... A-129
Figure A-53. Ammunition stowage plan, 16 and 18 round racks ....................................... A-132
Figure A-54. Ammunition stowage plan, 17 round rack..................................................... A-133
Figure A-55. Gun tube serial number ................................................................................ A-135
Figure A-56. Breech ring serial number ............................................................................. A-136
Figure A-57. DA Form 2408-4 with firing and maintenance data ...................................... A-137
Figure A-58. DA Form 2408-4 condemning gun tube........................................................ A-138
Figure A-59. DA Form 2408-4 transfer to new form .......................................................... A-139
Figure A-60. DA Form 2408-4 boresight and zero data .................................................... A-140
Figure B-1. Dual-feed system ................................................................................................ B-2
Figure B-2. The M242 25-mm guns eight cycles of function ................................................ B-4
Figure B-3. Reticle for boresight telescope NSN 4933-00-867-6607 .................................... B-5
Figure B-4. Boresight telescope NSN 4933-00-867-6607 ..................................................... B-6
Figure B-5. The 1-1000 boresight telescope ......................................................................... B-7
Figure B-6. Adapter for the 1-1000 boresight telescope........................................................ B-7
Figure B-7. Reticle for 1-1000 telescope ............................................................................... B-8
Figure B-8. Older 25-mm adapter, PN 12524010, fits 25-mm barrel on all BFVs
through A2 ODS ............................................................................................... B-10
Figure B-9. Newer 25-mm adapter, PN 12524144, fits 25-mm barrel on all BFVs ............. B-10
Figure B-10. Telescope reticle aimed at a corner of boresight panel .................................. B-11
Figure B-11. Telescope facing to the left ............................................................................. B-11
Figure B-12. Aiming point in the 2-mil circle ........................................................................ B-12
Figure B-13. Preparations before screening equipment ...................................................... B-13
Figure B-14. Example boresight test panel .......................................................................... B-13
xx
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Figure B-15. Example of a completed DA Form 7523-R..................................................... B-15

Figure B-16. Reticle alignment ............................................................................................ B-16
Figure B-17. Sight picture and scoring grid ......................................................................... B-17
Figure B-18. Azimuth for right aim-point coordinates .......................................................... B-17
Figure B-19. Elevation for right aim-point coordinates ........................................................ B-18
Figure B-20. Plotted aiming point ........................................................................................ B-18
Figure B-21. Reticle aimed at center of panel ..................................................................... B-19
Figure B-22. Kit right aiming point ....................................................................................... B-20
Figure B-23. Kit left aiming point ......................................................................................... B-21
Figure B-24. Aiming point .................................................................................................... B-21
Figure B-25. Distance and direction from center................................................................. B-22
Figure B-26. Adjusted aim point .......................................................................................... B-22
Figure B-27. Adapter-marking template .............................................................................. B-23
Figure B-28. Marked adapter .............................................................................................. B-23
Figure B-29. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the right, at mark "A" ......................... B-24
Figure B-30. Right aiming point as recorded on scoresheet ............................................... B-24
Figure B-31. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the left, at mark "A" ........................... B-25
Figure B-32. Left aiming point as recorded on scoresheet ................................................. B-26
Figure B-33. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the right, at mark "B" ......................... B-27
Figure B-34. Right aim point coordinates, Test 2 ................................................................ B-27
Figure B-35. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the left, at mark "B" ........................... B-28
Figure B-36. Left aiming point, Test 2 ................................................................................. B-28
Figure B-37. Distance between aim points, Test 1 ............................................................. B-29
Figure B-38. Distance between aim points, Test 2 ............................................................. B-30
Figure B-39. Mark "A" facing up, telescope to the right ...................................................... B-31
Figure B-40. Mark facing up, telescope to the left ............................................................... B-32
Figure B-41. Example completed SF 368 (telescopes) ...................................................... B-34
Figure B-42. Example completed SF 368 (adapters) .......................................................... B-35
Figure B-43. Close-in panel ................................................................................................. B-36
Figure B-44. Panel placement ............................................................................................. B-37
Figure B-45. Correct distance alignment for boresighting................................................... B-37
Figure B-46. 10-mil circle aligned with the 25-mm cross .................................................... B-39
Figure B-47. Boresight reticle aligned with the 25-mm cross .............................................. B-39
Figure B-48. Reticle centered between left, right, and lower limits ..................................... B-40
Figure B-49. Locknut, crank, and thumbscrews .................................................................. B-41
Figure B-50. Horizontal adjustment lock screw and horizontal adjustment screw .............. B-41
Figure B-51. ISU reticle aligned with "T" ............................................................................. B-43
Figure B-52. Alignment of TOW cross and 2-mil circle ....................................................... B-43
Figure B-53. Position of ISU reticle below the 25-mm cross ............................................... B-44
Figure B-54. Distance between aiming points..................................................................... B-45
Figure B-55. Auxiliary sight reticle positioned below the AUX cross................................... B-45
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xxi
Contents
Figure B-56. Auxiliary sight reticle positioned above the AUX cross ................................... B-46
Figure B-57. Drift within 1-mil circle ..................................................................................... B-47
Figure B-58. Boresight retention met ................................................................................... B-48
Figure B-59. Position of TOW cross .................................................................................... B-51
Figure B-60. 25-mm sight reticle (M2/M3) ........................................................................... B-60
Figure B-61. 25-mm sight reticle (ODS) .............................................................................. B-60
Figure B-62. BFVA3 reticle selection ................................................................................... B-61
Figure B-63. Choking a hull-down vehicle ........................................................................... B-62
Figure B-64. Frontal and flank views of a BMP ................................................................... B-63
Figure B-65. Full frontal and full flank views of a BMP ........................................................ B-63
Figure B-66. Determine TOW maximum engagement range .............................................. B-64
Figure B-67. BFVA3 default reticle lead line and mil relation .............................................. B-65
Figure B-68. Determine ranges for a BMP at target 1 (1,400 meters) and target 2
(1,800 meters) .................................................................................................. B-66
Figure B-69. Determine TOW maximum engagement range for a BFVA3 default
reticle ................................................................................................................ B-67
Figure B-70. Determine range using the auxiliary sight ....................................................... B-68
Figure B-71. TOW back-blast area ...................................................................................... B-70
Figure C-1. Machine gun to night vision sight matrix ............................................................. C-2
Figure C-2. AN/PEQ-2A ......................................................................................................... C-2
Figure C-3. AN/PAQ-4C ......................................................................................................... C-3
Figure C-4. M145 machine gun optic (MGO)......................................................................... C-3
Figure C-5. M14 MGO reticle ................................................................................................. C-4
Figure C-6. M145 MGO illuminated reticle ............................................................................ C-4
Figure C-7. AN/PVS-4 ............................................................................................................ C-5
Figure C-8. AN/PVS-4 reticle ................................................................................................. C-5
Figure C-9. AN/TVS-5A ......................................................................................................... C-6
Figure C-10. AN/TVS-5A earlier reticle .................................................................................. C-6
Figure C-11. AN/TVS-5A newer reticle .................................................................................. C-7
Figure C-12. AN/PAS-13 (V) 2 MWTS ................................................................................... C-7
Figure C-13. AN/PAS-13 (V) 3 HWTS ................................................................................... C-8
Figure C-14. TWS common display ....................................................................................... C-8
Figure C-15. MWTS M249 WFOV aim points........................................................................ C-9
Figure C-16. MWTS M249 NFOV aim points ........................................................................ C-9
Figure C-17. MWTS M240 WFOV aim points...................................................................... C-10
Figure C-18. MWTS M240 NFOV aim points ...................................................................... C-10
Figure C-19. HWTS M2 HB WFOV aim points .................................................................... C-11
Figure C-20. HWTS M2 HB NFOV aim points ..................................................................... C-11
Figure C-21. HWTS MK19 aim points ................................................................................. C-12
Figure C-22. Available sights for M249 SAW ...................................................................... C-13
Figure C-23. Available sights for M240B ............................................................................. C-13
Figure C-24. Available sights for M2 HB machine gun ........................................................ C-14
xxii
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Figure C-25. Available sights for MK19 machine gun ......................................................... C-14
Figure C-26. M249 SAW rear sight ..................................................................................... C-16
Figure C-27. M240B rear sight ............................................................................................ C-18
Figure C-28. M2 HB rear sight ............................................................................................ C-20
Figure C-29. Zero group size .............................................................................................. C-21
Figure C-30. MK19 rear sight .............................................................................................. C-22
Figure C-31. Target board for dry-zeroing .......................................................................... C-28
Figure C-32. Example of DA Form 7476-R, 10-Meter Boresight Offset Target .................. C-29
Figure C-33. Common reticle .............................................................................................. C-33
Figure C-34. FLIR WFOV reticle (1X) ................................................................................. C-34
Figure C-35. FLIR WFOV reticle (2X) ................................................................................. C-34
Figure C-36. FLIR NFOV reticle (1X) .................................................................................. C-34
Figure C-37. FLIR NFOV reticle (4X) .................................................................................. C-34
Figure C-38. Day TV WFOV reticle ..................................................................................... C-35
Figure C-39. Day TV NFOV reticle ...................................................................................... C-35
Figure C-40. LRAS3 boresight main menu tree .................................................................. C-36
Figure D-1. Javelin backblast safety zones ......................................................................... D-12
Figure D-2. Javelin missile .................................................................................................. D-13
Figure D-3. Sector sketch .................................................................................................... D-19
Figure G-1. Boresight panel dimensions ............................................................................... G-2
Figure G-2. Mandrel and borelight assembly ........................................................................ G-3
Figure G-3. Angle gauge ....................................................................................................... G-3
Figure G-4. Reticle control adapter lever .............................................................................. G-4
Figure G-5. Night sight azimuth/elevation adjustment .......................................................... G-5
Figure G-6. Daylight sight azimuth/elevation adjustment ...................................................... G-7
Figure G-7. Reticle control adapter ....................................................................................... G-9
Figure G-8. Daylight reticle .................................................................................................. G-10
Figure G-9. Caliber .50 mount and AZ/EL adjust ................................................................ G-11
Figure G-10. Daylight reticle ................................................................................................ G-12
Figure G-11. Night sight reticle............................................................................................ G-13
Figure G-12. Constant mil-angle relationship ...................................................................... G-14
Figure G-13. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions ............................................................................. G-16
Figure G-14. Flank BMP-2 dimensions ............................................................................... G-16
Figure G-15. Frontal Hind-D dimensions ............................................................................ G-16
Figure G-16. Flank Hind-D dimensions ............................................................................... G-17
Figure G-17. Frontal T-72 dimensions ................................................................................ G-17
Figure G-18. Flank T-72 dimensions ................................................................................... G-17
Figure G-19. Measuring width with binoculars .................................................................... G-18
Figure H-1. Mortar table levels .............................................................................................. H-3
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xxiii
Contents
Tables
Table 2-1. Fuel consumption chart ........................................................................................ 2-8
Table 2-2. Comparison of Abrams technical data by model .................................................. 2-9
Table 2-3. Comparison of BFV technical data by model ..................................................... 2-13
Table 2-4. Technical data of the M1117 - Guardian ASV .................................................... 2-16
Table 2-5. Comparison of armed HMMWV technical data by model .................................. 2-18
Table 2-6. Technical data of the M1064A3 self-propelled 120-mm mortar carrier ............. 2-19
Table 3-1. M231 characteristics ............................................................................................. 3-2
Table 3-2. M249 machine gun characteristics ....................................................................... 3-3
Table 3-3. M240 machine gun characteristics ....................................................................... 3-5
Table 3-4. M2 HB machine gun characteristics ..................................................................... 3-7
Table 3-5. MK19 machine gun characteristics ...................................................................... 3-8
Table 3-6. Technical data for the 120-mm mortar ............................................................... 3-13
Table 4-1. Month codes ......................................................................................................... 4-5
Table 4-2. Federal supply classification ................................................................................. 4-6
Table 4-3. Ammunition color coding, 20mm and larger ......................................................... 4-9
Table 4-4. 5.56 maximum effective ranges.......................................................................... 4-13
Table 4-5. 7.62mm maximum effective ranges.................................................................... 4-15
Table 4-6. Caliber .50 maximum effective range ................................................................. 4-17
Table 4-7. M1028 canister effects on various targets.......................................................... 4-50
Table 4-8.120mm German models for the M256 Cannon ................................................... 4-54
Table 4-9. Main gun ammunition codes............................................................................... 4-57
Table 4-10. TOW-2A model numbers .................................................................................. 4-80
Table 4-11. TOW-2B models ............................................................................................... 4-85
Table 4-12. Characteristics of the Javelin antitank guided missile ...................................... 4-95
Table 4-13. Common ammunition packing ........................................................................ 4-101
Table 6-1. Phoenix Beacon NSN listing ............................................................................... 6-17
Table 7-1. Ammunition/weapon selection .............................................................................. 7-3
Table 7-1. Ammunition/weapon selection (continued) ........................................................... 7-4
Table 7-2. Recognition method ............................................................................................ 7-11
Table 7-3. Effect of target conditions on range estimation .................................................. 7-11
Table 7-4. Mil relation for various targets ............................................................................ 7-13
Table 8-1. Range settings by weapon system ....................................................................... 8-5
Table 8-2. Battlesight range determination example ............................................................. 8-8
Table 8-3. Elements of a standard fire command .................................................................. 8-9
Table 8-4. Alert examples .................................................................................................... 8-10
Table 8-5. Weapon/ammunition element ............................................................................. 8-11
Table 8-6. Target descriptions ............................................................................................. 8-11
Table 8-7. Range element and sight selection .................................................................... 8-14
Table 8-8. Elements of the standard fire command ............................................................. 8-18
xxiv
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Table 8-9. Deviation computations ....................................................................................... 8-78

Table 9-1. Common fire control measures ............................................................................. 9-4
Table 9-2. Weapons safety posture levels ........................................................................... 9-11
Table 10-1. Situation report .................................................................................................. 10-5
Table 11-1. Gunnery-related TADSS and systems supported............................................. 11-2
Table 11-2. ROC-V usage table ........................................................................................... 11-3
Table 11-3. Tracking board usage table .............................................................................. 11-5
Table 11-4. Vehicle-to-target distance ................................................................................. 11-7
Table 11-5. Usage Table ...................................................................................................... 11-7
Table 11-6. Laser Target Interface Device usage table ....................................................... 11-7
Table 11-7. Thru-sight video usage table ............................................................................. 11-8
Table 11-8. Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System usage table ............................ 11-8
Table 11-9. COFT usage table ............................................................................................. 11-9
Table 11-10. Call for fire trainer usage table ...................................................................... 11-10
Table 11-11. HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer usage table ......................................... 11-11
Table 11-12. Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 usage table ............................................... 11-12
Table 11-13. Simulations Network usage table.................................................................. 11-14
Table 11-14. Close Combat Tactical Trainer usage table .................................................. 11-15
Table 11-15. Dummy rounds usage table .......................................................................... 11-16
Table 11-16. Requisition information.................................................................................. 11-18
Table 11-17. Caliber .50 inbore device usage table........................................................... 11-19
Table 11-18. Advanced Gunnery Training System usage table ........................................ 11-21
Table 11-21. Precision Gunnery System usage table ........................................................ 11-25
Table 11-22. Bradley Advanced Training System usage table .......................................... 11-27
Table 11-25. Virtual Convoy Combat Trainer ..................................................................... 11-32
Table 12-1. Gunnery tables .................................................................................................. 12-4
Table 12-2. Crew gunnery simulations prerequisites for live-fire ......................................... 12-6
Table 13-1. Formula for determining length of maneuver box ............................................. 13-9
Table 13-2. Dimensions for 25-mm M792 (HEI-T) ammunition ......................................... 13-11
Table 13-3. Dimensions for 7.62-mm M80 (A131) ammunition ......................................... 13-12
Table 13-4. Sample ballistic firing table for cartridge, APDS-T (muzzle velocity 1,345
mps) ................................................................................................................ 13-13
Table 13-5. Scaled ranges ................................................................................................. 13-14
Table 14-1. Gunnery skills test task list ................................................................................ 14-6
Table 14-2. Gunnery table I task list................................................................................... 14-11
Table 15-1. Vehicle target kill standards .............................................................................. 15-9
Table 16-1. Gunnery table structure..................................................................................... 16-2
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xxv
Contents
Table 16-2. Gunnery table ammunition allocation ............................................................... 16-3

Table 16-3. Standard task numbering system ..................................................................... 16-4
Table 16-4. Minimum proficiency levels for stabilized platforms ......................................... 16-7
Table 16-5. Minimum proficiency levels application by engagement .................................. 16-8
Table 16-6. Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course ................................................... 16-13
Table 16-7. Example of Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course (GT II-CPC) ........... 16-14
Table 16-8. Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun .......................................................... 16-15
Table 16-9. Example of Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun (GT III) ........................... 16-16
Table 16-10. Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun .............................................................. 16-17
Table 16-11. Example of Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun (GT IV) ............................. 16-18
Table 16-12. Gunnery Tables II and IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main Gun (GT 34) ....... 16-19
Table 16-13. Example of Gunnery Tables III and IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main
Gun (Table 34) ............................................................................................... 16-20
Table 16-14. Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice .................................................................. 16-21
Table 16-15. Example of Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice (GT V) ................................... 16-22
Table 16-16. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification .......................................................... 16-23
Table 16-17. Crew Qualification rating criteria................................................................... 16-23
Table 16-18. Example of Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification (GT VI) .......................... 16-24
Table 17-1. Unstabilized platform gunnery tables ............................................................... 17-2
Table 17-2. Minimum proficiency levels, unstabilized platforms.......................................... 17-4
Table 17-3. Annual ammunition roll-up ................................................................................ 17-8
Table 17-4. Task numbering and MPL application matrix ................................................... 17-9
Table 17-5. Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course ................................................... 17-14
Table 17-6. Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun .......................................................... 17-16
Table 17-7. Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun ........................................ 17-19
Table 17-8. Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice .......................................................... 17-22
Table 17-9. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course ............................................... 17-25
Table 17-10. Crew Qualification rating criteria................................................................... 17-25
Table 18-1. Tables VII, VIII, and IX minimum required targets per vehicle/squad ............ 18-10
Table 18-2. Tables X, XI, and XII minimum required targets per vehicle/squad ............... 18-10
Table 18-3. Table VIISection Proficiency Exercise .......................................................... 18-11
Table 18-4. Table VIIAmmunition allocations per vehicle ................................................ 18-11
Table 18-5. Table VIIISection Practice ............................................................................ 18-12
Table 18-6. Table VIIIAmmunition allocations per vehicle............................................... 18-12
Table 18-7. Table IXSection Qualification ....................................................................... 18-13
Table 18-8. Table IXAmmunition allocations per vehicle ................................................. 18-13
Table 18-9. Table XPlatoon Proficiency Exercise ........................................................... 18-15
Table 18-10. Table XAmmunition allocations per vehicle................................................ 18-16
Table 18-11. Table XIPlatoon Practice ............................................................................ 18-16
Table 18-12. Table XIAmmunition allocations per vehicle............................................... 18-17
Table 18-13. Table XIIPlatoon Qualification .................................................................... 18-17
xxvi
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Table 18-14. Table XIIAmmunition allocations per vehicle .............................................. 18-18

Table 19-1. Ammunition allocation for armor/cavalry units (per vehicle) ............................. 19-9
Table 19-2. Ammunition allocation for mortar (per gun) ...................................................... 19-9
Table 19-3. Ammunition allocation for artillery units (per bn/btry)...................................... 19-10
Table 19-4. Ammunition allocation for infantry units (per gun) .......................................... 19-10
Table 19-5. Example of a direct-fire computation sheet..................................................... 19-19
Table 19-6. Example of Class V expenditure ..................................................................... 19-20
Table 19-6. Example of Class V expenditure (continued) .................................................. 19-21
Table 19-7. Example of a CALFEX summary sheet .......................................................... 19-22
Table A-1. Reticle adjustment guide ......................................................................................A-7
Table A-2. M1A1 computer correction factors..................................................................... A-10
Table A-3a. Example 1 ........................................................................................................ A-14
Table A-3b. Example 2 ........................................................................................................ A-14
Table A-3c. Example 3 ........................................................................................................ A-14
Table A-4. M1A1 sight correction factors ............................................................................ A-20
Table A-5. M1A2 SEP computer correction factors ............................................................ A-23
Table A-6. M1A2 SEP/V2 sight correction factors .............................................................. A-38
Table A-7. Nominal temperature values for M1A1 and M1A2 SEP/V2 fire control input .... A-40
Table A-8. Barometric pressure values for M1A1 and M1A2 SEP/V2 fire control input .... A-41
Table A-9. Abrams pre-fire checklist ................................................................................... A-43
Table A-10. Nitrogen gas temperature versus precharge pressure chart........................... A-46
Table A-11. Causes of fault indication in the GPS field of view .......................................... A-48
Table A-12. Causes of computer self-test failure ................................................................ A-49
Table A-13. Abrams combined solution board dimensions ................................................. A-51
Table A-14a. M1A1 (upgraded CEU chart) ballistic computer inputs for check 4 .............. A-55
Table A-14b. M1A1 ballistic computer inputs for check 4 ................................................... A-55
Table A-15a. M1A1 (upgraded CEU chart) ballistic computer inputs for check 5 .............. A-59
Table A-15b. M1A1 ballistic computer inputs for check 5 ................................................... A-60
Table A-16. Nitrogen gas temperature vs. pre-charge pressure chart ............................... A-62
Table A-17a. Temperature checks, old CEU ...................................................................... A-82
Table A-17b. Temperature checks, new CEU..................................................................... A-82
Table A-18a. Screening test actions checklist (M1A1) ....................................................... A-88
Table A-18b. Screening test actions checklist (M1A1) (continued) .................................... A-89
Table A-19a. Screening test actions checklist (M1A2 SEP) ............................................... A-90
Table A-19b. Screening test actions checklist (M1A2 SEP) (continued) ............................ A-91
Table A-20. Dimensions of screening targets under unusual conditions (120mm) ............ A-96
Table A-21. Mil relation for various targets ....................................................................... A-126
Table B-1. Inch-to-mil conversion chart .............................................................................. B-29
Table B-2. Distance (in inches) between crosses and lower left hand corner or closein boresight panel............................................................................................. B-48
Table B-3. Cross colors and line widths .............................................................................. B-49
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xxvii
Contents
Table B-4. Length of lines on crosses ................................................................................. B-49

Table B-5. Example format for pre-fire checklist.................................................................. B-52
Table B-6. Example format for Bradley A3 gunners pre-fire checklist, part 1..................... B-53
Table B-7. Example format for Bradley A3 commanders pre-fire checklist, part 2 ............. B-54
Table C-1. Pre-fire checklist................................................................................................. C-15
Table C-2. Windage and elevation (peep sight) correction chart for the M249 SAW.......... C-17
Table C-3. Elevation correction chart for the M240B ........................................................... C-19
Table C-4. Windage correction chart for the M240B ........................................................... C-19
Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data ............................................................................ C-30
Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data (continued) ......................................................... C-31
Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data (continued) ......................................................... C-32
Table D-1. M16A2/M4 carbine rifle technical data ................................................................. D-2
Table D-2. M4/M16-series weapons ammunition .................................................................. D-3
Table D-3. M203 40-mm grenade launcher technical data ................................................... D-4
Table D-4. M203 40-mm grenade launcher ammunition ....................................................... D-5
Table D-5. M249 SAW 5.56-mm machine gun technical data............................................... D-6
Table D-6. M249 SAW 5.56-mm machine gun ammunition .................................................. D-7
Table D-7. M240B 7.62-mm machine gun ammunition ......................................................... D-7
Table D-8. M240B 7.62-mm machine gun technical data ..................................................... D-8
Table D-9. M136AT4 lightweight anti-armor weapon technical data ..................................... D-9
Table D-10. M136 AT4 lightweight anti-armor weapon actions and effects .......................... D-9
Table D-11. Javelin antitank guided missile technical data ................................................. D-11
Table F-1. Examples of potential hazards ............................................................................. F-2
Table F-2. Risk levels and impact on mission execution ....................................................... F-3
Table F-3. Risk assessment matrix ....................................................................................... F-3
Table F-4. M1A1/M1A2 SEP ammunition fire exit procedures .............................................. F-9
Table F-5. Tank rollover procedures.................................................................................... F-11
Table F-6. Bradley rollover procedures ............................................................................... F-13
Table G-1. ASV pre-fire checklist...........................................................................................G-8
Table G-2. Mil relation for various targets ............................................................................G-15
Table H-1. Mortar Table frequency ........................................................................................ H-2
Table H-2. Mortar Table 1 FDC examination ......................................................................... H-9
Table H-3. Mortar Table 1 gunner's examination ................................................................ H-10
Table H-4. Mortar Table 2 FDC examination ....................................................................... H-10
Table H-5. Mortar Table 2 gunner's examination ................................................................ H-11
Table H-6. Mortar Table 3 FDC training .............................................................................. H-11
Table H-7. Mortar Table 3 squad training ............................................................................ H-12
Table H-8. Mortar Table 4 FDC qualification ....................................................................... H-13
Table H-9. Mortar Table 4 squad qualification ..................................................................... H-14
Table H-10. Mortar Table 5 machine gun crew training/qualification .................................. H-15
Table H-11. Mortar Table 6 section training - dry/conventional mode................................. H-16
xxviii
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Contents
Table H-12. Mortar Table 7 section qualification - dry/conventional mode ......................... H-17
Table H-13. Mortar Table 8 section qualification - live/conventional mode ........................ H-18
Table H-14. Mortar Table 9 mortar section/platoon STX lanes - dry/live/digital mode ....... H-19
Table H-15. Mortar Table 10 section/platoon training - dry/digital mode ............................ H-20
Table H-16. Mortar Table 11 section/platoon qualification - dry/digital mode ..................... H-21
Table H-17. Mortar Table 12 section/platoon qualification - EXEVAL/LFX/digital mode .... H-22
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xxix
Preface
FM 3-20.21 describes how crews, sections, platoons, and companies organic to the Heavy Brigade Combat
Team (HBCT) and Armored Cavalry Regiment (ACR) train for combat weapon system proficiency. It provides
principles and techniques for the individual, crew, section, platoon, and company to engage and destroy enemy
targets efficiently in any given operational environment (OE).
FM 3-20.21 is designed for commanders, Master Gunners, and trainers of maneuver and sustainment units
within the HBCT and ACR.
FM 3-20.21 outlines Abrams tank, Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV), and armored High-Mobility Multipurpose
Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV) gunnery tables (GT) designed for crew through company to attain and sustain
tactical gunnery proficiency. Some operations will, at times, require maneuver units to operate independently at
the section and platoon level, which may consist of a variety of task organizations that include but are not
limited to tank/Bradley/armed HMMWV-pure sections and platoons or tanks, Bradleys, and/or armed
HMMWVs combined, or tanks in support of infantry.
The tasks, conditions, and standards on the GTs are based on a thorough analysis of gunnery engagement
factors and are based on actual hit or kill probabilities of threat versus U.S. platform weapons systems. Most of
the tasks can be found in the related military occupational specialty (MOS) Soldiers manuals and mission
training plans. All HBCT and ACR units are encouraged to recommend ideas to upgrade the tasks, conditions,
and standards in this manual.
FM 3-20.21 applies to the Active Army, the Army National Guard/Army National Guard of the United States
(ARNGUS), and the United States Army Reserve (USAR) unless otherwise stated.
Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men.
The proponent of this publication is HQ, TRADOC. Submit changes for improving this publication on DA
Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) and forward it to Director, Directorate
of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E), ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G, 204
1st Cavalry Regiment Road Ste 216, U.S. Army Armor Center, Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123. Additional
information is available at (502) 624-7323/2908 or DSN 464-7323/2908.
Other points of contact for information presented in this manual are (by category):
z
Abrams tanks:
TRADOC Capabilities Manager for HBCT, TCM-HBCT, DSN 464-7955 or Commercial

(Comm) (502) 624-7955.
DTDCD-E, ATZK-TDD-ORSA, DSN 464-3042 or Comm (502) 624-3042.

z
Abrams tank gun tubes (technical): TACOM-Rock Island, IL, AMSTA-LC-GAW, DSN
793-2189/2777 or Comm (309) 782-2189/2777.
z
Abrams tank gun tubes (safety engineering): TACOM-Rock Island, AMSTA-CS-CZR, DSN
793-2995 or Comm (309) 782-2995.
z
Ammunition-missile: Project Office, Close Combat Weapons Systems, Redstone Arsenal, AL
35898, Comm (256) 876-0728.
z
Ammunition-projectile: Project Manager, Maneuver Ammunition Systems, Picatinny, NJ, DSN
880-3405/4622 or Comm (973) 724-3405/4622.
z
BFVs: Stryker/Bradley Proponency Office, Fort Benning, GA, DSN 784-6491 or Comm (706)
544-6491.
z
Infantry doctrine: Commandant, United States Army Infantry School (USAIS), ATTN: ATSHATD, Fort Benning, GA 31905-5410.
xxx
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Preface
z
z
z
Reconnaissance gunnery doctrine: DTDCD-E, ATZK-TD, DSN 464-4453 or Comm (502)

624-4453.
Simulations: Advanced Gunnery Training Systems (AGTS) family: Gunnery Branch, DTDCDE, COFT SME, Fort Knox, KY 40121, DSN 464-5806/3633 or Comm (502) 624-5806/3633.
Simulations: Bradley Advanced Training System (BATS) and M2 Conduct-of-Fire Trainers
(COFT): Stryker/Bradley Proponency Office, Fort Benning, GA, DSN 784-6491 or Comm (706)
544-6491.
Simulations: Brigade Combat Team (BCT) COFT XXI, Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator
Trainer (A-FIST) XXI, and M1A1 Tabletop Gunnery Trainer (TGT): National Guard
Representative Office of the Special Assistant to the Commanding General (CG), Fort Knox,
KY, DSN 464-3214 or Comm (502) 624-3214.
Simulations: COFT XXI, BCT COFT XXI, Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator
Trainer (AB-FIST), and M2 TFT: Senior Bradley Master Gunner ARNG, SACG-ARNG,
USAIC, Fort Benning, GA 31905, DSN 835-5741 or Comm (706) 545-5741.
Training Device: Caliber .50 Inbore Device (Abrams): Chief, Systems Branch (Armor Training
Devices), DTDCD-E, Fort Knox, KY, DSN 464-5656 or Comm (502) 624-5656.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
xxxi
Chapter 1
Introduction
To defeat the enemy force in todays operational environment (OE) while avoiding
fratricide and collateral damage, crews within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team
(HBCT) and Armored Cavalry Regiment (ACR) must have a thorough knowledge of
the functional capabilities of their platform weapon systems, the techniques of
combat identification (CID), and the effective use of all crew-served weapons. In
addition, HBCT and ACR crews must develop and sustain tactical skills that will
allow them to maneuver effectively and survive on the battlefield. This combination
of crew gunnery and tactical skills is essential for total weapon system proficiency.
Field Manual (FM) 3-20.21 provides a systematic way to train weapon system
proficiency for armor, mechanized infantry, reconnaissance, engineers, fire support
combat platform systems within the HBCT and ACR, as well as sustainment unit
vehicles armed with crew-served weapons. It includes an assessment of combined
gunnery skills in crew gunnery tables (GT) and application in collective tactical
tables. FM 3-20.21 provides basic guidance on platform system employment and
crew-, section-, and platoon-level tactics.
Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 3-12.2 (M1A1 Tank Gunnery only).
Marine Corps designation of this publication applies to M1A1 tank doctrine and
tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) only. Its use is not intended for other
USMC gunnery.
SECTION I PURPOSE
Contents
Section I Purpose ................................... 1-1
Section II Scope ..................................... 1-2
Section III General Changes .................. 1-2

Chapters ............................................. 1-3
Appendices ......................................... 1-7
1-1. The purpose of FM 3-20.21 is to produce qualified sections and platoons within the HBCT and
ACR. With the paradigm shift from platform-centric to organization-centric, gunnery training and
integration strategies for all platforms within the HBCT and ACR are included in this manual. The direct
fire engagement process for all systems have been defined under the method detect, identify, decide,
engage, and assess (DIDEA). CID encompasses the detect-identify-decide portions of DIDEA. The
HBCTs fires battalion and the fire support personnel organic to the maneuver units use FM 3-09.8 to
conduct field artillery (FA) section indirect fire skill proficiency training and qualification.
1-2. The gunnery principles in this manual are designed to support HBCT and ACR units and the direct
fire engagement process. They allow the commander to have the flexibility to develop his gunnery program
tailored to the OE that coincides with the unit mission. Threat target arrays (target types and ranges) should
be developed based on the threat template for the unit mission. Urban clusters and friendly and
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
1-1
Chapter 1
noncombatant targetry allow the commander to develop more realistic scenarios that exercise the direct fire
engagement process using DIDEA.
1-3. FM 3-20.21 describes system features and ammunition characteristics, training
aids/devices/simulations and simulators (TADSS), engagement techniques, preliminary gunnery training,
gunnery skills tests (GST), GTs, and qualification standards for all direct fire crew weapons. When the
procedures in this manual conflict with the procedures in the technical manual (TM), the TM should be
followed.
1-4. FM 3-20.21 is intended to be a guide. Units may modify the gunnery program to meet local training
constraints, except for qualification tables. Units must evaluate training to make sure it adheres to sound
training policy and provides the unit commander with a viable assessment tool.
SECTION II SCOPE
1-5. FM 3-20.21 outlines HBCT and ACR platform weapon system GTs designed to attain and sustain
crew through platoon tactical gunnery proficiency. FM 3-20.21 describes how to
z
Develop a unit gunnery training program.
z
Conduct the direct fire engagement process.
z
Distribute and control fires as the leader of a squad, section, or platoon.
z
Employ the Abrams tank, Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV), and armed High-Mobility
Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV).
z
Integrate training devices into unit gunnery training.
z
Establish new training sites for combat training.
z
Boresight the weapon systems.
z
Conduct pre-fire checks.
z
Conduct a live-fire accuracy screening test (LFAST) and/or zeroing procedures.
z
Compensate for the loss of a crew member or a malfunction in the fire control system.
1-6. FM 3-20.21 also describes the
z
Characteristics, capabilities, and employment of ammunition used on the platform weapon
systems organic to the HBCT and ACR.
z
Tasks, conditions, standards, and administrative guides for GSTs on all HBCT and ACR combat
platform systems.
z
Procedures for developing tactical scenarios to support collective gunnery.
z
GTs and tactical tables used to determine individual, crew, and platoon gunnery proficiency.
Note. Critical procedural information contained in the operators manuals, which are listed in
the references section, may be repeated in this manual for emphasis.
SECTION III GENERAL CHANGES

1-7. This section provides a general overview of the chapters of the HBCT Gunnery Manual. FM 3-20.21
is a compilation of direct fire weapon systems information from a variety of FMs, technical bulletins (TB),
training circulars (TC), and other documents in order to provide a single source for direct fire gunnery
planning and execution for the HBCT.
1-8. The following manuals information has been incorporated herein to facilitate the gunnery planning
of the HBCT commander and staff:
z
FM 3-20.8.
z
FM 3-20.12.
z
FM 3-22.1.
z
FM 17-12-7.
1-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Introduction
1-9. Below is a synopsis of the chapters and their content.
CHAPTERS
CHAPTER 2, PLATFORM SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
1-10. Chapter 2 describes the weapons platforms available within the HBCT. Chapter 2 does not include
small arms individual or crew-served weapons. Its purpose is to provide a general overview of the
platforms capabilities, limitations, restrictions, and performance data that will help the staff plan their
training.
1-11. Specific weapons of the platforms, including small arms crew-serve weapons are discussed in
Chapter 3.
CHAPTER 3, PLATFORM WEAPON SYSTEMS CAPABILITIES

1-12. Chapter 3 describes the common crew-served weapons that may be mounted on vehicles or are part
of a weapons platform. Chapter 3 details the common characteristics, capabilities, and limitations for the
weapons and their employment.
CHAPTER 4, AMMUNITION
1-13. Chapter 4 includes all the ammunition fired from crew-served weapons, including 5.56mm for squad
automatic weapon (SAW), 7.62 for the M240 series, caliber .50, 25mm, 40mm for MK19 Mod 3, 120mm
Abrams, 120mm mortar, missiles, and smoke grenades for the launchers.
1-14. In the most recent manuals incorporated into the HBCT Gunnery Manual, ammunition was part of
the characteristics and description chapter. The volume of information on the different ammunition in the
HBCT was so large that it required a logical approach to presenting the information in order to meet the
needs of commanders, staff, Master Gunners, planners, and crewmen.
1-15. The ammunition is listed in order by caliber, from smallest to largest, with special purpose munitions
and missiles located near the end of the chapter.
1-16. Added/corrected North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) symbols based on Standardized
Agreement (STANAG) 2316 and 2322.
1-17. Lot number definitions and descriptions have been added. Color coding system has been updated.
Small arms common packaging with appropriate case/carton/can markings has been added.
1-18. Ammunition descriptions for 25mm and above have been enhanced to provide better information to
staff and users of the munition types.
1-19. A new section titled planning considerations has been added to help the staff sections plan for
tactical and gunnery training events. This includes marking transportation vehicles correctly, max load
capabilities, standard pallet pack sizes and weights.
1-20. An overall general ammunition safety section deals primarily with safety-of-use messages (SOUM),
ammunition information notices (AIN), and verification of suspended lot instructions for the range officer
in charge (OIC), range safety officer (RSO), Master Gunner, and gunnery noncommissioned officer (NCO)
use. This information is provided to augment the safety practices of the ammunition supply point as
directed in DA Pamphlet 385-63.
CHAPTER 5, DETECT
1-21. Chapter 5 is based on the initial section of the DIDEA process, which is the framework for the direct
fire engagement. Chapter 5 describes the detection process and provides crew search techniques, detection
guidelines, and classification criteria of threat targets.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
1-3
Chapter 1
CHAPTER 6, IDENTIFY
1-22. Chapter 6 deals with the second section of the DIDEA process. Chapter 6 describes the methods to
accurately identify potential threats and classify them correctly. Chapter 6 also details identification of
friendly forces and marking systems that may be used on the battlefield to reduce the possibility of
fratricide.
CHAPTER 7, DECIDE
1-23. Chapter 7 develops crew decision-making procedures as part of the DIDEA process. Chapter 7
describes the methods used by crews to determine the appropriate means of engagement, using direct or
indirect fires.
CHAPTER 8, ENGAGE DIRECT AND INDIRECT FIRES (CREW)

1-24. Chapter 8 provides the methods and procedures for engaging hostile forces from a crew platform,
using direct and indirect commands. These procedures are detailed in five sections:
z
Section I Battlecarry. Section I defines the battlecarry procedures and its intended purpose.
Section I provides information on how to determine battlesight ranges based on ammunition
type and most probable threat targets.
z
Section II Fire Commands. Section II provides all the basic fire command elements and their
use. Section II details the appropriate standard commands and the crew duties and
responsibilities in relation to those commands.
z
Section III Engagement Techniques. Section III discusses the various techniques for
engaging targets with machine guns.
Note. The primary references for engagement techniques for a vehicles main armament are
located in the respective appendix. This is done to standardize the manual in common chapters
and provided vehicle specific information as appropriate in a stand-alone appendix.
z
z
Section IV Sample Fire Commands. Section IV provides examples of various fire

commands that crews must be proficient at issuing.
Section V Indirect Fire. Section V provides the crew members the minimum call for fire
(CFF) requirements, their definitions, purpose, and order. This goal of this section is to provide
a baseline CFF format for crews to build from during their gunnery training.
1-25. Precision versus degraded gunnery. These are still "methods of engagement," however; they do not
have the same impact on fire commands as standard and reduced fire commands. Precision fire
commands have been defined more clearly and are strictly relative to the firing vehicle.
1-26. Standard and reduced fire commands are defined in detail. All seven elements are the standard. Use
of less than seven elements is a reduced fire command. For example, if the fire control system of a firing
platform provides range, a crew would "reduce" the range element from the fire command. If the
commander can lay the firer's weapon for direction, he can "reduce" the direction element from the fire
command. The "reduced" fire command does not apply to reducing the alert and weapon/ammunition
elements of the fire command only, as in previous versions of various gunnery manuals. It applies to the
capabilities and limitations of the firing platforms fire control system.
1-27. For the Bradley community, this change directly affects your use of the reduced fire command. Full
and reduced fire commands are not mandated based on the firing vehicle posture (offense or defense),
rather, their use is based solely on the current operational functionality of the platform. This actually helps
when describing precision vs. degraded fire commands when dealing with the M2A2 without the laser
range finder (LRF) or kinematic lead.
1-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Introduction
1-28. Several changes within the fire commands section are a shift from previous versions of the
respective gunnery manuals; Abrams, Bradley, and Scout. The goal of FM 3-20.21 is to standardize, where
practical, common subject matter across all combat vehicle platforms.
1-29. These are only some of the highlights of this chapter. Crews must be thoroughly familiar and well
versed in the conduct of fire for their platforms and must have an in depth understanding of the contents of
this chapter to be the most effective on the range and in combat.
CHAPTER 9, ENGAGE COLLECTIVE

1-30. Chapter 9 describes the methodology behind engaging targets as section- and platoon-size elements.
Direct and indirect fire planning are discussed in detail. Direct fire engagement is the highlight of this
chapter and includes a couple of minor changes to current collective engagement techniques.
1-31. A WEAPON CONTROL STATUS has been added as a part of the fire command. This will give the
section or platoon leader the ability to control the fires of their element while still allowing the flexibility to
engage targets as they present themselves based on the weapon control status given.
1-32. ORIENTATION is no longer an optional element to the fire command.
CHAPTER 10, ASSESS

1-33. Chapter 10 is the final chapter that deals with the DIDEA process. Chapter 10 provides the methods
of accurately assessing the effects of fires (both direct and indirect) employed by the vehicle crewmen in
the HBCT.
CHAPTER 11, TRAINING DEVICES

1-34. Chapter 11 is a companion to TC 25-8. It provides the staff an overview of the primary training
devices that are available in the Army Training Support Center system, as well as some commercial offthe-shelf (COTS) products that enhance the gunnery training program for the unit.
CHAPTER 12, GUNNERY TRAINING PROGRAM

1-35. Chapter 12 describes the methodology and requirements for training vehicle crews to be successful
at gunnery. Chapter 12 covers preparatory training for all weapons platforms and is outlined so that units
lacking Master Gunners will have a sufficient basis of knowledge to train their vehicle crews effectively.
CHAPTER 13, RANGE OPERATIONS

1-36. Chapter 13 outlines the procedures for successfully planning, coordination, and execution of a
gunnery density through all phases. Sample training plans are included to assist units without Master
Gunner support.
CHAPTER 14, INDIVIDUAL AND CREW LIVE-FIRE PREREQUISITE TRAINING

1-37. Chapter 14 incorporates former prerequisite testing (Tank Crew Gunnery Skills Tests [TCGST],
Bradley Gunnery Skills Test [BGST]) under a consolidated prerequisite testing format. This testing
consists of two partsGST and GT I (GT I - Crew Critical Skills Test).
1-38. GST consolidates and replaces previous editions of prerequisite gunnery testing for Abrams and
Bradley crews in addition to adding truck crews. This testing focuses on the individual skills required of
vehicle crewmen to safely and successfully perform selected critical gunnery tasks. All GST testing
consists of six tasks for each weapons platform. Two of those six tasks are common to all weapons
platforms and will be conducted by all vehicle crewmen, the other four tasks are vehicle specific. Soldiers
will be tested on their assigned specific weapon platform.
1-39. GST is a requirement prior to conducting GT II, the Preliminary Crew Proficiency Course (PCPC).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
1-5
Chapter 1
1-40. GT I, Crew Critical Skills Test, is an additional prerequisite test that focuses on critical tasks that are
performed by the vehicle crew. As with GST, GT I consists of weapons platform specific tasks and
common tasks that will be conducted by all crewmen prior to advancement to GT II.
CHAPTER 15, CREW EVALUATION

1-41. Chapter 15 details the entire crew gunnery training model and its evaluation. Chapter 15 thoroughly
describes the evaluation process, threat matrices for point calculation, sample scoresheets, and the
evaluator roles and responsibilities.
1-42. As the evaluation is a hybrid model of Abrams, Bradley, and truck gunnery models of previous
books, crews must master the evaluation process prior to any gunnery density. To augment their training, a
Master Gunner toolbox has been established with the Vehicle Crew Evaluator Exportable Package
(VCEEP) to facilitate certification of units evaluators. Visit https://www.us.army.mil/suite/kc/9773910 on
the Army Knowledge Online (AKO) website for tools and supporting products for the evaluation process,
classes, automated score sheets, and more. Users must have a valid AKO account for access to be granted.
CHAPTER 16, STABILIZED PLATFORM GUNNERY

1-43. Chapter 16 outlines the new design of the gunnery training tables for Abrams, Bradley, and Guardian
Armored Security Vehicle (ASV) crews. They contain all targetry requirements, minimum proficiency
levels (MPL), ammunition requirements, and task, conditions, and standards for all engagements in during
crew gunnery.
1-44. The Table numbering system for the crew tables has been adjusted, removing any tables that were
provided using simulators. The updated table names are listed in the following paragraphs for clarity.
1-45. GT II, Crew Proficiency Course, is the updated title for Bradley Crew Proficiency Course (BCPC)
and Tank Crew Proficiency Course (TCPC) from previous gunnery manuals. This remains a live fire
prerequisite for all crews.
1-46. GT III, Basic Machine Gun, is strictly used for machine gun training, but is designed to be fired as a
stand alone table with five engagements, or as a Table 34 including five engagements from GT IV, Basic
Main Gun Training.
1-47. GT IV, Basic Main Gun, may be fired as a stand alone table, or with GT III, Basic Machine Gun
Training, as listed above.
1-48. GT V, Crew Practice, is the updated title for previous gunnery manual editions Table VII, and
serves as the final practice live-fire event prior to crew qualification.
1-49. GT VI, Crew Qualification is the updated title for previous gunnery manual editions Table VIII, and
serves as the crew qualification requirement for Abrams and Bradley crews. Further, it is the live-fire
prerequisite for advancing to section gunnery.
CHAPTER 17, UNSTABILIZED PLATFORM GUNNERY

1-50. Chapter 17 outlines standardized truck gunnery for all vehicles with crew-served weapons within the
HBCT. This crew gunnery training methodology includes scouts, military police (MP), unstabilized ASV
variants, as well as sustainment unit vehicles.
1-51. The gunnery methodology listed in Chapter 17 uses the standardized scoring procedures as listed in
Chapter 15.
1-52. Units are encouraged to use this training model for all vehicles, whether wheeled or tracked, that do
not have a mounted maneuver gunnery model listed in a separate FM. For example, a units supply
sergeant that is assigned a Light Medium Tactical Vehicle (LMTV) with caliber .50 machine gun may fire
these tables as mounted qualification prior to a collective convoy live-fire exercise (LFX).
1-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Introduction
CHAPTER 18, COLLECTIVE GUNNERY

1-53. Chapter 18 outlines the execution of section and platoon gunnery qualification. Section gunnery
(Combat Tables VII, VIII and IX) is now a prerequisite to platoon gunnery qualification (Combat Tables
X, XI and XII).
1-54. Commanders are given the freedom to assemble and qualify their sections and platoons as either
vehicle type pure or combined arms mixed. Some examples of all combinations are included with this
chapter.
1-55. Targetry requirements in this chapter have been specifically linked to the ammunition resourced plus
any first round hit savings (a.k.a. harvested) ammunition available to the firing crews. Target
requirements based on ammunition availability allows the unit commander to tailor his force in a mixed
fashion that meets his desired end-state platoon composition. For example, if a commander wishes one of
his platoons to include one tank, one Bradley, and two armed HMMWVs, the ammunition is resourced by
vehicle, and determines the appropriate maximum number of targets for scenario development.
1-56. In-depth descriptions and sample scenarios are provided to assist units in their collective scenario
development process.
CHAPTER 19, COMBINED ARMS LIVE-FIRE EXERCISE

1-57. Chapter 19 is dedicated to the capabilities of the commander and staff to develop, plan, coordinate,
execute, and evaluate combined arms LFX from platoon (+) to task force level. It includes sample
scenarios for both single training area and simultaneous multiple range complex, training area, and firing
point use.
APPENDICES
1-58. The appendices are divided into packets for specific platforms. The purpose of these appendices is
for each crew to have a copy for gunnery as well as deployment. The chapters listed above are
predominantly used as a reference for planning purposes; the appendices to augment the crews technical
manuals to conduct common tasks.
z
Appendix A, Abrams Live-Fire Preparation.
z
Appendix B, Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation.
z
Appendix C, Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation.
z
Appendix D, Rifle Squad Gunnery.
z
Appendix E, Engineer Squad Qualification Tables.
z
Appendix F, Safety.
z
Appendix G, Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation.
z
Appendix H, 120-mm Mortar Gunnery.
1-59. These appendices are specifically designed to reduce the printable requirements for the crew and
squad.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
1-7
Chapter 2
Platform Systems Characteristics

All weapons platform systems within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT)
contribute to the combined arms effort. They provide the infantry, armor,
reconnaissance, engineer, and fire support elements with firepower, armor protection,
and battlefield agility.
To employ weapons platform systems within the HBCT effectively, Soldiers must
know the characteristics of their vehicle, fire control, weapon systems, and
ammunition. Chapter 2 specifically discusses the characteristics of the weapon
platforms found within the HBCT.
Contents
Section I Abrams Systems .................... 2-1
M1A1 Model ....................................... 2-2
M1A1 AIM Model ................................ 2-2
M1A1 AIM SA Model .......................... 2-4
M1A2 SEP Model ............................... 2-5
M1A2 SEP V2 (Version 2) Model ....... 2-7
Section II Bradley Fighting Vehicle
Systems ..................................................... 2-9
M2A2 and M3A2 Models .................. 2-10
M2A2 ODS and M3A2 ODS Models . 2-10
M2A3 and M3A3 Models .................. 2-11
M7 Bradley Fire Support Team ........ 2-14
Section III Guardian Armored

Security Vehicle (M1117) ........................ 2-14
Section IV Armed HMMWV Systems ... 2-16
M1025A2/M1026A1 Armed HMMWV
Model ................................................ 2-16
M1114 Up-Armored Armed HMMWV
Model ................................................ 2-17
M1151 Enhanced Up-Armored
Armed HMMWV Model ..................... 2-17
Section V M1064A3 Self-Propelled
120-mm Mortar Carrier ............................ 2-18
SECTION I ABRAMS SYSTEMS

2-1. The current fielded models of the Abrams main battle tank include the following:
z
M1A1 (Army National Guard of the United States [ARNGUS]).
z
M1A1 HA (heavy armor).
M1A1 AIM (Abrams integrated management) program.
M1A1 AIM ED (embedded diagnostics).
M1A1 AIM SA (situational awareness).
M1A2 SEP (system enhancement package) series.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-1
Chapter 2
M1A1 MODEL
2-2. The M1A1/M1A1 HA has the following characteristic (see Figure 2-1):
z
The 120-mm smoothbore cannon.
z
Increased armor protection (HA).
z
A chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) overpressurization system.
z
Digital electronic control unit (DECU) HA Model.
Figure 2-1. M1A1
M1A1 AIM MODEL

2-3. The M1A1 AIM program was designed to upgrade and extend the life of the aging M1A1 fleet. The
AIM program rebuilds the M1A1 to zero hours and adds various upgrades. M1A1 AIM upgrades
include
z
Revised hull and turret network boxes (RHNB&TNB) (see Figure 2-2).
Figure 2-2. Revised hull and turret network boxes
2-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
DECU for controlling and monitoring engine performance.

Upgraded tank commanders panel (UTCP) (see Figure 2-3).
Figure 2-3. Upgraded tank commanders panel

z
Eyesafe laser range finder (ELRF) (see Figure 2-4).
Figure 2-4. Eyesafe laser range finder

z
EDs are built-in diagnostics that ease fault isolation and minimize the amount of diagnostic test
equipment required to troubleshoot a fault.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-3
Chapter 2
z
z
z
z
Pulse jet-air system (PJS) that assists in maintaining the vehicles air induction system.
Battlefield override system that allows crews to override the tanks automotive protective
systems and operate the tank in emergency situations.
Drivers hatch interlock.
Increased armor protection.
M1A1 AIM SA MODEL

2-4. The M1A1 AIM SA adds the following upgrades to the M1A1 AIM upgrades:
z
Blue force tracker (BFT) Force XXI command and control system that allows the M1A1 AIM
SA crew to communicate digitally with a wider spectrum of Army vehicles.
z
The First Generation Forward Looking, Infrared (FLIR) (1st Gen FLIR) radiant thermal sighting
system, which gives the vehicle commander (VC) and gunner the ability to detect, identify, and
engage targets more accurately at a greater range. The 2d Gen FLIR has 3X, 6X, 13X, 25X, and
50X magnifications. The 25X and 50X are digital magnifications of the 13X picture. The 6X is
a digital magnification of the 3X picture.
z
A position navigation (POSNAV) system, which gives the crew the ability to use far-target
locate to calculate grids to targets for accurate digital calls for fire.
z
A drivers vision enhancement (DVE). The DVE is an uncooled, FLIR night-vision device. It has
a sensor module and a display module. The DVE is a real-time thermal-imaging system that
improves the drivers SA during limited visibility operations (see Figure 2-5 through Figure 2-7).
Figure 2-5. Drivers vision enhancement
2-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 2-6. Drivers vision enhancement (front display)
Figure 2-7. Drivers vision enhancement (rear connections)
M1A2 SEP MODEL

2-5. The M1A2 SEP tank system is designed to accommodate new and upgraded components required
for the continually expanding performance requirements and to facilitate ease of maintenance (see Figure
2-8). This is accomplished within the same space as the M1A1 tank. Improvements to the M1A2 SEP
include the following:
z
The M1A2 VC can acquire targets more rapidly using the Commanders Independent Thermal
Viewer (CITV) (see Figure 2-9). The CITV decreases target hand-off time by integrating the
target designate function incorporated in the Commanders Control Handle Assembly (CCHA).
This allows the VC to acquire targets independently from the gunner and then designate the
gunner to those targets.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-5
Chapter 2
Figure 2-8. M1A2 SEP

z
Increased the accepted range parameters for ballistic solution calculation from 200 to 3990 +/-10
meters on the M1A1 series, to 200 to 4,990 +/- 10 meters on the M1A2 SEP series that has
enhanced engagement range.
A special ballistic range default parameter of 150 meters has been created for canister rounds. If
a range is input outside of the appropriate range band for canister, the computer defaults to 150
meters to calculate ballistic solution. Lased ranges of 200 to 1,100 meters will generate a
ballistic solution for canister. For manually inputted ranges or battlesight-toggled ranges ballistic
solutions are generated between 25 and 1,100 meters for canister. Ballistic solutions for the coax
are calculated between ranges of 25 and 2,000 meters.
Figure 2-9. Commanders independent thermal viewer
2-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
z
z
z
The technological advancement of the POSNAV allows the fire control system to apply dynamic
cant to ballistic solutions for increased accuracy while on the move.
The built-in fault management system allows crews and maintenance teams to identify and
isolate malfunctions, in many cases with no external diagnostic test equipment. In a fraction of a
second, tripped circuit breakers are automatically reset by the fault management software. This
nonintrusive test leaves the crew unaware that this is even happening.
The 1st Gen FLIR radiant thermal sighting system gives the VC and gunner the ability to detect,
identify, and engage targets more accurately at a greater range. The 1st Gen FLIR has 3X, 6X,
13X, 25X, and 50X magnifications. The 25X and 50X are digital magnifications of the 13X
picture. The 6X is a digital magnification of the 3X picture.
Improved navigational capabilities with the Global Positioning System (GPS) built into the tank
provides a more accurate positional update than the initial navigation system of the M1A2.
Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2). The FBCB2 is a digital battlefield
command information system. The FBCB2 and integrated communications, command, and
control (IC3) give crews SA and real-time command and control.
A thermal management system (air cooling unit) cools the inside of the tank to protect the
electronics and provide crew comfort.
The DVE is an uncooled, FLIR night-vision device. It has a sensor module and a display module.
The DVE is a real-time thermal-imaging system that improves the drivers SA during limited
visibility operations.
M1A2 SEP V2 (VERSION 2) MODEL

2-6. The M1A2 SEP V2 adds the following upgrades to the M1A2 SEP upgrades:
z
Improved 2d Gen FLIR (Block I upgrade).
z
Improved hull system and turret system electronics with faster, more capable processors.
z
Six additional batteries for providing 8 to 10 hours of (engine off) turret operations.
z
Far-target-locate capability to calculate grids to targets for accurate digital calls for fire.
z
A DVE, which is a thermal periscope that replaces the AN/VVS-2 (infrared) IR drivers night
sight.
z
Improved turret armor packages.
M1 ABRAMS FUEL CONSUMPTION

2-7. The M1 Abrams series is powered by a 1500 hp Honeywell AGT1500, gas turbine engine. It has a
six speed (four forward, and two reverse) Allison X-1100-3B Hydro-Kinetic Automatic transmission,
giving the M1 a top speed of 42 mph (68 kmph) (governed) on paved roads, and 30 mph (48 kmph) crosscountry. The M1 Abrams series can be fueled with diesel fuel, kerosene, any grade of motor gasoline, JP-4
jet fuel, or JP-8 jet fuel.
2-8. The gas turbine propulsion system has high performance characteristics and high fuel consumption
(starting up the turbine alone consumes nearly 11 gallons). Because the M1 Abrams uses so much fuel, is
always a concern. Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 are charts to help planners decide how much fuel and
ammunition is needed for Abrams tanks based on tactical maneuver operations (operations requiring
movement with limited time spent with engines idling).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-7
Chapter 2
Table 2-1. Fuel consumption chart

Number of Tanks in Element
Hours of Operation (Moving)
10
11
12
13
14
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
600
750
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
1800
1950
2100
Transfe
r
620
775
930
1085
1240
1395
1550
1705
1860
2015
2170
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
RED
816
1020
1224
1488
1632
1836
2040
2244
2448
2652
2856
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3250
3500
1200
1500
1800
2100
2400
2700
3000
3300
3600
3900
4200
BLACK
1216
1520
1824
2128
2432
2736
3040
3344
3648
3952
4256
1400
1750
2100
2450
2800
3150
3500
3850
4200
4550
4900
1600
2000
2400
2800
3200
3600
4000
4400
4800
5200
5600
Transfer: When the units begin reporting transferring fuel from the front fuel cells to the rear.
Dark Gray: When the units begin reporting their fuel status as red (approximately fuel remaining).
Black: When the units begin reporting their fuel status as black (approximately fuel remaining).
Light Gray: Light gray shaded areas indicate two Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT) are required to
refuel entire element (based on a nominal 2,200 gals per HEMTT to allow for hot weather fuel expansion.
Dark gray shaded areas indicate three HEMTTs are required to refuel entire element.
2-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table 2-2. Comparison of Abrams technical data by model

Characteristics
M1A1 M1A1 AIM M1A1 AIM ED M1A1 AIM SA M1A2 SEP M1A2 SEP V2
Speed, Land
41.5 mph, 67 kph
Slope Climb
60%
Side Slope
40%
Trench Crossing (Inches)
108
Vertical Wall Climb (Inches)
49
Personnel Capacity (Crew

Members)
120mm Ammunition Ready
17
18
120mm Ammunition Bustle

Stowage
34 or 36
36
120mm Ammunition Hull

Stowage
Caliber .50 Ammunition

Ready
100

Stowed
900
M240 7.62-mm Coax

Ammunition Ready
2,800
M240 7.62-mm Loaders

Ammunition Stowed
200
M240 7.62-mm Ammo

Stowed
8,400
M16/M4 5.56-mm Ammo

Stowed
210
Reference: Operation under

Usual Conditions:
TM 9-2350-264-10-1
TM 9-2350-388-10-1
Reference: Operation under

Unusual Conditions:
TM 9-2350-264-10-2
TM 9-2350-388-10-2
LIN
T13168
T13305
NSN
2350-01-087-1095
2350-01-328-5964
Weight (Combat Loaded)
67.6 Tons
68.5 Tons
Fuel Available/Fuel Usable
504 Gallons/498 Gallons
504 Gallons/445.4
Gallons
42
SECTION II BRADLEY FIGHTING VEHICLE SYSTEMS

2-9. The original Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) models are the M2 Infantry Fighting Vehicle (IFV)
and the M3 Cavalry Fighting Vehicle (CFV), both of which were fielded in 1983. The following are the
model numbers that represent upgrades or differences in system configurations and capabilities:
z
M2A2 and M3A2.
z
M2A2 ODS (Operation Desert Storm) and M3A2 ODS.
M2A2 ODS-E (engineer vehicle).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-9
Chapter 2
M2A3 and M3A3.
M7 Bradley Fire Support Team (BFIST).
M2A2 AND M3A2 MODELS

2-10. The A2 model offers several improvements over its predecessors. These improvements included an
increase of 100 hp in the power train, 30-mm armor protection, armored-tile protection capability, and spall
liners (see Figure 2-10).
Figure 2-10. M2A2/M3A2
M2A2 ODS AND M3A2 ODS MODELS

2-11. Lessons learned during ODS inspired the development of new Bradley models, the M2A2 ODS and
M3A2 ODS. The ODS upgrades include the following:
z
ELRF. The ELRF is part of the vehicles Integrated Sight Unit (ISU). Using the ELRF, the crew
can determine target ranges from 200 to 9,995 meters, accurate within 10 meters. The ELRF
induces the weapon systems to superelevate for the determined range.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
2-10
Tactical Navigation System (TACNAV). The TACNAV system comprises the precision
lightweight GPS receiver (PLGR) and the Digital Compass System (DCS). It reports the
vehicles position in three dimensionslongitude and latitude, grid location, and elevation. The
PLGR works with the DCS to provide the BFV hull and turret azimuths, location, directions,
distance to way points, and steer-to data. This information shows up on both the commanders
and drivers compass displays.
Improved vehicle stowage.
Bench seats.
A tenth-man seat.
Mounted water ration heater.
Electric lift for engine-access door.
Outside stowage for personal gear.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
Three 25-mm ammunition boxes. Each box contains 50 rounds of linked ammunition (a hot
box).
DVE. The DVE is an uncooled, FLIR night-vision device. It has a sensor module and a display
module. The DVE is a real-time thermal-imaging system that improves the drivers SA during
limited visibility operations.
FBCB2. The FBCB2 is a digital battlefield command information system. The FBCB2 and IC3
give A2 ODS and A3 crews SA and real-time command and control.
M2A3 AND M3A3 MODELS

2-12. Innovations on the digitized M2A3 and M3A3 BFV improve the BFVs ability to shoot, move, and
communicate (see Figure 2-11 and Table 2-3 on page 2-13):
z Target Acquisition. Each A3 model has a commanders independent viewer (CIV) and the
Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS).
CIV. The CIV gives the A3 dual-sight capability. With the CIV, the commander can acquire
targets independently from the gunner.
While the gunner kills acquired targets, the commander can search for new ones. He
then designates the new targets and hands them over to the gunner. If for any reason
the gunner cannot fire, the commander can do so from his station by selecting IBAS on
the remote binocular display (RBD).
The CIV can traverse a full circle (360 degrees) in azimuth and can depress and elevate
from -22 to +60 degrees.
The CIV uses 2d Gen FLIR technology and day-TV video. The video image from the
CIV appears on the RBD. This allows the viewer to watch the image with both eyes at
the same time. The gunner and squad leader can also watch this video signal.
IBAS. On the A3, the gunners primary sight is the Target-Acquisition System (TAS),
which is part of the IBAS. Like the CIV, the TAS employs 2d Gen FLIR technology and
day-TV video. Like the A2 ODS, the TAS also has direct-view optics (DVO) and the
ELRF. The TAS provides limited sight travel without the disturbing turret motion
experienced in the earlier BFVs. The TAS periscopes head mirror assembly provides 5
degrees of travel left or right of center and 17 degrees of travel above and below center.
This extends the gunner sights elevation range from -22 to +60 degrees. This
independent travel accommodates the aided target tracker (ATT) that allows the gunner to
track two different targets within the same field of view (FOV) simultaneously. Using the
autopoint function allows the system to slew quickly to the closest tracked box nearest the
center of the reticle. As with the CIV, both the commander and the squad leader can see the
TAS video image. The TAS is capable of zooming 4x to 12x optically and 24x 48x digitally
to help identify the threat (digital zoom).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-11
Chapter 2
Figure 2-11. M2A3/M3A3

z
z
z
z
z
z
2-12
Turret Drive System (TDS). The TDS moves the weapon and stabilizes the A3 weapon
systems. The TDS responds to fire control system and crew inputs from the handstation.
SA. Improvements to the sights and the commanders tactical display (CTD) give the A3
commander a level of SA never before possible. The squad leaders display (SLD), controlled by
video selection buttons on the monitor, also gives passengers SA of the battlefield. It gives more
information about the battlefield location of each vehicle in the company, team, or task force. It
also gives operational graphics, and it lets the leader send and receive orders and mission updates
and respond to an expanding area of operations.
Electrical Power Control. The A3 has segregated electrical power control. This means that
many of its components can keep working when others fail. Connection to a data bus provides
redundant communications. The A3 has a 400-ampere current-regulated generator. The generator
supplies power to six 24-volt hull batteries and one 24-volt emergency-backup turret battery.
Fire Control. The A3s fire control system allows the crew to independently search, track, and
conduct target hand-off. Like the other BFVs, it also allows the commander to override the
gunner and abort a fired missile.
IC3. The IC3 digital battle command information system provides SA. It also offers real-time
command and control information to A3 crews and squads.
Navigation. The A3s subsystem POSNAV provides the A3 with accurate positioning and
navigation data. It works by combining GPS data with data obtained from an inertial navigation
unit (INU) and a vehicle motion sensor (VMS). Using the CTDs digital map, the crew can
navigate by loading and selecting routes and overlays.
CBRN Protection. The A3s large gas particulate filter system has additional crew stations and
heaters to provide CBRN protection to the entire crew and squads.
Diagnostics. The A3s built-in-test (BIT) continually monitors the systems turret status. On the
CTD, the BIT shows warnings and cautions about potentially dangerous faults. It recommends
degraded modes of operation when needed. Using pre-mission and preventive maintenance
checks and services (PMCS) checklists simplifies system maintenance.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table 2-3. Comparison of BFV technical data by model

Characteristics
M2A2
Speed, Land
41 mph, 66 kph
Slope Climb
60%
Side Slope
40%
M3A2
M2A2 ODS, M3A2 ODS

ODS-E
M2A3
M3A3
M7
38 mph, 61 kph
Trench Crossing 84
Vertical Wall
Climb
36
Personnel
Capacity
3 crew 7 passengers 3 crew 2

(M2)
passengers
6 passengers (M2A2)
3 crew 7
passengers
3 crew 2
passengers
3 crew 7
passengers
3 crew 2
passengers
4 crew 1
passenger
Firing Ports
6 (M2), 2 (M2A2)
TOW Missile
Variant
All
NA
TOW Missile
Ready
NA
TOW Missile
Stowed
25-mm Ammo
Ready
300
25-mm Ammo
Stowed
600
10
1,200
600
10
1,200
600
M240C 7.62-mm 800

Coax Ready
800, 400
10
NA
1,200
300
800, 400
800
M240C 7.62-mm 1,400

Coax Ammo
Stowed
3,600
1,400
3,400
1,400
3,400
2,800
M240B 7.62-mm 2,200

Ammo Stowed
3,200
2,200
3,400
2,200
3,400
NA
M231 FPW
5.56-mm Ammo
Stowed
4,200
2,200
2,520
NA
M16/M4 5.56mm Ammo

Stowed
2,520
1,680
2,520
1,680
2,520
1,680
1,680
Notes.
1. Firing the TOW 2, TOW 2A, and TOW 2B missile from the basic TOW launcher is possible; however, the missile will have a
reduced probability of hit.
2. TOW missile storage is reduced if squad is equipped with Javelin. M2 series IFV can replace up to 2 TOW with Javelin
missiles.
3. The Bradley A3 command vehicle will have 400 7.62 rounds in the ready stowage.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-13
Chapter 2
M7 BRADLEY FIRE SUPPORT TEAM

2-13. Integrating fire support team (FIST) mission equipment lets the Bradley crew complete fire support
missions while the 25-mm automatic cannon provides the BFIST crew self-defense and the ability to locate
targets on the move. This model adds an inertial navigation system and a new targeting station control
panel. A mission processor unit automates the fire request system.
2-14. The M7 BFIST replaces the aging M981 "hammerhead" Fire Support Team-Vehicle (FIST-V) in
selected mechanized units (see Figure 2-12). The vehicle provides company FIST and battalion/brigade fire
support officers with a vehicle platform where they can locate, plan, coordinate, execute and direct timely,
accurate, indirect field artillery (FA) and mortar fires.
Figure 2-12. M7 Bradley Fire Support Vehicle

2-15. As the name implies, the M7 BFIST is a modified M2A2 ODS BFV that has been equipped with a
specialized fire support mission equipment package (MEP). In addition to providing the critical FIST with
the same mobility, survivability and battlefield signature as the A2 series Bradley, the M7 provides FIST
with a 25-mm cannon for self-defense. Most important, the M7 design provides, for the first time, the
ability to "target on the move."
SECTION III GUARDIAN ARMORED SECURITY VEHICLE (M1117)

2-16. The Guardian Armored Security Vehicle (ASV) (M1117) is a four-wheel drive vehicle with
exceptional maneuverability and versatility. It can negotiate barricades, climb up to a 60-percent grade,
travel cross-country over challenging terrain, and traverse deep mud, snow, or water with equal ease. The
ASV is lightweight and air-transportable by C-130 and larger aircraft. This section discusses the vehicles
characteristics and gives a brief overview of its capabilities (see Figure 2-13).
2-17. The lightly armored, four-wheel drive ASV is equipped with a powerful 8.3 liter Cummins diesel
engine and an Allison 6-speed automatic transmission. It provides power sufficient to climb 60-percent
slopes and maintain highway speeds up to 63 miles per hour. A propeller shaft couples the transmission
with the drive transfer unit. Output from the transfer unit drives the rear differential when in two-wheel
drive mode and the front and rear differentials when in four-wheel drive mode. Operators can engage four
2-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
wheel drive on the fly by actuating a shift lever at the drivers station. The four-wheel independent
suspension allows smooth cross-country operation that easily negotiates 24-inch vertical obstacles and
enhances the ease of power steering and power braking. This modern design provides the mobility, agility,
and durability required for the wide range of missions encountered by military police (MP) Soldiers (see
Table 2-4 for more technical data).
2-18. The ASV fords hard bottom waterways up to 5 feet deep without any preparation. The ASV also
includes a central tire inflation system that enhances mobility by allowing tire pressure adjustment to
accommodate four different terrain typeshighways, secondary roads, off-road, and emergency conditions.
In addition to the central tire inflation system, the ASVs run-flat capability prevents vehicle
immobilization due to tire failure. The central tire inflation system may also provide additional operational
capabilities when tires are punctured by small arms fire or shrapnel and tire pressure is not reduced enough
to allow run-flat capability. The ASV also includes a winch capable of conducting retrieval operations at
15,000 pounds with a snatch block and cable for self-recovery operations.
Figure 2-13. Armored Security Vehicle M1117

2-19. The ASVs firepower consists of a one-person, turreted primary weapons station with a mounted 40millimeter automatic grenade launcher (MK19) and .50-caliber machine gun (M2/M48). The turret
traverses 360 degrees and allows for elevation of 45 degrees. The day/night target acquisition and fire
control system allows the gunner to engage targets at the maximum effective ranges of both weapon
systems. The ammunition ready racks hold 96 rounds of 40-millimeter ammunition and 200 rounds of .50caliber ammunition. The vehicle also includes a M249 squad automatic weapon mount and multi-salvo
smoke grenade system. The ASV teams weapons includes the following:
z
M249 machine guns.
z
M16/M4 rifles.
z
M203 grenade launchers.
z
AT-4 antitank weapon.
z
M9 pistol.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-15
Chapter 2
Table 2-4. Technical data of the M1117 - Guardian ASV

Feature
Data
Configuration Type
4X4
Operational Length
246 in
Operational Width
101 in
Operational Height
102 in
Minimum Ground Clearance
18 in
Maximum Speed
63 mph
Maximum Range
440 mi
Fording Depth
60 in
Gross Vehicle Weight
29,560 lbs
Vertical Wall
24 in
Maximum Climb Slope
60%
Maximum Side Slope
30%
SECTION IV ARMED HMMWV SYSTEMS

2-20. The armed High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV) is the light-weight vehicle
used by the HBCT scouts and various sustainment elements. It provides the crew with increased mobility,
as well as firepower against threat light-armored vehicles and troops. To use the vehicle to its potential, the
crew must know the characteristics, capabilities, and differences of the various armed HMMWV platforms.
Table 2-5 on page 2-18 shows armed HMMWV technical data by model. Current fielded models include
the following:
z
M1025A2 armed HMMWV.
z
M1026A1 armed HMMWV.
z
M1114 up-armored HMMWV.
z
M1151 up-armored HMMWV.
M1025A2/M1026A1 ARMED HMMWV MODEL

2-21. The M1025A2 and M1026A1 HMMWVs are armed-carrier configurations of the HMMWV family
(see Figure 2-14). The vehicles are equipped with basic armor. The weapon mount, located on the roof of
the vehicle, is adaptable to mount either the M240B 7.62-mm machine gun, M2 caliber .50 machine gun,
or MK19 grenade launcher. The weapons platform can be traversed 360 degrees. The vehicles can climb
60-percent slopes and traverse a side slope of up to 40-percent when fully loaded. The vehicles can ford
hard-bottom water crossings up to 30 inches without a deep water fording kit and up to 60 inches with the
kit. The M1026 and M1026A1 are equipped with the self-recovery winch, which can also be used to
recover like systems. The M1025A2 and M1026A1 models have the latest modifications applied to the
vehicles.
2-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 2-14. M1025A2/M1026A1
M1114 UP-ARMORED ARMED HMMWV MODEL

2-22. The M1114 HMMWV is an up-armored configuration of the HMMWV family (see Figure 2-15).
The vehicle is equipped with additional armor both on the sides and underneath to protect the crew from
small arms ammunition and mines. All other vehicle characteristics and weapon systems are identical to the
M1025A2 model. The additional weight of the armor and the change to the center of mass of the vehicle
limits the M1114 HMMWVs slope climbing to 40-percent and side slope traversing limit to 30-percent
slopes.
Figure 2-15. M1114 Up-Armored Armed HMMWV
M1151 ENHANCED UP-ARMORED ARMED HMMWV MODEL

2-23. The M1151 HMMWV is an enhanced up-armored configuration of the HMMWV family (see Figure
2-16). The vehicle is equipped with a heavier chassis and an improved engine that enables the use of
removable add-on armor protection.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-17
Chapter 2
Figure 2-16. M1151 Enhanced Up-Armored HMMWV

Table 2-5. Comparison of armed HMMWV technical data by model
Characteristics
M1025A2/M1026A1
M1114
M1151
Speed, Land
78 mph, 125 kph
Slope Climb
60%
40%
60%
Side Slope
40%
30%
40%
Water Fording Depth
60 with fording kit, 30 without fording kit
Vertical Wall Climb
18
Personnel Capacity
3 crew members, 1 passenger

Ready
100

Stowed
700
MK19 Ammunition Ready
48
MK19 Ammunition Stowed
240
55 mph, 88 kph
SECTION V M1064A3 SELF-PROPELLED 120-mm MORTAR CARRIER

2-24. This carrier is designed to carry the 4.7-inch (120-mm) mortar M121. The mortar can be fired from a
turntable in the carrier or removed and fired from a ground baseplate. The carrier has a crew of four,
including the driver (see Figure 2-17). (See Table 2-6 for technical data pertaining to the M1064A3 mortar
carrier.) The M1064A3s capabilities and features are
z
It travels easily over rough terrain.
z
It fords water up to 40 inches deep.
z
It can move at high speeds on improved roads and highways.
z
It is air transportable and can be dropped by parachute to troops in the field.
z
It has an enlarged three-piece firing hatch. This permits mortar to be fired through an arc of 90
degrees over the rear of the carrier.
z
It has a cupola with a caliber .50 machine gun.
z
It is propelled and steered on land and in water by tracks.
2-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
It has M17 periscopes around the drivers and commanders hatches for vision when buttoned
up.
It has an AN/VVS-2 drivers night-vision periscope stowed near the driver. The periscope can
be installed in the drivers hatch to provide night vision under blackout conditions.
It can be equipped to carry a CBRN (gas particulate filter) unit, a drivers windshield kit, an
engine coolant heater kit, and a personnel heater kit (for cold weather operation).
Figure 2-17. M1064A3 self-propelled 120-mm mortar carrier

Table 2-6. Technical data of the M1064A3 self-propelled
120-mm mortar carrier
Feature
Data
Speed Land
40 mph, 64 kph
Slope Climb
60%
Side Slope
30%
Trench Crossing
66
Vertical Wall Climb
24
Personnel Capacity
2 crew members 4 gun crew
Caliber .50 Ammunition Ready
100 rds
Caliber .50 Ammunition Stowed
1,900 rds
M121 Ammunition Horizontal
45 rds
M121 Ammunition Vertical
24 rds
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
2-19
Chapter 3
Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities

All weapons platform systems within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT)
contribute to the combined arms effort. They provide the infantry, armor,
reconnaissance, engineer, and fire support elements with firepower, armor protection,
and battlefield agility.
To employ weapons platform systems within the HBCT effectively, Soldiers must
know the capabilities of their vehicle, fire control, weapon systems, and ammunition.
Chapter 3 details the crew-served weapons found on platforms within the HBCT.
Contents
Section I Automatic Machine Guns ...... 3-1
M231 5.56-mm Firing Port Weapon .... 3-1
M249 Squad Automatic Weapon ........ 3-2
M240 Machine Gun Series ................. 3-4
M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun ........ 3-6
MK19 MOD3 40-mm Grenade
Machine Gun ...................................... 3-7
Section II M242 25-mm Automatic
Gun ............................................................. 3-8
M242 25-mm Automatic Gun .............. 3-8
Enhanced 25-mm Gun ........................ 3-9
Section III M256 120-mm Smoothbore

Cannon ....................................................... 3-9
Functional Components of the Gun
Tube and Breech .............................. 3-10
Components of the Recoil System .... 3-12
Section IV M121 120-mm Mortar .......... 3-12
Section V Smoke Grenade Launchers 3-14
M250 Smoke Grenade Launcher ...... 3-14
M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher ...... 3-14
Section VI TOW ..................................... 3-16
SECTION I AUTOMATIC MACHINE GUNS
M231 5.56-MM FIRING PORT WEAPON

3-1. The reference technical manual (TM) is TM 9-1005-309-10; National Stock Number (NSN) 100501-081-4582; Line Item Number (LIN) S56419. The Colt M231 Firing Port Weapon (FPW) is an adapted
version of the M16 assault rifle for firing from the ports on the M2/M3 Bradley (see Figure 3-1 and Table
3-1). The FPW was developed to provide a suitable weapon for use within a personnel carrier (PC) for
buttoned-up operations. The infantry rifle squad uses the M231 5.56-mm FPW to engage enemy personnel,
crew-served weapons and antitank guided missile (ATGM) teams, and to suppress suspected close-in
enemy positions. The FPW has a maximum effective range of 300 meters (tracer burnout). The firing rate
of the FPW is 1,100 to 1,200 rounds per minute. The basic Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) M2 has six
firing-port mounts, two on each side and two in the ramp. The BFV M2A2, M2A2 ODS (Operation Desert
Storm)\\HQDADFS\DATA\AGENCIES\APD\HOFF1\APDDATA\Application
Data\Microsoft\Word\F2301GL.doc - ODS, and A3 have two firing port mounts in the ramp (none on the
sides).
3-2. The ammunition for the FPW is the M196 tracer. The M231s design includes a thicker barrel to
better absorb the heat from firing M196 tracer rounds. Its rapid rate of fire allows squad members to use
the tracer-on-target (TOT) method of adjusting fire to suppress the target. When training, the squad uses
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3-1
Chapter 3
the M200 blank round and the M22 blank firing device. (TM 9-1005-309-10 provides more operator
information.)
Note. M193, M855 ball, and M856 ammunition types are not compatible with the FPW.
Crewmen must ensure these ammunition types are not used for safety reasons.
Figure 3-1. M231 5.56-mm firing port weapon

Table 3-1. M231 characteristics
Weight
7.34 lbs without a 30-round magazine
Weight with Ammo
8.34 lbs with a 30-round magazine
Overall Length
28.25 inches
Firing Rate (Full Automatic Only)

Sustained (Short Bursts)
50 to 60 rounds per minute
Minimum Cyclic
1,225 rounds per minute
Max Effective Range
328 yards (300 meters)
3-3. These weapons are only capable of fully automatic fire. The upper receiver on the FPW has been
modified to prevent any additional movement of the selector switch. This locks the weapon in automatic
fire mode with a special side plate that extends down to the lower receiver. These weapons retain a 65%
commonality with standard M16 rifles.
DANGER
Firing Port Weapon
Before using the FPW, make sure the exhaust fans work and the
exhaust hose is in good working conditionthey must be able to
remove poisonous gasses from the troop compartment.
M249 SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON

3-4. The references are TM 9-1005-201-10; FM 3-22.68; NSN 1005-01-127-7510; and LIN M09009.
The M249 is a lightweight, gas-operated, air-cooled, belt or magazine fed, one-man portable fully
3-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
automatic weapon capable of delivering a large volume of effective fire at ranges up to 800 meters (see
Table 3-2). The M249 is loaded, fired, unloaded and cleared from the open bolt position (see Figure 3-2). It
can accept belts of linked 5.56x45 mm North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) (.223 cal) ammunition
through the top-mounted feed tray or M-16 type magazines through the side-mounted port. Using M-16
type magazines should only be used in emergencies if Soldiers run out of belted ammunition, because this
often causes jams as the magazine spring cannot adequately keep up with the weapons high rate of fire.
The M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW) features a built-in bipod and a tripod-mounted lug for
supported fire, as well as a quick change barrel that helps prevent overheating during sustained fire. Barrels
are engaged and disengaged by rotating the built-in handle, and a spare is normally carried in the A-bag
by the gunner or his assistant. The forearm is designed to contain a small cleaning kit for field use, though
it may not be stored there in practice.
Figure 3-2. M249 squad automatic weapon 5.56mm

3-5. In addition to its traditional use as an infantry weapon, the M249 is also sometimes used as a
vehicle-mounted weapon, most often on High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicles (HMMWV). The
M249 may be mounted on a HMMWV using the machine gun mount, M197. Reference for the machine
gun mount is NSN 1005-01-413-4098; LIN M11071.
Table 3-2. M249 machine gun characteristics
Weight
16.41 lbs
Length
40.87 inches
Maximum Range
3,600 meters
Cyclic Rate of Fire
650 to 850 rpm (change barrel every min)
Rapid Rate of Fire
200 rpm (10 to 13 round bursts with 2 to 3 sec between

bursts) (change barrel every 2 min)
Sustained Rate of Fire
100 rpm (6 to 9 round bursts with 4 to 5 sec between bursts)

(no barrel changes)
Max Effective Range with

a Bipod to an Area Target
800 meters

a Bipod to a Point Target
600 meters

a Tripod to an Area
Target
1,000 meters

a Tripod to a Point Target
800 meters
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3-3
Chapter 3
M240 MACHINE GUN SERIES

3-6. The references are
z
TM 9-1005-313-10 (M240 series).
z
FM 3-22.68 (M240B).
z
NSN 1005-01-025-8095; LIN L923521 (M240).
z
NSN 1005-01-412-3129; LIN M92841 (M240B).
z
NSN 1005-01-085-4758; LIN M92420 (M240C).
3-7. The M240 is a belt-fed, air-cooled, gas-operated, fully automatic machine gun that fires from the
open-bolt position (see Figure 3-3). The M240 has been used by the U.S. armed forces since the late 1970s.
It is used extensively by the infantry, ground vehicles, and aircraft. Despite not being the lightest medium
machine gun in service, the M240 is highly regarded for its reliability, and its standardization among
NATO members. All variants of the M240 series are fed from disintegrating metallic, split-link belts, and
are capable of firing most types of 7.62mm NATO ammunition. They all share the same basic internal
parts, which are also interchangeable, for the most part, with other members of the M240 family. The
maximum effective range of the M240 is 900 meters which is the tracer burnout of the 7.62mm. The M240
machine gun has three rates of fire-cyclic, sustained, and rapid (see Table 3-3).
Figure 3-3. M240 series 7.62-mm machine gun

3-8. The Abrams crews use the M240 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun to engage enemy personnel, infantry
crew-served weapons, ATGM teams, and unarmored vehicles. The coax machine gun mounts on the right
side of the breech assembly, to the left of the gunner, and in front of the commander on the Abrams, and is
integrated into the fire control system. The M240 7.62-mm machine gun is also used by the loader on the
Abrams main battle tank. It has the same characteristics as the M240 coaxial machine gun; however, the
loaders M240 is not integrated into the fire control system and requires the loader to fire the weapon
manually.
3-9. The M240B is the U.S. infantry version, equipped with a folding bipod, pintle mount, forestock, and
accessory rails to mount optics and target illuminators (see Table 3-2 and Appendix. C). The M240B is
equipped with an integrated optical rail feed cover and a hand guard with heat shield to provide thermal
protection to the operator (see Figure 3-4). The pintle mount allows tripod and vehicle mounting. The
M240B machine gun can be mounted on armed HMMWVs, as well many other armed platforms.
Ammunition is fed into the weapon from a 100-round bandoleer containing a disintegrating metallic splitlink belt. A spare barrel is issued with each M240B. Barrels can be changed quickly as the weapon has a
fixed head space; however, barrels from different weapons should not be interchanged. M240 barrels are
set by the manufacturer for head space and timing and are matched by serial number to a specific weapon.
3-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 3-4. M240B machine gun

3-10. The M240C is the right hand feed variant of the M240 currently used on the U.S. M2 and M3 BFVs.
The M240C is identical to the M240 except for the ammunition feed cover and feed tray. All weapons in
the M240 family can be converted to right hand feed using M240C feeder components. The BFV crews use
the M240C 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun to engage enemy personnel, infantry crew-served weapons,
ATGM teams, and unarmored vehicles. The coax machine gun mounts in the plenum chamber on the right
side of the turret, in front of the commanders position on the Bradley, and is integrated into the fire control
system.
DANGER
Seals on the Access Doors
Before firing the coax, inspect the seals on the access doors.
Check for serviceability and ensure access doors are closed to
keep poisonous gas from leaking into the turret. (Bradley)
Smoke-Box
Before firing the coax, ensure that the smoke box is properly
closed. Check for serviceability of the smoke-box to ensure
poisonous gases are not leaking into the turret. (Abrams)
Table 3-3. M240 machine gun characteristics

Weight
27.6 lbs
Length
49 inches
Maximum Range
3,725 meters
Cyclic Rate of Fire
650 to 950 rpm (firing at 950 rpm will cause damage to the
weapon) (change barrel every min)
Rapid Rate of Fire


Maximum Effective Range to

an Area Target
1,100 meters
Maximum Effective Range to

a Point Target
900 meters
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3-5
Chapter 3
M2 HB CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN

3-11. The references are FM 3-22.65; TM 9-1005-213-10; NSN 1005-00-322-9715; and LIN L91975. The
M2 heavy barrel (HB) machine gun is a belt-fed, recoil-operated, air-cooled, crew-served machine gun (see
Figure 3-5). The gun is capable of single shot, as well as automatic fire, and operates on the short recoil
principle. In this action, the bolt and barrel are initially locked together, and recoil upon firing. After a
short distance, the bolt and barrel unlock, and the bolt continues to move rearwards relative to the barrel.
This action opens the bolt, and pulls the belt of ammunition through the weapon, readying it to fire again,
at a cyclic rate of 450 to 550 rounds per minute.
3-12. The M2 HB machine can be used to destroy varying targets including lightly armored vehicles,
massed troops, and aerial targets (such as helicopters and slow-flying aircraft). The M2 HB has excellent
long-range accuracy, external ballistics, performance, stopping power, and lethality. The M2 HB was
intentionally designed to be fit into many configurations. The M2 HB can be adapted to feed from the left
or right side of the weapon by exchanging the belt-holding pawls, the belt feed pawl, the front and rear
cartridge stops, and reversing the bolt switch. The conversion can be completed in under a minute with no
tools.
Figure 3-5. M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun

3-13. The M2 HB machine gun is the commanders weapon on the Abrams tank (see Table 3-4). The M2
HB is used to engage dismounted infantry, crew-served weapons, ATGM teams, light-armor vehicles, and
aircraft. The M2 HB is not integrated into the fire control system of the Abrams tank.
3-14. The M2 HB machine gun is also used as a vehicle-mounted weapon, most often on HMMWVs. The
M2 HB may be mounted on a HMMWV using the machine gun mount, MK 93 MOD1; NSN 1005-01383-2757; LIN M12647. The M2 HB is used to engage dismounted infantry, crew-served weapons,
ATGM teams, light-armor vehicles, and aircraft.
3-15. The M2 HB machine gun can be mounted on a M3 tripod mount, which is a lightweight, portable
mount that permits a high degree of accuracy and control of fire for dismounted squads. The M3 tripod
consists of a tripod, a pintle, and a traversing and elevating mechanism. The entire mount weighs 44
pounds. The references are TM 9-1005-245-13&P; NSN 1005-00-322-9716; and LIN M75577.
3-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table 3-4. M2 HB machine gun characteristics

Weapon
M2 HB
Weight
84 lbs
Length
65.13 inches
Maximum Range
6,764 meters
Cyclic Rate of Fire
Rapid Rate of Fire
>40 rpm (5 to 7 rounds per burst at 5 to 10 sec

intervals)
40 rounds per minute
Slow Rate of Fire
<40 rpm (5 to 7 rounds per burst at 10 to 15 sec

intervals)
Single Shot
One round every 2 to 3 seconds, as dictated by target.
Maximum Effective Range to an Area

Target
1,830 meters
Maximum Effective Range to a Point

Target
1,500 meters
MK19 MOD3 40-MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN

3-16. The references are TM 9-1010-230-10, FM 3-22.27; NSN 1010-01-126-9063, and LIN M92362.
The MK19 is a self-powered, air-cooled, belt-fed, blowback-operated weapon designed to deliver 40-mm
grenades against enemy personnel and lightly armored vehicles (see Figure 3-6). The MK19 can be
mounted on the HMMWV, M113 family of vehicles, 5-ton trucks, and selected M88A1 recovery vehicles.
The MK19 is designed to not overheat even after prolonged firing. The MK19 uses an open bolt principle.
The rounds are mechanically fed onto the bolt face with the pull of the charging handles. When the trigger
is pressed, the bolt closes, and the firing pin is released. The recoil blows back the bolt, dropping the empty
casing, and then feeds a new round onto the bolt face.
Figure 3-6. MK19 40mm grenade launcher

3-17. The MK19 can be mounted on a M3 tripod mount, a M4 pedestal, a M66 ring, a M113 PC
commanders cupola, and a MK93 MOD1 mount for a HMMWV (see Table 3-5). The MK93 MOD1 is
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3-7
Chapter 3
also used to mount the M2 HB. References for the MK93 Mount are TM 9-1010-230-23&P; LIN M12647;
and NSN 1005-01-383-2757.
Table 3-5. MK19 machine gun characteristics
Weapon
MK19
Weight
76 lbs
Length
43.1 inches
Maximum Range
2,212 meters
Arming Range
18 to 30 meters
Minimum Safe Range
310 meters
Cyclic Rate of Fire
Rapid Rate of Fire
Maximum Effective Range to an Area

Target
2,212 meters
Maximum Effective Range to a Point

Target
1,500 meters
SECTION II M242 25-MM AUTOMATIC GUN
M242 25-MM AUTOMATIC GUN

z
TM 9-1005-200-23&P (M242 Automatic Gun).
z
TM 9-2350-284-10-2 (M2A2, M3A2).
z
TM 9-2350-284-20-2-1 (M2A2, M3A2).
z
TM 9-2350-294-10-2 (M2A3, M3A3).
z
TM 9-2350-294-20-2-1 (M2A3, M3A3).
3-19. The Bradleys main armament is the M242 25-mm chain gun. It is an externally powered, chaindriven, single-barrel weapon which may be fired in semi-automatic or automatic modes (see Figure 3-7). It
is fed by a metallic link belt and has dual-feed capability. The term chain gun derives from the use of a
roller chain that drives the bolt back and forth. It can destroy lightly armored vehicles and aerial targets
such as helicopters and slow-flying aircraft. It can also suppress enemy positions such as troops in the
open, dug-in positions, and built-up areas.
Figure 3-7. M242 25-mm automatic gun

3-20. Unlike most automatic firearms, the M242 does not depend on gas or recoil to actuate its firing
system. Instead, it uses a 1.0 hp, 24VDC motor, positioned in the receiver to drive the chain and dual-feed
system. This system uses sprockets and extractor grooves to feed, load, extract, and eject rounds. A system
of clutches provides for an alternate sprocket to engage and thus allows the gunner to switch between
armor piercing rounds and high-explosive rounds.
3-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
DANGER
Before firing the 25-mm gun, the gunner must check the gun
cover for serviceability, zip it up, and ensure the turret ventilation
system is operational to prevent poisonous gas from leaking into
the turret. Firing rounds causes the gun powder to produce this
gas.
ENHANCED 25-MM GUN

3-21. Work on an upgraded weapon began in 1990. In doing so, three major systems and seven minor
systems were improved. The modifications began with introducing a chrome-lined barrel, an enhanced
feeder, and an enhanced receiver. The weapon system also received minor upgrades such as quickdetachable link covers, a larger breach assembly, a high efficiency muzzle brake, longer recoil, an integral
round counter, an extended life firing pin and spring, and a triple-spring drive clutch. It has a built-in test
(BIT) for the feed-select solenoid and gun-drive motor. The feed-select solenoid and the gun-drive motor
each contain a jumper wire that enables the on-vehicle BIT. It was first put to use on the M2A3/M3A3
Bradley, which is the third version of the M2 Infantry Fighting Vehicle (IFV).
SECTION III M256 120-mm SMOOTHBORE CANNON

z
TM 9-2350-264-10-1/2 (M1A1 Series).
z
TM 9-2350-388-10-1/2 (M1A2 Series).
z
TM 9-1000-202-14 (Evaluation of Cannon Tubes).
3-23. The Abrams main armament is the M256 120-mm smoothbore cannon (see Figure 3-8). It can fire a
variety of munitions to destroy heavily armored vehicles, lightly armored vehicles, massed troops, and
aerial targets (such as helicopters and slow-flying aircraft). The M256 cannon is capable of firing NATO
standard 120-mm combustible cartridge ammunition.
Figure 3-8. M256 120-mm smoothbore cannon

3-24. General characteristics for the M256 cannon are
z
Tube length is 17 ft 4 in.
z
Tube weight is 2,502 lbs.
z
Slinging point is 11ft 8in from the muzzle.
z
Bore evacuator is 28 lbs.
z
Bore diameter is 4.724 inches.
z
Breech ring is 1,506 lbs.
z
Breech block is 225 lbs.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3-9
Chapter 3
3-25. The M256 120-mm smoothbore cannon consists of the gun tube, breech, the recoil system, and the
bore evacuator.
FUNCTIONAL COMPONENTS OF THE GUN TUBE AND BREECH

3-26. The interior of the cannon is divided into the following three areas:
z
Chamber Area. The chamber area contains the entire cartridge and begins at the breech face of
the tube to a point 18-3/4 inches into the cannon (see Figure 3-9). At the rear of the chamber
region, rear obturation occurs.
Figure 3-9. Chamber area

z
Forcing Cone Area. The forcing cone area is the area starting at 18-3/4 inches and ending 22
inches into the cannon (see Figure 3-10). Forcing cone area is 3-1/4 inches long. The forcing
cone area is the transition between the chamber and the bore that guides the projectile into the
bore and compresses the obturator on the projectile, sealing in expanding propellant gasses
behind the projectile, resulting in forward obturation.
Figure 3-10. Forcing cone area
3-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Bore. The bore is the remainder of the interior of the cannon, starting at 22 inches from the
breech face to the muzzle end (see Figure 3-11).
Figure 3-11. Bore

3-27. Operation of the chamber and bore consists of
z
Initial detonation cartridge case combustion.
z
Rear obturation is provided by the cartridge stub base obturator seal expanding against the rear
portion of the chamber region.
z
Forward obturation by the projectile obturator seal.
z
Projectile forward movement.
z
Bore evacuator operation.
z
Shot exit.
z
Automatic breech opening.
z
Extraction and ejection begin.
z
Residual gases evacuated.
Note. Failure of the automatic breech opening system can increase firing times and contribute
to a flareback. Units must coordinate with unit maintenance shop to ensure proper clearance
between the operating crank and cam components are properly maintained.
3-28. The exterior of the gun tube is divided into the following three areas:
z
Breech Recess Area. The threaded end of the cannon that is inserted into the breechring. This
area contains the interrupted buttress threads.
z
External Machined Surfaces. This area contains the surfaces of the cannon that are machined
for fitting of external components such as the Muzzle Reference Sensor (MRS) and the bore
evacuator as well as the surfaces that interact with the recoil system.
z
Thermal Shrouds. These form fitting aluminum sleeves encase the exterior of the gun tube and
aid in the even distribution of heat around the gun tube due to firing. The thermal shrouds assist
in alleviating the effects of thermal bending.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3-11
Chapter 3
COMPONENTS OF THE RECOIL SYSTEM

3-29. The recoil system of the M1 series tanks serve the following four main purposes:
z
Absorb recoil energy.
z
Provide a fixed length of recoil through all angles of elevation.
z
Return the gun to battery through all angles of elevation.
z
Hold the gun in battery through all angles of elevation.
3-30. The recoil system is known as a Concentric Hydro-spring Constant Recoil System and consists of
the following:
z
Piston.
z
Gun cradle.
z
Recoil spring.
z
Replenisher.
3-31. The bore evacuator aids in removing spent propellant gases from the gun tube. The M256 gun tube
uses an eccentric pressure scavenging system. The bore evacuator is a chamber like device, located at
about the center of the gun tube. It is eccentric from the gun tube, meaning that the bore evacuator and the
gun tube do not share a common center. The center of the bore evacuator is offset higher than that of the
gun tube to allow the gun tube to be depressed lower over the rear (back) deck of the tank. Inside of the
bore evacuator are five bore evacuator holes equally spaced apart and drilled into the gun tube at a 30
degree angle towards the muzzle. When a projectile is fired down the gun tube and passes the bore
evacuator, propellant gasses fill the area inside the bore evacuator to a maximum of 150 psi. As the
projectile exits the gun tube, a vacuum is created. The pressure built up within the bore evacuator forces
propellant gasses out the muzzle and away from the turret interior, clearing the gun tube of any remaining
dangerous gas residue.
Note. If you see any evidence of gas leakage, powder streaks, or gas erosion, service the bore
evacuator in accordance with procedures found in the appropriate Operator's Manual.
SECTION IV M121 120-mm MORTAR

z
TM 9-1015-250-10.
z
FM 3-22.90.
z
FM 3-22.91.
3-33. This section contains the technical data and description of each component of the 120-mm mortar
(Figure 3-12 and Table 3-6). The mortar is a smoothbore, muzzle-loaded, crew-served, high angle-of-fire
weapon. It consists of a cannon assembly, bipod assembly, and baseplate. The 120-mm mortar is designed
to be employed in all phases and types of land warfare and in all weather conditions.
3-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 3-12. The 120-mm mortar

Table 3-6. Technical data for the 120-mm mortar
Feature
Data
Cannon
Bipod
110.0 lbs
M190 (Ground Mounted)
M191 (Carrier Mounted)
Baseplate
70.0 lbs
68.0 lbs
136.0 lbs
M67 Sight Unit
2.9 lbs
Elevation
Ground Mounted
Carrier Mounted
For Each Turn of Elevation Crank
0710 to 1510 mils

0750 to 1510 mils
5 mils
Traverse
Right or Left from Center Using Traversing

Wheel
With Extension
One Turn of Traversing Wheel
136 mils
Range
Maximum
Minimum
7,200 meters
200 meters
Rate of Fire
Maximum (First Minute)

Sustained (Indefinitely)
16 rds per min

4 rds per min
Bursting Radius
316 mils
5 mils
75 meters
Mortar Capabilities Mounted on Turntable
Traversing Limits (with

Traverse Extension)
Right of Center
Left of Center
858 mils
808 mils
Total Traverse Capability

from Extreme Left to
Extreme Right
Without Traversing Extension

With Traversing Extension
1,486 mils
1,666 mils
Elevation Limits (Level)
Track Maximum
Track Minimum
1,510 mils
800 mils
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3-13
Chapter 3
SECTION V SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHERS
M250 SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHER

z
TM 9-1040-267-20&P (M250).
z
TM 9-2350-264-10-1/2 (M1A1 Series).
z
TM 9-2350-388-10-1/2 (M1A2 Series).
3-35. The majority of Abrams tanks have two, six-tube, electrically fired grenade launchers, one on each
side of the turret (see Figure 3-13). Each can fire 2, 3 grenade salvos, or all 12 at once. On activation, the
grenades create enough smoke to screen the vehicle in three seconds. To use the smoke grenade launcher
system effectively, crews must know the grenade dispersal patterns: Salvo 1, Salvo 2, and Salvo 1&2.
Refer to the appropriate TM or Chapter 4 of this manual for dispersion patterns for the M250 smoke
grenade launcher.
Figure 3-13. Smoke grenade launcher
M257 SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHER

z
TM 9-1040-267-20&P (M257).
z
TM 9-2350-264-10-1/2 (M1A1 Series).
z
TM 9-2350-388-10-1/2 (M1A2 Series).
z
TM 9-2350-252-10-2 (M2/M2A1, M3/M3A1).
z
TM 9-2350-284-10-2 (M2A2/M3A2).
z
TM 9-2350-294-10-2 (M2A3/M3A3).
3-37. Selected Abrams tanks have two, eight-tube, electrically fired grenade launchers, (one on each side
of the turret. Each can fire two, four grenade salvos, or all sixteen at once. On activation, the grenades
3-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
create enough smoke to screen the Abrams in three seconds. To use the smoke grenade launcher system
effectively, tank crews must know the grenade dispersal patterns: Salvo 1, Salvo 2, and Salvo 1&2. See the
appropriate TM or Chapter 4 for M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher dispersion patterns for Abrams, Bradley,
and truck mounted systems.
3-38. The Bradley has two, four-tube, electrically fired grenade launchers, one on each side of the 25-mm
gun (see Figure 3-14). Therefore, each can fire four grenades. On activation, the grenades create enough
smoke to screen the vehicle in three seconds. Using one switch inside the vehicle, the commander or
gunner fires the launchers. The launchers cannot fire independently. Both launchers (all eight grenades)
fire at once.
Figure 3-14. M257 smoke grenade launchers

3-39. Armed HMMWVs have up to four, four-tube, electrically fired grenade launchers. On activation, the
grenades create enough smoke to screen the vehicle in three seconds. Using one switch inside the vehicle,
16 grenadesfire at once. Some of the newer variants of the HMMWV, however, have the ability to fire
each launcher independently.
DANGER
The hatches should be closed when firing the smoke grenade
launchers to prevent red phosphorus being blown in on the crew,
as red phosphorus can cause serious burns.
All personnel outside the vehicle must stay at least 200 meters
from the vehicle during firing.
Electrical system malfunctions or surges can cause smoke
grenades to kill or injure Soldiers. Before loading any smoke
grenades, make sure the grenade launcher switches are in the
OFF position.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3-15
Chapter 3
SECTION VI TOW
z
TM 9-2350-252-10-2 (M2/M2A1, M3/M3A1).
z
TM 9-2350-284-10-2 (M2A2/M3A2).
z
TM 9-2350-294-10-2 (M2A3/M3A3).
z
FM 3-22.34.
3-41. The tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided missile (TOW) is a command-guided surface
attack weapon that can destroy tanks, other armored vehicles, and helicopters (see Figure 3-15). It can also
destroy fortified bunkers, gun emplacements, and other protected positions. The TOW system destroys
armored vehicles at ranges from 65 to 3,750 meters, depending on the type of missile used. The TOW Aero
has a maximum range of 4,750 meters, and is the newest of the TOW missile family. The BFV crew can
reload the TOW launcher without exposure to hostile fire.
Figure 3-15. Tube-Launched, Optically Tracked, Wire-Guided Missile

3-42. When the firer pulls the trigger, the TOW subsystem starts a 1.5-second self-balancing routine that
activates the gyro and stabilizes the missile. To avoid accidentally aborting the missile, the crew must
remember this delay when firing the TOW. At launch, the electronic Command Guidance Electronics
(CGE) (M2/3 A1/A2 variants) or Digital Command Guidance Electronics (DCGE) (M2/3A2 ODS) System
and the Missile Control Subsystem (MCS) (all M2/3 variants) sends a signal that triggers the missile launch
motor to ignite. This ignition propels the missile out of the launcher, where the flight motor then takes
over. When the missile enters the firers line of sight, the Bradley sight system receives infrared energy
from the missile. Components in the sight system then signal the guidance system to position the missile
with respect to the sight systems line of sight. This exchange continues until the missile impact(s) or
aborts.
DANGER
1.5-Second Delay
When firing the TOW, there is a 1.5-second delay between the
initial launch and the gyro stabilization. This will cause the
missile appear off target prior to the stabilization gyro activation.
3-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
3-43. The last step in the firing sequence occurs when the TOW subsystem automatically cuts the guidance
wire and aborts 23 seconds after launch. When this occurs, the missile is programmed to dive into the
ground without detonating. The subsystem also cuts the wire when the
z
Vehicle commander (VC) or gunner presses the TOW ABORT switch.
z
VC or gunner selects another missile on the TOW control box.
z
Missile reaches the wires maximum range.
z
VC or gunner resets the weapons control box.
z
VC or gunner deselects the TOW weapon system.
z
VC or gunner changes magnification.
3-44. When firing a TOW, the firer must lay the crosshairs on the center mass of the target, fire the
missile, and keep the crosshairs on the target during the flight of the missile. This keeps the firer from
losing control of the missile.
3-45. Before firing any TOW missile on the Bradley, the firer ensures that both of the Integrated Sight
Unit (ISU) or Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS) ballistic doors are open.
3-46. In order to fire the TOW, the vehicle must be level or on a slope of less than 10 degrees. The wings
and control surfaces extend as soon as the missile clears the launcher. To avoid damaging these surfaces,
the end of the launcher needs at least 36 inches of clearance.
3-47. Between 500 and 900 meters down range, the missile could fly below the gunners line of sight to
the target; therefore, the firer must allow at least 30 inches of clearance between the line of sight and any
obstruction. This reduces the chance of the missile striking the ground on its way to the target.
3-48. In the defense and fighting from a two-tiered fighting position, TOWs must be fired from the hull
down (enfilade) position in order to ensure its survivability while in flight to the target.
DANGER
Firing over Wires
When firing over electrical wires, there is a danger of the
command-link wires touching a live high-voltage power line. This
may cause injury or death, cause the firer to lose control of the
missile, and/or damage launcher electronics.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3-17
Chapter 4
Ammunition
The success of U.S. forces depends on the effective use of the appropriate
ammunition against battlefield targets. Chapter 4 discusses the characteristics and
capabilities of the different ammunition available for vehicle-mounted crew-served
weapons used within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT), including machine
guns, 25-mm main gun, 40-mm grenade machine gun, 120-mm main gun, mortar,
special purpose munitions and missiles. Chapter 4 also includes general ammunition
information such as packaging, standard and North Atlantic Treaty Organization
(NATO) marking conventions, common pallet packaging, load capabilities of lift
assets, placard marking requirements, ammunition planning considerations, and other
safety considerations for ammunition types available within the HBCT.
Contents
Section I Ammunition Terminology ...... 4-2
Markings and Symbols........................ 4-2
Ammunition Lot Numbers ................... 4-4
Department of Defense Codes ........... 4-6
Color Coding ....................................... 4-8
Section II Machine Gun Ammunition .. 4-10
Packaging ......................................... 4-10
M249 5.56-mm Machine Gun
Ammunition ....................................... 4-12
M240 7.62-mm Machine Gun
Ammunition ....................................... 4-15
M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun
Ammunition ....................................... 4-17
Section III 25-mm Bradley Fighting
Vehicle Ammunition ................................ 4-20
Classification..................................... 4-20
Identification...................................... 4-20
Service Ammunition .......................... 4-21
Target Practice Ammunition ............. 4-29
Safety Information............................. 4-31
Section IV MK19 Mod 3, 40-mm
Grenade Machine Gun ............................ 4-32
Training Ammunition ......................... 4-35
3 September 2009
Section V 120-mm Abrams Tank

Ammunition .............................................. 4-38
Classification ..................................... 4-39
Identification ...................................... 4-39
Target Practice Ammunition .............. 4-51
Safety Information ............................. 4-53
Section VI Mortar Ammunition ............ 4-58
Classification ..................................... 4-58
Authorized Cartridges ....................... 4-58
Target Practice Ammunition .............. 4-62
Fuzes ................................................ 4-63
Mortar Safety Information.................. 4-67
Section VII Smoke Grenades ............... 4-68
Section VIII Missiles ............................. 4-72
TOW Missile Ammunition .................. 4-72
Javelin Antitank Guided Missile......... 4-93
Safety Information ............................. 4-97
Section IX Planning Considerations ... 4-98
Section X Safety ................................. 4-103
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-1
Chapter 4
SECTION I AMMUNITION TERMINOLOGY

4-1. Ammunition used for training and combat comes in a wide variety of calibers and projectile types,
are packaged in multiple ways, and have a variety of uses. Ammunition handlers, forecasters, planners, and
Master Gunners must have a solid working knowledge of the ammunition available for use within the
HBCT in order to plan, coordinate, execute, resupply, provide, and manage the training and combat stocks
allotted effectively and efficiently.
4-2. Ammunition is identified by markings and color-coding on the items themselves, the containers, and
the packing boxes (see Figure 4-1). The markings and standard nomenclature of each item, together with
the lot number, Federal Supply Classification (FSC) Code, National Stock Number (NSN), Department of
Defense Identification Code (DODIC), and Department of Defense Ammunition Code (DODAC), are
visual references that completely identify each item. This section gives a basic explanation of markings and
color-coding, in accordance with (IAW) Standardized Agreement (STANAG) and Military Standard (MILSTD) FM 4-30.13, MIL-STD 1168A, MIL-STD 709C, STANAG 2316, and STANAG 2322B.
Figure 4-1. Ammunition packaging and common markings example
MARKINGS AND SYMBOLS

4-3. Markings stenciled or stamped on munitions or their containers include all information needed for
complete identification.
4-4. Components in which all explosive, incendiary, or toxic materials have been simulated by
substitution of inert material are identified by impressed INERT markings. Components in which all
explosive, incendiary, or toxic materials have been omitted are identified by stamped EMPTY markings.
4-2
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
4-5. Packaging and containers for small arms ammunition are clearly marked with standard NATO
Symbols identifying the contents of the package by type of ammunition, primary use, and packaging
information. The most common NATO symbols are described IAW STANAG 2322B (see Figure 4-2).
Figure 4-2. Standard small arms ammunition markings
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-3
Chapter 4
AMMUNITION LOT NUMBERS

4-6. Each item of ammunition is assigned a complete round or item lot number when it is manufactured
or when it is at the load, assemble, and packaging (LAP) plant. Figure 4-3 breaks down a typical
ammunition lot number system. See MIL-STD 1168A for a description of the current system.
4-7. The lot numbers are used by manufacturers for quality control. The lot numbers identify the
manufacturer, month and year of manufacture, and information specific to the design, development, or
production of the ammunition:
z
Manufacturers Identification Code (MIC). The MIC, also called the manufacturers
identification symbol, identifies the primary manufacturer of the round. It does not include
subcontractors who have been tasked to supply subcomponents of the ammunition. For a
complete listing of the MICs for all manufacturers symbols or codes, see MIL HDBK-1461A.
z
Year of Production. This is identified as a two-digit number representing the production year.
Figure 4-3. Lot number example

z
4-4
Month of Production. This single letter identifies the month of production at the manufacturing
facility. The letter I is not used in the coding system to reduce confusion with the number 1.
The letter codes used are shown in Table 4-1.
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Table 4-1. Month codes
Lot Interfix Number. The interfix number represents one of four indicationsmore than a 30
day break in production, a new contract for the ammunition has been issued, a change in design
of the round has occurred, or the sequence number has been exhausted.
Tenth Position. There may be a letter in the tenth position, located between the interfix and
sequence number (see Figure 4-4). Each letter has a specific meaning. The tenth position is an
indicator that the ammunition has special attributes. When no special attributes exist, the default
, or normal lot indicator, is applied.
Figure 4-4. Tenth position codes
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-5
Chapter 4
Sequence Number. The sequence number identifies the production run of rounds produced.
Typically, there are lots or batches of 5,000 to 25,000 rounds produced for large caliber
ammunition or 100,000 rounds (or more) for small and medium caliber rounds. The number of
rounds produced in each batch is established by the manufacturer. Each sequence number
identifies the batch of ammunition produced based on the previous conditions of the overall lot
number. When the sequence number reaches 999, the interfix number will increase, resetting the
sequence number to 001.
Ammunition Lot Suffix. An alpha character added to the sequence portion of the ammunition
lot number denotes a rework effecting a material change in the original lot or to identify
reprocessed propellant lots. Ammunition lot suffixes are always in capital letters and are applied
sequentially starting with A and continuing through Z.
DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE CODES

FEDERAL SUPPLY CLASSES
4-8. Conventional ammunition falls within FSC Code 13. The FSC Code identifies the type of supply as
ammunition, depicted by the first two digits of the four digit FSC Code; 13XX. Within this group,
ammunition is further broken down by two more numbers that identify the general type or family in which
the item falls. Table 4-2 lists the FSC Codes for all ammunition types typical to the HBCT. These numbers
are used frequently when ordering, reporting, stocking, forecasting, issuing, and turning in ammunition at
the brigade level and above.
Table 4-2. Federal supply classification
FSC Group 13
Ammunition and Explosive Type or

Family
DODIC (see paragraph 4-10)
1305
1310
1315
1320
1330
1340
1345
1365
1370
1375
Ammunition less than 30mm

Ammunition 30mm through 75mm
Ammunition 75mm through 125mm
Ammunition over 125mm
Grenades
Rockets and rocket ammunition
Land mines
Military chemical agents
Pyrotechnics
Demolition materials
A
B
C
D
G
H, PB, PV, WF
J and K
K
L
M, ML, MN
NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER

4-9. Each complete round or item of conventional ammunition or associated explosive component is
identified by its own NSN. The first four numbers of the NSN is the FSC Code. It is followed by the
national item identification number (NIIN) that consists of a two-number code identifying the country of
manufacture and seven number item identification. See Figure 4-5 for the NSN example and Figure 4-6
for the country of origin codes.
4-6
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-5. National stock number example
Figure 4-6. Country of origin codes
DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE IDENTIFICATION CODE

4-10. DODIC is a single letter and three numbers or, in the case of small guided missiles (tube-launched,
optically-tracked, wire-guided [TOW], Javelin, Stinger), civilian packages ammunition, and some
demolitions, two letters and two numbers are used (such as PV18 for TOW-2B). It is attached at the end of
all NSNs to denote interchangeability of the item. The battalion and subordinate units will use the DODIC
for ammunition resourcing, ordering, forecasting, and shipments. See Figure 4-7 for a conventional NSN
with DODIC added, demonstrating interchangeability between various model numbers and the designators
of an ammunition item.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-7
Chapter 4
Figure 4-7. Department of Defense Identification Code example
DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE AMMUNITION CODE

4-11. DODAC includes the FSC Code of the ammunition and the DODIC. The code is used on all using
unit DA Form 581s, DA Form 3151-Rs, and most ammunition reports. The DODAC is used instead of the
DODIC to reduce errors with ammunition transactions when ordering at brigade level and above. The FSC
Code determines the leading (prefix) lettering code for the DODIC as shown in Figure 4-7. See Figure 4-8
for the identification of the DODAC.
Figure 4-8. Department of Defense Ammunition Code example
COLOR CODING
4-12. Ammunition is primarily painted to protect it from rust or corrosion. However, the color of the
protective coating and markings also makes ammunition easy to identify by the user. Ammunition 20mm
and larger is color-coded IAW MIL-STD 709C to facilitate user identification as shown in Table 4-3.
4-8
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Table 4-3. Ammunition color coding, 20mm and larger

Basic Projectile Color Indicates Use
Black
Olive Drab
Light Green
Light Blue
Armor defeating
Antipersonnel/anti-materiel
Smoke
Target Practice (TP)
Colors Indicating Filler or Charge
White Letters
Yellow Letters
Red Letters or Red Band
Yellow Band
White Diamonds
Black Band
Blue Band
Brown
Inert (no filler or explosive charge)

High-explosive filler or charge
Incendiary
Small amount of high-explosive charge
Antipersonnel flechettes
Secondary armor defeating
Inert (explosive filler replaced with flaked lead or concrete)
Low-explosive charge
4-13. Small arms ammunition (less than 20mm) is not color-coded under MIL-STD 709C. Marking
standards for small arms ammunition are outlined in
z
TM 9-1305-201-20&P, small arms ammunition to 30mm inclusive.
z
TM 9-1300-200, ammunition, general.
z
STANAG 2316, NATO marking of ammunition (and its packaging) below 20mm.
4-14. These publications describe the color coding system for small arms projectiles. The bullet tips are
painted a distinctive color as a ready means of identification for the user.
4-15. Frangible, Blue Tip plastic munitions, and short range munitions do not have a specific color code,
although their packaging may be marked with the NATO Frangible symbol as shown in Figure 4-9. These
types of training ammunition are specifically used for
z
Training where maximum range for the ammunition must be reduced based on authorized
surface danger zones (SDZ).
z
Use on lead free ranges, or indoor ranges where there is a danger of ricochets injuring the
shooter.
4-16. Figure 4-9 describes the general color codes for all types of small arms ammunition up to and
including caliber .50. Each caliber of small arms ammunition described in this chapter will have specific
examples of ammunition tip color coding (see TM 9-1300-200 for more information).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-9
Chapter 4
Ammunition Color Coding
Ammunition Type
No Color
Ball
Black Tip
Armor Piercing
Silver Tip
Armor Piercing Incendiary
Silver with Orange Tip
Armor Piercing Incendiary with

Tracer
Light Blue Tip
Incendiary
Light Blue Stripe with Dark Blue Tip
Incendiary
Orange Tip
Tracer
Maroon/Dark Red Tip
Tracer
Silver Cartridge
Black Cartridge and Tip
Perforated Cartridge
Crimped or Capped End
High Pressure Test

Dummy
Dummy
Blank
Package Marking
None
None
None
Figure 4-9. Small arms color coding and packaging markings
SECTION II MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION

4-17. Crews must be able to effectively engage threat dismounted personnel, crew-served weapons,
antitank guided missile (ATGM) teams, rocket propelled grenades (RPG) teams, trucks, lightly skinned
armored vehicles, lightly constructed covered positions and aircraft utilizing the crew-served machine
guns.
4-18. Crews must understand the capabilities and uses of ammunition to effectively engage threat targets
with the appropriate ammunition.
4-19. This section discusses the different ammunition associated with the crew-served machine guns and
their respective uses. The ammunition listed in this section is provided from smallest to largest caliber for
the crew-served machine guns for clarity.
4-20. Machine gun ammunition is identified by type, caliber, model, and lot number as described in the
previous section. Whenever possible, the appropriate symbol, marking, or color coding will be used in this
section for clarity.
PACKAGING
4-21. Small arms ammunition is packaged in different cartons, containers, and cases depending on the
specific DODIC. For example, the 5.56 ammunition for the M249 is packaged in either a 100 round drum
or 100 round belt in a Bandoleer (see Figure 4-10). The 7.62 mm ammunition is packaged in 2 belts of 100
4-10
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
rounds each in one metal can. The majority of caliber .50 ammunition is packaged in a 100 round linked
belt in a single metal can.
10
Figure 4-10. Bandoleer with 10 round clips, 5.56mm
4-22. All 5.56mm ammunition has a hazard classification of 1.4. This allows units to store small quantities
of small arms ammunition in their unit arm room IAW local policies and storage instructions.
Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12 shows the markings that are required on vehicles transporting 5.56mm
ammunition or when storing ammunition, respectively.
Figure 4-11. Storage marking
Figure 4-12.Transportation marking
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-11
Chapter 4
4-23. Crews should use caution when removing rounds from a belt of ammunition and later re-linking the
rounds. The belt of ammunition may get jammed in the ammunition chute, or cause a stoppage with the
weapon.
4-24. There are 11 types of machine gun ammunition available to use with the crew-served machine guns
within the HBCT (see Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-18):
z
Blank.
z
Frangible.
z
Ball.
z
Armor piercing (AP).
z
Incendiary.
z
Tracer (T).
z
Armor Piercing-Incendiary (API).
z
Armor Piercing-Incendiary with Tracer (API-T).
z
Saboted Light Armor Penetrator (SLAP).
z
Saboted Light Armor Penetrator with Tracer (SLAP-T).
z
Dummy.
M249 5.56-MM MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION

4-25. The M249 squad automatic weapon fires a NATO standard 5.56 round, contained in either a drum or
belt of ammunition. The M249 can fire 5.56 rounds from a 20/30round magazine in an emergency.
4-26. Ammunition for the M249 is issued in the M27 clip-type open link disintegrating, metallic, splitlinked belt (see Figure 4-13).
Figure 4-13. M27 clip-type open link
4-12
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
4-27. The maximum effective range (MER) of the ammunition is the greatest distance a crewman can
accurately engage threat targets utilizing the weapon system. Table 4-4 describes the maximum effective
range of standard 5.56mm ammunition when used with crew-served weapons and using different support
systems or engagement techniques.
Table 4-4. 5.56 maximum effective ranges
Mount/Use
Point Target
Area Target
Tripod
800 meters
1,000 meters
Bipod
600 meters
800 meters
Suppression
1,000 meters
1,000 meters
4-28. Figure 4-14 shows the most common ammunition packaging compositions for the 5.56mm crewserved weapons. Figure 4-14 shows the most common nomenclature, DODIC, ammunition type, use,
color-coding and packing markings.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-13
Chapter 4
Figure 4-14. 5.56mm crew serve common ammunition types
4-14
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
M240 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION

4-29. The preferred ammunition mix for the M240 is four M80 ball and one M62 tracer (commonly
referred to as the 4:1 link). Other types of 7.62-mm ammunition are available; however, the four-and-one
mix allows the commander and gunner to use the tracer-on-target (TOT) method of adjusting fire to
achieve target kill or suppression.
4-30. Ammunition for the M240 is issued in the M13 clip-type open loop, split-linked, disintegrating link,
metallic, belt. It is supplied as a complete round with open loop metal links. Using these metal links, belts
of various lengths may be assembled (see Figure 4-15).
Figure 4-15. 7.62mm ammunition with M13 disintegrating link

4-31. The MER of the ammunition is the greatest distance a crewman can accurately engage threat targets
utilizing the weapon system. The MER of the 7.62mm depends on the mount and the use of the weapon.
Table 4-5 describes the maximum effective ranges of 7.62mm rounds for the M240 series of machine guns.
Table 4-5. 7.62mm maximum effective ranges
Mount/Use
Point Target
Area Target
Tripod
900 meters
1,800 meters
Bipod
600 meters
800 meters
Suppression
1800 meters
1,800 meters
Vehicle
900 meters
1,800 meters
Note. 7.62mm tracer rounds, DODIC - A131, are the only 7.62mm rounds authorized for
overhead firing (firing over the head of exposed friendly forces) during training.
4-32. The M240 machine gun series uses several types of standard 7.62mm ammunition. Figure 4-16
shows the types and their characteristics. Soldiers may only use authorized ammunition manufactured to
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-15
Chapter 4
US and NATO specifications. Figure 4-16 illustrates the most common rounds by nomenclature, DODIC,
type, primary use and color code.
Figure 4-16. 7.62mm crew serve common ammunition types
4-16
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
M2 HB CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION

4-33. The preferred combat ammunition mix for the M2 HB machine gun is four (API-M8) and one (APIT-M20), commonly referred to as 4:1 link. Other types of caliber .50 ammunition are available; however,
the four-and-one mix allows the firer to use TOT method of adjusting fire to achieve target kill or
suppression.
4-34. Ammunition for the caliber .50 machine gun is issued as a complete round with a cartridge case,
primer, propellant, and bullet, in with either the M2 or M9 closed loop, disintegrating link (see Figure
4-17).
Figure 4-17. M2/M9 closed loop link

4-35. The M2 and M48 caliber .50 machine guns use several types of standard caliber .50 ammunition.
Figure 4-18 shows the most common types and their characteristics. Soldiers may only use authorized
ammunition manufactured to US and NATO specifications with the M2 and M48 machine guns.
4-36. The maximum effective range of the caliber 50 ammunition is the greatest distance a crewman can
accurately engage threat targets using the weapon system. Table 4-6 describes the MER of the 50 caliber
round with the M2 HB MG.
Table 4-6. Caliber .50 maximum effective range
3 September 2009
Mount/Use
Point Target
Area Target
Tripod
1,500 meters
1,830 meters
Truck/Flex
1,500 meters
1,830 meters
Tank/CWS/RWS
1,800 meters
1,830 meters
Suppression
1,500 meters
1,830 meters
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-17
Chapter 4
4-37. The U.S. caliber 50 machine guns use various ammunition types in training and combat. Figure 418a and Figure 14-18b illustrate the most common rounds by nomenclature, DODIC, type, primary use and
standard markings, for the caliber 50 machine guns.
Figure 4-18a. Characteristics of the most common caliber .50 ammunition types
4-18
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-18b. Characteristics of the most common caliber .50 ammunition types (continued)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-19
Chapter 4
WARNING
USE AUTHORIZED AMMUNITION ONLY FOR CALIBER .50
MACHINE GUN. USE OF UNAUTHORIZED AMMUNITION MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
Note. The ammunition containers have the lot numbers stenciled on the side of the box, not on
the individual rounds. Therefore, it is important to record the box lot numbers when belted
machine gun ammunition is removed from containers.
SECTION III 25-MM BRADLEY FIGHTING VEHICLE AMMUNITION

4-38. The Bradleys main armament is the M242 25-mm automatic gun. It can destroy lightly armored
vehicles and aerial targets such as helicopters and slow-flying aircraft. It can also suppress enemy positions
and troops in the open. The three service rounds used with the 25-mm gun are the M791, M919 and the
M792. The two training rounds used with the 25-mm gun are the M910 and M793.
CLASSIFICATION
4-39. Conventional 25-mm main gun ammunition is classified according to type and use.
z
Kinetic energy (KE) ammunitions (such as M791) are the primary rounds used against light
armored vehicles and slow moving aerial targets.
z
High-explosive (HE) ammunition. Chemical energy (CE) ammunition (such as M792 and M919)
are the primary rounds used against unarmored vehicles and helicopters. They can also be used
to suppress ATGM positions and enemy squads beyond coax range.
z
Training:
Target practice (TP) ammunition is used for gunnery training. These rounds have ballistic
characteristics similar to service ammunition, without the CE projectile, fuse or service
penetrator.
Dummy ammunition is used for practicing gunnery-related tasks; it has no propellant or

explosive charge.
IDENTIFICATION
4-40. The various 25mm main gun ammunition can be identified by shape, the projectile color code, and
markings on the projectile (see Table 4-3 for the standard marking convention).
COMPONENTS OF 25MM AMMUNITION

4-41. A complete round of 25mm main gun ammunition is usually composed of the following basic
components; however, not all types of rounds will have every part listed:
z
Booster Pellet part of the ignition sequence of the ammunition. The booster pellet is ignited
by the primer, which in turn ignites the propellant in the cartridge case.
z
Cartridge Case the steel casing that contains the propellant, booster pellet, flash tube and
primer.
z
Flash Tube part of the ignition sequence of the ammunition. The flash tube is ignited by the
primer, which in turn ignites the propellant in the cartridge case. For 25mm ammunition the
4-20
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
flash tube is only used in the M919 armor-piercing, fin stabilized, discarding sabot with tracer
(APFSDS-T).
Fuze the part of the HE projectile that causes it to function upon impact with a target (not used
in KE rounds).
Obturator a rubber, nylon or copper ring that seals propellant gases behind the projectile
during firing.
Ogive the curved portion of the projectile assembly that provides the aerodynamic shape
which lowers drag.
Primer the cap in the base of the cartridge case which when struck by the firing pin, starts the
ignition sequence of the booster pellet or flashtube, which in turn ignites the propellant charge.
Projectile Assembly the part of the round that travels through the gun tube.
Propellant the composition that burns, producing gas pressure that forces the projectile
assembly from the cartridge case down the gun barrel toward the target.
Pusher Base this is only a part of the 25mm M910 target practice discarding sabot with tracer
(TPDS-T) round. It is the metal base of the projectile assembly that the propellant gasses push
against to drive the projectile assembly down the gun barrel. It is discarded from the projectile
assembly once it leaves the gun barrel.
Rotating Band an iron or nylon o-ring located on the projectile assembly which engages the
lands and grooves of the gun and provides forward obturation by sealing propellant gases
behind the projectile during firing.
Subprojectile typically for KE rounds the part of the projectile that travels to the target after it
has discarded its sabots.
Windscreen a pointed, curved surface mainly used to form the streamlined nose of the round.
Also known as the nose cap.
SERVICE AMMUNITION
4-42. The M791 and M919 Sabot rounds use KE (no explosives are needed) to penetrate the target using
the mass of the projectile and the velocity of the projectile striking the target (see Figure 4-19).
Figure 4-19. Kinetic energy formula

4-43. The M792 HE round depends on CE and not striking velocity, therefore its ability to penetrate light
armor is as effective at 3,000 meters as it is at 200 meters.
4-44. Figure 4-20 provides a quick reference for comparing the three types of 25mm service ammunition.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-21
Chapter 4
Nomenclature
M791 APDS-T
M919 APFSDS-T
M792 HEI-T
A974
A986
A975
SAY-BOW
SAY-BOW
AAACH- EEE
1,345 mps
1,385 mps
1,100 mps
1,000 meters
0.8 sec
0.8 sec
1.2 sec
1,500 meters
1.2 sec
1.2 sec
2.2 sec
2,000 meters
1.7 sec
1.6 sec
3.6 sec
2,500 meters
DODIC
Announced in fire command as:
Muzzle velocity +/- 20 meters
Hazard Classification
Time of flight in seconds at
2.2 sec
2.1 sec
5.3 sec
Cartridge weight
458g
454g
501g
Projectile weight
134g
96g
185g
Tracer burn time
>1.7 sec
>1.8 sec
>3.5 sec
Bursting radius/aiming distance

maximum range
NA
NA
5m/10 to
200 m
Maximum effective range (MER)
2,000m
2,500m
3,000m
Tracer burn range
2,000m
2,500m
2,000m
MER is the greatest distance a threat target can be accurately engaged utilizing the weapon
system.
Figure 4-20. Comparison of service ammunition for 25-mm gun
M791 APDS-T
4-45. The M791 Armor-Piercing Discarding Sabot with Tracer (APDS-T) round penetrates light-armor
vehicles, self-propelled artillery, and aerial targets such as helicopters and slow-moving, fixed-wing
aircraft (see Figure 4-21).
4-22
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
DANGER
Before firing any discarding sabot ammunition, consider the
safety of Soldiers on the ground. The discarding sabot can cause
death or injury.
The discarding sabot travels down the gun-target line within a 30degree angle on either side of the gun-target line, for 200 meters.
Figure 4-21. M791 armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer

4-46. The APDS-T round is a fixed-type, percussion, primed round. It consists of a sabot-encapsulated
projectile body crimped to a steel cartridge case. The projectile body consists of a solid tungsten alloy
penetrator, pressed-on aluminum windscreen, pressed-in tracer pellets, molded discarding-type nylon
sabot, staked aluminum base, and welded or pressed-on nylon nose cap. The projectile sabot and nose cap
are black with white markings.
4-47. Gases produced by the burning propellant will send the projectile from the gun at 1,345 meters per
second (plus or minus 20 meters per second) and ignite the tracer. Setback, centrifugal, and aerodynamic
forces cause both the sabot and nose cap to discard as soon as the round leaves the barrel. The tungsten
penetrator (core) is spin-stabilized and penetrates the target solely by KE.
4-48. The maximum effective range of the M791 APDS-T is 2,000 meters due to tracer burnout; however
the APDS-T ammunition is accurate out to 2,200. As the range increases, the APDS-T round penetration
decreases, especially when target vehicles have an added layer of armor.
M919 APFSDS-T
4-49. The APFSDS-T round penetrates light-armor vehicles, self-propelled artillery, and aerial targets,
which includes helicopters and slow-moving, fixed-wing aircraft (see Figure 4-22).
DANGER
Because of the depleted uranium (DU) penetrator, the M919 APFSDS-T
round will only be used in combat or on ranges approved for DU use. If
at any time it gets damaged, crews must follow handling and reporting
procedures in DA Message RUEADWD3453, DTG-17051ZMAY2001 and
also in the vehicular technical manuals (TM 9-2350-252-10-1 or TM
9-2350-284-10-1).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-23
Chapter 4
Figure 4-22. M919 armor-piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot, with tracer

4-50. The APFSDS-T round is a fixed-type, percussion-primed round that consists of a sabot-encapsulated
projectile crimped into a steel cartridge case. The projectile is made of slate gray, corrosion-protected,
depleted uranium. It has a screw-on steel fin with pressed-in trace pellets; a three-piece, segmented
aluminum sabot; and a snap-on plastic protective cap. The projectile sabot and protective nose cap are
black, and the slip-band nylon obturator is white. The round has a green rubber sealant between the sabot
segments, the sabot and penetrator, and the sabot and plastic cap.
4-51. This KE round is similar to the APDS-T (M791) round, but with a velocity of 1,385 meters per
second (plus or minus 20m/s). It also has greater effective range, penetration capabilities, and tracer burn
time.
M792 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE INCENDIARY WITH TRACER

4-52. The high-explosive incendiary with tracer (HEI-T) round can destroy unarmed vehicles and
helicopters, and suppress enemy ATGM positions. The M792 is also used to engage enemy squads beyond
coax range (900 meters) and out to a maximum effective range of 3,000 meters (see Figure 4-23).
Figure 4-23. M792 high-explosive incendiary with tracer

4-53. The HEI-T cartridge is a fixed-type, percussion-primed round. The one-piece projectile body is filled
with high-explosive incendiary (HEI) and crimped to a steel cartridge case. The hollowed steel projectile
has an M758 mechanical fuze, 32 grams of an HEI mix, and a pressed-in tracer. The projectile is yellow
with a red band, black markings, and a gold tip. On some rounds, the projectiles yellow color is slightly
orange near the red band.
4-54. Gases produced by the burning propellant send the projectile out of the gun at 1,100 meters per
second. On impact, the M758 fuze ignites and the HEI filler detonates (see Figure 4-24). This projects steel
fragments from the body, rotating band assembly, and incendiary filler over a 5-meter radius.
4-24
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-24. M758 high-explosive incendiary with tracer fuze

4-55. The maximum effective range for HEI-T rounds is 3,000 meters. This is based on
z
A mechanical fuze (the M758 fuze) that detonates the round at approximately 3,000 meters.
z
The fact that tracers burn out at 2,000 meters, but the gunner can observe the impact of the round
beyond this range, up to 3,000 meters.
z
The 5-meter bursting radius and rate-of-fire that allow the firer to engage both point and area
targets out to 3,000 meters, though accuracy decreases beyond 1,600 meters.
4-56. The Hazard Classification for the M758 fuze is 1.1, which is different from the round itself (see
Figure 4-25). Support personnel must verify with the ammunition supply point or holding area for the
correct markings based on their vehicles overall cargo.
Figure 4-25. M758 fuze hazard classification marker

4-57. The M792 HEI-T projectile has a specific functioning sequence; safe, setback, armed, and
detonation. Figure 4-26 shows the M758 fuze and its components in the safe mode.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-25
Chapter 4
Figure 4-26. M758 fuze in SAFE

4-58. Once the M792 round is fired, the M758 round enters the setback function. This function prepares
the fuze to arm. Figure 4-27 shows the setback function.
Figure 4-27. M758 fuze setback function

4-59. Once the setback function is complete, the fuze is capable of arming. This is designed to occur
between 10 and 150 meters, but its typical arming distance is 50m from the end of the gun tube. Figure
4-28 and Figure 4-29 detail the steps of the arming function.
4-26
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-28. M758 fuze initial arming function
Figure 4-29. M758 fuze arming sequence complete

4-60. Once the M792 has been fired and the M758 fuze completes the arming function, the round can
detonate in one of three waysdirect impact, grazing impact, or self-destruct (see Figure 4-30 through
Figure 4-32). Figure 4-33 describes the two types of impact, direct (frontal) and grazing and the respective
angle of attack for the projectile striking a threat target.
z
Direct Impact. Striking the target crushes the projectiles probe cap. This pushes the probe
rearward, which thrusts the firing pin into the detonator, which detonates the HEI mixture.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-27
Chapter 4
Figure 4-30. M758 fuze direct impact functioning

Grazing Impact. Sometimes, due to spin decay (loss of forward velocity), the projectile strikes
the target with insufficient force. Spin decay triggers the set-back spring to overcome centrifugal
force, pushing the body assembly forward, and thrusting the detonator into the firing pin.
Figure 4-31. M758 fuze grazing impact functioning

z
4-28
Self-Destruct. If the round does not hit a target, the projectile self-destructs at 3,000 meters.
Depending on their severity; however, head winds and tail winds can reduce the distance where
the round self-destructs.
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-32. M758 fuze self destruct functioning
Figure 4-33. Frontal and grazing projectile impact zones for the M792
TARGET PRACTICE AMMUNITION

4-61. For more realistic training, the training ammunition for the 25-mm gun replicates service
ammunition. Figure 4-34 outlines the characteristics of the training ammunition for the 25-mm gun.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-29
Chapter 4
Nomenclature
M910 TPDS-T
M793 TP-T
DODIC
A940
A976
Announced in fire command as:
SAY-BOW
AAACH-EEE
Muzzle velocity +/- 20 meters
1,525 mps
1,100 mps
1,000 meters
0.8 sec
1.2 sec
1,500 meters
1.2 sec
2.2 sec
2,000 meters
1.8 sec
3.5 sec
2,500 meters
2.1 sec
5.2 sec
Cartridge weight
420g
501g
Projectile weight
95g
182g
Tracer burn time
>1.8 sec
>3.5 sec
Bursting radius/aiming distance

maximum range
NA
NA
Maximum effective range
2,000m
1,600m
>2,000m
>2,000m
Hazard Classification
Time of flight in seconds at
Tracer burn range
Figure 4-34. Comparison of training ammunition for 25-mm gun
M910 TARGET PRACTICE DISCARDING SABOT WITH TRACER

4-62. The TPDS-T round simulates the flight pattern of the M791 APDS-T round. The TPDS-T round
allows units to practice sabot engagements on limited-distance ranges (see Figure 4-35). The maximum
range of the TPDS-T round is 6,404 meters.
4-63. The TPDS-T cartridge is a fixed-type, percussion-primed round. It consists of a sabot projectile
assembly crimped to a steel cartridge case. The projectile assembly includes a discardable aluminum
pusher base. It also includes a sub-projectile encapsulated with a discarding nylon sabot and polyethylene
protective cap. The sub-projectile has a steel core with an aluminum or steel windscreen and pressed-in
tracer pellets. The projectile is blue with white markings.
4-64. The TPDS-T cartridge trajectory is ballistically matched to within 1 mil of the APDS-T to a range of
2,000 meters. The tracer burns out at 2,000 meters.
Figure 4-35. M910 TPDS-T
4-30
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
M793 TARGET PRACTICE WITH TRACER

4-65. The target practice with tracer (TP-T) cartridge is a fixed-type, percussion-primed training round that
is ballistically similar to the HEI-T round out to 2,000 meters (see Figure 4-36). The projectile consists of a
hollow steel body with blue with white markings. The TP-T rounds maximum effective range is 1,600
meters because accuracy is greatly reduced beyond that range.
Figure 4-36. M793 TP-T
SAFETY INFORMATION
DANGER OF DISCARDING PROJECTILE COMPONENTS
4-66. Crew members must consider the safety of the soldiers on the ground prior to firing any
ammunition with discarding sabot projectiles. The sabot leaves the barrel at a 30 degree angle on both sides
of the gun-target line for 200 meters (see Figure 4-37).
Figure 4-37. 25 mm sabot petal danger area
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-31
Chapter 4
AMMUNITION HANDLING
4-67. There is a danger that an electric spark or radio frequency (RF) energy can cause the primer to ignite.
z
Always wear gloves (combat vehicle crewman type, MIL-G-44108) when handling ammunition.
The human body absorbs RF energy that could be transferred to the primer electrode.
z
Never attempt to clean the primer on the aft face of the cartridge by touching the primer with
any metal object or tool.
z
To clean ammunition, wipe it clean with a dry, clean, soft rag. Do not use abrasive material or
cleaning solvent. If this amount of cleaning is not sufficient, do not use the cartridge; return it to
the ammunition supply point/quality assurance specialist.
z
Personnel should ensure that the use of cellular phones and electronic devices within vicinity of
ammunition is limited. It is possible for the devices to cause an electric spark which may cause
the primer to ignite.
DUST STORMS
4-68. During dust storms, crews should consider installing a muzzle cover or tarpaulin to prevent sand and
other debris from entering the muzzle of the M242 gun. This might prevent ammunition from being lodged
inside the chamber due to debris and sand buildup.
MAINTENANCE
4-69. Vehicle crews should conduct periodic inspections of service ammunition using the appropriate
operators manual. Maintenance includes only basic tasks, such as cloth wipe downs by crews, and touchup painting performed by ammunition supply point/quality assurance specialist (ASP/QASAS) personnel.
4-70. Ammunition condition codes are single letters that classify ammunition. Each code identifies the
degree of serviceability, condition, and completeness (readiness for issue and use), as well as other actions.
See FM 4-30.13 for specific information on the condition codes of main gun ammunition.
SECTION IV MK19 MOD 3, 40-MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN

4-71. The MK19 Mod 3 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun (GMC) (MK19) is used to destroy lightly armored
vehicles, defensive positions, and dismounted threats. It is also used to suppress enemy positions and
troops in the open. The MK19 fires CE and anti-personnel rounds. This section will discuss the
characteristics of both service (combat) and training 40mm rounds specifically designed for the MK19.
4-72. The MK19 fires the following cartridges: M430/M430A1 high-explosive, dual-purpose (HEDP)
grenades, the M1001 high velocity canister cartridge (HVCC) grenade, the M385 and M918 training
practice rounds, the MK 281 Mod 0 training round, and the M922/M922A1 dummy rounds. Figure 4-38
describes the characteristics of the various 40mm rounds available for the MK19 Mod 3.
4-32
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Nomenclature
M430/M430A1
HEDP
M1001 HVCC
M385 TP
M918 TP
MK 281 Mod 0
TP
M922/M922A1
Dummy
B472
DODIC
B542
BA11
B576
B584
BA12
Type
HEDP
HVCC
TP
TP
TP
Dummy
Fuze
M549 PIBD
None
None
M550 FEA
None
None
Primary Use
Lightly armored
vehicles,
personnel
Antipersonnel
Target practice
Target practice
Target practice
Weapon
function and
Crew training
Arming
Distance
18m to 30m
NA
NA
18 to 30m
NA
NA
Filler
Composition B
107 each 2
steel flechettes
Solid inert
projectile
Flash charge
composition
Orange
marking dye
Solid inert
projectile
Casualty
Radius
5m
5m
NA
NA
NA
NA
Burst Radius
15m
15m
NA
NA
NA
NA
Muzzle Velocity
241 m/s
242 m/s
244 m/s
242 m/s
242 m/s
NA
MER
1,500m
100m
1,500m
1,500m
1,500m
NA
Max Range
2,200m
100m
2,200m
2,200m
2,200m
NA
Projectile Color
Code
Olive drab with

black markings
and gold tip
Olive drab with

brown band
with white
diamonds and
gold tip
Blue with black

markings
Blue with black

markings and
brown band
Blue with black

markings
Gold with black

markings
Hazard
Classification
None
Legend: FEA = fuze escapement assembly

PD = point detonating
HEDP = high-explosive dual-purpose
HVCC = high velocity canister cartridge
MER = maximum effective range

TP = target practice
PIBD = point initiating, base detonating
Figure 4-38. Characteristics of 40-mm grenade
WARNING
Use only prescribed ammunition. Mixing the MK19 and M203
types of ammunition could result in injury. 40mm rounds are not
interchangeable between the two weapons.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-33
Chapter 4
SERVICE AMMUNITION
M430/M430A1 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE DUAL PURPOSE
4-73. The impact-type round penetrates 2 inches of steel armor and inflicts personnel casualties in the
target area. This round uses a point initiating base detonating (PIBD) fuze (M549) and filler composition B
(marked by yellow letters). The arming distance is between 18 to 30 meters, with a kill radius of 5 meters
and a wound radius of approximately 15 meters.
4-74. Maximum effective range is 1,500 meters and maximum range is 2,200 meters. The M430/M430A1
cartridge, linked with the M16A2 links, is the standard round for the MK19 Mod 3. The rounds are packed
48 rounds to each M548 ammunition container. The color code for the rounds is olive drab with a yellow
ogive and yellow markings. Figure 4-39 shows the internal components of the M430A1.
Figure 4-39. M430A1 internal components
M1001 HIGH VELOCITY CANISTER CARTRIDGE

4-75. The M1001 HVCC is an antipersonnel and anti-materiel round for the MK19 Mod 3. This projectile
inflicts personnel causalities in the target area with ground burst effects. The M1001 cartridge is linked
with the M16A2 series of links. The rounds are packed 48 rounds to each ammunition container. The color
code for the rounds is olive drab with a brown band around the body.
4-76. The HVCC round has a standard muzzle velocity similar to the HEDP at 242 meters per second.
Projectile payload consists of approximately 107 two inch long steel flechettes, or darts, as seen in Figure
4-40.
4-34
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-40. M1001 HVCC projectile and flechettes

4-77. The functioning of the projectile and dispersion of the approximately 107 flechettes require
sufficient momentum or velocity to remain lethal at the point of impact. The maximum effective range of
100 meters ensures the terminal velocity of the subprojectiles will be sufficient to penetrate the target.
TRAINING AMMUNITION
M385 TARGET PRACTICE
4-78. The M385 round is a target practice round that contains no filler or explosive charge. It is used for
gunnery training. The markings are a blue ogive with black lettering (see Figure 4-41). The M385 round
launches an inert projectile using an M2 propellant charge. The rounds are linked using either the M16A1
or M16A2 link, depending on production model and lot number. The maximum effective range is 1,500
meters and maximum range is 2,200 meters. The rounds are packaged in a 50 round belt in a wooden box.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-35
Chapter 4
Figure 4-41. M385 TP internal components
M918 TARGET PRACTICE

4-79. The M918 round is a target practice round that contains a small flash-bang charge that identifies the
impact to the firer and observer(s). Because of this, there may be some range restrictions concerning its
use. Verify with the local range SOP prior to firing. The markings are a blue ogive with black lettering.
4-80. The M918 round launches a flash bang projectile using an M2 propellant charge. The rounds are
linked using either the M16A1 or M16A2 link, depending on production model and lot number. Maximum
effective range is 1,500 meters and maximum range is 2,200 meters. The rounds are packaged in a 50
round belt in a wooden box. See Figure 4-42 for the internal components of the M918.
Figure 4-42. M918 internal components

4-81. During FY08, DODIC BA30 will become available to the force. This ammunition belt will consist of
two each M918 rounds and one each M385 round connected using an M16A2 standard link as shown in
Figure 4-43.
4-36
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-43. BA30 2:1 Link
MK 281 MOD 0 TARGET PRACTICE

4-82. The MK 281 Mod 0 is a target practice round used for gunnery proficiency. The MK281 Mod 0
contains marking dye instead of an explosive projectile. The dye is used to show point of impact during
gunnery training. Maximum effective range is 1,500 meters and maximum range is 2,200 meters (see
Figure 4-44). The markings are a blue ogive with black lettering. The rounds are linked using either the
M16A1 or M16A2 link, depending on production model and lot number. The rounds are packaged in a 50
round belt in a wooden box.
Figure 4-44. MK 281 mod 0 target practice
M922/M922A1 DUMMY
4-83. The M922/M922A1 dummy round is totally inert and is used to check gun functioning and to train
gun crews. The rounds themselves are only issued to the unit armorer and are not available from the
ammunition supply point (ASP) or ammunition holding area (AHA).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-37
Chapter 4
4-84. The dummy cartridges are linked together using the M16A2 links (see Figure 4-45). Each MK19
Mod 3 grenade machine gun is authorized one 10 round belt (DODIC B472) for training purposes. This
belt of dummy grenades are packed in a M2A1 metal shipping container.
Figure 4-45. B472 dummy linked

4-85. Figure 4-46 shows the various rounds used in the MK19 Mod 3 including their identifying color
codes and markings.
Figure 4-46. 40mm ammunition color codes and markings
SECTION V 120-MM ABRAMS TANK AMMUNITION

4-86. The Abrams tank main armament is the M256, 120mm smoothbore cannon. It is used to destroy
armored vehicles, lightly armored vehicles, helicopters and defensive positions. It is also used to suppress
enemy positions and troops in the open. The 120mm rounds are also used to conduct wall breaching and
4-38
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
obstacle reduction. The Abrams fires KE, CE, special purpose and training rounds. This section will
discuss the characteristics of both service (combat) and training main gun rounds.
CLASSIFICATION
4-87. Conventional main gun ammunition is classified according to type and use.
z
Armor-defeating ammunition. KE ammunition (such as M829A3) is the primary round used
against tank and tank-like targets. In a secondary role, it is used against helicopters and lightly
armored vehicles.
z
Multipurpose ammunition:
CE ammunition (such as M830A1 [MPAT]/M830 high-explosive antitank [HEAT]) are the

primary round used against lightly armored targets and field fortifications. In a secondary
role it can be used against personnel and tank-like targets. When in AIR mode, M830A1 is
the primary round used against helicopters.
High-explosive obstacle reducing with tracer (HE-OR-T). The M908 is a HE, obstaclereducing round used primarily against concrete and stone obstacles. In a secondary role, it
can be used against light armor and side/rear of tanks.
z
Antipersonnel. The M1028 canister round is primarily used against massed troop formations. In a
secondary role, it may be used against technical vehicles (light commercial trucks) and to breach
non-reinforced walls and concertina wire.
z
Training:
Target practice (TP) ammunition is used for gunnery training. These rounds provide
characteristics similar to service ammunition, without the CE projectile or service
penetrator.
Dummy ammunition is used for practicing gunnery-related tasks; it has no propellant or

explosive charge.
IDENTIFICATION
4-88. Main gun ammunition can be identified by shape, the projectile color code, and markings on the
projectile. See Table 4-3 on page 4-9 for the standard marking convention. In addition to the standard
colors and markings found on the projectile, the cartridge case base (aftcap) includes additional
information about the ammunition such as nomenclature and quick reference markings.
4-89. Service rounds are black or olive drab with white or yellow lettering. The training rounds are light
blue with white lettering.
CASE BASE QUICK REFERENCE MARKING

4-90. The case base (commonly referred to as the aft cap) has specific markings that help identify each
120mm main gun tank round. On each case base the user will see the Quick Identification Marking; lot
number for the case base and seal assembly; cartridge nomenclature; cartridge lot number, and the primer
(see Figure 4-47).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-39
Chapter 4
Figure 4-47. Aft cap markings

4-91. All current M829A2, M829A3, M830A1, M1028, and M908 tactical rounds have quick
identification markings on the case base to help the loader quickly identify the types of rounds loaded in
the ammunition racks (see Figure 4-48). Refurbished M830 rounds can be further identified by the painted
black aft cap with white markings in addition to the H Quick ID marking on the case base, these are
limited quantity rounds. The M829A1 and original M830 rounds do not have quick identification
markings.
Figure 4-48. Case base quick reference markings for service ammunition
4-92. The quick identification marking system has also been applied to the training ammunition to help the
loader and crews rapidly identify the type of round prior to loading. Not all training ammunition will have
these markings as stocks on hand were not upgraded with the new marking system. In these cases, the
loader should mark his aftcaps in a similar fashion with a grease pencil to aid in the identification process.
Figure 4-49 is an example of the training ammunition marking system.
4-40
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-49. Case base quick reference markings for training ammunition
COMPONENTS OF A MAIN GUN ROUND

4-93. A complete round of main gun ammunition is usually composed of the following basic parts;
however, not all types of rounds will have every part listed (see Figure 4-50):
z
Bourrelet raised metal portions on the front and aft areas of the projectile which center it in
the tube. The bourrelet may be made of metal or a composite material.
z
Cartridge Case combustible casing that contains the propellant, case base and primer. When
the round is fired, the combustible cartridge case is consumed and the gases expand the case
base and seal assembly to provide rear obturation.
z
Case Base the rear portion of the cartridge with the primer screwed into the case base. Upon
firing, the case base and seal assembly provide rear obturation. During counter-recoil, the case
base is ejected from the gun.
z
Fuze the part of the projectile that causes it to function upon impact or at a specific time (not
currently used in KE rounds).
z
Obturator a rubber, nylon or copper ring that seals propellant gases behind the projectile
during firing.
z
Ogive the forward portion of the projectile designed to reduce air resistance and assist in
providing aerodynamic stability.
z
Primer the component that is screwed into the case base, upon firing it ignites the propellant
charge.
z
Projectile the part of the round that travels through the gun tube.
z
Propellant upon firing, the primer ignites the propellant charge, producing gas pressure that
expands the rear seal, and forces the projectile from the gun tube toward the target.
z
Subprojectile generally refers to projectiles with discarding petals, the subprojectile (or
payload as in the M1028 canister round) impacts with the target.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-41
Chapter 4
Figure 4-50. Components of a 120mm main gun round
SERVICE AMMUNITION
4-94. Armor-defeating projectiles use either KE or CE to penetrate and destroy armored targets.
4-95. Figure 4-51 lists the characteristics of the main gun service ammunition available for the M1A1 and
M1A2 SEP.
4-42
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Nomenclature
M829A1
APFSDS-T
M829A2
APFSDS-T
M829A3
APFSDS-T
M830
HEAT-MP-T
M830A1
HEAT-MP-T
M908
HE-OR-T
M1028
Canister
DODIC
C380
C792
CA26
C787
C791
CA05
CA38
Muzzle
Velocity
1,575m/s
1,675 m/s
1,555 m/s
1,140 m/s
1,410 m/s
1,410 m/s
1,410 m/s
Announced in
Fire Command
as:
SABOT or
SAY-BOW
SABOT or
SAY-BOW
SABOT or
SAY-BOW
HEAT
MPAT or
MPAT AIR
OR
(OH-ARE)
CANISTER
or CAN
Fuze *
None
None
None
PIBD
PIBD or
Proximity
(air mode)
PIBD
None
Fuze
Performance
NA
NA
NA
Armed
11-30m
50% by
~20m
Air Armed
400-1000
m, (~700 m)
Ground
armed 1160 m,
(~35m)
Armed
11-60m
(~35m)
NA
Employment
Primary
Primary
armor
defeating
Primary
armor
defeating
Primary
armor
defeating
Light armor,
buildings,
bunkers,
personnel
Light armor,
buildings,
bunkers,
personnel,
helicopters
(air mode)
Obstacle
reduction
Massed
personnel
Employment
Secondary
Helicopters
Helicopters
Helicopters
Tank and
tank-like
Tank and
tank-like
Light armor
and side/
rear of tanks
Anti-materiel
and very
light
armored
Projectile
Color Code
Black with
white letters
Black with
white letters
Black with
white letters
Black with
yellow
letters
Black with
yellow
letters
Black with
yellow
letters and
yellow steel
nose
Olive drab
with white
letters
Weight
46.2 lb
44.9 lb
49.12 lb
53.4 lb
50.1 lb
50.1 lb
50.7 lb
Hazard
Classification
Length
38.7 in
38.7 in
38.7 in
38.6 in
38.7 in
38.7 in
30.7 in
EFC
1.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Storage
Temperature
Limits
-50F to
145F
-50F to
145F
-50F to
145F
-50F to
145F
-50F to
145F
-50F to
145F
-50F to
145F
Safe-to-Fire
Temperature
Limits
-25F to
125F
-25F to
125F
-25F to
120F
-50F to
145F
-25F to
120F
-25F to
120F
-50F to
145F
Performance
Temperature
Limits
-25F to
125F
-25F to
125F
-25F to
120F
-25F to
125F
-25F to
120F
-25F to
120F
-25F to
145F
* Fuze abbreviations: PIBD=point initiating base detonating, FFI=full frontal impact switch.
EFC= Equivalent Full Charge
Figure 4-51. Tank service round technical data
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-43
Chapter 4
SAFE TEMPERATURE NOTE

It is imperative that crewmembers pay attention to the difference
between storage temperature limits and the safe to fire limits. The
rounds can be stored from -50 F to 145 F. However, prior to firing, many
round types must be allowed to return to the safe to fire temperature
limits of -25 F to 125 F. IAW the tank operators manual, when ammunition
is stored in an open field environment, it must be covered (such as with a
tarpaulin) to reduce high temperatures within the ammunition containers.
ARMOR DEFEATING AMMUNITION

M829 A1/A2/A3 APFSDS-T
4-96. Sabot rounds are the primary armor-defeating round for the 120-mm main gun and the most accurate
of all tank ammunition. Sabot rounds use KE (weight and speed of the penetrator) to defeat the target (see
Figure 4-52).
Figure 4-52. Kinetic energy formula

4-97. The effectiveness of sabot rounds depends on the density of the target surface; therefore, consider
target armor thickness when selecting the appropriate armor-defeating round for a specific target. Use
sabot ammunition when faced with penetrating the thickest part of the target. Also, when possible,
maneuver your element to engage armored targets from the flank or rear where the armor is less dense.
4-98. Three types of 120-mm sabot rounds currently available for the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tanks are
M829A3 APFSDS-T, M829A2 APFSDS-T, and M829A1 APFSDS-T (see Figure 4-53 and Figure 4-54).
4-44
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-53. M829A3 APFSDS-T (120mm)
WARNINGS
In combat emergency conditions, when the lives of the crew are
in immediate jeopardy, the M829A3 may be fired at temperatures
as high as 135F although, there is a low, but real risk of gun tube
failure. If the M829A3s are fired at temperatures between 120F
and 135F, crews must examine the gun tube for unusual wear or
other abnormalities after firing 6 to 8 rounds, and must have
direct support maintenance personnel inspect the gun tube if 9 to
18 rounds are fired. Do NOT fire the M829A3 over 135F.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-45
Chapter 4
Figure 4-54. M829A1/M829A2 APFSDS-T (120mm)
MULTIPURPOSE AMMUNITION
M830 HEAT-MP-T
4-99. The HEAT round is used primarily against lightly armored targets and field fortifications (see Figure
4-55). In its secondary role it is used against personnel and armored vehicles. Each projectile consists of a
steel body with a stand off spike. Inside the projectile is a cone copper liner and wave shaper which forms
the explosives into a shaped charge for deeper penetration of the target. Finally, a crush switch in the nose
and a switch on the shoulder of the projectile comprise the Full Frontal Impact Switch Assembly. When
closed, any of these switches can activate the detonation sequencing.
Figure 4-55. M830 HEAT-MP-T (120mm)
4-46
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
4-100. Upon impact, one of the projectile switches is closed. The fuze then detonates the HE shaped
charge, which collapses the cone assembly, creating a high-velocity focused shock wave and a jet of metal
particles that penetrate the target (see Figure 4-56). This round depends on CE and not striking velocity,
therefore its ability to penetrate armor is as effective at 4,000 meters as it is at 200 meters.
Figure 4-56. Chemical energy ammunition effects

4-101. In addition to the M830 HEAT-MP-T (see Figure 4-55 on previous page), there are two other
HEAT rounds available, the M830A1 MPAT and M908 HE-OR-T (see Figure 4-57).
M830A1 HEAT-MP-T (MPAT)

4-102. The 120-mm M830A1 MPAT round is a fin-stabilized round that contains a HE warhead equipped
with a selectable proximity switch and fuze that allows it to be fired in either AIR or GROUND mode. Its
primary targets are light-armored ground targets, which are engaged with the fuze set to GROUND mode,
allowing the round to function either when it strikes a target with a direct or glancing blow. It may also be
used against bunkers, buildings, the flank and rear of enemy tanks, and enemy personnel.
4-103. With the switch set to AIR mode, this round can be used in a self-defense role against enemy
helicopters. The round will function either when it strikes a target or approaches the vicinity of a target that
is detected by the sensor; however, since the sensor is not active until 400 meters at the earliest, it will not
function in AIR mode at shorter ranges, but will detonate when striking a target.
4-104. The MPAT round case base will be marked as MPAT or MPAT-1. The primary difference
between the two rounds is a newer, stronger spring disk. The MPAT-1 spring disc is designed to prevent
separation of the case base from the combustible cartridge case when handling the round.
M908 HE-OR-T
4-105. The M908 is a HE-OR-T (see Figure 4-57). It is a full-service, 120-mm round fired from the
M256 cannon system. The M908 is an M830A1 round that has been reconfigured as follows:
z
A steel nose cap painted yellow replaces the proximity sensor.
z
Markings on the projectile or case base that identify the round as OR M908 or XM908.
4-106. The weight of the round and center of gravity are identical to the M830A1 MPAT round. The
M908 will be used primarily to reduce obstacles into rubble small enough to be cleared by either unit
organic equipment or external support, or to destroy concrete bridge pylons in order to create an obstacle
that would greatly restrict or impede enemy movement.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-47
Chapter 4
Figure 4-57. M830A1 HEAT-MP-T and M908 HE-OR-T
WARNING
The nose of the M830A1 contains the air/ground sensor. This
sensor can be damaged if it is struck on hard surfaces inside the
turret (turret roof, breech, etc.) with moderate force. Loaders
must take precaution to avoid striking the nose during the
loading process.
ANTIPERSONNEL AMMUNITION
M1028 Canister
4-107. The purpose of the M1028 round is to provide a short-range antipersonnel capability for the
Abrams tank. The projectile consists of a two-piece, forward and aft aluminum body that houses the
payload and prevents the deployment of the payload until shot exit. The aft body (commonly called the
pot) provides strength and stability for the forward body (see Figure 4-58). The forward body houses
approximately 1097 3/8" tungsten balls and is scored (grooved) so that upon muzzle exit, the sides (4
petals) peel away and permit the payload to disperse down range.
4-108. This round is most effective at 200 to 500 meters against a standard 10 man infantry squad in a
wedge formation. For enemy infantry squads less than 100 meters and greater than 500 meters crews
should use coax to engage the targets. At ranges less than 100 meters, the projectiles have not had enough
time to deploy adequately and the coax is more effective. At ranges beyond 500 meters, the lethality of the
4-48
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
canister is severely reduced due to loss of projectile density and velocity. The coax is much more effective
and efficient at ranges greater than 500 meters.
4-109. Since this is designed as a short range round, the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP fire control systems have
been modified with a default range of 150 meters as well as the required ballistic solutions. Units acquiring
the M1028 may or may not have the required updates to the tank fire control system to accurately fire the
canister round. The fire control computers for all 120-mm tanks are scheduled to be upgraded with M1028
ballistic solutions. If M1028 rounds are provided before tanks are upgraded, crews should index MPAT
and manually enter a 1,200 meter ballistic solution. This provides an equivalent super elevation for the
M1028 of about 340 meters.
4-110. For additional information on the M1028 canister round, refer to ST 3-20.12-7, M1028 120-mm
Canister (available on the Reimer Digital Library, Command Publications, STs).
4-111. See Table 4-7 for information on the effects of the M1028 canister round against threat targets at
specific ranges. See Figure 4-59 for the lethal danger zone of the M1028 canister round.
Note. The M1028 creates a higher wear pattern around the bore evacuator holes compared to
other 120-mm rounds. When tubes that have fired the M1028 are borescoped, maintenance
teams should be instructed to pay particular attention to this area.
Figure 4-58. M1028 canister
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-49
Chapter 4
Table 4-7. M1028 canister effects on various targets

Target Type
Ranges
Troops
200-500 meters
Cinderblock walls
<100 meters
Cinderblock walls
100-200 meters
Adobe wall
<75 meters
Double reinforced concrete

walls
50-70 meters
3X concertina wire
50-60 meters
Small commercial vehicles
<200 meters
Rounds
Effects
1 Round per squad

2 Rounds per platoon
1 Round
1 Round
2 Round
1 Round
2 Rounds
3 Rounds
~40 %
incapacitation
1 round
1 round
Rubble
Some perforation
Rubble wall
Penetration
Perforation
Man size hole for
entry, remaining
rebar will need to
be removed
Single person
passageway
Vehicle damage
and personnel
incapacitation
Notes 1. Troops 5 meters apart in wedge formation.

2. When firing the canister round against hard targets, unprotected personnel must be at
least 200 meters from the target area to avoid danger from debris.
Figure 4-59. M1028 canister lethal danger zone (not to scale)
4-50
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition

4-112. Target practice ammunition is used during gunnery training in place of service ammunition. The
fire control system on the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tanks has the ballistics data for each training round. In the
fire command, target practice rounds are announced as the round they represent. Their color code is light
blue with white letters.
4-113. The training rounds available for the M256 cannon are the M865 Target Practice Cone Stabilized
Discarding Sabot-Tracer (TPCSDS-T), M831A1, M831A1-TP-T, and M1002 target practice multipurposetracer (TPMP-T). Additionally, the M1028 canister round has been approved to be used on training ranges,
(see Figure 4-51 on page 4-43).
4-114. Figure 4-60 contains the characteristics of the 120mm training main gun ammunition.
Nomenclature
M865 TPCSDS-T
M831A1 HEAT-TP-T
M1002 TPMP-T
DODIC
C785
C784
CA31
Muzzle Velocity
1,700 m/s
1,140 m/s
1,375 m/s
Announced in Fire
Command as:
SABOT
HEAT
MPAT or
MPAT-AIR
Fuze
None
None
Simulated Air/Ground
switch
Projectile Color
Code
Light blue with white

letters

letters

letters
Hazard
Classification
Weight
37.8 lbs
51.4 lbs
46.0 lbs
Length
34.7
38.6
38.7
Tracer Color
Yellow/Gold
Red
Red/Orange
EFC
1.0
1.0
o
1.0
o
Storage
Temperature Limits
-50 F to 145 F
-50 F to 145 F
-50oF to 145oF
Safe-to-Fire
Temperature Limits
-50oF to 145oF
-50oF to 145oF
-25oF to 145oF
Performance
Temperature Limits
-25oF to 125oF
-25oF to 125oF
-45oF to 145oF
Figure 4-60. 120 mm target practice round technical data
M865 TPCSDS-T
4-115. The purpose of the M865 TPCSDS-T is to simulate the M829 family service sabot round for
gunnery training (see Figure 4-61). This round has similar physical characteristics (weight, length, center
of gravity, external appearance) as the original M829 round. The M829A1/A2/A3 service rounds are much
longer and heavier than that of the M865.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-51
Chapter 4
Figure 4-61. M865 TPCSDS-T

Note. In the M1A2 SEP with 4.0 software, the current or T-S1 M865 is labeled M865A3. This
error will be corrected in future software upgrades.
M831A1 HEAT-TP-T
4-116. The purpose of the M831A1 M831A1-TP-T is to simulate the M830 service M831A1-TP-T for
gunnery training. The M831A1 is cone stabilized and provides ballistic performance to meet its training
requirement out to approximately 2,000 meters (see Figure 4-62).
Note. All U.S. and German TP-T training rounds have arrows stamped on the spike. All TP-T
training rounds that do not have arrows stamped on the spike should be treated as service HEAT
rounds.
Figure 4-62. M831A1 HEAT-TP-T
4-52
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
M1002 TPMP-T
4-117. The purpose of the M1002 TPMP-T cartridge is to serve as a ground-mode-only training round for
the 120-mm, high-explosive, antitank multipurpose tracer (HEAT-MP-T), M830A1 tactical cartridge. This
round has essentially the same physical characteristics (weight, length, center-of-gravity, external
appearance) as the M830A1. Additionally, the nose is a plastic ring which simulates the AIR/GROUND
proximity switch found on the M830A. This design allows crew members to select the ground or air mode
of operation by turning the plastic ring (see Figure 4-63).
Figure 4-63. M1002 TPMP-T
SAFETY INFORMATION
DANGER
M831A1, M865, and M1002 rounds will not be stored in the hull
ammunition compartment due to the vulnerability of the M14
propellant. Crews will load only enough training ammunition in
the bustle compartments to achieve immediate training
objectives. No training ammunition with M14 propellant should be
stored in vehicles that are in a hostile environment.
INTEROPERABILITY OF 120MM AMMUNITION

4-118. As part of its design, the M1A1 and M1A2 series of vehicles are capable of firing NATO standard
combustible cartridge case 120mm tank ammunition. Within the European Union, the Leopard 2A4 and
Leopard 2A5 are used in 10 countries, capable of using the same ammunition.
4-119. TM 9-2350-264-10-2 and TM 9-2350- 388-10-2, Chapter 5, page 5-8 lists all ammunition that can
be fired from the M256 cannon, both US Army and NATO 120mm cartridges.
4-120. All ammunition listed in the firing table (FT) 120-D-2 can be fired from the M256 cannon.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-53
Chapter 4
4-121. Ammunition must still be inspected prior to use, including verifying there are no restrictions or
suspensions for the ammunition by type or lot number according to TB 9-1300-385. This includes German
ammunition.
4-122. The current German 120mm model rounds that can be fired from the M256 Cannon are shown in
Table 4-8.
Table 4-8.120mm German models for the M256 Cannon
Model Number
Type
Purpose
DM 12 HEAT-MP-T
High Explosive, Anti-Tank, Multi-Purpose with

Tracer
DM 12A1 HEAT-MPT
High Explosive, Anti-Tank, Multi-Purpose with

Tracer
DM 13 APFSDS-T
Armor Piercing, Fin Stabilized, Discarding

Sabot with Tracer
Sabot with Tracer
Sabot with Tracer
Sabot with Tracer
Sabot with Tracer
Target Practice with Tracer
Target Practice, Fin Stabilized, Discarding
Sabot with Tracer
Target Practice, Cone Stabilized, Discarding
Sabot with Tracer
Light Armored
Vehicles, Secondary
Armor Defeating
Light Armored
Vehicles, Secondary
Armor Defeating
Armor Defeating
DM 23 APFSDS-T
DM 33 APFSDS-T
DM 43 APFSDS-T
DM 43A1 APFSDS-T
DM 18 TP-T
DM 28 TPFSDS-T
DM 38 TPCSDS-T
Armor Defeating
Armor Defeating
Armor Defeating
Armor Defeating
Target Practice (HEAT)
Target Practice (Sabot)
Target Practice (Sabot)
Note. German Model rounds ending with a 2 are Service HEAT, ending with a 3 are Service
Sabot, and ending with an 8 are Training Rounds. 18 are Training HEAT, 28 are Fin Stabilized
Sabot, and 38 are Cone Stabilized Sabot.
DANGER OF DISCARDING PROJECTILE COMPONENTS

4-123. All rounds that have discarding sabots, such as service KE rounds, M865, MPAT, HE-OR-T, and
canister roundswill not be fired over friendly troops unless those troops are protected by adequate cover
defined in DA Pamphlet 385-63. Troops may be struck by the discarded components. This information
should be included in the daily safety briefing for firing tank crews while conducting gunnery.
z
Discarding Sabot Rounds. The danger area for rounds that have discarding sabots, such as
service KE rounds, M865, MPAT, and HE-OR-T extends to 1,000 meters from the gun and 70
meters to either side of the gun-target line (see Figure 4-64).
4-54
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-64. Discarding Sabot danger area

z
M1028 Canister Round. The danger area for the discarding components of the canister round
is similar to those of any KE sabot round as shown in Figure 4-64.
4-124. Unit Master Gunners must refer to DA Pamphlet 385-63 for accurate surface danger zone
dimensions for ammunition firing on any range.
AMMUNITION HANDLING
4-125. The 120-mm ammunition contains electric primers. There is a danger that an electric spark or RF
energy can cause the primer to ignite. Care should be taken not to touch the primer, since energy is
transferred if the center electrode of the primer is being touched. When handling or operating in the
vicinity of unpackaged ammunition, observe the following precautions:
z
Always wear gloves (combat vehicle crewman type, MIL-G-44108) when handling main gun
ammunition. The human body absorbs RF energy that could be transferred to the primer
electrode.
z
Never attempt to clean the primer or the primer electrode on the aft face of the cartridge by
touching the primer or electrode with any object or tool.
z
the ASP/QASAS (ammunition surveillance).
z
Personnel should not carry any unauthorized wireless/electronic devices when performing
uploading, downloading and prepare to fire operations when involving tank ammunition. It is
possible for the devices to cause an electric spark which may cause the primer to ignite.
z
Maintain a safe separation distance (SSD) of at least 30 meters between any source capable of
transmitting UHF/FM signals during operations involving all types of unpackaged tank
ammunition outside of the turret. This distance will avoid risk of initiating the primer while
ammunition is being handled
Note. Crews must periodically inspect their ammunition stowage compartments to maintain a
dry condition. Use desiccant bags to prevent excessive moisture within these compartments.
Never store ammunition in a wet compartment.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-55
Chapter 4
DUST STORMS
4-126. During dust storms, crews must install the main gun muzzle cover to prevent sand and other debris
from entering the M256 gun. Debris which enters the system could prevent main gun ammunition from
properly chambering. Also, during live fire, obstructions within the gun tube may contribute to a major
malfunction of the system, cause a rupture or damage the muzzle end of the gun tube.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICEABILITY

4-127. Tank crews must conduct periodic inspections of all ammunition using the appropriate tank
operators manual. These periodic inspections include a complete list of items to be inspected prior to
up/down loading of main gun ammunition or when removing an unfired round from the breech.
Maintenance includes only basic tasks, such as cloth wipe downs by crews, and touch-up painting
performed by ASP/QASAS personnel.
4-128. Table 5-2 of TM 9-2350-264-10-2, Chapter 5 and TM 9-2350-388-10-2, Chapter 5 contains a
complete inspection list of items to be inspected prior to handling and firing.
4-129. If units suspect that any 120-mm tank ammunition has been damaged and might not chamber
properly, request a man-portable chamber gage from the QASAS (see Figure 4-65). This gage can be used
to determine if rounds will fit inside the gun chamber.
Figure 4-65. Man-Portable Chamber Gage, NSN 5220-01-477-5455

4-130. During routine maintenance, care should be given to properly classify the ammunition by the
appropriate condition code. Ammunition condition codes are single letters that classify ammunition. Each
code identifies the degree of serviceability, condition, and completeness (readiness for issue and use), as
well as other actions. See FM 4-30.13 for specific information on the condition codes of main gun
ammunition (see Table 4-9).
4-56
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Table 4-9. Main gun ammunition codes
TANK AMMUNITION STOWAGE PLAN

4-131. The ammunition stowage plan for all tanks within the HBCT is part of the unit standing operating
procedures (SOP). The stowage plan should include the location of all ammunition authorized for the basic
load, by type and number of rounds. During darkness, when lights inside the turret will reduce the crews
night vision or give away the tanks position, a standardized stowage plan will help the loader rapidly
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-57
Chapter 4
locate the ammunition announced in the initial fire command. The stowage plan also helps the crew keep
track of the number of rounds (by type) that have been fired.
4-132. See Appendix A, page A-134 and page A-135 for further information regarding the layout of the
ammunition stowage plan for 16/18 round racks and the 17 round racks.
SAFETY NOTICE
CREW MEMBERS MUST ENSURE THAT ONLY THE KINETIC
ENERGY OR CANISTER ROUNDS ARE STOWED IN THE UPPER
AND OUTER TUBES IN THE AMMUNITION RACKS. STOWAGE OF
CHEMICAL ENERGY ROUNDS IN THESE TUBES CAN RESULT IN
INJURY OR DEATH IF THE ROUNDS EXPLODE IN THE RACK.
SECTION VI MORTAR AMMUNITION

4-133. Mortars are suppressive indirect fire weapons. They are employed to neutralize or destroy area or
point targets, screen large areas with smoke, and provide illumination or coordinated highexplosive/illumination. The mortar platoons mission is to provide close and immediate indirect fire
support for maneuver battalions and companies.
4-134. A complete round of mortar ammunition contains all of the components needed to get the round
out of the tube and to burst at the desired place and time. All 120-mm mortar cartridges, except training
cartridges, are packaged as a complete round and have three major componentsa fuze, body, and tail fin
with propulsion system assembly. This section discusses the proper care and handling, color codes, and
field storage of ammunition.
CLASSIFICATION
4-135. Ammunition is classified according to use. HE is used against personnel (in the open or in
bunkers), light vehicles, and light bunkers. White phosphorus (WP) is used for screening and spotting.
Illumination is used for battlefield illumination and signaling. Full range training rounds are used for
gunnery related training.
AUTHORIZED CARTRIDGES
4-136. There are four types of ammunition authorized for firing from the M121 mortar carrierHE,
smoke, ILLUM, and training. M929 smoke, M930 Illumination, M934 HE, and M933 HE cartridges are
authorized to be fired from the M121 carrier-mounted 120-mm mortar in a combat environment. For
training purposes, the M931 full range training round (FRTR) may be fired from the M121 carrier-mounted
120-mm mortar.
4-137. When firing the 900 series mortar ammunition, the bursting radius is 75 meters. A minimum range
of 200 meters at charge 0 (charge may vary in firing table and whiz wheel) applies to all rounds and fuzes.
4-138. Figure 4-66 contains a list of the authorized mortar ammunition.
4-58
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Nomenclature
M933/M933A1
HE
M934/M934A1
HE
M929
Smoke (WP)
M930/M983
Illuminating
M931
FRTR
DODIC
C623/CA44
C379/CA04
C624/CA03
C625/CA07
CA09
Type
HE
HE
Smoke, WP
Illuminating
TP
Fuze
Point
Detonating
(PD)
M745/M783
Multi-Option
(MO)
M734/M734A
1
PD/ Multioption
M734A1
Mechanical
Time Super
Quick
(MTSQ) M776
PD
M781
Body Material
HF-1
HF-1
F&R carbon
steel
Wrought
carbon steel
HR-1 Steel
Filler
Comp B
6.59 lbs
Comp B
6.59 lbs
WP felt
wedges
5.28 lbs
VL Candle/IR
Candle
Center Vent
Tube
Ignition
Cartridge
M981
M981/M1020
M981/M1020
M981/M1020
M1020
Propellant
Charge
M230
M230/M234
M230/M234
M230/M234
M233
Weight
31.2 lbs
31.2 lbs
31.2 lbs
31.2 lbs
31.2 lbs
Length
27.99 in
27.99 in
27.85 in
27.85 in
27.99 in
Projectile
Color Code
Olive drab
with yellow
markings
Olive drab
with yellow
markings
Light green
with yellow
band and light
red markings
White with
black
markings
Light blue
with white
markings
Range of
effect
7,200 meters
7,200 meters
Weather
depending
60 seconds
7,200 meters
Hazard
Classification
Figure 4-66. 120-mm mortar round technical data
WARNING
Only fire the authorized cartridges from the M121 mortar carrier.
Firing the M57, M68, or M91 120-mm cartridges from the M121
carrier-mounted mortar may cause bodily injury and hearing loss.
These cartridges are not authorized to be fired from the carrier.
SERVICE AMMUNITION
4-139. The M933A1 and the M934 HE mortar rounds are used against enemy personnel and light
materiel targets. See Figure 4-67 and Figure 4-68 for the description of the rounds.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-59
Chapter 4
Figure 4-67. M933A1 HE, with fuze, PD: M783 (120 mm)
Figure 4-68. M934 HE, with fuze, multi-optional: M734A1 (120 mm)
4-140. The M929 WP round is used for screening and marking a target area. See Figure 4-69 for the
description of the round.
4-60
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-69. M929 WP, with fuze, multi-optional: M734A1 (120 mm)
4-141. The M930 and the M983 Illumination rounds are used for battlefield illumination and signaling. See
Figure 4-70 and Figure 4-71 for the description of the rounds.
Figure 4-70. M930 IL, with fuze, super-quick: M776 (120 mm)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-61
Chapter 4
Figure 4-71. M983 IL, with fuze, super-quick: M776 (120 mm)

4-142. The M931 FRTR cartridge consists of a PD (practice) fuze, a hollow projectile body with vent
tube and base plug, a fin assembly, an obturating fuze ring, four propellant increments, and an ignition
cartridge (see Figure 4-72. The cartridge is similar in appearance to the M933 and M934 HE cartridges.
The cartridge is also ballistically similar to the HE cartridges and produces a similar signature (flash and/or
smoke and audible sound) upon impact.
Figure 4-72. M931 FRTR, with fuze, PD: M781 (120 mm)
4-62
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
FUZES
4-143. The fuzes used with the 120-mm mortar founds are described in the following paragraphs. The
settings allow the mortar round to detonate at a predetermined point, either at proximity to the target, near
the surface, on impact or on a .05 second delay on impact.
M776 MTSQ FUZE

z
z
z
Functions: Air burst or impact.

Settings: Six to 52 seconds.
Remarks: The fuze has a mechanical arming and timing device, expulsion charge, and safety
wire or pin (see Figure 4-73).
Figure 4-73. M776 MTSQ fuze

4-144. The setting procedures for the M776 MTSQ fuze are
z
Rotate the head of the fuze to the left (counterclockwise) until the inverted triangle or index line
is aligned with the correct line and number of seconds of the time scale.
z
Use the fuze setter to rotate the head of the fuze.
z
See the firing table for the correct time setting.
z
Remove the fuze safety pin or wire before firing.
z
To reset the M776 MTSQ fuze, rotate the head of the fuze counterclockwise until the safe line
(S or inverted triangle of the time scale) is aligned with the index line of the fuze body. Replace
the safety wire (see Figure 4-74).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-63
Chapter 4
Figure 4-74. M776 MTSQ fuze
M935 PD FUZE
z
z
z
Functions: Impact.
Settings: Super quick (SQ) or 0.05-second delay action.
Remarks: The fuze has a safety wire (see Figure 4-75).
Figure 4-75. M935 PD fuze

4-145. The setting procedures for the M935 PD fuze are
z
Super quick setting:
These fuzes are shipped preset to function super quickly on impact.
Verify the setting before firing. The selector slot should be aligned with the SQ mark.
z
Delay setting:
Turn the selector slot in a clockwise direction until the slot is aligned with the delay (DLY)
mark.
Use a coin or a flat-tip screwdriver to change the settings.

z
To reset the M935 fuze, align the selector slot with the SQ mark (see Figure 4-76).
4-64
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-76. Setting the M935 PD fuze
M734/M734A1 MULTIOPTION FUZE

z
z
z
Functions: Proximity or impact.

Settings: Proximity (PRX), near-surface burst (NSB), impact (IMP), or delay (DLY).
Remarks: The fuze can be set by hand (see Figure 4-77).
Figure 4-77. M734 multioption fuze

4-146. The fuze settings for the M734 and M734A1 fuze are
z
The fuze can be set by hand by rotating the fuze head clockwise until the correct marking (PRX,
NSB, IMP, or DLY) is over the index line.
PRXProximity. The fuze is set to PRX. Burst height is 3 to 13 feet (1 to 4 meters).
NSBNear-surface burst (nonjamming). Burst height is 0 to 3 feet (0 to 1 meter).
IMPImpact (super quick).
DLYDelay (0.050 seconds).

z
To reset the M734 Multi-option fuze rotate the fuze head counterclockwise until the PRX
marking is over the index line (see Figure 4-78).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-65
Chapter 4
Figure 4-78. Setting the M734 multi-option fuze
M745 PD FUZE
z
z
z
z
Functions: Impact.
Settings: None.
Remarks: The fuze functions on impact with super quick action only. Rotation of the fuze head
does not alter the function mode.
No setting is required. The fuze functions on impact with super quick action only. Disregard the
markings (PRX, NSB, IMP, and DLY) on the fuze head (see Figure 4-79).
Figure 4-79. M745 PD fuze
4-66
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
MORTAR SAFETY INFORMATION

AMMUNITION CARE AND HANDLING
4-147. The key to proper ammunition functioning is protection. Rounds prepared but not fired should be
returned to their containers, fuse end first. Safety is always a matter of concern for all personnel and
requires special attention where ammunition is concerned. Supervision is criticalimproper care and
handling can cause serious accidentsas well as inaccurate fire. Some of the principles of proper
ammunition handling are
z
Never tumble, drag, throw, or drop individual cartridges or boxes of cartridges.
z
Do not allow smoking, open flames, or other fire hazards around ammunition storage areas.
z
Inspect each cartridge before it is loaded for firing. Dirty ammunition can damage the weapon or
affect the accuracy of the round.
z
Keep the ammunition dry and cool.
z
Never make unauthorized alterations or mix components of one lot with another.
z
Each projectile must be inspected to ensure that there is no leakage of the contents and that the
projectile is correctly assembled.
4-148. Personnel should ensure that the use of cellular phones and electronic devices within vicinity of
ammunition is limited. It is possible for the devices to cause an electric spark which may cause the primer
to ignite.
4-149. Store WP-loaded cartridges at temperatures below 111.4 degrees Fahrenheit (44.1 degrees
centigrade) to prevent melting of the WP filler. If this is not possible, WP-loaded cartridges must be stored
fuze-end up so that WP will resolidify with the void space in the nose end of the cartridge (after
temperature returns below 111.4 degrees Fahrenheit [44.1 degrees centigrade]). Failure to observe this
precaution could result in rounds with erratic flight.
SEGREGATION OF AMMUNITION LOTS

4-150. Different lots of propellant burn at different rates and give slightly different effects in the target
area; therefore, the registration corrections derived from one lot do not always apply to another.
Ammunition MUST be segregated by lot and weight zone. In the field storage area, on vehicles, or in a
temporary storage area, ammunition lots should be roped off with communications wire or twine and
conspicuously marked with a cardboard sign or other marker.
BURNING OF UNUSED PROPELLANT CHARGES

4-151. Mortar increments and propelling charges are highly flammable, consequently they must be
handled with extreme care to prevent exposure to heat, flame, or any spark-producing source, such as the
hot residue from burning increments or propelling charges that float downward after a cartridge leaves the
cannon. Like other types of ammunition, increments and propelling charges must be kept cool and dry.
Storing these items inside metal ammunition boxes until needed is an effective way to prevent premature
combustion.
4-152. Unused charges must not be saved, but should be removed to a storage area until they can be
burned or otherwise disposed of in accordance with local range or installation regulations or SOP. Burning
increments create a large flash and lots of smoke. In a tactical environment, the platoon leader must ensure
that burning increments do not compromise camouflage and concealment.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-67
Chapter 4
OVERHEAD CLEARANCE
4-153. If obstructions are found at any point in the full range of traverse or elevation, the mortar is not
safe to fire. In a combat situation, however, it may be necessary to fire the mortar from that position. If this
is the situation, traverse and/or elevate the mortar until it clears the obstruction and level the sight by using
the elevation micrometer knob. Record the deflection and elevation where the mortar clears the obstruction
and report this information to the fire direction center (FDC).
SECTION VII SMOKE GRENADES

4-154. This section discusses the characteristics of vehicle employed smoke grenades. Smoke grenades
are primarily utilized to provide concealment for combat vehicles and personnel on the ground. They can
also be used to provide signaling for events and other follow on elements.
4-155. There are two types of vehicle employed smoke grenade launchers, the M250 and the M257. The
M250 smoke grenade launcher contains six smoke grenades in each launcher that when fired can cover a
110-degree arc in front of the turret. The M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher contains eight smoke grenades
in each launcher set that when fired can cover an arc of 104-degrees in front of the turret.
4-156. The M257 smoke grenade launchers are installed on several vehicles and are configured in
different arrays. The dispersion pattern for this launcher is similar for all launcher arrays; however,
additional salvos may not be available. The patterns shown in Figure 4-80 and Figure 4-81 display the most
common configuration for the smoke grenade launchers. Additional launchers placed below or adjacent
will cover the same dispersion area.
DANGER
The hatches should be closed when firing the smoke grenade
launchers to prevent red phosphorus being blown in on the crew,
as red phosphorus can cause serious burns.
All personnel outside the vehicle must stay at least 150 meters
from the vehicle during firing.
4-68
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-80. Salvo pattern for the M250 smoke grenade launcher system
Figure 4-81. Salvo pattern for the M257 smoke grenade launcher system
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-69
Chapter 4
4-157. L8A1 and L8A3 red phosphorus screening smoke grenades are identified by the markings at the
base of the casing (see Figure 4-82). The grenade is propelled from the discharger by pressure build-up in
the metal base when electrical current at the electrical firing clip ignites the squib-type electric fuze and
propellant charge. The propellant charge simultaneously ignites the delay composition within the delay
holder. During flight, the delay composition burns through and ignites the black powder bursting charge.
The bursting charge ignites the red phosphorus and butyl rubber composition and bursts the rubber body,
dispensing the burning red phosphorus and butyl rubber pellets to produce a smoke cloud.
Figure 4-82. L8A1 and L8A3 smoke grenade

4-158. The M76 infrared (IR) screening smoke grenade is identified by the markings at the base of the
casing (see Figure 4-83). This grenade contains brass powder fill, which is used for screening in a tactical
environment. The grenade is propelled from the discharger when an electrical current at the firing contact
activates the electrical match. The electrical match ignites the propellant, which both launches the grenade
and ignites the pyrotechnic time-delay detonator. Launch acceleration causes the setback lock to displace
aft, out of engagement with the safe and arm slider/bore rider. When the slider/bore rider clears the launch
tube, it moves into the armed position, which aligns the transfer lead with the time-delay detonator and the
booster lead. When the time-delay detonator ignites the transfer lead, booster lead, and central burster, the
grenade bursts and creates an IR obscuring cloud.
4-70
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-83. M76 and M82 smoke grenades

4-159. The M82 smoke grenade is identified by the markings at the base of the casing (see Figure 4-84).
The M82 smoke grenade contains titanium dioxide fill which provides visible smoke for use during
training. The M82 is an electronically initiated, propellant-launched grenade that functions to disseminate a
screening cloud 30 meters forward of the firing vehicle. The grenades plastic body houses the launch
system, the safe and arming mechanism, the explosive booster and burster, and the smoke composition.
The M82 is designed to simulate the L8A3 and M76 smoke grenade and can be used during gunnery or
force-on-force training.
4-160. Each grenade has a specific functioning area once it is discharged from the launcher. Figure 4-84
illustrates the grenade functioning area based on the respective vehicle launcher array. Although each
grenade is designed to function at 30m from the launcher, each pyrotechnic requires an additional eight
meters to fully ignite and provide screening (IAW DA Pamphlet 385-63). The illustration below represents
the hazard dimensions for all platforms launching the L8 series, M76, or M82 smoke grenades from their
vehicle. It shows the worst case distances as crews may have multiple grenade types prepared:
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-71
Chapter 4
Figure 4-84. Smoke grenade composite hazard area
SECTION VIII MISSILES

4-161. The following section will deal primarily with the missile category of weapons: the TOW family
of missiles for the Bradley Fighting Vehicle and the Javelin missile.
TOW MISSILE AMMUNITION

4-162. The following sub-section contains general descriptions of the TOW missiles and their shipping
containers. The data included covers weights, dimensions, identification markings, and differences among
models.
4-163. The TOW missile comes in four configurations with numerous types. These types mainly consist
of minor modification work orders (MWO) that are transparent to the operator and are continually added to
the missiles in inventory. All configurations use the same basic airframe, aerodynamic control system,
command-link wire, and missile electronics designs. Future TOW missile systems will only be guided by
RF and will not be wire guided.
4-164. The TOW missile is a solid propellant, command-guided, surface-attack, guided missile system
that can destroy tanks, other armored vehicles and helicopters. It can also destroy fortified bunkers, gun
emplacements and other protected positions.
4-165. It is tube-launched, optically tracked, and wire command-link guided. The missile is similar to a
conventional round of ammunition with respect to handling, storage, and loading characteristics. Although
the missile consists of three major sections, it is issued and handled as a complete round of ammunition.
The three major sections of the missile are warhead, center, and aft section. The center section contains the
electronic and flight motor sections, respectively. Figure 4-85 through Figure 4-87 show the sections of the
TOW-2A and TOW-2B missiles.
4-72
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-85. TOW missile sections, TOW-2A models with extended probe
Figure 4-86. TOW 2B missile sections, no extended probe
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-73
Chapter 4
Figure 4-87. TOW-BB sections
LAUNCH CONTAINERS
4-166. The launch container is a cylindrical housing constructed of rugged fiberglass, laminated with
epoxy resin. An electrical connector with associated wiring harness (umbilical cord) is built into the launch
container to provide electrical connections between the missile and the launcher. The container also houses
desiccant in the front to keep the missile dry. A humidity indicator is attached to the aft seal to provide
positive verification that the missile remains dry. The launch container provides protection for the missile
during handling operations. It also acts as an extension of the launch tube when the missile is loaded in the
launcher. Figure 4-88 shows the TOW missile launch container.
Figure 4-88. TOW launch container example (side, top and front views)
4-74
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
WARHEAD SECTION
4-167. The warhead section consists of the warhead assembly, an ogive assembly, and a safety and
arming device. The ogive assembly forms the front of the warhead section. The warhead assembly forms
the central portion of the warhead section itself. The safety and arming device is attached to the rear of the
warhead assembly and fits into the center of the electronics section assembly. The warhead assembly is a
shaped-charge device consisting of a welded outer case and mounting ring assembly, a liner cone, a
compression pad, a phenolic bushing, a HE, and a booster charge (see Figure 4-89).
Figure 4-89. TOW warhead assembly with extended probe (TOW-2A)

4-168. The ogive serves two functions. One function is to serve as an aerodynamic cover for the forward
end of the missile during flight. The other function is to detonate the fuze in the safety and arming device
upon contact with the target. In Figure 4-90, an additional ogive is present at the end of the extended probe
which houses a crush switch that detonates the fuze in the safety and arming device upon impact. As each
model has a different warhead assembly, refer to TM 9-1410-470-34 for the most accurate technical
information.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-75
Chapter 4
Figure 4-90. TOW-2B warhead assembly

4-169. The safety and arming device allows safe handling, transportation, storage, and operation of the
HE warhead to the point in missile flight where the round is designated to arm. The warhead for each
model of the missile is designed to defeat a specific target.
ELECTRONICS SECTION
4-170. The electronics section assembly (digital electronics unit [DEU]) contains all of the electronic
circuitry used in the missile. The electronics section assembly receives missile steering signals from the
attitude control gyro. The signals from the gyro are shaped and superimposed on the missile steering
signals to produce missile stabilization. The electronics section also applies driving voltages to the four
control-surface actuators. The most recent variants of the TOW missile have the DEU located in the aft
section.
FLIGHT MOTOR SECTION

4-171. The flight motor propels the missile towards the target. The flight motor case consists of two parts
and when conjoined, serves as part of the missile skin. The electronic section on early TOW-2A models
that have an analog electronics unit (AEU) is magneformed to the groove around the outside of the forward
portion of the flight motor case. The aft flight motor case is joined to the forward flight motor case by a
screw joint and has the four missile wings attached which provide stability for the missile in flight.
CENTER SECTION
4-172. The center section assembly consists of the center section case, the attitude control gyro, the
missile batteries, and the center section wiring harness. The aft end of the center section case is
magneformed to the groove around the outside of the aft case of the missile flight motor. The two flight
motor exhaust nozzles terminate at two ports in the center section.
4-76
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
AFT SECTION
4-173. The missile aft section assembly is composed of the launch motor, the aft section case, two wire
dispensers, a xenon (IR) light source and modulator, and an actuator system. On TOW 2 missiles, a thermal
beacon and shutter is also contained in the aft section (see Figure 4-91). The launch motor propels the
missile out of the launch container to approximately 7 meters. The flight motor then ignites to continue the
flight. The wire dispensers are mounted in the extreme end of the aft section assembly. Each wire dispenser
is a small-diameter aluminum bobbin mounted parallel to the missile longitudinal axis. Each bobbin
contains enough wire to ensure the range requirements of the missile are met.
4-174. The missile actuator system occupies most of the missile aft section assembly. The actuator system
consists of the actuator subsystem and the control surface assembly. The control surface assembly consists
of the four control surfaces, their extending springs, and the bulkhead to which they are mounted. The light
source is mounted at the extreme aft end of the missile so that IR energy is emitted toward the launcher
when the missile is in flight. This IR energy is detected by the IR sensor in the TOW optical sight to
determine the missiles position in space. For the TOW 2 system, the night sight tracker detects the thermal
source to determine the missile position. The optical sight and night sight together provide dual tracking
mode for the TOW 2 system.
MISSILE TECHNICAL DATA AND MARKINGS

4-175. The developments and improvements to the TOW missile family follow the developments and
improvements of tank armor. The five missiles that followed the basic TOW each improved upon the
previous missile. Areas of improvement included penetration, maximum range, usefulness during adverse
firing conditions, resistance to jamming, and attack profiles.
4-176. With the increased number of TOW missile types and wide variations in their capabilities
(especially armor penetration), TOW crews and range safeties must be able to quickly and accurately
identify the specific type of missile they have.
4-177. The configuration of the missile can be readily identified by the various identification decals,
tapes, and stencils on the missile case. General stencil markings for the TOW missiles are shown in Figure
4-91.
Figure 4-91.TOW missile stencil markings
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-77
Chapter 4
4-178. Figure 4-92 shows an overview of the TOW missile characteristics.

4-179. Tactile markings are used to help crews identify the specific TOW missile in its launch container
using raised rib sections and notched edges on the seal retainer on specific missiles. Refer to each missiles
data card listed in each section for the respective tactile markings.
4-180. Each missile has its own set of unique features. General descriptions, color coding, markings,
tactile markings, and performance information are provided in the following sections by missile type;
TOW-2A, TOW-2B, and TOW-BB.
Missile and Nomenclature
TOW
(BGM71A/A1)
ITOW
(BGM71C)
TOW-2
(BGM71D)
TOW-2A
(BGM-7E)
TOW-2B
(BGM-71F)
TOW-2B
Aero
(BGM71F6)
TOW-BB
(Bunker
Buster) (BGM71H)
DODIC
PB91
PB92
PV01
PB82
PV18
WF37
WF82
Weight (out
of tube)
40.7 lbs
41.9 lbs
47.2 lbs
49.9 lbs
49.8 lbs
50.5 lbs
49.6 lbs
Weight (in
tube)
54.8 lbs
56.0 lbs
61.3 lbs
64.0 lbs
63.9 lbs
64.6 lbs
63.7 lbs
Length (out of
tube)
45.8
45.6
46.2
46.1
46.2
47.7
46.0
Tube
diameter
8.6
8.6
8.6
8.6
8.6
8.6
8.6
Maximum
ranges
3,000m
(BGM-71A)
3,750m
(BGM-71A1)
3,750m
3,750m
3,750m
3,750m
4,500m
3,000m (bunkers)
3,750m (vehicles)
Two 5
explosively
formed
penetrators
6 fragmenting
HE
Warhead size
5 HE
5 HE
6 HE
6 HE
Two 5
explosively
formed
penetrators
Arming
distances
(minimum)
30m
30m
30m
30m
110m
110m
43m
Arming
distances
(best)
NA
NA
NA
NA
150m
150m
NA
Arming
distances
(maximum)
65m
65m
65m
65m
200m
200m
65m
Reliability
95.4 percent
Operating
temperature
-25 F to +125 F
Hazard
Classification
Figure 4-92.TOW missile characteristics
TOW-2A SERIES MISSILES

4-181. The TOW-2A series of missiles have a full-caliber, 6 inch warhead that includes an extended
probe. It has two IR radiators to provide hardened system performance against battlefield obscurants and
countermeasures when firing. The first IR radiator is the xenon beacon that receives signals from the flight
4-78
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
control unit. The second IR radiator is the thermal beacon and provides link compatibility with the electrooptical IR night sight, which is part of the TOW launcher system.
4-182. Figure 4-93 illustrates the cut-away drawing and shows the functional components of the TOW2A missile.
Figure 4-93. TOW-2A cut away diagram

4-183. There are two missiles types in the TOW-2A series that crews will see in training and combat;
surface attack and practice. Of these types of missiles, there are several models that crews will encounter.
Table 4-10 identifies these models, national stock numbers, nomenclatures, and DODICs, respectively.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-79
Chapter 4
Table 4-10. TOW-2A model numbers

Model
Number
NSN
Nomenclature
DODIC
Remarks
BGM-71E
1410-01-2299948
1410-01-3000254
1410-01-3135367
1410-01-3702288
1410-01-3798253
1410-01-3438924
Guided Missile,
Surface Attack
Guided Missile,
Surface Attack
Guided Missile,
Surface Attack
Guided Missile,
Surface Attack
Guided Missile,
Surface Attack
Guided Missile,
Practice
PD62
TOW-2A
PE96
PD62 with coated launch motor
PV47
1410-01-3702292
Guided Missile,
Practice
PV84
Coated launch motor and

digital electronics unit (DEU)
Splice-less harness and digital
electronics unit (DEU)
HERO case (green) and digital
Practice warhead with digital
electronics unit (DEU) and
coated launch motor
Splice-less harness and digital
BGM-71E-1B
BGM-71E-3B
BGM-71E-4B
BGM-71E-6B
BTM-71E-2B
BTM-71E-3B
PV83
PU08
PU09
4-184. The TOW-2A series of missiles have a precursor charge on its extendible probe. The precursor
charge is designed to force a reactive armor package on an armored or light armored target to discharge
prematurely to allow the main charge of the TOW warhead to function against the least amount of armor
protection on the threat target (see Figure 4-94 through Figure 4-96).
Figure 4-94. TOW missile striking ERA protected threat target
4-80
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-95. Initial detonation of precursor charge
Figure 4-96. Detonation of the primary warhead
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-81
Chapter 4
TOW-2A (BGM-71E Series)

4-185. This missiles primary purpose is to defeat armor targets using a series of CE warheads. This
provides the missile with the capability to defeat an armor threat target, even if it is protected by an
explosive reactive armor (ERA) package (see Figure 4-97).
Figure 4-97. TOW-2A, BGM-71E-4B

4-186. Figure 4-98 and Figure 4-99 are data cards as a reference to each model within the TOW-2A series
of missiles.
Figure 4-98. TOW-2A characteristics and markings
4-82
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-99. TOW-2A practice characteristics and markings
TOW-2B
4-187. This missile series primary purpose is to defeat armor targets using a series of CE warheads. This
provides the missile with the capability to defeat an armor threat target, even if it is protected by an ERA
package (see Figure 4-100).
Figure 4-100. TOW-2B Aero
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-83
Chapter 4
4-188. The TOW-2B is a top-attack missile that utilizes a tandem warhead, explosively formed
penetrators (EFP) that strike the target from above, the weakest part of the armor protective package. The
TOW-2B flight guidance system and rocket propulsion system are similar to those of previous versions of
the TOW missile. Figure 4-101 shows the basic internal components of the TOW-2B series of missiles.
Figure 4-101. TOW-2B cut away diagram
AERO PACKAGES
4-189. The TOW 2B Aero is an improvement on the TOW 2B missile. TOW 2B Aero was designed to be
effective to a range of 4.5 km. The extended range of the TOW 2B Aero is accomplished with two minor
modifications to the TOW 2B. First, more wire is added to accommodate the command guidance to the
extended range. Second, an aerodynamic ogive or front end has been added to the TOW 2B target sensor to
decrease drag and increases range. The new aerodynamic feature ensures stable controllable flight to 4.5
km while using the current propulsion system.
4-84
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
4-190. There are three models in the TOW-2B series that crews will see in training and combat. Table
4-11 identifies these models, national stock numbers, nomenclatures, and DODICs, respectively.
Table 4-11. TOW-2B models
Model
Number
NSN
Nomenclature
DODIC
Remarks
BGM-71F
1410-01-3225333
1410-01-3702289
1410-01-4730281
Guided Missile,
Surface Attack
Guided Missile,
Surface Attack
Guided Missile,
Surface Attack
PV18
TOW-2B with DEU
PV82
Splice-less harness and

PV82 with Gen I mod and
BGM-71F-1
BGM-71F-1A
WF37
4-191. The missile is programmed to fly approximately 2.25 meters above the gunners line of sight
(LOS), but the gunner aims center mass of the target. The missile detects the target by magnetic signature
and optical (laser) profile. The missiles sensors cannot distinguish between friendly and enemy, or
between destroyed and operational threats.
4-192. To prevent premature detonation of the TOW-2B warheads, crews must make sure their line of
sight is clear of friendly and destroyed vehicles 10 mils left and right of the gunners LOS. The TOW-2B
has two 5-inch warheads that, when detonated, explosively form two high-density tantalum penetrators.
4-193. Figure 4-102a through Figure 4-102c depict the TOW-2B functioning sequence.
Figure 4-102a. TOW-2B functioning sequence
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-85
Chapter 4
Figure 4-102b. TOW-2B functioning sequence (continued)
Figure 4-102c. TOW-2B functioning sequence (continued)

Note. Firing the TOW-2A and TOW-2B missiles from the basic TOW launcher is possible;
however, the missile will have a reduced probability of hit (PH).
4-86
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
4-194. Figure 4-103 through Figure 4-109 shows the data cards as a reference to each model within the
TOW-2B series of missiles.
Figure 4-103. TOW-2B characteristics and markings
Figure 4-104. TOW-2B Gen I characteristics and markings
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-87
Chapter 4
Figure 4-105. TOW-2B Aero characteristics and markings
Figure 4-106.TOW-2B Aero RF characteristics and markings
4-88
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-107.TOW-2B Aero Gen I characteristics and markings
Figure 4-108. TOW-2B Aero Gen 2 characteristics and markings
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-89
Chapter 4
Figure 4-109. TOW-2B Aero Gen 2 RF characteristics and markings
TOW BUNKER BUSTER (BGM-71H)

4-195. The TOW Bunker Buster (TOW BB) is an evolution of the TOW missile, designed to provide the
crew with a more versatile weapon against a wide variety of targets. The TOW BB employs a fragmenting
HE bulk warhead that can breach or destroy a multitude of target sets, particularly in complex urban
terrain. The TOW BBs warhead configuration enables it to breach 8-in thick (20.3 cm), double-reinforced
concrete walls and provides overmatch against earth and timber bunkers. Whereas traditional shapedcharge warheads can penetrate entire buildings, the TOW BB disperses its pressure at the point of
penetration. This enables greater precision in urban engagements and enhances lethality while minimizing
collateral damage outside of the target area. The TOW BB employs the TOW 2A guidance package. The
maximum effective range of the missile against bunkers is 3,000 meters due to their small profile and
resulting low aim point. Maximum effective range against other hardened targets is 3,750 meters (see
Figure 4-110).
4-90
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-110. TOW-BB basic sections

4-196. Figure 4-111 and Figure 4-112 show data cards as a reference to each model within the TOW-BB
series of missiles.
Figure 4-111. TOW-BB characteristics and markings
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-91
Chapter 4
Figure 4-112. TOW-BB RF characteristics and markings
WARNINGS
When attacking a target, there is an associated debris field from
warhead fragments and destruction of the target. To avoid the
possibility of death or injury, exposed troops should be no closer
than 400 meters from the target.
There is a remote possibility of a TOW BB missile detonating 43
meters from the launch platform. As a result, all TOW BB Missiles
are labeled Under Armor Only.
BACKBLAST AREA
4-197. The TOW weapon system has a backblast area that extends 75 meters to the rear of the vehicle in a
90-degree cone (see Figure 4-113). This area comprises both a 50-meter danger zone and an additional 25meter caution zone. The Bradley must be positioned so that no personnel, unarmored vehicles, or
obstructions (such as walls, embankments, or large trees) remain in the backblast area for its missile.
4-92
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-113. Backblast area danger zone
JAVELIN ANTITANK GUIDED MISSILE

4-198. The Javelin is a fire-and-forget, man-portable, medium, anti-armor, shoulder-fired weapon
designed with a reusable M98A1 command launch unit (CLU). The CLU houses the day sight, night-vision
sight (NVS), controls, and status indicators. The round consists of the missile, launch tube assembly
(LTA), and battery coolant unit (BCU). The missile contains the guidance section, mid-body section,
warhead section, propulsion section, and control actuator section. The LTA serves as the launch platform
and missile carrying container.
BASIC SKILLS TRAINER

4-199. The Basic Skills Trainer (BST) is an indoor training device that consists of a Student Station (SS)
and Instructor Station (IS). The Student Station consists of a Simulated Command Launch Unit (SCLU)
and a Missile Simulation Round (MSR). The IS incorporates a desktop computer, monitor, keyboard,
mouse, interconnect cable, and a surge suppressor. BST training exercises use real terrain models, actual
visible and IR, and matching three-dimensional target models for natural target movements. The gunner
sees a realistic, simulated, battlefield.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-93
Chapter 4
FIELD TACTICAL TRAINER

4-200. The Field Tactical Trainer (FTT) is an outdoor force-on-force trainer used in conjunction with a
tactical CLU and simulated round (SR). The FTT includes an IS to monitor the student. The SR is
equipped with Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES).
MISSILE SIMULATION ROUND

4-201. The MSR, issued with a simulated launch tube, is a field-handling round used to train gunners
proper maintenance and handling of a Javelin round. Its replicated weight and balance are precise, so
simulated training is accurate for feel. FTT contains no MSR instruments to monitor this aspect of training.
CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES

4-202. The missile has two gunner-selectable attack modestop attack or direct attack. Each mode has its
own flight path or profile for reaching the target.
Top-Attack Mode
4-203. Top attack is the default mode when the missile seeker is first activated. In top-attack mode, the
missile approaches from above to impact and detonate on top of a target. This capacity allows the gunner to
attack a target from the front, rear, or side with increased kill probability. Armored vehicles usually have
less protective armor on top. The minimum engagement distance is 150 meters.
4-204. The exact profile of the missile flight path depends on the range to the target and is determined
automatically by the missiles on-board software. When firing at a 2,000-meters target, the missile reaches
a height of around 160 meters above the battlefield. If a target is under a protective structure, firing in topattack mode will cause the missile to detonate on the structure instead of on the target. The gunner can
select the direct-attack mode to counter targets hiding under protective cover.
Direct-Attack Mode
4-205. Direct-attack mode can be selected only after seeker cool-down, and before lock-on. The gunner
pushes the ATTACK SELECT (ATTK SEL) switch on the right handgrip to change attack modes. In
direct-attack mode, the missile flies along a more direct path to the target. The missile impacts and
detonates on the targets front, side, or rear. The minimum engagement distance is 65 meters.
4-206. The exact profile of the missile-flight path shown in a general configuration depends on the range
to the target, and is determined automatically by the missiles on-board software. With a 2,000-meter
target, the missile reaches a height of about 60 meters above the battlefield. This path allows the missile to
reach a target under a protective structure. See Table 4-12 for technical data for the Javelin.
4-94
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Table 4-12. Characteristics of the Javelin antitank guided missile

Javelin Missile System
Surface attack guided missile and M98A1 command launch unit
Type of System
Fire and forget
Crew
One- to three-Soldier teams based on TO&E
Missile modes
Top attack (default), direct attack
Ranges
Top-attack mode minimum effective engagement
150 meters
Maximum effective engagement range (directattack and top-attack modes)
2,500 meters
Direct-attack mode minimum effective

engagement range
65 meters
Flight Time
About 14 seconds at 2,000 meters
Backblast Area
Primary danger zone extends out 25 meters at a 60-degree (cone shaped)

angle
PropulsionTwo Stage Motor
Launch motor ejects the missile from the LTA
Caution zone extends the cone-shaped area out to 100 meters

Flight motor propels the missile to the target
Firing from Inside Enclosures
Complete Round
(Launch tube assembly with
missile and BCU)
Battery Coolant Unit
Minimum room length
15 feet
Minimum room width
12 feet
Minimum room height
7 feet
Weight
35.14 lb (15.97 kg)
Length
47.60 in (120.90 cm)
Diameter with end caps
11.75 in (29.85 cm)
Inside diameter
5.52 in (14.02 cm)
Weight
2.91 lb (1.32 kg)
Length
8.16 in (20.73 cm)
Width
4.63 in (11.75 cm)
Type
Lithium, non-rechargeable
Life
4 min of BCU time
Coolant gas
Argon
References: FM 3-22.37, TM 9-1425-687-12/TM 9-1425-688-12.
4-207. The Javelin missile uses a dual-charged warhead (see Figure 4-114). The warhead has a precursor
charge and main charge.
z
Precursor. The precursor charge is an HE antitank shaped charge. Its purpose is to cause
reactive armor on the target to detonate before the main charge reaches the armor. Once the
reactive armor is penetrated, the targets main hull is exposed to the warheads main charge. If
the target is not equipped with reactive armor, the precursor provides additional explosives to
penetrate the main armor.
z
Main. The main charge is the second charge of a dual-charge warhead and is also an HE
antitank shaped charge. The primary warhead charge is designed to penetrate the targets main
armor to achieve a target kill.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-95
Chapter 4
Figure 4-114. Javelin missile

4-208. Soldiers must adhere the following precautions when employing the Javelin:
z
Backblast Area. The backblast of the Javelin comes from the firing of the launch motor and the
flight motor (see Figure 4-115). The Javelin has little recoil because the propellant gases escape
to the rear of the weapon. This backblast can damage equipment or seriously injure personnel
who are too close to the rear of the LTA at time of firing. The Javelin backblast area extends
100 meters to the rear and up to 25 meters to the sides of the launcher and forms a 60-degree
danger area. It is divided into a primary danger zone and two caution areas.
Primary Danger Area. The primary danger area is a 60-degree included sector, with the
apex of the sector at the aft end of the missile launch motor. The primary danger area radius
of curvature is 25 meters. Serious injury or fatality is possible for personnel in the primary
danger area during firing. A portion of the primary danger area has been extended forward
to the firing line. This portion is within the range of 1 to 5 meters left and right of launch
tube centerline.
Caution Area 1. Caution area 1 is an extension of the 25-meter primary danger zone arc
forward to the firing line on each side of the launcher. Serious hearing impairment or
damage from frequent exposure could occur to personnel in this area during firings.
Personnel should always wear the approved hearing and eye protection when positioned in
caution area 1.
Caution Area 2. Caution area 2 is identified as a 35-meter radius, aft of the launcher and
within the 60-degree sector. This area is affected by the activation of the FM pressure relief
system. Caution area 2 is an extension to the rear of the primary danger area. Hearing
impairment and eye damage could occur to personnel that are 10 meters beyond the primary
danger area during firing. Personnel should always wear the approved hearing and eye
protection when positioned in caution area 2.
Caution Area 3. Caution area 3 is an extension to the danger zone within the 60 degree
sector with a 100-meter radius. This area is affected by the activation of the flight motor
pressure relief system. Personnel located in this area will wear eye protection.
4-96
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Figure 4-115. Javelin backblast safety zones

DANGER
KEEP ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR OF THE BACKBLAST AREA.
FLYING DEBRIS PRODUCED BY FIRING A JAVELIN MISSILE
COULD INJURE OR KILL ANYONE REMAINING IN THE
BACKBLAST AREA.
SAFETY INFORMATION
FIRING OVER OBSTRUCTIONS
4-209. When firing the TOW missiles over electrical wires, gunners must take care to avoid letting the
command link wires touch a live high-voltage power line. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
injury or death. Also, it may cause the gunner to lose control of the missile and damage the launcher
electronics.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-97
Chapter 4
4-210. The Javelin missile can be fired over water without major concern, however it is not recommended
for the TOW to be fired over water as the guide wires may fall into the water and cause a short in the
electrical current.
AMMUNITION HANDLING
4-211. Do not fire a damaged encased missile such as one with large dents or cracks in the launch
container. However, if the missile only has minor bending of the end rings, this is not serious, and you can
fire the missile without danger.
4-212. Do not move or handle duds or defective missiles, except when you remove a misfire from the
launcher and place it a safe distance (200 meters) from the vehicle.
4-213. When handling or operating in the vicinity of unpackaged ammunition, observe the following
precautions:
z
Always wear gloves (combat vehicle crewman type, MIL-G-44108) when handling ammunition.
The human body absorbs RF energy that could be transferred to the ammunition.
z
the ASP/QASAS (ammunition surveillance).
z
Personnel should ensure that the use of cellular phones and electronic devices within vicinity of
ammunition is limited. It is possible for the devices to cause an electric spark which may cause
the primer to ignite.
FIRING IN WINDY CONDITIONS

4-214. Gusty, flanking, or quartering winds can move the TOW missile around during flight. As long as
the crosshairs remain on the center mass of the target, the weapon system will compensate for wind effects.
Gusty wind does not generally affect the flight of the Javelin missile.
MAINTENANCE
4-215. Vehicle crews should conduct periodic inspections of service ammunition using the appropriate
operators manual. Maintenance includes only basic tasks, such as cloth wipe downs by crews, and touchup painting performed by ASP/QASAS personnel.
4-216. See FM 4-30.13 for specific information on the condition codes of ammunition.
SECTION IX PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

4-217. This section deals primarily with the special considerations of ammunition transportation to and
from a range, as well as transportation of ammunition to vehicles in a combat environment.
4-218. The unit Master Gunner must forecast the ammunition requirement for any upcoming ranges, and
in turn must coordinate for specific lift assets with the unit S-4. Each unit within the HBCT has different
procedures for requesting transportation of ammunition; however it is imperative to understand the rules of
ammunition transportation, as well as the lift and transportation capabilities of available assets.
4-219. The fire symbol that applies to the most hazardous material present will be posted on or near all
explosives locations. It will be visible from all approach roads. One symbol posted on or near the door end
of an earth-covered magazine is normally enough. One or more symbols may be needed on other buildings.
When all munitions within a storage area are covered by one fire symbol, it may be posted at the entry
control point. Backing material for fire symbol decals should be the shape of the decal and should be
noncombustible.
4-98
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
4-220. Fire symbols will be placed on entrances to arms rooms containing ammunition. Where explosives
are stored in a locker or similar container, the container will also be marked with the appropriate fire
symbol.
4-221. Transportation of ammunition and explosives by military vehicles is governed by DA Pamphlet
385-64. Reference Chapter 7 of the DA Pam for specific transportation requirements of any ammunition.
Ammunition stored in building structures use the 24 placards and vehicles transporting the ammunition
will use the 12 placard as appropriate. All vehicles that are transporting ammunition and explosives must
also have specific hazardous placards emplaced in a conspicuous position. See Chapter 3 of the DA Pam
for the specific placement of the placards on ammunition storage containers.
z
Fire Division 1, Hazard Class 1.1. Large quantity explosive charges that when ignited, cause a
mass detonation of the adjoining ammunition. Items in this division are field artillery bags
propelling charges, demolitions charges, and TNT. There will be few secondary explosions that
will be much smaller than the initial detonation.
z
Fire Division 2, Hazard Class 1.2. Items configured for storage and transportation that do not
mass detonate when a single item or package in a stack is ignited fall within this division.
Explosions involving the items result in their burning and exploding progressively with no more
than a few at a time reacting. These reactions will project fragments, firebrands, and unexploded
items from the explosion site. Blast effects are limited to the immediate vicinity and are not the
primary hazard. Typically, main gun ammunition (25mm, 120mm), as well as 40mm with
explosive fillers (HEDP) are in this division.
z
Fire Division 3, Hazard Class 1.3. HD 1.3 includes items that burn vigorously and cannot
usually be extinguished in emergency situations. Explosions normally will be confined to
pressure ruptures of containers and will not produce propagating shock waves or damaging blast
overpressure beyond the magazine distance. The spreading about of burning container
materials, propellant, or other flaming debris may cause a severe hazard of spreading fire.
z
Fire Division 4, Hazard Class 1.4. Present a fire hazard with minimal blast, fragmentation, or
toxic hazards. Small arms ammunition with no incendiary devices fall within this division.
4-222. Figure 4-116 describes the ammunition placards based on Fire Division and Hazard Class, IAW
DoD 6055.9-STD. Included are the associated ordering (NSN) information based on location of the placard
(building, 24 or vehicle, 12, respectively). All placards are designed with orange backgrounds with black
lettering.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-99
Chapter 4
Fire Placard
Hazard Placard
Division and Class
Remarks
Fire Division 1
Hazard Class 1.1
24 NSN 7690-01-082-0290
12 NSN 7690-01-081-9581
Mass Detonation. The

ammunition during a fire in
storage or transport will
result in a mass
detonation.
Fire Division 2
Hazard Class 1.2
24 NSN 7690-01-082-0289
12 NSN 7690-01-087-7340
Explosion with Fragments.

The ammunition during a
fire in storage or transport
will result in an explosion
with projectile fragments.
Fire Division 3
Hazard Class 1.3
24 NSN 7690-01-081-9583
12 NSN 7690-01-081-9582
Fire Division 4
Hazard Class 1.4
24 NSN 7690-01-082-6709
12 NSN 7690-01-081-9584
Mass Fire. The

ammunition in storage or
transport will cause a
massive fire when ignited.
Moderate Fire. The

ammunition in storage or
transport will cause a
moderate fire when
ignited.
Figure 4-116. Example of ammunition placards

4-223. Blank ammunition cannot be transported or fired with live ammunition. Extreme injury or death
may occur as a result of mixing the two types of ammunition. See AR 386-63 for further safety guidance
regarding the use of blank and live ammunition.
4-224. All ammunition can be placed on pallets; all pallets are a standard size. However, care must be
taken to ensure that when loading a vehicle with ammunition pallets, do not exceed the safe load capacity
of the vehicle.
4-225. Table 4-13 provides the common packing of ammunition available to the HBCT. It also shows the
weight requirement of the ammunition.
4-100
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Table 4-13. Common ammunition packing

Ammunition
Packing Type
Rounds per
Pack
Pack per Case
Case per
Pallet
Pallet Weight
5.56 link
Metal Can
800
48
2790
7.62 mm link
Metal Can
200
48
3153
.50 cal
Metal Can
100
48
3790
40 mm
grenade
Metal Can
32
53
2100
120 mm Tank
Honeycomb
NA
30
2481
25 mm
Metal Can
30
30
1515
120mm Mortar
C623, C624,
CA03, CA07
Container,
Metal
24
2480
120mm (M)
C379, CA04
Container,
Metal
24
2455
120mm (M)
C625
Container,
Metal
15
1549
120mm (M)
CA09
Container,
Metal
21
1924
Grenade,
Illumination
Metal Can
36
36
2071
Grenade,
Smoke G826
Wood Box
96
2280
Grenade,
Smoke G815
Metal Can
99
1974
Grenade,
Smoke G978
Wood Box
384
96
1697
Tow missile
Box
NA
33
2100
Javelin missile
Container,
Metal
NA
864
4-226. Figure 4-117 shows the carrying capacity of the available transportation vehicles found in an
HBCT. Operators of the vehicles must be aware of the respective weight limitations of their vehicle.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-101
Chapter 4
Vehicle
Truck Cargo, 1 T,
4x4 M998
Truck Cargo, 1 T,
4x4 M1097
Truck, Cargo, 10T 8x8,

M977
Truck, Cargo, 10T 8x8,

M985
Cargo Weight
Number of Pallets
2,500 lbs
1 pallet (not to exceed cargo weight)
4,400 lbs
1 pallet
22,000 lbs
8 pallets
21,729 lbs
8 pallets
33,000 lbs (without trailer)

66,000 lbs (with trailer)
10 pallets (without trailer)

20 pallets (with trailer)
5,000 lbs
2 pallets
10,000 lbs
4 pallets
Truck, Tractor, 16.5 T,

10x10, PLS, M1074
Truck, Cargo, 2 T,
4x4, FMTV, M1078
Truck, Cargo, 5 T, 6x6,

FMTV, M1084
See Table 4-13 to identify maximum pallet weight by ammunition type. Pallet quantities listed above
represent the maximum number of standard pallets the vehicle can transport. Refer to specific vehicle
operators manual for appropriate lift and load capacity.
Figure 4-117. HBCT common vehicle cargo capacity
4-102
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Ammunition
SECTION X SAFETY
4-227. Periodically, the U.S. Army issues various warnings to units related to ammunition. These notices
are often good for only one year, but might be renewed until a problem is fixed or the information is
included in more permanent publications. These warnings can take several forms:
z
Ammunition Information Notices (AIN) and Notification of Ammunition Reclassification
(NAR) deal with all types of ammunition.
z
Safety-of-Use Messages (SOUM), Ground Precautionary Messages (GPM), and Maintenance
Advisory Messages (MAM) cover a wide range of topics, which may or may not cover
ammunition-specific issues.
z
Additional information can be found on Army Knowledge Online (AKO). In AKO, select
Knowledge Network, and then select Abrams Master Gunner Network.
4-228. If ammunition is stored in metal ammunition cans that are outside in hot, desert environments, the
top row of ammunition can heat to 190F, which easily exceeds the maximum safe firing temperatures of
all tank ammunition. Care should be taken to provide cover to ammunition that is stored outside in the
desert heat. Furthermore, if possible, crews should be cautious about immediately firing rounds that have
been stored in the top row of unprotected cans.
IDENTIFICATION OF SUSPENDED OR RESTRICTED LOTS OF AMMUNITION

Notes. It is the responsibility of the safety officer and ammunition noncommissioned officer
(NCO) to ensure that ammunition is checked for restrictions and suspensions. It is the officer in
charges (OIC) duty to abide by those, if any restrictions/suspensions are identified.
For further information regarding suspended or restricted ammunition, Soldiers may also
use the website http://www.jmc.army.mil/ib/ibq/SURV/gen/survinfo.htm. This page contains
current information, ARMY NAR messages with links for each message; an introduction link to
explain the TB and entries; and an automated look-up database that can be searched by DODIC,
Lot Number or NSN.
4-229. See Figure 4-118 for a flow chart for procedures for identifying suspended or restricted lots of
ammunitions.
4-230. When inspecting small arms ammunition (functional lots), the NSN and lot number can be found
on the plywood box.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
4-103
Chapter 4
Figure 4-118. Ammunition lot restriction flow chart
4-104
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21
3 September 2009
Chapter 5
Detect
On future battlefields crews must be able to engage multiple targets rapidly while
operating within irregular battle lines. Depending on the tactical situation and the
area of operations, enemy targets may be intermingled with friendly, coalition, and
neutral vehicles and personnel. Survival will depend on the crews ability to detect,
locate, identify and, if necessary, engage and destroy the enemy rapidly. Crews must
be proficient in the techniques and procedures for detecting and identifying potential
targets; making engagement decisions; executing and assessing engagements against
hostile targets, and employing fire commands to orchestrate the engagement process.
Chapter 5 discusses the steps in the engagement process and their relationship to each
other and discusses the detailed steps of the detection process.
Note. The figures in Chapter 5 depict only one platform. All scanning techniques refer to every
platform unless otherwise stated.
Contents
Section I Engagement Process ............. 5-1
Section II Detect ..................................... 5-2
Crew Search ....................................... 5-2
Sectors of Responsibility..................... 5-3
Target Detection ................................. 5-5
Target Location ................................... 5-7

Search Techniques ............................. 5-9
Ground and Air Search Tips.............. 5-15
SECTION I ENGAGEMENT PROCESS

5-1. The engagement process is the process of detecting, identifying, engaging and assessing targets on
the battlefield to ensure their rapid destruction. The detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess (DIDEA)
process provides an iterative, standardized, and systematic approach to target engagement activities across
the surface-to-surface, surface-to-air, air-to-surface, and air-to-air mission areas. DIDEA applies across the
user spectrum, from the individual infantryman, to direct fire surface platforms, to aviation platforms, to
indirect fire controllers. The individual actions of the DIDEA process are summarized below:
z
Detect. Detect is the acquisition and location of an object in the operational environment (OE).
z
Identify. Identify is a systematic process supporting the characterization of detected objects as
friend, enemy, or neutral.
z
Decide. Decide is the determination of appropriate application of military options and weapons
resources on identified objects.
z
Engage. Engage is the specific application of military options/weapons resources.
z
Assess. Assess did the applied weapons resources bring about the desired effect.
5-2. The engagement process is facilitated for direct fire weapons systems by employing fire commands
to organize and execute the process (see Figure 5-1).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
5-1
Chapter 5
Figure 5-1. Engagement process (detect)
SECTION II DETECT
5-3. Combat identification (CID) is the process of attaining an accurate characterization of detected
objects in the OE sufficient to support an engagement decision (see JP 3-0). The CID process has the
following three key purposes:
z
Identify and classify targets in the OE.
z
Allow for the timely processing of engagement decisions on targets classified as enemy.
z
The mitigation of fratricide and collateral damage to noncombatants.
5-4. The CID process is a series of progressive and interdependent steps (or actions)target search,
detection, location, and identification that lead to the decision process to engage or not engage. Effective
CID for a crew requires a constant combined effort from each crew member.
CREW SEARCH
5-5. Crew search (observation) is the act of carefully watching designated areas. Sectors of observation
are assigned by the vehicle commander (VC) or as outlined in the unit standing operating procedures
(SOP) to each crew member for target acquisition. If the vehicle is in a hide position, the VC may chooses
to position an observer (or two) forward of the vehicle to continue the crew search process while the
platform remains hidden. As Future Combat Systems Spin-Out technology becomes available, platoons
will have the option of employing Unattended Ground Sensors (UGS) and Class I Unmanned Aircraft
Systems (UAS) to assist in target detection in their sector.
5-6. Terrain, visibility conditions, vehicle positioning, and fire distribution planning dictate the distance
(depth and width) a crew, section, or platoon must cover. Each vehicles sector of fire and observation
must overlap with the sectors of adjacent vehicles. Based on these factors, the VC and gunner must
coordinate how they will cover the vehicles assigned sector, for both the offense and defense.
5-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Detect
SECTORS OF RESPONSIBILITY
5-7. Sectors of responsibility are areas assigned to each crew member for search and target acquisition.
While on an Abrams or Bradley, standard sectors of observation depend on turret orientation for all crew
members except the driver. On the armored High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV)
however, all crew members have the same sectors of observation while mounted on the platform. Crew
members must know their assigned sectors of observation to ensure 360-degree coverage of the battlefield.
When operating within a section or platoon, each platforms 360-degree coverage will create overlapping
fields of observation.
5-8. For tanks, sectors are normally assigned as follows:
z
During opened hatch operations
The VCs sector of responsibility is 360 degrees. However, when the loader observes from
the hatch, the VC observes from the left front of the gun mantle, clockwise, to the left rear
of the turret.
The gunners sector is along the axis of the main gun, within the limits of the gunners sight
in low magnification.
The loaders sector is from the right front of the gun mantle, counterclockwise, to the right
rear of the turret. The loader should be designated as primary air guard when he is not
inside the turret.
The drivers sector is forward, with the limits of his periscope.

z
During closed hatch operations
The VC must observe 360 degrees using his vision blocks. On tanks when the loader is able
to scan to the rear, the VC must be able to view from the back of the loaders sponson box.
This should slightly overlap the loaders viewing area. He also assumes duties as primary
air guard on M1A1 tanks.
The gunners sector remains the same.
The loader (tanks) orients to the rear of the turret, using his periscope.
The drivers sector remains the same.

5-9. For Bradleys, sectors are normally assigned as follows:
z
During opened hatch operations
The VCs sector of responsibility is 360 degrees.
The gunners sector is from fender to fender within the limits of his sights in low
magnification.
The drivers sector is forward and left, with the limits of his periscope.
z
During closed hatch operations
The VC must observe 360 degrees using his vision blocks.
The gunners sector remains the same.
The drivers sector remains the same.

5-10. During closed hatch operations, the crews ability to acquire targets is reduced by at least 50 percent.
The crew must make sure all vision blocks and sights are clear and free of obstruction.
5-11. Acquisition responsibilities for the M2A3/M3A3 and M1A2 SEP (System Enhancement Package)
crew must be altered as follows:
z
VC and Gunner. Remains the same with changes in responsibility depending on the situation.
(For example: The individual tank is allotted a sector of fire; the VC determines where most
main gun engagements are likely to occur. Usually, the gunner covers this area with the
Gunners Primary Sight (GPS). Depending on the width of the sector, the VC may scan the
same sector with the gunner [opposite directions], or assign the commanders independent
thermal viewer (CITV)/commanders independent viewer (CIV) its own sector. If the CITV/CIV
is assigned its own sector, the CITV/CIV and GPS sectors must overlap. In some situations, the
tanks sector may require the VC and gunner to scan different sectors simultaneously; the VC
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
5-3
Chapter 5
z
z
and gunner need to know the limits of both sectors and ensure that these sectors overlap.
Depending on the size of the sector to be scanned, the crew may decide to scan the sector in
different fields of view. The CITV/CIV would be set to scan in the wide field of view (WFOV),
AUTO-SCAN. This allows the VC to monitor the CITV/CIV, improved commanders weapon
station (ICWS), and the TACTICAL DISPLAY, simultaneously; while the gunner employs
detailed search techniques with the GPS in high magnification.)
Loader (Tanks). Orients to the rear of the turret, using his periscope.
Driver. Remains the same.
5-12. Due to the close range and the three-dimensional aspect for potential engagements urban operations
require tight teamwork to ensure no dead space is left uncovered and that 360 security is maintained. When
operating in a closed hatch posture in an urban environment it is particularly important that teams work to
cover dead space imposed by the mechanical limits of various systems to elevate their weapons systems
(see Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-4).
Figure 5-2. Dead space considerations for closed hatch operations
Figure 5-3. Abrams weapon dead space (flank)
5-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Detect
Figure 5-4. Bradley weapon dead space (flank)
TARGET DETECTION
5-13. Target detection is the discovery of any object in the OE such as personnel, vehicles, equipment, or
objects of potential military significance. Target detection occurs during target search as a direct result of
observation. Crews must also be well trained in identifying the potential threats such as surface- or
subsurface-laid mines, obstacles, booby traps, and unexploded ordnances (UXO) and improvised explosive
devices (IED). This requires complete attention to detail, identifying threats beyond the obvious or known
enemy systems.
TARGET SIGNATURES
5-14. Target signatures are indicators or clues that aid an observer in detecting potential targets. Most
weapons and vehicles have identifiable signatures. These signatures may be the result of the design or the
environment in which the equipment is operating; for example, firing a vehicles main weapon system will
produce blast, flash, noise, smoke, and dust. The movement of vehicles through a built-up area causes
more noise than the movement of the same vehicle in an open field. Different types of aircraft have
different signatures; for example, the signature of a hovering helicopter is not the same as that of a fixedwing aircraft. Other factors that affect target signatures are visibility, temperature, and weather conditions.
5-15. Wheeled or tracked vehicle signatures are most likely to be detected in open areas and rolling terrain.
Threat antitank positions visually cover primary avenues of approach where tanks and personnel carriers
are likely to be used. Helicopters are most likely on the backside of wood lines, ridgelines, and significant
folds in the terrain. Sight, hearing, and smell can all assist in detecting signatures that will lead to target
location and identification. Examples of target signatures are
z
Soldier
Foxholes.
Broken vegetation.
Footprints (weather conditions permitting).
Trash.
Small-arms weapons noise and flash.
Sounds (voices, equipment noises).
Dismounted movement (visual or audible).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
5-5
Chapter 5
Tracked Vehicle
Vehicle tracks on the ground (weather conditions permitting).
Hot spots from road wheels, engine compartments, tracks, or weapon barrels (if using
thermal sights).
Engine noise.
Exhaust plume and smoke.
Dust clouds from movement.
Disturbed areas of vegetation.
Weapons firings report and smoke from weapon.
A bright flash at night.
Open hatch silhouettes.
Reflections off of glass surfaces and optics.

Antitank
Sharp crack of the antitank guided missile (ATGM) being fired.
Missile launch swish sound.
Fast traveling hot spot with a vapor trail (during thermal operations).
Long, thin wires from fired ATGMs.
Recently destroyed armored vehicles.

Artillery
Loud, dull sound.
Grayish-white smoke cloud.
Bright orange flash and black smoke from airbursts.
Rushing noise several seconds before round impacts.
Self-propelled artillery has the same thermal infrared signatures as tracked vehicles.
Towed artillery signatures vary according to the towing vehicle.

Aircraft
Glare of the sun reflecting off aircraft canopies, wings, fuselages of fixed-wing aircraft,
windows, and rotor blades of helicopters.
Aircraft engine noise.
Vapor trails from engine exhaust and fired missiles.
Dust and movement of foliage from hovering helicopters.

Obstacles and Mine
Loose or disturbed dirt in a regular pattern.
A destroyed or disabled vehicle that appears to have struck a mine.
Dead animal carcasses along side of roads.
Piles of dirt or trash along side of improved roads.
DETECTION CHALLENGES
5-16. Some targets are more difficult to detect than others. Soldiers must be well trained to detect and
locate targets. Some examples of these more difficult targets and challenges are
z
Peripheral targets (targets on the edge of the field of view).
z
Targets that are camouflaged or in shadows.
z
Targets that can be heard but not seen.
z
Targets under less than ideal indirect fire illumination. If the illumination is in front of the target,
the resulting shadow will be darker than the target. If the illumination is behind the target (and
not in position to wash out the crews optics), the target should stand out distinctly from the
background. Soldiers should always keep one eye closed during illumination search, and never
look directly into the illumination source to retain their own night vision.
5-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Detect
z
z
z
z
z
Mirage effects caused by high temperatures and heat waves near the ground.
Small single targets such as lone infantry ATGM or rocket-propelled grenade (RPG) positions.
Small targets in complex detection environments (such as urban or jungle environments).
Natural and manmade obstacles.
Behavioral or physical deficiencies of the observer (fatigue and eye reaction to gun flashes).
THERMAL SIGHTS
5-17. The enemy uses darkness to move their forces, dig in, or continue the attack. During the day, the
enemy uses every means possible to cover their intentions. Some camouflaged targets are difficult to
acquire with the day optics, but can be detected with a thermal sight. The crew should use the thermal
sight, when so equipped, to acquire targets during limited and good visibility. Thermal sights operate on
the principle of sensing heat radiation or temperature differences in the field of view. This heat is translated
as an electronic image. Use of thermal imaging systems provides U.S. forces with a definite advantage over
the enemy to conduct night operations. Night operations are to our advantage if crews can maneuver and
engage targets using a thermal sighting systems. During day operations, crews should use thermal sights to
increase their ability to detect targets behind foliage or in shadows. Crews should also switch between day
and thermal optics during the day to aid in target detection.
5-18. The following thermal signatures can be detected using the thermal sight:
z
Solar Heat. Objects absorb heat from the sun at different rates depending on the material.
Darker objects and targets tend to retain heat more than lighter objects. The amount of heat
absorbed by an object determines the duration the object can be seen using the thermal sight.
Target signatures vary if heated only by solar heat. As the sun begins to set, the gunner must
observe how the object forms changes.
z
Fuel Combustion. Vehicles have a plume of heat from the exhaust and another around the
engine compartment due to fuel combustion. The location of the engine and the direction of the
exhaust differ between vehicles. The strength of the signature produced from the engine or
exhaust being used varies with the following:
How recent the vehicle was used.
The size of the vehicles exhaust plume.
Where the muffler is located.
The vehicle compositions ability to retain heat.

z
Friction. Moving parts of a vehicle cause friction. The areas that appear as images in the sight
include tracks, road wheels, drive sprockets, and support rollers. Vehicles being driven through
mud or snow do not create as sharp an image. Vehicle track shrouding materials can hide the
signature of the road wheels and the track shoes. The longer a vehicle is operated, the more
intense the image is of the heated area. A vehicle looks much different after a 12-km road march
than it does in a defensive position.
z
Thermal Reflections. Glossy, smooth surfaces, such as windows in buildings or the windshield
of a vehicle, can reflect radiated heat.
z
Body Heat. Humans are warm-blooded and their body temperature is always constant. When
humans are around an area much cooler than their body, their silhouette appears very clear
through thermal optics.
TARGET LOCATION
5-19. Target location is the determination of where a target is in your OE. Locating a target occurs as a
result of observation and detection during crew search.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
5-7
Chapter 5
TARGET DIRECTION TECHNIQUE

5-20. Once a target is located, the target location must be communicated to the rest of the crew. Methods
used to announce a located target depend on the individuals specific position, unit SOP, and time
available. The six most common target location methods for the tank and Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV)
crews are clock, sector, traverse, reference point, grid, and target designate (M2/M3A3 and M1A2 SEP
crews only).
CLOCK
5-21. The clock method is commonly used to locate the targets for the crew. Twelve oclock is based on
the direction of vehicle movement while traveling or hull orientation (front of vehicle) when stationary
(example: TROOPS, NINE OCLOCK). On the BFV and the M1A2 SEP, the VC or gunner can use the
turret position indicator to assist in accurately announcing target location.
SECTOR
5-22. The sector method is similar to the clock method; it is quick and easy to use. It is best used to
indicate a direction from the direction of movement (moving) or hull orientation (stationary) using the
terms center, left, right, and rear. Center sector is always to the front (example: THREE TRUCKS, LEFT
REAR).
TRAVERSE (SHIFT)
5-23. The traverse method is also a relatively quick method, primarily used by another observer to locate
the target for the gunner. The traverse method can be used when the VCs power control handle is
inoperable to guide the gunner on target (example: TRAVERSE (Shift) LEFTSTEADYON).
REFERENCE POINT
5-24. The reference point method is used mainly in conjunction with the vehicle optics. The VC uses his
binoculars (or CIV/CITV/commanders weapon station [CWS] sight reticle) to determine the mil value
from a terrain feature, known position, or target reference point (TRP). He then announces the mil value to
the gunner. The gunner uses the mil reticle relationship to traverse onto the target. The key to this location
method is the VCs and gunners knowledge of the mil-sight relationship.
z
The quick TRP method is used by all personnel to identify targets near a TRP (example: TWO
PCs, TRP ONE FOUR).
z
The precise reference point method is used to locate targets accurately in relation to a known
TRP (example: ATGM, TRP ONE FOUR, RIGHT FIVE MILS).
GRID
5-25. The grid method is the least desired technique because of the length of times it takes to guide the
gunner on target. The VC receives the location of a target by map grid from either an observation post,
Blue Force Tracker, Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2), or by the internal
communications systems. The VC then uses his map to orient the turret to the target area for the gunner.
TARGET DESIGNATE
5-26. The M2/M3A3/M1A2 SEP commander uses the target designate capability to lay the gunner on a
target. When a target is located with the CIV/CITV, the commander squeezes the palm switch and presses
the TARGET DESIGNATE button to move the gunners line of sight to the target.
5-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Detect
SEARCH TECHNIQUES
GROUND SEARCH TECHNIQUES
5-27. Crew members scan their sectors at all times to detect targets or possible target locations. They can
quickly locate targets by using ground search techniques: rapid scan, slow (50-meter) scan, detailed search,
and the off-center vision method. Crew members can use the thermal optics, infrared (IR) night-vision
devices, machine gun optics, naked eye, and binoculars for ground searches during both good and limited
visibility conditions.
Rapid Scan
5-28. The rapid-scan method is used to quickly detect obvious signs of enemy activity (see Figure 5-5). It
is usually the first method used, whether moving or stationary.
z
The crew member starts scanning in the center of the sector and rapidly scans from the nearest
to the farthest point.
z
He then orients left or right and conducts a rapid scan, near to far. This sweep must overlap the
center of the previously scanned sector.
z
Once one side of center is completed, he scans the remaining side in the same manner.
z
If more than one crew member is scanning, the gunner should always scan from near to far
while the other crew member scans from far to near.
z
The crew places weapon systems on the nearest target first.
Figure 5-5. Rapid scans
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
5-9
Chapter 5
Slow (50-Meter) Scan

5-29. If no targets are detected in the rapid scan, crew members conduct a more deliberate scan of the
terrain by using vehicle optics (day or thermal mode) or hand-held vision enhancers (see Figure 5-6). The
slow scan is best used by the VC or gunner when in a defensive position or from a short halt.
z
The gunner pauses at short intervals to give his eyes time to focus, searches a strip of the target
area 50 meters deep from right to left.
z
The gunner then searches a strip farther out from left to right, overlapping the first area scanned.
z
If another crew member is also scanning, he uses the same technique starting from the opposite
side. They continue this method until the entire assigned sector has been searched.
Figure 5-6. Slow (50-meter) scan

z
z
5-10
For scanning larger buildings in an urban environment, it is recommended that gunners employ
horizontal slow scan and VCs ground-to-roof scanning techniques (see Figure 5-7).
When a suspicious area or possible target signature is detected, he stops and searches the
immediate area thoroughly, using the detailed search method.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Detect
Figure 5-7. Ground-to-rooftop and horizontal slow-scan techniques

Notes. The M2/M3A3 Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS) and CIV, the Abrams
1st Generation forward looking, infrared (FLIR) and CITV and the Long-Range Advanced
Scout Surveillance System (LRAS3) can be electronically zoomed for an intensive observation
of potential targets.
The thermal radiation reflects off glass and prevents crews from reliably seeing through
windows using the thermal imaging system (TIS); therefore, crews should alternate the daylight
and thermal sight while scanning.
Detailed Search
5-30. If no targets are detected using the rapid or slow scanning methods, crews should use the vehicle
optics (day and night) to make a careful, deliberate search, either while stationary or moving (see Figure
5-8). This method is also used to search small areas or suspected avenues of approach in detail and
z
The crew concentrates on one specific area or location and studies that area intensely.
z
The crews look for direct or indirect target signatures in a clockwise manner around the focal
point area. When using more than one optic (such as IBAS, CITV and CIV), one crew member
scans clockwise and the other scans counterclockwise.
z
Sample target signatures are
Dust created by vehicle movement.
Tracks or tire marks.
Reflections from glass or metal.
Angular objects that do not conform to the surrounding area.
Vegetation that appears out of place.
Flash or smoke from a weapon or missile.
Entrenchments or earthworks.
z
Magnify optics as needed to cover detailed search areas.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
5-11
Chapter 5
5-31. The M2/M3A3 commander and the M1A2 SEP commander can use the CIV/CITV for additional
search capability. Gunners can use all of their sighting systems to perform target search techniques. The
dismounted squad can use the squad leaders display (SLD) in the M2/M3A3 for the acquisition process to
aid the crew in the target detection and for situational awareness (prior to dismounted squad ground
operations).
5-32. The LRAS3 is used on the scout HMMWV and some variants of the Mine Resistant Ambush
Protected (MRAP). The gunner can use this sight in all visibility conditions to provide excellent target
detection. The only shortfall is that the sight is not slaved to a weapon system, requiring the gunner to
reacquire a target with the mounted weapon sight.
Figure 5-8. Detailed-search technique
OFF-CENTER VISION METHOD

5-33. Crew members use the off-center vision method at night without the use of optics. At each likely
target area, they pause a few seconds to detect a target or any movement. If they detect an object, they use
off-center vision to observe it. To prevent object fade-out, they move their eyes frequently in short, abrupt,
irregular movements. Crew members can cup their hands around their eyes to increase night vision.
AIR SEARCH TECHNIQUES

5-34. While scanning their assigned sector for ground targets, crew members must also be aware of air
targets. To aid in the detection of air targets, crews should use the horizontal search-and-scan technique or
vertical search-and-scan technique. Crew members should periodically check the air space above their
assigned sector using the rapid-scan technique. As each crew member completes a rapid scan across the
sector and his field of view meets the horizon, he should switch to a detailed search and make a careful,
deliberate search of tree lines, valleys, and possible air corridors silhouetted by distant background terrain.
5-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Detect
5-35. Attack helicopters try to engage at extremely long ranges; therefore, target identification is difficult.
Crews must make every effort to correctly identify the target. To prevent fratricide, leaders must keep
crews informed of friendly aircraft operating in their units sector.
5-36. Based on mission, enemy, terrain (weather), troops and support available, time available, and civil
considerations (METT-TC) (factors taken into account in situation awareness and in the mission analysis
process), the unit commander may establish one or more air guards in sections, platoons, or convoys.
Note. For tanks an air guard is a designated tank (or tanks) with multipurpose antitank (MPAT)
battlecarried in air mode. If Stinger teams are attached to the unit, they should assume the role as
primary air guard.
5-37. The air guard is primarily responsible for detecting and engaging aerial targets. An air guard crew
searches for aerial targets in the same manner as other crews. Gunners search their assigned sector using
the search and scan techniques; however
z
Sector limits established for the gunner must cover likely helicopter locations and avenues of
approach.
z
Gunners must make sure ground reference points are always within their field of view in order
to maintain directional control and situational awareness.
Horizontal Search and Scan

5-38. Search up to 20 degrees above the horizon by moving the eyes in short movements across the sky,
working your way up and across. Continue the scan pattern below the horizon to detect aircraft flying napof-the-earth (see Figure 5-9).
Figure 5-9. Horizontal search and scan
Vertical Search and Scan

5-39. Search the sky using the horizon as a starting point and prominent terrain features as points of
reference. Move the eyes in short movements into the sky, then back down, continuing this movement
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
5-13
Chapter 5
across the terrain. Scan in the same pattern below the horizon to detect aircraft flying nap-of-the-earth (see
Figure 5-10).
Figure 5-10. Vertical search and scan
Estimation of Upper Search Limits

5-40. When scanning the sky for aircraft, crew members may miss high-flying aircraft if they limit their
search too near the horizon; yet, they are likely to miss low-flying aircraft if they expand the upper limits
of their search too high above the horizon. The correct upper limit of search is 20 degrees. Estimate 20
degrees using the technique illustrated (see Figure 5-11). With the fingers fully spread, the tip of the thumb
is the upper search limit.
Figure 5-11. Estimating 20 degrees

Note. Enemy aircraft typically operate in pairs. If a pair of aircraft is acquired, a second set of
aircraft should be expected. There may be one to four pairs of aircraft conducting an attack
mission.
5-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Detect
5-41. For flat terrain the horizontal search and scan technique is preferred. An alternate method of
conducting this scan is for the crew member to scan the horizon by moving their eyes from object to object.
They can see more detail this way than with a continuous scan of the horizon. For hilly terrain the vertical
search and scan technique is preferred.
GROUND AND AIR SEARCH TIPS

5-42. All of the optical devices available to a crew can be used to acquire targets.
z
Initial scanning can be done without optics. The members should scan different locations.
z
Target search is continuous. Any possible target(s) missed on the first or second scan may be
seen on the third or fourth scan.
z
The crew members must look for targets and target locations using proper scanning methods
within their assigned sectors.
z
Sector discipline is vital for both the crew member as well as the crew as a whole to ensure
constant coverage of their assigned sectors.
z
While on the move, the crew should use the rapid scan method, constantly scanning their entire
sector.
z
On optics with an adjustable reticle, the gunner should adjust the reticle brightness until the
reticle is barely visible. The vehicle dome lights should be off or in the filtered position, and the
panel light dimmer knob on the BFV should be adjusted to dim.
z
On the BFV, the commanders sight extension (CSE) should be covered when not utilized. It
enhances the gunners sight picture by reducing the amount of ambient light being reflected
through the integrated sight unit (ISU) optics from the CSE.
z
Operations during chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) conditions limit the
crew members abilities to acquire and locate targets. Whatever the platform, the crews fields of
view are greatly narrowed while wearing protective masks.
z
The crew members must search in areas where targets are most likely to appear, such as avenues
of approach, wood lines, and reverse-slope firing positions. This can be achieved by the VC
determining where he would be if he were the threat.
z
The crew should not use zoom when using rapid scans to detect targets.
z
On the M2A3 when the sight is unstowed and turned on and the commanders tactical display
(CTD) is on the map screen, the dismounts can use the SLD to help the M2/M3A3 crew in the
detection process by monitoring one of four videos (drivers vision enhancement [DVE], IBAS,
CTD, or CIV).
Note. Ground and air search techniques are used in conjunction with sector search techniques.
SECTOR SEARCH TECHNIQUES

5-43. Below are the following techniques that are used when more than one crewman is available for
searching.
Sector Overlapping
5-44. Crews must ensure the sectors they scan overlap those that have already been scanned or overlap
those of other crew members that are also scanning (see Figure 5-12).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
5-15
Chapter 5
Figure 5-12. Sector overlapping
Sector Divided
5-45. The vehicle crews divide the sector between them. One crew member scans one half of the sector,
and another scans the other half, ensuring the entire sector area is overlapped at the center of the sector (see
Figure 5-13).
Figure 5-13. Sector divided
5-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Detect
Near-to-Far Sector Search

5-46. The commander searches far using CITV/CIV (M1A2, M2A3), binoculars, or night vision devices,
and the gunner searches near using the primary sights or other optics to detect enemy target for the same
sector.
ACQUISITION REPORTS
5-47. Targets acquired by a crew or dismount team member are immediately reported to the VC by an
acquisition report. This target handover technique must take place before the determination step of the
engagement decision. An acquisition report consists of three elements:
z
Alert (optional).
z
Target description.
z
Target location.
5-48. For example: DRIVER REPORT, TWO MOVING PCs, ELEVEN OCLOCK.).
5-49. The description element of the report usually serves as the alert element (for example: TWO
MOVING PCs, ELEVEN OCLOCK.).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
5-17
Chapter 6
Identify
Target identification is one of the most important steps in the detect, identify, decide,
engage, and assess (DIDEA) process. Identification is the process of attaining an
accurate characteristic and discriminatory aspect of detected objects on the
battlefield. With proper training, timely application of the identify step in the
DIDEA process can occur (see Figure 6-1). Timely application is important for crew
members so they can engage hostile forces on the battlefield before the enemy can
engage them. Although the identification process encompasses classification,
identification, and discrimination, depending on the situation and the tactical decision
made, identification will be, as a minimum, discriminated as friend, enemy, or
noncombatant. By knowing and understanding the identification process, crew
members can engage the enemy in a timely manner and reduce casualties and
fatalities due to fratricide.
Unknown objects should never be engaged, rather the identification process should
continue until positive identification has been achieved. For example, a crew detects
an object in their sector and classifies it as a personnel carrier (PC), but cannot
positively identify it by type, nor discriminate it as friend or foe. The potential target
could not be classified as a noncombatant because the crew has positively determined
it is a combat vehicle. The object would be characterized as an unidentified PC and
the crew would not engage the object. It would remain unidentified until the crew
could close on the target, let the target close on them, or employ other means to
positively identify the object as friend or foe. If the object engages you during the
identification process, the crew is still required to discriminate between friend, foe, or
noncombatant in order to prevent potential fratricide.
Contents
Section I Classification .......................... 6-1
Section II Identification .......................... 6-2
Ground Vehicle ................................... 6-2
Aircraft Vehicle Identification............... 6-9
Section III Discrimination ..................... 6-13

Discrimination Definitions .................. 6-13
Joint Combat Identification Marking
Systems ............................................ 6-13
SECTION I CLASSIFICATION
6-1. Classification is the first step toward identification. It is the process of categorizing targets by types
(such as truck, tank, and PC). Soldiers can quickly scan the targets key recognition features and then
categorize it accordingly. Key recognition features are features on a vehicle that clearly identify it as a
certain nomenclature. When using key recognition features to determine nomenclature, crew members
should identify as many key features as possible to accurately identify the vehicle. Using only one or two
key recognition features greatly increases the chance of fratricide due to the increased number of vehicle
variants worldwide.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-1
Chapter 6
Figure 6-1. Engagement process (identify)
SECTION II IDENTIFICATION
GROUND VEHICLE
6-2. Once a target has been classified, it must be accurately identified by nomenclature. Identification is
the positive determination of a target by nomenclature or series, such as T-80 or Scorpion series. Once the
target has been classified, the crew observes key recognition features to positively identify the target.
6-3. A helpful method to aid in the identification of armored and wheeled vehicles is by recognizing key
features of a vehicle and using the wheels, hull, armament, track (WHAT).
6-4. When identifying wheeled and armored vehicles using WHAT, some questions to consider are
z
Wheels/track
How many wheels or road wheels are there and what is their spacing?
What type of suspension does the track have? Is the track unsupported (see Figure 6-2 and
Figure 6-3) or supported (see Figure 6-4)?
How many support rollers does it have?
What is the size/width of the track?
6-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Identify
Figure 6-2. Unsupported track (example one)
Figure 6-3. Unsupported track (example two)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-3
Chapter 6
Figure 6-4. Supported track

z
Hull:
Is the hull boat shaped (see Figure 6-5) or boxed shaped (see Figure 6-6)?
Figure 6-5. Boat shaped hull
6-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Identify
Figure 6-6. Boxed shaped hull
Does it contain a trim vane (see Figure 6-7)?
Figure 6-7. Trim vane
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-5
Chapter 6
Are there hydro-jets for amphibious uses (see Figure 6-8)?
Figure 6-8. Hydrojets
6-6
Are external fuel cells present?

What and how many track skirts does the vehicle have?
Where and what shape is the exhaust?
Where is the engine located?
Where is the drivers position?
Are there troop doors or hatches?
Are infantry firing ports visible?
Armament:
What type/size of main armament does it appear to have?
Are there secondary weapons?
Where is the bore evacuator (see Figure 6-9)?
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Identify
Figure 6-9. Bore evacuator
Is there a thermal shroud?

Is there a presence of a muzzle break/flash suppressor?
Is the main armament short or long?
What shape is the mantle (see Figure 6-10), if any?
Figure 6-10. Gun mantle
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-7
Chapter 6
Turret:
What shape and size is the turret?
Where is the turret mounted on the hull?
How many and what shape are the hatches (if visible)?
Does the vehicle have a fording snorkel kit (see Figure 6-11)?
Figure 6-11. Fording kit
Are grenade launchers present?

Are there troop rails visible?
Are there reactive tiles (see Figure 6-12)?
Figure 6-12. Armored reactive tiles

6-5. Once the key recognition features on the target have been identified, the crew, through training,
should be able to identify the exact nomenclature and should move on to target discrimination. Crews
identifying vehicles should consider which key features should be used primarily. Certain aspects of
vehicles never change even with variants, such as roadwheel number spacing and position of the turret
mounted on the hull. Using key features similar to reactive armor tiles, external fuel cells or track skirts
should only be used to validate or reinforce positive identification.
6-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Identify
6-6. For example, the gunner classifies a target as a tank because of the low silhouette, large gun tube,
and tracks. Using the WHAT method, he then looks at the targets wheels. From this he determines that the
suspension system has no support rollers and five road wheels. As he looks at the hull, he notes that it is
box-like and has a distinct splash guard. As he moves to the armament, he identifies the incomparable bore
evacuator at the end of the gun tube. Continuing on to the turret, it is smooth and rounded, and the troop
rails, one straight and one bowed are clearly visible. From his observations, he identifies the target as a
T-55 tank (see Figure 6-13).
Figure 6-13. Key recognition features (armored)

6-7. A crew member using the WHAT format and being familiar with key recognition features of
vehicles, will significantly increase the speed at which the threat vehicle can be identified and engaged
while reducing the probability of fratricide. Although using this format will aid crew members in
identifying vehicles, they should be aware that it does not complete the identification process. Crew
members may identify the vehicle as a T-72 however, with over 30 countries using it worldwide, it may be
operated by a coalition or allied force. Discrimination of the vehicle will be discussed later in this chapter.
AIRCRAFT VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

6-8. Similar to the WHAT format used in the identification of ground vehicles, the fuselage, armament,
rotors, and tail (FART) format is used when identifying aerial vehicles.
6-9. While identifying helicopters consider the following:
z
Fuselage
What shape and size is the fuselage?
Are there any weapon sights visible?
Are there landing wheels or skids?
Where is the exhaust located?
What shape is the nose?
Are troop doors present?
Where are the engines mounted (see Figure 6-14)?
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-9
Chapter 6
Figure 6-14. Engine mounting

Does the cockpit appear to be for one pilot or for a crew?
Is a large amount of the cockpit glass or other material?
Are there any windows visible?
Does it have any stub wings?
Are external fuel tanks visible?
Are there any other dominant features?

Armament
What type of main armament does it have?
Are there any secondary armaments?
Are the weapons attached to the wings or fuselage?
Is the weapon sighting system(s) visible?

Rotors
How many rotor blades are there?
Is there any type of equipment or sensors above the rotors (see Figure 6-15)?
Figure 6-15. Rotary wing external sensors
6-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Identify
Tail
How long is the tail wing?
Is there a tail rotor? If so, which side is the tail rotor on?
Is it a normal (see Figure 6-16) or fenestron (see Figure 6-17) tail rotor?
Figure 6-16. Tail rotor
Figure 6-17. Fenestron tail rotor
3 September 2009
Does it have rear horizontal stabilizer wings (see Figure 6-18)?

Is there an exhaust on the tail?
Does it have a rear landing wheel or skid?
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-11
Chapter 6
Figure 6-18. Rear horizontal stabilizer wings

6-10. While observing the helicopter in Figure 6-19 and using the FART method, the gunner identifies five
rotor blades and no distinct navigational or radar equipment above them. He then moves to its armament.
There he notices an AT-6 Spiral and a medium caliber machine gun. As the gunner moves to the fuselage,
he notices dual air intakes located just above the cockpit and the exhaust located on the side. The windows
on the fuselage are distinct and square and the cockpit is bubble-like in shape and is for more than one
person. When moving to the tail of the helicopter he notices that the tail rotor is located on the left side of
the platform and that the rear portion of the landing gear is not a wheel but rather a skid. From the
identification features, the gunner can now identify this platform as a MI-24 Hind-F.
Figure 6-19. Key identification features (helicopter)
6-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Identify
SECTION III DISCRIMINATION
DISCRIMINATION DEFINITIONS
6-11. Discrimination is the determination whether a target is friend, foe, or noncombatant. The following
list defines each:
z
Friend. Any force, US or allied, that is jointly engaged in combat operations with an enemy in a
theater of operation.
Foe (enemy combatant). Any individual who has engaged in antagonistic activities against a
friendly force and oppose the views and goals of friendly or allied forces.
Noncombatants. Personnel, organizations, or agencies that are not directly engaged in combat
operations. This includes individuals, such as medical personnel, chaplains, United Nations
(UN) observers, or media representatives. Organizations similar to the Red Cross or Red
Crescent can also be classified as noncombatants. In a theater of operation, most individuals will
fall into this category.
6-12. Although Russian equipment has been sold in large numbers worldwide, Soldiers could find
themselves facing British, French, and American-made equipment operating as a threat force. Further, it is
likely in any future conflict U.S. forces will deploy as part of a coalition of allied nations which may use a
wide variety of equipment. The discrimination process is also complicated by the increasing likelihood of
having to discriminate between friend/foe and combatant/noncombatant in urban settings. In order to
mitigate against fratricide and unnecessary collateral damage, Soldiers must use all of the situational
awareness (SA) tools available and develop tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) for performing target
discrimination.
JOINT COMBAT IDENTIFICATION MARKING SYSTEMS

6-13. Joint Coalition Identification Marking System (JCIMS) is a system used by U.S. and allied forces for
quick discrimination of personnel and vehicles. JCIMS kits consist of thermal and infrared marking devices
that enable forces equipped with thermal and night-vision devices to identify friendly forces based on the
unique signatures of the JCIMS devices.
6-14. Currently there are three approved systems that make up JCIMSCombat Identification Panels (CIP),
Thermal Identification Panels (TIP), and Phoenix Beacons. The following techniques are provided to assist
crews in target discrimination:
z
CIPs. CIPs are primarily for ground-to-ground identification. CIPs (battle boards) allow a
Soldier looking through a thermal sight to identify a friendly vehicle up to 4,000 meters away.
CIPs are bolted onto combat vehicles and provide a square or rectangle cold image on a hot
background (see Figure 6-20).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-13
Chapter 6
Figure 6-20. Combat identification panel

z
TIPs. TIPs are primarily for air-to-ground identification. These are foldable/rollable thermal
panels that can be tied to the upper surfaces of ground vehicles to aid in recognition from the air
(see Figure 6-21 and Figure 6-22). The TIPs can be utilized with thermals that operate only in
the three to twelve micron (wavelength) range. TIPs can be ordered in either a two square foot
or four square foot sizes, along with a variety of colors. See Figure 6-23 for the national stock
numbers (NSN).
Figure 6-21. Abrams thermal identification panel placement
6-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Identify
Figure 6-22. Bradley thermal identification panel placement
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-15
Chapter 6
NSN
Model
Size
Color
Design
Use
Max range
2590-01-4474937
TIP-3
4x4
Olive
Drab/Orange
Abrams
Boresight
Sight System
Dependent
2590-01-4474934
TIP-4
4x4
Tan/Orange
Abrams
Boresight
Sight System
Dependent
2590-01-4478997
TIP-5
4x4
Olive Drab
Vehicular
Sight System
Dependent
2590-01-4484531
TIP-6
4x4
Tan
Vehicular
Sight System
Dependent
2590-01-4526352
TIP-7
4x4
Olive
Drab/Orange
Apache
Boresight
Sight System
Dependent
2590-01-4526353
TIP-8
4x4
Tan/Orange
Apache
Boresight
Sight System
Dependent
2590-01-5316337
TIP-9
4x4
Light Brown
Vehicular
Sight System
Dependent
2590-01-5020006
TIP-12
2x2
Olive Drab
Personnel
1,000m
2590-01-5020016
TIP-13
2x2
Olive
Drab/Orange
Personnel
1,000m
2590-01-5020020
TIP-14
2x2
Tan
Personnel
1,000m
2590-01-5020025
TIP-15
2x2
Tan/Orange
Personnel
1,000m
Figure 6-23. Thermal identification panel NSN listing

z
6-16
Phoenix Beacons. A flashing near infrared beacon that is clearly visibly through night vision
optics. The user encodes the beacon with unique Morse Code like flashes. The encoded flashes
provide positive combat identification of the user. The Phoenix Light is a 2-ounce infrared
beacon that operates for up to 100+ hours using a 9-volt battery. The infrared signal can be seen
out to a range of 4 kilometers and is mounted on the highest point of the vehicle. A smaller
version of the Phoenix Light is made for dismounted personnel. Phoenix lights are only
viewable through night vision goggles, NOT through thermal sights or forward looking, infrared
(FLIR). The light identifies the vehicle and the individual Soldier from both the ground and air
(see Figure 6-24). Phoenix Beacons have the potential to be viewed by enemy elements with
night vision goggles. Units should tailor use of the beacon based on mission, enemy, terrain
(weather), troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC). See
Table 6-1 for the NSN for the Phoenix Beacons.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Identify
Figure 6-24. Phoenix Beacon

Table 6-1. Phoenix Beacon NSN listing
Model
NSN
Use
Color
Range
IR-14
5855-01-438-4588
Tactical
Infrared
5 miles
IR-15 V
5855-01-396-8732
Trainer
Green
5 miles
IR-25
5855-01-451-9877
Tactical
Infrared
5 miles
MARKINGS
6-15. Units may also have other means of discriminating friendly vehicles from enemy. This may come
from unit markings based off of the Army Combat Vehicle Marking Systems and unit standing operating
procedures (SOP) and also from SA based equipment such as Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and
Below (FBCB2) or Blue Force Tracker.
z
Unit Markings. Unit markings are outlined by AR 746-2 and set based off of the unit SOP.
They must distinctly identify a vehicle as friendly, and Soldiers must be well trained to identify
those markings (see Figure 6-25). There are several items that units can use to mark vehicles.
Examples are
Battlefield Reference Marking System (BRMS). The BRMS marking system panels come
in many different patterns. Based off the unit SOP, vehicles can place the panels on their
vehicle to differentiate different companies within a battalion. Not only could the BRMS
panels be used for making vehicle systems, but they could also be used for boresighting
vehicles or making target reference points (TRP). See Figure 6-25 for a list of NSNs and
their respective design.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-17
Chapter 6
Model
NSN
Type A
6910-01-388-7699
Type B
6910-01-388-7660
Type C
6910-01-388-7624
Type D
6910-01-460-8098
Type E
6910-01-460-8103
Type F
6910-01-460-8107
Type G
6910-01-460-8111
Type I
NA
Design
Note. Only 4x4 panels are available in T-Back (see Figure 6-26). The
2x2 size is only available in Flatback.
Figure 6-25. BRMS NSN listing
Figure 6-26. BRMS T-Back style
VS-17 panels (NSN 8345-00-174-6865) provide a bright recognition feature that allows
crews to identify friendly vehicles through the daysight (see Figure 6-27).
Figure 6-27. VS-17 panel
6-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Identify
Chemical lights provide a means of marking vehicles at night. However, chemical lights are
not visible through a thermal sight. An infrared (IR) variant is available for use with night
vision devices.
Unit symbols may also be used to mark friendly vehicles. An inverted V, for example,
painted on the flanks, rear, and fronts of a vehicle, aid in identifying a target as friendly.
This is typically limited to operations to enhance effectiveness.
SA. For digitally equipped units, the FBCB2 represent the best SA tool for assisting in the
discrimination of targets (see Figure 6-28). Known friendly and neutral locations can be
populated to the firing vehicles graphics as icons even if they are not FBCB2 equipped to
mitigate fratricide and collateral damage. The other primary source of SA comes from
operations order (OPORD)/fragmentary order (FRAGO) and combat reporting. Leaders are
responsible for keeping their subordinates aware of changes in the friendly and enemy situation,
to assist in the discrimination process.
Figure 6-28. Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
6-19
Chapter 7
Decide
Once the target has been identified, the decision is made to engage. The engagement
decision process is a series of progressive and interdependent steps (or actions)
making rules of engagement decisions, determining threat levels, selecting weapon
systems or ammunition, and making confirmation (see Figure 7-1). The vehicle
commander (VC) is ultimately responsible for the actions of his crew; however, when
the commander is unavailable the responsibility of target identification and
engagement is relinquished to the gunner. On systems other than the tank or the
Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) if the VC cannot see the target, or when speed is
needed, the responsibility of target identification and engagement is relinquished to
the gunner.
Contents
Section I Target Determination ............. 7-1
Threat Levels ...................................... 7-2
Target Prioritization............................. 7-2
Weapon/Ammunition Selection ........... 7-3
Target Confirmation ............................ 7-4
Section II Immediate Range
Determination ............................................ 7-5
Immediate Determination .................... 7-5
Laser Range Finder ............................ 7-5
Section III Deliberate Range

Determination .......................................... 7-11
Mil Relationship Method .................... 7-11
Maps/Digital Maps Method................ 7-17
SECTION I TARGET DETERMINATION

7-1. There are three target threat levels to defeat multiple targets on the battlefield; the most dangerous
targets must be engaged first. Commanders determine target threat levels based on threat analysis of the
mission area. All soldiers must know the engagement priorities of their unit; however, the VC is
responsible for determining the immediate target threat level based on the threat posture when time is
available. When time is not available, however, the responsibility falls on the gunner.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
7-1
Chapter 7
Figure 7-1. Engagement process (decide)
THREAT LEVELS
7-2. The threat levels are most dangerous, dangerous, and least dangerous.
z
Most Dangerous. When the crew observes a target with armor-defeating capabilities that
appears to be preparing to engage them, the target threat level is most dangerous. This type of
target is the greatest threat and must be engaged immediately.
z
Dangerous. When the crew observes an armor-defeating target that is not preparing to engage
them, the target threat level is dangerous. This type of target should be engaged after all most
dangerous targets have been destroyed.
z
Least Dangerous. When the crew observes a target that does not have an armor-defeating
weapon system, the target threat level is least dangerous. Although these types of targets do not
have the means to destroy your vehicle, they may still have the capability to call in other
equipment that can. This type of target is engaged after all most dangerous and dangerous
targets have been destroyed, unless it has a high priority of engagement (command and control
vehicles).
TARGET PRIORITIZATION
7-3. When multiple targets of the same threat level are encountered, the targets must be prioritized
according to the threat they represent. The determining factors used to prioritize these targets are engage
z
Close-range targets before engaging long-range targets.
z
Stationary targets before engaging moving targets.
z
Frontal targets before engaging flank or rear targets.
7-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Decide
7-4. Crews must be well versed in the threats armament and maximum effective range in order to classify
targets accurately and engage in the most efficient manner. A dismount with a rocket-propelled grenade
(RPG) or a technical truck with antitank guided missiles (AGTM) are extremely dangerous targets for all
vehicle platforms within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT), including the Abrams.
WEAPON/AMMUNITION SELECTION
Note. If the platform detecting a target is incapable of destroying it or rules of engagement
preclude using the only available effective weapon, crews must report the target immediately so
other military options/weapons systems can be brought to bear.
7-5. Weapon/ammunition selection is the logical selection of a weapon or ammunition that is appropriate
for a given target (see Table 7-1). In selecting weapon and ammunition type to utilize against targets, the
crew must determine the threat type and range. When selecting weapons a key consideration is choosing
the weapon that will achieve target effect with minimal collateral damage in urban environments. Crews
must also consider their proximity to other friendly forces.
Table 7-1. Ammunition/weapon selection
Weapon
Range (meters)
Target Type
M249 (5.56mm)
0 to 900
Troop
0 to 600
Unarmored
0 to 900
Troop
0 to 900
Light Armored
0 to 900
Unarmored
0 to 1,800
Troop
0 to 1,500
Unarmored
M240 (7.62mm)
M2 (.50 cal)
MK19 (40mm)
25mm
120mm
AT-4
3 September 2009
Arming Range(s)
0 to 1,500
Light Armored
0 to 800
Aerial
40 to 2,212
Troop
18 to 36 (HE)
40 to 1,500
Unarmored
18 to 30 (HEDP)
40 to 1,500
Light Armored
0 to 3,000
Troop
0 to 3,000
Unarmored
0 to 2,000
Light Armored
0 to 1,200
Aerial (HE)
1,200 to 2,000
Aerial (AP)
150 to 500
Troop
11 to 30 (HEAT)
200 to 5,000
Troop
15 to 60 (OR)
200 to 5,000
Unarmored
15 to 60 (MPAT)
200 to 5,000
Light Armored
200 to 5,000
Aerial (MPAT)
200 to 5,000
Armored (SABOT)
0 to 300
Unarmored
10 to 300
Light Armored
10 to 300
Armored
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
10 to 200 (HEI-T)
7-3
Chapter 7
Table 7-1. Ammunition/weapon selection (continued)

Weapon
Javelin
TOW
Range (meters)
Target Type
Arming Range(s)
65 to 2,000
Light Armored
65
65 to 2,000
Armored
65 to 3,000
Light Armored
30 to 65 (TOW)
65 to 3,000
Armored
110 to 200 (TOW-2B)
2000 to 3,000
Aerial
43 to 65 (TOW-BB)
65 to 3,750
Light Armored (TOW-2)
65 to 3,750
Armored (TOW-2)
2000 to 3,750
Aerial (TOW-2)
110 to 4,500
Light Armored (TOW-2B Aero)
200 to 4,500
Armored (TOW-2B Aero)
2000 to 4,500
Aerial (TOW-2B Aero)
Notes.
1. Should only be used for light armored vehicles when using antipersonnel (AP), armor-piercing incendiary
(API), or saboted light armor penetrator (SLAP) ammunition.
2. AP should be used while engaging light armored vehicles with 25-mm ammunition.
3. When engaging troops with M1028.
TARGET CONFIRMATION
7-6. Target confirmation is the rapid verification of the initial identification and discrimination of the
target, and is usually done by the VC. Confirmation takes place after the fire command, but before the
command of execution element and simultaneously as the gunner is completing his initial lay. Gunners also
go through a confirmation step. As the gunner makes his final, precise lay, he ensures that the target is
hostile before announcing IDENTIFIED.
7-7. If the gunner confirms that the target is hostile, he completes his final lay and engages the target on
order. If the gunner determines that the target is friendly or neutral, he announces his confirmation to the
VC (FRIENDLY or NEUTRAL). If he cannot determine the nature of the target, he announces
UNKNOWN. The VC then confirms the target is in the gunners field of view and conducts the combat
identification process again. If the commander cannot establish positive identification, he must either close
on the target, let the target close on him, or use other methods to establish positive identification of the
target, before beginning engagement execution.
WARNING
To prevent fratricide a crew should never engage a potential
target unless it is positively identified to be a threat target.
7-8. The VC must be informed of the tactical situation to assist in target confirmation. This can be
achieved through battlefield situation awareness from subordinates and higher elements or by other
technological elements such as Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) or Blue Force
Tracker). The M2/M3A2 Operation Desert Storm (ODS) appliques and the M2/M3A3s Squad Leaders
Display (SLD) provide battlefield awareness for the crew.
7-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Decide
SECTION II IMMEDIATE RANGE DETERMINATION
IMMEDIATE DETERMINATION
7-9. Range determination significantly affects target engagement. Errors in range determination cause
more first round misses than errors in deflection. Range errors that cause the first round to go over the
target are particularly serious because observing and adjusting from that round is difficult. Range
determination can be broken down into two broad categories: immediate range determination and
deliberate range determination.
7-10. Immediate methods of range determination afford the combat crew the most reliable means of the
range to a given target. The preferred method of immediate determination is the laser range finder (LRF) or
Bradley eye safe laser range finder (BELRF) on those vehicles so equipped. The other methods of
immediate range determination all rely on crew members employing the properties of the sighting systems
of their vehicles, and are preferred to other methods of range determination/estimation. Below are the
immediate range determination methods.
LASER RANGE FINDER

7-11. With the Abrams, the preferred method of range determination is the LRF/ELRF. The LRF can
range to targets located 200 to 7,990 meters from its location. If the range to the target is between 200
meters and 3,990 +/- 10 meters (4,990 +/- 10 meters on the M1A2 System Enhancement Program [SEP])
the range is automatically induced into the fire control system to calculate a ballistic solution and the range
will appear in the gunners primary sight (GPS) symbology.
7-12. In a Bradley, the LRF/BELRF can range to targets located from 200 to 9,990 meters in five meter
increments to an accuracy of +/- 10 meters. If the range to the target is between 190 to 3,000 meters, the
range is automatically induced into the fire control system for a ballistic solution.
7-13. The Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance System (LRAS3) is a long-range multi-sensor system
for the scout High Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV) platform. It is normally vehicle
mounted but is capable of operating dismounted on a tripod. The LRAS3 provides precise target location
through incorporation of advanced second generation forward-looking infrared (FLIR), a global
positioning interferometer, an ELRF and a television camera. The system is capable of spotting targets up
to 15 km away and can calculate ranges to within +/- 5 meters. As with the Bradleys reticle lead lines, the
LRAS3 can use its narrow field of view (NFOV) reticle to determine ranges to targets using the milrelation formula (see Figure 7-2). Remember, the targets dimensions must be known to estimate the range
(see Table 7-4). By using the reticle in the wide field of view (WFOV), operators can use the reticle
relationship method, to determine the range (see Figure 7-3).
7-14. Using an AN/GVS-5, the crew member can quickly and accurately determine the range for the
gunner. The AN/GVS-5 is organic to the scout platoon. It is a light weight, hand held, binocular-like LRF
capable of determining ranges between 200 and 9,990 meters (+/-10 meters).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
7-5
Chapter 7
Figure 7-2. LRAS3 NFOV reticle
Figure 7-3. LRAS3 WFOV reticle indicators

7-15. The following various conditions can cause effective use of the LRF to be lost:
z
Internal LRF failure.
z
Vehicle failure.
z
Environmental conditions (fog, falling snow, heavy rain).
z
Man-made or battlefield obscurants (smoke).
z
Multiple returns from a target smaller than the LRF beam width and obstructions to the front
and/or rear of the target.
7-16. All gunners, VCs, and operators must be familiar with all of the range determination tools that their
system offers them to cope with loss of effective use of the LRF.
ABRAMS GUNNERS AUXILIARY SIGHT

7-17. The gunners auxiliary sight (GAS) is an articulated telescope, coaxially mounted to the main gun.
The M1A1 and M1A2 SEP include illuminated ballistic reticles for kinetic energy (KE)/STAFF and
multipurpose tank (MPAT)/high-explosive antitank (HEAT) ammunition. The GAS offers 8X
magnification with an 8-degree field of view. It is filtered to protect the gunners vision from laser
reflections.
7-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Decide
BRADLEY AUXILIARY SIGHT

7-18. For the Bradley, the backup sight, known as the auxiliary (or aux) sight, is used when the Integrated
Sight Unit (ISU)/Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS) is not operational or turret power has
failed. The auxiliary sight has stadia lines for range determination and application of the correct
superelevation based on range. There are stadia lines for armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer
(APDS-T) and high-explosive incendiary with tracer (HEI-T) ammunition. This system is used to
determine the range and to engage the frontal or flank view of a BMP.
z
The auxiliary sight has two range scales. The high-explosive (HE) scale is on the left side of the
reticle and is represented by broken lines that extend to 3,200 meters. The antipersonnel (AP)
scale is on the right side represented by a solid line that extends to 3,400 meters (see Figure 74). The numbers 4 and 6 represent 400 meters and 600 meters, respectively. The HE range scale
continues to 32 (not shown in figure).
z
The range to a flank target is determined by elevating the gun until both the front and rear of the
target appears to be touching the AP stadia lines, as shown in Figure 7-4. The range to a flank
HE target is choked in the same manner, using the HE lines.
z
To determine the range to a frontal target, the gunner uses the half stadia method of aligning the
center vertical ranging lines with one side of the target and aligns the appropriate ammunition
stadia line on either side of the target (see Figure 7-5). When using the coax, the gunner uses the
HE stadia lines.
Figure 7-4. Bradley Stadia reticle on flank target
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
7-7
Chapter 7
Figure 7-5. Bradley Stadia reticle on frontal target
ABRAMS GUNNERS AUXILIARY SIGHT STADIA RETICLE

7-19. On the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP, the stadia reticle pattern is included on both GAS reticles. If the LRF
is inoperative, the stadia reticle may be used to determine the range to a target. The pattern has a base line
and a series of range lines for full-height targets, and a series of dots for ranging at a target in hull defilade.
The GAS stadia reticle is designed to permit gunners to determine range to the target if other, more precise,
ranging methods are not available. The full-size portion of the reticle is designed for a 2.30-meter-high
target (see Figure 7-6), while the turret portion is for a 0.90-meter-high target (see Figure 7-7). With
practice, gunners using the stadia reticle can consistently determine the range to within 100 meters.
Figure 7-6. Abrams Stadia reticle with full target
7-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Decide
Figure 7-7. Abrams Stadia reticle, defilade target
BRADLEY ISU STADIA RETICLE

7-20. For the Bradley, the ISU Horizontal Ranging Stadia (Choke Sight) is used. This range determination
method should be used only when firing from a defensive position.
z
The reticle within the ISU has a choke sight used to estimate the range to BMP-type targets. The
choke sight is used for a 1.8-meter-high target. Since the hull of a BMP is a standard hull that is
used on various vehicles throughout the world, the ranging stadia can be used for accurately
ranging to these different vehicles (see Figure 7-8).
z
To use the choke sight, the gunner moves the turret until the ranging stadia line appear to touch
the vehicle in the following manner:
Align the horizontal line to the bottom (track) of the target vehicle.
Move the turret horizontally along the target until the top of the hull appears to touch the
stadia line. The range is read from the stadia line at the point where the top of the hull
touches. If this point is between the tick marks, estimation must be made, and the range is
then indexed into the ISU. Then, the gunner or commander should relay the reticle on the
target.
z
The choke sight can be used to range to targets in turret-down positions. A technique in ranging
to a hull down target is to choke the target. The gunner aligns the bottom horizontal line to the
bottom of the target and aligns the stadia line until the top of the target appears to touch the lines
(see Figure 7-9). The gunner reads this range and divides that number in half. This technique is
less accurate than ranging a fully exposed target.
Note. Choke only the hull, not the whole vehicle. Do not choke weapons or lights mounted on
top of the turret.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
7-9
Chapter 7
Figure 7-8. Integrated Sight Unit choke (full target)
Figure 7-9. Integrated Sight Unit choke (defilade target)
RECOGNITION METHOD
7-21. With practice, range determination by recognition is quick and accurate; however, this method will
not work with passive or thermal sights. The principle of the recognition method is simple. When the VC
sees a target, he can determine the range according to what he recognizes. For example, if a target can be
recognized as a tank with the unaided eye, it is within 1,500 meters; if a target can be recognized as a tank
through magnifying optics (such as GAS and binoculars), it is within 5,000 meters (see Table 7-2). Table
7-3 gives range estimations for targets as seen with the unaided eye and through magnifying optics
(binoculars).
7-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Decide
Table 7-2. Recognition method

Range Determination
Recognition Method
Target
Unaided Eye
Magnification 8 Power
Tank crew, troops, machine gun, mortar,

antitank gun, antitank missile launchers
500m
2,000m
Tank, personnel carrier, truck (by model)
1,000m
4,000m
Tank, howitzer, personnel carrier, truck
1,500m
5,000m
Armor vehicle, wheel vehicle
2,000m
6,000m
7-22. When using the recognition method, the size and clarity of the target in relation to its background
must be considered. Some light and terrain conditions make a target seem closer; other conditions make it
seem farther away. The conditions outlined in the following table may cause an error in estimating range
by the recognition method.
Table 7-3. Effect of target conditions on range estimation
Target Conditions
Seems Closer:
Seems Farther:
Bright, clear day

Large targets
At sea
Sun in front of target
Targets at higher elevations
Bright colors white, red, yellow
Fog, rain, haze, twilight

Camouflaged targets
Sun behind target
Small targets
Targets at lower elevations
Dark colors
Contrast
Desert
Looking across ravines, hollows, rivers, depressions
100-METER UNIT-OF-MEASURE METHOD

7-23. To use this method, the VC or gunner must be able to visualize a distance of 100 meters on the
ground. For ranges up to 500 meters, he estimates the number of 100-meter increments between the two
objects he wishes to measure. Beyond 500 meters, the VC or gunner must select a point halfway to the
object(s), determine the number of 100-meter increments to the halfway point, and then double it to find
the range to the object(s).
SECTION III DELIBERATE RANGE DETERMINATION
MIL RELATIONSHIP METHOD

7-24. The mil relationship method may be used in deliberate range determination. When using the mil
relation method the crew must use binoculars or a sight system with a calibrated mil-scale to measure the
target.
7-25. The basis of the mil relation method is that one mil or equals a width (or height) of 1 meter at a
range of 1,000 meters or in a unit of angular measurement, equal to 1/6,400 of a circle or about 17.79
(17.8) degrees. The relationship of the angle, the length of the sides of the angle (range), and the width
(height) between the sides remains constant. Figure 7-10 shows the constant relationship as the angle
increases from 1 to 2 mils and the range increases from 1,000 to 2,000 meters.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
7-11
Chapter 7
7-26. Standard Army measurements are completed and expressed in the metric system. Other units of
measurement (yards, feet, or inches) may be substituted to express the target size or range; however, all
information must be expressed in the same unit of measure.
Figure 7-10. Constant mil-angle relationship

7-27. To use this method, the crew member must know the width, height, and length of the target. He
determines the known dimension with the binoculars mil scale or a non-ballistic sight reticle, substitutes
the mil relation, and computes the range (see Table 7-4). When measuring the frontal width, he measures
only the vehicles front slope (from left front corner to right front corner). When measuring flank width, he
measures the entire vehicle (see Figure 7-11). Accuracy of this method depends on knowing the target
dimensions and the commanders ability to make precise measurements with binoculars or the sight reticle.
7-28. Using Table 7-4 and by achieving proper vehicle identification, a crew member can properly
determine the standard mil size of the vehicle. This can then be utilized into the calculation of the mil
relationship method of range determination. Figure 7-11 through Figure 7-16 show the frontal and flank
view of a BMP-2 and where the information in the table applies.
7-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Decide
Table 7-4. Mil relation for various targets

BMP-2
Target width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 6.75 meters
140
0
1500
1700
1900
2300
2700
3400
4500
6800
Front 3.0 meters
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
1500
2000
3000
Height 2.3 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 5.5 meters
1100
1200
1400
1600
1800
2200
2800
3700
5500
Front 2.35 meters
500
500
600
700
800
1000
1200
1600
2400
Height 2.3 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
Target width (mils)
22.5
20
17.5
15
12.5
10
7.5
2.5
Flank 17.01 meters
800
900
1000
1100
1400
1700
2300
3400
6804
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Front 4.81 meters
1000
1100
1200
1400
1600
1900
2400
3200
4800
Height 3.82 meters
800
800
1000
1100
1300
1500
1900
2500
3800
BRDM-2
Target width (mils)
Mi-28 HAVOK
Mi-24 HIND-D
Target width (mils)
22.5
20
17.5
15
12.5
10
7.5
2.5
Flank 17.25 meters
800
900
1000
1200
1400
1700
2300
3500
6900
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Height 3.9 meters
800
900
1000
1100
1300
1600
2000
2600
3900
Front 6.9 meters
1400
1500
1700
2000
2300
2800
3500
4600
6900
T-72
Target width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 6.7 meters
1300
1500
1700
1900
2200
2700
3400
4500
6700
Front 3.4 meters
700
800
900
1000
1100
1400
1700
2300
3400
Height 2.3 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
T-80
Target width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 7.0 meters
1400
1600
1800
2000
2300
2800
3500
4700
7000
Front 3.6 meters
700
800
900
1000
1100
1400
1700
2300
3400
Height 2.2 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 6.9 meters
1400
1500
1700
2000
2300
2800
3500
4600
6900
Front 3.8 meters
800
900
1000
1100
1300
1500
1900
2500
3800
Height 2.2 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
T-90
Target width (mils)
Note. This table is a quick reference for determining the range of widely sold vehicles at
various ranges. The ranges have been rounded-off to the nearest hundredth.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
7-13
Chapter 7
Figure 7-11. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions
Figure 7-12. Flank BMP-2 dimensions
Figure 7-13. Frontal Mi-24 Hind-D dimensions
7-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Decide
Figure 7-14. Flank Mi-24 Hind-D dimensions
Figure 7-15. Frontal T-72 dimensions
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
7-15
Chapter 7
Figure 7-16. Flank T-72 dimensions

7-29. Since the relationship of the target width in mils ( and meters (W) is constant at varying distances,
accurate range determination is possible. The mil relation holds true whether the W factor is width, height,
or length. Therefore, the range can be determined provided the target dimensions are known. Target height
may be the most consistent measurement, because length and width are changing as targets move on the
battlefield.
7-30. There are two WORM formulas beneficial to crew members that can be used to determine
information about an object or target. The crew member determining range will be required to decide
which formula will be used based on known information gathered.
z
The first formula should be used to determine range. This formula will need both the width and
mil value of the vehicle (see Figure 7-17).
Figure 7-17. Measuring width with binoculars
7-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Decide
*Example: STEP 1: The BMP is 6.75 meters long (W). Using binoculars, the commander
determines that the BMP measures 10 mils in length.
STEP 2: The individual determining range substitutes known information into the
formula.
or
STEP 3: Since R is expressed in thousands of meters, multiply by 1,000; and round
off to the nearest tenth. For example: 0.675=0.7 so 0.7 x 1,000 = 700 meters, the
range to the BMP.
z
The second formula is used to determine the width (width, length, height) of an object. This is
important to determine the width of a bridge, for example, that has not been previously
identified. The formula carries the same basic concept as the first formula for determining range.
The operator will need to know the range to the target and the mil size.
Example: STEP 1: The gunner has determined that the range to a bridge is 1,200 meters. The VC,
looking through his binos, determined the mil value to be 2.5 mils.
STEP 2: The individual determining range substitutes known information into the formula.
or
MAPS/DIGITAL MAPS METHOD

7-31. The vehicle crew must have a map to navigate. They must constantly know where they are and
where they are going. (The ANPSN 11 precision lightweight GPS receiver [PLGR] or any other
navigational system will not eliminate the need for maps.) The vehicle crew can also use the map to
determine range. Besides computing distances on a traditional map, special features on the FBCB2 allow
the crew to plot points on the digital map and find the distance between them. A map also allows them to
determine the best battlecarry range setting for the terrain and enemy situation and to adjust the battlecarry
range when the situation changes.
z
Both in offense and defense, the vehicle crew must continually assess likely enemy locations,
engagement areas, and engagement ranges. This information gives the vehicle crew the
capability to rapidly determine range when contact is made.
z
Target reference points (TRP) are used as both direct and indirect fire control measures. These
are entered in the sector sketch for the VC to control his fires and ensure that his reports of
enemy sightings are accurate. Since the range to each TRP is known, this will assist in range
determination.
KNOWN RANGE (RANGE/SKETCH CARDS)

7-32. The primary use of the range or sketch card is to assist the crew in engaging targets during limited
visibility or when effective use of the LRF has been lost. The VC may also use the range or sketch card to
assist in determining range since range data is recorded on the card. The range to a previous target
engagement is also classified as a known range.
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
7-17
Chapter 7
ADJACENT VEHICLE
7-33. Range information can be obtained from an adjacent vehicle that has an operable LRF. If the vehicle
providing the range data is relatively close (lateral distance) to the receiving vehicle, then it will be at the
same range from the target.
FLASH-TO-BANG
7-34. Sound travels through the air at a fairly constant speed, about 330 meters (approximately 1,100 feet)
per second. This makes it easy to estimate range if you can see and hear the action. For example, when you
see the flash or smoke of a weapon, or the dust it raises, immediately start counting at a rate of one count
per second. When you hear the report of the weapon, stop and multiply the number you were counting
when you heard the report by the constant 330. This will be the range to the weapon in meters. If you stop
on the number 3, the range is about 990 meters.
7-35. Practice timing the speed of your count. The best way to do this is to practice with pyrotechnics fired
at known distances. If this is not possible, have someone time you while you count; start over when the
count reaches a number higher than 10. Counting numbers such as 12 and 13 will throw your timing off.
With practice, you can estimate range more accurately with this method than by eye alone.
7-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
Chapter 8
Engage Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew)

Crews must be able to engage multiple targets rapidly while operating within
irregular battle lines. Depending on the tactical situation and the area of operations,
enemy targets may be intermingled with friendly, coalition, and neutral vehicles and
personnel. Crews must be proficient in the techniques and procedures for detecting
and identifying potential targets; making engagement decisions; executing and
assessing engagements against hostile targets, and employing fire commands to
orchestrate the engagement process. Chapter 8 discusses the elements of the fire
command and how to use fire commands on Abrams, Bradley, and armed vehicles
during the engagement process (see Figure 8-1).
In Chapter 8, the use of the term main gun is used to describe the 120mm main gun
of the Abrams series of vehicles and the 25mm gun of the Bradley series,
respectively.
The fourth step in the engagement process is execution. Once a target has been
detected, identified, and the decision to engage has been made, the crew uses the
weapons on their platform or at their disposal to eliminate the threat rapidly and
decisively. The key processes in engagement execution are
z
Selecting a method of engagement.
Precision.
Degraded.
z
Initiating the engagement with a fire command.
z
Employing proper gunnery techniques.
In order for crews to take advantage of the various vehicles weapon systems to
quickly lay, engage, and destroy threat targets, crews must be proficient in the
methods and techniques of engagement execution. While some of these methods and
techniques will be common between platforms, most are heavily influenced by the
capabilities and limitations particular to each platform. The available weapon systems
to a crew also include indirect fire systems, so crews should be proficient in calling
for artillery and mortar fires. This section is divided into the following discussion
elements:
z
Common elements of crew fire commands.
z
The engagement process specific to the Abrams vehicle platforms.
z
The engagement process specific to the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV)
platforms.
z
The engagement process specific to the armed High-Mobility Multipurpose
Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV).
z
Calling for indirect fires.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-1
Chapter 8
Contents
Section I Battlecarry ............................... 8-2
Prepare for Contact............................. 8-2
Section II Fire Commands ..................... 8-8
Fire Commands Categories .............. 8-17
Fire Command Terms ....................... 8-22
Subsequent Fire Commands ............ 8-26
Multiple Engagements ...................... 8-29
Section III Engagement Techniques ... 8-32

Employing Vehicle Machine Guns ..... 8-33
Engage Soft Targets ......................... 8-33
Section IV Sample Fire Commands..... 8-43
Section V Indirect Fire .......................... 8-65
Call for Fire........................................ 8-65
Adjusting Fires .................................. 8-74
Figure 8-1. Engagement process (engage)
SECTION I BATTLECARRY
8-1. Each platform, whether firing precision or degraded gunnery methods, moves into a hostile
environment prepared to engage threats immediately. Prior to movement, the vehicle commander (VC) will
place the weapon systems on his vehicle in a red status, herein called battlecarry. This section
discusses the battlecarry process and ways of determining an appropriate battlesight range.
PREPARE FOR CONTACT

8-2. Battlecarry is a posture in which a vehicle is prepared for an engagement at all times and ensures
z
The main gun or primary weapon system is loaded with the designated ammunition type.
z
The fire control system is set to fire the selected ammunition type (Abrams and Bradley).
z
A predetermined battlesight range has been applied to the system (Abrams and Bradley).
8-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
8-3. The crew will place their vehicle in a battlecarry posture before moving into a tactical situation or
upon command from an approving authority. All engagements begin from this posture (see Figure 8-2).
The crew duties to place a vehicle into a battlecarry posture are
z
VC. Announces BATTLECARRY, followed by the type of ammunition he wants
battlecarried (for example, BATTLECARRY HEAT, or BATTLECARRY HE) and
Battlesight Range.
z
Gunner. Sets up the fire control system for the ammunition called for
Ensures weapon select is placed in electrical safe.
Abrams TRIGGER SAFE.
Bradley Rounds are loaded into the feeder, ghost rounds is cycled, mechanical Safe on
FIRE, and electrical Safe on SAFE.
Truck weapon on mechanical safe unless VC directs otherwise.
Indexes the ammunition type and announces that it is indexed and battlesight range (for
example, HEAT INDEXED, RANGE 900).
Ensures the correct battlesight range is entered in the computer for the ammunition
specified.
Selects the proper auxiliary sight reticle and applies the proper sight correction factor, if
applicable.
Ensures the laser range finder (LRF)/eyesafe laser range finder (ELRF) is set in FIRST or
LAST RETURN logic, based on the tactical situation.
Announces GUNNER READY to inform the VC that all actions have been completed.
z
Driver. Ensures his station is ready for operation and he is ready to scan his sector and
Checks the drivers instrument panel for caution/warning lights.
Ensures night vision devices are prepared or installed as necessary and a power source with
back-up is available.
Announces DRIVER READY, to inform the VC he is ready for operations.

z
Loader (Abrams). Loads the ammunition announced by the VC and
Ensures the SAFE/ARMED lever is in the SAFE position and the white SAFE light is
illuminated.
Loads the main gun round.
Checks ammunition ready rack for subsequent round availability.
Ensures the recoil path of the main gun is clear.
Ensures the ready ammunition door is closed.
Announces HEAT LOADED, MAIN GUN SAFE, LOADER READY, to inform the VC
that all actions have been completed.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-3
Chapter 8
Figure 8-2. Battlecarry command
BATTLESIGHT RANGE
8-4. Battlesight range is a range applied only to vehicles with a fire control system (see Figure 8-3). The
purpose of the battlesight range is to provide a standard range to target for the ballistic computer for
emergency situations that require firing without lasing.
8-5. Vehicles without a fire control system may use a traverse and elevation (T&E) mechanism to ensure
rounds do not fire beyond the engagement area. Use of the T&E mechanisms as a range control measure
should be limited to rural or desert environments only. Use of the T&E mechanism in urban environments
may limit the ability of gunners to engage targets on upper floors or rooftops of buildings in the
engagement area.
8-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-3. Concept of battlesight
DETERMINING BATTLESIGHT RANGE

8-6. The unit commander may choose (based on mission, enemy, terrain (weather), troops and support
available, time available, and civil considerations [METT-TC]) from a variety of range and ammunition
combinations for his units battlesight range. The battlesight range is only used on vehicles with a fire
control system.
8-7. If the primary threat (most likely target to be engaged) is armored vehicles, Sabot/armor piercing
(AP) is the most appropriate ammunition; otherwise, high-explosive antitank (HEAT), multipurpose
antitank (MPAT) or high explosive (HE) is usually preferred, respectively. In counterinsurgent operations,
however, canister/HE may be the most appropriate ammunition to battlecarry.
8-8. The typical range settings by weapon system are shown in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1. Range settings by weapon system
Ammunition
Abrams
Bradley
Sabot/AP
1,200 meters
1,200 meters
HEAT/HE
900 meters
1,000 meters
MPAT
900 meters
Canister
300 meters
Coax(7.62 mm)
600 meters
Caliber .50
600 meters
ASV
600 meters
MK19
600 meters
600 meters
8-9. Factors for selecting another battlesight setting include weather, smoke, range, or other conditions
that reduce visibility. The battlesight range should be based on the commanders analysis of METT-TC.
Although these are the standard battlesight ranges, commanders should adjust them accordingly and issue
them in the operations order or warning order (see Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-5
Chapter 8
Ammunition Battlesight
Range
Nomenclature
800
1000
M829A1
APFSDS-T
1200
1400
1600
1800
800
1000
M829A2
APFSDS-T
1200
1400
1600
1800
800
1000
M829A3
APFSDS-T
1200
1400
1600
1800
800
1000
M791
APDS-T
1200
1400
1600
1800
800
1000
M919
APFSDS-T
1200
1400
1600
1800
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Kill Zone
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400
0 to 1150 meters
0 to 1250 meters
0 to 1350 meters
0 to 1450 meters
850 to 1650 meters
1050 to 1950 meters
0 to 1200 meters
0 to 1300 meters
0 to 1400 meters
0 to 1500 meters
800 to 1600 meters
1000 to 1900 meters
0 to 1200 meters
0 to 1300 meters
0 to 1400 meters
0 to 1500 meters
800 to 1600 meters
1000 to 1900 meters
0 to 900 meters
0 to 1100 meters
0 to 1400 meters
1100 to 1600 meters
1350 to 1750 meters
1600 to 1950 meters
0 to 900 meters
0 to 1100 meters
0 to 1400 meters
1050 to 1600 meters
1350 to 1750 meters
1550 to 1950 meters
Figure 8-4. Battlesight range examples, APFSDS, and AP rounds
8-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Ammunition Battlesight
Range
Nomenclature
200
800
1400
700
800
900
Kill Zone
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400
1200 to 1600 meters

1400 to 1600 meters
1600 to 2000 meters
800
0 to 1000 meters
1000
0 to 1100 meters
1200
0 to 1300 meters
1400
1200 to 1600 meters
1600
1400 to 1600 meters
1800
1600 to 2000 meters
800
0 to 900 meters
1000
0 to 1000 meters
1200
1000 to 1400 meters
1400
1200 to 1600 meters
1600
1400 to 1600 meters
1800
1600 to 2000 meters
800
0 to 950 meters
1000
M792
HEI-T
600
1000 to 1400 meters
1800
M908
HE-OR-T
500
0 to 1000 meters
1200
1600
M830A1
HEAT-MP-T
400
0 to 900 meters
1000
M830
HEAT-MP-T
300
850 to 1100 meters
1200
1100 to 1250 meters
1400
1350 to 1450 meters
1600
1550 to 1650 meters
1800
1750 to 1850 meters
Figure 8-5. Battlesight range examples, chemical energy rounds

8-10. Use the following method to determine battlesight range (see Table 8-2):
z
Step 1. Determine what the expected target is.
z
Step 2. Divide the expected known height of the target by two.
z
Step 3. Determine the ammunition to be fired.
z
Step 4. See firing table (FT) 120-D-2 or FT 25-A-2 and use the maximum ordinate of the
ammunition to be fired.
z
Step 5. Locate the answer to step 2 in the maximum ordinate column. The battlesight range will
be listed in column 1 or 11 (range).
Note. If the exact number cannot be found in the maximum ordinate column, round down to
ensure the projectile does not go over the target at the range to the maximum ordinate.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-7
Chapter 8
Table 8-2. Battlesight range determination example

Battlesight Range Determination Example
Step
1
Determine what the expected target is.
Step
2
Divide the expected known height of the target by two. This determines
the distance from the aiming point (center of visible mass) to the top of
the target. If the round flies above this number during its trajectory to the
target, it could miss the target.
Step
3
Determine the ammunition to be fired.
Step
4
Use appropriate firing tables (FT) to find the maximum ordinate of the
ammunition to be fired
FT 120-D-2 (Abrams)
Step
5
Locate the Answer to step 2 in the maximum ordinate (MAX ORD)

column. This ensures the round at the given range will not go over the
target when firing in an emergency.
900 meters
Battlesight Range = The battlesight range has the highest probability of hitting
and killing a targets between the firing vehicle and 200 meters beyond the
battlesight range.
BMP
2.3 Divided by 2 = 1.15m
M830 (Abrams)
900 meters
SECTION II FIRE COMMANDS

8-11. All direct-fire engagements begin with a fire command. The fire command coordinates the crews
effort, reduces confusion, and helps the crew engage targets faster. Initial fire commands alert the crew to
initiate actions. Subsequent fire commands direct the fires of the selected weapon when the desired effect
from the initial fire command has not been achieved. There are seven elements to a standard fire command.
Fire commands will vary in form, but must include those elements necessary to alert the crew; select the
weapon/ammunition; determine the target description, direction, and range/elevation; execution; and
termination.
8-12. The VC issues a fire command to his crew for each target engagement. Standard terminology and
logical sequence are used to achieve effectiveness and speed of engagement. Only those elements
necessary to load, aim, and fire the crews weapons accurately and effectively are given, as well as the
termination command for the engagement.
8-13. VCs may use as little as three or as many as seven elements of the fire command, depending on the
situation. Once a VC determines to eliminate the threat target with direct fire, the VC initiates the
engagement with a fire command. Each type of vehicle uses all of the standard fire command elements and
terms; however, on vehicles equipped with a fire control system, the operational components of that system
may allow the commander to omit certain elements. The VC may have to include certain elements of the
standard fire command in order to compensate for fire control system shortcomings or failure. Table 8-3
shows the sequence and terminology used in a fire command.
8-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table 8-3. Elements of a standard fire command

Element
Example
Remarks
Alert
GUNNER
Alerts the entire crew that someone in the

crew will be firing an engagement using the
primary weapon, main gun or coax. Vehicles
with only one primary firer may omit this
element. It must be used when an alternate
firer is directed to engage (loader, rear bank).
Weapon or
Ammunition
SABOT
Identifies the ammunition to fire, requiring the

gunner to ensure the ammunition is properly
indexed, and the loader (Abrams) what to load
after the initial round is fired. Vehicles
mounting single weapons (caliber .50 only)
may omit this element.
Description
PC
A clear and concise target description for the

firer to identify. VCs must use modifiers when
multiple targets are presented.
Direction
TRAVERSE RIGHT STEADY

ON
This is required when the VC cannot lay the

gun for direction (such as VC does not have
the capability to move the turret to the targets
general direction).
Range
or Elevation
ONE-FOUR-HUNDRED
This is required when the firing platforms fire

control system does not provide the accurate
range to target.
Execution
FIRE
The VC is the ONLY crew member authorized

to issue the command of execution. This
cannot be delegated to the gunner.
Termination
CEASE FIRE
ANY member of the crew can terminate an

engagement.
ALERT
8-14. The first element of the fire command is the ALERT. All fire commands begin with an alert to the
crew. Although a contact report can be considered an alert, only the VC or Gunner can give the alert
element. Table 8-4 describes the proper alerts given to the crew.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-9
Chapter 8
Table 8-4. Alert examples

Alert
Description
CONTACT
Any member of the crew announces Contact when identifying a

threat to their own vehicle, crew, or squad by one or more of the
forms of contact that effect the rules of engagement (ROE); visual,
physical (direct fire), or aircraft. Only the VC and gunner may
announce CONTACT as part of the fire command, however.
Note. On the Abrams, the alert element of the fire command also
informs the loader to arm the main gun for a pending engagement.
VC alerts the crew that the gunner will be firing.
VC alerts the crew that the loader will be firing the M240 machine
gun (Abrams).
VC alerts the crew and squad that the squad will be engaging a
target (when working with a dismounted squad).
VC alerts the crew that the squad will be firing from the rear bank
using the port firing weapons (Bradley).
VC alerts the crew that he will be firing the caliber .50 machine gun.
VC alerts the crew that he will be firing the M240 machine gun.
VC alerts the crew that he will be firing the MK19 Mod 3.
VC alerts the crew that he will be firing the M249 automatic weapon.
VC alerts the crew that he will be engaging a target with the main
gun (Abrams). The ammunition type identifies the subsequent
ammunition to be loaded and indexed by the crew. On the Abrams,
the gunner may also use this alert when the VC has issued the Fire
and Adjust command of execution when he requires another round.
On vehicles where the commander has the ability to override the
gunners control handles, the VC may issue this alert when he
assumes control of the turret and intends to fire himself.
Although the sensings are technically a response term, they also act
as an alert to the crew. A sensing given by the gunner or VC acts as
the alert element when issuing a subsequent fire command or direct
fire adjustment.
Used rarely, if a target is hit but the desired effect is not achieved,
the VC announces TARGET REENGAGE. These two words
together act as the alert to the crew that the firer will be firing
another round or burst.
GUNNER
LOADER
SQUAD
REAR BANK
CALIBER FIFTY
TWO FORTY
MARK NINETEEN
TWO FOUR NINE
SABOT
FROM MY POSITION
DOUBTFUL, LOST,
OVER, SHORT
TARGET REENGAGE
Note. Although there are eight forms of contact, generally, the forms of contact that will initiate
an escalation of force for the crew are visual contact where friendly forces may or may not have
been identified by the threat, physical contact (direct fire or vehicle borne improvised explosive
device [VBIED]) with an enemy force, or indirect contact (improvised explosive device [IED])
with an enemy force. The current rules of engagement (ROE) will provide additional guidance
or restrictions depending upon the area of operations and unit mission.
8-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
WEAPON/AMMUNITION
8-15. The second element of the fire command is the WEAPON/AMMUNITION. This identifies to the
crew which weapon or ammunition type will be fired at the threat during the engagement. Use the terms in
Table 8-5 to identify the weapon or ammunition to be fired during an engagement.
Table 8-5. Weapon/ammunition element
Weapon/Ammunition
Announced As
Armor Piercing rounds (25mm or above)
SABOT (pronounced SAY-BO)
HEAT or HE rounds
HEAT (Abrams)
HE (Bradley)
120-mm HEAT-MP-T and TPMT-T in ground mode
MPAT (pronounced EM-PAT)
120-mm HEAT-MP-T and TPMT-T in air mode
MPAT-AIR
120-mm HE-OR-T
OR (pronounced OH-ARE)
120-mm Canister
CANISTER or CAN
M2 Machine Gun
CALIBER-FIFTY
M240/M240C Coaxial Machine Gun
COAX
M240 Machine Gun
TWO-FORTY
M249 Machine Gun
TWO-FOUR-NINE
MK19 Mod 3
MARK-NINE-TEEN
TOW
MISSILE
Javelin
MISSILE
Stinger
MISSILE
DESCRIPTION (TARGET DESCRIPTION)

8-16. The third element of the fire command is DESCRIPTION. More appropriately, it is the target
description. It is a given in the fire command to identify which target the firer is to engage or in which
order (for multiple threats). Most targets can be described by one of the following terms in Table 8-6.
Table 8-6. Target descriptions
Target
Announced As
Tank or Tank-Like Target

Unarmored Vehicle
Personnel Carrier (PC)
Helicopter
Fixed-Wing Aircraft
Personnel
Sniper
RPG Team
Machine Gun Emplacement
Antitank Gun, Antitank Missile, or Towed Artillery
Bunker
Other Targets
TANK
TRUCK
PC
CHOPPER
PLANE
TROOPS
SNIPER
RPG TEAM or RPG
MACHINE GUN
ANTITANK
BUNKER
Use the briefest term possible to clearly describe
the target to the firer.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-11
Chapter 8
8-17. Combining terms (ANTITANK TRUCK) can identify combination targets, such as truck-mounted
antitank guided missile systems.
8-18. If multiple targets present themselves, the VC must identify which one to engage first. For example,
GUNNER HEAT STATIONARY AND MOVING TRUCKS STATIONARY FIRST.
8-19. For crews with only one weapon system and one possible firer (armed truck, HMMWV, Guardian),
the target description can take the place of the ALERT in the fire command when using a reduced fire
command.
DIRECTION
8-20. The fourth element of the fire command is given to guide the gunner when the commander cannot
lay the weapon for direction from his position (commanders override, control hand station, or
commanders handle). This element is mandatory for truck crews, on Abrams crews when directing the
loader to fire his machine gun, for Bradley crews when directing the rear bank to engage a target, or when
handing off a target from VC to gunner using a commanders independent sight (commanders independent
thermal viewer [CITV]/commanders independent viewer [CIV]).
8-21. There are six methods of directing the gunner onto the target:
z
Clock Method. The VC announces the direction as it relates to the targets location using the
hands of a clock. Twelve oclock is always the orientation of the hull/body of the vehicle. For
example, GUNNER TROOPS THREE OCLOCK.
z
Sector or Quadrant Method. The VC announces the quadrant the target is located in
respective to his vehicle. For example, GUNNER TROOPS LEFT FRONT.
z
Traverse Method. The VC tells the gunner TRAVERSE LEFT (RIGHT). The gunner
traverses the turret in the direction announced. As the gun tube nears the target, the VC
announces STEADY, and the gunner slows his traverse in the same direction. When the VC
thinks the target is in the gunners field of view, he announces ON. When the gunner sees the
target(s), he announces IDENTIFIED. The gunner should use the lowest magnification when
using this method to identify potential targets. For example, TRAVERSE LEFT TRAVERSE
LEFT STEADY ON. The crew may use SHIFT rather than TRAVERSE for clarity.
z
Reference Point Method. The reference point must be one that the gunner can see and
recognize easily, typically used in a deliberate defense. For example, the VCs command might
be REFERENCE POINT BRIDGE TRAVERSE RIGHT. The gunner identifies the
reference point and traverses right, looking for the target. The TC may have to further define the
target description and location. Once the gunner identifies the target, he announces
IDENTIFIED. Another example of this method is, TROOPS TRP 2.
z
Designate Method. On vehicles equipped with a commanders independent thermal viewer, the
VC designates the target, announces DESIGNATE and pushes the designate button on his
control handle, the gunner centers his control handles and look through his primary sight until
he identifies the target by announcing IDENTIFIED.
z
Marking Targets with Tracers. This is the least preferred method of directing the gunner onto
a target. It can be helpful, however, to suppress the target area with small arms fire while the
gunner lays on, identifies, and prepares to engage, depending on the situation. Using a weapon
loaded with tracer rounds, to include a ammo mix of 4 ball rounds to 1 tracer round, or 4:1 mix,
the VC announces WATCH MY TRACERS, and fires at the target area (for example,
GUNNER HEAT PC WATCH MY TRACERS CALIBER FIFTY.
Notes. For safety purposes on the M1A2 and M2/M3A3 the VC must announce
DESIGNATE when designating from target to target.
VC on the Abrams cannot use the clock method when directing the gunner onto target as
there is no internal gun tube orientation indicator in the gunners station.
8-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
RANGE OR ELEVATION
8-22. The fifth element of the fire command tells the crew and gunner what range to set on the weapon
sight or in the fire control system and/or at what elevation the target is located at. If the vehicles LRF is
operational, then this element of the fire command is normally omitted. If no LRF is available or is not
operational, this element is required. When operating in an urban environment or restricted terrain, using
elevation commands will increase the gunners ability to rapidly identify targets to engage.
8-23. When the vehicle is equipped with a CITV or CIV, the VC can determine the range to a target
independently from the gunner using the CITV or CIV stadia reticle. When the VC designates a target he
has choked to the gunner, the choked range is automatically induced into the fire control system to
calculate a ballistic solution M1A2, M2A3, and Bradley Fire Support Team (BFIST) vehicles.
8-24. When an accurate range to target cannot be determined using an electronic device (CITV/CIV
[M1A2 and M2A3] or LRF), determine range using either the known-range method or the estimated-range
method depicted below, as deemed necessary (see range determination information). When the VC wants
the gunner to determine the range to the target using the stadia reticle, he will announce CHOKE as the
range element.
z
Known-Range Method. By knowing the range to probable target areas prior to engagements,
the crew can reduce engagement time and improve accuracy by indexing the known vehicle-totarget range into the computer control panel (CCP) or gunners computer display panel (GCDP)
on the Abrams series, and the range knob to input the range into the fire control system for
Bradley crews. The known range from a previous target engagement or established target
reference points (TRP) may also be used.
z
Estimated-Range Method. To engage targets when an accurate range cannot be determined
electronically or is unknown, the VC or gunner must estimate the range to the target. Range data
is announced in the fire command in even hundreds or thousands, otherwise digit by digit (see
Table 8-7). Examples, if the VC announces
CHOKED ONE SIX HUNDRED, the gunner uses the gunners primary sight (GPS)
and the range designated from the VC (M1A2 SEP only). In this example, the VC
determined the range using the CITV stadia reticle.
ONE EIGHT HUNDRED, the gunner shifts to the auxiliary sight and uses the appropriate
reticle and range line (Abrams and Bradley crews). For trucks, this estimated range allows
the gunner to focus his target acquisition in a certain area from his position.
INDEX ONE EIGHT HUNDRED, the gunner uses the GPS and enters the range into the
Future Combat System using the CCP/GCDP/Integrated Sight Unit (ISU)/Improved
Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS).
GUNNER SABOT TANK CHOKE, the gunner shifts to the gunners auxiliary
sight (GAS), selects the appropriate reticle, and uses the choke sight to estimate the range,
then repeats the range to the VC.
z
Elevation Method. When operating in an urban or restricted environment, targets will present
themselves in buildings or higher on terrain features. Their location will require VCs to provide
elevation information to the firer. Examples of the elevation method are
Floor. VCs state the floor of a building the target is located on. It can be followed by
additional information such as the window location of the threat. For example, GUNNER
COAX SNIPER RIGHT FRONT THIRD FLOOR SECOND WINDOW FROM
LEFT.
High low. The VC may use the terms HIGH or LOW for an elevation description in
urban, rural, and restricted terrains.
Terrain level. When fighting in restricted terrain with rugged, steep hills or mountains, VCs
should identify where on the terrain feature the target is located. Figure 8-6 shows these
sections that are divided.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-13
Chapter 8
Table 8-7. Range element and sight selection

Range
GPS/TIS/ISU/IBAS Announced As
Auxiliary Sight Announced As
840 meters
INDEX EIGHT HUNDRED
EIGHT HUNDRED
2,000 meters
INDEX TWO THOUSAND
TWO THOUSAND
1,200 meters
INDEX ONE TWO HUNDRED
ONE TWO HUNDRED
860 meters
INDEX NINE HUNDRED
NINE HUNDRED
3,040 meters
INDEX THREE THOUSAND
THREE THOUSAND
8-25. For example, the VC can announce TROOPS RIGHT FRONT THREE HUNDRED
CHARLIE, identifying a troop target to the right front at the crest of the hill.
Figure 8-6. Elevation levels Alpha, Bravo, and Charlie example
EXECUTION
8-26. All fire commands must be executed in order for the firer to commence the engagement. The list
below describes the authorized commands of execution. The VC is the only crewman authorized to
announce a command of execution. The list below describes the authorized commands of execution when
issuing a fire command:
z
FIRE. This is the standard command of execution for all weapon systems.
z
(FROM MY POSITION), ON THE WAY. Normally, the gunner will engage all main gun
and coax targets; however, if he is unable to identify the desired target or if there is no gunner
present, the VC will engage the target using the trigger on his power control handle. If the
gunner can identify the target while the VC is engaging from his position, the gunner announces
IDENTIFIED. The VC can return control of the gun to the gunner or complete the
engagement from his position. To maintain overall control and ensure continuous target
acquisition, the VC should return control to the gunner immediately after the gunner identifies
the target. To return control to the gunner, the VC announces FIRE. When the VC engages
from his position, he must announce ON THE WAY prior to squeezing the trigger just as any
other firer would. His announcement of FROM MY POSITION alerts the crew that he will be
firing the engagement. His announcement of ON THE WAY is the command of execution in
this instance only.
8-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
FIRE AND ADJUST. If the commander cannot assist the gunner (or loader) in adjustment,
he announces FIRE AND ADJUST. This tells the gunner (or loader) that he will not receive a
subsequent fire command and must conduct the engagement on his own. Once this command is
given, the firer can continue to engage the target until it is destroyed. If additional threats
present themselves, the firer must alert the crew by announcing the weapon he plans to fire and
a target description.
When the gunner identifies additional targets to engage or requires subsequent rounds to
destroy the initial target, he announces his sensing and/or new target description. If the
same ammunition type is to be used, he announces ON THE WAY (after the loader arms
the main gun and announces UP for Abrams crews). If the target requires a change of
ammunition, the gunner announces SABOT, HEAT or COAX, respectively. For
example, the VC would initiate the fire command by announcing GUNNER HEAT
PC. The gunner would identify the target by announcing IDENTIFIED, (the loader
would arm the main gun and announce UP for Abrams crews). Then, the VC announces
FIRE AND ADJUST. The gunner would verify his range, aim center mass, track the
target, announce ON THE WAY, and squeeze the trigger. The gunner would state the
sensing of the round, TARGET. Then, if the gunner identifies another confirmed threat
target, for instance Troops, he announces COAX TROOPS, and prepares to engage.
If the VC does not cease fire the engagement, the gunner announces ON THE WAY prior
to engaging.
In the event the VC has directed FIRE AND ADJUST, to the gunner, particularly on a
canister engagement, the gunner may switch between weapon systems by announcing a
sensing of his round fired the intended ammunition or weapon, and a new target description.
For example, during a canister engagement, the gunner fires the canister round and must
engage remaining troop targets with coax. His response to the first round fired would be
TARGET (WEAPON OR AMMUNITION) TROOPS ON THE WAY. If the VC
disagrees with the firers actions or decides to regain control of the turret, he must announce
CEASE FIRE to the crew.
The gunner may continue to reengage or initiate engagement of new targets presented in
this manner until the VC takes control of the turret. The VC resumes control of the turret by
announcing CEASE FIRE.
When the gunner is completed engaging and no other targets have presented themselves, he
announces GUNNER COMPLETE. This allows the crew to know he has finished his
engagement, but is now actively seeking additional targets. If additional confirmed threat
targets are identified by the gunner, he will alert the crew by stating which ammunition type
he wants loaded and the target description (as stated earlier).
If the commander continues to designate the gunner or loader to each target, then continues
to scan his sector, he issues the command FIRE AND ADJUST.
In the event a crew member announces CEASE FIRE, control of the turret immediately
returns to the VC.
FIRE, FIRE (ammunition type or weapon). If the commander wants the next main gun
round for the loader to load (or indexed) to be a different type than is currently chambered, he
uses the command of execution FIRE, FIRE (ammunition type). In a multiple engagement, this
ensures that the proper ammunition for the threat is used. Example: GUNNER SABOT
TANK PC TANK FIRST FIRE, FIRE HEAT.
FIRE, FIRE (ammunition type or weapon) AND ADJUST. This is a combination of
FIRE, FIRE (AMMUNITION) and FIRE AND ADJUST. It can be used by a VC following
the guidelines established above. Its purpose is to provide the VC the ability to direct the gunner
on multiple targets using multiple ammunition or weapons, and also to allow the gunner to make
his own direct fire adjustments as necessary.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-15
Chapter 8
8-27. The term AT MY COMMAND is used to synchronize fires from a single or multiple vehicles. It is
not the command of execution, but is a preparatory command used just prior to the any command of
execution listed above.
Notes. ON THE WAY is the last verbal response announced by a firer. The firer will squeeze
the trigger on the Y of WAY. When firing machine guns or the platforms main gun, each
time the trigger is squeezed, butterfly is depressed, or an electrical trigger is depressed, the firer
must announce ON THE WAY. During a continuous engagement of the same target without
interruption, announcement of ON THE WAY is only required once. If there is a clear break
in firing for adjustment, corrections, or additional commands from the VC, ON THE WAY
must be announced again.
Abrams Note. When firing the caliber .50, the VC must announce to the crew
CALIBER FIFTY (or TWO FORTY if mounted in the commanders weapon station
[CWS]) to alert them as part of the fire command. He is only required to announce this once per
target that he engages. The purpose is to notify the crew that he will be firing the weapon
mounted in his weapon station. As this is the only required element of his fire command for his
weapon station, he does not need to announce it on each firing burst of the machine gun. The
VC is not required to announce ON THE WAY. Once he has completed firing, he will
announce VC COMPLETE. At the completion of the overall engagement, CEASE FIRE
must still be announced.
Vehicles Equipped with a Commanders Independent Sight. If the VC issues a fire
command and wishes to continue to scan using his independent sight, he must use FIRE AND
ADJUST.
TERMINATION
8-28. Every engagement must be terminated; the seventh element informs the all crew members to stop
firing and prepare for a subsequent fire command when engaging multiple targets or additional instructions
as they develop the situation. The VC announces CEASE FIRE to switch weapon systems during an
engagement (for those vehicles equipped with multiple weapon systems) unless he issues the Fire and
Adjust command, then fire and adjust rules apply to the firer (gunner/loader).
8-29. When a Bradley crew has fired its TOW-2B missile and the warhead has detonated, the VC will
announce CEASE TRACKING to terminate the engagement.
8-30. For multiple weapon systems engagements on the Abrams vehicle, when the gunner completes his
part of a multiple weapon systems engagement, he announces GUNNER COMPLETE. The gunner then
moves the GUN SELECT switch to the TRIGGER SAFE position, the MAGNIFICATION switch to the
3X position, and continues to scan his sector.
8-31. To terminate the loaders engagement, the VC announces CEASE FIRE or LOADER CEASE
FIRE during multiple weapon systems engagements. If the loader completes his part of a multiple weapon
systems engagement, he announces LOADER COMPLETE and moves the M240 machine gun
MECHANICAL SAFE switch to the SAFE position.
8-32. When the VC finishes an engagement with the commanders weapon, he announces VC
COMPLETE. The VC has overall responsibility of the turret and is still responsible for terminating the
engagement. When the VC fires his weapon from his position, he is still required to announce CEASE
FIRE to terminate the overall crew engagement.
8-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
METHODS OF ENGAGEMENT
8-33. There are two methods of engagement, precision and degraded. Both methods use fire commands to
control the direct fire engagement and will contain all the elements of the standard fire command either
verbally, by the standing operating procedures (SOP) (the primary firer, for example), or by automatic
input from the vehicles fire control system.
Precision
8-34. Precision gunnery is the most accurate method of direct-fire engagement for all weapon platforms.
When the firing vehicle is fully mission capable and the fire control system relative to the vehicle is
functioning correctly, the precision method of engagement is used. This method uses the entire fire control
system organic to the vehicle to engage threat targets. Crews will use elements of the standard fire
command to initiate engagements.
Degraded
8-35. Vehicles are considered degraded when their fire control system or weapon system is not fully
functioning. This method of engagement will require the VC to issue elements of the fire command that
normally are optional, respective to his vehicle, in order to overcome the failure. The VC may decide to
fire using degraded methods before the engagement starts or when a malfunction of the fire control system
or an environmental condition during a precision fire command exist. In these cases, the element of the fire
command that corrects or compensates for the fire control system degradation is added to the fire
command.
FIRE COMMANDS CATEGORIES

8-36. There are two categories of fire commandsinitial and subsequent. The first fire command category,
the initial fire command, initiates hostilities toward a threat target or series of targets. The second category
of fire commands, subsequent fire commands, is used to reengage a target to achieve the desired target
affect.
8-37. There are two types of fire commands based strictly on the capabilities of the firing platform
standard and reduced.
STANDARD
8-38. The baseline for all fire commands and includes all seven basic elements of the fire command. All
platforms within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) can use the standard fire command at any time
to initiate an engagement. All VCs must be proficient at using the standard fire command prior to using
reduced fire commands.
REDUCED
8-39. A commander may elect to omit one or more elements from the standard fire command based on
tactical situation. Some vehicles within the HBCT require certain fire command elements based on the
capabilities or limitations of the firing platform. A degradation of a fire control system may also require the
VC to use additional elements in order to overcome the system failure. Table 8-8 shows the minimum
required elements based on the firing vehicles capabilities or limitations during the firing occasion.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-17
Chapter 8
Table 8-8. Elements of the standard fire command

Element
Condition
Remarks
Alert
Optional
Ammunition
or Weapon
Optional
Description
Direction
Mandatory
Optional
Can be omitted when the default firer (gunner) is clear to the

crew. If the VC wishes another crew member to fire a weapon
subsystem, the alert element cannot be omitted (such as loader,
rear bank, squad).
Vehicles mounting single weapons (such as caliber. 50 only)
may omit this element. If the VC wishes to fire the ammunition
that is currently battlecarried, this element may be omitted.
Under no circumstance can this element be omitted.
If the VC has the ability to lay the firing weapon for direction
himself, this element may be omitted. (Commanders control
handle or hand station.)
Range
or Elevation
Optional
If the firing crew has an operational LRF incorporated into the

firing weapon system this element may be omitted.
Execution
Mandatory
The VC is the only crew member authorized to issue the

command of execution. This cannot be delegated to the gunner.
Termination
Mandatory
All fire commands must be terminated.
8-40. The initial fire command is given when a target or targets are first detected by a crew and no other
engagement is ongoing (see Figure 8-7). The initial fire command initiates all hostilities against threat
targets and can be delivered in two waysstandard or reduced. All fire commands must contain the
elements that a fire control system DOES NOT provide to the crew.
Figure 8-7. Fire command concept
Note. If a firer is not identified during the alert (reduced fire command), the gunner is the default
firer on platforms with multiple crew members capable of firing (REAR BANK, LOADER).
8-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
8-41. Reduced fire commands contain only those elements that are not provided by the fire control system.
Reduced initial fire commands typically do not contain an ALERT or AMMUNITION or WEAPON
description. This type of initial fire command can be given any time the crew clearly understands who is
firing, which weapon is to be fired, and what ammunition type will be fired. For example, armed HMMWV
crews with only one weapon system can always use reduced fire commandsthere is only one possible firer
(the gunner) and only one weapon to fire.
8-42. The VC, at his discretion, may choose to omit certain parts of the fire command (in accordance with
[IAW] unit SOP). The reduced fire command must not confuse the crew and must include sufficient
information to allow the crew to react properly to the situation. A reduced fire command must contain (as a
minimum) the target description, command of execution and termination(for example, TRUCK, FIRE,
CEASE FIRE). (If time permits, a full fire command should always be used.)
8-43. The following are examples of situations in which reduced fire commands may be used:
z
When a crew member acquires a target that is an immediate threat, he gives an acquisition or
contact report (CONTACT DIRECT FRONT). The VC or gunner lays the gun and the
gunner announces IDENTIFIED (RANGE); the VC confirms the target as hostile,
announces the target description TANK, PC, etc, waits for the loader to announce UP,
(Abrams) and announces FIRE.
z
During continuing contact, after a fire command has been issued, the VC elects to omit the alert
and ammunition elements of the fire command. In a target-rich environment, the fire command
may be extremely short. The VC may announce the target description, PC. The VC lays the
gun for direction as needed, and the gunner announces IDENTIFIED (RANGE). The
loaders response of UP must be given to assure the gunner and VC that he has armed the
main gun and is clear of the path of recoil (Abrams). After the VC confirms the target as hostile
and evaluates the range to target, he announces FIRE. Other than the omission of the alert and
ammunition elements, the fire command remains standard (see Figure 8-8 and Figure 8-9).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-19
Chapter 8
Figure 8-8. Standard fire command, single target example
8-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-9. Reduced fire command, single target
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-21
Chapter 8
FIRE COMMAND TERMS

8-44. In addition to the primary seven elements discussed above, a fire command will include terms used
to respond to, add to, repeat, or correct a fire command. These terms are classified into several types:
z
Crew Response. These terms are confirmations of the VCs fire command. They are stated in
order to ensure clarity of the initial or subsequent fire command.
z
Crew Action. These terms require the crew to perform a given function in order to direct fires
onto the target. They are stated upon completion of the implied task as directed by the fire
command.
z
Sensing. All rounds or bursts fired from a weapon system require the crew to sense, or identify
the strike of the round in relation to the target. They provide an indicator to the VC when he can
issue another initial fire command for additional targets on the battlefield. In the event that the
rounds do not have the desired effect on the target, sensings are uses as the alert element for
subsequent fire commands.
z
Engagement Technique. The VC can direct a specific engagement technique to the gunner to
facilitate the targets destruction or effective suppression.
z
Modifier. A description modifier is used to enhance the target description to clearly identify a
specific target to engage when operating in a target rich environment.
z
Clarification. Clarification term is a request by a crew member to either repeat or correct an
element of the fire command.
z
Driver Action. These terms are used to move the firing vehicle into a position that best supports
the engagement. Driver actions are also used to seek alternate positions, return to defilade
position, or move through battlefield obscurants during an engagement.
CREW RESPONSE TERMS

8-45. Additional response terms that must be used in fire commands are
z
IDENTIFIED (RANGE). The gunner uses this term to inform the VC that he has located the
target(s) stated in the fire command. If the gunner gave an acquisition or contact report for the
target, he does not have to say IDENTIFIED, but must announce the range to target he
determined. IDENTIFIED, RANGE stated by itself indicates to the VC that the gunner has
confirmed the target as stated in the description and that the gunner has the proper range induced
into the fire control system. If the gunner cannot confirm the target as hostile, the gunner will
announce IDENTIFIED, followed by FRIENDLY, NEUTRAL, or UNKNOWN. When
firing a subsequent round at the same target (not returning to a previously engaged target), the
gunner does not have to announce IDENTIFIED, only the (RANGE) induced (see page 8-26
subsequent fire commands for more information).
z
CANNOT IDENTIFY. This term informs the VC that the gunner cannot find the target. The
VC must redirect the gunner onto the target, re-lay the weapon, or engage the target. For
platforms equipped with a commanders override, commanders hand station, the VC may
override the gunners power control handles and lay the gun for direction as necessary. For
vehicles equipped with a CITV or CIV, the VC may designate the target and hand off the target
to the gunner once identified.
z
CANNOT ENGAGE. This term informs the VC that the gunner can identify the target but is
unable to conduct the engagement.
z
ON THE WAY. This term informs all crew members that a weapon is being fired, alerting them
to sense the round. The firer must announce this prior to firing. The gunner will state the range
to target that he is firing prior to announcing ON THE WAY, when equipped with a range
finder. This aids the VCs situational awareness (SA) during engagements and provides an
additional verification of the accurate range to target prior to firing.
8-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
GUNNER/LOADER COMPLETE. This term informs the VC that individual crewmen are
finished with their portion of a multiple weapon system engagement (or when the VC is using
his CITV/CIV to scan for targets) and that their systems are free to engage other targets.
VC COMPLETE. This term informs the crew that the VC has completed firing his weapon
system and is prepared to resume control of the turret.
CREW ACTION TERMS

8-46. The following terms are used to inform the VC of actions taken as implied tasks from a fire
command:
z
(AMMUNITION TYPE) INDEXED. The gunner must use this response to indicate that he has
indexed the proper ammunition change directed in the fire command or battlecarry posture.
z
(AMMUNITION TYPE) LOADED. The loader on the Abrams must use this response to
indicate that he has loaded the proper ammunition change directed in the fire command or
battlecarry posture. When using this term, the main gun is not armed.
z
UP. This term is used by the loader to signify that the main gun is loaded with the ammunition
required in the fire command, the main gun is armed, and the recoil path of the main gun is
clear. The ammunition type must be announced before UP when the commander directs an
ammunition change in the fire command or directs a battlecarry posture.
z
(AMMUNITION TYPE) UP. This term is used by the loader to signify that the main gun is
loaded with the ammunition specified in a subsequent fire command, the main gun is armed, and
the path of recoil of the main gun is clear for firing.
z
DESIGNATE (M1A2 SEP/M2A3 ONLY). This term informs the gunner that the VC will hand
a target off to him. This term can be used before or during a fire command.
SENSING TERMS
8-47. For every round fired, the firer must announce a sensing to inform the VC of the outcome of the
engagement. Sensings are the verbal responses to a round or series of rounds (machine gun burst) of where
the round(s) strike or pass the target in relation to the target aiming point. If the first round or burst fails to
destroy the target, sensings will enable the crew to adjust fire for subsequent rounds.
8-48. The ability of the firer or VC to sense rounds will depend on local obscuration created from firing,
target area obscuration from smoke or dust created from the impact of rounds, and time of flight of the
round.
z
Obscuration. The flash, muzzle blast, heat shimmer, debris, and movement of the firing vehicle
(platform rock) may prevent the crew from sensing their fires.
z
Flight Time. When firing main gun ammunition, flight time is so short that the projectile may
reach the target before the vehicle has settled and local obscuration has cleared.
8-49. All crew members should attempt to sense every round fired. When firing service ammunition, a
bright flash or explosion will be visible if the target is hit. When firing the MPAT round in AIR mode, a
black cloud of smoke is produced when the round functions on the target (Abrams). If the point at which
the tracer strikes short, passes, or hits the target cannot be verified by the crew, the firer announces
LOST. When the gunner senses the strike of the round in relation to the target, he announces one of the
following sensings listed in Figure 8-10.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-23
Chapter 8
Figure 8-10. Rounds fired
8-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUE TERMS

8-50. The following engagement technique terms are used to provide instruction to the firer of an
engagement and direct him to engage a target or series of targets in a specific manner:
z
SUPPRESS, is used to direct the firer to continue to engage in order to suppress the target.
This is typically given after the desired target effect has been achieved, but dismounts remain in
the target area, either dispersing or dismounting from vehicle targets.
z
Z-PATTERN, is used to direct the firer to use the standard Z pattern to engage threat
dismounts.
z
RELASE, directs the firer to relase to a target due to an actual or perceived inaccurate range
to target.
z
LEAD, directs the firer to add lead to his sight picture respective to the targets direction of
travel.
z
REENGAGE, can be used to alert the firer to continue engaging the same target with the same
weapon system. This is also a direct fire adjustment technique that is discussed later.
MODIFIER TERMS
8-51. When there are multiple targets, the commander must better identify the targets and accurately
describe the target to engage first. Some of these descriptions could be
z
NEAR, FAR.
z
LEFT, RIGHT, CENTER.
z
STATIONARY, MOVING, DEFILADE.
z
LEFT TO RIGHT, RIGHT TO LEFT, directs the gunner to engage the targets identified in
a certain order that may be different from most dangerous to least dangerous. This is most
commonly used when firing collectively with a section or platoon element. Typically, this term
is used with a section or platoon fire command to adhere to that higher elements instruction or
the standard operating procedures for the platoon.
z
NEAR TO FAR, FAR TO NEAR, directs the gunner to engage the targets identified in a
certain order that may be different from most dangerous to least dangerous. This is most
commonly used when firing collectively with a section or platoon element. Typically, this term
is used with a section or platoon fire command to adhere to that higher elements instruction or
the standard operating procedures for the platoon.
z
SHIFT, tells the firer to move to the next target or location to be announced by the
commander.
z
LIFT, tells the firer to prepare to move fires in a direction to be announced by the commander.
Typically, this command is given when friendly forces are moving toward the target area and is
used as a control measure to protect friendly forces.
z
LOW POWER (MAG), tells the gunner to switch to the lowest magnification in order to
identify or engage targets at extremely close ranges.
z
HIGH POWER (MAG), tells the gunner to switch to a higher magnification prior to receiving
the command of execution to facilitate positive target identification and classification.
CLARIFICATION TERMS
8-52. Repeating terms. When a crew member fails to hear or understand a part of the fire command, he
announces the element in question. For example, if the gunner says AMMO, the VC repeats only the
element in question from the fire command.
8-53. To correct an error in the initial fire command, the commander commands CORRECTION and
corrects only the element in error. For example, GUNNER, HEAT, TRUCK, ONE SIX HUNDRED,
CORRECTION, ONE EIGHT HUNDRED, FIRE.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-25
Chapter 8
8-54. If an error has been made in the initial fire command and the execution command has been given, the
commander must cease fire and issue a complete, new fire command.
8-55. To correct an error in a subsequent fire command, the commander announces CORRECTION and
repeats the entire subsequent fire command.
DRIVER ACTION TERMS

8-56. Other commands to the driver, used to facilitate vehicle movement before, during, and after an
engagement, include, but are not limited to
z
DRIVERMOVE UP.
z
DRIVERBACK.
z
DRIVERSTOP.
z
DRIVERSEEK ENFILADE.
z
DRIVERSEEK DEFILADE.
z
DRIVERMOVE OUT.
SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS

8-57. The second category of fire commands is the subsequent fire command. Subsequent fire commands
are specifically given to the crew in the event the initial round (main gun) or burst (machine gun) misses
the target or target area. The subsequent fire command is also used in the event the VC determines the
target effect from a hit requires additional servicing to reduce the threat (mobility kill, not catastrophic or
firepower achieved on threat target). The subsequent fire command contains corrections, techniques, or
modifications to the firers sight picture or point of aim to fire additional rounds at the target in order to
achieve a target hit. The command of execution and termination elements is always mandatory.
8-58. Many factors can cause a target miss. These factors depend on the direct-fire technique used and the
ammunition fired. The following factors could contribute to target misses:
z
Incorrect boresight or zero.
z
Battle damage to own vehicle or weapon.
z
Failure of the crew to perform correct before-operation checks or armament accuracy checks
(AAC) of the fire control system (Abrams) or built-in test (BIT) (Bradley).
z
Incorrect Target Acquisition System (TAS) alignment (M2A3).
z
Error in crew drill during the engagement, such as an incorrect lay of the sight (reticle) on the
target aiming point (poor sight picture).
z
Loss of boresight or zero.
z
Round-to-round dispersion (predominantly with large caliber ammunition).
z
Incorrect range.
z
Excessive cant of the firing platform (trunnion tilt).
z
Refraction (optical path bending).
8-59. A subsequent fire command may contain up to five elements: alert, deflection correction, range or
elevation correction, execution, and termination. The alert, execution, and termination elements are always
given. A deflection or range/elevation correction should be given when a crew does not have the ability to
electronically determine accurate range to target or compute automatic lead. If a full-up fire control system
with automatic lead and super-elevation is available, the reengage method should be used. A sensing of
LOST, OVER, SHORT, or DOUBTFUL acts as the alert of the subsequent fire command. This
will cue the crew that a subsequent fire command is being issued. (On Abrams vehicles, it also serves as
the alert element to the loader to arm the main gun, if appropriate.)
z
Alert. The sensing for the round fired alerts the gunner that a subsequent fire command is being
issued.
z
Deflection correction (only if necessary). A deflection correction is based on the VCs or
gunners sensing of where the round strikes in relation to the target. A deflection error in excess
8-26
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
of one target form indicates a fire control malfunction (if so equipped), optical path bending, or
an error in the gunners lay. Deflection corrections will not be less than one-half target form and
should not be more than one target form. On vehicles equipped with a LRF, automatic superelevation, and automatic lead, deflection errors in excess of one form indicate an improper sight
picture, reticle aim, or incorrect range to target. The gunner should again aim center of visible
mass, track the target, re-lase, and evaluate his range. Once complete, the VC will provide the
command of execution.
Range correction (only if necessary). A range correction is based on the VCs or gunners
sensing of where the round strikes in relation to the target. Range corrections will not be less
than one-half target form or more than one target form. For range corrections in excess of one
target form, reengage. On vehicles equipped with a LRF, automatic super-elevation, and
automatic lead, deflection errors in excess of one form indicate an improper sight picture, reticle
aim, or incorrect range to target. The gunner should again aim center of visible mass, track the
target, re-lase, and evaluate his range. Once complete, the VC will provide the command of
execution.
Notes. Though not recommended, the VC may make larger corrections in both deflection and
elevation when using the GAS. See below for direct fire adjustment techniques.
Abrams Note. When adjusting by target form using the GPS or thermal imaging sight
(TIS) reticle, do not release the palm switches or re-lase to the targetthis will cause the
ballistic solution to change.
z
z
Execution. The VC announces FIRE, or another command of execution as listed on page 814.
Termination. The VC completes the subsequent fire command by announcing CEASE FIRE.
DIRECT-FIRE ADJUSTMENT METHODS

8-60. Closely following the before-operation checks, prep-to-fire checks, and direct-fire techniques
already discussed will increase the chances of achieving a first-round target destructive hit. In some
situations, however, direct-fire adjustment will be necessary. When a gunner or VC fires a round and
misses the target, the crew must take actions to obtain a rapid target hit with a subsequent round. The crew
must use a subsequent fire command to adjust fires onto a target.
8-61. There are two direct-fire adjustment methodsreengage and standard adjustment methods.
Reengage
8-62. Vehicles without a fire control system, an operational LRF, or a stabilization system failure will not
use the reengage method. If the firing vehicles fire control system is fully operational, the reengage
method is the preferred method for subsequent rounds after a first-round or first-burst miss. Reengage is a
rapid technique in which a new ballistic solution is entered in the fire control system. Example
z
Gunner. OVER.
z
Loader. UP.
z
VC. OVERREENGAGE.
z
Gunner. Dumps the lead solution in the fire control system by quickly releasing and re-grasping
the palm grips, then re-lays, re-lases to the target, and announces (RANGE). The VC then
issues the command of execution. Since the firer has already identified the target he will be
engaging, he does not have to announce IDENTIFIED again. He must announce the new
induced range prior to the command of execution.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-27
Chapter 8
Notes. If the gunner has been given the FIRE AND ADJUST command, he announces his
sensing and any appropriate change to ammunition. The gunner dumps the lead solution in the
fire control system by quickly releasing and re-grasping the palm grips, then re-lases to the
target, waits for an UP, and announces, ON THE WAY.
If the crew has a sensing of TARGET, but the target has not been completely
destroyed (for example, it cannot move but can still fire), the gunner or VC will re-lay using the
same sight picture, announce TARGET (await UP from the loader) REENGAGE. The
firer will announce (RANGE), and once he is given the command of execution will fire the
subsequent round.
Standard Adjustment
8-63. The standard adjustment method is the primary means for weapon systems without a fire control
system, or those vehicles whose fire control systems are damaged, to direct main and machine gun fires on
to target accurately and effectively.
8-64. When firing and unable to hit the target using the reengage method (or when using degraded
methods of engagement using the GPS), the VC or crew member (if given the FIRE AND ADJUST
command) may choose to use the standard adjustment method. The standard adjustment for both elevation
and deflection will not be less than a one-half target form or more than one target form. When the crew
observes a round missing the target in both range and deflection, the deflection correction is given before
the range correction, similar to the order of the elements of a fire command. If the crew observes over,
short, lost, or doubtful, the VC or crew member will announce his sensing and the intended correction in
one of the following ways:
Note. The VC has the option of increasing the gunners adjustment beyond one target form
based on the situation.
z
z
z
z
Deflection correction. DOUBTFUL LEFT (RIGHT) RIGHT (LEFT) ONE-HALF FORM.

Range correction. SHORT (OVER) ADD (DROP) HALF FORM.
Combination of deflection and range correction. DOUBTFUL LEFT (RIGHT), OVER
(SHORT) RIGHT (LEFT) HALF FORM DROP (ADD) HALF FORM.
Lost. LOST DROP HALF FORM. Typically, if the round is lost, the round traveled over
the target to beyond the line of sight of the crew. In this instance, dropping one half or one form
is the preferred adjustment.
8-65. After making his sight correction, the gunner announces (DEFLECTION/RANGE
CORRECTION), awaits the command of execution, announces ON THE WAY, and fires. This informs
the VC that the gunner understands the intended correction and has applied it prior to firing. In the event
the gunner has incorrectly applied the correction, it provides the VC time to cease fire the engagement
rather than knowingly fire a round or burst ineffectively.
For Abrams and Bradley Crews

8-66. If, after firing two rounds (Abrams) or eight rounds (Bradley), respectively, with the GPS using
degraded methods of engagement, the gunner or the VC has not sensed some target effect, the decision
should be made to use the auxiliary sight to complete the engagement. As soon as the tactical situation
permits, the crew should perform a boresight check, and re-boresight if necessary. During combat, the VC
may have to make larger corrections than the standard corrections listed above in order to get target effect
as rapidly as possible.
8-28
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Note. Though not recommended, the VC may make larger corrections in both deflection and
elevation than the standard direct fire adjustments listed above.
CREW DUTIES IN RESPONSE TO A FIRE COMMAND

8-67. Each crew member has specific duties to perform in response to each element of a fire command.
The VC and gunner will apply the rules of lay for every round fired. The rules of lay are (EAR)
z
End lay in elevation.
z
Always aim at the center of visible mass.
z
Remember the sight picture at trigger squeeze.
8-68. The VC, gunner, (or loader) will squeeze the trigger as soon as he announces (RANGE), ON THE
WAY (on the Y of WAY). Vehicles not equipped with a laser rangefinder or means to electronically
determine the range will not include range as a prefix to ON THE WAY.
NOTES FOR ABRAMS, BRADLEY, AND LRAS3 EQUIPPED VEHICLES

8-69. With the enhancements of digital capabilities for information gathering and reporting, and the
CITV/CIV for increased observation, the M1A2 SEP and M2A3 can cover a larger sector of fire than
previous vehicle variants. This larger sector could have multiple avenues of approach. The gunner could be
required to engage multiple targets on his own, while the VC continues to scan and designate with the
CITV or CIV, which places increased responsibilities on the gunner to make his own decisions when given
the command, FIRE AND ADJUST. Also, this requires the VC and gunner to maintain a constant
communication flow.
8-70. Normally with Abrams and newer Bradley variants, the LRF is kept in the ARM LAST RTN logic
position. When the target is extremely small or at an extended range (the entire target appears within the
aiming circle), ARM 1ST RTN logic is the preferred position, as the laser beam may project beyond the
target and cause multiple returns. Before firing, the gunner checks through the GAS to ensure the path of
the main gun is clear. Prior to firing, the gunner on these vehicle types will announce the range to target
determined and displayed in his field of view followed by ON THE WAY.
8-71. Setting the AMMUNITION SELECT switch (M1A1), push button (M1A2 SEP), or selecting the
appropriate ammunition on the weapons control box (WCB) (Bradley), to a different ammunition with the
palm switches pressed updates the ballistic solution for the new ammunition. For the BFV, the crew must
re-lase the target before an updated ballistic solution is induced into the system.
8-72. For Abrams crews, when changing ammunition during a degraded engagement, the gunner indexes
the correct ammunition type, but does not release his palm switches, the VC does not have to press the
BATTLE SGT (battlesight) button again, and the range in the fire control system remains the same.
However, if the gunner releases the palm switches during the engagement, he must re-grasp the palm
switches and track the target smoothly. The VC presses the BATTLE SGT button and uses the
ADD/DROP toggle switch (or the four-way switch on the M1A2 SEP) to update the complete ballistic
solution (10 meters) for the new ammunition, and announces BATTLESIGHT.
8-73. For Abrams crews, to make sure the main gun can be loaded safely across all types of terrain, the
GUN/TURRET DRIVE switch in the loaders position should remain in the elevation uncouple (EL
UNCPL) position. This returns the main gun to a position standard for loading when the SAFE/ARM lever
is moved to the SAFE position by the loader.
MULTIPLE ENGAGEMENTS
8-74. In combat, vehicle crews may engage targets using multiple engagement techniques. These
engagements require speed and accuracy to suppress or destroy all targets. The types of target engagements
are single target engagements, multiple target engagements, and multiple weapon system engagements
(Abrams and Bradley crews). For single target engagements, crews respond with standard crew duties.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-29
Chapter 8
Multiple target engagements and multiple weapon system engagements require additional fire command
elements and responses from the crew.
MULTIPLE MAIN GUN OR COAX MACHINE GUN ENGAGEMENTS

8-75. A multiple main gun or coax machine gun engagement is more than one target engaged with the
same weapon. These engagements, especially multiple vehicle engagements, require rapid and accurate
fire, target destruction, and quick shifts to new targets. The VC determines which target presents the
greatest threat (most dangerous) and issues a fire command to engage that target first. The VC determines
the next most dangerous target, directs fires to the second target and continues this process until all targets
are destroyed. On vehicles with automatic lead provided by the fire control system, when moving from one
target to another, the gunner must make sure he releases the palm switches momentarily (dumps lead
solution), then squeezes the palm switches again. This eliminates the floating reticle and makes laying on
the next target much faster. The gunner must now re-lase to the new target to establish an accurate ballistic
solution.
Note. On the M2A3, no kinematic lead is automatically induced when firing the coax machine
gun or when firing the tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided (TOW) missile system.
8-76. The VC must decide whether or not a target has been destroyed. Indications that a target has been
sufficiently damaged include secondary explosions or crew members abandoning the vehicle. Multiple
engagements require the VC to shift fires quickly from one target to the next as the classification of most
dangerous changes from moment to moment.
8-77. Multiple coax machine gun engagements are performed in the same manner. The most dangerous
target is engaged first; fires are then shifted to the next most dangerous or dangerous target (see Figure
8-11).
8-30
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-11. Reduced multiple target fire command example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-31
Chapter 8
MULTIPLE WEAPON SYSTEMS ENGAGEMENT (ABRAMS, BRADLEY, AND ASV)

8-78. There are two types of multiple weapon system engagementssequential and simultaneous.
Sequential
8-79. Sequential engagements are engagements which may require the use of two weapon systems against
multiple targets in a sequential manner. All platforms with multiple weapon systems have the ability to
execute these engagements. The second is one that requires the simultaneous use of multiple weapons
against multiple targets.
8-80. Sequential engagements use an initial fire command when initiating direct fires at each target, but
may involve a change of weapon system between the first and second target.
Simultaneous (Abrams only)

8-81. Simultaneous engagements are specific to Abrams platforms. It is an engagement where multiple
weapon systems are engaging one or more targets whether independently or simultaneously. A sample fire
command and the VCs and gunners responses to a multiple weapon systems engagement follows. The
VC announces GUNNER SABOT TANK. The gunner announces IDENTIFIED (RANGE) and
takes up the correct sight picture. The VC evaluates the range, and then announces FIRE AND ADJUST
CALIBER FIFTY. The gunner announces ON THE WAY and engages his target. He then announces
his sensing and intended correction and continues to engage the target. If a target destructive hit is sensed,
the gunner announces TARGET GUNNER COMPLETE. When the VC finishes his engagements, he
announces VC COMPLETE. The VC resumes control of the engagement at this time and announces
GUNNER CEASE FIRE LOADER 240, TROOPS 9 OCLOCK, THREE HUNDRED. The loader
announces IDENTIFIED, THREE HUNDRED and takes up the correct sight picture. The VC then
announces FIRE AND ADJUST. The loader announces ON THE WAY and engages his target. The
loader must sense his own rounds and make his own corrections using the tracer on target (ToT) technique.
If a target destructive hit is sensed, the loader announces TARGET LOADER COMPLETE. The VC
resumes control of the engagement at this time and announces LOADER CEASE FIRE.
8-82. During some multiple weapon systems engagements, the VC may need to stop firing his caliber .50
engagement temporarily, to assist the gunner. The two most common situations are
z
When the gunner cannot identify the target, the VC will lay the main gun on target.
z
When the gunner cannot sense the effect of the round, the VC will help sense rounds.
Notes. In the case of multiple machine gun engagements, the VC will use the FIRE AND
ADJUST command for the loader. The VC should only direct the loader to engage targets that
are to the left of the main gun or CITV (M1A2 SEP).
(M1A2, M2/M3A3) The fire and adjust command of execution used when the VC is
going to use the CITV/CIV to search for more targets does not take the responsibility for cease
firing the weapon system in use from the VC.
SECTION III ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUES

8-83. For the wide variety of platforms in the HBCT, there are an equally wide variety of techniques to
employ those platforms weapon systems against threat targets. This section will discuss general
engagement techniques for machine gun and main gun targets. See your platforms respective appendix for
detailed information on techniques used during engagements using platform specific ammunition.
8-32
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
8-84. There are a number of firing techniques that are common across all platforms. In order to best
describe the techniques, aim points will be defined as appropriate though your platforms reticle, iron sight,
or sight picture may vary.
EMPLOYING VEHICLE MACHINE GUNS

8-85. Vehicle crews must be able to effectively engage infantry, crew-served weapons, antitank guided
missiles (ATGM) teams, rocket-propelled grenades (RPG) teams, trucks, light armored vehicles, lightlyconstructed covered positions, and aircraft. This section discusses how vehicle machine guns are used and
their role in direct-fire engagements.
8-86. Machine guns are extremely effective weapons, but they also serve the vehicle crews in different
ways. The crew is limited only by their ingenuity in using these weapons. The following is a list of primary
uses for platform mounted machine guns:
ENGAGE SOFT TARGETS

8-87. Crews will primarily engage soft targets with machine guns. Soft targets are those that can be
penetrated or destroyed using 7.62mm or caliber .50 ammunition. These types of targets include
unprotected troops, snipers, RPG teams, trucks (unarmored), cars, aircraft, bunkers, or non-reinforced
buildings. These are the primary targets for machine guns out to their maximum effective range.
ENGAGE POINT TARGET

8-88. A point target requires a gunner to aim at a single point or location and fire controlled, accurately
aimed bursts to destroy a singular target. Although an RPG team is presented by as many as three targets, it
is still classified as a point target. In order to engage these targets:
z
Unstabilized Machine Guns Versus Stationary Point Targets. Gunners firing unstabilized or
pintle mounted machine guns should estimate the range to target, aim to the center of visible
mass near the base of the target, and fire an initial burst. Adjust the ToT in order to move the
strike of the round into the target area. Once complete, fire a killing burst of 20 to 30 rounds to
destroy the target. If dismounts abandon the soft target you are engaging, continue to engage the
dismounted threat as point targets or as area targets.
z
Unstabilized Machine Guns Versus Moving Point Targets. Gunners firing from unstabilized
or pintle mounted machine guns should estimate the range and speed of the target. Gunners must
lead the vehicle (target) based on the apparent rate the target is moving. Always lead targets in
the direction of their travel and include the super-elevation required for the determined range.
Once tracking the targets movement and range, fire an initial burst into the target area. The
strike of the rounds and visible tracers should intersect the path the threat target is traveling.
Adjust as necessary based on the strike of the rounds around the target area. Unless absolutely
necessary, do not make aggressive adjustments, keep your elbows locked to your sides, and
continue to engage smoothly with short bursts. Once the gunner achieves rounds in the target
area, he should immediately begin firing a killing burst, placing as many rounds into the target
and target area as possible (see Figure 8-12 and Figure 8-13).
z
Stabilized Machine Guns. Gunners must lay to the base of the target, lase, get an accurate
range, adjust the sight picture to the center of visible mass, and engage upon receiving the
command of execution. The initial burst should be 10 to 20 rounds and should be effective
enough to destroy the point target. If dismounted threats appear leaving the target or target area,
the gunner may engage those threats using point techniques or switch to area techniques as
necessary (see Figure 8-14).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-33
Chapter 8
Figure 8-12. Manually applied lead for a slow moving target
Figure 8-13. Manually applied lead for a fast moving target
8-34
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-14. Aiming point for machine gun point target, stationary
ENGAGE AREA TARGET

8-89. Engaging area targets requires the gunner to begin the engagement at the base of the target, fire an
initial burst into the target area, adjust fire into the target area, fire a killing burst, and sweep through the
area with a follow-on suppressive burst of 10 to 15 rounds. The initial burst is the same as firing at a point
target. The suppressive burst for area targets includes the use of the Z pattern to destroy any remaining
threat targets that have not gone to ground. The Z pattern is fired from front (near) to back (far), crossing
back and forth across the target area as shown in Figure 8-15.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-35
Chapter 8
Figure 8-15. Z pattern fired from the front

8-90. When engaging area targets on the offense, slight movements of the turret/pintle mount can provide
an effective Z pattern without much effort. In the offense, continue to move when engaging targets.
Movement of the turret/gunner skate ring and vehicle carries the burst through the target when a narrow
frontal area target is presented (see Figure 8-16). Round dispersion will cover target width.
8-36
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-16. Z pattern
ENGAGE AIRCRAFT TARGET

8-91. Engaging moving aircraft through your area of responsibility requires crews to be familiar with the
engagement techniques associated with fast fixed wing and slow rotary-wing aircraft engagements. Figure
8-17 defines the procedures for crews engaging these types of aircraft while the threat is approaching their
position and while the aircraft is traveling across their front (left to right, or right to left).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-37
Chapter 8
Figure 8-17. Aiming points for engaging aircraft with vehicle machine guns
8-38
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
ENGAGE AIRBORNE TARGETS

8-92. The rapid rate of fall of paratroopers makes them hard to engage. To engage the paratrooper,
gunners
z
Fire a burst with a lead of two body lengths beneath the feet of the dropping paratrooper (see
Figure 8-18).
z
If a troop-carrying helicopter is sighted, the helicopter should be engaged first.
Notes. The Geneva Convention of 1949 and the Rules of War prohibit engaging crewmen
parachuting from disabled aircraft.
The MK19 should not be used against paratroopers because of time of flight of rounds.
Figure 8-18. Paratrooper engagement technique
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-39
Chapter 8
SUPPRESSIVE FIRE ENGAGEMENTS

8-93. Vehicle suppressive fire is direct fire placed on known or likely enemy locations to degrade one or
more of the enemys basic combat functionsmoving, shooting, observing, or communicating. This takes
the threats current place in his own detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess (DIDEA) process and
makes him begin again, providing friendly forces time to develop a situation and destroy the threat.
Whenever possible, use machine guns for suppressive-fire engagements to conserve main gun ammunition
(120mm or 25mm). Suppressive fire is most effective when fired at a sustained rate of 20- to 30-round
bursts (4 to 6 tracers) every 10 seconds for the M240, and 10- to 15-round bursts (2 to 3 tracers) every 10
seconds for the caliber .50. No specific pattern or engagement technique is prescribed; however, each burst
should strike within 10 meters of the suspected target area. In dense terrain or areas of high enemy troop
activity, overwatching vehicles can cover maneuvering vehicles with suppressive machine gun fire.
Note (Abrams). To conserve the limited caliber .50 ammunition, use the loaders machine gun
along with the coax on targets within 900 meters. Use the caliber .50 machine gun to suppress
targets from 900 to 1,800 meters.
Reconnaissance by Fire
8-94. Reconnaissance by fire is used when other means of enemy detection have been unsuccessful or are
not available. It is best employed with another vehicle within the same section. One vehicle can fire on a
suspected enemy position or suspicious area to cause the enemy to react and compromise his position at the
time of our choosing, not his. The second vehicle can then engage and destroy the enemy from a different
location.
8-95. To conserve main gun ammunition, use vehicle-mounted machine guns in reconnaissance by fire to
cause a hidden enemy to react. Fire a single burst (20 to 30 rounds with the M240 or 10 to 15 rounds with
the caliber .50) while constantly observing for enemy movement, return fire, or the flash of rounds striking
metal.
Ranging
8-96. (M1A1 only) When the GAS and LRF are inoperative, the caliber .50 machine gun may be used as a
ranging gun out to 1,800 meters. The M240 (either coax or mounted in the CWS) may be used as a ranging
gun out to 900 meters. Limited use of this technique is recommended, because it reveals your position.
Designating Targets
8-97. Section and platoon leaders can use machine gun fire effectively to designate targets for other
vehicles, artillery forward observers (FO), or aerial fire support. Limited use of this technique is
recommended, because it reveals your position.
Firing Through Cover

8-98. Vehicle-mounted machine guns can be used effectively to penetrate most cover used by infantry,
such as small trees, hasty barricades, or lightly constructed buildings.
Incendiary Effects
8-99. Machine gun tracers or incendiary ammunition, particularly armor-piercing incendiary-tracer
(API-T), can be used to set fire to any readily combustible material such as dry grass, grain, dried brush, or
wood. Fire will deny a particular area to enemy use, and smoke from a burning field can be used to screen
movement.
8-40
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Coaxially Mounted Machine Gun Coax (Abrams and Bradley)

8-100. The coax machine gun can effectively engage area or point targets out to 900 meters, its maximum
effective range (tracer burnout). When using the coax, the VC or gunner should set the LRF LOGIC switch
based on the operational environment. To provide the most accurate range to troop type target, gunners
should lase the base of the target, then raise aim center of visible mass prior to firing (see Figure 8-19).
Figure 8-19. Sight picture for lasing on troops using last return logic
Note. Due to the rapid decrease in range to the target during offensive coax engagements, it may
be necessary to re-lase to the target during the engagement. The gunner must not forget to dump
lead after re-lasing. Armed trucks firing in the offense will want to fire at the base of targets
initially. As the vehicle progresses toward the target area, the rounds will close with and strike
within the target area.
MACHINE GUN ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUE FOR THE GAS/AUXILIARY SIGHT

8-101. For Abrams, if the GPS or TIS is inoperative, use the HEAT reticle in the GAS. Due to the
ballistic mismatch of HEAT ammunition and the 7.62-mm coax round, the range must be doubled. (If the
target is at 800 meters, use the 1,600-meter range line.) Also, if lead is to be applied, use 7-1/2 mils
initially, and correct as necessary.
8-102. For Bradleys, if the IBAS/ISU is inoperative, use the AP side of the reticle in the AUX sight.
Gunners should fire a sensing burst into the target area and then adjust the reticle lay before firing a
suppressive burst.
LOADERS MACHINE GUN

8-103. The loaders M240 machine gun is used to engage area and point targets designated by the VC.
When using the M240 machine gun, the loader should
z
Lay the weapon for deflection.
z
Fire bursts of 20 to 30 rounds (4 to 6 tracers) to engage all targets except aircraft. Engage
aircraft using a continuous burst.
z
Use tracer impact to adjust rounds on target. These adjustments are given as
UP/DOWN/RIGHT/LEFT.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-41
Chapter 8
8-104. When the loader is directed to engage targets with the M240, both the VC and loader must
remember
z
The loaders main duty is to load the main gun.
z
The loaders machine gun does not have any sights; therefore, it should be used only for area or
aerial targets.
z
The VCs weapon and loaders machine gun can be fired simultaneously; however, caution must
be used to prevent injury to the loader or VC.
z
To avoid damaging the CITV, thermal shrouds, the bore evacuator, or the muzzle reference
system (MRS) collimator, the loaders machine gun should be fired at targets to the left of the
main gun only.
8-105. The loaders stand should be adjusted so the chest-hold technique can be used to steady the M240
while firing. The loader grasps the handles of the loaders M240 mount, holds them closely against his
chest for steadiness and control, and fires the weapon.
WARNING
When engaging targets, the VC and loader should not cross each
others fire. This could injure crew members and damage
equipment.
VEHICLE COMMANDERS WEAPON

8-106. The M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun is mounted in the CWS on the M1A1 Abrams vehicle. The
M2 HB flex caliber .50 machine gun is mounted in the Improved Commanders Weapon Station (ICWS)
on the M1A2 SEP vehicle. (The M240 7.62-mm machine gun can be mounted in the CWS and the ICWS
when necessary). The M2 machine gun can engage area and point targets out to 1,800 metersits maximum
effective range. If the M240 7.62-mm machine gun is mounted, it should only be used out to 900 meters
(tracer burnout). When using the commanders weapon
z
Lay the weapon for deflection and estimate the range. If the situation permits, the VC should
have the gunner lase to the target and announce range; then, the VC should place the appropriate
range line on target (M1A1 only).
z
Fire bursts of 10 to 15 rounds (2 to 3 tracers) for the M2 or 20 to 30 rounds (4 to 6 tracers) for
the M240 to adjust on target.
z
Use the short-halt technique to engage targets while on the move unless the vehicle is equipped
with a Commanders Remotely Operated Weapon Station (CROWS) variant that provides
stabilization.
8-107. On identification of an appropriate caliber .50 target, the VC announces CALIBER FIFTY and,
on the M1A1, lays the appropriate range line on the target center of mass. On hearing the VC announce
CALIBER FIFTY, the loader positions himself in the loaders hatch (if not in closed-hatch posture),
assumes the VCs responsibilities for primary target acquisition (ground and air), and assists in adjusting
the VCs machine gun fire. If the gunner is engaging targets with the main gun, the loader must remain
inside the turret. In all other situations, the loader should be out of the hatch, helping to sense rounds and
acquire targets (see Figure 8-20).
8-108. If the gunner or loader can see the caliber .50 tracers, he assists the VC in adjusting firethese
adjustments are given as UP/ DOWN/RIGHT/LEFT. On completion of the caliber .50 engagement, the
VC announces VC COMPLETE.
8-42
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-20. M1A1 caliber .50 aiming points
SECTION IV SAMPLE FIRE COMMANDS

8-109. The following examples are generic in nature, but show common fire commands that Abrams,
Bradley, and truck crews will face (see Figure 8-21 through Figure 8-41). The fire command examples are
provided in the following order to reduce confusion:
z
Common fire commands among all platforms are
Use of REENGAGE.
Single target.
Multiple targets.
Degraded single target.
Degraded multiple targets.
Degraded change of weapon system.
Fire commands to squads.
Smoke grenade fire commands.

z
Abrams series
Canister rounds and the use of FIRE AND ADJUST.
Simultaneous engagements firing all machine guns.
Change of weapon system.
Caliber .50 and main gun using FIRE AND ADJUST.

z
M1A2 variant specificdesignating targets.
z
Bradley series
Precision, VC determines range.
Precision, gunner determines range.
Change of weapon system.
Missile fire command.
Missile to 25mm, change of weapon system.
Rear bank fire command.

z
M2A3 variant specificdesignating targets.
z
Armed truck (including change of weapon system for the Armored Security Vehicle [ASV])
Single target engagement.
Multiple target engagement.
Change of weapon system (ASV).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-43
Chapter 8
Figure 8-21. Direct fire adjustment using the re-engage method
8-44
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-22. Single target engagement example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-45
Chapter 8
Figure 8-23. Multiple target fire command example
8-46
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-24. Single target fire command using BATTLE SGT button example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-47
Chapter 8
Figure 8-25. Single target fire command example without LRF/ELRF
8-48
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-26. Single target fire command using the stadia reticle with adjustment example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-49
Chapter 8
Figure 8-27. Multiple target fire command using the stadia reticle example
8-50
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-28. Multiple target fire command, GPS malfunction example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-51
Chapter 8
Figure 8-29. Change of weapon system using GAS or auxiliary sight fire command example
8-52
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-30. Fire command to dismounted squad example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-53
Chapter 8
Figure 8-31. Smoke grenade fire command example
8-54
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-32. Simultaneous engagement fire command example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-55
Chapter 8
Figure 8-33. Change of weapon system fire command example
8-56
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-34. Simultaneous targets, caliber .50 and main gun example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-57
Chapter 8
Figure 8-35. VC main gun fire command example
8-58
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-36. Canister engagement using FIRE AND ADJUST
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-59
Chapter 8
Figure 8-37. Multiple weapon system (Bradley) fire command example
8-60
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-38. Multiple weapon system (Bradley), fire and adjust, fire command example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-61
Chapter 8
Figure 8-39. Truck single target fire command example
8-62
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-40. Truck multiple target fire command example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-63
Chapter 8
Figure 8-41. ASV change of weapon system fire command example
8-64
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SECTION V INDIRECT FIRE

8-110. When the decision to engage is made and the method of engagement selected is to employ indirect
fire, the engagement is initiated by the fire support team, or by other Soldiers in position to observe and
direct the fires. The observer initiates an indirect fire engagement with a call for fire. VCs must be fluent at
calling for indirect fires at their disposal in order to rapidly engage threat targets using all munition deliver
systems at their disposal. This section provides the crew the fundamentals of the call for fire process,
control measures, commands, and the standard call for fire format.
CALL FOR FIRE

8-111. A call for fire is a concise message prepared by the observer. It contains all of the information
needed by the fire direction center (FDC) to determine the method of target attack. It is a request for fire,
not an order.
8-112. A call for fire must be sent quickly but clearly enough that it can be understood, recorded, and
read back, without error, by the FDC recorder. The observer should tell the radio operator he has seen a
target so the radio operator can start the call for fire while the target location is being determined.
Information is sent as it is determined, rather than waiting until a complete call for fire has been prepared.
8-113. Regardless of the method of target location used, the normal call for fire is sent in three
transmissions consisting of six elements with a break and read back after each transmission. The
transmissions and elements are organized in the following sequence:
z
Observer identification and warning order.
z
Target location.
z
Target description, method of engagement, and method of fire and control.
OBSERVER IDENTIFICATION
8-114. This element tells the FDC who is calling for fire.
WARNING ORDER
8-115. The warning order clears the net for the fire mission. The warning order consists of the type of
mission, the size of the element to fire for effect (FFE), and the method of target location.
Type of Mission
8-116. There are four types of fire missions. They are
z
Adjust Fire. When the observer believes that an adjustment must be made (because of
questionable target location or lack of registration corrections), he announces ADJUST FIRE.
z
Fire for Effect. The observer should always strive for first-round FFE. The accuracy required to
FFE depends on the accuracy of target location and the ammunition being used. When the
observer is certain that the target location is accurate and that the first volley should have the
desired effect on the target so that little or no adjustment is required, he announces FIRE FOR
EFFECT.
z
Suppress. To quickly bring fire on a target that is not active, the observer announces
SUPPRESS (followed by the target identification). Suppression missions are normally fired on
preplanned targets, and a duration is associated with the call for fire.
z
Immediate Suppression and Immediate Smoke. When engaging a planned target or target of
opportunity that has taken friendly maneuver or elements under fire, the observer announces
IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION or IMMEDIATE SMOKE (followed by the target location).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-65
Chapter 8
Size of Element to Fire for Effect

8-117. The observer may request the size of the unit to FFE, for example, BATTALION. Usually he
does this by announcing the last letter in the battalion FDC's call sign. For example, T6H24 is announced
H. If the observer does not specify a size of element to FFE, the FDC will make the decision based on the
attack guidance received and the Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual (JMEM) solution.
Method of Target Location

8-118. There are five methods to identify target locations. They are
z
Grid. The word grid is not announced; such as ADJUST FIRE, OVER.
z
Laser Grid. The observer announces LASER GRID, for example FIRE FOR EFFECT, LASER
GRID, OVER.
z
Polar Plot. The observer announces POLAR, for example, ADJUST FIRE POLAR, OVER.
z
Laser Polar. The observer announces LASER POLAR, for example, ADJUST FIRE, LASER
POLAR, OVER.
z
Shift from a Known Point. The observer announces SHIFT, followed by the designation of the
known point or by the target number, for example, ADJUST FIRE, SHIFT KNOWN POINT 1,
OVER.
Target Location
8-119. The target locations are
z
Grid. In a grid mission, six-place grids normally are sent. Eight-place grids should be sent for
registration points or other points for which greater accuracy is required. The OT direction
normally will be sent after the entire initial call for fire, since it is not needed by the FDC to
locate the target.
z
Laser Grid. A laser grid mission is the same as a grid mission with the following exceptions:
Target grid is sent to a greater level of accuracy (8 or 10 digit grid depending on

observation post location accuracy).
In an adjust fire mission, corrections are sent in the form of a grid to the burst location.
z
Polar Plot. In a polar plot mission, the word polar in the warning order alerts the FDC that the
target will be located with respect to the observer's position. The observer's location must be
known to the FDC. The observer then sends the direction and distance. A vertical shift tells the
FDC how far, in meters, the target is located above or below the observer's location. Vertical
shift may also be described by a vertical angle in mils, relative to the observer's location.
z
Laser Polar. Laser data are sent to the nearest 1 mil for direction and vertical angle and the
nearest 10 meters for distance.
z
Shift. In a shift from a known point mission, the target will be located in relation to a
preexisting known point or recorded target. The point or target from which the shift is made is
sent in the warning order. (Both the observer and the FDC must know the location of the point
or recorded target.) The observer then sends the OT direction. Normally, it is sent in mils.
However, the FDC can accept degrees or cardinal directions, whichever is specified by the
observer. The corrections are sent next:
The lateral shift in meters (how far left or right the target is) from the known point.
The range shift (how much farther [ADD] or close [DROP] the target is in relation to the
known point, to the nearest 100 meters).
The vertical shift (how much the altitude of the target is above [UP] or below [DOWN] the
altitude of the known point, expressed to the nearest 5 meters). Vertical shift is usually only
significant if it is greater than or equal to 35 meters.
8-66
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Target Description
8-120. The observer must describe the target in enough detail that the FDC can determine the amount and
type of ammunition to use. The FDC selects different ammunition for different types of targets. The
observer should be brief but accurate. The description should contain the following:
z
What the target is (such as troops, equipment, supply depot, trucks).
z
What the target is doing (such as digging in, in an assembly area).
z
The number of elements in the target (such as squad, platoon, three trucks, six tanks).
z
The degree of protection (such as in the open, in foxholes, in bunkers with overhead protection).
8-121. The target size and shape if these are significant. If the target is rectangular, the length and width
(in meters) and the attitude (azimuth of the long axis, 0000-3199 mils) to the nearest 100 mils should be
given, for example, ATTITUDE 2800, LENGTH 400, WIDTH 300. If the target is circular, the radius
should be given, for example, RADIUS 200. Linear targets may be described by length, width, and
attitude.
METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT
8-122. The observer may indicate how he wants to attack the target. This element consists of the type of
adjustment, DANGER CLOSE, MARK, trajectory, ammunition, and distribution.
Type of Adjustment
8-123. Two types of adjustment may be employedarea and precision. Area fire is standard without
request.
z
Area. Area fire is used to attack an area target. Since many area targets are mobile, the
adjustment should be as quick as possible, consistent with accuracy, to keep the target from
escaping. A well-defined point at or near the center of the area to be attacked should be selected
and used as an aiming point. This point is called the adjusting point during adjust fire missions.
To achieve surprise, fire may be adjusted on an auxiliary point, and after adjustment is
completed, the FFE shifted to the target. Normally, adjustment on an area target is conducted
with one adjusting weapon.
z
Precision. Precision fire is conducted with one weapon on a point target. It is used to either
obtain registration corrections or to destroy a target. When the mission is a registration, it is
initiated by the FDC with a message to observer (MTO). If the target is to be destroyed, the
observer announces DESTRUCTION.
Danger Close
8-124. DANGER CLOSE is included in the method of engagement when the target is (rounds will
detonate) within 600 meters of any friendly troops for mortars and artillery, 750 meters for 5-inch naval
guns. See FM 3-09.32, for a listing of risk-estimate distances for surface-to-surface and air-delivered
munitions
Mark
8-125. MARK is included in the method of engagement to indicate that the observer is going to call for
rounds for either of the following reasons:
z
To orient himself in his zone of observation.
z
To indicate targets to ground troops, aircraft, or other observers.
z
Trajectory.
z
Low Angle. Standard without request.
z
High Angle. If high angle is desired, it is requested immediately after type of engagement. If the
firing unit determines that high angle must be used to attack a target, the FDC must inform the
observer in the MTO that high angle will be used. Mortars fire only high angle.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-67
Chapter 8
Ammunition
8-126. The observer may request any type of ammunition during the adjustment or the FFE phase of his
mission. Shell HE with fuze quick is normally used in adjustment. If that is what the observer desires, he
need not request it in his call for fire. If the observer does not request a shell-fuze in effect, the fire
direction officer (FDO) determines the shell-fuze combination. Unit SOP may designate a standard shellfuze combination.
Note. Ammunition standards may vary from unit to unit. The observer must learn these
standards upon assignment to a unit.
8-127. If the observer does desire other than standard shell/fuze combinations the shell/fuze "in adjust" is
announced first, then the shell/fuze "in effect". For FFE missions, it is not necessary to announce "in
effect" after the shell/fuze request.
z
Followed By. This is part of a term used to indicate a change in the rate of fire, in the type of
ammunition, or in another order for FFE, for example white phosphorous (WP) FOLLOWED
BY HE.
z
Projectile. Examples of requests for other than HE projectile are ILLUMINATION, dual
purpose improved conventional munitions (DPICM), and SMOKE.
z
Fuze. Most missions are fired with fuze quick during the adjustment phase. If fuze quick is
desired or if a projectile that has only one fuze is requested, fuze is not indicated. Illuminating,
improvised conventional munitions (ICM) and smoke projectiles are fuzed with time fuzes;
therefore, when the observer requests ILLUMINATION, ICM, or SMOKE, he does not
announce TIME.
z
Volume of Fire. The volume of fire desired in FFE is stated in rounds per weapon system.
Distribution
8-128. The observer may control the pattern of bursts in the target area. This pattern of bursts is called a
sheaf. Unless otherwise requested, a standard sheaf is a circular target with a 100 meter radius. The
ballistic computer system for the weapon system used determines individual weapon aiming points to
distribute the bursts for best coverage of this type of target (see Figure 8-42).
8-68
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 8-42. Standard sheaf

8-129. A converged sheaf places all rounds on a specific point and is used for small, hard targets (see
Figure 8-43).
Figure 8-43. Converged sheaf
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-69
Chapter 8
8-130. An open sheaf separates the bursts by the maximum effective burst width of the shell fired (see
Figure 8-44).
Figure 8-44. Open sheaf

8-131. Special sheafs (linear, rectangular, circular, or irregular) of any length and width may be
requested. If target length, or length and width are given, attitude also must be given. If target length is
greater than or equal to five times the target width, the ballistic computer system assumes a linear target.
The mortar ballistic computer always assumes the target is linear and fires a parallel sheaf unless a special
sheaf is requested (see Figure 8-45).
Figure 8-45. Special sheaf
8-70
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
8-132. The parallel sheaf distributes the bursts of all pieces similar to the distribution of weapons on the
gun line due to firing the same data with each piece (see Figure 8-46).
Figure 8-46. Parallel sheaf
METHOD OF FIRE AND CONTROL

8-133. The method of fire and control element indicates the desired manner of attacking the target,
whether the observer wants to control the time or delivery of fire, and whether he can observe the target.
The observer announces methods of fire and control as discussed below.
Method of Fire
8-134. In area fire, the adjustment normally is conducted with one howitzer or with the center gun of a
mortar platoon or section. If the observer determines that more than one gun is necessary for adjustment,
he can request 2 GUNS IN ADJUST or PLATOON/BATTERY RIGHT (LEFT). (Adjusting at extreme
distances may be easier with two guns firing.) The normal interval fired by a platoon or battery right (left)
is 5 seconds. If the observer wants some other interval, he may so specify.
Method of Control
8-135. The methods of control are
z
Fire When Ready. This method is standard without request.
z
At My Command. If the observer wishes to control the time of delivery of fire, he includes AT
MY COMMAND in the method of control. When the pieces are ready to fire, the FDC
announces PLATOON (or BATTERY or BATTALION) IS READY, OVER. (Call signs are
used.) The observer announces FIRE when he is ready for the pieces to fire. This only applies
to adjusting rounds and the first volley of a FFE. AT MY COMMAND remains in effect
throughout the mission until the observer announces CANCEL AT MY COMMAND, OVER.
At my command can be further specified. BY ROUND AT MY COMMAND controls every
round in adjustment and every volley in the FFE phase.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-71
Chapter 8
8-72
Cannot Observe. CANNOT OBSERVE indicates the observer cannot see the target (because
of vegetation, terrain, weather, or smoke); however, he has reason to believe a target exists at
the given location and that it is important enough to justify firing on it without adjustment.
Time on Target (TOT). The observer may tell the FDC when he wants the rounds to impact by
requesting TIME ON TARGET, 0859, OVER. The observer must ensure his time and the
FDC's time are synchronized prior to the mission.
Time to Target (TTT). The observer may tell the FDC when he wants the rounds to impact by
requesting TIME TO TARGET (so many) MINUTES AND SECONDS, OVER,
STANDBY, HACK, OVER. Time to target is the time in minutes and seconds after the "hack"
statement is delivered when rounds are expected to hit the target.
Continuous Illumination. In this method of control, illumination projectiles are fired at
specified time intervals to provide uninterrupted lighting on the target or specified area. The
observer may specify the time interval (in seconds). If the observer does not provide a time
interval, the FDC determines the interval by the burning time of the illumination ammunition in
use. If any other interval is required, it is indicated in seconds.
Coordinated Illumination. The observer may order the interval between illumination and HE
projectiles, in seconds, to achieve a time of impact of the HE coincident with optimum
illumination; or he may use normal AT MY COMMAND procedures. The command
ILLUMINATION MARK is used to tell the FDC when the illumination round is providing
optimal visibility on the target.
Cease Loading. The command CEASE LOADING is used during the firing of two or more
rounds to indicate the suspension of loading rounds into the gun(s). The gun sections may fire
any rounds that have already been loaded.
Check Firing. CHECK FIRING is used to cause an immediate halt in firing. Use this
command only when necessary to immediately stop firing (such as for safety reasons) as it
may result in cannons being out of action until any rammed/loaded rounds can be fired or
cleared from the tubes.
Continuous Fire. In field artillery (FA), mortars and naval gunfire (NGF), continuous fire
means loading and firing as rapidly as possible, consistent with accuracy, within the prescribed
rate of fire for the equipment. Firing will continue until suspended by the command CEASE
LOADING or CHECK FIRING.
Repeat. REPEAT can be given during adjustment or FFE missions. During Adjustment
REPEAT means firing another round(s) with the last data and adjust for any change in
ammunition if necessary. REPEAT is not sent in the initial call for fire.
During FFE, REPEAT means fire the same number of rounds using the same method of FFE as
last fired. Changes in the number of guns, the previous corrections, the interval, or the
ammunition may be requested.
Request Splash. SPLASH can be sent at the observer's request. The FDC announces SPLASH
to the observer 5 seconds prior to round impact. SPLASH must be sent to aerial observers and
during high-angle fire missions.
Do Not Load. DO NOT LOAD allows the section to prepare ammunition and lay on the target
without loading a projectile. When the command CANCEL DO NOT LOAD is given the
section automatically loads and fires the weapon (except for an at my command mission).
Duration. DURATION is usually used for suppression missions. DURATION will tell the
FDC the total time a target needs to be engaged.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SAMPLE MISSIONS
8-136. See Figure 8-47a and Figure 8-47b for sample calls for fire for various type missions.
EXAMPLES
FIRE
MISSION
Initial Fire Request
Observer
Z57 THIS IS Z71, ADJUST FIRE, OVER.
FD
THIS IS Z57, ADJUST FIRE OUT.
GRID NK180513, OVER.

GRID NK180513, OUT.
INFANTRY PLATOON IN THE OPEN, ICM IN
EFFECT,
INFANTRY PLATOON IN THE OPEN, ICM IN
EFFECT, OUT.
Message to Observer
Z, 2 ROUNDS, TARGET AF1027,
Z, 2 ROUNDS, TARGET AF1027, BREAK,
DIRECTION 1680, OVER.
DIRECTION 1680, OUT.
Note. Direction is sent before or with the first subsequent correction.
FIRE MISSION (SHIFT)
Observer
H66 THIS IS H44, ADJUST FIRE SHIFT
AA7733, OVER.
FDC
THIS IS H66, ADJUST FIRE SHIFT AA7733,

OUT.
DIRECTION, 5210, LEFT 380, ADD 400,
DOWN 35, OVER.
DIRECTION, 5210, LEFT 380, ADD 400,
DOWN 35, OUT.
COMBAT OP IN OPEN, ICM IN EFFECT,
OVER
COMBAT OP IN OPEN, ICM IN EFFECT, OUT.
Message to Observer
H, 1 ROUND, TARGET AA7742, OVER.
H, 1 ROUND, TARGET AA7742, OUT.
Figure 8-47a. Fire mission examples
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-73
Chapter 8
EXAMPLES (Continued)
FIRE MISSION (POLAR)
Observer
Z56 THIS IS Z31, FIRE FOR EFFECT, POLAR,
OVER.
FDC
THIS IS Z56, FIRE FOR EFFECT, POLAR,

OUT.
DIRECTION 4520, DISTANCE 2300, DOWN
35, OVER.
DIRECTION 4520, DISTANCE 2300, DOWN
35, OUT.
INFANTRY COMPANY IN OPEN, ICM, OVER.
INFANTRY COMPANY IN OPEN, ICM, OUT.
Message to Observer
Y, VT, 3 ROUNDS, TARGET AF2036, OVER.
Y, VT, 3 ROUNDS, TARGET AF2036, OUT.
FIRE MISSION (SUPPRESSION)
Observer
H18 THIS IS H24, SUPPRESS AB3104, OVER.
FDC
THIS IS H18, SUPPRESS AB3104, OUT.
FIRE MISSION (IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION)

Observer
H18 THIS IS H24, IMMEDIATE
SUPPRESSION, GRID 211432, OVER.
FDC
THIS IS H18, IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION,
GRID 211432, OUT.
Note. A two gun section using two rounds of HE or VT normally fires immediate suppression missions.
However, the -type of ammunition, units to fire, and volume may vary based on unit SOP.
Figure 8-47b. Fire mission examples (continued)
ADJUSTING FIRES
8-137. An observer's prime concern is the placement of timely and accurate fires on targets. If an
observer can locate the target accurately, he will request FIRE FOR EFFECT in his call for fire. Failure
to locate the target accurately may result from poor visibility, deceptive terrain, poor maps, or the
observer's difficulty in pinpointing the target. If the observer cannot locate the target accurately enough to
warrant FFE, he may conduct an adjustment. Even with an accurate target location, if current firing data
corrections are not available, the FDO (FA), or mortar platoon leader may direct that an adjustment be
conducted. Normally, one gun is used in adjustment. Special situations in which more than one gun is used
are so noted throughout this discussion.
8-74
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
8-138. When it is necessary for the observer to adjust fire, he must select an adjusting point. In area
missions, he must select a well-defined point near the center of the target area on which to adjust the fire.
The point selected is called an adjusting point. The location of this point is the target location element of
the call for fire in an area fire mission
8-139. Prior to commencing area fire adjustments, the first thing to be determined is the observer-target
(OT) direction followed by determining the OT factor. To determine the OT factor when the OT range is
greater than 1,000 meters, the range from the observer to the target (OT distance) is expressed to the
nearest thousand and then expressed in thousands (see Figure 8-48).
EXAMPLE
OT range = 4,200 meters
OT distance (expressed to nearest thousand) = 4,000
OT factor (expressed in thousands) = 4
Figure 8-48. Observer target factor calculation
8-140. For an OT range less than 1,000 meters, the distance is expressed to the nearest 100 meters and
expressed in thousands (see Figure 8-49).
EXAMPLE
OT range = 800 meters
OT factor = 0.8
Figure 8-49. Observer target factor
SPOTTINGS
8-141. A spotting is the observer's determination of the location of the burst (or the mean point of impact
[MPI] of a group of bursts) with respect to the adjusting point as observed along the OT line. Spottings are
made for the following:
z
Deviation (the number of mils right or left of the OT line).
z
Distance (whether the burst occurred beyond or short of the target).
z
When fuze time is fired, the height of burst (HOB) (the number of mils the burst is above the
target).
8-142. Spottings must be made by the observer the instant the bursts occur except when the spottings are
delayed deliberately to take advantage of drifting smoke or dust. The observer is usually required to
announce his spottings during his early training; experienced observers make spottings mentally. The
observer should consider the most difficult spottings first. The sequence of spottings is HOB (air or graze),
range (over or short), and deviation (left or right). For the purpose of this manual we will only discuss
deviation and range spottings for an in-depth discussion on adjustment of fire (see FM 6-30).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-75
Chapter 8
Range Spotting
8-143. Definite range spottiness is required to make a proper range adjustment. Any range spotting other
than DOUBTFUL, LOST, or UNOBSERVED is definite. Normally, a round which impacts on or near
the OT line results in a definite range spotting. Figure 8-50 shows the approximate areas for various range
spottiness. An observer may make a definite range spotting when the burst is not on or near the OT line by
using his knowledge of the terrain, drifting smoke, shadows, and wind. However, even experienced
observers must use caution and good judgment when making such spottiness. Possible range spottiness are
as follows:
z
OVER. A round that impacts beyond the adjusting point.
z
SHORT. A round that impacts between the observer and the adjusting point.
z
TARGET. A round that impacts on the target. This spotting is used only in precision fire
(registration or destruction missions).
z
RANGE CORRECT. A round that impacts at the correct range.
z
DOUBTFUL. A round that can be observed but cannot be spotted as OVER, SHORT,
TARGET, or RANGE CORRECT.
z
LOST. A round whose location cannot be determined by sight or sound.
z
UNOBSERVED. A round not observed but known to have impacted (usually heard).
z
UNOBSERVED OVER or SHORT. A round not observed but known to have impacted over
or short.
Figure 8-50. Range spotting for observer adjustments
8-76
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Deviation Spotting
8-144. A deviation spotting is the angular measurement from the adjusting point to the burst as seen from
the observer's position. During a fire mission, the observer measures the deviation, in mils, with his
binoculars (or another angle-measuring instrument). Deviation spottings are measured to the nearest 5 mils
for area fires and 1 mil for precision fires (see Figure 8-51). Possible deviation spottings are as follows:
z
LINE. A round that impacts on line (LN) with the adjusting point as seen by the observer (on
the OT line).
z
LEFT. A round that impacts left (L) of the adjusting point in relation to the OT line.
z
RIGHT. A round that impacts right (R) of the point in relation to the OT line.
Figure 8-51. Deviation spotting of 30 left
TYPES OF CORRECTIONS
8-145. After a spotting has been made, the observer must send corrections to the FDC to move the burst
onto the adjusting point. The corrections are sent, in meters, in reverse of the order used in making
spottings; that is, deviation, range, and HOB.
Deviation Corrections
8-146. The distance in meters that the burst is to be moved (right or left) is determined by multiplying the
observer's deviation spotting in mils by the OT distance in thousands of meters (the OT factor). Table 8-9
depicts some deviation corrections. Deviation corrections are expressed to the nearest 10 meters. A
deviation correction less than 30 meters is a minor deviation correction. It should not be sent to the FDC
except as refinement data or in conduct of a destruction mission.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-77
Chapter 8
Table 8-9. Deviation computations

OT Range
OT Factor
Spotting Example
Deviation Correction
4,000 meters
2,500 meters
3,400 meters
1,500 meters
700 meters
4
2
3
2
0.7
45R
100L
55L
20R
45L
LEFT 180
RIGHT 200
RIGHT 160
LEFT 40
RIGHT 30
Range Correction
8-147. When making a range correction, the observer attempts to "add" or "drop" the adjusting round,
along the OT line, from the previous burst to the target. If his spotting was SHORT, he will add; if his
spotting was OVER, he will drop. The observer must be aggressive in the adjustment phase of an adjust
fire mission. He must use every opportunity to shorten that phase. He should make every effort to correct
the initial round onto the target and enter FFE as soon as possible. Successive bracketing procedures
should be used only when time is not critical. When conducting an adjustment onto a target, the observer
may choose to establish a range bracket.
ADJUSTMENT TECHNIQUES
8-148. There are four techniques that can be used to conduct area adjustment fires. Successive
bracketing is best when observers are inexperienced or when precise adjustment is required, such as
precision registrations and destruction missions. It mathematically ensures that FFE rounds will be within
50 meters of the target. Hasty bracketing is best when responsive fires are required and the observer is
experienced in the adjustment of fire. One-round adjustment provides the most responsive fires but
generally requires either an experienced observer or an observer equipped with a LRF. Creeping fire is used
in danger close missions. Upon completion of each mission, refinement data and surveillance are required.
From this surveillance the FDC can determine the effectiveness of the fires.
Successive Bracketing
8-149. After the first definite range spotting is determined, the observer should send a range correction to
the FDC to establish a range bracket of known distance (one round over and one round short). Once the
bracket has been established, the observer successively splits the bracket until he is assured the rounds will
be within 50 meters of the adjusting point when he fires for effect. Normally, range changes of 100, 200,
400, or 800 meters are used to make splitting the bracket easier. The observer enters FFE when he is sure
of rounds impacting within 50 meters of the adjusting point (see Figure 8-52 through Figure 8-57).
8-78
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
EXAMPLE
The first round impacts over the adjusting point. The observer should
send a drop correction enough to place the next round short of
the adjusting point.
Figure 8-52. Initial splash of adjustment fire
EXAMPLE
The observer sends DROP 400 (-400) after observing his first round.
The next round impacted short of the adjusting point.
Figure 8-53. First adjustment round, DROP 400
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-79
Chapter 8
EXAMPLE
The observer has now established a range bracket. He has had one round over
and one short of the adjusting point, separated by 400 meters. Using the
successive bracketing technique, the observer sends ADD 200 (+200).
Figure 8-54. Second adjustment, ADD 200
EXAMPLE
The third round impacts over the adjusting point. The observer has a 200-meter
bracket because round 2 impacted short of the adjusting point and the distance
between the two rounds was 200 meters. Splitting the bracket, the observer
sends DROP 100 (-100), FIRE FOR EFFECT.
Figure 8-55. Final adjustment, DROP 100, FIRE FOR EFFECT
8-80
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Hasty Bracketing
8-150. Experience has shown that effectiveness on the target decreases as the number of rounds used in
adjustment increases. An alternative to successive bracketing is the hasty bracketing technique. Successive
bracketing mathematically ensures the observer that the FFE rounds will impact within 50 meters of the
adjusting point, however, it is a slow and unresponsive technique. Therefore, if the nature of the target
dictates that effective fires are required in less time than the successive bracketing technique would take,
the hasty bracketing technique should be used. The success of hasty bracketing adjustment depends on a
thorough terrain analysis that gives the observer an accurate initial target location. The observer gets a
bracket on his first correction much as in the successive bracketing technique. He uses this initial bracket
as a yardstick. to determine his subsequent correction. He then sends the FDC the correction to move the
rounds to the target and FIRE FOR EFFECT.
EXAMPLE
The first round impacts approximately 35 mils right and 100 meters short of
the adjusting point. The observer spots it as SHORT, 35 RIGHT. With an OT
factor of 4, the observer sends LEFT 140, ADD 200.
Figure 8-56. Hasty bracketing, first round
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
8-81
Chapter 8
EXAMPLE
The next round impacts approximately 10 mils left and 50 meters over the adjusting
point. The observer spots it as OVER, 10 LEFT. He looks at the round and the
adjusting point and decides that he needs to go right 40 meters (10 x OT factor of 4)
and drop 50. He will then be on his adjusting point. Therefore, he sends
RIGHT 40, DROP 50, FIRE FOR EFFECT.
Figure 8-57. Hasty bracketing, second round
One-Round Adjustment
8-151. Unlike the preceding two adjustment techniques, this method does not require the establishment of
a bracket. The observer spots the location of the first round, calculates and transmits to the FDC the
corrections necessary to move the burst of the round to the adjusting point, and fires for effect. This
technique requires either an experienced observer or one with accurate distance-measuring equipment such
as a LRF. All missions conducted by using a ground/vehicular laser locator designator (G/VLLD) should
be FFE or one-round adjustments.
Creeping Fire (Danger Close)

8-152. The creeping method of adjustment is used during danger close missions. The observer should
make range changes by creeping the rounds to the target, using corrections of 100 meters or less, rather
than making large range corrections.
8-82
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Chapter 9
Engage Collective
Chapter 9 provides standardized methods for directing and controlling fires
applicable to the individual vehicle, the section, and the entire platoon. Chapter 9
covers the procedures used from the time targets are acquired, through the placement
of fires on those targets, to the reporting of the effects of those fires to the
company/troop commander. Also included are considerations for fire distribution and
control during offensive and defensive operations. Although the discussion focuses
on actions at the platoon and section level, these actions are always integrated into,
and become part of, the company or troop plan.
Contents
Section I Section, Platoon, and
Company Fire Control............................... 9-2
Principles of Fire Control .................... 9-2
Fire Control Measures ........................ 9-3
Section II Direct Fire Planning and
Execution ................................................. 9-13
Direct Fire Planning .......................... 9-13
Company/Platoon/Section Fire
Commands ....................................... 9-14
Section III Indirect Fire Planning and

Execution ................................................. 9-18
Indirect Fire Planning ........................ 9-18
Indirect Fire Team ............................. 9-19
Fire Planning ..................................... 9-19
Fire Support Planning for Offensive
Operations ........................................ 9-20
Fire Support Planning for Defensive
Operations ........................................ 9-21
Target Attack..................................... 9-26
Figure 9-1. Engagement process (engage)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-1
Chapter 9
SECTION I SECTION, PLATOON, AND COMPANY FIRE CONTROL
PRINCIPLES OF FIRE CONTROL

9-1. Effective fire control requires a unit to rapidly acquire the enemy and mass the effects of fires to
achieve decisive results in the close fight. When planning and executing direct fires, the commander and
subordinate leaders must know how to apply several fundamental principles. The purpose of these
principles of direct fire is not to restrict the actions of subordinates. Applied correctly, these principles help
the company team accomplish its primary goal in any direct fire engagementto both acquire first and
shoot first giving subordinates the freedom to act quickly upon acquisition of the enemy. This discussion
focuses on the following principles:
z
Mass the effects of fire.
z
Destroy the greatest threat first.
z
Avoid target overkill.
z
Employ the best weapon for the target.
z
Minimize friendly exposure.
z
Prevent fratricide.
z
Plan for limited visibility conditions.
z
Develop contingencies for diminished capabilities.
MASS THE EFFECTS OF FIRE

9-2. The company team must mass its fires to achieve decisive results. Massing entails focusing fires at
critical points and distributing the effects. Random application of fires is unlikely to have a decisive effect.
For example, concentrating the company teams fires at a single target may ensure its destruction or
suppression; however, that fire control technique will probably not achieve a decisive effect on the enemy
formation or position.
ASSESS AND DESTROY THE MOST DANGEROUS THREAT FIRST

9-3. The order in which the company team engages enemy forces is in direct relation to the danger they
present. The threat posed by the enemy depends on his weapons, range, and positioning. Presented with
multiple targets, a unit will, in almost all situations, initially concentrate fires to destroy the greatest threat,
and then distribute fires over the remainder of the enemy force.
AVOID TARGET OVERKILL

9-4. Use only the amount of fire required to achieve necessary effects. Target overkill wastes ammunition
and ties up weapons that are better employed acquiring and engaging other targets. The idea of having
every weapon engage a different target, however, must be tempered by the requirement to destroy the
greatest threats first.
EMPLOY THE BEST WEAPON FOR THE TARGET

9-5. Using the appropriate weapon for the target increases the probability of rapid enemy destruction or
suppression and saves ammunition. The company team has many weapons with which to engage the
enemy. Target type, range, exposure, weapons and ammunition availability, and desired target effects are
key factors in determining the weapon and ammunition that should be employed. Additionally, leaders
should consider individual crew capabilities when deciding on the employment of weapons. The
commander task organizes and arrays his forces based on the terrain, enemy, and desired effects of fires
(an example is when the commander expects an enemy infantry assault in restricted terrain, he would
employ his infantry squads, taking advantage of their ability to best engage numerous, fast-moving targets).
9-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
MINIMIZE FRIENDLY EXPOSURE

9-6. Units increase their survivability by exposing themselves to the enemy only to the extent necessary
to engage them effectively. Natural or man-made defilade provides the best cover from kinetic energy (KE)
direct fire munitions. Crews and squads minimize their exposure by constantly seeking effective available
cover, attempting to engage the enemy from the flank, remaining dispersed, firing from multiple positions,
and limiting engagement times.
PREVENT FRATRICIDE
9-7. All personnel must be proactive in reducing the risk of fratricide and noncombatant casualties. There
are numerous tools to assist in this effort. They are identification training for combat vehicles and aircraft,
the units weapons safety posture, the weapons control status (WCS), recognition markings, and a common
operational picture (COP). Knowledge and employment of applicable rules of engagement (ROE) are the
primary means of preventing noncombatant casualties.
PLAN FOR EXTREME LIMITED VISIBILITY CONDITIONS

9-8. At night, limited visibility fire control equipment enables the company team to engage enemy forces
at nearly the same ranges that are applicable during the day. Obscurants such as dense fog, heavy smoke,
and blowing sand, however, can reduce the capabilities of thermal and infrared (IR) equipment. The unit
should, therefore, develop contingency plans for such extreme limited visibility conditions. Although
decreased acquisition capabilities have minimal effect on area fire, point target engagements will likely
occur at decreased ranges. Typically, firing positions, whether offensive or defensive, must be adjusted
closer to the area or point where the commander intends to focus fires. Another alternative is the use of
visual or IR illumination when there is insufficient ambient light for passive light intensification devices.
DEVELOP CONTINGENCIES FOR DIMINISHED CAPABILITIES

9-9. Leaders initially develop plans based on their units maximum capabilities; they make alternate plans
for implementation in the event of casualties or weapon damage or failure. While leaders cannot anticipate
or plan for every situation, they should develop plans for what they view as the most probable occurrences.
Building redundancy into these plans, such as having two systems observe the same sector, is an invaluable
asset when the situation (and the number of available systems) permits. Designating alternate sectors of fire
provides a means of shifting fires if adjacent elements are knocked out of action. Examples of
contingencies for diminished capabilities include
z
Designating certain vehicles to engage certain targets due to ammunition shortages or weapon
malfunctions.
z
Designating certain vehicles within the combined arms platoon to engage certain targets due to
inherent weapon range/firepower limitations.
z
Designating certain vehicles to engage certain targets due to vehicle fire control system
malfunctions.
FIRE CONTROL MEASURES

9-10. Fire control measures are the means by which the commander or subordinate leaders control fires.
Application of these concepts, procedures, and techniques assist the unit in acquiring the enemy, focusing
fires on him, distributing the effects of the fires, and preventing fratricide. At the same time, no single
measure is sufficient to effectively control fires. At the company team level, fire control measures will be
effective only if the entire unit has a common understanding of what they mean and how to employ them.
The following discussion focuses on the various fire control measures employed by the company team.
Table 9-1 lists the control measures; it is organized by whether they are terrain-based or threat-based.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-3
Chapter 9
Table 9-1. Common fire control measures

Terrain-Based Fire Control Measures
Threat-Based Fire Control Measures
Target reference point

Engagement area
Sector of fire
Direction of fire
Terrain-based quadrant
Friendly-based quadrant
Maximum engagement line
Restrictive fire line
Final protective line
Rules of engagement
Weapons ready posture
Weapons safety posture
Weapons control status
Engagement priorities
Engagement criteria
Engagement techniques
Fire patterns
Target array
TERRAIN-BASED FIRE CONTROL MEASURES

9-11. The company team commander uses terrain-based fire control measures to focus and control fires on
a particular point, line, or area rather than on a specific enemy element. The following paragraphs describe
the tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) associated with this type of control measure.
Target Reference Point

9-12. A target reference point (TRP) is a recognizable point on the ground that leaders use to orient
friendly forces and focus and control direct fires. In addition, when TRPs are designated as indirect fire
targets, they can be used in calling for and adjusting indirect fires. Leaders designate TRPs at probable
enemy locations and along likely avenues of approach. These can be natural or man-made points. A TRP
can be an established site, such as a hill or a building, or an impromptu feature designated as a TRP on the
spot, like a burning enemy vehicle or smoke generated by an artillery round. Friendly units can also
construct markers to serve as TRPs. Ideally, TRPs should be visible in three observation modes (unaided,
passive-IR, and thermal) so they can be seen by all forces. Example of TRPs include the following features
and objects:
z
Prominent hill mass.
z
Distinctive building.
z
Observable enemy position.
z
Destroyed vehicle.
z
Ground-burst illumination.
z
Smoke round.
Engagement Area
9-13. This fire control measure is an area along an enemy avenue of approach where the commander
intends to mass the fires of available weapons to destroy an enemy force. The size and shape of the
engagement area (EA) is determined by the degree of relatively unobstructed intervisibility available to the
units weapon systems in their firing positions and by the maximum range of those weapons. Typically,
commanders delineate responsibility within the EA by assigning each platoon a sector of fire or direction
of fire; these fire control measures are covered in the following paragraphs.
Sector of Fire
9-14. A sector of fire is a defined area that must be covered by direct fire. Leaders assign sectors of fire to
subordinate elements, crew-served weapons, and individual Soldiers to ensure coverage of an area of
responsibility. Leaders may also limit the sector of fire of an element or weapon to prevent accidental
engagement of an adjacent unit. In assigning sectors of fire, commanders and subordinate leaders consider
the number and types of weapons available. In addition, they must consider acquisition system type and
9-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
field of view in determining the width of a sector of fire (for example, while unaided vision has a wide
field of view, its ability to detect and identify targets at certain ranges and in limited visibility conditions is
restricted). Conversely, most fire control acquisition systems have greater detection and identification
ranges than the unaided eye, but their field of view is narrow. Means of designating sectors of fire
include
z
TRPs.
z
Clock direction.
z
Terrain-based quadrants.
z
Friendly-based quadrants.
Direction of Fire
9-15. A direction of fire is an orientation or point used to assign responsibility for a particular area on the
battlefield that must be covered by direct fire. Leaders designate directions of fire for the purpose of
acquisition or engagement by subordinate elements, crew-served weapons, or individual Soldiers.
Direction of fire is most commonly employed when assigning sectors of fire would be difficult or
impossible because of limited time or insufficient reference points. Means of designating a direction of fire
include
z
Closest TRP.
z
Clock direction.
z
Cardinal direction.
z
Tracer on target.
z
IR laser pointer.
Quadrants
9-16. Quadrants are subdivisions of an area created by superimposing an imaginary pair of perpendicular
axes over the terrain to create four separate areas or sectors. Quadrants can be based on the terrain, friendly
forces, or enemy formation.
9-17. The method of quadrant numbering is established in the unit standing operating procedures (SOP);
however, care must be taken to avoid confusion when quadrants based on terrain, friendly forces, and the
enemy formations are used simultaneously.
Terrain-Based Quadrant
9-18. A terrain-based quadrant entails use of a TRP, either existing or constructed, to designate the center
point of the axes that divide the area into four quadrants. This technique can be employed in both offensive
and defensive operations. In the offense, the commander designates the center of the quadrant using an
existing feature or by creating a reference point (for example, using a ground burst illumination round, a
smoke marking round, or a fire ignited by incendiary or tracer rounds). The axes delineating the quadrants
run parallel and perpendicular to the direction of movement. In the defense, the commander designates the
center of the quadrant using an existing or constructed TRP.
9-19. In the examples shown in Figure 9-2, quadrants are marked using the letter Q and a number (Q1 to
Q4); quadrant numbers are in the same relative positions as on military map sheets (from Q1, as the upper
left-hand quadrant, clockwise to Q4, as the lower left-hand quadrant).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-5
Chapter 9
Figure 9-2. Examples of terrain-based quadrants

Friendly-Based Quadrant
9-20. The friendly-based quadrant technique entails superimposing quadrants over the units formation.
The center point is based on the center of the formation, and the axes run parallel and perpendicular to the
general direction of travel. For rapid orientation, the friendly-quadrant technique may be better than the
clock-direction method; this is because different elements of a large formation are rarely oriented in the
same direction and because the relative dispersion of friendly forces causes parallax to the target. Figure
9-3 illustrates use of friendly-based quadrants.
Figure 9-3. Example of friendly-based quadrants
9-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
Maximum Engagement Line

9-21. A maximum engagement line (MEL) is the linear depiction of the farthest limit of effective fire for a
weapon or unit. This line is determined by the weapons or units maximum effective range and by the
effects of terrain. For example, slope, vegetation, structures, and other features provide cover and
concealment that may prevent the weapon from engaging out to the maximum effective range. An MEL
serves several purposes. The commander may use it to prevent crews from engaging beyond the maximum
effective range, to define criteria for the establishment of triggers, and to delineate the maximum extent of
battle space on the sector sketch.
Restrictive Fire Line

9-22. A restrictive fire line (RFL) is a linear fire control measure beyond which engagement is prohibited
without coordination. In the offense, the commander may designate an RFL to prevent a base of fire
element from firing into the area where an assaulting element is maneuvering. This technique is
particularly important when armored vehicles support the maneuver of infantry squads. In the defense, the
commander may establish an RFL to prevent the unit from engaging a friendly rifle squad positioned in
restricted terrain on the flank of an avenue of approach.
Final Protective Line

9-23. The final protective line (FPL) is a line of fire established where an enemy assault is to be checked
by the interlocking fires of all available weapons. The unit reinforces this line with protective obstacles and
with final protective fires (FPF) whenever possible. Initiation of the FPF is the signal for elements, crews,
and individual Soldiers to shift fires to their assigned portion of the FPL. They spare no ammunition in
repelling the enemy assault, a particular concern for machine guns and other automatic weapons.
THREAT-BASED FIRE CONTROL MEASURES

9-24. The company team commander uses threat-based fire control measures to focus and control fires by
directing the unit to engage a specific enemy element rather than to fire on a point or area. The following
paragraphs describe the TTPs associated with this type of control measure.
Fire Patterns
9-25. Fire patterns are a threat-based measure designed to distribute the fires of a unit simultaneously
among multiple, similar targets. They are most often used by platoons to distribute fires across an enemy
formation. Leaders designate and adjust fire patterns based on terrain and the anticipated enemy formation.
The basic fire patterns, illustrated in Figure 9-4, are the following:
z
Frontal.
z
Cross.
z
Depth.
Frontal
9-26. Leaders may initiate frontal fire when targets are arrayed in front of the unit in a lateral
configuration. Weapon systems engage targets to their respective fronts (for example, the left flank weapon
engages the left-most target; the right flank weapon engages the right-most target). As targets are
destroyed, weapons shift fires toward the center of the enemy formation and from near to far.
Cross
9-27. Leaders initiate cross fire when targets are arrayed laterally across the units front in a manner that
permits diagonal fires at the enemys flank or when obstructions prevent unit weapons from firing
frontally. Right flank weapons engage the left-most targets; left flank weapons engage the right-most
targets. Firing diagonally across an EA provides more flank shots, thus increasing the chance of kills. It
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-7
Chapter 9
also reduces the possibility that friendly elements will be detected if the enemy continues to move forward.
As enemy targets are destroyed, weapons shift fires toward the center of the enemy formation.
Depth
9-28. Leaders initiate depth fire when targets are dispersed in depth, perpendicular to the unit. Center
weapons engage the closest targets; flank weapons engage deeper targets. As the unit destroys targets,
weapons shift fires toward the center of the enemy formation.
Figure 9-4. Examples of fire patterns
Target Array
9-29. Target array permits the commander to distribute fires when the enemy force is concentrated and
terrain-based controls are inadequate. This threat-based distribution measure is created by superimposing a
quadrant pattern over an enemy formation. The pattern is centered on the enemy formation, with the axes
running parallel and perpendicular to the enemys direction of travel. The target array fire control measure
is effective against an enemy with a well-structured organization and standardized doctrine; however, it
may prove less effective against an enemy that presents few organized formations or does not follow strict
prescribed tactics. Quadrants are described using their relative locations. The examples in Figure 9-5
illustrate the target array technique.
9-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
Figure 9-5. Examples of target array
Engagement Priorities
9-30. Engagement priorities, which entail the sequential ordering of targets to be engaged, can serve one or
more of the following critical fire control functions:
z
Prioritize high-priority targets (HPT). In concert with his concept of the operation, the
commander determines which target types provide the greatest payoff; he can then set these as a
unit engagement priority. (Example: The commander may decide that destroying enemy
engineer assets is the best way to prevent the enemy from breaching an obstacle.)
z
Employ the best weapons for the target. Establishing engagement priorities for specific
friendly systems increases the effectiveness with which the unit employs its weapons. (Example:
The engagement priority for the company teams tanks could be enemy tanks first, then enemy
personnel carriers (PC); this would decrease the chance that the teams lighter systems will have
to engage enemy armored vehicles.)
z
Distribute the units fires. Establishing different priorities for similar friendly systems helps to
prevent overkill and achieve effective distribution of fires. (Example: The commander may
designate the enemys tanks as the initial priority for one Bradley Fighting Vehicle [BFV]
platoon while making the enemys PCs the priority for another platoon. This would decrease the
chance of multiple tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided [TOW] being launched against
two enemy tanks while the dangers posed by the PCs are ignored.)
Weapons Ready Posture

9-31. The weapons ready posture is a means by which leaders use their estimate of the situation to specify
the ammunition and range for the most probable anticipated engagement. The ammunition selection is
dependent on the target type, but the leader may adjust it based on engagement priorities, desired effects,
and effective range. Range selection is dependent on the anticipated engagement range; it is affected by
terrain intervisibility, weather, and light conditions. Within the company team, weapons ready posture
affects the types and quantities of ammunition loaded in ready boxes, stowed in ready racks, and carried by
rifle squads.
9-32. The following considerations apply:
z
For tanks, weapons ready posture is defined as the battlecarry.
z
For BFVs, weapons ready posture covers the selected ammunition and the indexed range.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-9
Chapter 9
For infantry squads, weapons ready posture is the selected ammunition and indexed range for
individual and crew-served weapons. (Example: An M203 grenadier whose most likely
engagement is to cover dead space at 200 meters from his position might load high-explosive
dual-purpose [HEDP] ammunition and set 200 meters on his quadrant sight. To prepare for an
engagement in a wooded area where engagement ranges are extremely short, an anti-armor
specialist might dismount with an AT4 instead of a Javelin.)
Engagement Criteria
9-33. Engagement criteria is a specific set of conditions that dictates initiation of fires. Engagement
criteria, specifies the circumstances in which subordinate elements are to engage. The circumstances can be
based on a friendly or enemy event. (Example: The engagement criteria for a friendly platoon to initiate
engagement could be three or more enemy combat vehicles passing or crossing a given point or trigger
line. This trigger line can be any natural or man-made linear feature, such as a road, ridgeline, or stream. It
may also be a line perpendicular to the units orientation, delineated by one or more references points.)
Rules of Engagement
9-34. ROEs specify the circumstances and limitations under which forces may engage; they include
definitions of combatant and noncombatant elements and prescribe the treatment of noncombatants.
Factors influencing ROE are national command policy, the mission and commanders intent, the
operational environment, and the law of war. ROE always recognize a Soldiers right of self-defense; at the
same time, they clearly define circumstances in which he may fire.
Weapons Safety Posture

9-35. Weapons safety posture is an ammunition handling instruction that allows the commander to
precisely control the safety of his units weapons. Leaders supervision of the weapons safety posture, as
well as Soldiers adherence to it, minimizes the risk of negligent discharge and fratricide. Table 9-2
outlines procedures and considerations for the company team in using the four weapons safety postures,
listed in ascending order of restrictiveness:
z
Red direct (ammunition loaded).
z
Red tight (ammunition locked).
z
Amber and clear (ammunition prepared).
z
Green and clear (weapons cleared).
9-36. In setting and adjusting the weapons safety posture, the commander must weigh the desire to prevent
negligent discharges against the requirement for immediate action based on the enemy threat. If the threat
of direct contact is high, for example, the commander may establish the weapons safety posture as
ammunition loaded. If the requirement for action is less immediate, he may lower the posture to
ammunition locked or ammunition prepared. Additionally, the commander may designate different
weapons safety postures for different elements of the unit. For example, in the attack position, tanks and
BFVs may switch to ammunition loaded while rifle squads riding in BFVs remain at ammunition locked.
9-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
Table 9-2. Weapons safety posture levels

Element Safety
Posture
Tank Weapons and

Ammunition
BFV Weapons and

Ammunition
Crew-Served and Squad

Weapons and
Ammunition
Red Direct
Main gun ammunition

loaded.
Machine gun
ammunition on feed
tray, bolt locked to
rear.
Smoke grenades in
launchers.
Weapons on electrical
safe.
25-mm rounds cycled to

the bolt.
Coax rounds on feed
tray, bolt locked to rear.
TOW missiles in
launchers.
Smoke grenades in
launchers.
safe.
Rifle rounds chambered.

Machine gun and SAW
ammunition on feed tray,
bolt locked to rear.
Grenade launcher
loaded.
Weapons on manual
safe.
Red Hold
Main gun ammunition

is loaded.
Machine gun
ammunition on feed
tray, bolt forward.
Smoke grenades in
launchers.
and mechanical safe.
25-mm rounds loaded

in feeder but not cycled
to the bolt.
Coax rounds on feed
tray, bolt locked to rear.
TOW missiles in
launchers.
Smoke grenades in
launchers.
safe.
Magazines locked into

rifles.
Machine gun and SAW
ammunition on feed tray,
bolt locked forward.
Grenade launcher
unloaded.
Amber and Clear
Main gun ready rack

filled.
Machine gun
ammunition boxes
filled.
Smoke grenades in
launchers. Weapons
on electrical and
mechanical safe.
25-mm ready boxes

filled. First round at the
forwarder.
Coax ammunition boxes
filled.
TOW missiles in
launchers.
Smoke grenades in
launchers.
safe.
Magazines, ammunition
boxes, launcher
grenades, hand
grenades prepared but
stowed in pouches/vests.
Green and Clear
Main gun ready rack

filled.
Machine guns cleared
with bolts locked to
the rear. Weapons on
electrical and
mechanical safe.
25-mm feeder removed,

feeder and chamber
cleared.
Coax bolt group
removed and chamber
clear.
Magazines, ammunition
boxes and launcher
grenades removed,
weapons cleared.
Engagement Techniques
9-37. Engagement techniques are effects-oriented fire distribution measures. The following engagement
techniques, the most common in company team operations, are covered in this discussion:
z
Point fire.
z
Area fire.
z
Simultaneous fire.
z
Alternating fire.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-11
Chapter 9
z
z
z
z
Observed fire.
Sequential fire.
Time of suppression.
Reconnaissance by fire.
Point Fire
9-38. Point fire entails concentrating the effects of a units fire against a specific, identified target such as a
vehicle, machine gun bunker, or antitank guided missile (ATGM) position. When leaders direct point fire,
all of the units weapons engage the target, firing until it is destroyed or the required time of suppression
has expired. Employing converging fires from dispersed positions makes point fire more effective because
the target is engaged from multiple directions. The unit may initiate an engagement using point fire against
the most dangerous threat, and then revert to area fire against other, less threatening point targets.
Area Fire
9-39. Area fire involves distributing the effects of a units fire over an area in which enemy positions are
numerous or are not obvious. If the area is large, leaders assign sectors of fire to subordinate elements
using a terrain-based distribution method such as the quadrant technique. Typically, the primary purpose of
the area fire is suppression; however, sustaining effective suppression requires judicious control of the rate
of fire.
Simultaneous Fire
9-40. Units employ simultaneous fire, to rapidly mass the effects of their fires or to gain fire superiority
(for example, a unit may initiate a support by fire operation with simultaneous fire, and then revert to
alternating or sequential fire to maintain suppression). Simultaneous fire is also employed to negate the low
probability of hit and kill of certain antiarmor weapons (for example, a rifle squad may employ
simultaneous fire with its AT4s to ensure rapid destruction of a BMP).
Alternating Fire
9-41. In alternating fire, pairs of elements continuously engage the same point or area target one at a time
(for example, a company team may alternate fires of two platoons; a tank platoon may alternate the fires of
its sections; or an infantry platoon may alternate the fires of a pair of machine guns). Alternating fire
permits the unit to maintain suppression for a longer duration than does volley fire; it also forces the enemy
to acquire and engage alternating points of fire.
Observed Fire
9-42. Observed fire is normally used when the company team is in protected defensive positions with
engagement ranges in excess of 2,500 meters. It can be employed between elements of the company team,
such as the tank platoon lasing and observing while the BFV platoon fires, or between sections of a
platoon. The commander or platoon leader directs one element or section to engage. The remaining
elements or section observes fires and prepares to engage on order in case the engaging element
consistently misses its targets, experiences a malfunction, or runs low on ammunition. Observed fire allows
for mutual observation and assistance while protecting the location of the observing elements.
Sequential Fire
9-43. Sequential fire entails the subordinate elements of a unit engaging the same point or area target one
after another in an arranged sequence (for example, a mechanized infantry platoon may sequence the fires
of its four BFVs to gain maximum time of suppression). Sequential fire can also help to prevent the waste
of ammunition, as when an infantry rifle platoon waits to see the effects of the first Javelin before firing
another. Additionally, sequential fire permits elements that have already fired to pass on information they
have learned from the engagement. An example would be an infantryman who missed a BMP with AT4
fires passing range and lead information to the next Soldier preparing to engage the BMP with an AT4.
9-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
Time of Suppression
9-44. Time of suppression is the period, specified by the commander, during which an enemy position or
force is required to be suppressed. Suppression time is typically dependent on the time it will take a
supported element to maneuver. Normally, a unit suppresses an enemy position using the sustained rate of
fire of its automatic weapons. In planning for sustained suppression, leaders must consider several factors:
the estimated time of suppression, the size of the area being suppressed, the type of enemy force to be
suppressed, range to the target, rates of fire, and available ammunition quantities. The following example
lists steps that a unit might take in calculating time of suppression capabilities:
z
The BFVs in a mechanized infantry platoon are given the task of suppressing an area to support
the assault of another element.
z
One BFV, firing 25-mm high-explosive incendiary with tracer (HEI-T) ammunition at a
sustained rate of 60 rounds per minute, expends 180 rounds (capacity of the large ready box,
minus sufficient rounds for easy reloading) in 3 minutes.
z
Given an adjusted basic load of 720 rounds of high-explosive (HE), a single BFV can sustain
fire for four periods of 3 minutes, requiring three reloads of 180 rounds into the large ready box.
z
A BFV crew, using a loader in the troop compartment, can reload the large ready box with 180
rounds in about 3 minutes if the ammunition is already prepared for loading.
z
Using an individual BFVs sustained rate of fire of 60 rounds per minute and alternating the fire
of sections to permit reloading (one section fires for 3 minutes while the other reloads), the
platoon can sustain 120 rounds per minute for 24 minutes.
Reconnaissance by Fire
9-45. Reconnaissance by fire is the process of engaging possible enemy locations to elicit a tactical
response, such as return fire or movement. This response permits the commander and subordinate leaders
to make accurate target acquisition and then mass fires against the enemy element. Typically, the
commander directs a subordinate element to conduct the reconnaissance by fire (for example, he may direct
an overwatching platoon to conduct the reconnaissance by fire against a probable enemy position before
initiating movement by a bounding element).
SECTION II DIRECT FIRE PLANNING AND EXECUTION
DIRECT FIRE PLANNING

9-46. Leaders plan direct fires to be able to distribute and control their fire. Determining where and how
the company team can mass fires is an essential step in this process. See FM 3-90.1 for a detailed
discussion of the process of the company team.
9-47. Based on where and how they want to focus and distribute fires, leaders can establish the weapons
ready postures for their elements, as well as engagement criteria for initiating fires. During mission
preparation, leaders plan and conduct rehearsals of direct and indirect fires (and of the fire control process)
based on the estimate of the situation.
DIRECT FIRE STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURES

9-48. A well-rehearsed direct fire SOP ensures quick, predictable actions by all members of the company
team. The commander bases the various elements of the SOP on the capabilities of his force and on
anticipated conditions and situations. SOP elements should include means for
z
Focusing fires.
z
Distributing their effects.
z
Orienting forces.
z
Preventing fratricide.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-13
Chapter 9
COMPANY/PLATOON/SECTION FIRE COMMANDS

9-49. Fire commands are oral orders issued by commanders and leaders to focus and distribute fires as
required and to achieve decisive effects against the enemy. They allow leaders to rapidly and concisely
articulate their firing instructions using a standard format. Unit fire commands include these elements,
which are discussed in detail in the following paragraphs:
z
Alert.
z
Weapon or ammunition (optional).
z
Target description.
z
Orientation.
z
Range (optional).
z
Control.
z
Execution.
z
WCS.
ALERT
9-50. The alert specifies the elements that are directed to fire. It does not require the leader initiating the
command to identify himself. Examples of the alert element (call signs and code words based on unit SOP)
include the following:
z
GUIDONS (all subordinate elements).
z
RED (1st Platoon only).
z
ALPHA (Alpha Section only).
WEAPON OR AMMUNITION (OPTIONAL)

9-51. This element identifies the weapon and/or ammunition to be employed by the alerted elements.
Leaders may designate the type and number of rounds to limit expenditure of ammunition. Examples of
this element include the following:
z
TOW.
z
TWO ROUNDS SABOT.
TARGET DESCRIPTION
9-52. Target description designates which enemy elements are to be engaged. Leaders may use the
description to focus fires or achieve distribution. Examples of target description include the following:
z
THREE PCs.
z
THREE TANKS AND TEN PCs.
z
TROOPS IN TRENCH.
ORIENTATION
9-53. This element identifies the location of the target. There are numerous ways to designate the location
of target, including
z
Closest TRP (example: TRP 13).
z
Clock direction (example: ONE OCLOCK).
z
Terrain quadrant (example: QUADRANT ONE).
z
Friendly quadrant (example: LEFT FRONT).
z
Target array (example: FRONT HALF).
z
Tracer on target (example: ON MY TRACER).
z
Laser pointer (example: ON MY POINTER).
9-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
RANGE (OPTIONAL)
9-54. The range element identifies the distance to the target. Announcing range is not necessary for
systems that are range finder equipped or that employ command-guided or self-guided munitions. For
systems that require manual range settings, leaders have a variety of means for determining range,
including
z
Predetermined ranges to TRPs or phase lines (PL).
z
An M1A1/M1A2 tank crew announcing the range for a M2/M3 A2-equipped platoon.
z
Hand-held range finders.
z
Range stadia.
z
Mil reticle.
CONTROL
9-55. The commander may use this element to direct desired target effects, distribution methods, or
engagement techniques. Subordinate leaders may include the control element to supplement the
commanders instructions and achieve effective distribution. Examples of information specified in the
control element include
z
Target array (example: FRONT HALF).
z
Fire pattern (example: FRONTAL, DEPTH, CROSS).
z
Terrain quadrant (example: QUADRANT ONE).
z
Engagement priorities (example: TANKS ENGAGE TANKS; BFVs ENGAGE PCs).
z
Engagement technique (example: VOLLEY, AREA).
WEAPONS CONTROL STATUS

9-56. The final element is the WCS. The three levels of WCS outline the conditions, based on target
identification criteria, under which friendly elements may engage. The commander sets and adjusts the
WCS based on friendly and enemy disposition and the clarity of the situation. In general, the higher the
probability of fratricide, the more restrictive the WCS. The three levels, in descending order of
restrictiveness, are
z
WEAPONS HOLD. Engage only if engaged or ordered to engage.
z
WEAPONS TIGHT. Engage only targets that are positively identified as enemy.
z
WEAPONS FREE. Engage any targets that are not positively identified as friendly.
z
CEASE FIRE. All firing will immediately stop.
9-57. As an example, the commander may establish the WCS as WEAPONS HOLD when friendly forces
are conducting a passage of lines. By maintaining situational understanding (SU) of his own elements and
adjacent friendly forces; however, he may be able to lower the WCS. In such a case, the commander may
be able to set a WEAPONS FREE status when he knows there are no friendly elements in the vicinity of
the engagement. This permits his elements to engage targets at extended ranges even though it is difficult
to distinguish targets accurately at ranges beyond 2,000 meters under battlefield conditions. A further
consideration is that the WCS is extremely important for forces using combat identification systems;
establishing the WCS as WEAPONS FREE permits leaders to engage an unknown target when they fail to
get a friendly response.
EXECUTION
9-58. The execution element specifies when fires will be initiated. The commander may wish to engage
immediately, delay initiation, or delegate authority to engage. Examples of this element include
z
FIRE.
z
AT MY COMMAND...FIRE
z
AT PHASE LINE _____________.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-15
Chapter 9
PLATOON MOVEMENT COMMAND (DEFENSIVE ENGAGEMENTS)

9-59. The platoon movement command is used while engaging from a defensive battle position. It allows
the platoon leader to coordinate the movement of the platoon from the defilade to an enfilade position and
back to the defilade at the end of the engagement. It ensures that the platoons firepower is maximized in
the EA and assists in promoting shock effect. The most commonly used example of this element
includes
z
TOP HAT, TOP HAT (Tells the platoon to move from their defilade position to the enfilade).
z
LOW SKY, LOW SKY (Tells the platoon to move from their enfilade position back down to
the defilade).
Sample Fire Commands
Figure 9-6. Sample frontal fire command
9-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
Figure 9-7. Sample cross-fire command
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-17
Chapter 9
Figure 9-8. Sample depth fire command
SECTION III INDIRECT FIRE PLANNING AND EXECUTION
INDIRECT FIRE PLANNING

9-60. Mortars are organic to the combined arms battalion or reconnaissance squadron. They are organized
as platoons in all combined arms battalions. They are organized as sections in cavalry troops. Regardless of
the organization to which they belong, mortars have the battlefield role of providing the maneuver
commander with immediate indirect fires. This section provides an overview for planning organic indirect
fires. See FM 3-90.1 and FM 3-22.91 for a detailed discussion.
9-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
9-61. For mortar fire to be effective, it must be dense enough to hit the target at the right time with the
right projectile and fuze. Some type of observation is desirable for every target to ensure that fire is placed
on the target.
9-62. Mortars are area fire weapons; however, units can employ them to neutralize or destroy area or point
targets, screen large areas with smoke for sustained periods, or provide illumination.
INDIRECT FIRE TEAM

9-63. Indirect fire procedures are a team effort (Figure 9-9). They include locating the target, designating
the correct asset to fire the mission, determining firing data, applying data to the mortar, and preparing the
ammunition. Fire support teams (FIST) are located in artillery units and, depending on the mission, are
attached to maneuver units. The team consists of a forward observer (FO), a fire direction center (FDC),
and mortar squads.
9-64. The FO, as part of the FIST, is normally provided by a direct support (DS) artillery battalion. One
four-man FO team supports each mechanized infantry/armor company.
9-65. The FDC has two computer personnel in each section who control the mortar firing. They convert
the data from the FO in a CFF into firing data that can be applied to the mortar and ammunition.
Figure 9-9. Indirect fire team
FIRE PLANNING
9-66. The ability of mortar platoons to engage targets with accurate and sustained fires depends on the
precision and detail of fire plans. Fire planning is concurrent and continuous at all levels of command. The
principles of fire planning used by field artillery (FA) also apply to mortars.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-19
Chapter 9
FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING FOR OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

9-67. Fires planned to support an attack consist of a preparation, if ordered, and subsequent fires. The
preparation may be delivered before the advance of the assault elements from their line of departure (LD)
and may continue for a short time thereafter. Fires planned for the preparation are normally limited to
known targets and suspected areas. The delivery of fires on scheduled targets should be consistent with the
threat imposed, time available for coordination, and availability of ammunition.
9-68. Fires planned in support of the attack are shifted to conform to the movements of the supported unit.
They are planned in the form of targets, groups of targets, and series of targets. They may be fired on a
time schedule or on-call and may include targets from the LD to the objective, on the objective, and
beyond the objective.
9-69. Supporting fires have several specific objectives. They assist the advance of the supported unit by
neutralizing enemy forces, weapons, and observation short of the objective. They assist the supported unit
in gaining fire superiority on the objective so that the assaulting force can close to assault distance, and
they protect the supported unit during reorganization. On-call targets are planned on likely assembly areas
and routes for enemy counterattacks. Supporting fires prevent the enemy from reinforcing, supplying, or
disengaging his forces.
9-70. The following are some general offensive fire support (FS) planning considerations:
z
Synchronize targeting meetings with the air tasking order (ATO) cycle, and use them to refine
high-payoff target lists (HPTL) and confirm decide, detect, deliver, and assess (D3A)
methodology.
z
Post the most current maneuver graphics, fire support coordination measures (FSCM), FS unit
locations, ranges of FS systems and targets.
z
Check the target overlay periodically to ensure that the current enemy situation is reflected in
targeting.
z
Ensure that fire plans address the commanders FS guidance and allocation of resources. Fire
support elements (FSE) must allow enough time both to update FS computers for rehearsals and
convert them back for actual operations.
z
Check communications systems with all elements.
z
Determine the times that all FS systems must be ready based on the scheme of maneuver.
z
Determine how and when to shift the priority of fires. Also, determine what will be the trigger
for shifting the priorities of fire.
z
Consider developing an interdiction plan to disrupt enemy preparation of the objective.
z
Plan fires short of the LD/line of contact (LD/LC). Plan defensive fires (for example, FPFs) for
unit assembly areas and trains.
z
Plan fires en route to the LD/LC.
z
Plan fires to support a hasty defense if attack fails.
z
Plan fires to limit enemy efforts at counterreconnaissance.
z
Plan fires from the LD/LC to the objective.
z
Provide priority of fires to lead elements.
z
Consider using fires to suppress enemy direct fire weapons.
z
Consider using smoke to limit enemy observation of friendly maneuver elements.
z
Consider using smoke to screen friendly obstacle breaching operations.
z
Consider planning fires on exposed flanks to disrupt counterattacks.
z
Consider task organization of observers to ensure that all critical targets are observed.
9-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
Consider preparatory fires. Ensure that they are tied to maneuver events (that is, are not just
timed). Advantages must outweigh the loss of surprise. Fires must be accurate to be effective;
consider how successful reconnaissance efforts have beenand whether there will there be a
need to adjust preparation fires before executing the assault. Ensure that ammunition is available
to accomplish the commanders guidance. Consider whether the enemy will be able to recover
from the effects of the preparation prior to the assault.
Determine when and how to shift fires (particularly priority targets en route). Use: time (at a
predetermined time, fires will shift), location (fires shift when maneuver reaches a certain
location, such as a PL), on call (the maneuver commander directs when the fires shift), or event
(a predetermined event signals shifting of fires). Ensure that the method to be used is understood
by all FS assets, from observer to delivery means.
Plan fires on the objective
Consider fires to delay enemy reinforcements and resupply by ground or air.
Consider fires to suppress enemy direct fire weapons.
Consider obscurants to screen friendly forces or obscure hostile ground observation when
consolidating on the objective.
Designate a signal for lifting or shifting fires. Ensure that the signal is understood by
maneuver elements.
Plan fires in support of a hasty defense upon successful attack of the enemy objective.
Plan fires beyond the objective
To divert, delay, disrupt, or limit enemy reinforcements.
To block avenues of approach for counterattacking forces. Consider using FA-delivered

scatterable mine (SCATMINE) to assist in this effort.
To disrupt or delay enemy retreat.
Ensure that subordinate elements maintain communications and report unit location and
status hourly.
FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING FOR DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

9-71. Fires in support of defensive operations include long-range fires, close defensive fires (CDF), FPFs,
and fires within the battle area.
Long-Range Fires
9-72. Long-range fires are designed to engage the enemy as early as possible to inflict casualties, delay his
advance, harass him, interdict him, and disrupt his organization. Long-range weapons engage the enemy as
soon as he comes within range. As a result, the volume of fire increases as the enemy continues to advance
and comes within range of additional weapons. A counterpreparation designed to disrupt the enemys
attack preparations before the attack can be fired as part of long-range fires.
Close Defensive Fires

9-73. CDFs are supporting fires employed to destroy the enemy attack formations before the assault.
Final Protective Fires

9-74. FPFs are planned to prohibit or break up the enemy assault on the forward defense area. They consist
of prearranged fires of supporting weapons to include machine gun FPLs and mortar and artillery FPF.
Only those weapons whose FPFs are in front of the threatened units will fire their assigned fires; all other
available weapons will use observed fire to supplement or reinforce the FPF in the threatened area. Direct
fire weapons will engage targets in front of the threatened area to reinforce FPF or to engage other targets.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-21
Chapter 9
9-75. The artillery and mortar FPF are integrated with the FPL of machine guns. Each artillery battery
normally fires one FPF. The mortar platoon of the battalion may fire one or two FPF; however, the
platoons fires are more effective in one FPF than in two.
9-76. The following are some general defensive FS planning considerations:
z
Synchronize targeting meetings with the ATO cycle, and use them to refine HPTL and confirm
D3A methodology.
z
Post the most current maneuver graphics, FSCMs, FS unit locations, and ranges of FS systems
and targets.
z
Check the target overlay periodically to ensure that the current enemy situation is reflected in
targeting.
z
Ensure that fire plans built at brigade and subordinate levels are based on the commanders FS
guidance and allocation of resources. Fire plans (to include special munitions, such as
SCATMINE) must be entered into the FS computer in time to conduct technical rehearsals and
prepare for firing.
z
Check communications systems with all elements.
z
Identify requirements for positioning observers forward of friendly maneuver forces. Ensure that
extraction guidelines are established and understood. Develop backup plans in case these FOs
are forced to withdraw prior to execution of key essential fire support tasks (EFST).
z
Determine what time is needed for all FS systems to be ready based on the scheme of maneuver,
and ensure that these times are met.
z
Determine how and when to shift the priority of fires. Determine what will be the trigger to
shift the priority of fires.
9-77. In addition, in planning FS for defensive operations, plan FS early and throughout the entire
defensive sector
z
Plan fires in support of the security area.
z
Plan counterreconnaissance fires. Consider augmenting forward elements with observers and the
use of laser-guided munitions, if available.
z
Plan fires to support delaying actions, to disrupt or limit the momentum of the enemys attack, to
reduce the enemys combat power, and to force the enemy commander to deploy his forces
early. When applicable, fires may also support efforts to divert an enemys attack.
z
Locate and destroy HPTs that must be eliminated to prevent enemy success and to support
friendly shaping and decisive operations.
z
Consider using fires to separate enemy formations.
z
Position observers on templated avenues of approach.
z
Plan fires on key choke points.
z
Employ combat observation and lasing team (COLT) and Knight teams in overwatch positions
to provide early warning, range-finding, and target designation.
z
Plan SCATMINE and smoke to separate lead elements from follow-on forces
Ensure that FS assets are identified and directed to support the counterfire battle.
Plan counter-preparation fires.
Coordinate common sensor boundaries to help in delineating radar responsibilities.

z
Plan fires in the main battle area (MBA)
Plan fires throughout the MBA.
Mass fires to limit, disrupt, delay, divert, and damage the enemy.
Plan fires to assist maneuver during retrograde operations.
Position secondary observers to back up those observers responsible for observing key
areas or executing critical FS triggers.
Plan fires on key obstacles and assign redundant observers to execute the fire plan.
Know the engineer obstacle plan and types of obstacles.
9-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
Consider the terrain when targeting obstacles. Fires placed incorrectly force the enemy to
take an alternate course of action.
Consider the use of smoke to support the obstacle plan.

Plan fires in support of EAs
Use FS to canalize the enemy.
Plan groups for simultaneous engagement within EAs.
Plan series to preclude enemy movement out of EAs.
Mass fires in EAs.
Plan coordinated attack in EAs with air assets.
Consider the use of illumination in the EA.

Plan defensive fires
Integrate FS into the direct fire defensive plan.
Suppress enemy indirect and direct fire weapons.
Assign priority targets and FPFs to battle positions, strong points, or perimeter defenses.
Plan for use of smoke during periods of limited visibility to degrade enemy night vision
capabilities.
Plan for contingencies to reallocate FS to strengthen vulnerabilities.

Plan to support hasty attack
Use quick fire planning techniques.
Place coordinated fire line (CFL) close to forward defensive positions to facilitate rapid
engagements.
TERMINOLOGY
9-78. Some of the common terms used in fire planning are defined as follows:
z
Target. A target is troops, weapons, equipment, vehicles, buildings, or terrain that warrants
engagement by fire and that may be numbered for future reference (see Figure 9-10). A solid
cross designates a target on overlays, with the center of the cross representing the center of the
target. The target number consists of two letters and four numbers allocated by higher
headquarters. This numbering system identifies the headquarters that planned the target,
distinguishes one target from another, and prevents duplication.
z
Targets of opportunity. Targets of opportunity are targets for which fires have not been
planned.
z
Planned targets. Planned targets are scheduled or on call.
Scheduled targets are fired at a specific time before or after H-hour, or upon completion of
a predetermined movement or task.
On-call targets are fired only upon request. They include targets for which firing data is
kept current, and targets for which firing data is not prepared in advance (for example, a
road junction (a prominent terrain feature) that the FO may use as a reference point).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-23
Chapter 9
Figure 9-10. Scheduled target (TRP type)
Figure 9-11. Planned targets (linear type)

z
9-24
FPF. FPF is an immediately available, prearranged barrier of fire designed to impede enemy
movement across defensive lines or areas (Figure 9-12). The FPF is represented on a map or
firing chart by a linear plot. The designation of the unit that will fire the FPF is placed above the
plot representing the FPF.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
Figure 9-12. Linear target symbol with FPF label
TARGET CONSIDERATIONS
9-79. Planned targets include areas of known, suspected, and likely enemy locations and prominent terrain
features. These areas are determined through intelligence sources, knowledge of the situation, and map and
terrain study. They are planned without regard to boundaries or weapon abilities. Duplication of effort will
be resolved by the next higher headquarters.
FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION MEASURES

9-80. The FIST and FS planners use FSCM to ensure that fires impacting in their zone will not jeopardize
troop safety, interfere with other FS means, or disrupt adjacent unit operations.
Boundaries
9-81. Boundaries determined by maneuver commanders establish the operational zone for a maneuver unit
and the area in which the commander fires and maneuvers freely. A unit may fire and maneuver against
clearly identified enemy targets near or over its boundary, as along as such action does not interfere with
adjacent units.
Coordination Measures
9-82. Coordination measures designate portions of the battlefield where actions may or may not be taken.
The fire support coordinator (FSCOORD) or FIST chief recommends coordination measures; the
commander establishes them. Coordination measures facilitate operations by establishing rules and
guidelines for selected areas for a given time. There are two categories: permissive and restrictive.
z
Permissive Measures. Permissive measures are drawn in black on overlays and maps. They are
titled and indicate the establishing headquarters and the effective date, time group (DTG).
Permissive measures allow fires into an area such as a free-fire area or across a line; an example
of such is a fire support coordination line (FSCL) that need not be further coordinated as long as
they remain within the zone of the established headquarters.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-25
Chapter 9
A coordinated fire line is a line beyond which conventional surface FS meansmortars, FA,
and naval gunfire (NGF)may fire any time within the zone of the establishing
headquarters without further coordination.
An FSCL is a line beyond which all targets may be attacked by any weapon system without
endangering troops or requiring further coordination with the establishing headquarters.
The effects of any weapon system may not fall short of this line.
A free-fire area is a designated area into which any weapon system may fire without further
coordination with the establishing headquarters.
Restrictive Measures. Restrictive measures are drawn in red. They are titled and indicate the
establishing headquarters and the effective DTG. Restrictive measures mean that fires into an
area or across a line must be coordinated with the establishing headquarters on a case-by-case
basis. Examples of restrictive measures include a restrictive fire area (RFA), a no-fire area, a
RFL, and an airspace coordination area (ACA).
A RFA is an area in which specific restrictions are imposed and into which fires that exceed
those restrictions will not be delivered without coordination with the establishing
headquarters.
A no-fire area is an area in which no fires or effects of fires are allowed. There are two
exceptions:
When the establishing headquarters approves fires temporarily within a no-fire area on
a mission basis.
When an enemy force within the no-fire area engages a friendly force and the
commander engages the enemy to defend his force.
A RFL is a line established between converging friendly forces (one or both may be
moving) that prohibits fires or effects from fires across the line without coordination with
the affected force.
An ACA is a block of airspace in the target area in which friendly aircraft are reasonably safe
from friendly surface fires. It may be a formal measure, but it is usually informal.
TARGET ATTACK
9-83. The FIST chief, when planning fires or deciding to engage a target, ensures that the fire conforms to
the scheme of maneuver of the supported unit. He must also be informed of the present enemy situation. In
determining the method of attack, the FDC chief considers target description, registration data, size of
attack area, and the maximum rate of fire.
METHOD OF ATTACK
9-84. The method of attacking a target depends largely on its description, which includes the type, size,
density, cover, mobility, and importance. Those factors are weighed against the guidelines established by
the commander. The FDC then decides the type of projectile, fuze, fuze setting, and ammunition to be
used.
z
Fortified targets must be destroyed by point-type fire using projectiles and fuzes appropriate for
penetration. Mortar fire does not usually destroy armor, but it can harass and disrupt armor
operations.
z
A target consisting of both men and materiel is normally attacked by area fire using air or impact
bursts to neutralize the area. Flammable targets are engaged with HE projectiles to inflict
fragmentation damage, and then with white phosphorous (WP) projectiles to ignite the material.
9-26
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Engage Collective
9-85. The method of attacking a target is governed by the results desired: suppression, neutralization, or
destruction.
z
Suppressive Fires. Suppressive fires limit the ability of enemy troops in the target area to be an
effective force. HE/PROX (proximity) creates apprehension or surprise and causes tanks to
button up. Smoke is used to blind or confuse, but the effect lasts only as long as fires are
continued.
z
Neutralization. Neutralization knocks the target out of the battle temporarily. Ten percent or
more casualties usually neutralize most units. The unit becomes effective again when casualties
are replaced and equipment repaired.
z
Destructive Fires. Destructive fires put the target out of action permanently. A unit with 30
percent or more casualties is usually rendered permanently ineffective, depending on the type
and discipline of the force. Direct hits are required on hard materiel targets.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
9-27
Chapter 10
Assess
After the crew has engaged a hostile target with either direct or indirect fires, the
crew collectively must assess the effects of their fires. The accurate assessment of the
effects of fires will determine further courses of action to eliminate the target in the
event the fires were unsuccessful, or shift their fires to additional targets on the
battlefield. Accuracy in the assessment phase of the detect, identify, decide, engage,
and assess (DIDEA) process and systematic reporting of their fires effects to a higher
headquarters provides the maneuver commander critical information necessary to
make key decisions for the unit (see Figure 10-1). The vehicle commander (VC) will
have to understand kill standards (what amount of lethal force is required to destroy a
threat) and the classification of effects; mobility, firepower, catastrophic, or a
combination. He will also need to understand what the classifications of indirect fire
assessments are, and interpret those assessments into accurate reports. This chapter
details the engagement assessment process, methods to terminate direct and indirect
fires, and report the end results of those fires.
Contents
Section I Engagement Termination .... 10-2
Section II Engagement Assessment ... 10-2
Direct Fire Engagement Assessment 10-2
Indirect Fire Engagement
Assessment ...................................... 10-3
Section III Reports ................................ 10-4
Figure 10-1. The engagement process (assess)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
10-1
Chapter 10
SECTION I ENGAGEMENT TERMINATION

10-1. The VC (or fire support officer [FSO] for indirect fire engagements) must determine when to cease
fire against a target, when to shift fire to another target when multiple targets are present, and when to
tactically move from one fighting position to another. Target effect may not always be clear to the crew,
depending on battlefield effects (fog of war), local and threat target obscurants, weather, and optics
capabilities. This requires leaders to make tactical decisions based on key indicators of munitions effects
against threat targets.
SECTION II ENGAGEMENT ASSESSMENT

10-2. When friendly forces have either directly or indirectly engaged the enemy, they must perform an
assessment of enemy battle damage and threat forces casualties. Leaders must understand the effects of
their fires and interpret their observations of those effects on enemy forces to their higher headquarters. By
providing this information, crews help build a consolidated picture for the maneuver commander who will
determine if the enemy is destroyed, neutralized, suppressed, or dispersed. The maneuver commander may
also decide to continue the engagement or bypass the enemy.
DIRECT FIRE ENGAGEMENT ASSESSMENT

KILL STANDARDS
10-3. Kill standards are classified as mobility, firepower, mobility and firepower, and catastrophic.
z
A mobility kill degrades a vehicles ability to move under its own power but still maintains the
ability to use its weapon systems.
z
A firepower kill prevents a vehicles ability to use its weapon systems.
z
A combined mobility and firepower kill will make the vehicle noncombat effective.
z
A catastrophic kill is a total loss of weapons systems, vehicle mobility, and all onboard
equipment.
ARMORED VEHICLES
Kill Standard
10-4. Based on the ammunition and time required to achieve destruction, the standard is achieving a
catastrophic kill. The minimum standard is to at least achieve a mobility or firepower kill. This renders the
vehicle and its systems ineffective against friendly forces.
Kill Indicators
10-5. During an engagement, the gunner or commander may cease or shift fire to a different target for
many reasons. Most of these reasons are based off of the observed actions of the threat vehicle. When
assessing target effects and determining if they should lift of shift fires to another target, crew should look
for some of the following signs:
z
The vehicle stops moving. If a vehicle stops moving, VCs may wish to reengage in the event the
vehicle maintains the ability to engage his vehicle with direct fires in a degraded capacity.
z
The vehicle stops firing.
z
The vehicle is smoking from what appears to be internal damage.
z
The vehicle explodes with immense smoke and flames or secondary explosions occur.
z
The crew abandons the vehicle.
10-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Assess
Note. When a 25-mm round (armor-piercing [AP] or high-explosive [HE]) or tube-launched,

optically-tracked, wire-guided (TOW) missile hits an armored vehicle, an observable explosion
with flash occurs. This is the effect of the round impacting on the target, not necessarily an
indication of damage to the target.
UNARMORED VEHICLES
Kill Standard
10-6. Threat unarmored vehicles are multiwheeled, which allows them to continue operating with one or
more tires punctured. The standard against an unarmored vehicle is the same as an armored target; to
achieve a catastrophic kill. At a minimum, the crew should cause a mobility kill or cause the driver and
crew to abandon the vehicle before lifting or shifting fires to another target.
Kill Indicators
10-7. One or more of the following indicators may cause the gunner or commander to cease fire or shift to
a different target:
z
The vehicle stops moving. If a vehicle stops moving, VCs may wish to reengage in the event the
vehicle maintains the ability to engage his vehicle with direct fires in a degraded capacity.
z
The vehicle stops firing.
z
The vehicle explodes.
z
The crew abandons the vehicle.
DISMOUNTED TROOPS AND ANTI-ARMOR SYSTEMS

Kill Standard
10-8. Destruction of dismounted troop point and area targets is difficult to measure. The goal is to
neutralize the dismounted troops and anti-armor firepower capability of the target through destruction,
damage, or suppression.
Kill Indicators
10-9. When engaging point or area dismounted troop or anti-armor targets, the following indicators may
lead the commander to cease or shift fire:
z
The dismounted troop threat stops maneuvering.
z
The dismounted troop threats anti-armor fire ceases or becomes noticeably ineffective.
z
Dismounted troop casualties are observed.
Note. When suppressing an area target, the duration of required suppression is based on the
mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil
considerations (METT-TC) requirements of the situation. Suppression should be maintained as
long as the unit gains a tactical advantage by doing so or until another element can close with
the target and destroy it.
INDIRECT FIRE ENGAGEMENT ASSESSMENT

10-10. Indirect fire assessment is based on the mission type and method of attack. For illumination and
smoke missions, assessment is based on whether the mission met the commanders intent. For attack
missions, the assessment of success is based on the desired result of the engagementsuppression,
neutralization, or destruction.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
10-3
Chapter 10
SUPPRESSION
10-11. The primary objective of suppressive fires is to get the enemy to keep their heads down, which
reduces shoot, move, or observation capability of their surroundings. Suppressive fire can be aimed at
direct target such as an enemy vehicle or at an area target such as a tree line where suspected enemy troops
are hiding. When suppressing an area target, the duration of the required suppression is based on the
METT-TC requirements of the situation. Suppression should be maintained as long as possible for the unit
to gain a tactical advantage or until another element can close with the target and destroy it. The other
elements should only close on the enemy once coordination has been conducted and fires have been lifted
or shifted.
10-12. The purpose of suppression fire has three purposes
z
To kill or destroy threat targets as quickly as possible.
z
To stop the threats engagement process.
z
To allow the maneuver force to close in on the threat position to provide more accurate fires.
10-13. The threat engagement process is similar to our process. In a continuous cycle, the threat elements
perform the following actions:
z
Detect you.
z
Identify you as a threat.
z
Decide to engage you with the type of armament or firepower they currently have or deliver to
you (indirect).
z
Engage you.
z
Assess the effectiveness of their fires.
10-14. If the enemys engagement cycle is interrupted, the target is suppressed. Once the threat target is
suppressed, they must return to the beginning of their engagement process. This will allow the vehicle
more time to reposition and provide more effective fires on the threat target. Suppressive fires may
continue depending on how rapidly the threat returns to the engage element of the engagement process or
until the threat has been neutralized or destroyed.
NEUTRALIZATION
10-15. A target is neutralized when it is temporarily taken out of the battle. Neutralizing a unit allows the
maneuver commander to decide whether to continue to engage with indirect fires, maneuver to the target
and engage with direct fires or bypass a target and proceed with other missions.
DESTRUCTION
10-16. Destructive fires render the vehicles or enemy units capabilities to shoot, move, communicate, and
observe ineffective. A unit with thirty percent or more casualties is usually considered destroyed,
depending on the type and discipline of the opposing force. Hard material targets require direct hits and
should be assessed by the same kill standards as for direct fire engagements by the FSO. Although the kill
indicators remain the same for direct and indirect fires, caution should still be taken when maneuvering
closer to the engaged threat. These threats, although appearing to be destroyed, may still have the
capability to engage with other means, such as infantry with antitank weapons that had survived the
indirect fires.
SECTION III REPORTS

10-17. When crews have finished an engagement and when time permits, they should provide their higher
headquarters an accurate report outlining their engagement, current situation and enemy battle damage
assessment (BDA). This can be done through two reportsBLUE-2 (situation report [SITREP]) or a BDA
report. Information in the report may be based on your unit standing operating procedures (SOP) but
should provide the following at a minimum:
z
Friendly action taken/situation.
z
Estimated location of destroyed enemy vehicle(s).
10-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Assess
z
z
z
z
Number of vehicles engaged or destroyed.

Time of situation.
Vehicular position/posture.
Tactical intentions.
10-18. Reports should be brief but accurate and detailed enough so the maneuver commander can assess
his overall units tactical situation. Although your vehicle may not be digitally equipped, when sending
enemy positions to your command, they should be as accurate as possible. This would allow the maneuver
commander or higher headquarters the ability to plot information on the Force XXI Battle Command
Brigade and Below (FBCB2), if digitally equipped, or to determine possible threat areas if the enemy
vehicles were not catastrophically killed. If vehicles were only suppressed or the VC is not sure the
vehicles were destroyed, it should be noted in the report.
10-19. When sending the report, crew members should make the report as brief as possible. Jamming the
communication line for lengthy periods of time may cause your unit to miss critical reports such as a spot
report (SPOTREP) or contact report from another vehicle.
10-20. Example: Your vehicle, A-13, has just engaged and destroyed two tanks and one set of troops
vicinity of TRP 3. You are currently set in battle position 2B. Table 10-1 shows an example report.
Table 10-1. Situation report
Description
Radio Transmission
Friendly Action Taken
Engaged and destroyed 2 tanks and 1 set of troops
Location of Enemy Vehicles
Vicinity TRP 3
Time of Situation
1635
Vehicular Position/Posture
I am set BP-2B
Tactical Intentions
Continuing to defend, out
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
10-5
Chapter 11
Training Devices
Chapter 11 identifies training aids, devices, simulators, and simulations (TADSS) that
enhance a units ability to train, sustain, and evaluate gunnery and tactical training.
Chapter 11 is not intended to be a users guide but rather gives an overview of the
systems and how they relate to a gunnery training program. Because of the high cost
of ammunition and high operational tempo of training areas, the use of TADSS at
home station is becoming increasingly more important.
Note. TADSS undergo continuing development based on evolving doctrine and
technological improvements; therefore, the information in Chapter 11 may not represent
the most current training devices available for training.
Contents
Section I TADSS Overview .................. 11-1
Section II Common TADSS .................. 11-3
Training Aids ..................................... 11-3
Devices ............................................. 11-8
Simulators and Simulations .............. 11-9
Section III Abrams TADSS ................. 11-16
Training Aids ................................... 11-16
Devices ........................................... 11-19
Simulators and Simulations ............ 11-20
Section IV Bradley TADSS ................. 11-23

Training Aids ................................... 11-23
Devices ........................................... 11-25
Simulators and Simulations ............. 11-26
Section V Armed HMMWV TADSS ..... 11-29
Training Aids ................................... 11-29
Simulators and Simulations ............. 11-31
SECTION I TADSS OVERVIEW

11-1. Trainers must identify the specific resources that increase a units ability to train, sustain, and
evaluate gunnery and tactical training. Table 11-1 offers a quick reference of the TADSS that relate to
specific systems. See Chapter 12 for a more detailed discussion of the integration of virtual training
TADSS into the gunnery training program.
11-2. TADSS are defined as
z
Training Aids. Training aids are tools that provide assistance in conducting training.
z
Devices (Appended Equipment). Appended equipment includes three-dimensional training
products that mount on the actual platform and can be activated either mechanically or
electrically.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-1
Chapter 11
Simulators. Simulators are stand-alone trainers that replicate the functions of equipment or
systems. They use electronic or mechanical means to reproduce conditions necessary for an
individual or crew to practice operational tasks in accordance with (IAW) training objectives.
Simulations. Simulations replicate a combat environment for training from the individual to the
collective level using computers. Simulators, as used in this manual, refer either to networked
simulators or to appended devices that provide a combat system the ability to train as a simulator.
Table 11-1. Gunnery-related TADSS and systems supported
TADDS
System Supported
Training Aids
Tracking Boards
Common
Laser Target Interface Device (LTID)
Common
Scale Models
Common
Dummy Rounds
Common
Recognition of Combat Vehicle (ROC-V)
Common
Devices (Appended Equipment)

Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement Systems
(MILES)
Common
Thru-Sight Video (TSV) Systems
Abrams/BFV Common
AIMTEST Caliber .50 Inbore Device
Abrams-Specific
Precision Gunnery System (PGS)
BFV-Specific
Simulators and Simulations
Family of Conduct-of-Fire Trainers (COFT)
M1A1 Abrams and BFV ODS and Below
Bradley Advanced Training System (BATS)
BFVA3
Family of Advanced Gunnery Training Systems
Abrams-Specific
M1A1 Tabletop Gunnery Trainer (TGT)
Abrams-Specific
Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer

(AFIST) XXI
Abrams-Specific (NG only)
Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator

Trainer (AB-FIST)
BFV-Specific
M2 ODS Tabletop Full-Fidelity Trainer (TFT)
BFV ODS-Specific
Engagement Skills Trainer (EST) 2000
Individual and Crew Weapons through MK19
Family of Simulations Networks (SIMNET)
BFV/Abrams Common
Combined Arms Tactical Trainer (CATT) (Family of

Systems)
Common
Close-Combat Tactical Trainer (CCTT) (CATT

Subsystem)
BFV/Abrams Common
Close-Combat Tactical Trainer Reconfigurable

Vehicle Simulator (CCTT-RVS) (CATT Subsystem)
HMMWV/HEMTT-Specific
Virtual Warrior
Individual and Crew Weapons
Virtual Combat Convoy Trainer (VCCT)
HMMWV-Specific
Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer (VCOT)
HMMWV-Specific (Levels 1 and 2) and Common

(Level 3)
11-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
SECTION II COMMON TADSS

11-3. This section describes TADSS that are common to most or all platform systems within the Heavy
Brigade Combat Team (HBCT). Devices that are designed for platforms with a fire control system will not
apply to armed High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicles (HMMWV).
TRAINING AIDS
DUMMY ROUNDS
11-4. Various dummy rounds are available to conduct training with the M256 120-mm tank cannon, the
M242 25-mm automatic gun, MK19 machine gun, M2 HB machine gun, M240 machine guns, and the
tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided (TOW) system. See the platform-specific TADSS sections of
this chapter for details of various dummy round types.
11-5. Recognition of Combat Vehicle (ROC-V) is a Windows-based day optic and thermal sight vehicle
identification training program developed in support of 2d Gen forward looking, infrared (FLIR) programs.
This computer-based, multimedia training program can be tailored to serve as an individual tutorial,
collective trainer, and standardized testing tool at individual, institutional and unit levels (see Table 11-2).
Table 11-2. ROC-V usage table
Individual
Crew
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
Collective
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
GT
T - Suitable for training for this event
E - Enhances training for this event
P - Suitable for individual training for this event
X - Not suitable for training for this event
Capabilities and Limitations

Capabilities
11-6. ROC-V capabilities include
z
Training Vehicle Identification. Training is organized by vehicle types and confusion sets.
ROC-V can train Soldiers on three different methods of visual recognition through 360 degrees
of vehicle aspect.
Visualunaided optics.
First generation thermal.
Second generation thermal.

z
Testing Vehicle Identification. Testing is progressive throughout the training modules.
Instructors can also use a pre-generated test within the system or generate their own tests.
Gunnery skills test (GST). Instructors have the capability of generating tailored exams for
their GSTs.
Common task test (CTT). A pre-generated CTT vehicle identification test is provided with
the software, or instructors can generate their own tests.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-3
Chapter 11
Limitations
11-7. ROC-V limitations include
z
Limited Vehicle Backdrops. There are a limited number of pictures of each vehicle, allowing
the Soldier to memorize terrain characteristics instead of vehicle recognition cues.
z
Limited Resolution of Pictures. Various targets, especially at longer ranges, lack the resolution
for positive identification through 360 degrees of rotation.
ROC-V Training Integration

11-8. ROC-V helps Soldiers learn to identify the thermal signatures of combat vehicles through the use of
an interactive curriculum that teaches the unique patterns and shapes of vehicle hotspots, and overall
vehicle shapes and characteristics. ROC-V also provides Soldiers with practical experience in the use of
their thermal sensor image controls. Through the use of virtual sight controls, Soldiers learn to adjust their
thermal image to find targets and bring out their thermal identification (ID) cues (see Figure 11-1).
11-9. ROC-V should be integrated to the individual gunnery training program to train vehicle
identification and for testing purposes on GST.
Figure 11-1. Sample ROC-V training screen

Tracking Boards
11-10. Tracking boards are training aids that provide a crew with manipulation training for their fire
control system. The boards require the gunner and vehicle commander (VC) to traverse and elevate their
sight reticles to track within a pair of lines as if they were tracking a vehicle moving cross-country. An
advanced tracking board that incorporates physically manipulating elements of the fire control system can
be manufactured to make training more challenging to crews. Table 11-3 gives the specifications for
designing tracking boards based on the distance from vehicle to tracking board.
11-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
Table 11-3. Tracking board usage table

Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
Tracking Board Training Integration

11-11. Power and manual control tracking board exercises should be included in individual gunnery
training to build fundamental manipulation skills in the VC and gunner. Tracking board exercises are
practiced with the primary sight, the auxiliary sight, as well as Commanders Independent Thermal View
(CITV)/Commanders Independent Viewer (CIV) and the TOW reticles, both day and night (see Figure
11-2 through Figure 11-4 and Table 11-4 and Table 11-5).
Figure 11-2. Sample basic tracking board
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-5
Chapter 11
Figure 11-3. Sample advanced tracking board
Figure 11-4. Advanced with swithology
11-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
Table 11-4. Vehicle-to-target distance

Vehicle-to-Tracking Line
Distance (Meters)
Length of Target Line

(Meters)
Width Between Parallel Lines

(Millimeters)
1.67
14.7
10
3.33
29.4
15
5.00
44.1
20
6.67
58.8
25
8.33
73.5
30
10.00
88.2
35
11.67
102.9
40
13.33
117.6
45
15.00
132.3
50
16.67
147.0
Table 11-5. Usage Table

Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
11-12. Armored vehicle scaled models can be used to train crews in target acquisition, range
determination, and vehicle identification. These models are three-dimensional and are made of a hard
plastic. Scaled models enhance individual gunnery training such as range determination, gun lay, and
combat vehicle identification. Scaled models are available in 1:10, 1:30, l:35, and 1:60 scale at the local
training support center (TSC).
LASER TARGET INTERFACE DEVICE

11-13. The Laser Target Interface Device (LTID) aids in gunnery training with Multiple Integrated Laser
Engagement System (MILES)/Precision Gunnery System (PGS) (see Table 11-6). LTID allows
MILES/PGS hits on a target to activate the targets hit sensor, knocking down the target. The LTID
receives a coded MILES/PGS message and converts it into electrical pulses. These pulses activate the
shock generator mechanism that activates a hit sensor, simulating a projectile striking the target. LTID can
be used on full-scale, half-scale, or one-tenth-scale (on M31A1 lifters).
Table 11-6. Laser Target Interface Device usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-7
Chapter 11
11-14. The system components are

z
Detection assembly.
z
Electronic assembly.
z
Shock generator mechanism.
Laser Target Interface Device Training Integration

11-15. Targets with LTIDs enhance training on device-based gunnery Tables II, VII, and X, and,
allowing for visible target effects when using MILES or PGS. See TM 9-1265-376-10 for more
information.
DEVICES
THRU-SIGHT VIDEO SYSTEMS (ABRAMS AND BRADLEY)
11-16. Thru-sight video (TSV) systems are vehicle-appended systems that provide a video and audio
recording of gunnery or tactical engagement exercises of vehicles with a fire control system. The TSV is
designed to support all proficiency levels during dry or live-firing engagements (see Table 11-7).
Table 11-7. Thru-sight video usage table
Individual
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
Crew
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
Collective
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
11-17. TSV records the gunners sight picture in real time; makes a recording of crew intercom and radio
transmissions for critique of the live fire; records and displays fire control system information (time tags,
vehicle identification, and trigger pull time) during simulated engagements and during subcaliber
engagements in order to enhance the gunnery after action review (AAR).
FAMILY OF MULTIPLE INTEGRATED LASER ENGAGEMENT SYSTEMS

11-18. MILES is an integrated family of low-power, eye-safe, laser-based devices (see Table 11-8 and
Figure 11-5). It simulates the casualty-producing effects of direct fire weapons using laser beams. When
fired, an invisible laser beam is sent out from a transmitter. The laser beam transmits coded messages
(based on the weapon and ammunition selected) to the detector belt sensors on other MILES-equipped
vehicles. Various types of MILES have been fielded including
z
MILES.
z
MILES II.
z
MILES 2000.
Table 11-8. Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
11-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
Figure 11-5. Components of vehicular MILES 2000

11-19. MILES enables the crew to use the vehicle in combat training exercises (force-on-force). It also
provides the commander an economical way to train and evaluate his crews proficiency in teamwork and
crew coordination during gunnery training exercises. Burst on target (BOT) and tracer on target (TOT)
cannot be trained using MILES because the crew cannot see hit signatures or tracers.
MILES Training integration

11-20. MILES is integrated into the device-based gunnery programs for the various systems in the
HBCT. It is an alternate training device for the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) (when PGS is unavailable)
and the tank (when the inbore subcaliber device is unavailable or impractical to use). It can be incorporated
into device-based gunnery tables to include Tables I, II, VII, VIII, X, and XI.
SIMULATORS AND SIMULATIONS

FAMILY OF CONDUCT-OF-FIRE TRAINERS
11-21. The Conduct-of-Fire Trainer (COFT) family is one of the primary simulators for training crew
gunnery skills without using ranges, ammunition, or vehicles (see Table 11-9). The various configurations
of the COFT simulate the controls and optics of the VCs and the gunners positions. It simulates the use of
the fire control systems against stationary and moving threats, single and multiple target arrays, during day,
night, and reduced visibility conditions in various different environments. The COFT allows training
without regard to time of day or climatic conditions. The current COFT configurations are the COFT,
Abrams Mobile Conduct-of-Fire Trainer (MCOFT) XXI, Bradley COFT XXI and the Mobile Brigade
Combat Team (BCT) BCT MCOFT XXI.
Table 11-9. COFT usage table
Individual
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
Crew
Collective
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-9
Chapter 11

11-22. The COFT, currently employed by the active component, simulates the BFV Operation Desert
Storm (ODS) and below and employs the same instructional subsystem and simulated environment as the
Bradley Advanced Training System (BATS) (see page 11-27).
11-23. The BCT COFT XXI and COFT XXI are used by the reserve component and are mobile
configurations of the COFT system. BCT COFT XXI is assigned to combined arms battalions in Army
National Guard (ARNG) HBCTs. COFT XXI is specific to the Armored Reconnaissance Squadron (ARS)
of the HBCT and includes only an M3A2 ODS and below simulator. Unique characteristics of the BCT
COFT XXI and COFT XXI are
z
No fixed power supply is requiredpowered by an integral generator.
z
Databases for Europe (summer and winter), desert, urban (Zussman urban site, and geo-specific
Baghdad).
z
Crew records are interchangeable between the COFT XXI, Advanced Bradley Full-Crew
Interactive Simulator Trainer (AB-FIST), and Tabletop Full-Fidelity Trainer (TFT).
COFT Training Integration

11-24. COFT represents the primary virtual training system for equipped units for individual gunnery
virtual training and gunnery skills sustainment training. It is also a useful tool for retraining crews that
require it in the crew gunnery phase. COFT training builds the foundation of VC/gunner coordination and
trains the crew on engagement techniques for precision and degraded modes of gunnery in offensive and
defensive postures in a variety of environments. It trains in all elements of the engagement process. Some
configurations of the COFT are capable of being networked to serve as collective virtual training
simulations. Completion of COFT matrix training is a prerequisite to live-fire training.
CALL FOR FIRE TRAINER

11-25. The Call for Fire Trainer (CFFT) is an individual and collective training system that provides a
simulated battlefield for training forward observer tasks at the institutional and unit level to accurately call
for indirect fire (see Table 11-10 and Figure 11-6). It replaces the target set forward observer (TSFO)
GUARDFIST II, and Field Artillery Training System (FATS).
Table 11-10. Call for fire trainer usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
11-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
Figure 11-6. Call for Fire Trainer
Capabilities
11-26. The capabilities are
z
Trains all Soldiers how to call for and adjust fire without the use of live ammunition.
z
Trains leaders how to conduct fire support planning, coordination, and execution of all
supporting fires.
z
Multiple terrain databases (National Training Center [NTC], Fort Sill, Baghdad).
z
Deployable/transportable and will provide advanced distributed learning simulated military
equipment, virtual environments, and Computer Generated Forces (CGF).
z
Operates in a stand-alone mode to train from 1 to 30 students.
HMMWV EGRESS ASSISTANCE TRAINER

11-27. The HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer is a training device designed to meet the Army specific
training needs of Soldiers, institutions and the operational environment (see Table 11-11 and Figure 11-7).
Hands-on training in a replicated tactical vehicle affords commanders the capability to immerse Soldiers in
a replicated operational environment (without risking the safety of Soldiers, damaging expensive
equipment, or potentially polluting/destroying the environment).
Table 11-11. HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-11
Chapter 11
Figure 11-7. HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer

11-28. The capabilities and limitations are
z
Realistic training on vehicle rollover response.
z
Training for Soldiers to achieve self-control and overcome the natural fear and panic following
the catastrophic event which led to the vehicle rollover event.
z
The device is designed to increase the situational awareness of vehicle rollover by permitting the
instructor to observe driver performance and reactions to emergency conditions without
requiring the use of an actual vehicle for initial driving and sustainment training.
ENGAGEMENT SKILLS TRAINER 2000/LASER MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING SYSTEM

11-29. The Engagement Skills Trainer (EST) 2000 simulates weapon training events that lead to live-fire
individual/crew weapon qualification and training events currently not resourced under Standards and
Training Commission (STRAC) (see Table 11-12 and Figure 11-8). The system saves ammunition
resources. The EST is used primarily as a unit/institutional, indoor, multipurpose, multilane, small-arms,
crew served, and individual antitank training simulator.
Table 11-12. Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
11-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
Figure 11-8. EST 2000 Engagement Skills Trainer

11-30. The EST 2000 is capable of providing three modes of training
z
Marksmanship training mode (initial and sustainment training).
z
Collective gunnery training mode (5 to 10 firers).
z
Judgmental training mode (shoot/dont shoot training).
11-31. The EST 2000 System comes in packages that are designed to support 5, 10, or 15 lane training
areas.
EST 2000 Training Integration

11-32. The EST 2000 can be incorporated into various phases of the gunnery program for virtual training.
z
Marksmanship Training Mode.
Virtual pre-live-fire training for individual and crew-served weapons in rifle squads.
Virtual pre-live-fire training for armed HMWWVs gunners and VCs.
Virtual pre-live-fire training for tank loaders on Abrams tanks (and VCs on M1A2 System
Enhancement Program [SEP] tanks).
z
Collective Gunnery Training Mode.
Squad fire distribution training.
Virtual pre-live-fire training for armed HMWWV gunners and VCs.
Virtual pre-live-fire training for tank loaders on Abrams tanks (and VCs on M1A2 SEP
tanks).
z
Judgmental Training Mode. Engagement decision training.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-13
Chapter 11
11-33. The Simulations Network (SIMNET) is a system of combat vehicle simulators linked to each other
over a local area network (LAN) (see Table 11-13). They simulate the M1-series tank and the M2-/M3series BFV. The upgraded versions of the SIMNET (SIMNET XXI) features improved realism of the crew
stations, fire control system, and optics over the legacy version. The configurations can vary from tank or
infantry platoon to a battalion task force. SIMNET is primarily a maneuver training simulator system;
however, it can be used to train fire distribution for collective gunnery.
Table 11-13. Simulations Network usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
FAMILY OF SIMULATIONS NETWORKS

11-34. A company commander may train one platoon at a time using a subset of a company- or battalionsize configuration. When used as a company- or battalion-level trainer, a tactical operation center and
combat trains command post are available to act as the administration, logistics and operations centers that
would normally be present during combat operations. Computer-generated imagery is used to create the
illusion of riding in tanks and BFVs, fighting force-on-force battles.
11-35. The system and its computers are simple to use. With few exceptions, four hours of practice will
support situational training exercise (STX) training on mounted tasks. As in any training, the leader must
plan and prepare his objectives in advance and make sure the entire chain of command knows the training
objectives.
11-36. The SIMNET has only limited capability of integrating any squad/dismounted scout team training
to the platform maneuver training. SIMNET has limited ability to integrate reconnaissance HMWWV
training with tank and BFV training.
SIMNET Training Integration

11-37. SIMNET is one of the primary virtual trainers that can be used to train entire crews in maneuver
for collective gunnery. It can be effectively used to prepare leaders in the fundamentals of fire planning and
distribution for heavy-platform systems prior to conducting the collective gunnery phase.
COMBINED ARMS TACTICAL TRAINER

11-38. The Combined Arms Tactical Trainer (CATT) is a family of combined arms simulation systems
designed to support the Armys simulation-based combined arms training strategy. The initial CATT
system is the Close Combat Tactical Trainer (CCTT), which provides the underlying baseline (architecture,
terrain databases, AAR, semi-automated forces [SAF], and models/algorithms) for future CATT
expansions, pre-planned product improvements, and system enhancements. The CATT systems are
primarily maneuver trainers, not gunnery trainers; however, they can be successfully integrated into a
gunnery training program. Current versions of the CATT include
z
CCTT. The CCTT primarily simulates heavy vehicle maneuver units (see Table 11-14 and
Figure 11-9). The CCTT is a system of computer-driven combat-vehicle simulators connected
by LAN. Simulators include the M1 Abrams tank, the BFV, the HMMWV, and the Fire Support
Team Vehicle (FIST-V). The simulators work interactively to control other vehicle models and
11-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
z
z
functions similar to the vehicles and functions they simulate. The trainer trains mounted crews
through battalion task force Soldiers in selected collective tasks. An important feature of the
trainer is the CGF capability that can simulate both friendly and opposing forces with only
limited human intervention from crews up through regiment.
Aviation Combined Arms Tactical Trainer (AVCATT). The AVCATT is an aviation
simulation system networkable with the CCTT.
Virtual Warrior. The virtual warrior is a rifle squad centric collective virtual training system
designed to train dismounted soldiers, leaders, and units (platoon through battalion). It enables
more frequent, repetitive, standards-based training to build and sustain readiness at home
station. The virtual warrior combines immersive Soldier and leader simulators with personal
computer-based reconfigurable vehicle simulators, dismounted Soldier multifunctional
workstations, and high-fidelity convoy trainers to support training of leaders and Soldiers from
squad/crew to company with extensions to individual Soldier and battalion echelons. The virtual
warrior will enable training on the full-spectrum of operations required in urban and complex
terrain environments.
CCTT Reconfigurable Vehicle Simulator (CCTT-RVS). CCTT-RVS introduces multiple
configurations of wheeled vehicles and their various crew-served and small-arms capabilities
into the CCTT simulated environment. The CCTT-RVS complements the standard combined
arms CCTT family with the representation of a variety of wheeled vehicles, including multiple
variants of the HMMWV and Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Truck (HEMTT), all equipped
with small arms simulators. The CCTT-RVS allows the training of up to five crew members,
including the driver, commander, gunner, and riflemen. The system also features
A 360-degree field of view.
Full inventory of ballistically matched weapons with the option of tetherless performance.
Organic radios and Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) interfaces.
Compatibility with all CCTT terrain databases.
Single instructor station for scenario generation, exercise control, and AAR.
CATT Training Integration

11-39. The CATT simulations are among the primary virtual trainers that can be used to train entire crews
in maneuver for collective gunnery. They can be effectively used to prepare leaders in the fundamentals of
fire planning and distribution for platform systems prior to conducting the collective gunnery phase.
Table 11-14. Close Combat Tactical Trainer usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-15
Chapter 11
Figure 11-9. Close Combat Tactical Trainer
SECTION III ABRAMS TADSS

11-40. This section describes TADSS that are specific to the M1-series Abrams.
TRAINING AIDS
DUMMY ROUNDS
11-41. Various dummy rounds are available to conduct training with the M256 120-mm tank cannon, the
M2 HB machine gun, and M240 machine guns (see Table 11-15 and Figure 11-10).
Table 11-15. Dummy rounds usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
11-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
Figure 11-10. 7.62mm, caliber .50 and 120-mm dummy rounds
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-17
Chapter 11
120-mm Sabot, HEAT, Canister, and MPAT Dummy Rounds

11-42. The 120-mm dummy rounds are inert cartridges and are not Class V items. They can be obtained
from the installation TSC. The 120-mm dummy rounds have the same weight and shape of their
representative service rounds, but the projectile and cartridge case are made of a solid black plastic to
distinguish them as dummy rounds (see Figure 11-10).
M2 Dummy Round (Caliber .50)

11-43. The M2 dummy round is a caliber .50 cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for
non-fire training with the M2 HB machine gun. It is made of brass with a metal tip. The cartridge case has
three holes drilled into it to further identify it as a dummy round. The links can become damaged or rusty
and should be changed as often as possible.
11-44. The M2 dummy round is a Class V item and can be requisitioned with DA Form 581, Request for
Issue and Turn-In of Ammunition. (Table 11-16 contains information required for requisitioning the M2
dummy round.)
M172 Dummy Round (7.62 mm)

11-45. The M172 dummy round is a 7.62-mm cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for
non-fire training with the M240 machine gun. It is made of brass with a metal tip. It is recommended for
use over the plastic-tipped version. (The plastic tips can become bent and get jammed, either in the weapon
or the feed chute.)
11-46. The M172 dummy round is a Class V item that can be requisitioned using DA Form 581. (Table
11-16 contains information required for requisitioning this round.)
Table 11-16. Requisition information
Nomenclature
DODIC/TASC Item Number
Cartridge, 7.62-mm Dummy M172
A159
Cartridge, 7.62-mm Dummy M172 (Carton Packed)
A162
Cartridge, Caliber .50 Dummy M2
A560
Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M865 TPCSDS-T
DVC-T-17-107
Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M831A TP-T
DVC-T-17-108
Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M1002 TP-T
DVC-T-17-111
Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M1028 Canister
DVC-T-17-113
Cartridge, 120-mm Dummy M 829A2 APFSDS-T
DVC-T-17-112
DUMMY ROUND TRAINING INTEGRATION

11-47. Dummy rounds can be used to train several of the tasks that are part of the GST and Gunnery
Table I (GT I) (Chapter 14, Individual and Crew Live-Fire Prerequisite Testing, contains the GST and
GT I).
z
Load and clear the main gun on the Abrams tank.
z
Identify 120-mm main gun ammunition using the stub-base marking (Canister only) and
projectile end.
z
Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the tank machine guns.
11-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
CAUTION
Because the M172 dummy round is made of brass and can be
damaged during training, the rounds should be inspected periodically
and replaced as needed. Continued use of damaged rounds or links
can damage the feed chute or the weapon. The links should be
changed as often as possible.
DEVICES
11-48. The caliber .50 inbore device is an internally mounted, subcaliber gunnery training device that can
be used to enhance a units gunnery training.
CALIBER .50 INBORE DEVICE

11-49. The caliber .50 inbore device is a subcaliber device that provides realistic ballistic engagement of
targets at a fraction of the cost of full-caliber main gun ammunition (see Table 11-17 and Figure 11-11).
Any caliber .50 ammunition can be used with this device; however, the M962 Sabot light armor penetratortracer (SLAP-T) round is the closest ballistically matched round that will simulate the 120-mm M830 highexplosive antitank (HEAT) round out to 2,000 meters. The device has the advantage over MILES that it
employs the full fire control system, training the gunner in proper engagement techniques. It allows
complete involvement of tank crew in the engagement process and provides the ability to observe direct
fires and provide sensings for other firing vehicles. However, the caliber .50 inbore device only partially
trains the loader. The caliber .50 inbore device also enables leaders to control and distribute fires.
11-50. The caliber .50 inbore device suffers the limitation of requiring a live-fire range facility to be used.
Additionally, due to the extended surface danger zone of the M962 SLAP-T round, conventional caliber
.50 capable ranges may not support firing this system.
Table 11-17. Caliber .50 inbore device usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-19
Chapter 11
Figure 11-11. Caliber .50 inbore device
WARNING
When using M962 SLAP-T ammunition with the caliber .50 inbore
device, Master Gunners (during scenario development) must
ensure the range they are using supports the extended surface
danger zone of that ammunition.
Caliber .50 Inbore Device Training Integration

11-51. Training with the caliber .50 inbore device can enhance gunnery training on certain tank tables
where main gun ammunition is limited. This system can be used most effectively on Tank Tables II, VIII,
and XI. It can also be used for retraining crews on Tank Table V.
11-52. When training for collective gunnery, the caliber .50 inbore device should never be used with
platform systems that employ PGS or MILES, to avoid damaging LTID systems on the targetry.

FAMILY OF ADVANCED GUNNERY TRAINING SYSTEMS
11-53. The Advanced Gunnery Training System (AGTS) is a family of tank gunnery training simulators
for VC/gunner teams (see Table 11-18). Its primary purpose is to train/sustain basic gunnery skills and
increase combat gunnery skills. The AGTS places the VC and gunner in a realistically simulated crew
station and presents them with a full range of computer-controlled engagement situations. The AGTS
produces full-color, computer-generated action scenes in which crew members interact with various target
situations. Programmed exercises vary in target type and number, range, vehicle and target motion,
visibility, and other complex conditions.
11-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
Table 11-18. Advanced Gunnery Training System usage table

Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
11-54. The variants of the AGTS family replicate the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tanks and come in fixed-site,
mobile, and relocatable configurations. These configurations are
z
AGTS. M1A2 SEP-variant of the simulator.
z
Mobile Advanced Gunnery Training System (MAGTS). Mobile configuration of the AGTS.
z
Relocatable Advanced Gunnery Training System (RAGTS). Relocatable-variant of the
AGTS.
z
Computerized Advanced Gunnery Training System (C-AGTS). M1A1-variant of the
simulator.
z
Mobile Configuration of Computerized Advanced Gunnery Training System (MC-AGTS).
Mobile configuration of the C-AGTS.

System Capabilities
11-55. The AGTS provides initial, refresher, and sustainment training for VC/gunner teams to facilitate
the crawl/walk/run training methodology. The system uses computer-generated visual scenes, targetry, and
special effects to simulate the engagement of targets. The majority of the fire control system is replicated in
both physical and functional aspects. The system trains both fully operational and degraded-mode gunnery
techniques under a wide variety of conditions. The crew training program consists of crew gunnery,
collective gunnery, sustainment, and special-purpose exercises that are designed to train fully operational
precision gunnery and battlesight gunnery techniques.
11-56. For collective gunnery training, the AGTS systems are capable of being networked for section
and platoon training. A platoon after-action review (PAAR) shelter is provided for exercise management
and conducting AARs.
Limitations
11-57. Although the AGTS places the VC and gunner in a realistically simulated crew station and
presents them with a full range of computer-controlled engagement situations, some functions of the VC
and gunner stations are physically simulated and some are not. The AGTS also provides no training for the
loader or driver.
AGTS Training Integration

11-58. AGTS represents the primary virtual training system for equipped units for individual gunnery
virtual training and gunnery skills sustainment training. It is also a useful tool for retraining crews that
require it in the crew gunnery phase. AGTS training builds the foundation of VC/gunner coordination and
trains the crew on engagement techniques for precision and degraded modes of gunnery in offensive and
defensive postures in a variety of environments. It trains in all elements of the engagement process. The
crew training program consists of basic gunnery, gate-to-live-fire, combat gunnery, advanced combat
gunnery, sustainment gunnery, and special-purpose gunnery exercises designed to train the full range of
gunnery engagement techniques. For advanced gunnery virtual training, the AGTS is capable of being
networked for section and platoon gunnery training simulations.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-21
Chapter 11
ABRAMS FULL-CREW INTERACTIVE SIMULATOR TRAINER XXI

11-59. The Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer (A-FIST) XXI is an appended, fully
deployable, full-crew training system capable of training precision, degraded, and battlesight gunnery,
driving, crew communications and coordination, and mission tactics for the M1A1 tank (see Figure 11-12).
With A-FIST XXI, M1A1 tank crews can conduct tank gunnery training using the actual controls and input
devices of the tank. A-FIST XXI crew records are interchangeable with BCT COFT XXI by use of a
floppy disc.
Figure 11-12. Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer
A-FIST XXI Capabilities and Limitations

System Capabilities
11-60. The A-FIST XXI is capable of simulating the use of both primary and alternate fire controls and
sighting systems against stationary and moving threats, single and multiple target arrays, during day, night,
and reduced visibility conditions in various different environments. The A-FIST XXI provides gunnery
training using the majority of the fire control system of the actual vehicle combined with computergenerated graphics. The computational system of the A-FIST XXI determines the point of aim for the
weapon system in use and computes trajectory of the round in use and point of impact to simulate the
visual effects of tracer, BOT. It also simulates hostile fire signature and obscuration. The system supports
day/night unlimited visibility conditions, as well as degraded mode and manual mode engagements.
A-FIST XXI provides terrain databases for European, desert, and urban (Zussman urban site and geospecific Baghdad) environments.
Limitations
11-61. The A-FIST XXI can be operated in any facility in a 30 x 30 area. If that area is not available
and the muzzle reference system (MRS) update is to be performed outside of the building, 30 x 21 is the
required area. Power required to operate the system is 115 Vac, 60 Hz, on a 30-amp circuit with an L5-30R
receptacle within 50 feet of the instructor/operator station (IOS). It can also be powered by a single-phase
11-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
generator 115 Vac, 60 Hz, 30-amp within 70 feet of the IOS. There are no other operating limitations,
except those environmental considerations that affect the facility.
A-FIST XXI Training Integration

11-62. A-FIST XXI training should be incorporated into the virtual gunnery training program of the unit.
It is designed to train or sustain gunnery proficiency of crews by successfully completing exercises that
require the performance of gunnery tasks under conditions similar to those encountered in combat. The
crew training program consists of individual gunnery, crew gunnery, gate-to-live-fire, combat gunnery,
advanced combat gunnery, sustainment gunnery, special-purpose gunnery exercises, and practice exercises
designed to train the full range of gunnery engagement techniques.
SECTION IV BRADLEY TADSS

11-63. This section describes TADSS that are specific to the M2-/M3-series and M7 BFVs.
TRAINING AIDS
DUMMY ROUNDS
11-64. Various dummy rounds are available to conduct training with the M242 25-mm automatic gun,
M240 machine gun, and the TOW system (see Table 11-19 and Figure 11-14).
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
M794 Dummy Round (25-mm)

11-65. The M794 dummy round is a non-fire training round used to conduct training on various 25-mm
tasks. The M794 dummy round is a cast metal round that is non-corrosive and weighs about the same as
the M792 and M793 rounds. Previous dummy rounds were made from fired casings and had plastic or
wooden tips. Because the casing of a fired round is slightly expanded, such rounds could get stuck in the
breech of the 25-mm gun. The use of such rounds should be discontinued and the cast metal rounds
requisitioned. The links can become damaged or rusty and should be changed as often as possible.
11-66. The M794 dummy round is a Class V item and can be requisitioned with DA Form 581. Table
11-20 contains information required for requisitioning the M794 dummy round.)
M172 Dummy Round (7.62-mm)

11-67. The M172 is a 7.62-mm cartridge minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for non-fire
training with the M240 machine gun (see Figure 11-13). It is made of brass with a metal tip. It is
recommended for use over the plastic-tipped version. (The plastic tips can become bent and get jammed
either in the weapon or the feed chute.)
11-68. The M172 round is a Class V item that can be requisitioned using DA Form 581. (Table 11-20
contains information required for requisitioning this round.)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-23
Chapter 11

Nomenclature
DODIC
1305-A159
1305-A162
Cartridge, 25-mm Dummy M794 (Carton Packed)
1305-A966
Cartridge, 25-mm Dummy M794 (Linked)
1303-A967
Missile Simulation Round (MSR)
Figure 11-13. 7.62mm and 25mm dummy rounds
CAUTION
Missile Simulation Round

11-69. The missile simulation round (MSR) is used to train crews in all non-fire TOW-related tasks. It is
a dummy TOW round casing. It comes in a crate the same as an actual round. The MSR simulates the
actual weight of a real TOW missile. Although the MSR does not have a diaphragm or humidity indicator,
it does have a front cover and a forward handling ring. It is a nonexpendable major-end item that can be
requisitioned through the supply system.
11-70. If the guide lugs or the electrical connector on the MSR are damaged, the round should not be
used. Continued use of a damaged round will cause damage to the launcher.
11-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices

11-71. Dummy rounds can be used to train several of the tasks that are part of the GST (Appendix B,
Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation, contains the Bradley crew GST).
z
Load and unload the high-explosive (HE) and antipersonnel (AP) ready boxes, load the 25-mm
feeder, apply immediate action on the 25mm, and unload and clear the 25-mm gun.
z
Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the M240-series machine guns.
z
TOW trainingupload the BFV, upload the TOW launcher, apply immediate action on the TOW
subsystem, remove a misfire TOW, unload and stow a TOW to its storage configuration.
DEVICES
PRECISION GUNNERY SYSTEM
11-72. The PGS is an eye-safe laser simulation device that provides normal- and degraded-mode gunnery
on unit vehicles. The system allows crews to develop and sustain gunnery skills while training using their
own vehicles. All weapons and ammunition are duplicated in simulation by replicating tracer and missile
signatures in the commander and gunners sights. This allows crews to apply lead, BOT, and TOT
procedures during engagements. The PGS is fully compatible on MILES-equipped ranges, vehicles, and
targets on the MILES battlefield (see Table 11-21 and Figure 11-14).
Table 11-21. Precision Gunnery System usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-25
Chapter 11
Figure 11-14. Precision Gunnery System

11-73. The system can send and receive hit, kill, and miss signals from other PGS- or MILES-equipped
vehicles. A mounting reconfiguration allows the TOW to be fired in simulation while the 25-mm and coax
are fired live. The PGS provides vehicle crew evaluator (VCE) the ability to review engagements during
the AAR process. It displays ballistic information for each round fired. This information identifies
placement of each simulated round in relation to the target, in mils, both in azimuth and elevation. (TM
9-6920-711-12&P and TM 9-6920-710-12&P provide additional information.)
11-74. The M2/M3A3 PGS is a vehicle-mounted training device that assists the BFV crew in gaining and
improving proficiency in gunnery skills without the expenditure of live ammunition. Gunnery and tactical
training can be conducted wherever an eye-safe laser is permitted. The BFVA3 PGS provides the crew
with the visual and sound effects that simulate real-world firing conditions. The BFVA3 PGS provides full
fire control interface by interfacing system controls into the vehicles Training Device Interface Panel
(TDIP).
PGS Training Integration

11-75. PGS is the preferred device for the BFV for use on device-based gunnery training in crew and
collective gunnery. It can be incorporated into device-based gunnery tables to include Tables I, II, VII,
VIII, X, and XI.

11-76. The BATS is the virtual gunnery trainer for the BFVA3. The purpose of the BATS is to train and
sustain a crews ability to perform fundamental gunnery techniques in simulated gunnery and combat
scenarios.
11-26
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
BRADLEY ADVANCED TRAINING SYSTEM

BATS Capabilities and Limitations
11-77. BATS provides sustainment and cross-training programs to train crews in a simulated gunnery or
combat mode (see Table 11-22). The BATS provides battle-focused training in the gunnery mode through
the use of panel targets (IAW TC 25-8), range markers, ammunition allocation, and evaluation standards.
The BATS provides realistic training in the combat mode by presenting realistic target models. Target
destruction is accomplished by realistic probability of hit (PH)/probability of kill (PK), based on range and
type. Engagement parameters are input to support a specific units threat template and mission-essential
task list (METL).
Table 11-22. Bradley Advanced Training System usage table
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
BATS Training Integration

11-78. BATS is the primary virtual trainer for crews of the BFVA3 for individual gunnery training and
gunnery skills sustainment training. It is also a useful tool for retraining crews that require it in the crew
gunnery phase. BATS training builds the foundation of VC/gunner coordination and trains the crew on
engagement techniques for precision and degraded modes of gunnery in offensive and defensive postures
in a variety of environments. It trains in all elements of the engagement process.
ADVANCED BRADLEY FULL-CREW INTERACTIVE SIMULATOR TRAINER

11-79. The AB-FIST is an appended Bradley gunnery training device for use on a powerless, stationary,
sheltered, BFV ODS and below. With the AB-FIST, BFV crews can conduct Bradley gunnery training
using the actual switches and controls of the BFV. The AB-FIST is a fully deployable, full-crew, highfidelity training system capable of training and sustaining precision and battlesight gunnery. The AB-FIST
incorporates the entire BFV crew that enhances crew coordination (see Figure 11-15).
Figure 11-15. Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-27
Chapter 11
AB-FIST Capabilities and Limitations

System Capabilities
11-80. The AB-FIST trains target acquisition, identification, driving, and engagement skills for the BFV
crew, section, and platoon. It has the capability of simulating use of both primary and alternate fire controls
and sighting systems against mobile and stationary threats, single and multiple target arrays, in a realistic
battlefield environment during day, night, and reduced visibility conditions in a European, desert or urban
environments. It is a network-capable system that can be linked together or with the systemsCOFT XXI,
TFT, A-FIST XXI, and Virtual Convoy Combat Trainer (VCCT), to conduct combined arms training and
mission rehearsal. The AB-FIST provides realistic training in the combat mode by presenting realistic
target models (vehicles IAW ROC-V 9.1). All ammunition characteristics are correct IAW the applicable
firing table (FT). The databases provided by the AB-FIST are European (summer and winter), desert,
urban (Zussman urban site and geo-specific Baghdad). The AB-FISTs crew records are transferable to the
TFT, and COFT XXI by either 3.5 floppy disk or writable compact disc.
Limitations
11-81. The AB-FIST can be operated in any facility in a 35 x 20 area with 16 feet of overhead
clearance. Power required to operate the system is 115 Vac, 60 Hz, on a 30-amp circuit with a L5-30R
receptacle within 50 of the IOS. It can also be powered by a single-phase generator 115 Vac, 60 Hz, 30amp within 70 feet of the IOS. There are no other operating limitations except those environmental
considerations that affect the facility.
AB-FIST Training Integration

11-82. AB-FIST training should be incorporated into the virtual gunnery training program of the unit. It
is designed to train or sustain gunnery proficiency of crews by successfully completing exercises that
require the performance of gunnery tasks under conditions similar to those encountered in combat.
M2 ODS TABLETOP FULL-FIDELITY TRAINER

11-83. The M2A2 ODS TFT is a fully deployable training system capable of training and sustaining
precision and battlesight gunnery (see Figure 11-16). The size of this system makes it ideal for deployment
to remote sites by units equipped with M2A2 ODS BFVs. The TFT simulates the vehicles primary fire
control and sighting equipment, which are used against aerial and mobile/stationary ground targets in a
realistic battlefield environment. The trainer evaluates commander/gunner performances and provides
feedback to the crew as the training progresses.
Figure 11-16. Tabletop Full-Fidelity Trainer
11-28
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices

11-84. The TFT consists of tabletop components, including a commanders station, weapons station,
gunners station, and instructors station. Its key features are
z
Deploys inside five two-man carry containers.
z
Easily transports in a HMMWV, van, or pickup truck.
z
Uses standard 110V or 220V power.
z
Can operate in a small tent powered by a standard Army field generator.
z
Crew records are transferable to the AB-FIST and COFT XXI by 3.5 floppy disc or writeable
compact disc.
z
Realistic vehicle models (IAW ROC-V 9.1).
z
All ammunition flight characteristics are correct IAW the applicable FT.
11-85. The TFT has no means to conduct engagements using the manual hand wheels. Engagements that
would be conducted in the manual mode are defaulted to commanders engagements.
TFT Training Integration

11-86. The TFT is not the primary BFV virtual gunnery trainer; however, it provides sustainment and
cross-training programs to train crews in a simulated gunnery or combat mode. Because it is easily
transportable and deployable, it can be used to sustain critical gunnery skills while deployed.
SECTION V ARMED HMMWV TADSS

11-87. This section describes TADSS that are specific to the M1025-/1026-series, M1114 and M1151
armed HMMWVs. These TADSS are also applicable to a wide range of sustainment support units and
elements to supplement their gunnery training program.
TRAINING AIDS
DUMMY ROUNDS
11-88. Various dummy rounds are available to conduct training with the MK19 machine gun, M2 HB
machine gun, and M240 machine gun (see Table 11-23 and Figure 11-17).
Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-29
Chapter 11
Figure 11-17. Dummy rounds
VM922/M922A1 Dummy Round (40mm)

11-89. The M922/M922A1dummy round is a 40-mm inert cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It
is used for non-fire training with the MK19 machine gun. It is made of brass with a brass projectile (inert).
The links can become damaged or rusty and should be changed as often as possible.
11-90. The M922/M922A1 dummy round is a Class V item and can be requisitioned with DA Form 581.
(Table 11-24 contains information required for requisitioning the M2 dummy round.)
M2 Dummy Round (Caliber .50)

11-91. The M2 dummy round is a caliber .50 cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for
non-fire training with the M2 HB machine gun. It is made of brass with a metal tip. The links can become
damaged or rusty and should be changed as often as possible.
11-92. The M2 dummy round is a Class V item and can be requisitioned with DA Form 581. (Table 1124 contains information required for requisitioning the M2 dummy round.)
11-30
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
M172 Dummy Round (7.62mm)

11-93. The M172 dummy round is a 7.62-mm cartridge, minus the gun powder and primer. It is used for
non-fire training with the M240 machine gun. It is made of brass with a metal tip. It is recommended for
use over the plastic-tipped version. (The plastic tips can become bent and get jammed either in the weapon
or the feed chute.)
11-94. The M172 dummy round is a Class V item that can be requisitioned using DA Form 581. (Table
11-24 contains information required for requisitioning this round.)
Nomenclature
DODIC
A159
A162
Cartridge, Caliber .50 Dummy M2
A560
Cartridge, 40-mm Dummy M922/M922A1
B472

11-95. Dummy rounds can be used to train several of the tasks that are part of the GST (Appendix C,
Armed HMMWV Live-Fire Preparation, contains the armed HMMWV crew GST).
z
Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the M2 machine gun.
z
Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the MK19 grenade machine gun.
z
Load, fire, apply immediate action, unload, and clear the M240-series machine guns.
CAUTION

VIRTUAL CONVOY COMBAT TRAINER
11-96. The VCCT is a virtual training system used to train drivers and gunners of military vehicles how
to identify a potential ambush, identify improvised explosive devices (IED), avoid an ambush, return fire,
maneuver and react appropriately in the operating environment (OE). Recent combat operations have
demonstrated the need for convoy combat training. For the active component, the VCCT is an interim fix
until the CCTT-RVS is available in sufficient quantities to meet training requirements. The Army has
purchased two variants of the VCCT (the VCCT-L [Lockheed] and the VCCT-R [Raydon]) with slightly
different characteristics and capabilities (see Table 11-25 and Figure 11-18, Figure 11-19, and Figure
11-20).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-31
Chapter 11
Table 11-25. Virtual Convoy Combat Trainer

Individual
Crew
Collective
INDIVIDUAL
INSTRUCTION
GST
GT
I
GATE
TO
LIVE
FIRE
GT
II
GT
III
GT
IV
GT
V
GT
VI
GT
VII
GT
VIII
GT
IX
GT
X
GT
XI
GT
XII
Figure 11-18. VCCT-R (configuration 1)
Figure 11-19. VCCT-R (configuration 2)
11-32
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
Figure 11-20. VCCT-L
VCCT Capabilities and Limitations

VCCT-L Characteristics and Capabilities
11-97. The VCCT-L comes in either a fixed site or mobile configuration. The mobile configuration has
one vehicle simulator per trailer. The fixed sight configuration is designed around four vehicle simulators.
11-98. The VCCT variant L has the following characteristics and capabilities:
z
Trains soldiers in basic and advanced convoy skills using variable terrain and roads in a variety
of weather, visibility, and vehicle-operational conditions.
z
Incorporates small arms and crew-served weapons.
z
Provides mission-preview/mission-rehearsal capability.
z
Trains general and specific driving and engagement skills.
z
Provides a collective, immersive virtual environment with precision weapons engagement
system.
z
Leverages CCTT vehicular software, databases, and AAR.
z
Reacts to contact, call for fire, and close air support.
VCCT-R Characteristics and Capabilities
11-99. The VCCT variant R is contained in two 53-foot trailers. The top layout represents the CrewStation Trailer (CST) that houses three crew trainers. The bottom layout represents the AAR trailer that
houses one crew trainer and the two IOS/AAR stations, plus a group viewing area.
11-100. The VCCT-R has the following characteristics and capabilities:
z
Realistic Vehicle Simulation.
Wheeled vehicle dynamics.
Collision detection.
Engine and transmission simulation.
Vehicle sound effects.

z
Realistic Weapons Simulation.
Rifle M-4.
Caliber .50 machine gun.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-33
Chapter 11
Weapon sound effects (fire, impact).

Accurate ballistics calculations (Army Materiel Systems Analysis Activity [AMSAA]
tables).
VCCT Training Integration

11-101. The VCCT, while primarily a collective convoy engagement training tool, can be integrated into
the virtual training for all phases of gunnery for armed HMWWVs and sustainment units. The system
provides training for collective tasks and fire distribution and control.
VIRTUAL CONVOY OPERATIONS TRAINER

11-102. The Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer (VCOT) provides training for combat convoys under
realistic conditions. VCOT ensures that Soldiers are trained to anticipate ambushes and other enemy
actions from all possible directions by allowing the crew to observe, maneuver, and fire their weapons
through a full 360-degree circumference (see Figure 11-21).
Figure 11-21. Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer

11-103. The VCOT system has the flexibility to allow users to choose a vehicle mix for their convoy, the
weapon system employed on each vehicle, the routes along which the convoy will travel, and the type and
strength of enemy activity along the convoy route. The VCOT may be operated either as a collective
training system where all crew stations operate together or as a gunnery trainer where crew stations operate
independently.
11-104. The VCOT is comprised of five VCOT crew stations networked with an IOS/AAR station. The
IOS/AAR station allows for management of a running exercise and review of a completed training mission.
11-34
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Training Devices
11-105. Three types of virtual crew stations are used:

z
Level 1, Crew Station. Comprised of an actual HMMWV vehicle, appended with training
equipment to provide high-fidelity training for a HMMWV gunner and driver.
z
Level 2, Crew Station. A higher fidelity device providing positions for the HMMWV gunner,
driver, and commander.
z
Level 3, Crew Station. Consists of tabletop-mounted equipment, and providing positions for
the gunner and driver for any of three simulated vehiclesAbrams tank, BFV, and HMMWV.
11-106. The VCOT is supplied with up to four different terrain databases:
z
Zussman, a small geo-specific urban area used for initial gunnery training.
z
Baghdad, which provides a large urban training environment.
z
A generic desert area.
z
A generic European area.
VCOT Training Integration

11-107. The VCOT can be used for training individual and collective gunnery skills for armed HMWWVs.
It can also be used for collective virtual training of heavy and light vehicles integrated into combined arms
platoons and sections.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
11-35
Chapter 12
Gunnery Training Program

Chapter 12 provides guidelines for the development of a gunnery training program
that is designed to produce qualified crews, sections and platoons by training critical
skills that facilitate crew- through platoon-level teamwork. Further, it covers the
strategy and training plans derived from the gunnery training program development
process.
Gunnery training programs should be developed to follow a logical progression of
training, conducted in three phasesindividual, crew, and collective gunnery.
z
Individual. The individual gunnery phase trains individual crewman on crewlevel skills, using classroom and home-station training in conjunction with the
Gunnery Skills Test (GST).
z
Crew. The crew gunnery phase develops crew skills on Tables I, II, III, IV, and
V and culminates in crew qualification on Table VI.
z
Collective. The collective gunnery phase develops section and platoon
coordination and fire control and distribution on Tables VII, VIII, X and XI.
Culminating in section and platoon qualifications on Tables IX and XII. There
are also guidelines for executing a company-level combined arms live-fire
exercise (CALFEX) with organic indirect fire and sustainment unit support.
The success or lack of success of any training program will be the direct result of the
amount of time, effort, and emphasis placed into the development of the program.
Keep in mind that this chapter gives commanders and trainers a guide by which to
base a training program, but it does not limit the ability to create innovative
variations built upon this framework.
Contents
Section I Training Assessment ........... 12-2
Essential Warfighting Skills .............. 12-2
Battle Focus ..................................... 12-2
Mission-Essential Task List .............. 12-3
Commanders Assessment ............... 12-3
Section II Training Strategy................. 12-4
Gunnery Tables ................................ 12-4
Individual Gunnery Phase ................ 12-5
Crew Gunnery Phase ....................... 12-7
Collective Gunnery Phase ................ 12-8
Cross-Training Strategy.................... 12-9
Integrated Training Strategy ............. 12-9
3 September 2009
Section III Commanders Guidance .. 12-17

Training Goals ................................ 12-17
Training Requirements ................... 12-17
Section IV Training Plans .................. 12-18
Gunnery Training ............................ 12-18
Long-Range Training Plans ............ 12-20
Short-Range Training Plans............ 12-21
Near-Term Training Plans .............. 12-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-1
Chapter 12
SECTION I TRAINING ASSESSMENT
ESSENTIAL WARFIGHTING SKILLS

12-1. Crews must achieve proficiency in certain skills critical to maintaining their warfighting capabilities.
The first nine listed below apply to all platform systems. The rest apply to specific training requirements
based on variations in the vehicles capabilities and systems:
z
All platform systems:
Engaging stationary and moving targets from a stationary and moving combat vehicle.
Engaging targets in a chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) environment.
Engaging targets at night.
Engaging targets from a short halt.
Detecting, identifying, classifying, and discriminating targets as friendly, neutral, or threat.
Acquiring and engaging targets in an urban, woodland, or desert environment.
Calling for indirect fire.
Calling for medical evacuation (MEDEVAC).
Calling for support.
Engaging targets under digital conditions (applies to digitally equipped platforms only).
Engage targets using the appropriate technique for the target type (see Chapter 8).
Engaging multiple and successive targets.

z
Abrams and Bradley:
Engaging multiple targets using the auxiliary sight.
Engaging targets using manual controls.
Engaging multiple targets with multiple weapon systems from multiple stations.
Engaging multiple and successive targets requiring different ammunition types.
Engaging targets using hunter-killer techniques.
Conducting a fire mission task (applies to Bradley Fire Support Team [BFIST] and
reconnaissance only).
12-2. Sections and platoons must achieve proficiency in the following skills:
z
Executing collective tasks as a section or platoon.
z
Engaging multiple targets utilizing fire control and distribution.
z
Engaging targets while maneuvering as a section or platoon.
z
Using digital capabilities during a tactical scenario.
z
Maintaining situational awareness (SA) and ensuring personnel protection.
BATTLE FOCUS
12-3. Battle focus is a concept for deriving peace-time training requirements from war-time missions.
Battle focus guides the planning, execution, and assessment of each units training program. This is to
ensure that its members train as they fight. The battle-focus process is the same for active component (AC)
and reserve component (RC) units (both modified table of organization and equipment [MTOE] and table
of distribution and allowances [TDA]). FM 7-0 explains how to plan, resource, and execute training events.
This manual provides the gunnery principles and standards to evaluate crew, section and platoon training.
12-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
MISSION-ESSENTIAL TASK LIST

12-4. A units training program must support the mission-essential task list (METL); therefore, time,
resources, and command emphasis must all focus on training tasks that support the METL. Platoon
sergeants and squad leaders should use the appropriate critical task list to identify the individual tasks that
support the collective tasks. To develop the METL, the commander must know and understand the war
plans and external directives handed down from the higher headquarters.
z
War Plans. The most critical parts of METL development are the units war-time operations
and contingency plans. The missions and related information in these plans provide the keys to
determining essential training tasks. From each war plan, the commander selects each mission
that his unit is expected to execute in combat.
z
External Directives. Additional training tasks relevant to the units war-time mission derive
from external directives. Such directives could include
Mobilization plans.
Installation war-time transition and development plans.
Force-integration plans.
z
Task List. Once the commander lists all possible tasks, the commander identifies those that are
most critical to success on the battlefield. This refined list becomes the METL.
COMMANDERS ASSESSMENT
12-5. Gunnery training must be well-designed and continuous for units to achieve, improve, and sustain
gunnery proficiency. Each commander must continually assess their units previous performance, current
level of training and state of weapon and weapon platform maintenance to determine its level of
proficiency in gunnery. Then, they must train their unit to produce skilled crewmen, crews, and platoons.
The Master Gunner should advise the commander and assess, plan, develop, implement, instruct, evaluate,
and reassess all phases of gunnery training. The commanders ongoing assessment is crucial to gunnery
program development and where the team effort should be demonstrated most.
12-6. The following factors must be considered during the assessment:
z
Level of maintenance within the unit.
z
Evaluate previous training. The commander assesses training with input from the executive
officer (XO), S-3, subordinate leaders, and Master Gunners (see FM 7-0). He can use individual
and crew training to determine the units proficiency.
Individual. Common task test results show basic individual training proficiency. The GST
evaluates specific platform-related individual proficiency. Individual weapons training and
qualification scores indicate proficiency levels with the various weapons organic to the
squads and platoon.
Crew. Crew training proficiency can be measured by reviewing simulations unit

summaries along with performance analyses. Crew gunnery results and evaluation sheets
from the last gunnery period provide additional field-oriented data, which also help the
commander to determine training requirements.
Collective. Collective training proficiency can be measured by reviewing past collective

gunnery, Combat Training Center (CTC), and field training exercises (FTX) results.
Tactical simulations (Close Combat Tactical Trainer [CCTT], Simulation Network
[SIMNET]) data may be used to support this assessment.
z
Crew turbulence.
z
Training days available.
z
Training dollars available.
z
Resources available.
z
The units specific METL.
z
Past strengths and weaknesses within the unit.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-3
Chapter 12
z
z
z
Availability of experienced and proficient crewmen, capable of peer training.

Who will be the primary trainer for the gunnery program?
Evaluation. The commander uses specific standards to measure the demonstrated abilities of
individuals and crews. Accurate evaluations are necessary to identify where to place training
emphasis. Leaders must make on-the-spot corrections and demand aggressive action to correct
training deficiencies. Crew-level simulations results are also good indicators of crew
proficiency.
Informal. Unit leaders evaluate performance informally during training.
Formal. The commander schedules a dedicated evaluator on either the long-range or shortrange training plan.
Internal. The evaluated unit plans, resources, and conducts their own evaluations.
External. Higher headquarters or another unit plans, resources, and conducts a unit
evaluation.
SECTION II TRAINING STRATEGY
GUNNERY TABLES
12-7. Table 12-1 lists the gunnery tables (GT) that support the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT)
gunnery training strategy by platform system and the gunnery phase in which they are conducted.
Table 12-1. Gunnery tables
Gunnery
Phase
CREW
COLLECTIVE
12-4
Tank/Bradley Tables
Armed Vehicle Tables
Rifle Squad Tables
GT I, Crew Critical Skills

Table
GT I, Crew Critical Skills

Table
GT I, Buddy-Team Fire
and Movement Exercise
GT II, Crew Proficiency

Course (CPC)
GT II, Crew Proficiency

Course (CPC)
GT II, Fire Team

Maneuver Exercise
GT III, Basic Machine

Gun
GT III, Basic Machine

Gun
GT III, Squad Battle Drill

Exercises
GT IV, Basic Main Gun
GT IV, Basic Extended

Range Machine Gun
GT IV, Squad Situational

Training Exercises (STX)
GT V, Basic Crew
Practice
GT V, Basic Crew
Practice
GT V, Squad Practice
GT VI, Basic Crew

Qualification
GT VI, Basic Crew

Qualification
GT VI, Squad
Qualification
GT VII, Section
Proficiency Exercise
GT VII, Section
GT VIII, Section Practice
GT VIII, Section Practice
GT IX, Section
Qualification
GT IX, Section
Qualification
GT X, Platoon Proficiency
Exercise
GT X, Convoy/Platoon
CT XI, Platoon Practice
GT XI, Convoy/Platoon
Practice
GT XII, Platoon
Qualification
GT XII, Convoy/Platoon
Qualification
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Note. Collective gunnery

for the Rifle Squad is
conducted in conjunction
with their BFV crew on GT
VII through GT XII.
3 September 2009
INDIVIDUAL GUNNERY PHASE

12-8. The individual gunnery phase develops individual and crew skills needed to operate the vehicle and
turret weapon systems. Individual gunnery training focuses on the technical aspects of gun theory, turret
operations, gunnery techniques, virtual and crew simulations training, and device-based training. The
trainers use classroom instruction, hands-on training and crew gunnery simulators to provide each crew
member with knowledge of the capabilities, limitations, and characteristics of the vehicle, as well as
training.
VIRTUAL TRAINING
12-9. Crew members will conduct virtual gunnery training during the individual gunnery phase using crew
gunnery simulators to train the vehicle commander (VC) and gunner on individual and crew-coordination
skills. Training can also include other driver/loader tasks, such as announcing of vehicle and tubelaunched, optically tracked, wire-guided (TOW) launcher status (up and down).
Crew Simulation Training

12-10. Crew simulation training focuses on the VC and gunner. There are three training categories of
crews:
z
New. Either the VC, gunner, or both are new to their position.
z
Turbulent. Both the VC and gunner have previously held the position they are in, but have not
worked together as a crew.
z
Sustainment. The VC and gunner have previously qualified together as a crew.
New and Turbulent Crews

12-11. New and turbulent crews should be evaluated to determine their initial proficiency based on
gunnery parameters. Is the crew proficient engaging
z
Stationary targets from a stationary vehicle?
z
Moving targets from a stationary vehicle?
z
Stationary targets from a moving vehicle?
z
Moving targets from a moving vehicle?
z
Multiple targets?
12-12. Once a crews initial proficiency level is established, they should be placed in the simulators
instructional subsystem accordingly. These crews will execute training sessions throughout the individual
gunnery phase to prepare them for live-fire in the crew gunnery phase. The crew will execute the
prerequisite to live-fire exercise for their respective simulator system prior to the crew phase.
Sustainment Crews
12-13. After the crew has qualified Table VI on their weapon platform during a previous gunnery density,
they will be categorized as a sustainment crew. Sustainment crews already have a location in the
instructional subsystem from the last gunnery. These crews should continue from that location during the
individual gunnery phase, improving on their weaknesses and sustaining their strengths. These crews will
continue to utilize the simulator system a minimum of four hours per month (Abrams/Bradley) as directed
in AR 350-1, DA PAM 350-38, and local training regulations. The crew will execute the prerequisite-gateto-live-fire exercise for their simulator system again prior to the crew phase.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-5
Chapter 12
Gate to Live-Fire
12-14. Each simulator has a different instructional subsystem with a prescribed exercise that will be
passed as a prerequisite to firing live ammunition. These exercises are recommended minimum
requirements driven by the Combined Arms Training Strategies (CATS) for each proponent. The purpose
of these exercises is to ensure the crew possesses the skills and experience necessary to safely execute livefire gunnery. It is required that crews conduct four hours of simulation training per month to achieve this.
The prerequisite exercises are listed in Table 12-2 for each simulator system.
Table 12-2. Crew gunnery simulations prerequisites for live-fire
System
Gate-to-Live-Fire Exercise
EST 2000
*Commander determined*
C-AGTS/AGTS
Gate-to-Live-Fire
AFIST XXI
Gate-to-Live-Fire
BFV COFT
MPL
BATS
MPL
AB-FIST/COFT XXI
204
DEVICE-BASED TRAINING
12-15. Crew members will conduct constructive gunnery training during the individual phase using
training devices that allow crews to practice and refine their collective skills on their vehicles. Crews learn
fundamentals of turret manipulation, gun lay, and tracking for all platform systems. At this point,
individual crew duties and actions are integrated, and crews perform as a team. The crews abilities are
evaluated during the crew proficiency course for their platform weapon system.
12-16. Figure 12-1 is a flowchart that outlines the progressive training requirements conducted during the
individual gunnery phase.
12-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 12-1. Sample six month gunnery training plan
CREW GUNNERY PHASE

12-17. The crew gunnery phase trains crew skills developed in individual gunnery and evaluates the
crews proficiency during crew qualification. Crew gunnery training focuses on crew coordination and the
direct fire engagement process. The crew gunnery phase is conducted primarily using the live training
method however, qualification tables must be conducted live using full-caliber ammunition for all weapon
systems platforms. The commander may choose to use device-based training to conduct practice tables;
Device-based gunnery includes Table II Crew Proficiency Course (CPC). This table is conducted in local
training areas or ranges using Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES) or Precision
Gunnery System (PGS). PGS is the primary device for Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) gunnery training.
Thru-Sight Video (TSV) enhances this training with its ability to provide recorded feedback on target
acquisition, sight picture and engagement technique. See Chapter 11 for complete characteristics. The
commander may choose to use the live training method for the CPC firing subcaliber ammunition
providing crews conduct a dry run first to demonstrate mastery of the basic skills and safety principles.
This includes firing of subcaliber devices. Once Table II CPC has been completed and qualified dry, the
commander may refire Table II CPC with full caliber ammunition if the range and ammunition resourcing
permits.
12-18. Additional virtual and/or device-based training may be necessary for crews during this phase to
facilitate successful completion. Additional resourcing for retraining may not be available for all units.
When this occurs, subcaliber devices and simulations may be used for all tables except the qualification
table.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-7
Chapter 12
12-19. Abrams crews are encouraged to conduct individual (authorized tables only) gunnery utilizing the
caliber .50 inbore device. This will require the crew to exercise all components of the fire control system.
VIRTUAL TRAINING
12-20. Crews may continue to conduct virtual gunnery training during the crew gunnery phase using
crew gunnery simulators to train the VC and gunner on crew-coordination skills. Crew weaknesses
identified during the conduct of crew GTs may be addressed using crew simulators if time and resources
permit.
12-21. Crews may conduct device-based gunnery training on practice tables during the crew phase using
training devices. It is recommended that crews use the live training method for all crew GTs and reserve
the device-based method for skills that require additional training. Device based training is not authorized
for any qualification table.
LIVE TRAINING
12-22. Crews will conduct crew qualification using the live training method with full-caliber ammunition
on a full-scale range. Practice tables are fully resourced and are fired using the live training method as well.
COLLECTIVE GUNNERY PHASE

12-23. The collective gunnery phase trains squad, section, and platoon leaders and company commanders
to fight their maneuver element and enhances the crews gunnery skills by applying them during tactical
scenarios as part of a section or platoon. Collective gunnery training focuses on accomplishing collective
tasks in support of a maneuver elements mission.
12-24. The collective gunnery phase is conducted using the device-based training method for proficiency
exercises and practice tables. The live training method is required for all qualification tables. Qualification
tables must be conducted live using full-caliber ammunition for all weapon systems platforms. Additional
virtual and/or device-based training may be necessary for sections and platoons during this phase to
facilitate successful completion.
12-25. Collective phase gunnery includes Table VII through Table XII for all platform systems.
Company-level CALFEXs may be executed if time and resources permit.
VIRTUAL TRAINING
12-26. Maneuver elements should conduct virtual gunnery training before and during the collective
gunnery phase using tactical training simulators to train the leaders on controlling their elements
maneuver and fires. Simulators allow training for both pure and combined arms maneuver. The trainers
have all crew member stations; however, squad leaders may only participate in a limited role.
12-27. Maneuver elements may conduct device based gunnery training on practice tables during the
collective phase using training devices. It is recommended that maneuver elements conduct the proficiency
exercise prior to practice and qualification when executing the training as a mixed or combined arms
element.
LIVE TRAINING
12-28. Maneuver elements will conduct qualification using the live training method with full-caliber
ammunition on a full-scale range. Abrams elements are allocated subcaliber ammunition for practice tables
and may fire these tables live. A CALFEX is resourced for company-level training and should incorporate
indirect fire support, air/ground integration, sustainment unit support elements.
12-29. If commanders elect to fire combined arms platoons, each section must qualify GT IX prior to
conducting a GT X, XI or XII.
12-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CROSS-TRAINING STRATEGY
12-30. The commander, platoon leaders, first sergeant, and platoon sergeants manage training to ensure
every Soldier is trained on individual and collective tasks for both crew and squad skills, regardless of duty
position. The unit-training program must focus on developing tough, combat-ready platoons with a
balanced, simultaneous, integrated squad and crew plan.
12-31. During individual and crew gunnery training, cross training occurs often to counter inevitable
peacetime personnel changes or combat personnel losses. Cross training incorporates both the crew and
squad, sustaining basic crew skills and providing additional training for the squad in case they must
perform as a vehicle crewman. Cross training improves coordination between the crew and the squad. For
BFVs, alternate crews are required to train regularly in crew gunnery simulation, conduct crew device
gunnery, and take the GST. Additionally, the platoon leaders backup crew is resourced to fire crew
gunnery.
INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY

12-32. Units must ensure collective training integrates all Soldiers in the platoon. The platoon sergeant,
squad leaders, and VCs, in coordination with the platoon leader, are the principle trainers for the collective
skills of integrated vehicle teams, squads, sections, and platoon. Primary references include this manual
and appropriate collective tasks.
12-33. Figure 12-2 through Figure 12-8 are flow charts that demonstrate gunnery training progression.
The grey dotted lines on each flow chart depict the approximate transition point to the next gunnery phase:
z
Individual to crew gunnery.
z
Crew to collective gunnery.
12-34. Although the flow chart sequences events, units may be required to conduct some events out of
sequence or simultaneously based on time and resource availability (for example, maneuver/range training
area).
12-35. Prerequisite training events must be conducted prior to the requisite event (for example, Table II
prior to Table VI); these are denoted in the training strategy flow charts with an asterisk beside the event.
12-36. It is important that the brigade commander and combined-arms battalion commanders, as well as
Master Gunners, within the HBCT understand each of the following training strategies so they may better
integrate the sections and platoons into their collective gunnery training.
z
Abrams training strategy.
z
Mechanized infantry training strategy.
z
Reconnaissance integrated training strategy.
z
Combat engineer integrated training strategy.
z
Fire support team training strategy.
z
Mortar integrated training strategy.
z
Sustainment unit training strategy.
ABRAMS TRAINING STRATEGY

12-37. Figure 12-2 outlines a logical progression of events that a tank platoon can adapt to their training
strategy. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in
after action reviews (AAR). Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future
training requirements.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-9
Chapter 12
Figure 12-2. Abrams training strategy
BRADLEY AND RIFLE SQUAD INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY

12-38. Figure 12-3 outlines a logical progression of events that a mechanized infantry platoon can adapt
to their training strategy. Rifle squads and Bradley crews are dual-tracked to focus on their specific training
needs. Both tracks must be integrated to develop a mechanized infantry platoon that fights as one unit.
Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in AARs.
Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements.
12-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 12-3. Mechanized infantry training strategy
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-11
Chapter 12
RECONNAISSANCE INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY

12-39. Figure 12-4 outlines a logical progression of events that a reconnaissance platoon can adapt to
their training strategy. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards
discussed in AARs. Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training
requirements.
Figure 12-4. Reconnaissance integrated training strategy
12-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
COMBAT ENGINEER INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY

12-40. Figure 12-5 outlines a logical progression of events that an engineer platoon can adapt to their
training strategy. Engineer squads and the Bradley crews are dual-tracked to focus on their specific training
needs. Both tracks must be integrated to develop an engineer platoon that fights as one unit. Individual and
collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in AARs. Objective
evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements.
Figure 12-5. Combat engineer integrated training strategy
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-13
Chapter 12
FIRE SUPPORT TEAM TRAINING STRATEGY

12-41. Figure 12-6 outlines a logical progression of events that a fire support team can adapt to their
training strategy. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and
discussed in AARs. Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training
requirements. Currently, there is no BFIST crew gunnery simulator; however, BFIST crews may adapt
training to accommodate some of the M7 capabilities. As an example, the unit might place a handheld
terminal unit (HTU) in the turret and a line control unit (LCU) in the crew shelter for practicing fire
missions.
Figure 12-6. Fire support team training strategy
12-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
MORTAR INTEGRATED TRAINING STRATEGY

12-42. Figure 12-7 outlines a logical progression of events that a mortar platoon can adapt to their
training strategy. Mortar squads and the fire direction center (FDC) are dual-tracked to focus on their
specific training needs. Both tracks must be integrated to develop a mortar platoon that fights as one unit.
Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in AARs.
Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements.
12-43. Mortar gunnery training is covered in two manuals. FM 3-22.90 covers gunnery training for gun
crews and FM 3-22.91 covers gunnery training for the FDCs. Commanders should refer to these manuals
for more specific details on mortar gunnery. This will facilitate more effective incorporation of indirect fire
support during the collective phase of gunnery.
Figure 12-7. Mortar integrated training strategy
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-15
Chapter 12
SUSTAINMENT UNIT SUPPORT TRAINING STRATEGY

12-44. It is important that the brigade commander, reconnaissance squadron commander, and combined
arms battalion commanders, as well as Master Gunners, within the HBCT understand the sustainment
training strategy so they may better integrate sustainment elements into their collective gunnery training.
Figure 12-8 outlines a logical progression of events that a sustainment platoon can adapt to their training
strategy. Individual and collective training must be evaluated against specific standards and discussed in
AARs. Objective evaluations provide readiness indicators and determine future training requirements.
Figure 12-8. Sustainment training strategy
12-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SECTION III COMMANDERS GUIDANCE
TRAINING GOALS
12-45. Training goals will vary based on the assigned mission and commanders intent. The goal is to
create a training environment that is as realistic and demanding as possible with the resources available.
The following goals should be set to ensure successful training:
z
Set and enforce tough, but achievable standards. Tough standards will generate effective
training; loose standards will produce weak vehicle crews. The crews cannot be fooled; they
know when they have done well. Insist on repetition to achieve mastery.
z
Start early. All aspects of a training program must be thoroughly coordinated. Forecast
resources and maintenance assistance long before they are needed.
z
Be thorough. Avoid wasting resources and training opportunities. Give subordinates the
guidance and assets needed to train their crews, squads, sections, and platoons.
z
Be flexible. Continually update the training program to the changing needs of the unit. If
assessment and planning stop, the training program stagnates.
z
Train continually. Train at every opportunity, not just during an intensified period, to
get ready for qualification tables. Specialized high intensity training programs should be
used only to bring a unit up to a desired proficiency level; then train continually to maintain that
level.
12-46. Contingency plans and alternate methods of training should be identified in case the primary plan
cannot be executed. Training time is valuable and should not be lost due to unforeseen factors.
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
12-47. Training must conform to Army doctrine. The training requirements listed below must be trained
and completed to standard to ensure the ultimate success of the gunnery training plan.
z
Schedule crew/squad skills training monthly, concurrently with preventative maintenance
checks and services (PMCS), prepare-to-fire checks, armament accuracy checks (AAC)
(Abrams only), and tactical training.
z
All Soldiers assigned to a vehicle and platoon alternate crew members (infantry only) must pass
all GST tasks in the 3 months (6 months for RCs) before live fire.
z
Schedule gun tube recoil exercise and borescope semi-annually (Abrams).
z
Crews must meet or exceed the prerequisites to live-fire as established by AR 350-1 STRAC,
local regulations and the unit commander. (See Gate to Live-Fire under Section II, Training
Strategy for minimum requirements by system).
z
Digitally equipped units will conduct 50% of all engagements digitally during the crew GT.
z
Crews must pass all Table I tasks before conducting Table II CPC.
z
Crews must qualify on Table II before conducting crew GTs.
z
Crews must qualify on Table VI before conducting the collective GTs.
z
Squads must qualify on Rifle Squad Table VI (Engineer Qualification Table VIII for engineer
units) before conducting the collective GTs.
z
Armor and infantry sections must qualify on Table IX prior to conducting Table XII when firing
a GT XII.
z
Armor and infantry platoons must qualify on Table XII annually.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-17
Chapter 12
z
z
z
z
Reconnaissance platoons must qualify either as sections on Table IX or as a platoon on Table

XII annually.
Bradley commanders and gunners must have completed the TOW gunnery program to standard
before they can fire a live TOW missile.
GST evaluators must pass all GST tasks within one month before they evaluate a particular GST
station themselves.
All vehicle crew evaluators (VCE) must certify or recertify in accordance with (IAW) the VCE
certification program in the 3 months (6 months for RC) before live-fire.
Note. Commanders will have the flexibility to conduct their advance phase of gunnery as either
pure or combined arms sections and/or platoons. The first time a platoon leader conducts
collective gunnery, it should be with a pure platoon to demonstrate basic proficiency.
12-48. The commander develops his training strategy after assessing the strengths and weaknesses of his
unit. His strategy must focus on his METL, sustain his units strengths, and correct its weaknesses. He will
find that some tasks apply to all Soldiers, some apply only to the vehicle crews, and others apply only to
the Soldiers in squads. This requires an integrated training strategy. Gunnery progresses logically to
support crew training, leading the section or platoon up to a collective, tactical, live-fire evaluation during
section or platoon qualification.
SECTION IV TRAINING PLANS

12-49. Once the commander and his staff have developed his METL and thoroughly assessed training
proficiency, he begins the detailed process of developing a training plan.
GUNNERY TRAINING
MASTER GUNNER
12-50. The mission of the Master Gunner is to train the unit for gunnery and act as subject matter expert
for all weapon system platforms in the HBCT. The Master Gunner advises commanders at all echelons and
assists with the planning, development, execution, and evaluation of all gunnery-related training
(individual, crew, and collective).
12-51. The Master Gunner duties include
z
Assist the integration of newly assigned Soldiers.
Sets up or conducts initial skills training for new VCs or gunners.
Assists in training new crew members.
Trains and certifies vehicle crew evaluators.

z
Assists all elements in the unit concerning gunnery training.
z
Forecasts and manages ammunition.
z
Manages gunnery records, GST records, and crew rosters.
z
Sets up and oversees GST training and evaluates the results.
z
Coordinates and controls training device use.
z
If senior instructor/operator (SIO) qualified, he certifies and recertifies other
instructors/operators (IO) to conduct crew gunnery simulations training.
z
Plans and manages crew gunnery simulations training.
z
Trains crews on device gunnery (installation, boresighting and troubleshooting procedures, point
of aim, and maintenance).
12-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
z
Executes gunnery training (see Chapter 13, Range Operations).

Supervises live-fire ranges to make sure all standards are followed.
In a tactical environment, advises the commander of the tactical capabilities and limitations of
all platform weapon systems against threat systems (in coordination with the S-2).
Advises the commander on battle roster changes and crew turbulence impacts.
12-52. The Master Gunners formal training includes extensive training in vehicle maintenance; range
planning, preparation, and execution; and all phases of gunnery training. Though this chapter previously
discussed the main responsibilities of the Master Gunner, their scope changes depending on the level of
assignment.
z
Brigade Master Gunner. The Master Gunner assigned to brigade level must
Work closely with Master Gunners assigned to lower echelons to make sure standards are
uniform throughout training programs.
Develop the written certification test for VCEs.
Provide any new information on ways to improve crew training.
Coordinate with range-control personnel at the installation or major training area.
Help develop and upgrade range facilities.

z
Battalion Master Gunner. When assigned to battalion level, the Master Gunner must
Continue to train Master Gunners assigned to the battalion.
Help the battalion commander and command sergeant major select candidates for Master
Gunner School.
Develop new training techniques to improve crew training.
Coordinate with brigade for gunnery training assets.
Certify VCEs.
Certify GST evaluators IAW this manual.
Certify range safety personnel.
Manage ammunition resourcing.
Monitor company gunnery training plans.
Develop battalion level gunnery training plans.

z
Company Master Gunner. When assigned to company level, the Master Gunner must
Develop and execute the company-level gunnery training plan.
Help service the turret and weapon system as required.
Work with unit maintenance to correct turret problems.
Complete DA Form 2408-4, Weapon Record Data.
Coordinate with the battalion S-3 and battalion Master Gunner to secure company gunnery
training assets.
Train VCEs.
z
Platoon Master Gunner. When assigned to platoon level, the Master Gunner must
Make sure the platoon weapon system and turret are maintained.
Update the companys Master Gunner on the platoons crew training.
Help the companys Master Gunner with unit gunnery training.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-19
Chapter 12
MANAGING BATTLE ROSTER CHANGES

12-53. The greatest problem a commander must contend with in regards to gunnery when developing a
training plan is battle roster changes. The commander must plan short- or long-term solutions for reducing
it and controlling its effects. He must do this before he develops and executes his training plan.
z
Short-Term Solutions.
Change personnel as a crew rather than a single crewman. For example, if a staff sergeant
Bradley commander is promoted to platoon sergeant, then his entire crew moves with him.
This causes only one crew change rather than two.
Train an alternate for each position.

z
Long-Term Solutions.
Continually cross-train personnel for replacements. Experienced Soldiers are easier to train
than new Soldiers.
Form complete crews from new personnel who come into the unit.
LONG-RANGE TRAINING PLANS

12-54. Long-range planning synchronizes supporting units and agencies by allocating dedicated training
time for organizations and units to train on METL tasks. Long-range planning goes out to one year for AC
and three to five years for RC at the company level.
12-55. Each commander identifies training needs from his METL task-proficiency assessment. He sets
goals and forecasts or allocates resources to reach them. When considering his long-range plan, the
commander must answer several questions:
z
What is the current platoon proficiency level (crew and squad)? The answer to this question
depends on
Battle roster changes.
Performance during previous gunnery maneuver exercises and squad, section, and platoon
situational training exercises (STX) and live-fire exercises (LFX).
z
What are the performance goals for the platoons (proficiency level crews and squads must reach
to accomplish METL tasks)? Some goals include
Set a percentage of qualified marksmen, sharpshooters, and experts for AT4, Javelin, M16,
M203, M240B, M249, or other weapon systems that the unit uses.
Set a percentage of qualified, superior, and distinguished ratings for vehicle crews.
Obtain an overall rating of trained (T) on the appropriate collective GT.

z
What resources must we have, and where is the command emphasis?
Correct tasks that fall short of the standard.
Sustain proficiency in tasks that meet the standard.

z
What schools and training are needed to certify and train trainers?
Master gunners course.
Vehicle crew evaluators certification.
GST evaluator certification.
Instructor/operator courses within the unit.
Certification course for MILES or PGS device training.
12-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SHORT-RANGE TRAINING PLANS

12-56. Short-range planning defines in greater detail the broad guidance on training events and other
activities outlined in the commanders training guidance and depicted on the long-range calendar. Shortrange planning looks out from three to six months for AC and 12 to 20 months for RC. Resources
identified during long-range planning are allocated and prioritized during short-range planning. Command
training guidance is published to provide trainers detailed information on the training objective.
12-57. Gunnery resource considerations are ammunition, fuel and maintenance, range and maneuver area,
and training device availability.
z
Ammunition. Master gunners must carefully manage ammunition allocations. The battalion
Master Gunner forecasts ammunition needs well before the training event. For many reasons, the
ammunition authorization could fall short of the forecasted training requirement. Device gunnery
will not train proper boresight, zero, or gun-operation procedures and should be considered when
planning non-qualification tables. Once the Master Gunner knows the yearly ammunition
authorization, he allocates ammunition based on the commanders guidance and priority.
z
Fuel and Maintenance. An intensive vehicle technical inspection program should be instituted
prior to gunnery to ensure all vehicles are fully mission capable (FMC) with the goal of each
crew qualifying on their own vehicle.
z
Range and Maneuver Area. Include target and range-support personnel.
z
Short-Range Gunnery. Considerations include
Vehicle services.
Other mandatory training, or events prescribed by higher headquarters.
No training events (holidays, leaves, installation support).
Crew and squad training priorities and expected outcomes.
Leader, individual, and collective tasks associated with the training event.
Steps required in preparing trainers and evaluators.
Integration of crew and squad training on the training calendar.

z
Training Device Availability.
Crew training. The crew practices with MILES, PGS, and/or caliber .50 inbore device.
MILES, however, is unsuitable for moving target engagements on vehicles with no
kinematic lead because it does not require the gunner to apply lead to engage a target.
MILES is also unsuitable for training burst on target (BOT), tracer on target (TOT), and
manual range index adjustment. Consequently, the commander must develop a strategy to
train with resources available. These strategies can include
Crew rehearsals and chair drills.
Conduct qualification refires and additional training.
Resource additional ammunition to new crews.
Increase device-based training.
Increase use of crew gunnery simulators.
Squad training.
Conduct weapons qualification.
Dry fire or use MILES on STX lanes.
Conduct a squad and platoon LFX.
Conduct LFX re-fires and additional training.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-21
Chapter 12
Section and platoon training. The section and platoon practices with MILES, PGS
(primary device for BFV gunnery training), and/or caliber .50 inbore device. MILES,
however, is unsuitable for moving target engagements on vehicles with no kinematic lead
because it does not require the gunner to apply lead to engage a target. MILES is also
unsuitable for training BOT, TOT, and manual range index adjustment. Commanders may
dry fire or use 7.62mm in a subcaliber role.
Rehearse the platoon.
Qualify the platoon.
NEAR-TERM TRAINING PLANS

12-58. Near-term planning consists of scheduling and executing training specified in the short-range
training plan, providing specific guidance for training, and producing detailed training schedules. Nearterm planning covers a period of six to eight weeks prior to execution of training for AC and four months
prior to execution of training for RC.
12-59. Training meetings should be held at battalion, company, and platoon levels so all key personnel
understand detailed information.
z
Battalion meetings focus on training management.
Conduct final coordination of ranges, training areas, and ammunition.
Coordinate between units for maintenance, medical, logistical, and personnel requirements.
Lock in and publish unit-training schedules.

z
Company and platoon meetings cover the specifics of executing the training event. These
elements should be included in the gunnery operation order (OPORD).
Discuss when the training will be conducted, to include movement times, to the training
area.
Discuss personnel involved in the training event, and identify who is responsible for
conducting the training.
Discuss in detail the range setup, execution, and key individual responsibilities.
Discuss training location, uniforms, and special equipment required to conduct training.
Discuss specific personnel performance measures to be evaluated.

12-60. Commanders should require briefbacks to ensure subordinate leaders understand all aspects of the
training event.
12-61. The formal training plan culminates with the training schedule. Commanders, key leaders, and all
trainers must continue to plan and coordinate training informally with a series of pre-execution checks.
Additionally, trainers, Soldiers, and support personnel must thoroughly prepare for training.
z
Pre-execution checks systematically prepare Soldiers, trainers, and resources to ensure that
training starts properly. These checks are developed, and responsibility for them assigned, during
short-range planning. To develop an intensive pre-execution checklist, trainers should integrate
range and training area checks and considerations from Chapter 13.
z
Commanders prepare trainers to conduct performance-oriented training by providing time,
guidance, resources, and references. Each trainer rehearses his preparations and reviews the tasks
and subtasks that he must conduct. This gives him confidence in his ability to perform the task
himself, and to teach Soldiers the correct skills.
12-62. Table 12-3 outlines a sample six month gunnery training plan for an Abrams equipped unit. All
required training prior to the crew gunnery phase is included. Units may have to modify their training plan
based on time and resource constraints, provided all required training and testing is conducted.
12-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 12-9. Sample six month gunnery training timeline (Abrams)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
12-23
Chapter 13
Range Operations
Chapter 13 outlines the procedures, duties, resources, and responsibilities for
establishing and operating both permanent and temporary gunnery and tactical
training facilities.
Contents
Section I Planning Range Operations 13-1
Planning Gunnery Exercises ............. 13-1
Commanders Intent ......................... 13-2
Developing Scenarios for Collective
Gunnery Tables .............................. 13-15
Planning for Range Operations....... 13-20
Section II Conducting Range
Operations ............................................. 13-24
Opening the Range and Occupying
the Training Site.............................. 13-24
During the Exercise ........................ 13-25
Closing the Range........................... 13-25

Administration and Emergency
Directions ........................................ 13-26
Section III Digital Range Set Up ........ 13-27
Data Sets ........................................ 13-27
Range Overlay ................................ 13-27
Digital Base Station ......................... 13-28
Rehearsal........................................ 13-28
Icon Management ........................... 13-28
SECTION I PLANNING RANGE OPERATIONS

13-1. This section outlines procedures, duties, and responsibilities for planning and establishing gunnery
ranges and tactical courses, to include developing scenarios for gunnery ranges to support a complete
gunnery exercise. A combat training program is conducted on training areas and conducted dry and live on
range firing complexes. It provides an opportunity to acquire targets in a realistic environment and to use
the weapon systems to engage targets. Tactical training should be integrated with gunnery training.
PLANNING GUNNERY EXERCISES

13-2. When planning a gunnery exercise the following general procedures are followed:
z
Determine the commanders intent for the end state of the exercise.
z
Make tentative plans for crew and collective gunnery.
z
Evaluate range and ammunition resources to support the plans.
z
Forecast resources necessary to execute the training event(s).
z
Develop scenarios for crew and collective gunnery tables (GT).
z
Proof all scenarios prior to execution.
z
Coordinate with supporting elements.
z
Plan range operations and personnel.
z
Execute the exercise.
z
Evaluate the exercise through after action reviews (AAR).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-1
Chapter 13
COMMANDERS INTENT
13-3. Planning a gunnery training exercise begins with the commanders intent for the desired end state of
the exercise. The commander will issue guidance to his staff on the training mission(s) that the unit is to
perform. The staff first plans for the collective gunnery phase to meet the commanders intent. The staff
tailors a crew gunnery training program that supports the collective training plan. The S-3 and Master
Gunner develop the crew tables using their inherent flexibility to tailor the tasks to the mission in order to
meet the commanders intent.
z
To develop the crew GTs
The S-3 and Master Gunner identify how crew tables and tasks are going to be designed to
train to the mission that will be used in the collective GTs.
The Master Gunner determines which ranges will support firing these tables and tasks and
develops scenarios for each table.
z
To develop the collective GTs
The commander and his S-3 determine which core mission(s) to conduct based on the units
mission-essential task list (METL) and specific command guidance.
The S-3 identifies the primary collective tasks to evaluate based on the core missions.
The S-3 identifies which collective tasks will be firing tasks.
The S-3 and Master Gunner develop scenarios that require the sections and platoons to
conduct designated core missions and their respective primary collective tasks. Live-fire
gunnery presentations are incorporated into the firing tasks.
SITE SELECTION
13-4. Before selecting a site, identify the training area or range(s) that will support the training event.
Make a thorough map and ground reconnaissance of areas available for firing. The range must be large
enough to accommodate all weapon systems, types of ammunition, and types of exercises to be fired. Some
considerations for site selection are
z
Sufficient maneuver area and enough targets to provide several routes and target arrays.
z
Targets in realistic arrays and, where possible, not marked by berms.
z
Enfilade and defilade firing positions.
z
Sand table layouts of the entire range area to aid rehearsals.
z
Terrain that accommodates integration of squad and vehicle fire and maneuver.
RANGE OR TACTICAL COURSE RECONNAISSANCE

13-5. The S-3 and Master Gunner conduct a reconnaissance of the ranges they will use to support their
gunnery training plan. Additionally, the officer in charge (OIC) and noncommissioned officer in charge
(NCOIC) for each range should personally conduct a reconnaissance and coordinate with range control
headquarters before the unit occupies the range or training area. The reconnaissance should provide
answers to the following questions:
z
What route to the range or training area will be used?
z
How many vehicles can run the combat course simultaneously?
z
Are enfilade and defilade positions available?
z
What control facilities are available? What is their condition?
z
Is the tower equipped with FM communication equipment?
z
Are range safety markers visible for live fire? How will they be illuminated at night?
z
How is access to the impact area controlled for live fire? What are guard requirements?
z
Does the range support firing of all types of ammunition and pyrotechnics required for the
exercise?
13-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Who furnishes targets, target supplies, or vehicle visual modification sets (3)? Where are targets
stored? Are the targets the correct type, size, shape, and color? What is the condition of target
mechanisms? Who provides the target operators and target details?
Is there a boresight panel at the recommended range?
Can boresighting and zeroing be conducted simultaneously?
What is the condition of moving targets?
Who furnishes the caliber .50 inbore devices or Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System
(MILES) equipment for the tactical course? Are all caliber .50 inbore devices or MILES
equipment accounted for and operational?
Has the range or training area been cleared of unexploded ordnance?
Who will furnish fire-fighting equipment, range flags, and range regulations?
Does the range or training area provide adequate space for maneuvering vehicles and the
weapons to be used?
Does the range provide firing positions for indirect-fire illumination?
Does the range allow reduced vehicle-to-target ranges for limited visibility?
Who will supply optics for scoring and control?
What is the digital infrastructure provided on the range (Force XXI Battle Command Brigade
and Below (FBCB2), audio/visual (A/V), and instrumentation required)?
Where are the following administrative areas:
Ammunition pad?
Clearing pit and misfire pit?
Barriers/guard posts?
Mess area?
Latrine?
Helipad?
Aid station?
Troop break and billet areas?
Maintenance area?
Briefing and debriefing tent (AAR facility)?
Track vehicle parking area?
Very important person (VIP) parking area?
Wheel vehicle parking area?
Concurrent training area?
RANGE OR TRAINING AREA LAYOUT

13-6. Generally, vehicle ranges support both crew and collective live-fire scenarios. Some ranges consist
of stationary and moving vehicle positions; however, when there is a moving vehicle position, the
maneuver box area is laid out to make sure the firing vehicle is within the firing limits of the range. When
possible, course runs will not be limited to roads or range trails, but will be designed to maneuver crosscountry.
z
Coordinate with the range facility manager to gather information about the facility. Determine if
the surface danger zone (SDZ) diagram is current; construct one, if necessary refer to DA Pam
385-63 and Technical Bulletin (TB) Med 524. As a minimum, you will need to obtain the
following information about your facility:
A scaled range diagram (preferably in 100-meter increments) that identifies target pits (by
type and number), battle positions, and firing points or map of the training area.
A fire/no-fire matrix (if available), which is the authorized list of targets allowed to be fired
within the SDZ diagram from each firing point/battle position. This is typically located in
the range standing operating procedure (SOP).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-3
Chapter 13
Conduct a reconnaissance of the facility to
Identify any restrictions for the facility.
Determine the best lanes that allow the most targets to be engaged.
Determine if the facility supports dual-lane scenario or only single-lane firing.
Determine the layout of course roads to identify a course speed.
Determine if the facility supports firing multiple weapons platforms simultaneously.
Plan to maximize throughput.
13-7. Answer the following questions before developing the scenario:

z
How many lanes will be firing?
z
What weapon platform types will be firing?
z
What is the maximum distance of the firing box for offensive engagements?
z
What is the course speed?
z
What is the order of tasks for each scenario?
z
Is cross-firing allowed on the range?
Note. The order of tasks is usually most influenced by the location of specific target types on
the range, typically moving targets or targets in urban clusters. Plan these engagements first
when developing a scenario.
DEVELOPING THE SCENARIO

13-8. Once planning is complete, develop the scenario, including the following:
z
Identify the first firing position and the first task to be fired.
z
For offensive tasks with delay target(s), estimate where the firing vehicle should be (based on
course speed) to determine which target(s) to select. Identify alternate targets for each
engagement.
z
If you are firing a dual-lane scenario, consider where the firing vehicles are in relation to each
other when one finishes an engagement. Neither firing vehicle should be placed in the danger
zone of the other while firing.
z
If you are firing tanks and Bradleys on the same range, take into consideration whether the
vehicles will be firing at the same targetry and the ranges at which they will be engaging those
targets. Firing positions and offensive firing points may have to be adjusted to compensate.
z
When listing target information, include the following:
Target pit number and/or target number.
Target type.
Vehicle-to-target range.
For tanks, ensure loaders targets are always to the left of the main gun-target line and the
vehicle commanders (VC) machine gun engagements are always to the right of the main
gun-target line.
Exposure time (target lift and delay time, if applicable).
Hostile fire signature (no less than 5 seconds after exposure).
Type of ammunition to be fired at the target.
Number of hits required to kill the target.

Note. If running both Abrams and Bradleys simultaneously, target hit sensors will have to be
adjusted accordingly if targets are to be engaged by both weapon platforms.
13-4
Target speed (if moving).

Target direction (if moving).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
Evasive moving target (plan maneuver).

Alternate target number (if applicable).
Targetry
13-9. All targets are constructed in accordance with (IAW) TC 25-8. All stationary targets should be
mounted on pop-up mechanisms to facilitate target acquisition and scoring. Moving targets should be
presented at speeds between 24 and 32 kph (15 to 20 mph). Moving, evasive targets should be presented at
speeds between 8 and 32 kph (5 to 20 mph). Currently, an evasive target can be programmed to move at
varying speeds, conduct short halts, or change direction. They must be visible from the firing position for
the entire exposure time, and must run for a minimum of 15 seconds in each step to allow for acquisition,
tracking, and engaging. Evasive targets should have the ability to change speed and direction, and alter
their appearance or thermal signature as the vehicles directions change. All target types must have thermal
target signatures for both day and night engagements IAW TC 25-8.
z
Armor. Armor targets will be presented as stationary or moving, frontal or flank threat armor
silhouettes.
z
Light Armored Vehicle. Light-armored vehicle targets will be presented as stationary or
moving, frontal or flank threat personnel carrier (PC) or fighting vehicle silhouettes.
z
Unarmored Vehicle. Unarmored vehicle targets will be presented as stationary or moving,
frontal or flank threat armed truck silhouettes.
z
Point Troop. Point troop targets are no more than three E-type silhouettes placed in line, in
depth, or in a wedge formation, no more than 5 meters apart or 10 meters in depth (if more than
one silhouette is used). These targets may be placed on a single vehicle target lifter at ranges
beyond 900 meters to allow crews to engage the target with high-explosive (HE) rounds.
z
Area Troop. Realistic arrays include no more than 7 and no fewer than 4 E-type silhouettes
placed in a linear or wedge formation. They are spread up to 5 meters apart, but the whole target
array fits in an area up to 30 meters wide by 20 meters deep.
z
Aerial. Aerial targets will be presented as stationary or moving, frontal or flank threat attack
helicopter silhouettes.
Friendly and Neutral Presentations

13-10. Realistic friendly and neutral presentations may be incorporated in all phases of gunnery to train
crews and squads in combat identification and fratricide avoidance. Presentations must appear realistic in
visual, thermal, and infrared (IR) optics. Friendly/neutral presentations will be marked as follows:
z
Friendly Vehicle. Friendly vehicle presentations will be displayed with CIP panels properly
located on the silhouette. Phoenix beacons should be used at night to provide IR optics with
friendly identification signature. Unit SOPs can also be used to develop specific identification
markings.
z
Friendly Troop. Units should use established SOPs to depict friendly troop thermal signature
combat identification for night engagements. Phoenix beacons should be used at night to
provide IR optics with friendly identification signature.
z
Neutral. Neutral presentations must be clearly identifiable as civilian vehicles and personnel.
Personnel presentations may consist of any number silhouettes dispersed in a small group.
Lateral Dispersion of Targets

13-11. Target dispersion must be used for all GTs. The intent is to ensure gunners and VCs are not able to
acquire both targets in a two-target engagement or no more than two targets in a three-target engagement
while in narrow field of view (NFOV). The minimum target dispersion on an engagement should be 1.5
times the NFOV of the platform. However, all targets presented during degraded mode engagements must
be dispersed no more than 40 mils within the field of view of the vehicles auxiliary sight. Given the
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-5
Chapter 13
difference in the platform optics, the Abrams and the Bradley will have different minimum lateral target
dispersions. The distance between targets can be worked out using the WORM formula.
z
Abrams. For the Abrams tanks, the thermal wide field of view (WFOV) is 15 degrees, 1.5 times
the WFOV in mils is 400 mils.
z
Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) Integrated Sight Unit (ISU). For the BFV with ISU, the
thermal WFOV is 6.6 degrees, 1.5 times the WFOV in mils is 176 mils.
z
BFV Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS). For the BFV with IBAS, the
forwarding looking, infrared (FLIR) WFOV is 13.3 degrees, 1.5 times the WFOV in mils is 355
mils.
Note. In tasks where three targets are used, the third (delayed) target may be presented
anywhere, as long as it is at the proper range.
Urban Clusters
13-12. Commanders may opt to conduct their gunnery utilizing urban clusters to replicate urban
operations on the range (see Figure 13-1). Urban clusters should consist of single and multiple story
structures in and around the targetry replicating buildings similar to those the unit expects to encounter in
their operational environment (OE). These structures should be constructed in groups of no less than three
buildings per cluster. Urban clusters must be available during all phases of gunnery for single and/or
multiple lane ranges to support the unit mission. The example below illustrates urban clusters on a multiple
lane range complex.
Figure 13-1. Urban cluster
Maneuver Boxes
13-13. The maneuver box is the maximum distance the vehicle could travel and still have the target(s)
exposed, to include vehicle acceleration and target lift time. Maneuver boxes must be clearly defined so as
to be able to accurately determine if the targets can be safely fired at for their entire presentation time and
to accurately plot surface danger diagrams as necessary. Figure 13-2a outlines various firing box lengths
13-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
based on vehicle speed, number of targets within the presentation and target exposure times. Additionally,
an 8 second target lift/firing vehicle acceleration time has been built into the table to accommodate these
events, therefore the starting point for offensive engagements is the point at which the firing vehicle begins
movement, the target lifter can begin raising the target into a locked position with actual engagement
occurring at a predetermined point within the maneuver box. In-depth proofing of the range prior to
execution will determine at what point targets are in a locked position and able to be engaged. Due to
variable target lift times as determined by target type (vehicle vs. troop silhouette) and range to range
variances, this engagement point within the maneuver box will not be constant. The firing vehicle must
adhere to start and stop points. At no time, will the vehicle extend or surpass the exposure and engagement
times. Figure 13-2a through Figure 13-2d displays the step-by-step process involved in an offensive
engagement.
Figure 13-2a. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-7
Chapter 13
Figure 13-2b. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued)
Figure 13-2c. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued)
13-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
Figure 13-2d. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement (continued)

13-14. To determine the size of a maneuver box, the average vehicle speed for the course and the target
exposure time must be known. Table 13-1 shows how to determine the length of a maneuver box. If the
first number after the decimal is 5 or more, the length is rounded up to the next whole number. Table 13-1
shows how to determine the length of a delayed target maneuver box.
Table 13-1. Formula for determining length of maneuver box
FIRING VEHICLE SPEED
Target Array Type
12 MPH
SINGLE
TARGET
310 meters
DOUBLE
TARGET
310 meters
3 TGTS - 15
Sec delay
391 meters
3 TGTS - 20
Sec delay
418 meters
3 TGTS - 25
Sec delay
445 meters
13 MPH
337 meters
337 meters
424 meters
453 meters
482 meters
14 MPH
363 meters
363 meters
457 meters
488 meters
520 meters
15 MPH
389 meters
389 meters
490 meters
523 meters
557 meters
16 MPH
415 meters
415 meters
522 meters
558 meters
594 meters
17 MPH
441 meters
441 meters
555 meters
593 meters
631 meters
18 MPH
467 meters
467 meters
588 meters
628 meters
668 meters
19 MPH
493 meters
493 meters
620 meters
663 meters
705 meters
20 MPH
519 meters
519 meters
653 meters
698 meters
742 meters
Maneuver Box Length

Notes.
1. Maneuver box length is determined by converting miles per hour (mph) to meters per seconds (mps) by multiplying
using a constant value of 0.4471416.
2. Multiply the determined mps by the target exposure time + 8 seconds for target lifter time.
3. Round to the nearest whole number to obtain maneuver box length in meters.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-9
Chapter 13
Surface Danger Zone Diagrams

13-15. When establishing ranges, units must submit SDZ diagrams to the installation range control
facility for approval before firing. Restrictions and precautions for SDZ diagrams are found in DA Pam
385-63 and TB Med 524. SDZ diagrams show range boundaries and safety features in overlay form,
including safety limit markers for each firing position (see Figure 13-3, Figure 13-4, Table 13-2, and Table
13-3). Firing tables (FT) provide values for range, maximum ordinates, and superelevation for each
ammunition type.
Note. If you must construct an SDZ diagram, refer to DA Pam 385-63.
General Surface Danger Zone Considerations
13-16. When engaging ground targets, the unit may reduce Distance X (maximum range) to 15 degrees
elevation, provided they maintain the guns firing elevation at less than or equal to 15 degrees. If they
cannot control the weapon at or under 15 degrees, such as could happen when firing while moving over
rough terrain with inoperative stabilization, they will use the maximum range (Distance X). At 15 degrees
elevation, range equals the greatest distance the projectile can travel when fired at elevations at or under 15
degrees. The unit derives this value by evaluating ricochet and ballistic FT data.
WARNING
Laser range finders (LRF) will be used only on established lasersafe ranges. Do not fire the LRF at reflective surfaces at any
range.
Non-Eye-Safe Laser Surface Danger Zone

13-17. When non-eye-safe lasers are used, the nominal ocular hazard distance (NOHD) (an additional
buffer area) must be added to the SDZ diagram. The NOHD will vary for each type of laser device and
type of terrain. (See DA Pam 385-63, Table 19-1, for the appropriate NOHD.) For the LRF, the NOHD is 7
kilometers. Every object the laser beam strikes will reflect energy. In most cases, this energy is diffused
and is not hazardous. To prevent eye injury from a reflected laser beam, avoid shiny surfaces. Remove
mirrors, panes of glass or plastic, chrome-plated metal, or other flat mirror-like objects having a vertical or
near-vertical surface from the target area. If it is impractical to remove some surfaces, cover them with
lusterless paint. Cloth, cardboard, wood, and lusterless metal targets are acceptable for laser ranging.
Tank Main Gun Surface Danger Zone Considerations
13-18. Total range distance includes horizontal range corresponding to 10-degree quadrant elevation, and
an allowance for the maneuver area and Area B, when required. This total range distance will be decreased
only on a waiver basis. The main gun will not be fired at quadrant elevations greater than +5 degrees (+89
mils). This provides a safety factor of 5 degrees within the SDZ diagram. Firing limits for establishing
ranges can be obtained from the local range control officer.
13-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
Figure 13-3. Sample SDZ diagram for 25-mm M792 ammunition

Table 13-2. Dimensions for 25-mm M792 (HEI-T) ammunition
Area A
Area B
Area W2
Angle Y
Angle Z
Distance X1
Ricochet
Range
15 Deg Elevation
Range
300m
400m
1,373m
28 deg
5 deg
6,381m
5,265m
5,244m
300m
400m
1,290m
27 deg
5 deg
6,381m
5,071m
5,244m
300m
400m
908m
19 deg
5 deg
6,381m
4,792m
5,244m
300m
400m
1,047m
19 deg
5 deg
6,381m
4823m
5,244m
Notes.
1. Firer may reduce Distance X (maximum range) to Ricochet Range when engaging ground targets at ranges up to 3,000
meters from the stationary firing positions. When firing from a moving vehicle over level terrain at ground targets up to 3,000
meters, he can use the 15 degree Elevation Range, except for armor Impact Medium, in which case he uses the Ricochet
Range distance, whichever is greater. When firing on the move over rough terrain the firer uses Distance X.
2. When firing at aerial targets with the gun elevation greater than 15 degrees, the firer need not use the Ricochet Area
defined by Area W and Angle Y.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-11
Chapter 13
Figure 13-4. Sample SDZ diagram for 7.62-mm M80 (A131) ammunition
Table 13-3. Dimensions for 7.62-mm M80 (A131) ammunition
Impact
Media
Area A
Area B
Angle P
Angle Q
Area W
Left and
Right of
GTL
Distance
X
Distance
Y
Earth
N/A
N/A
43.81
deg
38.90
deg
1,461m
5 deg
4,100m
4,073m
Water
N/A
N/A
43.81
deg
38.90
deg
1,461m
5 deg
4,100m
4,073m
Steel
N/A
N/A
20.17
deg
75.54
deg
861m
5 deg
4,100m
4,073m
Concrete
N/A
N/A
20.17
deg
75.54
deg
861m
5 deg
4,100m
4,073m
Notes.
1. Firer may reduce Distance X (maximum range) to Ricochet Range when engaging ground targets at ranges up to
3,000 meters from the stationary firing positions. When firing from a moving vehicle over rough terrain the firer uses
Distance X.
2. When firing at aerial targets with the gun elevation greater than 15 degrees, the firer need not use the Ricochet Area
defined by Area W and Angle Y.
Ballistic Firing Tables

13-19. The Master Gunners and range control personnel use the ballistic data in ammunition FTs to
develop or modify surface danger area diagrams (see Table 13-4). With the Master Gunners knowledge of
the fire control system, they jointly develop realistic GTs. The following terms explain the data in all
gunnery FTs; however, the relative locations of the data columns might differ among the tables for the
various rounds of ammunition and types of weapons:
z
Angle of Fall. The angle, measured in mils, between the line of sight and the line of elevation.
z
Ballistic. The science that deals with the motion, behavior, and effects of a projectile.
z
(D=change) DH/DR. The change in height (in meters) of a projectile for a 100-meter change in
linear range on the ground, at a given range.
13-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
(D=change) DR/DSE. The number of meters a 1-mil elevation change will move the round in
linear range, on the ground, at a given range and super elevation.
Drift. The number of mils the projectile moves to the right of the gun-target line due to the spin
caused by the rifling in the gun.
Line of Departure. A prolongation of a line running through the axis of the gun bore as the
projectile leaves the muzzle.
Line of Elevation. A prolongation of a line running through the axis of the gun bore.
Line of Sight. A straight line between the gun sight and the target.
Maximum Ordinate. The maximum height the projectile travels above the line of sight at a
given range.
Range. The distance from the vehicle to the target.
Range to Maximum Ordinate. Out to this range (the range at which the round reaches
maximum ordinate) the projectile ascends; beyond this range, it descends. This range (to the
maximum ordinate) always occurs shortly past half of the target range.
Remaining Velocity. The speed of the projectile in meters per second and at a selected range.
Super Elevation. The angle, measured, in mils, between the line of sight and a line tangent to
the trajectory at the point of impact. The additional elevation induced into the fire control system
raises the ballistic flight of a given projectile. This ensures that the projectile hits the target at a
given range.
Ten kph Crosswind Deflection. Generally, thanks to crosswind deflection, a round is most
unstable when it exits the muzzle. This effect of wind deflection assumes a crosswind speed of
10 kph. The firer applies the correction into the wind. If the wind speed is more or less than 10
kph, the firer estimates the point of aim.
Time of Flight. The time a projectile takes to reach a target at a selected range.
Trajectory. The path of the projectile from the muzzle of the weapon to the first point of
impact.
Vertical Gun Jump. The angle measured in mils between the line of departure of the projectile
and the line of elevation.
Table 13-4. Sample ballistic firing table for cartridge, APDS-T (muzzle velocity 1,345 mps)
Range
Superelevation
DR/DSE
DH/DR
Drift
Time of
Flight
1,600m
5.12 mils
263 m/mils
0.6m per
100m
0.1 mils
1.33 sec
1,700m
5.49 mils
257 m/mils
0.6m per
100m
0.1 mils
1.42 sec
1,800m
5.88 mils
252 m/mils
0.7m per
100m
0.1 mils
1.52 sec
1,900m
6.72 mils
247 m/mils
0.7m per
100m
0.1 mils
1.61 sec
10kph
Crosswind
Deflection
Maximum
Ordinate
Range to
Max Ordinate
Angle of Fall
Remaining
Velocity
Range
0.2 mils
2.2m
830m
6 mils
1,075 m/sec
1,600m
0.3 mils
2.2m
884m
6 mils
1,058 m/sec
1,700m
0.3 mils
2.2m
938m
7 mils
1,041 m/sec
1,800m
0.3 mils
2.2m
993m
8 mils
1,025 m/sec
1,900m
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-13
Chapter 13
Scaled Ranges
13-20. Certain gunnery training can be accomplished on scaled down ranges when access to full scale
ranges is limited. Table 13-5 defines various scaled ranges to targets. For realism, if a scaled range is used,
targetry should be scaled down as well. Scaled sizes for targetry can be found in TC 25-8.
Table 13-5. Scaled ranges
SCALE OF RANGES
Combat
Range
(meters)
800
1/2 Scale
(meters)
400
1/5 Scale
(meters)
470
1/10 Scale
(meters)
80
1/20 Scale
(meters)
132
1/30 Scale
(meters)
87
1/35 Scale
(meters)
1/60 Scale
(meters)
75
44
49
900
450
592
90
148
98
84
1,000
500
660
100
165
110
94
55
1,100
550
724
110
181
120
103
60
1,200
600
792
120
198
131
113
66
1,300
650
856
130
214
142
122
71
1,400
700
924
140
231
154
132
77
1,500
750
990
150
247
164
141
82
1,600
800
1,060
160
264
176
150
88
1,700
850
1,120
170
280
186
160
93
1,800
900
1,192
180
297
198
169
99
1,900
950
1,256
190
313
208
179
104
2,000
1,000
1,320
200
330
220
188
110
2,100
1,050
1,388
210
346
230
198
115
2,200
1,100
1,450
220
363
242
207
121
2,300
1,150
1,520
230
379
250
216
126
2,400
1,200
1,588
240
396
264
226
132
2,500
1,250
1,650
250
412
274
235
137
2,600
1,300
1,720
260
429
286
245
143
2,700
1,350
1,780
270
445
296
254
148
2,800
1,400
1,850
280
462
308
264
154
2,900
1,450
1,915
290
478
318
273
159
3,000
1,500
1,980
300
495
330
282
165
PROOFING THE SCENARIO

13-21. After the scenario is approved on paper, it must be proofed on the facility using the vehicle(s) for
which the scenario was approved. It is imperative that this be conducted before the unit arrives, to prevent
lost training time.
13-22. All conditions must be the same as if actually firing, using the same type weapon platform(s) that
will be firing. If firing a dual-lane scenario, proof both lanes at the same time. Each target should be
checked for validity by making sure it can be viewed through the firing vehicle optics throughout the entire
presentation time. The range to the targets and the target presentation times should be verified. For
offensive engagements the proofing vehicle should maneuver through the entire maneuver box to ensure
that targets are not masked for any part of their presentation time. On computer-controlled ranges, Master
Gunners should proof scenarios and adjust target lift times as necessary to ensure that multiple targets are
programmed to lift simultaneously. Adjustments may also be necessary for delayed targets to ensure they
are presented with the proper lift time and have the appropriate target exposure time.
13-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
13-23. For Abrams units, proofing should be accomplished by making sure targets can be viewed through
the gunners auxiliary sight (GAS) throughout the entire exposure time. Using only the gunners primary
sight (GPS) to proof can lead to dead space within the gun-target line.
DEVELOPING SCENARIOS FOR COLLECTIVE GUNNERY TABLES

13-24. Combined Arms Training Strategies (CATS), along with scenario development and the evaluation
criteria and requirements in Chapter 12, establish an Army standard for training and evaluation. At the
same time, they allow unit commanders to tailor tactical tasks based on their particular missions and
training emphasis. These tables should be designed to be combined arms events, to employ multi-echelon
training, and to be interactive to the extent that tactical decisions affect targetry presentations. This section
provides information for developing tactical scenarios to support collective gunnery training.
13-25. Collective proficiency exercises and practice tables are a building block for section and platoon
qualification. Sections and platoons should collectively participate in device-based training at least once
before conducting live-fire training at that level. When they do qualify, sections and platoons follow the
guidelines and standards in the applicable CATS and this chapter.
z
The commander and his S-3 determine which CATS core mission(s) to conduct based on the
units METL and specific command guidance.
z
The S-3 identifies the primary collective tasks to evaluate based on the core missions.
z
The S-3 identifies which collective tasks will be firing tasks.
z
Section and platoon gunnery will be conducted in two phases, one during the day and one at
night.
z
The S-3 and Master Gunner develop scenarios that require the sections and platoons to conduct
designated core missions and their respective primary collective tasks. Live-fire gunnery
presentations are incorporated into the firing tasks. This chapter identifies the type and the
minimum number of live-fire targets for each platform system during qualification. However,
units may add targets if resources allow.
z
The S-3, S-2, and Master Gunner select vehicle and troop arrays that represent threat forces in
the OE or the required training emphasis. They also specify threat target types and engagement
distances, or range bands as well as most-to-least-dangerous targets, based on the threat analysis
and training emphasis. The end product is a threat template for section and platoon gunnery
exercises.
z
The S-3 develops an operation order (OPORD) that supports the missions.
z
The Master Gunner prepares evaluation packets for each section or platoon. Each packet
contains training and evaluation outlines (T&EO), as well as tactical and gunnery scoresheets.
The Master Gunner arranges the contents in collective-task sequence and prepares an allinclusive list of what is in an evaluation packet.
z
The Master Gunner coordinates all necessary resources and personnel to support the gunnery
exercises.
z
For FBCB2-equipped platform systems, tactical scenarios will integrate digital training.
13-26. The collective tables must begin with an OPORD issued to the platoon by the platoon leader.
Graphics used to control movement to the range and section sectors of fire and axis of advance (range
limitations) will be developed as a hard copy and transmitted, if equipped, via digital communications.
Section and platoon leaders must develop their own additional direct fire control and distribution measures
and graphics using the platoon SOP. Situation reports (SITREP) and fragmentary orders (FRAGO) used to
control the section will be issued based on these graphics.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-15
Chapter 13
LIVE-FIRE CONSIDERATIONS
13-27. Firing tasks are conducted on the range complex that offers the best available target and maneuver
area that replicates the selected mission.
z
Targets in and around building facades replicate an urban environment.
z
Long-range targets on flat terrain replicate a desert environment.
z
Practice and qualification may be conducted on the same range; however, target presentation
will not be in the same sequence.
z
All targets within a presentation are presented simultaneously. This requires the firing element
to properly control and distribute fires.
z
For each squad that will fire, no more than two dismount squads are presented simultaneously.
z
Indirect-fire support should be incorporated in the scenario, whether it is simulated or live fire
(conduct live fire if possible). If mortars are used for illumination, this can count as fire support.
Indirect-fire targets are additional target presentations based on the threat template and should
support mortar gunnery standards. Indirect-fire targets should be placed beyond effective directfire range or beyond direct-fire restricted fire lines so they are not engaged with direct fires.
z
Air-ground coordination should be incorporated in the scenario, whether it is simulated or live.
Aviation targets are additional target presentations based on the threat template and should
support aviation gunnery standards.
COMBINED ARMS INTEGRATION

13-28. Collective gunnery training can be enhanced by integrating combined arms training to the gunnery
exercises. Each participating unit, with its specific weapon systems, must be included in the planning
process. The following is a discussion of the key considerations for the different types of units that may be
included in collective gunnery training.
Scouts
13-29. Scout platoons and sections may be integrated into tactical scenarios to exercise security and
reconnaissance missions. This may be accomplished independently or in conjunction with a section,
platoon, or company team exercise. If scouts are to be deployed forward of uploaded weapon systems, their
safety must be paramount.
Mortars
13-30. When supporting a live-fire exercise (LFX), mortar firing points must be planned to avoid firing
over the heads of troops. To increase the training benefit for mortar crews, the exercise should be planned
to cause mortars to displace and provide continuous support. (Many of the safety considerations discussed
for field artillery [FA] are applicable to mortars.)
13-31. As required by each installation, a certified safety officer must be on the mortar point. The mortar
platoon/section leader and fire support officer (FSO) must know the location of the maneuver units so they
can make sure the SDZ is enforced with respect to the gun-target line. If the mortars are fired from direct
lay, it is relatively easy to verify friendly unit positions.
Field Artillery
13-32. FA units may support collective gunnery as an externally evaluated exercise or as internally
evaluated sustainment training. The internally evaluated sustainment training requires greater coordination
between the maneuver and FA headquarters in the planning stage, so that required FA tasks are included in
the exercise. Collective gunnery training offers the FA commander collective gunnery training offers the
fires battalion commander the opportunity to train the brigades indirect fire team (the fires battalion and
the fire support personnel organic to the brigade headquarters and its subordinate maneuver battalions).
This enables the fires battalion commander to better advise the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT)
13-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
commander on the status of the brigades fire support system. The brigade and maneuver
battalion/squadron commanders have an opportunity to observe and evaluate his subordinate battalion fire
support elements their organic fires cell and fire support teams (FIST). If necessary, the firing points that
support the training range must be identified, and the sequence of events may have to allow for FA
registration fires.
13-33. The impact area must be large enough (within the limits of local range constraints) to
accommodate the adjustment of indirect fires. Units will not normally be allowed to maneuver into
permanent artillery impact areas because of the possibility of duds. Temporary impact areas may be
established, if necessary. With the concurrence of range control, certified ammunition may be fired into a
temporary impact area that is to be maneuvered through later. Participants should be alert to the possibility
of duds and take appropriate action if one is encountered. After the exercise is completed, the user clears
the area, with the assistance of the explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) detachment.
13-34. Units may maneuver in proximity to indirect fires under certain conditions. Troops and vehicles
involved in training may operate under the gun-target line in certain areas during firing. Armored vehicles
may maneuver under air bursts if variable time (VT) or time fuses are used on certified ammunition, and if
the firing data meet certain conditions explained in DA Pam 385-63, paragraph 11-5e. In this case, all
down range vehicles must remain buttoned up.
13-35. Waivers may be pursued to facilitate the maneuver of helicopters near and under the gun-target
line and around the flanks of the SDZ; the key to imaginative training is detailed planning.
13-36. Personnel may occupy approved bunkers within 200 meters of impacting artillery in areas
surrounding the impact area; however, this situation must be planned to fit into the tactical scenario.
13-37. As many variables become known, the supporting artillery unit can compute a relatively accurate
buffer zone (safety diagram) for planning purposes. When constructing laser range danger fans for
precision-guided munitions employment, safety computations are especially critical (from the standpoint of
eye-safe laser designator use). This data will have to be approved by the local range control office before
the scenario is finalized.
13-38. The use of illumination and smoke and the employment of precision-guided munitions should be
incorporated into the fire support plan. The FIST chief must perform a detailed analysis of the terrain to
support the commanders scheme of maneuver, especially when employing precision-guided munitions.
The FIST chief should accompany the company team commander on his leaders reconnaissance of the
maneuver area.
Note. Fire support planning and coordination are accomplished IAW FM 6-20. FM 6-30
provides a detailed explanation of precision-guided munitions and laser designating devices.
Engineers
13-39. The extent and nature of engineer tasks are based, in part, on the type of scenario and range
facility. The task force and engineer unit are involved in the planning, execution, and selection of the
maneuver area prior to the occupation of the range facility.
z
Mobility. In an offensive scenario, obstacle-breaching tasks may require the employment of
organic or supporting engineer equipment and offensive munitions. Threat doctrine for obstacle
employment should be reflected in the scenario and target array. The obstacle should be
realistic, but not so much that it overwhelms the unit. It must key certain responses, resulting in
certain actions to reduce or bypass the obstacle. Safety constraints for any munitions planned in
the operation (Bangalore torpedoes, line charges, mine-clearing line charges [MICLIC], M908)
must be briefed to all participants (for example, if the MICLIC is to be used to breach a
minefield, all personnel within 1,000 meters must be buttoned up in a combat vehicle.) The
engineers move with the maneuver element as appropriate to the scenario.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-17
Chapter 13
Countermobility. Minefields, demolitions, and other obstacles should be planned in support of

a defensive exercise. On some facilities, the actual emplacement of obstacles may be restricted
for various reasons. If the obstacle is to be simulated, it must be emplaced (as much as the
situation will allow) on an adjacent training area. Obstacles that are planned, resourced, and
emplaced should be granted obstacle effect by increasing target engagement times and
decreasing the array according to the type of obstacle. If demolition is authorized on the range,
the required safety precautions must be strictly enforced.
Survivability. Defilade and improved positions may already exist on some range facilities. If
not, survivability may be exercised in the preparation of a defensive position, based on the
priority of work established by the commander.
Army Aviation
13-40. When aviation assets are to be integrated, the range control office requires enough lead time to
coordinate airspace management issues with the installation airspace management office. The Combined
Arms Battalion headquarters will assume operational control, approve their maneuver, and monitor
coordination between the aviation and ground maneuver elements. To fully exploit the mobility and standoff range advantage of aviation assets, increased range depth must be considered.
13-41. The use of aviation requires additional SDZ applications, as outlined in DA Pam 385-63, Chapter
13. They may fire from the flanks of ground maneuver units, or between them, but not from their rear (no
overhead fire). When antitank guided missiles (ATGM) or aerial rockets are to be fired, the backblast area
must be considered. If helicopters are to maneuver down range from the ground element, their safety must
be considered.
13-42. If Hellfire is being used in the indirect mode, special consideration must be given to the locations
of the firing aircraft and the designator. The SDZ for the Hellfire includes a seeker angle 20 degrees to
either side of the gun-target line. The designator may not be located anywhere within the seeker angle, and
preferably would be masked from the launch point by terrain or foliage.
Close Air Support

13-43. Employment of United States Air Force (USAF) assets requires a certified forward air controller
(FAC) to assume the responsibility for integrating tactical aircraft into the scenario. Considerations for
employment include identification of friendly troops and the target area, and control of surface fires. SDZs
are discussed in Air Force Instruction (AFI) Regulation 13-212.
13-44. When employed, the sorties should be allocated to the combined arms battalion and controlled by
the units FAC. Within the constraints of local range regulations, an airspace coordination area should be
established to allow surface fires while close air support (CAS) is employed. An alternative method is to
apply CAS against targets not in the maneuver units line of sight. Examples of this would be a secondechelon battalion in a defensive scenario, the main defensive belt or a reserve unit in an offensive scenario,
or insurgent indirect fire positions in support of a convoy ambush. If ingress is parallel to the gun-target
line and the aircraft break away to the opposite side, airspace coordination is vastly simplified. Overflight
by participating aircraft before the exercise meets USAF regulatory guidance without disrupting the
scenario.
13-45. If Joint Air Attack Team (JAAT) operations are planned, the FSO, FAC, and air battle captain
(ABC) exercise the necessary command and control measures. Aviation systems are more increasingly
falling under the sphere of control of the maneuver element leader. This is a valid training objective for
Army aviation units, CAS pilots, and battalion fire support elements.
Note. Most installations have an Air Force representative that assists in the planning of CAS.
13-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
Ground Surveillance Radar

13-46. Radar requires some form of movement to track. Moving targets may be used to provide such a
radar signature. In an offensive scenario, ground surveillance radar (GSR) may be used to vector friendly
elements. Target acquisition and tracking reports that GSR would normally provide for long-range or flank
surveillance might be as effectively portrayed by inputs from the incident list. If GSR is employed, the
protection of the system and personnel should be considered in positioning, setup, breakdown, and
maneuver to avoid detracting from the firing units operation. GSR should be employed to supplement the
units limited-visibility operation, and can also be used to monitor range boundaries.
Military Intelligence
13-47. Military intelligence can come from any agency that procures, analyzes, and uses information of
tactical and strategic military value from the ground forces (infantry, vehicle platforms, artillery,
sustainment units), air forces (Unmanned Aircraft System [UAS], CAS), and sea forces (battleships). This
process of intelligence incorporates four phasescollection, analysis, processing, and dissemination about
the enemy, terrain, and weather in an area of operations or area of interest in offensive and defensive
scenarios.
Sustainment Units
13-48. The extent to which sustainment units are portrayed is again determined from training objectives.
Ammunition and fuel should be dispensed in the tactical assembly area prior to the exercise. The company
combat trains should displace, as appropriate, in company-level training scenarios. If desired, some of the
ammunition allocated may be pre-stocked in a secondary battle position for a defensive scenario or
maintained with a logistics package to perform emergency resupply on the objective during consolidation.
Ammunition redistribution should be an integral part of the tactical scenario.
13-49. Sustainment unit assets may be used to support convoy escort training scenarios. Units may
designate targets for sustainment weapon systems to engage, if desired. Maneuver company-level
sustainment unit platforms such as the M113A3 are allocated limited ammunition for the caliber .50 and
MK19 machine guns.
13-50. Broken-down vehicles or designated battle-damaged vehicles may be used to exercise
maintenance and recovery crews in any phase of the exercise. Enemy prisoners of war (EPW) processing
or casualty treatment should be exercised throughout the operation. Sustainment Unit vehicles may be
required to engage targets during recovery operations.
13-51. A decontamination exercise may also be integrated into the scenario during the
reconsolidation/reorganization phase. Simulated agents will provide realism in portraying a chemical
environment. The simulation used must conform to local regulations. The decontamination exercise will
require decontaminating apparatus, other decontaminators, spare chemical suits for exchange, and mask
filters.
SCENARIO ENHANCEMENT
13-52. Evaluators can use pyrotechnics and simulators (weapons effect) for effect and to cue the sections
and platoons to certain events.
z
Unit SOPs should be given to the evaluators for implementation into the evaluation.
z
The company commander may follow the platoon during platoon tables to exercise command
and control training. Simulating radio traffic enhances the effects of the tactical scenario.
Company commanders receive all platoon reports, both FM and digital (if so equipped), and
issue instructions and FRAGOs based on the established scenario.
z
Target presentations occur based on the section or platoons tactical employment. The element
should react to, rather than anticipate, target presentations.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-19
Chapter 13
ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR LARGER LIVE-FIRE EXERCISES

13-53. Larger gunnery training exercises such as Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX),
Combined Arms Urban Gunnery Exercise (CAUGEX), or fire coordination exercise (FCX) require
additional planning and coordination from the staff. These exercises also require careful risk management
due to the high number of firing elements to synchronize. Depending on the facilities available, these
exercises may require the simultaneous operation of more than one range facility. They are personnel and
resource intensive and can require support from outside of the firing battalion. The following are some
things that can be done to enhance the scenarios:
z
The battalion commander may follow the company during the CALFEX to exercise command
and control training. Simulating radio traffic enhances the effects of the tactical scenario.
Battalion commanders receive all company reports, both FM and digital (if so equipped), and
issue instructions and FRAGOs based on the established scenario.
z
Evaluators can use pyrotechnics and simulators (weapons effect) for effect and to cue the
company/troop to certain events.
z
Unit SOPs should be given to the evaluators for implementation into the evaluation.
z
Target presentations occur based on the company/troops tactical employment. The element
should react to, rather than anticipate, target presentations.
z
The company team may be the lead element or may be following other units and attack through
them. The attack may be hasty or deliberate.
z
A security force may be employed forward of the company team. The company team may
defend in sector or in a battle position or strongpoint.
PLANNING FOR RANGE OPERATIONS

REQUIRED PERSONNEL
13-54. The commander is responsible for safety during all phases of training; however, he designates key
personnel to run a range or training area. In order to run any range or training area, the minimum personnel
required are an OIC, a range safety officer (RSO), and medical support appropriate to the level of the
training exercise as governed by local regulations.
z
OIC. The OIC is responsible for everything that occurs at the training site. The duties of the
OIC include
Ensures the overall safe conduct of training and proper use of the installation training
complex.
Receives a range safety briefing from installation range control organization on use of the
training complex.
Ensures the RSO is physically present at the training site.
Determines when it is safe to fire IAW applicable regulations and installation range
requirements.
Ensures receipt of final clearance from range control to fire.
Ensures proper supervision of personnel performing misfire, hang-fire, and cook-off

procedures.
Ensures required communications are established and maintained.
Ensures safe laser operations.
Ensures adequate medical support is available.
Ensures ammunition and explosives are properly handled, transported, stored, and
accounted for within the training complex from the time of receipt to the time of
expenditure or turn in.
Ensures a written log is maintained of pertinent safety and control data concerning the
operation of firing ranges, weapons training facilities, and maneuver areas, authorized
operating times, impact area entries and exits, and cease fire authorizations.
Ensures plans for firing exercises and maneuvers are coordinated with range control.
13-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
Ensures control of target areas to prohibit entry by unauthorized personnel.

Ensures all ammunition malfunctions and accidents are reported to range control in
accordance with AR 75-1 and DA Pam 385-40.
Ensures coordination and approval has been gained from the range control agency for all
civilian personnel that will be entering the training site.
Briefs the RSO on the duties to be performed in support of the training event. Clearly
establishes the requirement for the RSO to brief the OIC on the safety of the facility and
unit, and the readiness to commence live-fire operations prior to the start of firing.
Implements risk management in all phases of the training events.

RSO. The duties of the RSO include
Ensures all personnel have passed the gunnery skills test (GST) in the timeframe required
for the system.
Conducts a safety briefing before any day or night firing.
Enforces all safety regulations.
Ensures all ammunition is handled correctly.
Enforces smoking restrictions.
Ensures all misfires are handled as stated in DA Pam 385-63 and the appropriate operators
manual.
Ensures accidents are investigated and reported promptly IAW all regulations.
Ensures weapons on live-fire ranges are pointed toward the impact area at all times.
Ensures personnel are clear of the danger area (except as authorized in DA Pam
385-63).
Checks all ammunition for restricted or suspended lots, using TB 9-1300-385.
Ensures barriers and guards are in place before the exercise is started.
Checks medics to make sure they have all required medical equipment and Class VIII
supplies and a properly marked vehicle or ambulance for transporting casualties.
Medical aidman. The medical aidman
Meets the local requirements to qualify as the medical support for the particular type of
range/training area.
Has an aid bag.
Is familiar with local medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) reports and procedures.
Has an ambulance or vehicle available that has been properly marked as a medical vehicle
and is dispatched with proper fuel and oil levels.
Knows how to get to the aid station or hospital (primary and alternate route) and has
rehearsed the route.
Is a licensed driver (not a primary driver of his vehicle).
Understands his duties relevant to local range SOP.
RECOMMENDED PERSONNEL
13-55. The commander typically should assign other personnel to assist in running the training event.
Below are recommended additional personnel:
Note. Some of these may be required by local regulation.
z
An NCOIC who will

Supervise details and assist the OIC and RSO.
Coordinate placement of vehicles upon arrival.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-21
Chapter 13
An ammunition NCO who will make sure
All ammunition is delivered and properly stored at the training site.
The correct type and amount of ammunition is present at each training site.
Each vehicle receives the proper number of rounds, by type.
The training site is properly policed of brass and packaging materials.
All ammunition is checked to make sure no restricted or suspended lots are used in training,
using TB 9-1300-385.
A target NCO who will make sure that
Targets are the type and color specified by the OIC and placed in the correct array.
Moving targets are operable and trained operators are available.
The target detail is available when needed.
There are enough spare targets, target mechanisms, and batteries on hand to support the
range or training area.
Vehicle crew evaluators (VCE) who will
Act as instructors during practice exercises.
Act as evaluators during qualification.
Confer with the OIC and Master Gunner on any scoring discrepancies.
Ensure compliance with all safety procedures.
Conduct AARs.
A fire-fighting detail
Know who they are.
Know the location of equipment.
Know how to use the equipment.

Radiotelephone operators who
Can operate the radios.
Can use the communications security (COMSEC) equipment properly.
Can maintain a communications log.

A briefing NCO who
Knows how to conduct range operations.
Knows who is firing.
Knows the results of the crews/platoons already fired.
Knows the location of other key personnel.

Concurrent training NCO who
Ensures proper set up and running of site.
Maintains control of personnel on site.
Gathers site information for the OIC.
Note. For moving vehicle ranges, personnel requirements are larger; usually more evaluators
are needed.
MASTER GUNNERS DUTIES

13-56. The Master Gunner is the commanders gunnery technical advisor; he helps the commander and
the staff plan, develop, and conduct gunnery training. The Master Gunner
z
Organizes range firing exercises.
z
Sets up range firing exercises.
Coordinates target arrays.
Coordinates exposure times for targets.
Coordinates maneuver box verification.
Coordinates setup of all ranges to ensure they meet the standards in this manual.
13-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Prepares a surface danger area diagram and range overlay, if required.

Prepares scaled ranges, if required.
Ensures proper conduct of range firing exercises.
Supervises the crews to ensure proper boresighting.
Confirms zero/live-fire accurate screening test (LFAST) procedures.
Conducts remedial training on site, as needed.
Ensures that a standard VCE program is implemented.
RANGE CONTROL BRIEFING

13-57. The range control officer is responsible for the coordination and safe conduct of range activity for
all units using range facilities. Normally, unit leaders will be required to receive a range briefing from the
range control officer before occupying a range. Schedule to receive this briefing at least one day prior to
range operations to prevent any delay in training. Range control should also provide a set of local range
regulations and policies.
RANGE EQUIPMENT
13-58. The OIC and NCOIC should make sure the following equipment is on hand:
z
For gunnery and tactical exercises:
OPORD for the exercise.
Range regulations.
All other required regulations, SOPs, maps, and overlays.
Waivers, if necessary.
RSO and OIC certification cards.
TMs and operators manuals for all equipment on the range.
FM radio sets and antennas.
Evaluator communications (jump radios).
Targets and target operating and control mechanisms.
Target repair equipment.
Flashlights for scorers.
Batteries for lights and radios.
Clipboards.
Water.
Stop signs.
Engineer tape.
Fire extinguishers for ammunition pads.
No smoking signs.
Ammunition markers.
Absorbent materials available for spills.
Flag sets.
Recovery means.
Briefing tent.
Scoresheets.
Stopwatches/eight-face punch clock.
Binoculars/spotting scope.
Night-vision devices.
Field telephones, as required.
Fire-fighting equipment.
Vehicles for target and scoring detail, fire-fighting detail, backup aid vehicle, and safety
officers (moving range).
Generators to power light sets.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-23
Chapter 13
Equipment for concurrent training.

Boresight equipment.
Weather station (or phone numbers to meteorological data source).
Other table of organization and equipment (TO&E) and expendable supplies.

For gunnery exercises:
Range flag.
Range lights, chemical lights, or lanterns.
Compass for marking rounds out of impact area.
Gunners quadrant.
For tactical exercises:

PGS or MILES equipment.
Opposing force (OPFOR) equipment (VISMODS, personal gear if available).
OPFOR personnel.
Eyesafe laser filter (ELF).
Target signature devices.
Blank adapters.
RANGE COMMUNICATIONS
13-59. The installation range officer controls all ranges by wire and radio to obtain clearance to fire,
report, coordinate, and call cease fires. The OIC controls all training activities, including firing, by the best
means available. In all cases, the OIC plans for a backup communication system.
SECTION II CONDUCTING RANGE OPERATIONS

13-60. A unit range SOP will save both time and energy for the firing unit. The SOP should include
guidelines for occupying the range and describe actions to be taken for specific tasks, such as
z
Coordinating with maintenance contact teams.
z
Replacing targets.
z
Repairing target mechanisms.
z
Fighting range fires.
z
Breaking down ammunition.
z
Moving vehicles to the ammunition point and to the ready line.
z
Firing orders.
z
Policing the range.
z
Departing the range.
OPENING THE RANGE AND OCCUPYING THE TRAINING SITE

13-61. The range is opened and occupied according to local range SOP and the unit SOP. The following
personnel are responsible for the sequence of events used to open the range and occupy the training site:
z
The OIC will
Receive a range briefing from range control personnel a minimum of one day prior to range
operations.
Move to the range or training site before the company arrives.
Report occupation and request hot/wet firing status of the range facility.
Check communications and make sure backup communications are available for live fire.
13-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
Make sure range equipment is present and operational.

Ensure barrier sweeps are conducted, if necessary.
The NCOIC will
Set up the concurrent training area.
Supervise ammunition, targets, and administrative details.
Supervise placing vehicles in the correct order for firing or going through the tables.
The RSO will
Brief all personnel on range safety.
Make sure range guards are posted and briefed on live-fire ranges.
Make sure no live ammunition is present on a nonfiring range.
Inspect ammunition storage and handling.
Make sure all safety markers are present and visible on the range.
DURING THE EXERCISE

13-62. The following personnel are responsible for certain events during the conduct of the exercise:
z
The OIC, with assistance from the unit Master Gunner or other experienced NCO, will
Control the firing of LFX.
Maintain proper spacing between units going through the course.
Maintain all required communications.
Ensure the gunnery standards are met.

z
The NCOIC will
Supervise all details.
Control the movement of personnel from firing positions to concurrent training and other
administrative areas.
z
The RSO will
Ensure misfires are handled IAW safety regulations.
Ensure the ELF is being used for tactical tables.
Watch for any safety violation.
Clear each vehicles weapon systems once the exercise is complete.
Have no additional duties assigned.

z
The briefing NCO will
Know the location of other key personnel.
Be aware of how the range is being conducted.
Stay aware of the results of firing.
Know how many personnel are on the range.
CLOSING THE RANGE

13-63. The following personnel are responsible for certain events while closing the range:
z
The OIC will
Notify range control that firing has ceased.
Ensure the range or training area is cleared IAW local regulations and SOPs.
z
The NCOIC will
Supervise ammunition and target details.
Ensure the policing and cleaning of range facilities is complete.
Ensure that petroleum, oil, and lubricants (POL) spills are cleaned up either by the using
unit, or a supporting engineer unit, and reported to post authorities, depending on the size of
the spill.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-25
Chapter 13
The RSO will
Ensure all weapons are cleared.
Ensure all misfires are removed from the range.

The ammunition NCOIC will
Ensure no ammunition is removed from the range by anyone other than authorized
personnel.
Prepare residue certificates required by the ammunition supply point.
ADMINISTRATION AND EMERGENCY DIRECTIONS

13-64. Administration requirements in DA Pam 385-63, local range regulations, and unit SOPs can be
used to plan personnel and equipment requirements. All current references should be placed in a notebook
and kept at the training site at all times. Range control frequency, phone number, and certain emergency
directions must be included. Emergency directions should include the MEDEVAC radio frequency and call
sign; hospital phone numbers; and the frequency, call sign, and directions to the nearest aid station or
dispensary.
VEHICLE FLAGS
13-65. Vehicle flags should no longer be used to display weapons safety posture on the range. Weapons
safety posture is the responsibility of the VC.
MASTER GUNNERS RANGE BOX

13-66. The following list of items should be carried in the Master Gunner range box. This list should be
amended depending on the situation, whether combat or training.
z
Gunners quadrant.
z
FTs (120mm, 40mm, 25mm, caliber .50, 7.62mm and 5.56mm as applicable).
z
Compass.
z
Range maps.
z
Portable boresight panel.
z
Publications.
Local range regulation/SOP.
DA Pam 385-63.
DA Pam 350-38.
FM 3-20.21.
TC 25-8.
TMs for vehicle, weapons, communications, and other devices.
DA Forms 2408-4, Weapon Record Data (current and blanks).
DA Forms 1594, Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officers Log.

z
Crew training records.
Results from last GST.
Crew gunnery simulator unit backup.

z
Range book with scenarios, scripts, battle rosters, prior results, and any other pertinent
information.
z
VCE support equipment.
Spare tapes (audio and video).
Timing boards/stopwatches.
Pocket calculators.
Pens, pencils and grease pencils.
13-26
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Range Operations
DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet, and DA Form 7663-R, Crew Gunnery RollUp Sheet.
Notebooks.
Target maintenance equipment.
Staple gun and staples.
Hammer and nails.
Tape (100 mph).

Engineer tape.
Additional Master Gunner tools (Abrams specific).
Weather station (with air temperature and barometric pressure).
Firing probes (two or three for 120-mm tank firing pins).
Firing circuit tester.
Spline keys.
Wrenches (9/16 and 3/4).
Jewelers screwdriver.
Multimeter.
Jump cables/plugs.
Remote firing device (tank).
Spotting scope (for tank LFAST).
Portable armament accuracy checks (AAC) panel.
Cartridge extractors (7.62 mm and caliber .50).

Additional Master Gunner tools (Bradley specific).
Lacing pliers.
5-mm and 6-mm hex sockets and wrench.
Needle nose pliers.
Multimeter.
Cartridge extractor (7.62mm).
Jump cables/plugs.
Weather station (with air temperature and barometric pressure) (A3 units).
z
z
SECTION III DIGITAL RANGE SET UP

13-67. Digitally enhanced gunnery ranges support the incorporation of digital communication equipment
during firing exercises. All digitally equipped units will conduct a minimum of 50 percent of all
engagements during the crew gunnery phase as digital engagements.
DATA SETS
13-68. Each digital scenario requires a data set, which consists of a digital script and one or more
overlays, to handle digital gunnery requirements. Users can store these data sets in the mission data loader
(MDL). This lets users retrieve and distribute the data sets to any FBCB2-equipped vehicles when the
lower tactical Internet (LTI) is unavailable, or to restore data to the net control station (NCS), if needed.
RANGE OVERLAY
13-69. Units should develop standard overlays, both FBCB2 and hardcopy, for each range. At the least,
each overlay includes the following graphic control measures:
z
Objectives. These are included for orientation.
z
Battle Positions. In limited visibility, this control measure shows tower and safety personnel the
positions of the firing vehicles.
z
Boundaries. These usually consist only of outer range safety markers.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
13-27
Chapter 13
z
z
z
Target Reference Points (TRP). These help orient VCs on the battlefield. They usually include
inner and outer range safety markers or easily identified points on the battlefield.
Phase Lines. These help control movement.
Routes. These help orient the vehicle and aid in sustainment operations.
DIGITAL BASE STATION

13-70. For reliable range communications, the NCS serves as the digital base station. In case this station
fails, units should establish a backup digital base station. The NCS, however, is the only radio that is set to
frequency hopping/master (FH/M). At least one evaluator should have FBCB2 to monitor and evaluate the
firing vehicles digital traffic.
REHEARSAL
13-71. The unit should rehearse range setup before executing GTs. This allows for target synchronization,
establishment of safety procedures, fratricide avoidance, and testing of communications.
ICON MANAGEMENT
13-72. The units tactical SOP (TACSOP) provides guidelines for managing icons. After the unit
completes the table, the FBCB2 operator or VCE, acting as the platoon leader, executive officer (XO), or
S-2, removes the red icons from the system.
13-28
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Chapter 14
Individual and Crew Live-Fire Prerequisite Training

Chapter 14 discusses the Gunnery Skills Test (GST) and Gunnery Table (GT) I Crew
Critical Skill Table. The GST evaluates the individual crew members ability to execute
selected gunnery-related skills. GT I evaluates the entire vehicle crews ability to
execute selected tasks. These tests are a prerequisite to firing live ammunition and must
be completed within three months of live-fire gunnery. The tasks listed in Chapter 14
provide the unit commander with a means to certify the weapon platform crewmans
basic gunnery proficiency prior to live-fire exercises (LFX). The GST and GT I can also
be used as a guide for identifying individual and crew gunnery strengths and
weaknesses. GST and GT I results should be used by the commander and Master
Gunner when structuring the units annual gunnery training program. Following are the
tasks to be trained and tested for GST and GT I. The conditions and standards for these
tasks will be found in Special Text (ST) 3.20.21-1 (currently being developed) and will
be available for download from the Reimer Digital Library (RDL).
Contents
Section I Gunnery Skills Test .............. 14-1
Requirements ................................... 14-1
Safety Precautions ............................ 14-2
Evaluation Procedures ...................... 14-2
Planning Considerations ................... 14-3
Conduct of the Gunnery Skills Test .. 14-5
Test Stations ..................................... 14-6
Section II Gunnery Table I Crew

Critical Skills Test.................................. 14-10
Requirements .................................. 14-10
Safety Precautions .......................... 14-10
Evaluation Procedures .................... 14-10
Planning Considerations ................. 14-12
Conduct of Gunnery Table I ............ 14-13
Test Stations ................................... 14-13
SECTION I GUNNERY SKILLS TEST
REQUIREMENTS
14-1. All personnel assigned to a vehicle crew (regardless of military occupational specialty [MOS]) who
will be participating in gunnery will be administered the GST. Crew members are required to pass the GST
within three months of live-fire gunnery. A fire support officer (FSO) assigned as a loader on a company
commanders tank is also required to pass the GST. (The FSO will load the company commanders tank
during all tank tables.) To pass the GST, a crewman must receive a GO on all stations. Because Soldiers
will be cross-trained in all positions, all crew members will be tested on Common Tasks 1 and 2 and all
GST tasks specific to their weapon platform. Testing is as follows:
z
ALL crews: Stations 1 and 2 (common tasks).
z
Abrams equipped crews: Stations 3A through 6A.
z
Bradley equipped crews: Stations 3B through 6B.
z
Truck equipped crews: Stations 3T through 6T.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
14-1
Chapter 14
Note. Tank Table II can be fired with the caliber .50 inbore device only after completion of the
GST and dry or blank firing of Table II prior to using the subcaliber device. Completion of the
GST is always a prerequisite to crew gunnery.
14-2. If a crew member fails a task, he must be retrained and retested on that station until he receives a
GO. Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each station must be used to prepare, administer,
and evaluate the GST.
Note. Evaluators must have passed the GST within one month and must be validated by the
units Master Gunner or GST noncommissioned officer in charge (NCOIC) prior to testing.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14-3. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station in accordance with (IAW) the unit standing
operating procedures (SOP) and installation or division requirements.
EVALUATION PROCEDURES
ADMINISTRATIVE PROCESS
14-4. Before the crewmen arrive, the evaluator sets up the equipment and materials needed at each test
station. When the crewmen arrive, the evaluator should have a crew roster, by vehicle bumper number and
position, at his station. He logs the crewmen in on the roster at each station and provides each crewman
with all materials and necessary equipment as outlined on this page and in the test administrative guide (ST
3.20.21-1, available for download on RDL) for that station. The evaluator reads the instructions for each
station to the crewmen, exactly as written in the guide. The evaluator must use the criterion scoring
checklist provided for each task to evaluate each crewmans performance and complete DA Form 7558-R,
HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual Roll-Up (on page 14-7) as the crewman completes each
station. As each crewman finishes or the time limit is up, whichever occurs first, the evaluator checks the
crewmans performance as either GO or NO-GO, informs him of his performance on that task, and directs
him either to the next station or to further training.
Note. The company Master Gunner or GST NCOIC is responsible for filling out and
maintaining platoon and company roll-ups and for ensuring that the roll-ups are collected and
passed to higher headquarters.
EVALUATION CRITERIA
14-5. See the attached criterion scoring checklist for each task.
PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED

14-6. The personnel, equipment, and material listed below are required for all stations:
z
Primary evaluator (staff sergeant [SSG] or above; normally the Master Gunner) in charge of
administering the test (he may also occupy a test station).
z
Station evaluator, sergeant (SGT) or above (one per test station).
z
Classroom or training area.
z
Stopwatch (one per evaluator).
z
Criterion scoring checklist (one per crewman).
z
Desk and chair or clipboard (one per crewman if required).
14-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Individual and Crew Live Fire Prerequisite Training
z
z
Pencils (one per crewman if required).

Field Manual (FM) 3-20.21 (one per station).
Note. Additional items, if required, are listed in the test administrative guide for each particular
station.
ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES FOR CREWMAN RECEIVING A NO-GO

14-7. If a crewman does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion scoring checklist, he receives a
NO-GO. He must then be critiqued on that task by the evaluator, to include an explanation of his mistakes
and what he must do to correct them. Crewmen will be retested IAW the gunnery order or GST order.
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
14-8. The NCOIC tasked to conduct the GST should consider the following elements during his planning.
IDENTIFY THE TYPE OF GST

14-9. The NCOIC must determine whether the GST will be a diagnostic or a record test, using the
following considerations:
z
A diagnostic GST identifies the units strengths and weaknesses, provides information for the
gunnery program, and assesses newly assigned personnel. Although DA Pam 350-38 only
requires record testing of GST twice yearly, diagnostic evaluations should be scheduled
quarterly.
z
A record GST allows commanders to certify proficiency of crew members to meet tank table
prerequisites.
DETERMINE THE TEST SITE

14-10. Establish a test site that will support the testing of all stations. Refer to the station conditions for
each station to determine what is needed for that station.
CONSTRUCT A TEST STATION DIAGRAM (FLOW CHART)

14-11. Before the test is rehearsed, a test station diagram or flow chart should be designed (see Figure
14-1). This diagram will facilitate management and control of the test. It will also aid in briefing Soldiers
and evaluators. The diagram should include
z
Test stations.
z
Control station.
z
Direction of rotation.
z
Movement schedule.
z
Aid station/warm-up tent, if available.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
14-3
Chapter 14
Figure 14-1. Test station diagram
DETERMINE RESOURCES
14-12. The NCOIC must determine the resources necessary to support the GST. He must consider the
support of the test site, as well as the support required to conduct the test to standard. The NCOIC can
determine equipment requirements, such as dummy rounds, machine guns and vehicles by referring to the
individual stations in this chapter. To support the test site, the NCOIC must determine the amount of
support needed to conduct the test; examples include the following:
z
Vehicles with drivers.
z
Transportation to and from the test site.
z
Tents for warm-up briefings.
z
Tables for scoring.
z
Chairs.
z
Medical support, if needed.
z
Class I support, if needed.
14-13. Once the NCOIC has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel
and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the company first sergeant (1SG) or
battalion S-3 and S-4.
SELECT EVALUATORS
14-14. Evaluators should be selected as far in advance as possible. This gives the NCOIC time to select
the most qualified personnel available and to coordinate with other units, if necessary. Early selection, in
turn, allows the evaluators time to prepare. If the NCOIC must draw on resources from outside his unit, he
should request assistance from his 1SG to make this coordination. After the evaluators have been selected,
the NCOIC will brief them on their duties and responsibilities, the test schedule and location (using a flow
chart or test station diagram), and the station they will be testing.
14-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
TEST EVALUATORS
14-15. Evaluators must be technically proficient in performing all tasks to standard. The GST is typically
conducted over multiple training days. Due to personnel requirements and availability issues, each
evaluator will be tested and certified on all GST stations.
CONDUCT A REHEARSAL
14-16. Because of the size and scope of this test, it must be rehearsed before it is administered. This
rehearsal will be conducted at the test site with all evaluators present. The NCOIC should check each
station to make sure that the evaluator is aware of his duties and responsibilities, that the stations are set up
correctly with all required equipment, that support and test materials are on hand, and that each station is
conducted IAW the test administrative guides.
CONDUCT OF THE GUNNERY SKILLS TEST

14-17. Prior to testing, the NCOIC must make sure the stations are set up and all equipment and support
requirements are available. He must also make sure the crew members are briefed on safety and location of
the stations and are assigned to the test stations.
CONDUCT THE AFTER ACTION REVIEW FOR THE GST

14-18. The battalion/brigade Master Gunner or operations Sergeant Major (SGM) should conduct an after
action review (AAR) to help the NCOIC understand his actions and interactions during the conduct of the
GST. The AAR should be conducted prior to the debrief to the unit commander and should consist of a
discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the NCOIC to better
prepare the debrief to the commander as well as prepare him for the next GST.
PREPARE THE DEBRIEF

14-19. Once the test is complete, the NCOIC will prepare a debrief for the commander to inform him of
the GST results. This information is also retained for training records. The NCOIC collects the crew
members scorecards as soon as they complete testing, before anyone leaves the test site. The evaluators
can provide additional information about a crew members test performance. After all data is collected, the
NCOIC prepares summary of the results, interpreting information from test results to determine the
strengths and weaknesses of the unit. This report will, at a minimum, contain the following data:
z
A roster, by duty position, of each crew member tested.
z
The scores of each crew member tested.
z
The percentage of crew members passing the GST.
z
Percentage of GOs per station.
z
Percentage of NO-GOs per station.
z
Recommendations for corrective action.
COLLECT AND MAINTAIN GST INFORMATION

14-20. Because the GST is a live fire prerequisite, the GST roll-up information must be maintained by the
unit Master Gunner or S-3 representative for 12 months and must accompany the unit throughout the entire
gunnery density.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
14-5
Chapter 14
TEST STATIONS
14-21. Each station consists of a test administrative guide and criterion scoring checklist (see Table
14-1). Figure 14-2 shows an example of DA Form 7558-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual
Roll-Up. Figure 14-3 shows an example of DA Form 7662-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Platoon
Roll-Up. Figure 14-4 shows an example of DA Form 7665-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual
Roll-Up.
Table 14-1. Gunnery skills test task list
Task No.
Title
COMMON TASKS
Task 1
Theater Threat Vehicle and Threat Vehicle Identification (common)
Task 2
Ammunition Identification (common)
ABRAMS TASKS
Task 3A
Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate
Action on the M240 7.62-mm Machine Gun
Task 4A
Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Set Headspace and Timing, Perform a Function Check, Load,
and Perform Immediate Action on the M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun
Task 5A
Perform a Muzzle Reference System (MRS) Update
Task 6A
Reload the 120-mm Main Gun
BRADLEY TASKS
Task 3B
Action on the M240C 7.62-mm Machine Gun
Task 4B
Load and Unload AP and HE Ready Box
Task 5B
Load, Apply Immediate Action, and Unload Feeder on the M242 25-mm Gun
GUARDIAN TASKS
Task 3G
Clear, Disassemble, Assemble, Perform a Function Check, Load, and Perform Immediate Action
on the MK19 40-mm Machine Gun
Task 4G
and Perform Immediate Action on the M48 Caliber .50 Machine Gun
Task 5G
Perform Misfire Procedures on Turret Mounted Weapons
Task 6G
Load and Unload Turret Mounted Weapons
TRUCK TASKS
Task 3T
Action on the M240B 7.62-mm Machine Gun
Task 4T
and Perform Immediate Action on the M2HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun
Task 5T
Action on the MK19 40-mm Machine Gun
Task 6T
Action on the M249 5.56-mm Machine Gun
14-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 14-2. Example of DA Form 7558-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual Roll-Up
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
14-7
Chapter 14
Figure 14-3. Example of DA Form 7662-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Platoon Roll-Up
14-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 14-4. DA Form 7665-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Company Roll-Up
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
14-9
Chapter 14
SECTION II GUNNERY TABLE I CREW CRITICAL SKILLS TEST

14-22. This section discusses GT I, the crew critical skill test. GT I evaluates the crews ability to execute
selected safety and gunnery related skills. The tasks listed in this section provide unit commanders with a
means to certify the crews proficiency prior to LFXs. Gunnery Test I can also be used to identify the
crews strengths and weaknesses in performing common and vehicle-specific crew tasks. The unit
commander can use Gunnery Test I prior to any field exercise as a way to certify a crews proficiency on
safety-related and crew-specific tasks. The primary trainers for this table are the Platoon Sergeant and
company Master Gunners. This ensures standardization of tests and evaluation for their commander.
REQUIREMENTS
14-23. All personnel assigned to a vehicle crew (regardless of MOS) will be administered GT I. Crews
are required to pass the GT I within three months of live-fire gunnery. To pass GT I, a crew must receive a
GO on all stations. Because crew members are cross-trained in all positions, each crew member will be
proficient in the responsibilities for each station. All crews, regardless of vehicle type, must pass the
common tasks. In addition to the common tasks, crews must pass all tasks that apply to their vehicle type
as listed in Table 14-2. For example, a Bradley crew will have to pass tasks 1, 2, 3, 4, 5B, 6B, 7B-1, 7B-2,
7B-3, and 8B.
14-24. Commanders should require all crew members to conduct these tasks from all positions. This
allows crewmen to change positions when required during the gunnery density. For example, an Abrams
loader may serve as a driver on another vehicle. This training strategy will help the commander in
overcoming such circumstances as crew shortages or unforeseen absences (such as emergency leave,
quarters) of the rostered crew members.
14-25. If a crew fails a task, all crew members must be retrained and retested on that station until they
receive a GO. Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each station must be used to prepare,
administer, and evaluate GT I.
Note.
Evaluators must have passed the GT I within six months prior to testing.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14-26. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station IAW the unit SOP, equipment TMs, or
Safety of Use Messages.
EVALUATION PROCEDURES
ADMINISTRATIVE PROCESS
14-27. Before the crewmen arrive, the evaluator sets up the equipment and materials needed at each test
station. When the crew arrives, the evaluator logs the crewmen in on a crew roster at each station and
provides each crewman with all materials and equipment displayed, as outlined in this discussion and in the
test administrative guide (see ST 3.20.21-1, available for download from RDL) for that station. The
evaluator reads the instructions to the crewmen exactly as written in the guide for each station. The
evaluator must use the criterion scoring checklist provided for each task to evaluate each crewmans
performance. He then completes DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet. As each crew finishes or
the time limit is up, whichever occurs first, the evaluator checks the crews performance as either GO or
NO-GO, informs them of their performance on that task, and directs them either to the next station or to
further training.
14-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Note. The company Master Gunner or NCOIC is responsible for maintaining score sheets and
roll-ups and for ensuring that these records are collected and passed to higher headquarters,
where they are maintained for 12 months. These records, in addition to all GST score sheet rollups, will accompany the unit for the entire duration of the gunnery density. They must be readily
available to the range officer in charge (OIC) and range safety officer (RSO) when firing.
Table 14-2. Gunnery table I task list

Task No. Title
COMMON TASKS
Task 1
Crew Fire Evacuation Drills
Task 2
Crew Rollover Drills
Task 3
Send/Receive Radio Reports
Task 4
Send/Receive Digital Reports
ABRAMS TASKS
Task 5A
Evacuate an Injured Crewman (Tank)
Task 6A
Boresight an Abrams
Task 7A
Misfire Procedures on the 120-mm Main Gun
Task 8A
Remove/Install the Breechblock on the M256A1 120-mm Cannon
BRADLEY TASKS
Task 5B
Evacuate an Injured Crewman (Bradley)
Task 6B
Boresight a Bradley
Task 7B-1 Misfire Procedures on the 25-mm Main Gun

Task 7B-2 Misfire Procedures on the TOW
Task 7B-3 Remove a Misfired TOW
Task 8B
Remove/Install the M242 25-mm Main Gun
GUARDIAN TASKS
Task 5G
Evacuate an Injured Crewman (Guardian)
Task 6G
Boresight a Guardian
Task 7G
Mount turret mounted weapons
TRUCK TASKS
Task 5T
Evacuate an Injured Crewman (Truck)
EVALUATION CRITERIA
14-28. See the criterion scoring checklist for each task.
PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED

14-29. The personnel, equipment, and material listed below are required for all stations:
z
Primary evaluator (SSG or above; normally the Platoon Sergeant) in charge of administering the
test.
z
Classroom, training area, or maintenance bay.
z
Stopwatch (one per evaluator).
z
DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet.
z
FM 3-20.21 (one per station).
z
Appropriate TMs for the vehicle on which the crew is being tested.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
14-11
Chapter 14
Note. Additional items, if required, are listed in the test administrative guide for each specific
station.
ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES FOR CREWS RECEIVING A NO-GO

14-30. If a crew does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion scoring checklist, they receive a
NO-GO. They must then be critiqued on that task by the evaluator, including an explanation of their
mistakes and what they must do to correct them. The crew will be retrained IAW the pertinent TM or FM
and retested IAW with the local SOP.
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
14-31. GT I is performed at the platoon level and is supervised at the company level. Due to training time
constraints, the table can take 30 to 90 days to complete. The company Master Gunner and Platoon
Sergeants are responsible for the conduct of GT I. They should consider the following elements during his
planning.
IDENTIFY THE TYPE OF TESTING

14-32. The Master Gunner and Platoon Sergeant must determine whether GT I will be administered as a
diagnostic test or a record test, using the following considerations:
z
A diagnostic GT I identifies the units strengths and weaknesses, provides information for the
gunnery program, and assesses newly assigned personnel. Although DA Pam 350-38 only
requires record testing of GT I twice yearly, diagnostic evaluations should be scheduled
quarterly.
z
A record GT I allows commanders to certify proficiency of crews to meet live-fire prerequisites.
DETERMINE THE TEST SITE

14-33. Establish a test site that will support the testing of all stations (for example, the boresighting test
requires a clear view of a target at 1,200 meters). Refer to the station conditions for each station to
determine what is needed for each station.
CONSTRUCT A TEST STATION

14-34. Before the test is rehearsed, a test station diagram or flow chart should be designed. This diagram
will facilitate management and control of the test. It will also aid in briefing Soldiers and evaluators. The
diagram should include
z
Test stations.
z
Control station.
z
Direction of rotation.
z
Movement schedule.
z
Aid station/warm-up tent, if available.
DETERMINE RESOURCES
14-35. The NCOIC must determine the resources necessary to support the GT I. He must consider the
support of the test site, as well as the training aids required to conduct the test to standard. The NCOIC can
identify training aids, such as dummy rounds, machine guns, vehicles, and muzzle boresight devicesby
referring to the individual stations in this chapter. To support the test site, the NCOIC must determine the
amount of support needed to conduct the test; examples include the following:
z
Vehicles with drivers.
z
Transportation to and from the test site.
14-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
z
z
z
Tents for warm-up briefings.

Stopwatches.
Tables for scoring.
Chairs.
Medical support, if needed.
Class I support, if needed.
14-36. Once the NCOIC has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel
and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the company 1SG or battalion S-3 and S-4.
SELECT AND TEST EVALUATORS

14-37. VCs serve as evaluators for their crews, with the Platoon Sergeants as the primary training/testing
supervisor. The company Master Gunner and Platoon Sergeants will brief their VCs their duties and
responsibilities as evaluators, as well as on the test schedule and location. Each evaluator will be tested on
all test stations prior to evaluating GT I.
CONDUCT OF GUNNERY TABLE I

14-38. Prior to testing, the NCOIC must make sure the vehicles are set up and all equipment and training
aids are available. He must also make sure the crews are briefed on safety. During testing, the Master
Gunner or Platoon Sergeant will spot-check each station to make sure that task standards are being
maintained and that the evaluators are maintaining a roster of evaluated personnel and are annotating DA
Form 7664 R, HBCT Gunnery Table I Crew Critical Skills Test Scoresheet.
CONDUCT THE AAR FOR GUNNERY TABLE I

14-39. An AAR should be conducted by the battalion/brigade Master Gunner or Operations SGM to help
the NCOIC understand his actions and interactions during the conduct of the GT I. The AAR should be
conducted prior to the debrief, to the unit commander and should consist of a discussion of the strengths
and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the NCOIC to better prepare the debrief to the
commander as well as will prepare him for the next iteration of GT I.
PREPARE THE DEBRIEF

14-40. Once the test is complete, the NCOIC will prepare a brief for the commander to inform him of the
GT I results. This information is also retained for training records. The NCOIC collects each crews
scorecards as soon as they complete testing, before anyone leaves the test site. The evaluators can provide
additional information about a crews test performance. After all data is collected, the NCOIC prepares a
summary of the results. Information from test results must be interpreted to determine the strengths and
weaknesses of the unit. This report will, at a minimum, contain the following data:
z
A roster, by duty position, of each crew tested.
z
The scores of each crew tested.
z
The percentage of crews passing GT I.
z
Percentage of GOs per station.
z
Percentage of NO-GOs per station.
z
Recommendations for corrective action.
TEST STATIONS
14-41. Each station consists of a test administrative guide and criterion scoring checklist (see Table
14-2). Examples of DA Form 7664-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I Crew Critical Skills Test Scoresheet; DA
Form 7660-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I Crew Critical Skills Test Platoon Roll-Up; and DA Form 7661-R,
HBCT Gunnery Table I Crew Critical Skills Test Company Roll-Up are shown in Figure 14-5 through
Figure 14-7.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
14-13
Chapter 14
Skills Test Scoresheet
14-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Skills Test Platoon Roll-Up
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
14-15
Chapter 14
Skills Test Company Roll-Up
14-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Chapter 15
Crew Evaluation
Direct fire crew gunnery evaluation follows a common methodology for all platform
systems within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT). Chapter 15 describes the
methodology for evaluating crew gunnery as well as the crew prerequisites for
specified training events. This information will support the gunnery tables presented
in Chapter 16 (stabilized gunnery) and Chapter 17 (unstabilized gunnery).
For the unit to have a successful gunnery density with marked improvement in crew
performance and proficiency the unit must have a sound set of scenarios developed
and proofed by the unit Master Gunner or Senior Gunner (gunnery specialist in
Sustainment Units that do not have assigned Master Gunners), adequate resources
including make up time on the range(s), and exceptional, professional evaluations.
This chapter discusses the vehicle crew evaluators (VCE) roles and responsibilities
and the process of evaluating the gunnery tables.
Contents
Section I Vehicle Crew Evaluators ...... 15-2
Evaluator Team Composition............ 15-2
Evaluator Roles and Prerequisites .... 15-3
Duties ............................................... 15-4
Vehicle Crew Evaluators Certification15-5
Section II Engagement Task,
Conditions, and Standards..................... 15-6
Evaluation Terms and Concepts ....... 15-6
Section III Firing Occasion and Timing
Events .................................................... 15-10
Target Exposure Time .................... 15-10
Vehicle Exposure Time ................... 15-11
Offensive, Short Halt, or Retrograde
Engagements.................................. 15-11
Defensive Engagements ................. 15-12
Exposure Break Times ................... 15-14
Section IV Evaluating the Crews Duties15-19
Immediate DisqualificationExtremely
Hazardous Conduct ........................ 15-19
Automatic Zero-Point PenaltyCritical
Crew TasksNot Adhering to Task,
Conditions, and Standards.............. 15-19
3 September 2009
30-Point Penalty
Safety/Personnel Protection ........... 15-20
5-Point PenaltyLeader Or
Fundamental Crew Tasks............... 15-20
Section V Common Crew
Scoresheet............................................. 15-22
Section VI Crew Qualification
Standards .............................................. 15-26
Individual Gunnery Phase .............. 15-26
Crew Gunnery Phase ..................... 15-26
Qualification Re-Fires ..................... 15-26
Section VII Call For
Engagements ........................................ 15-27
Section VIII After Action Reviews ..... 15-27
Planning The AARs ........................ 15-27
Preparing For The AARs ................ 15-28
Conducting The AARs .................... 15-28
Matrix Examples ............................. 15-29
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-1
Chapter 15
SECTION I VEHICLE CREW EVALUATORS

15-1. The key to a successful gunnery density that builds on crews previous performance, increases
competence and confidence of the crews, and establishes a high proficiency standard is the VCE. The
VCE, if selected correctly, is a large contributor to the overall success of the unit during the gunnery
events.
15-2. Commanders will select highly competent crewmen who meet the prerequisites (see paragraph 15-8)
to perform the duties as VCEs. They should consider the crewmans past performance, competence,
experience, and leader recommendations in order to identify the best personnel for evaluator positions,
particularly for qualification tables. It is essential that the evaluators have exceptional attention to detail,
gunnery experience, and professionalism in order to provide the firing crews excellent feedback, tips,
methods, and engagement techniques that will drastically increase the crews lethality through the course
of the gunnery density.
EVALUATOR TEAM COMPOSITION

15-3. Depending on the size of the gunnery density and the range complex, the number of evaluators may
vary. Having the correct number and type of evaluators will maximize the units throughput of firing
vehicles on the range, reduce range down time, and provide for the highest quality evaluations.
15-4. There are four key members of an evaluation team; the primary evaluator, the timing controller, the
thermal optic/audio/visual controller, and the radio telephone operator (RTO).
15-5. Depending on the range complex, additional members in the same roles should be employed to
facilitate crew throughput and a smooth transition between firing crews. For example, when firing on a
Multipurpose Range Complex (MPRC) using two core firing lanes, a possible team composition is shown
in Figure 15-1.
Figure 15-1. Vehicle crew evaluator team example
15-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
15-6. The same quantity of personnel is required for day and night as shown in Figure 15-1. For planning
purposes, double the number of personnel tasked. This provides the evaluators off time to conduct other
missions, especially as typical night fire phases continue until mandatory shut down times.
Note. Evaluators external to the firing units battalion must be used for evaluating qualification
tables. These evaluators must provide an in-brief to the firing unit prior to firing, typically
during the morning safety briefing the day of firing. Qualification table evaluations must be
accomplished by a non-biased, external source.
EVALUATOR ROLES AND PREREQUISITES

15-7. When selecting an evaluator for gunnery training, the following prerequisites must be adhered to in
order to provide the crews the best available assessment of their gunnery performance. As the VCE teams
are comprised of different positions, duties, and responsibilities, the prerequisites are developed by team
position.
PRIMARY EVALUATOR/EVALUATOR
15-8. This evaluator will complete the scoresheets with the crew information, firing data by engagement,
occasion information, and after action review (AAR) comments accordingly. The evaluator is responsible
for leading the AAR for firing crews at the end of the day and night phase. The evaluator
z
Is a staff sergeant or above.
z
Weapon system qualified within the last twelve month (active component [AC] and reserve
component [RC]). The most experienced member of the evaluation team.
z
Certified within three months of evaluating any live-fire exercise (six months for RC) on all
evaluator positions on the team. Certification includes successful completion of the Vehicle
Crew Evaluator Exportable Package (VCEEP), trained and tested by the unit Master Gunner or
Gunnery NCO/Senior Gunner.
z
Should be an experienced vehicle commander (VC) of the same platform as the firing crew.
Although the scoring and evaluation process is standard within the HBCT, it is extremely
difficult for an evaluator to conduct the AAR with the firing crew if the evaluator has limited or
no experience as a VC on the evaluated crews platform. For example, an Abrams commander
should not conduct the AAR for a Bradley crew. In this case, it establishes a communication
barrier that is counterproductive to the AAR process.
z
Qualified maneuver units VCs that have experience in motorized gunnery are authorized to act
as primary evaluators to sustainment unit crews.
TIMING CONTROLLER
15-9. This evaluators primary responsibility (as detailed later in this chapter) is to accurately keep time of
firing occasional information. This timing information and its accuracy are critical in identifying the crews
qualification status of the engagements. The timing controller
z
Is a sergeant or above.
z
Must have previous gunnery experience as a gunner or VC. Certified within three months of
evaluating any live-fire exercise (six months for RC) on conduct of fire, crew response,
engagement techniques, timing procedures, and safety aspects of the firing vehicles.
Certification includes successful completion of the VCEEP, trained and tested by the unit
Master Gunner or gunnery NCO/Senior Gunner.
z
Can be of any MOS provided all other requirements are met. The standard evaluation process
allows for unit flexibility when assigning evaluators to this position.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-3
Chapter 15
THERMAL OPTIC/AUDIO/VISUAL CONTROLLER

15-10. This evaluators primary responsibility (as detailed later in this chapter) is to orchestrate and
facilitate the video and audio recordings to support the evaluation, re-timing of engagements (if necessary),
and the after action review tape. The evaluator
z
Is a specialist or above.
z
Should have gunnery experience. Must be certified by the unit Master Gunner or gunnery
NCO/Senior Gunner on use of the equipment, adjustment of thermal and day optics, target
locations, engagement scenarios, and recording techniques. This evaluator DOES NOT have to
certify through the VCEEP, but it is highly encouraged.
z
Must have a working knowledge of fire commands and can clearly identify the intended target
the crew is actively engaging in a timely manner. He must be able to accomplish this through
audio cues and fire commands from the firing net and/or the jump radio frequency. His
proficiency at this task is critical in providing the firing crews a video representation of their
engagement that clearly shows strike of the round(s) in and around the target area.
RADIO TELEPHONE OPERATOR

15-11. The tower RTOs primary responsibility (as detailed later in this chapter) is to control movement
of firing and non-firing vehicles on the range in a safe manner, and control the script or firing instructions
to the crews. The RTO
z
Is a sergeant or above.
z
Must have previous gunnery experience. Should have previous tower experience, but can be
trained during the individual and crew tables. If experience is limited, he should not be used on
the qualification tables.
z
No certification is required. He must be briefed on the conduct of the range. He must also be
provided with a copy of the tactical script (radio traffic) that will be read to the firing crews over
the firing frequency to initiate their engagement.
z
Although only one RTO is required for the day and night phase, units should consider
separating the RTO details between the Admin net and the Firing net, each with their own
respective RTO. This additional RTO is extremely helpful in pushing crews to the firing line
while his counterpart can focus on the safe conduct of the firing line.
Note. During the gunnery density, units should rotate evaluators through all team positions and
take Soldiers that do not meet all the prerequisites for Qualification Tables and incorporate them
into the individual and non-qualification crew tables. This enhances their skills and is a great
learning experience for the junior leaders.
DUTIES
15-12. The VCE assesses basic vehicle crew duties for crew gunnery through the use of jump radios
(intercom capable platforms) or by hot bedding in a firing vehicle. He enforces safety requirements,
instructs and evaluates crews during non-qualification exercises, and evaluates crews during qualification
exercises. Finally, he conducts a debriefing to the crew in an AAR at the completion of each firing phase
(day/night).
15-13. During the evaluation, the VCE is responsible for
z
Assessment of the crews performance during the engagements fired on the range.
z
Recording of firing occasion information on the appropriate scoresheet.
z
Assessment of the crews duties, including fire commands, crew responses, drills, crew actions,
safety precepts, and conduct on the range.
15-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
Recording of violations, corrections, or instructional guidance for use in the AAR. All
comments must be based on doctrine or current tactics, techniques, and procedures relevant to
the firing platform or engagement task. The VCE is responsible for referencing all crew duty
penalties from this chapter. All penalties must be addressed during the AAR process.
Reporting the final results of the firing phase, day and night, by engagement to the unit Master
Gunner or gunnery NCO/Senior Gunner. Compiling the units results is a unit responsibility.
15-14. The VCE does not control or influence the alibi process (discussed later in this chapter).
VEHICLE CREW EVALUATORS CERTIFICATION

15-15. In order to complete accurate and efficient evaluations of each gunnery table, VCEs must be
thoroughly trained and certified on their duties and responsibilities. This includes proficiency on all aspects
of direct fire engagement and indirect fires request and use. The unit Master Gunner or Gunnery
NCO/Senior Gunner is responsible for the training, testing, evaluation, certification, recertification, and
sustainment of the VCEs prior to gunnery execution.
15-16. Certification is initial training for VCEs. VCEs must certify within 3 months of evaluating any
live-fire exercise (6 months for RC). For digitally equipped units, VCEs must be FBCB2 qualified.
Certification consists of
z
Complete the 40-hour VCEEP for the appropriate platform. Although the gunnery evaluation
process is standardized, the VCEEP packages are oriented specifically to the weapon platform to
reduce confusion and enhance the Soldiers learning. The VCEEP can be obtained from
https://www.us.army.mil/suite/kc/9773303. Users must have a valid AKO account and password
to gain access. This package contains all the required certification materials, to include detailed
information in a courseware format covering all pertinent chapters in the HBCT Gunnery
Manual, including the use of this chapter.
z
The student must receive a GO on the scoresheets with audio command and pass a written
examination with at least 20 questions with a minimum score of 70 percent.
RECERTIFICATION
15-17. Recertification is refresher training for VCEs. Recertification consists of the VCEEP written
examination. The recertification also includes information on any doctrinal changes that directly affect the
evaluation process that have occurred within the previous 18 months. VCEs must recertify annually by
passing the written exam with a minimum score of 70 percent.
SUSTAINMENT
15-18. Sustainment training ensures the VCE reinforces what he learned during the VCEEP course. It
strengthens his knowledge base by practical exercise and training opportunities at the unit level. It ensures
that the commander can find consistent, effective crew evaluators year-round, and increases the experience
level of the certified VCEs. The following is a list of sustainment training opportunities for the certified
VCEs within the unit:
z
Assign as VCEs for another units gunnery density.
z
Perform VCE functions while conducting instructor/operator functions (I/O) in the units
simulator (such as Advanced Gunnery Training Systems [AGTS], Bradley Advanced Training
System [BATS]).
z
Evaluate crews while completing chair drills.
z
Act as assistant instructors during VCEEP courses for own and external units.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-5
Chapter 15
TRAINER RESPONSIBILITIES
15-19. Master Gunners are gunnery subject matter experts (SME). They develop and conduct VCE
training using the VCE exportable training package as the baseline. The Master Gunner should always
include the following information specific to the training range being used during the VCE classes:
z
Brigade Master Gunners are responsible for monitoring the VCE training program.
z
Battalion and company Master Gunners are responsible for executing the VCE training program.
z
Unit Master Gunners are responsible for VCE support and keeping the units certified VCEs
informed of changes to gunnery doctrine as appropriate.
SECTION II ENGAGEMENT TASK, CONDITIONS, AND STANDARDS

15-20. Each table has its own established guidelines and requirements. These standard requirements are
the minimum proficiency levels (MPL) that must be maintained on every firing table. They are based upon
the platforms capabilities, unit mission, and potential threats. The MPLs are directly related to the
engagements, as the commander determines the range to target, vehicle posture (offense, defense, or short
halt), target type based on ammunition resourcing and engagement type, and level of degradation to the
firing platforms fire control system or crew.
15-21. Specific information on the MPLs can be found in each platforms chapter for crew and collective
gunnery, respectively.
15-22. The designer of the scenario (or series of engagements that make up the gunnery table), must
follow the prescribed rules of the MPLs. Each of these MPLs when applied has a direct impact on the
evaluators use of this manual to accurately derive a score for the engagement. The MPLs applied to the
engagement type (VC engagement, main gun pure, machine gun pure, change of weapon system, etc.)
provide the evaluator the task and conditions.
15-23. The following list of items are the minimum required information for the VCE to evaluate firing
crews correctly:
z
Target type(s).
z
Range to each target.
z
Firing vehicle type.
z
Firing vehicle posture.
15-24. The Master Gunner must provide the crew scoresheets with the engagement information pre-filled
out to reduce the possibility of errors. He must also provide a tentative firing order to the VCE team to best
prepare their evaluations.
15-25. The evaluator uses the posture, target type, and range to target for each target presented during an
engagement and applies them to the scoring matrix. This application of information establishes the
standards for the individual target. The collective standards from all presented targets (up to three),
establishes the standards for the engagement.
15-26. The application of the task, conditions, standards, and firing occasion times will determine the
total score of the firing task or engagement. This will be discussed later in this chapter.
EVALUATION TERMS AND CONCEPTS

15-27. The standard scoring model developed for the HBCT manual will be the common scoring system
for all direct-fire platform mounted gunnery evaluation across the Army. This system of evaluation
represents a paradigm shift from performance based gunnery to a hybrid threat threshold/performance
model, called threat based methodology. The threat targets replicated for gunnery training are the T-90
main battle tank, the BMP-3 Infantry Fighting Vehicle (IFV), an antitank guided missile (ATGM) capable
technical truck, dismounted infantry and rocket propelled grenade (RPG) teams with RPG-29 capability.
15-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
THREAT BASED METHODOLOGY

15-28. The standard gunnery model is designed specifically to reflect the potential threats capability to
harm the firing vehicle. This is done by establishing a 70 point line, using established threat capabilities,
world wide.
FIRING PLATFORM
15-29. Each firing platform must have the capability to destroy the presented targets. The Master Gunner
is responsible to ensure the engagements of the scenario are appropriate to the firing vehicle. The standard
evaluation model is specifically designed for Abrams (all variants), Bradley (all variants), and armed truck
crews (any vehicle with a crew served small or medium caliber weapon system).
THREAT TYPE
15-30. Each threat target type is assigned a matrix based on the firing platform (Abrams, Bradley, or
Armed Truck). Each vehicle platform has its own set of matrices as the resilience against threat weapons is
different from platform to platform.
Matrix Category
15-31. Within the vehicle set of matrices, each vehicle has a separate scoring matrix based on the firing
vehicles posture, referred to as the matrix category. The three types of matrices categories are offense,
defense, and short halt. Short halt may be a vehicle that is on the offense then comes to a halt to engage, or
a static traffic control point (TCP) where the firing vehicle is exposed to the enemy threats.
Threat Matrices
15-32. These are the performance tables for the standard gunnery model. They are required to determine
the overall crew performance. A matrix is provided for each firing platform, regarding each threat type,
and firing vehicle matrix category (see Figure 15-2).
Determine the Score
15-33. When determining the score for a target type, the evaluator must select the proper matrix (called
an exposure matrix) to determine the target score. This is completed by identifying the appropriate sheet
(matrix) for the firing vehicle, posture or matrix category, and target type. Once identified, the evaluator
must cross index the threats range to target and the time determined to engage and destroy the threat. The
matrices and their use will be described in greater detail later, but understanding the principles of the
matrices up front will provide better understanding of the standard scoring methodology as you progress
through this chapter.
Exposure Matrix
15-34. The exposure matrices, described above, determine the crews allowable exposure time to a given
threat target. This methodology depends on various threat weapon systems capabilities. When using an
exposure matrix, the VCE looks at the left-hand column for the exposure time that was recorded for that
target. He follows that row to the right until it intersects with the range to that target (located on the top
row). The number in the corresponding box is the raw score for that target. For targets that fall between the
100-meter increments, the VCE rounds the range up to the nearest 100 meters (for example, he rounds up
1,530 meters to 1,600 meters, providing the benefit of doubt to the firing crew). The matrices include
z
Armored targets. These matrixes are based on the time a T-90 125-mm main gun takes to hit
an Abrams tank or Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV). There are three matrixes based on
offensive, defensive, and short halt conditions.
z
Light-armored targets. These matrixes are based on the time a BMP-3 or ATGM takes to hit
an Abrams/Bradley/armed truck. There are three matrixes based on offensive, defensive, and
short halt conditions.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-7
Chapter 15
Unarmored/troop targets. These matrixes are based on the time a truck-mounted ATGM or
dismounted ATGM team takes to hit an Abrams/Bradley/armed truck. There are three matrixes
based on offensive, defensive, and short halt conditions.
15-35. Each firing vehicle type has a corresponding set of matrices. Care must be taken by the VCE to
ensure that the proper matrix under the proper conditions is used to score each target.
15-36. To illustrate how the general process works; the VCE is evaluating an Abrams firing from a
defensive fighting position at a T-90 threat target at 900 meters. The VCE selects the appropriate exposure
matrix, Abrams Armored Defense, for the engagement. To identify the threat target kill standard, the VCE
moves across the top row indicating range to target and finds 900 meters. He moves down that column and
identifies the 70 point line. He moves left over to the total exposure time column and identifies the max
time to kill at 13 seconds. So, an Abrams platform fighting from a defensive position, firing at a threat
armor vehicle at 900 meters, has 13 seconds to destroy the target, indicated by the 70 Point Line. Keep in
mind that the Defense on the matrix does not indicate the threat posture, but the friendly vehicle posture.
Figure 15-2. Sample threat matrix

70 Point Line
15-37. This line on the matrices represents a known time when a highly trained opposing force has fired
at the friendly vehicle such that the probability of hit and the potential damage from that strike results in a
mobility, firepower, or catastrophic kill is above 50%. The other 50% generates negligible damage.
15-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
Above the 70 Point Line

15-38. If a firing vehicle destroys the threat vehicle before the 70 point line (faster), points received for
that specific target, (at that specific range, from a known platform at a known own-vehicle posture) results
in additional points based on crew performance.
Note. If the crew scores below the 70 point line for any of the target(s) presented during an
engagement, the crew cannot qualify the engagement, regardless of the score.
15-39. Engagement task standards require the vehicle crew to hit a given target with an appropriate
number of rounds, utilizing the proper engagement techniques for the weapon system selected, without
exposing their own vehicle beyond the given targets threat time (time it takes for the threat to acquire,
engage, and get a round/burst on the crews vehicle). Crews must kill all targets in an engagement in
accordance with (IAW) the appropriate engagement task standards in order to pass the engagement. Crews
must also adhere to the critical crew tasks and safety/personnel protection standards described in this
section. Engagement task standards include the target kill standards.
TARGET KILL STANDARDS

15-40. A firing crew must destroy all targets presented during an engagement in order to pass or qualify
that engagement. Table 15-1 shows all platforms target kill standards based on the weapon system
employed. If a crew fails to achieve a kill on any target during an engagement IAW Table 15-3, that crew
will ultimately fail the engagement.
Table 15-1. Vehicle target kill standards
Target
120mm Point
Target Type
All
120mm Area
Troop
Vehicles
ATGM Team
25mm Point
25mm Area
Aerial Target
Bunker/Fortified
buildings
Troop
Armored Target
TOW Family of
Missiles
Armored Target
Bunker
Caliber .50
MK 19 40mm
Point
Mk 19 40mm Area
7.62mm
RPG Team
Unarmored
Vehicle
RPG Team
Unarmored
Troop
RPG Team
Unarmored
Vehicle
Troop
3 September 2009
Standards
Hit target with at least one round.
Hit two troop targets with main gun (canister) and achieve a kill on
50 percent of area targets overall between main gun round and
machine gun suppression.
Hit with at least three rounds at any distance.
Hit with at least one round (HE) at a distance greater than 900
meters.
Hit with at least five rounds at any distance
Hit with at least five rounds (HE) at ranges to 1,200 meters.
Suppress 75 percent of target area with HE at ranges greater than
900 meters.
Hit with one missile of basic TOW TOW 2B from 65 to 3,750
meters.
Hit with one missile of extended range with TOW (Arrow) from 65
to 4750 meters.
Hit with one missile of TOW BB from ranges of 1201 to 3,750
meters.
Hit one target with one round.
Hit target with at least three rounds.
Hit one round within 5 meters of the target.
Hit one round within 5 meters of the target.
Hit one round within 5 meters of the target and suppress the area.
Hit one target with one round at ranges less than 900 meters.
Hit with at least three rounds at ranges less than 900 meters.
Hit one troop target with one round at ranges less than 900
meters.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-9
Chapter 15
SECTION III FIRING OCCASION AND TIMING EVENTS

15-41. During the evaluation process of a firing crew, in order to determine a firing crews score for an
individual target and subsequently, the overall engagement, certain timing events must be recorded. These
timing events begin and end at specific times, and in certain instances can have a break time where the
running engagement time is theoretically paused, and all engagements end. This section details the
different measurements of time that are required for the timing controller to accurately measure, record,
and report.
15-42. It is imperative that the timing controller be fluent in all the terms, definitions, and actions listed in
this section. The most common errors when evaluating crews happen during the timing procedures and can
cripple a crews ability to qualify an engagement, and perhaps, the entire table due to a lack of attention to
detail.
15-43. The timing events and firing occasions listed here will be listed in a sequential form, however,
certain timing considerations may take place at multiple instances during the course of an engagement. The
VCEEP course that accompanies this manual provides excellent training material to reinforce the elements
in this (and other) sections. The following firing occasions and timing events are detailed in this section:
z
Target exposure time.
z
Vehicle exposure time.
z
Offensive, short halt, or retrograde engagements.
z
Defensive engagement.
z
Exposure break time.
TARGET EXPOSURE TIME

15-44. Each engagement is made up of a target array. This target array can consist of one to three targets.
For unstabilized gunnery tables, no more than two targets will be presented during an engagement unless a
friendly/neutral panel is presented. During unstabilized gunnery tables, no targets will be presented on a
delay.
TARGET DELAYS
15-45. For engagements with three targets in the presentation, the third target will be presented to the
firing crew not earlier than 15 seconds after both initial targets in the presentation are locked in place.
Commanders may select the third target delay time between 15 and 25 seconds based on their training
objectives. This 15 to 25 second gap between presentations is the target delay. It represents within the
scenario additional forces that are moving into the firing vehicles sector, or replicates targetry that
required friendly movement to detect.
15-46. All presented targets will be fully exposed for 50 seconds in the defense and offense. Delayed
targets will be presented for 50 continuous seconds, beginning when they are fully locked after their delay.
For example, on a presentation of three targets, the third target is presented after a 20 second delay at the
discretion of the commander. The initial two targets (if not destroyed by the firing vehicle) will be exposed
to the firing crew for 50 seconds. At that point, the targets will go down. At the 20 second point, the third
target presents itself and remains locked and exposed to the firing crew for 50 seconds.
MOVING TARGETS
15-47. Moving target exposure times are no different than listed above. The scenario may detail that the
moving target be evasive in nature, but the total exposure time of 50 seconds remains the same.
15-48. On computer-controlled ranges, Master Gunners must proof target scenarios and adjust, if
necessary, target lift times to ensure multiple targets are programmed to lift at the same time. Adjustment
may also be needed for delayed targets to ensure they are presented at the proper time and duration.
15-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
VEHICLE EXPOSURE TIME

15-49. The VCE must record vehicle exposure times for each task fired. Vehicle exposure time measures
how long the firing vehicle is exposed to any threat target(s) that are currently presented and locked in
position. Timing procedures apply for single- and multiple-target engagements. The VCE determines
timing as described below and without variations.
OFFENSIVE, SHORT HALT, OR RETROGRADE ENGAGEMENTS

TIME START
15-50. Time starts when the initial target(s) for the engagement is fully exposed (target lock) or when the
crew fires the first round, whichever occurs first (see Figure 15-3 and Figure 15-4). If two targets are
presented initially, time does not start until both targets are fully exposed and locked in position or when
the crew fires the first round, whichever occurs first.
Figure 15-3. Targets not fully presented example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-11
Chapter 15
Figure 15-4. Targets fully presented and locked example
Notes. Offensive engagements require the vehicle to be moving at a tactical pace

prior to the command to lift targetry.
Short halt engagements require the vehicle to
Be moving on the offense at a tactical pace prior to the command to lift
targetry. Once the VC recognizes the threat, commands are given to the driver
to halt and initiate fire commands as necessary.
Be occupying a TCP from a stationary position without the ballistic protection
of a battle position. Fire commands may be initiated immediately upon
identification of the targets.
Retrograde engagements are offensive engagements that occur over the firing
vehicles rear deck. The vehicle does not have to halt prior to firing.
TIME STOPS
15-51. Time stops for each target in an engagement when the target is killed or when target exposure time
expires.
DEFENSIVE ENGAGEMENTS
15-52. In a defensive engagement, the firing vehicle is positioned in a turret-down position. On
command, the driver may bring the vehicle forward to clear the main weapon from the berm or battle
position, moves into the hull-down position to engage target(s), then returns to the turret-down position.
This is typically for Abrams, Bradley, and ASV crews, however when firing armed trucks, the VC may
wish to observe fires from the gunner and need to move forward into the hull down position. An example
of the turret and hull down positions for Abrams, Bradley, and armed trucks are shown in Figure 15-5 and
Figure 15-6.
15-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
Figure 15-5. Defense timing procedure example, turret down or defilade position
Figure 15-6. Defense timing procedure example, hull down or enfilade position
TIME STARTS
15-53. Target exposure starts when the initial target(s) for the engagement is fully exposed (target lock)
or when the crew fires the first round, whichever occurs first (see Figure 15-3 and Figure 15-4). If two
targets are presented initially, time does not start until both targets are fully exposed and locked in position
and locked in position or when the crew fires the first round, whichever occurs first.
DEFILADE TIME STOPS/STARTS

15-54. Defilade time ends when the VC announces DRIVER-MOVE OUT, or when a weapon is fired.
Defilade time starts again when the VC announces DRIVER-MOVE BACK, or in the case of firing a
machine gun from the defilade, when the firer stops firing the machine gun completely. Again, the purpose
of this is to have a recording of the timing event from the jump radio/intercom system on the evaluation
recording in the event retiming is required.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-13
Chapter 15
TIME RESUMES
15-55. Time resumes when the crew fires another round or when the VC directs the driver to move
forward, whichever occurs first.
Note. There is no limit to the amount of defilade time a crew can acquire as long as target
exposure time is not exceeded.
TIME STOPS
15-56. Time stops when all targets have been destroyed or the target exposure time expires.
EXPOSURE BREAK TIMES

15-57. Exposure break times are designed to credit the crew when due to certain circumstances, the crew
cannot safely engage the targetry, or the target presented cannot be observed for direct fire engagement
through no fault of the crew. In all cases, in order to receive exposure break times, the crew must be fully
prepared to engage, if not for the situation.
DUST DOWN/WIND DOWN

15-58. A dust down occurs when a round falls short of the target and debris (not the round itself) knocks
the target down. This can happen to any firing platform during the conduct of an engagement.
15-59. A wind down occurs when a large caliber round passes (not striking) a target panel and blows the
target down.
15-60. If either a skip round or near miss knocks down the target, the VCE or control officer will
announce DUST DOWN or WIND DOWN, as appropriate over the firing frequency. If the target is
the only target remaining in a multiple-target engagement, all time (engagement and exposure) will stop
until the target is represented (it may need to recycle on the tower instrumentation requiring additional
time). If the target has to be re-presented due to dust down, wind down, or target malfunction, the crew will
be alerted and told the exposure time remaining for that target. When the target is re-presented, time will
start when the target is fully exposed or a weapon system fires, whichever occurs first. If more than one
target remains after a dust down or wind down, engagement time will not be stopped unless all other
targets are knocked down before the dust-down target reappears.
15-61. The ultimate intent of this type of break time is to ensure the benefit of the doubt goes to the crew
in a fair and impartial manner.
TARGET OBSCURATION (40MM AND 120MM ONLY)

15-62. Obscuration time is the time that a target is not viewable to a crew due to obscuration at the
vehicle and/or obscuration in the target area.
15-63. During offensive engagements, obscuration time is subtracted from each target engaged
subsequent to the occurrence of the obscuration. For Abrams crews, the firing weapon must be prepared to
fire, including the loader announcing UP, for the obscuration break time to begin. During defensive
engagements, obscuration time is accumulated to calculate target re-present time (if necessary); this time is
cumulative to each target in the engagement. No more than 10 seconds of obscuration time will be given in
the offense. This does not apply to short halt engagements. Short-halt obscuration criteria is the same as
defensive criteria. Maximum obscuration time during defensive engagements is at the discretion of the
battalion commander.
15-64. Since each target in an engagement has an independent time, a separate stopwatch may be used to
determine obscuration time between rounds. Accurate timing of obscuration ensures crews receive actual
target engagement/hit time.
15-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
15-65. Down-range target obscuration is at the discretion of the VCE based on the weather conditions.
Calculating obscuration time requires attention to detail. Evaluators must remember the perspective of the
evaluators and target conditions from the tower are quite different from the perspective of the firing crew,
especially during night engagements.
z
Obscuration during offensive engagements (see Figure 15-7)
The crew should move quickly through obscuration and continue the engagement without
stopping time.
The VCs must maneuver their vehicle to minimize the effect of obscuration (short halt,
increase speed, driver back up as necessary.)
Break time starts after the VC or gunner gives the first announcement of TARGET
OBSCURED, and the loader announces UP, (Abrams). (In the event of a coax
engagement following the main gun, obscuration time begins on the announcement of
CEASE FIRE and the first announcement of TARGET OBSCURED after the main
gun has fired.) Conditions must be established within the vehicle to enable the crew to
engage targets before obscuration break time can begin.
All offensive, short-halt engagement obscuration is at the discretion of the VCE based on
range layout, target presentation, and weather conditions.
z
In defensive engagements (see Figure 15-8)
Obscuration time starts on the first announcement of TARGET OBSCURED after the
loader announces UP. (In the event of a coax engagement following the main gun,
obscuration time begins on the announcement of CEASE FIRE and the first
announcement of TARGET OBSCURED.) Conditions must be established within the
vehicle to enable the crew to engage targets before obscuration break time can begin.
Obscuration time will be calculated for each target to determine the re-presentation time a
crew is entitled to if obscuration precludes the crew from destroying all targets.
z
In either offensive, short-halt, or defensive engagements
The VCE should record obscuration time if he determines that the obscuration prevents the
firing of subsequent main gun or coax rounds.
Break time stops when the VC begins another fire command, a round is fired, the gunner
announces IDENTIFIED, or the VCE is sure the firing vehicle is clear of the
obscuration.
Obscuration time cannot be given for delayed targets that were not presented during the
obscuration.
Targets can be re-presented for a time period equal to the sum of all the previous
obscuration times in that particular task, but not to exceed the target exposure time stated in
the task conditions (50 seconds plus any presentation delay for that target). The VCE must
ensure that the specific target being re-presented was presented and locked during the
obscuration (see note below).
The time that it took the crew to engage the re-presented target will be added to the last
target engagement time as the new engagement time for that target.
Note. The crew cannot be given obscuration time for a target that was no longer presented.
Special consideration must be given if obscuration occurs or is occurring as time elapses on an
engagement. The re-present time must begin at the final target exposure time for that target.
Example: If a target is exposed for 50 seconds and the crew does not have an opportunity to
engage due to 15 seconds of obscuration, then start the re-presentation time at 35 seconds;
otherwise, the crew will be given credit twice for the obscuration time.
15-66. The intent of scoring and timing is to force crews to train as they would fight. Crews should be
trained and rewarded for hitting targets rapidly, but not penalized when artificial maneuver constraints
prevent them from continuing to engage the target. VCEs are responsible for determining whether local
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-15
Chapter 15
obscuration prevents the crew from continuing to engage their targets. VCEs are to maintain fairness and
equity when calculating break times across all firing crews.
15-67. Actions listed above are also recorded on the evaluation recording. In the event the evaluator
needs to review the tape/digital recording for time, the requirements for break times are announced over the
jump radio/intercom, and therefore should be present on the audio. Evaluators must also record the events
accurately on the standard scoresheet (see Section V).
Figure 15-7. Obscuration example, defense
15-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
Figure 15-8. Obscuration example, offense
MECHANICAL MALFUNCTIONS
15-68. When a vehicle crew is preparing for gunnery, they should ensure that their vehicle is Fully
Mission Capable. PMCS and all prep to fire checks must be completed prior to each gunnery phase (day
and night). Crews will not receive break times for mechanical malfunctions. A mechanical malfunction
may be grounds for an alibi but only after the crew has adhered to the alibi process. Failure to identify a
fault prior to a gunnery phase is not grounds for an alibi. See paragraph 15-73 for information on alibis and
the alibi process.
15-69. The following malfunctions are not break times but may be grounds for an alibi:
z
Breech up (Abrams). A Breech up is not grounds for breaking time, but may be grounds for an
alibi if the fault was not induced by crew error. On the occurrence of a breech up, the crew will
clear the malfunction IAW TM 9-264-2350-10-2 or TM 9-388-2350-10-2. The Master Gunner
will pull the crew from the range, and maintenance must verify, troubleshoot, and repair the
fault. If a crew experiences a breech up, they must announce BREECH UP to alert the tower
that a malfunction has occurred. (Abrams)
z
Aftcap (Abrams). An aftcap hanging up in the aftcap deflector is not grounds for breaking
time, but may be grounds for an alibi if the fault was not induced by crew error. If a crew
experiences an aftcap, they must announce AFTCAP to alert the tower that a malfunction has
occurred. (Abrams)
z
Stoppage. A machine gun stoppage is not grounds for break time. Crews must apply immediate
action and fight through the malfunction. Alibis will be given if it is determined that crew error
did not induce the malfunction. If a crew experiences a stoppage, they must announce
STOPPAGE to alert the tower that a malfunction has occurred.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-17
Chapter 15
15-70. Crew error is defined as

z
Failure to follow instructions.
z
Failure to follow procedures as outlined in applicable operator TM/FM.
15-71. The mechanical malfunction will still be recorded in the REMARKS block for that engagement
fired.
MISFIRES (ABRAMS ONLY)

15-72. When a misfire occurs, the VCE will start break time on the second announcement of MISFIRE
(unless there is a target that can be engaged with another weapon system) and stop break time when a
round is fired or the VCE is sure the firing vehicle is clear of the malfunction. If a misfire occurs during a
three-man crew engagement, break time will begin on the VCs first announcement of MISFIRE, and
stop when a round is fired or the VCE is sure the firing vehicle is clear of the malfunction.
ALIBI PROCESS
15-73. The alibi process is the procedures that must be followed when a crew has a mechanical
malfunction and cannot continue with their gunnery run. The following conditions apply to all alibis:
z
A crew is allowed one alibi for one engagement only. If a VC decides to continue on with the
gunnery run and the mechanical malfunction continues, the crew will only be allowed to alibi
and re-shoot the last engagement before the vehicle was pulled, provided the alibi is granted.
z
Alibis will only be granted for malfunctions that were of no fault of the crew and were not
identifiable by the crew by performing PMCS and prep to fire checks. See Figure 15-9 for the
alibi process.
z
Weapons malfunctions short of a broken part or component are not grounds for an alibi. Parts or
components that are out of adjustment are not grounds for an alibi.
Figure 15-9. Alibi process
15-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
SECTION IV EVALUATING THE CREWS DUTIES

15-74. Crew-duty penalties are implemented to ensure crews practice proper engagement techniques and
procedures. There are four categories of crew-duty penalties
z
Applied to each engagement:
Immediate disqualification. Extremely hazardous conduct.
Automatic zero point. Disregard for announced task, conditions, and standards.
30-point penalty. Failure to adhere to basic safety/personnel protection precepts.

z
Applied, as a total, to each phase (day/night).
5-point penalty. Failure to perform fundamental leader/crew tasks.

15-75. If a suspected crew-duty penalty is not listed here, the evaluator will not deduct points, but rather
annotate the issue on the firing crews scoresheet and use it as an AAR discussion point.
IMMEDIATE DISQUALIFICATIONEXTREMELY HAZARDOUS

CONDUCT
15-76. Any crew found in violation of the following policies will receive an immediate disqualification
for the table they are firing:
z
Crews firing outside the range fan.
z
Crew members not in proper uniform (as specified by the commander [see note below]).
z
Firing into the berm.
z
Negligent discharge.
z
Loader holding a round in his lap. (Abrams).
z
Ammunition doors remaining open while firing. (Abrams).
z
Guards, shields, stub base catcher box, and aftcap deflector not properly installed and
serviceable. (Abrams).
Note. Proper uniform, unless modified by the HBCT commander, is complete Nomex (if
available); coveralls with gloves; or ACUs with shirt sleeves down, collar up and buttoned,
approved fire resistant boots, gloves.
AUTOMATIC ZERO-POINT PENALTYCRITICAL CREW TASKS

NOT ADHERING TO TASK, CONDITIONS, AND STANDARDS
15-77. Any crew found in violation of the following policies will receive 0 points for the engagement
they are firing:
z
Not adhering to the action, conditions and standards of the given engagement.
z
Not buttoned up or masked during a chemical, biological, radiological, or nuclear (CBRN)
engagement.
z
Using components of the fire control system (if equipped) that are announced as degraded in the
engagement conditions.
z
VC not firing his engagement.
z
Engaging friendly or noncombatant presentations.
z
Not over-pressurized during a CBRN engagement (Abrams).
z
Firing the main gun at troops (due to range constraints), except for canister and 25mm
engagements as directed by the tower.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-19
Chapter 15
z
z
Knocking down a target with ammunition incapable of killing it (for example, 25 mm HE

knocks down a frontal BMP, or knocking down a tank target with 7.62 mm.).
When in the defense and using the GAS sight, the gunner identifies the target before the
command DRIVER MOVE OUT is given (Abrams).
30-POINT PENALTYSAFETY/PERSONNEL PROTECTION

15-78. Failure to adhere to basic safety/personnel protection precepts:
z
Firing or attempting to fire the main gun or machine gun before announcing FIRE (or UP for
Abrams).
z
Announcing ON THE WAY before FIRE (or UP for Abrams).
z
Firing or attempting to fire before announcing ON THE WAY.
z
Announcing FIRE before the loader announces UP (Abrams).
z
The loader leaving the main gun armed or arming the main gun between engagements without
receiving a fire command. (Abrams).
z
Firing the TOW missile from a turret-down position (BFV).
z
VC fails to announce DESIGNATE when designating a target using the CITV/CIV.
5-POINT PENALTYLEADER OR FUNDAMENTAL CREW TASKS

15-79. Failure to perform leader or fundamental crew tasks:
z
Incorrect conduct of fire (initial or subsequent fire command incomplete based on the fire
control system capabilities or limitations, as directed by the tower).
VC failing to announce elements of the fire command not provided by the fire control
system as detailed in the task, conditions, and standards for the engagement.
Failure to announce CEASE FIRE when changing weapon systems, except during FIRE
AND ADJUST engagements.
Failure to announce CEASE FIRE to terminate an engagement.
Failure to announce CEASE FIRE for the main gun prior to giving the initial fire
command for the loaders M240.
VC fails to use the FIRE AND ADJUST execution element for a loaders machine gun
engagement when he is engaging a target simultaneously (Abrams).
z
Improper ammunition and weapon. This crew penalty would apply if the crew inadvertently
fires the wrong ammunition/weapon (such as coax at a PC), then corrects and kills with the
proper ammunition.
Note. For Abrams crews, this does not apply to battlecarried rounds from the previous
engagement. Proper ammunition change must occur during the engagements relevant to the
target.
z
z
15-20
Failure to identify friendly and noncombatant presentations.

Digital battle damage assessment (BDA). Not using the digital communications to transmit
BDA at the end of the phase.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
Incorrect response terms. Crew member fails to use proper response terms in support of the
leader/fundamental crew task standards.
VC or Gunner fail to give sensing of each maingun round fired (Abrams) or burst fired of
25mm (Bradley).
Gunner fails to confirm target(s) by announcing IDENTIFIED.
Gunner fails to repeat range to target after announcing IDENTIFIED.
Incorrect response to a fire command or subsequent/follow-on fire command (safety crew

cuts cannot be evaluated as an incorrect response).
Gunner fails to announce the ammunition that is indexed during a change of ammunition
(SABOT or AP/HEAT or HE INDEXED).
Loader fails to announce the ammunition that is loaded during a change of ammunition
(SABOT/HEAT LOADED). (Abrams Only)
Loader announces UP when it is obvious to the VCE that the round is not loaded
(Abrams only).
Gunner fails to announce the choked range (Abrams and Bradley).
Loader arms main gun when gunner is directed to engage with machine gun (Abrams only).
Incorrect engagement techniques. Commander or gunner fails to use proper engagement
techniques (Bradley crews only).
Fails to fire a 10- to 15-round initial burst; then fire additional 10- to 15-round burst(s) at
point targets until target is destroyed (machine gun targets).
Fails to fire a sensing round, two if the ammunition has changed, then fire a 3- to 5-round
burst (25-mm point targets for Operation Desert Storm [ODS] and below, A3 Bradleys do
not require a sensing round).
Fails to fire a 15- to 20-round burst (25-mm) while adjusting on the target (aerial target).
Fails to fire a 3- to 5-round burst (M2/M3A3) without a sensing round, except when using
the auxiliary sight or when the ELRF is not operational.
15-80. All safety penalty points are deducted from the engagement that they occur on. This includes
automatic zero, immediate disqualification, and 30 point penalties. Five point penalty points are
deducted from the end of the gunnery table they occurred on.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-21
Chapter 15
Engagement Example
A BFV in the defense during a day engagement engages two stationary flanked BMPs at 1,200 meters.
Description
The VC announces DRIVER MOVE OUT at 8 seconds. The crew then opens fire on the first BMP at 12
seconds, closes at 16 seconds for a TARGET, and the VC announces DRIVER BACK UP at 17
seconds.
The VC announces DRIVER MOVE OUT at 26 seconds. The crew then opens fire on the second BMP at
30 seconds, closes at 34 seconds for a TARGET.
Scoring
The close time for the first BMP was 16 seconds. The close time on the second BMP was 34 seconds.
These times are recorded on the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14c.
Total defilade time for the first BMP was 8 seconds (the initial time the BFV was in the defilade position).
Total defilade time on the second BMP was 17 seconds (8 seconds for the initial time the BFV was in the
defilade position, plus 9 seconds for when the BFV backed back down into the defilade from 17 seconds to
26 seconds). These times are recorded on the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14e.
Engagement time for the first BMP 8 seconds (16 seconds close time minus 8 seconds total defilade time).
Engagement time for the seconds BMP was 17 seconds (34 seconds close time minus 17 seconds total
defilade time). These times are recorded on the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14g.
Final engagement time for the first BMP results in 8 seconds. Because it is the target with the lowest
engagement time, the time is transferred into the final engagement time with no change. Final engagement
time for the second BMP results in 9 seconds. Since there are two targets the time used to engage the first
target is subtracted from the second target (17 seconds minus 8 seconds). These times are recorded on
the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14h.
Using the appropriate matrices, determine the points earned for each target. The resulting points for the
first BMP target is 100 points and for the second BMP target is 100 points. These times are recorded on
the Crew Gunnery Scoresheet in Block 14i.
The individual target points are then added together and divided by the total number of targets presented
(100 + 100 = 200, then 200 / 2 = 100).
The resulting score for this engagement would be a 100 point, qualified engagement.
Rationale
Due to the scoring being based on the amount of time it takes a threat target to complete the DIDEA
process against the firing platforms vehicle, one must assume, tactically, that during the initial presentation
of a multiple target engagement, each target has independent sectors of responsibility. Using this
assumption, only one target has started the DIDEA process against your vehicle. The second target does
not start this process until you fire against the first target. This is why to determine the final engagement
time, it is necessary to subtract the smallest engagement time from the largest of the targets, not on a
delay. The delay target represents a threat being called in and therefore already knows your approximate
location.
Figure 15-10. Engagement example
SECTION V COMMON CREW SCORESHEET

15-81. Evaluators use DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet (see Figure 15-11 and Figure 15-12
for a sample of a completed scoresheet) to record the results of gunnery engagements. The instructions for
completing the scoresheet are on page 2 of DA Form 7657-R (see Figure 15-12). Evaluators use DA Form
7663-R, Crew Gunnery Roll-Up Sheet (see Figure 15-13 for a sample of a completed rollup sheet) to
record the results of the gunnery table. Blank forms designed for reproduction are located at the back of
this manual. If needed, they can be downloaded from the U.S. Army Publishing Directorate (see
References).
15-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
Figure 15-11. Example of DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-23
Chapter 15
Figure 15-12. Directions for completions of form
15-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
Figure 15-13. Example of DA Form 7663-R, Crew Gunnery Roll-Up Sheet
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-25
Chapter 15
SECTION VI CREW QUALIFICATION STANDARDS
INDIVIDUAL GUNNERY PHASE

COMBAT TABLE IICREW PROFICIENCY COURSE
15-82. Crews must qualify Table IICrew Proficiency Course (CPC), dry or device-based (Multiple
Integrated Laser Engagement System [MILES]/Precision Gunnery System [PGS]), prior to subcaliber
(with the caliber .50 inbore device) or full caliber firing as a prerequisite to conducting full-caliber live-fire
gunnery training.
15-83. Crews must obtain a minimum of 700 points overall on Table II and receive at least 70 points on 7
of 10 tasks to be qualified (this is a prerequisite to crew gunnery live fire). This is a dual qualification
criteria table. Crews must qualify on this table prior to conducting any live fire training on their vehicle,
and is the last Live-Fire Prerequisite.
15-84. Table II will be conducted on a full or scaled range using device-based methodology on the actual
platform system. Table II can not be considered qualified if conducted in crew gunnery simulations.
15-85. Although Table II is not resourced for full caliber live firing, if ammunition is available, the
commander may choose to fire this table utilizing full caliber ammunition provided Table II is fired dry or
device based first.
CREW GUNNERY PHASE

TABLE VICREW QUALIFICATION
15-86. Crews must obtain a minimum of 700 points overall on Table VI and receive at least 70 points on
7 of 10 tasks to be qualified. This is a dual qualification criteria table. Crews must qualify at least one
engagement at night to be considered qualified.
15-87. Crews will only receive a rating on Table VI, Crew Qualification, based on their overall
performance for that table. Crew ratings will be based on the following criteria:
z
Distinguished. The crew obtains a score of 900 to 1,000 points on Table VI with 70 or more
points on 9 of the 10 tasks.
z
Superior. The crew obtains a minimum score of 800 points on Table VI with 70 or more points
on 8 of the 10 tasks.
z
Qualified. The crew obtains a minimum score of 700 points on Table VI with 70 or more points
on 7 out of 10 tasks.
z
Unqualified. The crew obtains a combined score of 699 or fewer points on Table VI, or 69 or
fewer points on 4 or more of the 10 tasks.
QUALIFICATION RE-FIRES
15-88. If a crew fails to qualify, it re-fires for qualification. The highest rating that a crew can earn when
re-firing is QUALIFIED.
z
A crew re-fires only the engagements with a score of 69 or fewer points.
z
A crew re-fires only the number of engagements required to obtain a qualified rating (700 points
and 7 qualified engagements).
15-26
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
SECTION VII CALL FOR ENGAGEMENTS

15-89. All crews must perform one of the Call For engagements during the day phase and another
during the night phase. These engagements are graded on a Go/No Go basis.
15-90. The three variations that the commander may select from are:
z
Call for fire.
z
Request medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) (using standard nine-line).
z
Call for support.
15-91. For the call for fire task, the crew must give a grid coordinate within 150 meters of the target
while it is exposed to receive points for the engagement (see FM 3-09.8). Failure to give a grid within 150
meters of the target will result in a No-Go for the event.
SECTION VIII AFTER ACTION REVIEWS

15-92. The VCE will conduct a formal AAR (see TC 25-20) after all crew gunnery events. In AARs, he
combines the feedback received from all participants. AARs identify where a crew meets, or fails to meet,
Army standards. AARs provide commanders, leaders, and training managers with a focus for future
training events.
PLANNING THE AARS

15-93. Successful AARs require planning and resource management. Commanders and training
managers
z
Select evaluators. One of the most challenging tasks during the planning phase is selecting and
scheduling qualified evaluators. Whom they select depends on the type of evaluators they need
crew, section, or platoon evaluators or internal or external evaluators.
Crew evaluators. Evaluators required for crew gunnery events must hold VCE
qualifications. Normally, individual and crew gunnery Tables I through V are internally
evaluated, and Table VI is externally evaluated.
Section/platoon observer controllers. Collective gunnery tables are evaluated by officers

and senior NCOs who are qualified on the platform(s) they are evaluating. The observer
controllers normally are from within the HBCT. Observer controllers must be certified and
meet all requirements established by the brigade commander.
z
Develop evaluation records. The scoresheets, along with the computer printout, give the VCE
a record of each engagement for use during the AAR.
z
Select the AAR site. When organizing the training site, the commander and training managers
should plan the location of the AAR site simultaneously. They should locate it close enough to
the training site to avoid long delays between training and reviewing the training results;
however, they should place it far enough from the training area to avoid the distractions of other
elements conducting training, such as the signatures of vehicles moving or firing. The AAR site
should accommodate all participants comfortably and shelter them from the elements.
z
Select training aids. Training aids give evaluators and participants a means to reenact the
training event. They can also encourage discussion. At a minimum, evaluators should use a
range diagram of the area. Training aids to use during AARs include
Charts or drawings. This should show the scenario, routes, and targets with any operational
graphics supporting the AAR. Using charts or drawings lets all participants review actions
while they follow the prescribed scenario.
Sand tables/terrain boards. This shows the topographical features of the area. Sand tables
should reflect the scale of the area accurately. They should show the scenario, routes, and
targets, along with any operational control measures that apply to the training. This allows
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-27
Chapter 15
the evaluator to guide the discussions while focusing on the particular place the action
occurred.
Tape recorders. Tape recorders can play back the fire commands and the radio-net traffic.
(Recorders allow the crew to hear their commands and review their responses.)
Thru-sight videos (TSV). TSVs allow playback of real-time video of live-fire gunnery
engagements and fire commands. It offers a look at engagement techniques and identifies
errors that can be corrected before the next training event.
Precision gunnery system AAR computer. This is used to review gunnery data during
device-based exercises. It allows the evaluator and crew members to see the placement of
each round in relation to the target and its corresponding data.
PREPARING FOR THE AARS

15-94. Before conducting an evaluation and an AAR, the evaluator prepares himself and the AAR site:
z
Review the scenario. Before evaluating a crew or platoon, the evaluator must know the
scenario and mission, collective tasks, and terrain of the training area. Once the evaluator knows
the scenario and mission, he must ensure he knows the doctrine that applies.
z
Observe training. The evaluator must place himself in the best position to observe the task
being conducted. The evaluator must record his observations.
z
Collect information. After the event, the evaluator must collect information from other
observers. During gunnery events, the evaluator collects information such as target kill times
from the tower observers and VCEs.
z
Develop a discussion outline. The evaluator must develop an outline he wants to follow during
the AAR. He should identify the key areas he wants the participants to discuss, to include both
strong and weak points. To accomplish his goal for the AAR, he should list key questions to ask
to give him the results he wants. The evaluator must determine what methods or techniques he
will suggest to improve efficiency. If required, he should ask Master Gunners or other
experienced personnel to relay helpful tips to the crew or platoon.
z
Rehearse. Before participants arrive at the AAR site, the evaluator organizes his training aids,
evaluation sheets, and seating arrangements. The evaluator should ensure the training aids are
functioning and viewable by all participants. At a minimum, evaluators should rehearse the key
points to be made.
CONDUCTING THE AARS

15-95. Crew members usually know how they performed before the AAR, though they may not know
why they performed the way they did. The function of the evaluator conducting the AAR is to encourage
members to discuss what they did and guide them into discovering why. The members then determine how
they can do it differently next time. The evaluator aids in these discussions and provides expertise when
needed. When conducting AARs, the evaluator should use the following guidelines:
z
Make sure all participants are present. The evaluator should not begin the AAR until all
participants are present. Anyone missing may have witnessed an event and may have something
to contribute to the discussion.
z
Restate the training objectives. The evaluator begins the AAR by restating the training
objectives of the training event and its major tasks for the crew (crew gunnery). He begins by
stating its title, You just completed the day phase of Table VI. He then highlights the major
task involved, This phase tested your ability to conduct four engagements. The first was a
defensive engagement using the auxiliary sight, the second was an offensive engagement, the
third was a defensive commander engagement in a CBRN environment, and the fourth was a
retrograde while returning up range.
15-28
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Crew Evaluation
z
z
Generate discussion. The evaluator begins the discussion by asking questions about the first
event. For crew gunnery, Who saw the target first? After discussing one event, the evaluator
asks questions about the next. He and the evaluated crew/unit discuss events in chronological
order.
Orient on training objectives. As discussions move away from the objectives, the evaluator
must bring the discussions back on track. The evaluator keeps discussions on topic to make the
best use of valuable AAR time.
Seek maximum participation. Evaluators must make sure all participants are heard and not let
one person monopolize discussions. If a member has not participated, the evaluator asks him a
direct question such as, What were you doing during this time?
Summarize to emphasize key learning points. As weaknesses are discovered and discussed,
the evaluator summarizes the result and the solution.
Overview the event. The evaluator closes the AAR by reviewing strengths and weaknesses
relative to Army standards. For example, (Crew), we found that during the fourth engagement,
you failed to engage the AP target. This gave him the time to place a killing burst on your
vehicle. After the discussion we just finished, you now know how to avoid this mistake in the
future....
MATRIX EXAMPLES
15-96. Figure 15-14 is an example of a vehicle scoring matrix. Due to an ever-evolving threat, future
updates are to be published in a stand-alone special text (ST). Units must ensure that prior to conducting
gunnery the most recent matrices are obtained and used to score crews.
15-97. Download
the
most
recent
ST
prior
to
firing
gunnery
from
https://www.us.army.mil/suite/kc/9773303. Users must have a valid AKO account and password to gain
access.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
15-29
Chapter 15
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Figure 15-14. Abrams armored defense (example)
15-30
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Chapter 16
Stabilized Platform Gunnery

Chapter 16 covers crew gunnery for stabilized platforms within the Heavy
Brigade Combat Team (HBCT). Stabilized platforms are defined as any
vehicle with a crew-served weapon system or systems that have a fire control
system that includes powered traverse and/or superelevation, a laser range
finder (LRF), and thermal optic capability. The platform must be capable of
rudimentary stabilization of the firing weapon system while moving. Vehicle
platforms that fall within the stabilized category in the HBCT are the Abrams
Main Battle Tank, Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV), Guardian Armored
Security Vehicle (ASV), and vehicles equipped with a remote weapon station.
Gunnery Tables (GT) II (Crew Proficiency Course [CPC]) through GT VI
(Crew Qualification) are discussed in this chapter. All GTs described in this
chapter are evaluated using the standard crew evaluation procedures as
outlined in Chapter 15, Crew Evaluation.
Contents
Section I Requirements ....................... 16-1
Gunnery Tables ................................ 16-1
Prerequisites ..................................... 16-3
Engagement Tasks ........................... 16-4
Minimum Proficiency Levels ............. 16-7
Digital Gunnery ................................. 16-9
Scenario Requirements .................... 16-9
Developing Scenarios for Crew
Gunnery Tables ................................ 16-9
Section II Gunnery Instruction and
Live-Fire Prerequisites .......................... 16-10
Common Instruction ........................ 16-10
Gunnery Table I .............................. 16-12
Gunnery Table II, Crew Practice
Course ............................................ 16-13
Section III Crew Gunnery ................... 16-15

Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine
Gun ................................................. 16-15
Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun . 16-17
Gunnery Table III/IV, Basic Machine
Gun and Main Gun (GT 34) ............ 16-19
Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice ..... 16-21
Gunnery Table VI, Crew
Qualification .................................... 16-23
Crew Ratings .................................. 16-23
Section IV Example Gunnery Table VI16-25
SECTION I REQUIREMENTS
GUNNERY TABLES
16-1. The GTs overall are structured in two sectionscrew and collective gunnery. These tables are
designed to develop stabilized platform crews into cohesive, efficient, and effective combat systems
operating as a single platform, or in sections or platoons of various compositions. Table 16-1 shows the GT
structure including the title and purpose of each.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-1
Chapter 16
Table 16-1. Gunnery table structure
16-2. Chapter 16 focuses specifically on the requirements for conducting crew level gunnery. GTs II, III,
IV, V, and VI are described in detail, including tasks, engagements, ammunition requirements, and the
application of the commanders option to each table.
16-3. It is critical to the success of the unit that the commander, Master Gunner, Senior Gunner, and
planning staff are well versed on the contents of this chapter in order to establish and execute their gunnery
density that meets the desired end state of the commander.
16-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table 16-2. Gunnery table ammunition allocation
PREREQUISITES
16-4. All crew members must complete the following prerequisite training events prior to conducting fullcaliber live-fire gunnery training:
z
Vehicle commanders (VC) and gunners must complete required exercises in the conduct of fire
trainers as outlined in Chapter 12, Gunnery Training Program. If simulation systems are not
available, the unit commander should develop snake board and/or chair drill requirements that
emphasize switchology, target hand off, crew coordination, and conduct of fire exercises.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-3
Chapter 16
z
z
All vehicle crew members, and alternate crew members must pass all required gunnery skills test
(GST) tasks within 3 months (4 months for reserve components [RC]) prior to executing any
live-fire table or exercise (see Chapter 14, Individual and Crew Live-Fire Prerequisite Testing).
All vehicle crew members and alternate crew members must pass required GT I, Crew Critical
Skills, within 3 months (4 months for RCs) prior to live fire, as outlined in Chapter 14.
A crew must qualify GT II, CPC within the 3 months (4 months for RCs) before firing fullcaliber live rounds. Vehicles that have a subcaliber live-fire training device must complete GT II
dry or blank prior to using the subcaliber device.
ENGAGEMENT TASKS
16-5. Each GT consists of a series of 5 or 10 tasks. These engagement tasks types are standardized to
facilitate a common training structure, provide a clear training regimen that builds on previously trained
tasks, and a progressive model that utilizes the crawl, walk, run methodology.
16-6. There are six standardized engagement tasks for stabilized direct fire weapon platforms; VC,
machine gun pure, main gun pure, change of weapon system, degraded, and simultaneous/multiple target
engagements. Each of these engagement tasks is assigned one or two task numbers. The numbering for the
tasks are shown in Table 16-3.
Table 16-3. Standard task numbering system
Note. Use of the word main gun denotes the largest caliber weapon on a multiple weapon
system platform, typically 25mm, 40mm, and 120mm. The term machine gun, is used for all
7.62mm weapons on a platform, and caliber .50 on the ASV only. Caliber .50 engagements for
the Abrams crews are located in task 0 or task 9, depending on the table.
16-7. Each table contains a minimum of five and a maximum of ten of the above listed tasks. Each specific
engagement is identified by the table number, followed by the task number. For example, GT V, task 8 is
identified as engagement 58. For GT III and IV that only have five engagements each, no task number is
replicated twice to reduce confusion when firing the two GTs combined.
16-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
16-8. The GTs are organized into a logical numbering system with the conditions for each engagement.
This sequence supports a crawl, walk, run training methodology. This logic will apply to GT IIGT
VI.
16-9. The targetry is aligned in a manner that allows a commander to fire both Abrams and Bradleys on
the same range using the same targets. This is intended to speed up the gunnery process, reduce range
constraints, and promote cohesion within the combined arms team and it also provides the Combined Arms
Battalion the ability to cross attach as desired prior to the start of the gunnery density.
16-10. Defensive engagements should begin with the vehicle starting in a turret-down position and
moving to a hull-down position to engage the target. On a range where this cannot be accomplished or
where turret-down positions do not exist, units should train using simulated battle positions.
16-11. Short-halt tasks will be conducted either with the firing vehicle moving and then halting on the
course road, or from an exposed stationary position, such as a stationary traffic control point (TCP) set on
the course road.
16-12. Offensive tasks will be conducted with the firing vehicle on the move at a speed that will facilitate
engaging the target safely within the designated maneuver box. See Chapter 13, Range Operations for
planning factors for offensive firing boxes.
16-13. A frontal stationary target may be substituted for a moving target if range limitations do not
support the target array. The appropriate matrix will be referenced when assessing vehicle exposure times,
see Chapter 15, Crew Evaluation for evaluation procedures.
16-14. There is no distinction between day or night engagements. Based upon the commanders intent
and how the vehicles are outfitted (such as Tank Urban Survivability Kit [TUSK] with loaders thermal
sight), units determine which engagements are fired during the day or night.
16-15. Following the minimum proficiency levels (MPL) provides a minimum number of engagements
either day or night. This allows units with strict firing times the flexibility to shift engagements when
necessary.
16-16. The ammunition requirement numbers given for each table represent the number of rounds that are
allotted for each GT according to DA PAM 350-38, STRAC.(full caliber ammunition is not resourced for
Army units on GT II, however, the commander may choose to fire this table utilizing full caliber
ammunition if it is available and the table has been previously fired either dry or device-based) Rounds
made available from first round hit savings (commonly called harvested rounds) are designed to be used
for retraining, or pushed to the collective tables as the commander sees fit.
16-17. Figure 16-1 shows the GTs with ammunition and targetry for an Abrams and Bradley capable
range. The targets have been notionally selected for clarity (the commander selects the type of target based
on the weapon system capabilities).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-5
Chapter 16
Figure 16-1. Abrams and Bradley capable gunnery table example

16-18. As shown in Figure 16-1, all targetry is selected based upon the ammunition type authorized and
resourced for the engagement. Stationary targets are identified as STA, and moving targets are identified
with MOV.
16-19. VC engagements (task 0) are resourced specifically for the ammunition listed. Alteration to the
ammunition type is not authorized except when multiple platforms are firing the same scenario. In those
instances, ammunition identified inside the parenthesis (CE) or (Coax) identifies the Bradley
ammunition and weapon system authorized.
16-20. Degraded (Loader Option) listed in task 8, and Multiple Target engagements listed in task 9 will
identify either the M240, caliber .50, or coaxial machine gun as the primary weapon for the engagement.
For Bradley crews, only the coaxial machine gun will be employed where those items are listed.
16-21. This table set may be used for any vehicle employing a crew-served weapon (small arms and
40mm) that are fired from a stabilized platform. This includes any remote weapon station installed on a
vehicle as the primary weapon system, such as Mine Resistant Ambush Protected (MRAP) variants or
some Stryker variants. These are included in the event a unit within the HBCT is equipped with these
possible platforms for training prior to deployment or contingency operations.
16-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
MINIMUM PROFICIENCY LEVELS

16-22. MPLs are the required attributes for every GT. The commander, staff, and Master Gunner develop
the GT scenarios using the MPLs to make sure the all primary skill sets are trained and tested during the
GTs. The MPLs outline
z
The requirements of the GTs that the scenarios must contain.
z
Provide a common set of requirements for all direct fire weapon crews to train to during the
gunnery density.
z
The rules that must be adhered to when developing the gunnery scenarios.
z
The critical skills that must be trained and evaluated.
z
How the GTs can augment the commanders flexibility.
16-23. Table 16-4 shows the MPLs for crew and collective gunnery, although listed for crew gunnery
only.
Table 16-4. Minimum proficiency levels for stabilized platforms
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-7
Chapter 16
16-24. In addition to the MPLs listed above, units have radio communication tasks for each table. The
method of evaluation is up to the commander and has no direct impact on the crews gunnery qualification
rating or score. One of the following tasks will be evaluated on each GT, day and night:
z
Call for fire engagement day and night.
z
Call for medical evacuation (MEDAVAC) day and night.
z
Call for support day and night.
Note. The above call for requirements can be mixed so long as one is completed during the
day and one is completed during the night. These tasks are completed during the course of the
gunnery densities individual and crew phases, which provide crews opportunities to be trained
and tested on all three tasks at least three times each. Commanders are encouraged to include
them in the collective gunnery phase.
16-25. When considering the MPLs and the tasks together to define the scenario for the unit, see Table
16-5 that outlines the possibilities and feasibility of each MPL by task or engagement type.
Table 16-5. Minimum proficiency levels application by engagement
16-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Notes. Main gun is used to describe a 25mm, 40mm, or 120mm engagement, respective to the
firing vehicle.
Caution indicates engagements that may be fired using the listed MPL, however, units
should consider the impacts of the selection. For example, if a crew is firing a degraded
engagement using an auxiliary sight, you MAY fire the task at night, BUT you must have a
method of illumination. Tasks of this nature should not be fired on qualification tables.
NO GO indicates MPLs that may not be applied to the task under any circumstance.
Any engagement can be fired day or night.
Any engagement can be fired in a chemical environment.
Units equipped with TUSK components may fire Engagement 0 or Engagement 9 at night,
but should limit this to Tables II, III, IV or V only.
DIGITAL GUNNERY
16-26. Crews on digitally equipped vehicles must fire 50% of all engagements using digital
communications. This will enhance digitally equipped units and provide the users with techniques and
procedures for engaging threat targets while maintaining situational and environmental awareness,
including reporting functions to a higher headquarters using their digital systems. Digital gunnery is
conducted on all GTs. The minimum requirements for crew gunnery are listed below. Commanders may
add to these requirements.
z
Digital set up and overlays sent to the combat vehicle as a prefire requirement.
z
Digital overlays populated with icons for friendly/neutral targetry.
z
Digital message prompts prior to engagement (five total for each GT).
z
Digital battle damage assessment and repair (BDAR) roll-up sent by the crew at the end of each
phase (day and night).
SCENARIO REQUIREMENTS
16-27. Crew GTs will be conducted on the platform system while on a training area (GT II), range (GT
III and IV) or range complex (GTs V and VI), not in crew gunnery simulation where crews cannot exercise
all aspects of manipulating the vehicle. GTs II, III, and IV can be completed on range complexes where
and when available.
16-28. The vehicle crew evaluator (VCE) will evaluate crew gunnery in accordance with (IAW) the
conditions and standards outlined in Chapter 15 and conduct an after action review (AAR) after each run
(day and night phase) to enhance the training value. Although the evaluation procedures are standardized,
and all platform crew members will be capable of performing VCE duties on other platforms, the
debriefing AAR NCO must be the same military occupational specialty (MOS) as the firing crew. See
Chapter 15 for VCE requirements, duties, and descriptions.
16-29. Practice and qualification tables may be conducted on the same range provided they do not contain
the same scenarios.
DEVELOPING SCENARIOS FOR CREW GUNNERY TABLES

16-30. Each installation may have specific requirements for scenario development; be sure to check the
local standing operating procedures (SOP) before beginning the planning process. When planning the
scenarios for a qualification range, it is recommended that two scenarios per lane be developed.
16-31. The following planning guide is designed to help units develop scenarios for gunnery ranges and
training areas.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-9
Chapter 16
SCENARIO DEVELOPMENT
16-32. Include the following when planning the range scenario:
z
Identify which tables and tasks are going to be fired (Tables II through VI).
z
All tasks on Tables II through VI are numbered 0 through 9 with each task given specific
engagement type. Within each task, the primary weapon system and authorized ammunition type
is identified.
z
The Master Gunner will select each target from the authorized targets list based on the
commanders intent, mission-essential task list (METL), and potential theater of operations.
z
For each selected target the Master Gunner will establish the range to target, incorporating the
MPLs as required. The Master Gunner will use range references such as the range SOP and
target pit/battle position cross reference to determine the suitability of the target location.
z
Using the MPLs, develop the scenarios to meet the tables requirements. See Table 16-4, MPL
Application by Engagement on page 16-8 as a guide to ensure common mistakes that will result
in lost range time are avoided.
z
The targets identified on each GT as Target 1, 2, or 3 are specifically designed to be presented
exactly in the order listed. Any deviation from that structure could result in a specific skill set
training opportunity being lost, or may prove to be tactically unsound. The crew does not have
to engage the targets in the order they are presented.
z
Every task listed is a swing task; they can be fired day or night with some considerations for
degraded (auxiliary sight) engagements, loader, and VC engagements, respective to the
platforms fire control system capabilities.
z
Any task may be selected as a chemical (chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear
[CBRN]) engagement.
z
Weapon systems identified for the engagement must be used to engage and destroy the targets.
Failure to use the listed weapon system will result in an automatic zero for the engagement. For
example, a VC who is to fire caliber .50 at a target may not fire a main gun round to destroy the
target for any reason. The tasks are specifically designed to train certain critical skill sets. Using
alternate, although fully capable, weapon systems to destroy targetry does not accurately
evaluate the crews ability to master their platform.
Notes. If the commander has the resources and he chooses to, he may opt to fire the degraded
engagement using artillery/mortar illumination. However, firing the degraded engagement at
night will not be performed on any qualification table.
Units equipped with TUSK components may fire Engagement 0 or Engagement 9 at
night, but should limit this to Tables II, III, IV or V only.
SECTION II GUNNERY INSTRUCTION AND LIVE-FIRE PREREQUISITES
COMMON INSTRUCTION
16-33. Before crew members progress to device-based gunnery training with vehicle systems (GT II),
they should receive basic classroom instruction, hands-on crew training, and individual training. Examples
of common classroom subjects, hands-on crew training, and individual training are listed in platform non
specific terms, are listed below. Platform-specific hands-on training is covered in the respective section for
that platform system. Commanders must ensure that time for this training is factored into the long range
and short range training plan.
16-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CLASSROOM SUBJECTS
16-34. Individual crew members should receive classroom instruction on a variety of subjects that will
increase their proficiency with their vehicle, weapon systems, and fire control system. This training will
facilitate cohesion as a crew and ultimately increase their lethality on the battlefield.
16-35. The references listed for each example subject area listed in Figure 16-2 provide the instructor
with the information necessary to develop lesson plans for each subject.
CLASSROOM SUBJECTS
1. Basic capabilities of the platform weapons systems (Chapter 3).
2. Range/sketch card (applicable FMs).
3. Gun theory and weapons system functions (applicable TMs).
4. Fire control trainingboresighting, armament accuracy checks (AAC), and zero/
live-fire accurate screening test (LFAST)/screening procedures (appropriate appendix).
5. Direct-fire engagement process (Chapters 5 through 10).
6. Training devices (Chapter 11).
7. Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) training, if digitally equipped (unit
SOP).
HANDS-ON CREW TRAINING

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Individual and Crew training and testing (Chapter 14).

Range determination training (Chapter 7).
Drivers training (AR 600-55).
Thermal training (recognition of combat vehicles [ROC-V]).
Preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) training (appropriate TMs).
Simulations (Chapter 11, Chapter 12, appropriate IUH).
INDIVIDUAL TRAINING
1.
Individual weapons training (appropriate FMs).
Figure 16-2. Basic instruction example

16-36. Crews will conduct hands-on training, both individually and collectively, to prepare for the GST
and GT I (Crew Critical Skills). This training will focus primarily on skills necessary to maintain the
vehicle, react to hazardous conditions, and utilize their platform weapon system to engage and destroy
targets safely and in a timely manner.
16-37. Crew members are trained and evaluated on various skills based on their duty position:
z
The crew is trained and evaluated on
Installing and removing training devices.
Operating as a crew in a gunnery range environment.
Weapon and ammunition characteristics, capabilities, and effects.
Detecting, identifying, deciding, engaging, and assessing targets (DIDEA) process.

z
The VC is trained and evaluated on
Controlling the vehicle, crew, and weapon systems.
Laying the weapon systems on targets while issuing fire commands.
Acquiring and designating targets.
Initiating fire commands.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-11
Chapter 16
Conducting target-handoff procedures.
Performing engagement techniques from the VCs position.

The turret crew members are trained and evaluated on
Manipulating the turret.
Operating the turret weapons system controls.
Disassembling and assembling the turret weapons.
Uploading, downloading, and clearing the turret weapons.
Performing immediate action on the turret weapons.
Boresighting or zeroing the weapon systems, including optics alignment.
Reacting to fire commands.
Performing engagement techniques.
Engaging targets with training devices and in simulators.
Misfire procedures.
Operations under unusual conditions.
The driver is trained and evaluated on
Performing offensive and defensive driving techniques.
Assisting in target acquisition.
Battle position selection, actions on contact, and reaction drills.
Identify and use of lines of intervisibility (IV lines) and reverse slope defense.
16-38. Crew gunnery training devices and simulators must

z
Replicate/simulate the characteristics of the ammunition.
z
Allow crews to practice proper gunnery techniques identified in Chapter 5 through Chapter 10
and the respective platforms appendix.
z
Use all applicable functions of the fire control system for the conditions of the engagement.
z
Simulate realistic effects on the target to facilitate proper engagement assessment.
INDIVIDUAL TRAINING
16-39. All Soldiers will conduct individual training to prepare them for live-fire gunnery and integration
as a maneuver unit in collective gunnery. Individual training must include cross-training to other positions
within the crew.
16-40. Cross training enables the crews to best prepare for combat to overcome loss of personnel through
attrition, MEDEVAC, and conflicting taskings. It also develops the future gunner or VC for professional
development.
GUNNERY TABLE I
16-41. GT I, Crew Critical Skills consist of those skill that are critical to the safety of the crew and
essential to the operation of the combat platform assigned. GT I is designed to test the crews ability as a
whole to accomplish these vital tasks in a timely manner. GT I should be conducted in garrison, prior to the
gunnery density. GT I is a live fire prerequisite that must be completed prior to GT II. Testing and
administrative guides are located in Chapter 14.
16-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
GUNNERY TABLE II, CREW PRACTICE COURSE

16-42. GT II, Crew Practice Course (CPC) is a single vehicle CPC (see Table 16-6 and Table 16-7. CPC
is designed to evaluate the crews ability to engage stationary and moving targets placed in a tactical array
from a stationary and moving vehicle. CPC tasks are to be conducted either dry or device based prior to
using the .50 cal inbore device (Abrams) or full caliber ammunition.
Table 16-6. Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-13
Chapter 16
Table 16-7. Example of Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course (GT II-CPC)
16-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SECTION III CREW GUNNERY
GUNNERY TABLE III, BASIC MACHINE GUN

16-43. Table III, Basic Machine Gun is a single-vehicle machine gun pure table (see Table 16-8 and
Table 16-9). GT III is designed to evaluate the crews ability to engage stationary and moving targets
placed in a tactical array from a stationary and moving vehicle using the vehicle mounted machine guns.
Table III is designed to give the commander the option to fire with GT IV to make a full 10 engagement.
Although its not required, the tables are specifically designed to be combined. GT III should only be fired
separately from GT IV if range availability and gunline permit.
Table 16-8. Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-15
Chapter 16
Table 16-9. Example of Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun (GT III)
16-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
GUNNERY TABLE IV, BASIC MAIN GUN

16-44. Table IV is a single-vehicle main gun pure qualification table (see Table 16-10 and Table 16-11).
GT VI is designed to evaluate the crews ability to engage stationary and moving targets placed in a
tactical array from a stationary and moving vehicle using the main gun. This table can be fired as a stand
alone table or in conjunction with GT III. Range availability and gunnery timeline will be more conducive
to firing these tables as a Table III/IV.
Table 16-10. Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-17
Chapter 16
Table 16-11. Example of Gunnery Table IV, Basic Main Gun (GT IV)
16-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
GUNNERY TABLE III/IV, BASIC MACHINE GUN AND MAIN GUN

(GT 34)
This is a combination table, and NOT an additional table for firing. This combination
table is called GT III/IV (or Table 34). Resourcing for this example table is provided by
GT III and GT IV.
16-45. Tables III and IV are designed to be fired together at the commanders discretion. This promotes
the commanders flexibility based on range availability and resources available. It is provided here to show
how the two tables are designed to be linked together, and provides and example of the specific targetry
and ammunition requirements in order to facilitate scenario development.
16-46. GT III/IV is designed to evaluate the crews ability to engage stationary and moving targets placed
in a tactical array from a stationary and moving vehicle using the all available weapon systems (see Table
16-12 and Table 16-13).
Table 16-12. Gunnery Tables II and IV, Basic Machine Gun and Main Gun (GT 34)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-19
Chapter 16
Table 16-13. Example of Gunnery Tables III and IV, Basic Machine Gun and
Main Gun (Table 34)
16-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
GUNNERY TABLE V, CREW PRACTICE

16-47. GT V, Crew Practice is a single vehicle practice table (see Table 16-14 and Table 16-15). Table V
is designed to train the crew to engage moving and stationary targets using all vehicle weapon systems. It
requires the crew to call on the knowledge gained throughout all previous tables. GT V will prepare the
crew for GT VI, Crew Qualification by presenting them with tasks that require the crew to use all the
aspects of their fire control system against a variety of target arrays.
Table 16-14. Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-21
Chapter 16
Table 16-15. Example of Gunnery Table V, Crew Practice (GT V)
16-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
GUNNERY TABLE VI, CREW QUALIFICATION

16-48. GT VI, Gunnery Crew Qualification is a single vehicle qualification table (see Table 16-16). GT
VI is designed to evaluate the crew on engaging moving and stationary targets using all vehicle weapon
systems while in the offensive or defensive postures. GT VI must be fire using full caliber ammunition.
Table 16-16. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification
CREW RATINGS
16-49. Crews are evaluated on their level of competence on their platform using the standard evaluation
procedures as described in Chapter 15. The end state for each crew after completing GT VI is a crew that is
confident and competent to a standard that best prepares them for combat.
16-50. The crew rating is an overall snapshot of the performance on the crew qualification table that
provides commanders an overview of the crews performance and competence employing their platform. It
also is an indicator of unit readiness and training deficiencies for future training events.
16-51. The qualification table crew ratings are based on a dual-qualification criteria system. This system
requires crews to qualify a minimum number of engagements and have a minimum number of overall
points to be considered qualified. Failure to meet the QUALIFIED standard requires crews to re-fire
engagements, or in severe cases, be replaced as appropriate.
16-52. Crews will receive an overall qualification rating for GT VI, Basic Crew Qualification, based on
the dual-qualification criteria as outlined in Table 16-17 and Table 16-18.
Table 16-17. Crew Qualification rating criteria
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-23
Chapter 16
Table 16-18. Example of Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification (GT VI)
16-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SECTION IV EXAMPLE GUNNERY TABLE VI

16-53. To assist the unit with gunnery scenario development, a scenario selection special text has been
created for both this chapter as well as Chapter 17, Unstabilized Platform Gunnery. The following sets of
10 figures are an example of GT VI under development. Each step of the scenario build process is shown
in task order, and includes an explanation or justification for all commander selected items.
16-54. Figure 16-3 is an example of a target scenario worksheet downloadable from
https://www.us.army.mil/suite/kc/9773910. Master Gunners or scenario developers may use this chart to
develop their engagements. It provides all the MPL information that may be selected, ammunition
capabilities based upon target selection, target type possibilities, target posture information, and range to
target data. This downloadable sample packet is not a requirement, but will assist with scenario
development and organization.
Figure 16-3. Target scenario development tool example

16-55. Task 0, VC engagements have some limitations based on the optical capabilities of the platform.
As spin-off technologies are made available, platform capabilities increase and therefore, the MPL
application to the engagements may be affected.
16-56. Once the Master Gunner identifies the requirements and intent of the commander, he can develop
the scenario for the GTs. The following figures show each engagement in task order for an entire GT VI,
with an example of the step sequence that the engagements will be fired.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-25
Chapter 16
16-57. These sheets help identify which MPLs to apply, the available targetry, type of ammunition for
each target, range to target, and any notes for the engagement. For these examples, the scenario is being
built so an Abrams and Bradley may shoot the same scenario. Figure 16-4 shows the selected MPLs for
engagement 60 (Table VI, Task 0, VC).
Figure 16-4. Engagement 60 example

16-58. This engagement is specific for the VC. The gunner may not fire this engagement. The resourced
ammunition is kinetic energy (KE), and the target is required to be moving, a BMP flank was selected as
the target. A KE 25mm and 120mm projectile can kill this target as shown in the ammunition capabilities
columns. Figure 16-5 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 61 (Table VI, Task 1, Machine Gun Pure).
16-26
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009

16-59. This engagement was selected for night, offense, in a chemical environment. One CBRN
engagement must be fired day and night. This engagement will meet the night requirement.
16-60. The Master Gunner will determine the range to target as appropriate for the range he will be firing
on. All targets are 7.62mm capable and will work for both Abrams and Bradley platforms. Figure 16-6
shows the selected MPLs for engagement 62 (Table VI, Task 2, Machine Gun Pure).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-27
Chapter 16

16-61. This is the second machine gun pure engagement of the table. As we selected the first machine
gun pure engagement to be fired at night, this target will be fired during the day to provide balance to the
table, although this is not required.
16-62. Targets selected allowed some variety and required the gunner to use different engagement
techniques from target to target. The engagement was selected as an offensive task. Figure 16-7 shows the
selected MPLs for engagement 63 (Table VI, Task 3, Main Gun Pure).
16-28
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009

16-63. This engagement has a single moving target. The long-range main gun MPL was selected for this
engagement, requiring the Abrams target placement >2000m, and the Bradley target placement >1400m.
16-64. As the development of this engagement is the long range mover, it was selected to be fired from
a defensive position.
16-65. Due to the difference in range from Abrams to Bradley, one method to utilize the same mover for
both platforms is to have the Abrams crews engage from BP 1 on a course road, and the Bradley crews fire
from BP 2 or BP 3, provided the range to target meets the MPL selected. This change in firing location is
due to the maximum effective range of the 25mm training ammunition, as well as the number of rounds
resourced per 25mm target (8 each). Figure 16-8 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 64 (Table VI,
Task 4, Main Gun Pure).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-29
Chapter 16

16-66. This three-target engagement is one of only two on GT VI. It was selected to be fired during the
day using a TCP position. This is where the vehicle is positioned in a defensive posture in the open on a
course road with no battle position.
16-67. The short-range main gun MPL is applied to the first target presented in the scenario. The moving
target is placed at a KE capable range for both Abrams and Bradley crews. Figure 16-9 shows the selected
MPLs for engagement 65 (Table VI, Task 5, Change of Weapon System).
16-30
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009

16-68. This engagement was selected for night from the defense. It includes the utilization of the short
range machine gun MPL applied to Target 1.
16-69. Target range was based on the firing ammunition type for both targets individually. For target 2,
1200m was selected to challenge the crews ability to acquire both targets, one close range, one medium
range. Figure 16-10 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 66 (Table VI, Task 6, Change of Weapon
System).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-31
Chapter 16

16-70. This is the second engagement for a change of weapon system. As the first was placed during the
night, this engagement was selected for day, offense, in a chemical environment. This satisfies the CBRN
MPL requirement for day.
16-71. Although target 1 is a stationary target, a stationary flank technical truck was selected. As long as
the ammunition is capable of killing the target with the rounds authorized, it is a viable target solution for
the scenario. Figure 16-11 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 67 (Table VI, Task 7, Degraded).
16-32
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009

16-72. This engagement is specifically a degraded engagement. The scenario developer must pick one of
the three types of authorized degradation for this engagement.
16-73. The scenario developer must use caution when selecting the level of degradation for the
engagement based on whether it will be fired day or night. In this example, the engagement will be fired
during the day using Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem (IBAS)/Integrated Sight Unit
(ISU)/Gunnerys Primary Sight (GPS)/Thermal Imaging System (TIS) manual controls.
16-74. Range to target should be selected using keeping in mind the standard battlecarry range, optics
capability, choke sight (stadia reticle to target silhouette presentation) and reticle range gradient lines to
ensure a realistic engagement.
16-75. If manual controls are used, it is not recommended to have the targets more than 50 mils apart to
ensure the crew is capable of traversing from one target to the other in a reasonable amount of time.
16-76. Figure 16-12 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 68 (Table VI, Task 8, Degraded).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-33
Chapter 16

16-77. This engagement is specifically a degraded engagement. The scenario developer must pick one of
the three types of authorized degradation for this engagement.
16-78. The scenario developer must use caution when selecting the level of degradation for the
engagement based on whether it will be fired day or night. In this example, the engagement will be fired
during the day using the auxiliary sight and power controls. Using the auxiliary sight requires the
engagement to be fired during the day. If mortar or field artillery illumination rounds are available, this
degradation may be fired at night, but only on non-qualification tables (<GT VI).
16-79. Range to target should be selected using keeping in mind the standard battlecarry range, optics
capability, choke sight (stadia reticle to target silhouette presentation) and reticle range gradient lines to
ensure a realistic engagement. It is not recommended to apply the long-range main gun MPL to this
engagement.
16-80. Figure 16-13 shows the selected MPLs for engagement 69 (Table VI, Task 9, Multiple Target or
Simultaneous [Abrams]).
16-34
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009

16-81. When firing only Bradley crews on this engagement, any MPL can be selected, and can be fired
day or night. If Abrams and Bradley crews will both fire this scenario, considerations for the simultaneous
engagement must be made:
z
If TUSK is installed on the Abrams, and thermal optics are available for the loader and VC may
be fired at night on non-qualification tables (< GT VI).
z
Target 1 and Target 2 are locked for the loader and VC. This provides the crew to engage the
targets in a tactically sound manner where they fire from the defilade position. This engagement
technique does not expose the vehicle to hostile fire while they engage from the defilade.
z
Target 3 requires the scenario developer to select either 15, 20 or 25 seconds for the delay. This
target may not be presented at the same time as the first two targets. Crews may wait to engage
all three targets at once from the enfilade position if they choose.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
16-35
Chapter 16
It is not recommended for the loader or VC to engage rocket-propelled grenade (RPG), sniper,
or troop targets with their weapon systems on the qualification table. Truck frontal and flank
targets are the preferred targetry due to the weapons unstabilized capability, and lack of front
sight post (loader). The truck type targets provide the most visible area for the rounds to strike in
relation to a troop set or E-type silhouette series.
16-82. Once the engagements are drafted out, they must be put into a firing sequence or step order for
execution on the range. This can be done in a variety of ways, but general rules are
z
Start with a defensive, long-range engagement to maximize the range complexs capabilities.
z
Two defensive engagements may be fired in a row, if necessary.
z
Do not fire all defensive engagements first, followed by offensive engagements. This will cause
command and control problems for the tower.
z
Base the number of day and night engagements based on the available daylight and firing hours.
The engagements and table structure provides for a mixture from 7 day/3 night to 3 day/7 night.
This facilitates the needs of the units that may fire in austere, extreme northern gunnery ranges.
z
If a day run is not complete, but the crew has fired 1 offense, 1 defense, and 1 short halt/TCP
engagement during the day, the remaining engagements may be shifted to night.
16-36
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Chapter 17
Unstabilized Platform Gunnery

Chapter 17 covers crew gunnery for unstabilized direct-fire platforms within the
Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT), including scout High-Mobility Multipurpose
Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV), military police (MP) Armored Security Vehicle (ASV),
and sustainment unit Convoy Protection Platforms (CPP). Unstabilized platforms are
those vehicles that have mounted crew serve weapons without a fire control system
that provides a level of stabilization that facilitate an accurate shoot-on-the-move
capability.
Commanders can use the training model detailed within this chapter for training
crews assigned to other vehicles that have an unstabilized crew-served machine guns
such as the supply sergeants Light Medium Tactical Vehicle (LMTV), personnel
carriers (PC), and command and control vehicles.
Gunnery training phases and critical gunnery skills for armed vehicle crews are
identified in this chapter. Guidelines are provided in Chapter 13 for the development
of a gunnery training program that is designed to produce qualified crews by training
critical skills that facilitates teamwork at the crew level and during crew, section,
platoon, convoy and base defense operations. Further, it covers the strategy and
training plans derived from the gunnery training program development process.
Individual and crew gunnery training for unstabilized armed vehicles within the
HBCT are addressed in detail. Gunnery Tables (GT) II through VI are contained in
this chapter and evaluated using the methodology in Sections I and IV of Chapter 8
and Section II of Chapter 12.
Contents
Section I Gunnery Training Program .. 17-2
Section II Requirements ...................... 17-3
Prerequisites ..................................... 17-3
Digital Gunnery ................................. 17-5
Scenario Requirements .................... 17-5
Developing Scenarios for Crew
Gunnery Tables ................................ 17-6
Section III Unstabilized Platform
Gunnery ................................................... 17-9
Common Instruction .......................... 17-9
Gunnery Table I, Critical Crew Skills17-11
Gunnery Table II, CPC ................... 17-13
3 September 2009
Section IV Crew Gunnery................... 17-15

Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine
Gun ................................................. 17-15
Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range
Machine Gun................................... 17-18
Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew
Practice ........................................... 17-21
Gunnery Table VI, Crew
Qualification Course ........................ 17-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-1
Chapter 17
SECTION I GUNNERY TRAINING PROGRAM

17-1. Gunnery training programs should be developed to follow a logical progression of training,
conducted in three phasesindividual, crew, and collective gunnery. These phases are described below and
detailed in Table 17-1.
z
Individual. The individual gunnery phase trains individual crewmen and crew level skills
utilizing classroom and home-station training. During this home station training, it incorporates
tracking boards, gun laying exercises, and culminates with emergency operations in the Crew
Critical Skills (GT I).
z
Crew. The crew gunnery phase develops crew skills from the individual gunnery phase and
begins with a live-fire prerequisite, GT II, Crew Proficiency Course (CPC). After its successful
completion, crews begin training using live ammunition from their respective vehicle while in
defensive or offensive postures. The crew gunnery phase culminates with the Crew
Qualification Course, GT VI.
z
Collective. The collective gunnery phase develops coordination and fire distribution and control
during section, platoon, convoy and base defense operations. There are also guidelines for
supporting a company-level Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX).
Table 17-1. Unstabilized platform gunnery tables
17-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SECTION II REQUIREMENTS
PREREQUISITES
17-2. Crew members must complete the following prerequisite training events prior to conducting fullcaliber live-fire gunnery training:
Note. All occupants of the vehicles to include the driver, vehicle commander (VC), gunner, and
assigned vehicle occupants are considered crew members.
z
Gunners and VCs must be qualified on the crew-served weapon for their assigned vehicle in the
ground role (ground mount) within 6 months prior to firing. The VC will be required to fire the
crew-served weapon on all GTs. The gunner and VC should complete training in a simulation or
simulator as required by the units gunnery training program.
Crew members must pass all associated Gunnery Skills Test (GST) tasks within 1 month (3
months for reserve components [RC]) prior to live fire.
Crews must complete GT I, Crew Critical Skills (CCS), within 3 months prior to live fire (6
months for RCs).
A crew must qualify on GT II, CPC within 3 months (6 months for RCs) prior to live fire. GT II
is designed to be firing with blank ammunition (not including 40mm, MK19).

17-3. The minimum proficiency levels (MPL) are the commanders tool to tailor training to fit his training
objectives based on his core mission-essential task list (CMETL) and directed mission-essential task list
(DMETL). They also provide common requirements for all GTs and provide a standardized basis for
training models and evaluation standards. Commanders must follow Table 17-2 when designing their
respective gunnery. Sustainment unit commanders should consider the role of their crews when determining
engagement range to target. Table 17-2 is the minimum requirements, but commanders may choose to
increase these requirements to meet their training objectives.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-3
Chapter 17
Table 17-2. Minimum proficiency levels, unstabilized platforms
Notes. GT IV is only resourced for scout armed HMMWV Crews within the HBCT. This
table is designed for extended range machine gun engagements. All ranges to target will be
> 800 meters.
Commanders firing non-scout crews should restrict range to target to 600 meters or
less for all targetry except where indicated in the MPLs. This provides a more realistic
gunnery based on the units mission and role within the HBCT.
All firing crews must complete a radio communication task, day and night, based on
the commanders guidance. These tasks can be call for fire, request medical evacuation
(MEDEVAC), or call for air/ground support.
If the unit does not have optics that support night gunnery, the night tasks will be
fired during the day.
17-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
DIGITAL GUNNERY
17-4. Crews on digitally equipped vehicles should fire specified engagements using digital
communications. This will enhance digitally equipped units and provide the users with techniques and
procedures for engaging threat targets while using their digital platform. Digital gunnery is conducted on all
tables. The minimum requirements for digital crew gunnery are listed below and commanders may add to
these requirements.
z
Digital set up and overlays sent to the vehicle as pre-fire requirement.
z
Digital overlays populated with icons for friendly/neutral targetry.
z
Digital message prompts prior to engagement (50% of engagements).
z
Digital battle damage assessment and repair (BDAR) roll-up sent by the crew at the end of each
phase (50% of engagements).
SCENARIO REQUIREMENTS
17-5. Crew GTs will be conducted on the platform system, not in crew gunnery simulation where crews
cannot exercise all aspects of manipulating the vehicle and its weapon system(s).
17-6. A frontal stationary target may be substituted for a moving target if range limitations do not support
the target array. The appropriate matrix will be referenced when assessing vehicle exposure times.
17-7. The Vehicle Crew Evaluator (VCE) will evaluate crew gunnery in accordance with (IAW) the
conditions and standards outlined in Chapter 15 and conduct an after action review (AAR) after each run to
enhance the training value.
17-8. Practice and qualification tables may be conducted on the same range, provided they do not contain
the same scenarios. Units may not teach the test.
17-9. Defensive engagements should begin with the vehicle starting in a defilade (turret-down) position
and moving to an enfilade (hull-down) position to engage the target(s), as seen in Figure 17-1 through
Figure 17-4. It may not be necessary for the crew to move forward to an enfilade position in order to fire the
weapon. However, the VC and driver lose the opportunity to sense rounds to better adjust fires. It is not a
requirement to move forward provided the crew can safely engage the targets from the defilade position.
Evaluators must clearly understand the rules for scoring crews when firing from a defilade position (see
Chapter 15).
Figure 17-1. HMMWV in the defilade position example
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-5
Chapter 17
Figure 17-2. HMMWV in the enfilade position example
Figure 17-3. LMTV in the defilade position example
Figure 17-4. LMTV in the enfilade position example

17-10. Short-halt tasks will be conducted either with the firing vehicle moving and then halting on the
course road, or from an exposed stationary position as at a static checkpoint.
17-11. Offensive tasks will be conducted with the firing vehicle on the move at a speed that will facilitate
engaging the target safely within the designated maneuver box.
17-12. Evaluators use DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet (see Chapter 15), to record the results
of gunnery engagements. The instructions for completing the scoresheets are in Chapter 15. Blank forms
designed for reproduction are located at the back of this manual. If needed, units can download the form
from the US Army Publishing Directorate (see References).
DEVELOPING SCENARIOS FOR CREW GUNNERY TABLES

17-13. Each installation may have specific requirements for scenario development. Check the local standing
operating procedures (SOP) before beginning the planning process. When planning the scenarios for a
qualification range, it is recommended that two scenarios per lane be developed.
17-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
17-14. The following planning guide is designed to help units develop scenarios for gunnery ranges and
training areas. This planning guide consists of the planning, development, and proofing processes.
PLANNING THE SCENARIO

17-15. Include the following when planning the range scenario:
z
Identify which tables and tasks are going to be fired (Tables II through VI).
All tasks on Tables II through VI are numbered 0 through 9 with each task given specific
engagement type. Within each engagement, the primary weapon system is identified. The
Master Gunner or Senior Gunner will select each target from the authorized targets list
based on the commanders intent, mission-essential task list (METL), and potential theater
of operations.
For each selected target the Master Gunner or Senior Gunner will establish the range to
target for each selected target. The Master Gunner or Senior Gunner will use range
references such as the range SOP and target pit/battle position cross reference.
Using the minimum proficiency levels, develop the scenarios to meet the tables
requirements.
Note. Due to the complexity and limitations of the fire control system on the ASV all MK19
engagements should be fired at 800 meters or less during the day and at 300 meters or less at
night.
17-16. An example of the task numbering is listed below in conjunction with the MPL capabilities.
Table III, Engagement Number 5 would be Engagement 35, Multiple Targets, two
Stationary Targets. Table IV, Engagement 1 would be Engagement 41, VC task (see Table
17-3 and Table 17-4).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-7
Chapter 17
Table 17-3. Annual ammunition roll-up
17-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table 17-4. Task numbering and MPL application matrix
Notes. During the VC engagements (tasks 0 and 1), when building the scenario the long and
short range tasks can be done, but they are primarily designed for the gunner. Consider applying
these MPLs to gunner engagements.
As the multiple mover engagement (task 9) is extremely difficult, scenario developers
should not use the short halt or long range MPLs on the qualification table (GT VI).
SECTION III UNSTABILIZED PLATFORM GUNNERY
COMMON INSTRUCTION
17-17. Before crew members progress to device-based gunnery training with vehicle systems (Table II),
they should receive basic classroom instruction, hands-on crew training, and individual training. Examples
of common classroom subjects, hands-on crew training, and individual training are listed and discussed in
Figure 17-5.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-9
Chapter 17
CLASSROOM SUBJECTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Basic capabilities of the platform weapons systems (Chapters 2, 3, and 4).

Range/sketch card (applicable FMs).
Gun theory and weapons system functions (applicable TMs).
Fire control training. Zero procedures (Appendix C).
Direct-fire engagement process (Chapter 8)
Training devices (Chapter 11).
FBCB2 training, if digitally equipped (unit SOP).

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Gunnery skills tests (Chapter 14).

Range determination training (Appropriate Appendix).
Drivers training (AR 600-55).
Thermal training (ROC-V).
PMCS training (appropriate TMs).
Simulations (Appropriate Instructor Utilization Handbook).
INDIVIDUAL TRAINING
1. Individual weapons training (appropriate FMs).
2. Movement and maneuver training.
3. FIST training (FMs 3-09.8 and 3-22.91).
Figure 17-5. Common instruction crew training prior to gunnery
CLASSROOM SUBJECTS
17-18. Individual crew members will receive classroom instruction on a variety of subjects that will
increase their proficiency with their vehicle platform and weapon system. This training will facilitate
cohesion as a crew.
17-19. The references listed for each example subject area listed in Figure 17-5 provide the instructor with
the information necessary to develop lessons for each subject. They also provide a reference source for crew
members during individual gunnery.

17-20. Crews will conduct hands-on training both individually and collectively to prepare for Tables I and
II. This training will focus primarily on skills necessary to maintain the vehicle, utilize their platform
weapon system to engage and destroy targets, and emergency procedures such as roll over drills, and crew
evacuation.
17-21. Crew members are trained and evaluated on various skills based on their duty position.
z
The crew is trained and evaluated on
Installing and removing training devices.
Operating as a crew in a gunnery range environment.
Detecting, identifying, deciding, engaging, and assessing targets.
Simulation training utilizing the Engagement Skills Trainer (EST), Close Combat Tactical
Trainer (CCTT), and convoy simulators, for example.
z
The VC is trained and evaluated on
Controlling the vehicle, crew, and weapon systems.
Guiding the gunner on targets while issuing fire commands.
Acquiring targets.
Initiating, executing, and concluding fire commands.
17-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
The turret crew members are trained and evaluated on

Manipulating the turret or skate, pintle, and traverse/elevation mechanism.
Operating the turret weapons system.
Disassembling and assembling the turret weapons.
Uploading, downloading, and clearing the turret weapons.
Performing immediate action on the turret weapons.
Reacting to fire commands.
Performing engagement techniques.
Boresighting training devices.
Engaging targets with training devices.

The driver is trained and evaluated on
Performing offensive and defensive driving techniques.
Assisting in target acquisition.

Crew gunnery training devices and simulators must
Emulate/simulate the characteristics of the ammunition.
Allow crews to practice proper gunnery techniques identified in this manual.
Simulate realistic effects on target to facilitate proper engagement assessment.
17-22. The references listed for each training subject listed in Figure 17-5 provide the instructor with the
information necessary to develop lessons for each subject (the GSTs and GT I, CCS are already in
evaluation format in Chapter 14). They also provide a reference source for crew members during individual
gunnery.
INDIVIDUAL TRAINING
17-23. All Soldiers will conduct individual training to prepare them for live-fire gunnery and integration as
a maneuver unit in collective gunnery. The scope of the individual training is based on the crew-served
weapon assignment, vehicle assignment, and crew management. All firing gunners and VCs from a crew
must qualify on their crew-served weapon in a ground role prior to moving on to crew gunnery.
GUNNERY TABLE I, CRITICAL CREW SKILLS

17-24. During introductory manipulation training, crew members learn how the cupola responds to their use
of the cupola controls. Manipulation combines eye-hand coordination and reinforcement training. The two
types of manipulation include gun lay and tracking.
17-25. The GTs are designed to build a crews ability to destroy targets through in different postures, threat
target postures, and complexity. This is done using the crawl, walk, run methodology, and ensures the crews
are confident and capable with their weapon system
17-26. Figure 17-6 and Figure 17-7 are an overview chart with sample target selections of the entire GTs.
Theses matrices shows the types of targetry for each main task, and how the tables progress toward training
harder than the test, as well as the progression of complexity.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-11
Chapter 17
Figure 17-6. Example of unstabilized platform gunnery table matrix
17-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 17-7. Example of Guardian ASV gunnery table matrix
GUNNERY TABLE II, CPC

17-27. The purpose of the CPC is to prepare the crew for live fire (see Table 17-5, Figure 17-8, and Figure
17-9 [ASV]). This table cannot be fired live. If blank ammunition is not available, crews may fire the
engagements dry. Evaluators must consider the crews ability to lay on target accurately and engage threat
targets in a timely manner to determine the engagement time. Evaluation of this table is based upon the
standard evaluation model as listed in Chapter 15.
17-28. Ammunition resourced for this table is blank. No blank rounds are available for the MK19, 40mm
grenade launcher. Small arms quantities are listed per vehicle respective to the type of machine gun
assigned.
17-29. If thermal or night optics are not available, all 10 tasks will be fired during the day phase. All
targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay between targets.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-13
Chapter 17
Table 17-5. Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course

Engage and destroy stationary and moving targets from a stationary and
moving armed vehicle during both day and night operations.
TASK:
Given the following:

z A fully operational armed vehicle.
z MILES.
z Full-size or scaled targets with LTIDS.
z Blank ammunition.
Note. Vehicle posture and target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels
for armed GTs as listed on page 17-4.
CONDITIONS:
STANDARDS:
The crew must obtain a minimum of 700 of the 1,000 total points and score
at least 70 points on 7 of 10 engagements. VC tactical task (2x) is evaluated
based on the commanders guidance. A Go must be received to continue
to the next GT.
Figure 17-8. Example of Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course
17-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 17-9. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table II, Crew Proficiency Course
SECTION IV CREW GUNNERY
GUNNERY TABLE III, BASIC MACHINE GUN

17-30. The purpose of the Basic Machine Gun is to develop the VC and Gunners skills engaging targets
from a defensive or offensive posture. This table is designed for firing using a crawl, walk, run
methodology. It utilizes the common scoring methodology found in Chapter 15.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-15
Chapter 17
17-31. Evaluators are positioned in the tower to record contact reports and firing information, while another
evaluator is positioned on the firing vehicle. Evaluation of this table is based upon the standard evaluation
model as listed in Chapter 16. Evaluators on the vehicle must have passed the GST and should be capable of
acting as a safety NCO. Although the evaluator is not the Range Safety Officer (RSO), one of his key
responsibilities is to provide a second set of eyes when clearing the weapon system, especially when the VC
and gunner switch positions during the table.
17-32. Ammunition resourced for this table is live. Small arms quantities are listed per vehicle respective to
the type of machine gun assigned. If thermal or night optics are not available, all 10 tasks will be fired
during the day phase. All targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay
between targets (see Table 17-6, Figure 17-10, and Figure 17-11 [ASV]).
Table 17-6. Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun
Engage and destroy stationary single and multiple targets from a stationary
armed vehicle during both day and night operations.
CONDITIONS:
z Three fourths scale targets (if available).
z Allocated ammunition.
z All engagements are fired from a defensive posture.
for armed GTs as listed on page 17-4.
STANDARDS:
at least 70 points on 7 of 10 engagements. VC tactical tasks are assessed
based on the commanders guidance. A Go on that task (3x) must be
achieved to continue to the next GT.
TASK:
17-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 17-10. Example of Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-17
Chapter 17
Figure 17-11. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun
GUNNERY TABLE IV, EXTENDED RANGE MACHINE GUN

17-33. The purpose of the Extended Range Machine Gun Table is to prepare the scout or reconnaissance
crew for engagements at ranges beyond 800 meters, firing from both offensive and defensive postures. This
table is not resourced for vehicles other than the scout/recon and military police (MP) elements.
the type of machine gun assigned.
17-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
17-35. If thermal or night optics are not available, all 10 tasks will be fired during the day phase.
acting as a safety NCO. Although the evaluator is not the RSO, one of his key responsibilities is to provide a
second set of eyes when clearing the weapon system, especially when the VC and gunner switch positions
during the table.
17-37. All targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay between targets (see
Table 17-7, Figure 17-12, and Figure 17-13 [ASV]).
Table 17-7. Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun
TASK:
CONDITIONS:
Engage and destroy stationary single targets from a stationary and moving
armed vehicle during both day and night operations at extended ranges.
z Full-scale targets (3/4 scale targets are optional).
for armed GTs listed on page 17-4.
STANDARDS:
3 September 2009
based upon the commanders guidance. A Go must be received on the
tactical task (4x) to proceed to the next GT.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-19
Chapter 17
Figure 17-12. Example of Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range Machine Gun (scout/recon only)
17-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 17-13. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table IV, Extended Range
Machine Gun (scout/recon only)
GUNNERY TABLE V, BASIC CREW PRACTICE

17-38. The purpose of the Basic Crew Practice Course is to prepare the crew for the Crew Qualification
Table (see Table 17-8, Figure 17-14, and Figure 17-15 [ASV]). It is designed to provide an offensive and
defensive mix that adequately trains the crews for qualification.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-21
Chapter 17
during the table.
17-42. All targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay between targets.
Table 17-8. Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice
TASK:
CONDITIONS:
z
Full-scale targets (3/4 scale targets optional).
Allocated ammunition.
for armed GTs listed on page 17-4.
STANDARDS:
17-22
tactical task (5x) to proceed to the next GT.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 17-14. Example of Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-23
Chapter 17
Figure 17-15. Example of Guardian ASV Gunnery Table V, Basic Crew Practice
GUNNERY TABLE VI, CREW QUALIFICATION COURSE

17-43. The purpose of the Crew Qualification Course is to qualify crews on critical gunnery tasks and
prepare the crew for collective gunnery (see Table 17-9, Figure 17-16, and Figure 17-17 [ASV]). This table
cannot be fired dry.
17-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
during the table.
17-47. All targetry for an engagement will be presented simultaneously with no delay between targets.
Table 17-9. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course
TASK:
CONDITIONS:
z Full-scale targets.
Notes. Table VI must be conducted on a full-scale range using full-scale targets, and firing
full-caliber ammunition. Crews may not dry-run Table VI prior to live fire.
STANDARDS:
tactical task (6x) to proceed to collective gunnery.
CREW RATINGS
17-48. Crews will receive an overall qualification rating for Table VI based on the common scoring model
dual qualification criteria (qualified tasks and total crew points) (see Table 17-10).
Table 17-10. Crew Qualification rating criteria
DISTINGUISHED
Crew scored at least 70 points on at least 9 of 10 engagements and

more than 900 points overall.
SUPERIOR

QUALIFIED

UNQUALIFIED
Crew failed to qualify at least 7 engagements or scored less than

700 points.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-25
Chapter 17
Figure 17-16. Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course
17-26
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 17-17. Guardian ASV Gunnery Table VI, Crew Qualification Course
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
17-27
Chapter 18
Collective Gunnery
Collective Gunnery Tables (GT) are designed to test the units and leaders ability to
take knowledge learned from and crew GTs and apply it to tactical combat scenarios
at the section, platoon, and company team levels, to include combined arms sections
and platoons. Chapter 18 discusses GTs VII through XII for the Heavy Brigade
Combat Team (HBCT),
Section and platoon GTs can be conducted as either pure elements (such as the tank
platoon) or as a combined arms section and platoon. Integration of sustainment unit
support, aviation, and indirect-fire support in these tables is imperative to presenting
realistic, challenging tactical scenarios. The culmination of this training is the
company-level Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX) (see Chapter 19).
Contents
Section I Evaluation ............................. 18-1
Concept ............................................ 18-1
Collective Task Scoring Model.......... 18-2
Evaluation Team ............................... 18-6
General Requirements ...................... 18-6
Digital Requirements ........................ 18-9
Call for Fire Requirements ................ 18-9
Prerequisites ................................... 18-10
Section II Section Gunnery................ 18-11
Table VIISection Proficiency
Exercise .......................................... 18-11
Table VIIISection Practice ............ 18-12
Table IXSection Qualification ........ 18-13
Section III Platoon Gunnery .............. 18-15

Table XPlatoon Proficiency
Exercise .......................................... 18-15
Table XIPlatoon Practice .............. 18-16
Table XIIPlatoon Qualification ...... 18-17
SECTION I EVALUATION
CONCEPT
18-1. Collective gunnery training measures a maneuver elements proficiency in executing collective tasks.
Leaders are trained and evaluated on the following skills:
z
Platoon leaders:
Distribution and control of fires for squads and either pure or combined arms vehicle
sections and platoons.
Conducting platoon-level collective tasks, both pure and combined arms, in accordance
with (IAW) the applicable Combined Arms Training Strategies (CATS).
Controlling the maneuver of squads and vehicle sections and platoons.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-1
Chapter 18
Squad/section leaders:
Distribution and control of fires for fire teams and vehicles within their sections.
Conducting squad/section-level collective tasks IAW the applicable CATS.
Controlling the maneuver of vehicles and fire teams within their sections.
COLLECTIVE TASK SCORING MODEL

18-2. The collective task scoring model will be used to evaluate section and platoon gunnery and
effectively measure a maneuver elements ability to accomplish its mission by executing tasks to standard.
The collective scoring model allows the commander to determine if his unit has or has not demonstrated
overall proficiency to perform task steps or performance measures to support the stated mission. Under this
method, collective task standards will be evaluated utilizing the training and evaluation outlines (T&EO)
for that task. Gunnery will also be evaluated on tasks containing engagements by the percentage of
presented targets that are destroyed. The evaluator will use this data to determine the task assessment as
either trained (T), needs practice (P), or untrained (U). The senior evaluator will use the task assessments to
determine an overall assessment of the sections/platoons performance on the table as either trained (T),
needs practice (P), or untrained (U).
TACTICAL TASK SCORE

18-3. The standards for each collective task are in the T&EOs. These are used to evaluate the section or
platoons performance of that task.
18-4. The maneuver element must meet a minimum proficiency level (MPL) of passing all task standards,
critical, and leader subtasks in the T&EO.
GUNNERY SCORE
18-5. Gunnery is tied to the T&EO standards for the collective task containing engagements. These tasks
will be identified as firing tasks. The maneuver element must meet an MPL of 50 percent target destruction
during a firing task. Commanders may opt to increase the gunnery standard to a higher percentage.
COLLECTIVE TASK ASSESSMENT

18-6. The following criteria will provide a guideline the evaluator may use to determine his assessment:
z
Trained (T).
Evaluated as trained (T) under the T&EO.
Destroyed all targets presented (T).

z
Needs Practice (P).
Evaluated as needs practice (P) under the T&EO.
Met collective task gunnery MPL.
Untrained (U).
Failed to meet the task standards or one or more critical or leader performance measures
within the T&EO for the collective task.
Failed to meet the gunnery MPL.
TABLE ASSESSMENT
18-7. The table assessment is based on the determination of the commander/senior evaluator:
z
Trained (T). The maneuver element is assessed as trained (T) on all collective tasks and has met
all requirements.
z
Needs Practice (P). The commander identifies one or more significant deficiencies in overall
proficiency and/or the unit has been assessed as untrained (U) on one or more tasks.
z
Untrained (U). The commander determines the unit has not demonstrated overall proficiency in
his tasks or has failed to perform the stated mission.
18-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Collective Gunnery
18-8. Evaluators use DA Form 7659-R, Gunnery Tables VII, VIII, IX Scoresheet (Section Qualification),
or DA Form 7658-R, Gunnery Tables X, XI, XII Scoresheet (Platoon Qualification), to record the gunnery
and tactical scores along with task and table assessments (see Figure 18-1 and Figure 18-2) assessments.
Blank forms designed for reproduction are located in the back of this manual. If needed, they can be
downloaded from the U.S. Army Publishing Directorate (see References).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-3
Chapter 18
Figure 18-1. Example of DA Form 7659-R, Gunnery Tables VII, VIII, IX

Scoresheet (Section Qualification)
18-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Collective Gunnery
Figure 18-2. Example of Form DA 7658-R, Gunnery Table X, XI, XII

Scoresheet (Platoon Qualification)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-5
Chapter 18
EVALUATION TEAM
18-9. Evaluators enhance the training experience by providing valuable and credible observations. Each
evaluator should hold the same or higher rank than the evaluated elements leader. Ideally, the evaluator
should have experience in the evaluated leaders position. The commander should task sufficient evaluators
and exercise support personnel to observe and evaluate the section and platoons performance. Those
personnel help enforce range safety with the range safety officer and perform their own assigned tasks.
SENIOR TRAINER
18-10. The battalion commander or his representative (battalion executive officer [XO] or S-3) with the
assistance of the battalion/squadron Master Gunner develops, designs, and executes the training exercise.
He collects all evaluation packets. He factors in his own observations and assesses the elements overall
training. He approves alibis and oversees the after action review (AAR).
SECTION/PLATOON EVALUATOR
18-11. Each section/platoon has one senior evaluator. At a minimum, he should have leadership
experience in at least the level he is evaluating (section or platoon leader time). He observes overall
section/platoon tasks, actions, and fire control and distribution. He gives the senior trainer his evaluations,
observations, and an initial assessment. He also conducts the AAR.
ASSISTANT EVALUATOR
18-12. Each section/platoon containing rifle squad elements has at least one assistant evaluator. The
assistant evaluator should have leadership experience in at least the level he is evaluating (squad or platoon
leader time). He observes overall squad leader tasks, rifle squad and fire team actions, and fire control and
distribution. He also helps ensure live-fire safety. He assesses the squads using the T&EOs. He provides
input during the AAR.
GUNNERY EVALUATOR
18-13. Each section/platoon has one gunnery evaluator, who should be a Master Gunner or a qualified
vehicle crew evaluator (VCE) that understands crew gunnery evaluation and target operations. The
gunnery evaluator monitors his designated section/platoon and confirms target kills with the range tower.
Another gunnery evaluator can work with the computer operator to enhance range operations. Squad target
kills may be assessed by the assistant evaluator or the gunnery evaluator in the tower (if down range data is
available).
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
18-14. Collective proficiency exercises and practice tables are a building block for section and platoon
qualification. Proficiency tables are resourced for device-based gunnery. Sections and platoons should
participate collectively in device-based training at least once before conducting live-fire training at that
level. Practice tables are resourced for subcaliber (Abrams) training. Bradleys will fire full caliber 25mm
ammunition. When they do qualify, sections and platoons follow the guidelines and standards in the
applicable collective tasks and this chapter.
z
Section and platoon gunnery will be conducted in two phases, one during the day and one at
night.
z
The S-3 and Master Gunner develop scenarios that require the sections and platoons to conduct
designated core missions and their respective primary collective tasks. The engineer company
Master Gunner will provide subject matter expertise (SME) to develop scenarios for engineer
platoons. Live-fire gunnery presentations are incorporated into the FTs. This chapter identifies
the minimum number of live-fire targets for each platform system during qualification; however,
units may add targets if ammunition resources allow.
z
The S-3, S-2, and Master Gunner select vehicle and troop arrays that represent threat forces in
the operational environment (OE) or the required training emphasis, based on the units missionessential task list (METL). They also specify threat target types and engagement distances or
18-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Collective Gunnery
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
range bands as well as most-to-least-dangerous targets, based on the threat analysis and training
emphasis. The end product is a threat template for section and platoon gunnery exercises.
The S-3 develops an operation order (OPORD) that supports the missions.
The Master Gunner prepares evaluation packets for each section or platoon. Each packet
contains T&EOs and table assessment sheets. He arranges the contents in collective-task
sequence.
The Master Gunner coordinates all necessary resources and personnel to support the gunnery
exercises.
The sections and platoons use all organic equipment and weapon systems.
Proficiency, practice, and qualification tables may be conducted on the same range; however,
target presentation will not be in the same sequence.
The computer addresses, individually, all troop targets for scoring. Troop targets will not be
linked together to create multiple kills.
All units equipped with the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV), regardless of type (BFV, Bradley
Fire Support team [BFIST], Engineer Bradley Fighting Vehicle [EBFV]) will use the Bradley
ammunition and targetry allocations.
Mounted Crew Served Weapons refers to all wheeled and tracked vehicles within the HBCT
that mount either a caliber .50 machine gun, 7.62-mm machine gun or a MK19.
For each rifle squad that will fire, no more than two area troop targets are presented
simultaneously.
18-15. The commander may choose, prior to qualification, to organize his sections and platoons as either
mixed or pure elements. Figure 18-3 details all of the possible HBCT section and platoon collective
gunnery combinations.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-7
Chapter 18
Figure 18-3. Abrams and Bradley Crew Gunnery Tables II-VI
18-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Collective Gunnery

18-16. These engagements will be conducted on all proficiency exercises and collective tables.
Commanders may choose to conduct one friendly or one neutral presentation, day and night.
18-17. These engagements will be conducted on all platforms:
z
One defensive engagement, day and night.
z
One offensive engagement, day and night.
z
One short-halt engagement, day and night.
z
One chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) engagement, day and night.
z
One sabot point target (one must be moving), day and night, 2,000 meters or greater (Abrams).
z
One main gun point target (other than canister), day and night, 800 meters or less.
z
One short-range coax target, day and night, 300 meters or less.
z
One 25-mm point target (BFV Operation Desert Storm [ODS] and below), day and night, 1,600
meters or greater (Bradley).
z
One call for fire engagement, day or night.
18-18. These engagements will be conducted on the armed High Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle
(HMMWV):
z
Caliber .50/MK19:
One point target, day and night, 900 meters or greater.
One point target, day and night, 400 meters or less.

z
MK19. One area target, day or night, 1,200 meters or greater.
DIGITAL REQUIREMENTS
18-19. The standards listed below are the minimum requirement for digitally equipped units conducting
Tables VII through XII. Commanders may add to the requirements.
z
Digital setup and overlays sent to all vehicles in the unit from the platoon/section leader as
prefire requirement.
z
Commanders may choose to populate overlays with friendly/neutral presentations.
z
All vehicles in the unit must send and receive one digital message within the table.
z
The platoon/section leader must send and receive one digital message to the platoon
leader/commander.
Note. Digitally equipped units should assign a vehicle to populate friendly icons for Force XXI
Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) on engagements with friendly presentations to
reinforce combat identification and situational awareness (SA) training.
CALL FOR FIRE REQUIREMENTS

18-20. Vehicle commanders (VC) must meet the following requirements, as a minimum, in support of the
live-fire requirement to incorporate indirect fires:
z
The leader must develop a fire-support plan for his element.
z
The leader must initiate one call for fire mission, both day and night firing phases, on section
and platoon GTs.
z
The grid or impact must be within 150 meters of the target area.
z
The leader must report battle damage assessment (BDA) to higher (digitally, if equipped).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-9
Chapter 18
MINIMUM REQUIRED TARGETS

18-21. Table 18-1 and Table 18-2 shows the minimum required targets for Tables VII through XII.
Table 18-1. Tables VII, VIII, and IX minimum required targets per vehicle/squad
Platform System
Abrams
Bradley
Unstabilized weapon
platform (HMMWV,
ASV)
Target
Minimum Target
Main gun
Machine gun
11 (one additional target will

be made available for a
canister engagement)
AP point
HE point
Coax point
TOW
1 (per table)
Squad targets
37 (individual silhouettes)
Point
Table 18-2. Tables X, XI, and XII minimum required targets per vehicle/squad
Platform System
Abrams
Bradley
Unstabilized Weapon
Platform (HMMWV,
ASV)
Target
Minimum Target
Main gun
Machine gun
11
AP point
HE point
Coax point
TOW
1 (per table)
Infantry targets
37 (individual silhouettes)
Point
PREREQUISITES
18-22. Sections and platoons must complete these prerequisite activities before conducting a live-fire
gunnery exercise:
z
All crew members (including the platoon leaders backup crew member for mechanized
infantry) must have passed the Gunnery Skills Test (GST) and GT I within the previous three
months (six months for reserve component [RC] units).
z
All vehicle crews must have qualified as a crew on their respective Table VI within the previous
six months.
z
All rifle squad members must have qualified on their individual weapons within the previous six
months.
z
Rifle squads must have qualified on Rifle Table VI within the previous six months.
18-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Collective Gunnery
z
z
Engineer squads must have qualified as a squad on Engineer Qualification Table VIII within the
previous six months.
BFIST crews must have completed the fire support team (FIST) certification exercises within
the previous six months.
SECTION II SECTION GUNNERY
TABLE VIISECTION PROFICIENCY EXERCISE

PURPOSE
18-23. Table 18-3, Table VII introduces crews and squads to fire and maneuver as a section. It is a
device-based exercise that focuses on conducting battle drills. The objective is to develop proficiency
working as either a pure or combined arms section.
Table 18-3. Table VIISection Proficiency Exercise
TASK:
Conduct selected collective tasks while engaging a threat force during both
day and night operations.
CONDITIONS:
z
A fully equipped maneuver element section.
z
MILES (PGS for Bradleys).
z
Allocated training ammunition.
z
Full-size or scaled targets.
z
OPORD.
Note. Target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for collective tables.
STANDARDS:
Section must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P).
AMMUNITION
18-24. Table 18-4, Table VII will be conducted using the device-based training method for Abrams tanks.
Bradleys and unstabilized weapon platforms will conduct this table dry if Multiple Integrated Laser
Engagement System (MILES) is not available for a particular weapon system (MK19). At no time will
blank ammunition and live ammunition be fired on the same range.
Table 18-4. Table VIIAmmunition allocations per vehicle
Vehicle
Abrams
Bradley
Unstabilized
Weapon Platform
(HMMWV, ASV)
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Allocations per Vehicle
120mm
MILES
Caliber .50 blank
5 0 rounds with MILES
7.62mm blank
150 rounds with MILES
25mm AP
PGS or MILES
25mm HE
PGS or MILES
7.62mm blank
PGS or 200 rounds with MILES
TOW ATWESS
PGS or 1 round with MILES
Squad individual weapons
Blank ammunition
Caliber .50 blank
MK19 40mm
DRY
7.62mm blank
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-11
Chapter 18
TABLE VIIISECTION PRACTICE

PURPOSE
18-25. Table 18-5, Table VIII prepares the section for qualification. The objective is to enhance the skills
developed in Table VII in preparation for Table IX.
Table 18-5. Table VIIISection Practice
TASK:
CONDITIONS:
z A fully equipped maneuver element section.
z Caliber .50 inbore device for Abrams.
z Allocated training ammunition.
z Full-size or scaled targets.
z OPORD.
Note. Scoring of target presentation must adhere to the MPL for collective tables.
STANDARDS:
AMMUNITION
18-26. Table 18-6, Table VIII will be conducted live-fire subcaliber for Abrams and full-caliber main gun
for Bradleys.
Table 18-6. Table VIIIAmmunition allocations per vehicle
Vehicle
Abrams
Bradley
Ammunition
Caliber .50 SLAP-T
8 rounds
Caliber .50
DRY
7.62mm
DRY
25mm AP
24 rounds
25mm HE
24 rounds
7.62mm
DRY
TOW
DRY
Ball and tracer ammunition based on resources

available and targets presented
Caliber .50
Unstabilized
Weapon Platform MK19 40mm
(HMMWV, ASV) 7.62mm
18-12
DRY
DRY
DRY
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Collective Gunnery
TABLE IXSECTION QUALIFICATION

PURPOSE
18-27. Section qualification evaluates the sections ability to execute collective tasks in a tactical live-fire
environment. Collective task evaluations and target destruction measure the sections combat proficiency.
All elements within the section are integrated and evaluated on their ability to fight as a cohesive maneuver
force.
z
The section must meet all prerequisites described in Section I.
z
Section qualification must be conducted live-fire using full-caliber ammunition.
z
Sections must qualify Table IX as a prerequisite to Tables X, XI and XII (see Table 18-7).
Table 18-7. Table IXSection Qualification
TASK:
CONDITIONS:

z
A fully equipped maneuver element section.
z
z
Full-size targets.
z
OPORD.
Note. Scoring of target presentation must adhere to the minimum proficiency levels for
collective tables.
STANDARDS:
AMMUNITION
18-28. Table 18-8, Table IX will be conducted full-caliber live-fire.
Table 18-8. Table IXAmmunition allocations per vehicle
Vehicle
Abrams
Bradley
Unstabilized
Weapon Platform
(HMMWV, ASV)
3 September 2009
Ammunition
Allocations per Vehicles
120-mm TPCSDS-T
7 rounds
120-mm Canister
1 round (fired by only one tank per section)
Caliber .50
200 rounds
7.62mm
350 rounds
25mm AP
72 rounds
25mm HE
40 rounds
7.62mm
250 rounds
TOW
1 missile

Caliber .50
300 rounds
MK19 40mm
64 rounds
7.62mm (if equipped)
300 rounds
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-13
Chapter 18
SECTION TABLE EXAMPLES

18-29. Figure 18-4 through Figure 18-6 describes examples of pure and mixed section engagements.
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Attack (Day Phase)

Conduct Assembly Area Activities
Conduct Tactical Movement
Destroy an Inferior Force
FT: 2 T-90s, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads
Task: React to Chemical/Biological Attack
Task: Conduct an Overwatch/Support by Fire (FT)
3 T-90s, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Defend (Night Phase)

Conduct a Rearm and Resupply
Conduct Troop-Leading Procedures
Conduct a Platoon Defense (FT)
3 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 3 rifle squads, 2 RPG teams
Task: Conduct Tactical Movement
Figure 18-4. Section pure (armor)
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Move/Generic (Day Phase)

Conduct a Tactical Road March
Execute Actions on Contact/Take Action on Contact (FT)
Iteration 1: 2 T-90s, 2 BMP-3s, 1 BRDM-2, 1 RPG team, 2 rifle squads
Iteration 2: 3 BMP-3s, 2 rifle squads
Task: React to Indirect Fire Drill
Task: React to Chemical/Biological Attack/React to a Chemical Attack
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Stability/Support (Night Phase)

Conduct a Rearm and Resupply/Perform Resupply Operations
Conduct Area Security/Conduct a Security Patrol
Support Roadblock/Checkpoint Operations/Establish a Checkpoint (FT)
Iteration 1: 1 T-90, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 3 rifle squads
Iteration 2: 3 BMP-3s, 1 armed truck, 2 rifle squads, 2 RPG teams
Task: Conduct an Overwatch/Support by Fire/Conduct a Raid (FT)
Iteration 1: 2 T-90s, 1 armed truck, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team
Iteration 2: 3 BMP-3s, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads, 2 RPG teams
Task: Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Activities
Figure 18-5. Section mixed (1 Abrams/2 Bradley with 1 rifle squad)
18-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Collective Gunnery
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Attack (Day Phase)

Destroy an Inferior Force/Attack an Inferior Force (FT)
2 T-90s, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads
Task: Conduct an Overwatch/Support by Fire/Conduct Overwatch (FT)
2 T-90s, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team
Task: Conduct Target Acquisition
Indirect-Fire Targets: 3 T-90s, 2 BMP-3s
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Move/Screen (Night Phase)

Conduct a Rearm and Resupply/Rearm and Resupply
Execute Actions on Contact/Disengage from Threat Contact (FT)
1 BMP-3, 1 armed truck, 3 rifle squads
Task: Conduct a Screen (FT)
1 BMP-3, 2 armed trucks
Indirect-Fire Targets: 2 T-90s, 3 armed trucks
Task:
Conduct
Consolidation
and
Reorganization
Activities/Perform
Consolidation and Reorganization
Figure 18-6. Combined arms section (1 Abrams/2 unstabilized weapon platforms/1 BFIST)
SECTION III PLATOON GUNNERY
TABLE XPLATOON PROFICIENCY EXERCISE

18-30. Table 18-9, Table X introduces sections and squads to fire and maneuver as a platoon. It is a
device-based exercise that focuses on conducting battle drills. The objective is to develop proficiency
working as an integrated platoon.
Table 18-9. Table XPlatoon Proficiency Exercise
TASK:
CONDITIONS:
z
z
z
z
z
z
A fully equipped maneuver element platoon.

MILES.
PGS for Bradleys (MILES if PGS is not available).
OPORD.
collective tables.
STANDARDS:
Platoon must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P).
AMMUNITION
18-31. Table 18-10, Table X will be conducted device-based using the device-based training method for
Abrams and Bradleys. Armed HMMWVs will conduct this table dry if MILES is not available for a
particular weapon system (MK19). At no time will blank and live ammunition be fired on the same range.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-15
Chapter 18
Table 18-10. Table XAmmunition allocations per vehicle

Vehicle
Abrams
Bradley
Ammunition
120-mm
MILES
Caliber .50 blank
7.62-mm blank
25mm AP
PGS or MILES
25mm HE
PGS or MILES
7.62-mm blank
PGS or 200 rounds with MILES
TOW ATWESS
PGS or 1 missile with MILES
Blank ammunition
Caliber .50 blank

Unstabilized
(HMMWV, ASV) 7.62mm blank

DRY
TABLE XIPLATOON PRACTICE

18-32. Table 18-11, Table XI prepares the platoon for qualification. The objective is to enhance the skills
developed in Table X in preparation for Table XII.
Table 18-11. Table XIPlatoon Practice
TASK:
CONDITIONS:
z
z
z
z
z

Caliber .50 inbore device for Abrams.
OPORD.
collective tables.
STANDARDS:
Platoon must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P) and meet all
minimum requirements stated in Section II.
18-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Collective Gunnery
AMMUNITION
18-33. Table 18-12, Table XI will be conducted using the live-fire subcaliber training for Abrams.
Bradleys will conduct this table with full-caliber main gun ammunition.
Table 18-12. Table XIAmmunition allocations per vehicle
Vehicle
Abrams
Bradley
Ammunition
Caliber .50 SLAP-T
8 rounds
Caliber .50
DRY
7.62mm
DRY
25mm AP
24 rounds
25mm HE
24 rounds
7.62mm
DRY
TOW
DRY

Caliber .50
Unstabilized
(HMMWV, ASV) 7.62mm
DRY
DRY
DRY
TABLE XIIPLATOON QUALIFICATION

18-34. Platoon qualification evaluates the platoons ability to execute collective tasks in a tactical live-fire
environment (see Table 18-13). Collective task evaluations and target destruction measure the platoons
combat proficiency. All elements within the platoon are integrated and evaluated on their ability to fight as
a cohesive maneuver force.
z
The platoon must meet all prerequisites described in Section I.
z
Platoon qualification must be conducted live-fire using full-caliber ammunition.
Table 18-13. Table XIIPlatoon Qualification
TASK:
CONDITIONS:
z
z
z
z

Full-size targets.
OPORD.
collective tables.
STANDARDS:
Platoon must achieve an overall rating of Needs Practice (P).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-17
Chapter 18
AMMUNITION
18-35. Table 18-14, Table XII will be conducted full-caliber live-fire.

Table 18-14. Table XIIAmmunition allocations per vehicle
Vehicle
Abrams
Bradley
Unstabilized
Weapon Platform
(HMMWV, ASV)
Ammunition
120-mm TPCSDS-T
7 rounds
Caliber .50
200 rounds
7.62mm
350 rounds
25mm AP
72 rounds
25mm HE
40 rounds
7.62mm
250 rounds
TOW
1 missile

Caliber .50
300 rounds
MK19 40mm
64 rounds
7.62mm
300 rounds
PLATOON TABLE EXAMPLES

18-36. Figure 18-7 through Figure 18-9 describes examples of pure and combined arms platoon
engagements.
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Offense (Day Phase)

Occupy an Assembly Area
Take Action on Contact (FT)
Iteration 1: 2 BMP-3s, 1 BRDM-2, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle
squads
Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 2 BTR-80s, 1 armed truck, 1 RPG team, 1 rifle
squads
Conduct an Attack (FT)
Iteration 1: 1 BMP-3, 1 BRDM, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle
squads
Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 2 BTR-80s, 2 armed trucks, 1 RPG team, 2 rifle
squads
Clear a Trench Line (FT)
Iteration 1: 1 BMP-3, 1 BRDM-2, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 3 rifle
squads
Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 1 BTR-80, 1 armed truck, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle
squads
React to a Chemical Attack
Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization
Figure 18-7. Platoon pure (infantry)
18-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Collective Gunnery
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Defense (Night Phase)

Report Tactical Information
Conduct a Defense (FT)
Iteration 1: 2 BMP-3s, 1 BRDM-2, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 3 rifle
squads
Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 2 BTR-80s, 1 armed truck, 1 RPG team, 3 rifle
squads
Iteration 3: 2 BMP-3s, 1 BTR-80, 1 T-90, 2 rifle squads
Task: Employ Fire Support
Indirect Fire Targets: 2 T-90s, 3 BMP-3s >3,500 meters
Task: Perform Resupply Operations
Figure 18-7. Platoon pure (infantry) (continued)
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Move/Reconnaissance and Security (Day Phase)

Conduct a Convoy Escort
Execute Actions on Contact/Take Action on Contact (FT)
Iteration 1: 3 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 2 BRDM-2s, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads
Iteration 2: 2 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 1 BTR-80, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads
Task: Conduct an Attack by Fire/Attack by Fire (FT)
Iteration 1: 3 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 2 BRDM-2s, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads
Iteration 2: 2 BMP-3s, 2 BTR-80s, 2 armed trucks, 1 RPG team, 2 rifle
squads
Task: Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Activities
Mission: Stability/Support (Night Phase)

Task: Conduct Area Security/Conduct a Security Patrol
Task: Respond to a Civil Disturbance/React to a Civil Disturbance (FT)
Iteration 1: 2 armed trucks, 1 RPG team, 2 rifle squads
Iteration 2: 3 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team
Task: Support Roadblock/Checkpoint Operations/Establish a Checkpoint (FT)
2 BMP-3s, 2 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 1 rifle squad
Task: Conduct a Rearm and Resupply/Perform Resupply Operations
Figure 18-8. Platoon mixed (2 Abrams/2 Bradleys with 2 rifle squads)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
18-19
Chapter 18
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Attack (Day Phase)

Destroy an Inferior Force/Attack an Inferior Force (FT)
2 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 3 armed trucks, 2 RPG teams, 2 rifle squads
Task: Conduct an Overwatch/Support by Fire (FT)
Iteration 1: 2 T-90s, 1 armed truck, 2 rifle squads, 1 RPG team
Iteration 2: 2 T-90s, 1 armed truck, 1 RPG team
Indirect Fire Targets: (3) T-90s, (2) BMP-3s
Mission:
Task:
Task:
Task:
Move/Screen (Night Phase)

Conduct a Rearm and Resupply/Rearm and Resupply
Execute Actions on Contact/Disengage from Threat Contact (FT)
2 T-90s, 1 BMP-3, 2 armed trucks, 3 rifle squads, 1 RPG team
Task: Conduct a Screen (FT)
Iteration 1: 2 BMP-3s, 2 armed trucks, 2 rifle squads
Iteration 2: 1 BMP-3, 1 armed truck, 1 rifle squad
Indirect Fire Targets: 2 T-90s, 3 armed trucks
Task: Conduct Consolidation and Reorganization Activities/Perform
Consolidation and Reorganization
Figure 18-9. Combined Arms Platoon (2 Abrams/2 unstabilized weapon platforms/1 BFIST)
18-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Chapter 19
Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise

Chapter 19 covers the Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX). The CALFEX
is the culmination of weapon systems training at the company team level. It combines
the various capabilities of multiple weapon platforms into one exercise and trains
them to perform their primary combat missions in a realistic, live-fire environment.
Contents
Section I Conduct of the Combined
Arms Live-Fire Exercise .......................... 19-1
Concept ............................................ 19-1
Prerequisites ..................................... 19-2
Training Philosophy .......................... 19-2
Section II Planning Guidelines ............ 19-2
Weapon System Considerations ....... 19-3
Personnel Requirements ................ 19-11
Section III Training ............................. 19-12
Progressive Training ....................... 19-12
Key Personnel Training................... 19-13
Observer/Controller and Evaluator
Preparation ..................................... 19-13
Section IV Execution .......................... 19-13

Phase One Pre-Live-Fire ............. 19-13
Phase Two Tactical Movement,
Mission Execution ........................... 19-14
Phase Three Reorganization and
Reconstitution ................................. 19-14
Section V Evaluation .......................... 19-15
Standards for Evaluation ................ 19-15
Scoring ........................................... 19-17
SECTION I CONDUCT OF THE COMBINED ARMS LIVE-FIRE EXERCISE
CONCEPT
19-1. A CALFEX is a costly, resource-intensive exercise in which combined arms teams, or task forces,
maneuver and employ organic and supporting weapon systems. It is the most realistic measure of combined
arms combat readiness and should be an integral part of every units training program. Commanders must
be aware of the limitations of the CALFEX, particularly in regard to flank maneuvering, and firing on livefire ranges. Available terrain will rarely support this type of maneuver. Use of nonfiring maneuver areas, in
conjunction with live-firing ranges will assist in promoting realism as well as adding tactical training not
possible on live-fire ranges alone. Commanders should use live-fire exercises (LFX) to train certain aspects
of combat readiness, such as distribution, coordination, and synchronization of fires. Commands should try
to link multiple digital multipurpose range complexes (DMPRC), coordination of all six warfighting
functions available should be synchronized, coordinated, and controlled whether at the same ranges or
multiple facilities or a variety of live-fire ranges for maximum training value whenever possible.
19-2. For an exercise of this nature to be effective, it must involve detailed planning and careful
resourcing. Supplementary missions and a wide range of supporting tasks can be integrated into the
exercise. Resources, including ammunition, personnel, equipment, maneuver areas and firing ranges must
be programmed and coordinated early in the planning process to ensure that the exercise can be conducted
day and night.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-1
Chapter 19
Notes. This information is not intended to supersede the live-fire program at the National
Training Center (NTC), but to compliment it. Certain planning aspects described herein address
common constraints at Army posts worldwide. These same constraints may be relaxed at the
NTC because of the nature of terrain and to enhance realism.
All reports, orders, and graphics will be sent digitally, along with backup hard copies. During
contact, however, FM will be the primary means of communications. Digital communications
will continue as soon as the situation permits.
PREREQUISITES
19-3. Individual and crew-level weapon system proficiency is a critical prerequisite to the effectiveness of
CALFEX. It is required that participating platoons be qualified on Combat Table XII or equivalent platoon
qualification prior to a CALFEX. Command elements (platoon leaders; platoon sergeants; sustainment unit
commanders; and company, battalion, brigade, and division commanders) must successfully participate in
and complete a fire coordination exercise (FCX) prior to a CALFEX.
Note. DA Pam 350-38 provides the frequency of resourced events.
TRAINING PHILOSOPHY
19-4. Command elements (battalion, brigade, or division) participate in all aspects of planning, execution,
and evaluation of CALFEX participants. They receive reports from the maneuvering company team, issue
fragmentary orders (FRAGO), portray the friendly and enemy situation throughout the battlefield, and
coordinate the maneuver and support of sustainment unit elements not under the companys span of
control. If the exercise actively integrates sustainment tasks, the command elements provide command and
control and direct and support resupply and reconstitution. A CALFEX must have a minimum of three
different weapon system platforms participating in the event (such as Abrams, Bradley, and mortars).
19-5. The primary trainer during a company team CALFEX is the battalion commander. His participation
reinforces the chain of command and provides first-hand observation of the subordinate staff, commanders,
and supporting assets. A CALFEX gives units the opportunity to accomplish multi-echelon, combined
arms training and evaluation throughout the task force.
19-6. The training objective of a CALFEX is to accomplish a designated combat mission (attack, defend,
movement to contact) with live ammunition, a realistic target array, and required support and sustainment
unit assets. Standards are found in applicable Combined Arms Training Strategies (CATS) for the selected
mission, as modified by local conditions and the commanders guidance.
19-7. The training assessment of the unit(s) is important in determining the tasks to be trained during a
CALFEX, as well as all preliminary training, which should precede all exercises.
z
What is the required level of unit proficiency?
z
What is the current level of training?
z
What training is necessary?
SECTION II PLANNING GUIDELINES

19-8. A CALFEX is a major training event. To be realistic and effective, it must be well planned and well
supported with specific consideration given to each unit and weapon system to be employed. The number
of inherent supporting missions and tasks that are exercised may vary according to a number of planning
factors, such as the number and types of weapon systems used, the nature of the training land and ranges
available, and weather conditions anticipated for the exercise. The capabilities of the ranges (target pits,
19-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
lifting devices, control console, range limits, weapons authorized, freedom of maneuver, and range time
available) have an impact on the conduct of the exercise.
19-9. Long-range planning considerations are crucial in the allocation of major resources, identification of
participants, and the prerequisite training and qualification needed prior to a CALFEX.
19-10. Short-range planning includes the identification and allocation of ammunition, petroleum, oils, and
lubricants (POL), equipment and support personnel. Coordination of facilities and resources is a
continuous process through execution. Scenario development is initiated during the midterm and finalized
during the short-term planning phase. Prerequisite individual and collective training continues throughout
the planning phases.
19-11. Detailed planning by the control headquarters focuses on the training objectives and development
of the scenario. The mission specified by the control headquarters may be the same primary mission for
each company, or it may vary between companies based on their mission-essential task list (METL)
assessments. The inherent tasks to be exercised may be specified in the commanders initial guidance, or
developed as the scenario is designed.
19-12. The S-2 develops the appropriate threat array based on threat doctrine, potential theaters of
operation and contingency tasks. The participating units S-1, S-4, battalion executive officer (XO) and
battalion maintenance officers (BMO) provide the estimate of troops and equipment available for the
exercise. The identification of sustainment unit assets, internal support capabilities, and external tasking
requirements is crucial in the early stages of a CALFEX planning.
19-13. Once the control headquarters approves the scenario concept, the scenario is drafted and submitted
for the approval of range control. The firing overlay is included with the scenario. From the scenario, the
operation order (OPORD) and control plans are developed, and the detailed schedule is finalized and
published.
19-14. The scenario is written in narrative format with key cues and responses in operational terms.
Different installations vary in the degree of detail required. As much freedom of maneuver as possible
should be retained for the maneuver commanders to execute training effectively with the utmost realism.
19-15. A friendly/neutral presentation, to be presented within the CALFEX scenario, is recommended to
further enforce fire control and facilitate the training of established anti-fratricide measures.
19-16. Use of urban clusters (discussed in Chapter 13) during the CALFEX can enhance the realism of
training and provide better training opportunities for dismounted infantry operations.
19-17. Planners must not underestimate the time and resources required in the planning and conduct of a
CALFEX.
WEAPON SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS

19-18. Each unit, with its specific weapon systems, involved in CALFEX must be included in the
planning process. The following is a discussion of the key considerations for the different types of units.
19-19. The unprecedented ground mobility of the M1-series tank and M2/M3 Bradley teams necessitates
the design of deep ranges in order to make maximum use of their advanced capabilities. Targets on ranges
should be heated to facilitate acquisition by weapon platforms that are equipped with thermal optics. If
local conditions require range fan markers, they should also be heat-enhanced.
19-20. The use of screening smoke (to include thermal-defeating agents), both friendly and enemy, must
be considered in planning. Friendly use is a function of indirect-fire support planning as well as the
employment of on-board smoke grenade launchers and vehicle smoke generators. Enemy use is developed
in conjunction with the target array and in accordance with (IAW) threat doctrine. This includes the
assumption that the threat will mix chemical agents with smoke, forcing the exercising unit to operate in a
protected posture to survive and accomplish the mission. The possibility of smoke (as well as chemical,
biological, radiological, and nuclear [CBRN] simulations) drifting into adjacent ranges, roads, training
areas, and civilian land must be dealt with according to local procedures.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-3
Chapter 19
MECHANIZED INFANTRY
19-21. As mechanized infantry employs a wide variety of organic weapon systems, the exercise must
include
z
Long-range targets for tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided (TOW) missiles and
120-mm tank main gun.
z
Medium-range targets for 25-mm, caliber .50 and 7.62-mm automatic weapons, Javelin, and
MK19.
z
Close-in targets for traditional squad weapons.
z
Threat targetry movement while on the offense.
z
Depleting arrays.
z
Threats targets IAW TC 25-8.
z
Friendly targets with combat identification panels (CIP) panels.
z
Neutral presentations.
z
Maximum surface danger zone (SDZ).
19-22. For dismounted maneuver and exposed crewmen, the requirements for overwatching fires must be
considered. (For example, hazards of 120mm target practice cone stabilized discarding sabot tracer
(TPCSDS-T), 25-mm armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer (APDS-T), antitank guided missile
(ATGM), grenades, claymores, MK19, M203, and firing port weapons must be given special
consideration.) When exercising ATGM weapon systems, the low allocation and high cost of training and
service ammunition may be overcome by using the corresponding Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement
System (MILES) Combat Vehicle System (CVS)/Precision Gunnery System (PGS) equipment.
19-23. Defilade positions for fighting vehicles may be required, depending on the scenario, facilities, and
tasks to be trained. Also, improved fighting positions may be required for dismounted personnel.
ARMOR
19-24. With tanks, a key consideration is freedom of maneuver. On many high-technology ranges, roads
have been constructed to protect wiring systems and contain the maneuver unit within the range
boundaries. Such facilities have a recognized limiting effect on freedom of maneuver. The design of the
target array and the use of obstacles can facilitate a realistic scenario in a constrained environment.
19-25. Another element of the maneuver equation is the extent to which cross fires and overwatching
fires can be used. Cross fires are often limited on training ranges, precluding attacks on the flanks of
objectives and into the flanks of target arrays. Long-range, high-velocity rounds such as tank cannon
projectiles, 25mm, and missiles are most restricted in this regard. The doctrinal application of the cross-fire
control technique seeks to attack targets from the flank. Ways to incorporate this technique involve the
following:
z
Limit available positions that maneuvering vehicles may occupy.
z
Present concentrated target groups (correlated to engagement area) that can be engaged safely
using cross fires.
z
Administratively control the presentation sequence to preclude exposing targets to an element
that would result in a violation of the approved SDZ.
z
Emplace flank vehicle targets and firing (overwatch) positions in a way that simulates trapping
the opposing forces (OPFOR) in a multiunit cross fire, where the other units are notional.
19-26. Tanks main gun rounds and other weapons may not be fired over the heads of unprotected troops,
as outlined in DA PAM 385-63. Discarding sabot rounds should not be fired overhead if armored
personnel carriers or other lightly armored vehicles are in the down-range field of view of the firing tank
(the discarding sabots may penetrate the vehicle). Buttoned-up vehicles may maneuver parallel to the line
of fire to a certain extent. The exact limit of advance is determined by the SDZ for the overwatch element,
and corresponds to a 15-degree fan outside the limit of fire. An additional SDZ extends farther to the flank
19-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
when firing sabot rounds (or when unprotected troops are maneuvering down range). Dimensions of SDZs
are given in DA PAM 385-63.
LASER SAFE DESIGNATION

19-27. The procedures for designating a range facility laser safe are discussed in DA PAM 385-63,
Chapter 19. All laser devices should be treated as direct-fire weapons.
SCOUTS
19-28. Maneuver battalion and cavalry scouts should be integrated into both offensive and defensive
scenarios to exercise security and reconnaissance missions. This may be accomplished independently or in
conjunction with a company team exercise. If scouts are to be deployed forward of uploaded weapon
systems, their safety is paramount.
ARMY AVIATION
19-29. When aviation assets are to be integrated, the range control office requires enough lead time to
coordinate airspace management issues with the installation airspace management office. The battalion task
force headquarters will assume operational control (OPCON), approve their maneuver, and coordinate the
aviation element and ground maneuver company team. To fully exploit the mobility and stand-off range
advantage of aviation assets, increased range depth must be considered when developing the fires
synchronization matrix.
19-30. The use of aviation requires additional SDZ applications, as outlined in AR 385-63, Chapter 13.
They may fire from the flanks of ground maneuver units, or between them, but not from their rear (no
overhead fire). When ATGMs or aerial rockets are to be fired, the backblast area must be considered. If
helicopters are to maneuver down range from the ground element, their safety must be considered.
19-31. If Hellfire is being used in the indirect mode, special consideration must be given to the locations
of the firing aircraft and the designator. The SDZ for the Hellfire includes a seeker angle 20 degrees to
either side of the gun-target line. The designator may not be located anywhere within the seeker angle, and
preferably would be masked from the launch point by terrain or foliage.
19-32. If Joint Air Attack Team (JAAT) operations are planned, the fire support officer (FSO), forward
air controller (FAC), and air battle captain (ABC) exercise the necessary command and control measures.
While the aviation systems involved are entirely out of the sphere of control of the maneuver company
team commander, the event may be integrated into the scenario without interfering with the flow of the
exercise. This is a valid training objective for Army aviation units, close air support (CAS) pilots, and
battalion fire support elements.
Note. Most installations have an Air Force representative (Joint Tactical Air Controller
[JTAC]) that assists in the planning of CAS.
FIELD ARTILLERY
19-33. Field artillery (FA) units may support a CALFEX as an externally evaluated exercise or as
internally evaluated sustainment training. The internally evaluated sustainment training requires greater
coordination between the maneuver and FA headquarters in the planning stage, so that required FA tasks
are included in the exercise. The fires battalion typically incorporates CALFEX support into its field
training and LFXs. CALFEX offers the FA commander an opportunity to observe and evaluate his
subordinate battalion fire support elements and fire support teams (FIST). If necessary, the firing points
that support the CALFEX range must be identified, and the sequence of events may have to allow for FA
registration fires. The CALFEX is another opportunity for the brigade and battalion commanders to
collectively train and evaluate the brigades fire support system as described in Chapter 13.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-5
Chapter 19
19-34. The impact area must be large enough (within the limits of local range constraints) to
accommodate the adjustment of indirect fires. Units will not normally be allowed to maneuver into
permanent artillery impact areas because of the possibility of unexploded ordnances (UXO). Temporary
impact areas may be established, if necessary but cannot be used if dud producing munitions will be fired.
With the concurrence of range control, certified ammunition (INERT) may be fired into a temporary
impact area that is to be maneuvered through later. Participants should be alert to the possibility of duds
and take appropriate action if one is encountered. After the exercise is completed, the user clears the area,
with the assistance of the explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) detachment.
19-35. Units may maneuver in proximity to indirect fires under certain conditions. Troops and vehicles
involved in training may operate under the gun-target line in certain areas during firing. Armored vehicles
may maneuver under air bursts if variable time (VT) or time fuses are used on certified ammunition, and if
the firing data meet certain conditions explained in DA PAM 385-63, paragraph 11-4j. In this case, all
downrange vehicles must remain buttoned up.
19-36. Waivers may be pursued to facilitate the maneuver of helicopters near and under the gun-target
line and around the flanks of the SDZ; the key to imaginative training is detailed planning and
coordination.
19-37. Personnel may occupy approved bunkers within 200 meters of impacting artillery in areas
surrounding the impact area; however, this situation must be planned to fit into the CALFEX scenario and
approved by range control.
19-38. As many variables become known, the supporting artillery unit can compute a relatively accurate
buffer zone (safety diagram) for planning purposes. When constructing laser range danger fans for
Copperhead employment, safety computations are especially critical (from the standpoint of eye-safe laser
designator use). These data will have to be approved by the local range control office before the scenario is
finalized.
19-39. The use of illumination and smoke and the employment of Copperhead should be incorporated
into CALFEX fire support. The FIST chief must perform a detailed analysis of the terrain to support the
company team commanders scheme of maneuver, especially when employing Copperhead. The FIST
chief should accompany the company team commander on his leaders reconnaissance of the maneuver
area. (Fire support planning and coordination are accomplished IAW FM 6-20. FM 6-30 provides a
detailed explanation of Copperhead and the ground/vehicular laser locator designator [G/VLLD].)
MORTARS
19-40. When supporting a LFX, mortar firing points must be planned to avoid firing over the heads of
troops. To increase the training benefit for mortar crews, the exercise should be planned to cause mortars to
displace and provide continuous support. (Many of the safety considerations discussed for FA are
applicable to mortars.)
19-41. As required by each installation, a certified safety officer must be on the mortar point. The mortar
platoon/section leader and FSO must know the location of the maneuver units so they can make sure the
SDZ is enforced with respect to the gun-target line. If the mortars are fired from direct lay, it is relatively
easy to verify friendly unit positions.
CLOSE AIR SUPPORT

19-42. Employment of United States Air Force (USAF) assets requires a certified forward air controller
to assume the responsibility for integrating tactical aircraft into the scenario. Considerations for
employment include identification of friendly troops and the target area, and control of surface fires. SDZs
are discussed in Air Force Instruction (AFI) 13-212.
19-43. When employed, the sorties should be allocated to the battalion task force and controlled by the
units FAC. Within the constraints of local range regulations, an airspace coordination area should be
established to allow surface fires while CAS is employed. An alternative method is to apply CAS against a
second-echelon battalion in a defensive scenario, or the main defensive belt or a reserve unit in an
19-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
offensive scenario. If ingress is parallel to the gun-target line and the aircraft break away to the opposite
side, airspace coordination is vastly simplified. (Overflight by participating aircraft before the exercise
meets USAF regulatory guidance without disrupting the scenario.)
Note. Most installations have an Air Force representative that assists in the planning of CAS.
AIR DEFENSE ARTILLERY

19-44. Missile systems (such as Stinger, Redeye) may be maneuvered on the range IAW the units task
organization; however, the availability of missiles is normally too low to facilitate live-fire as well as SDZ
sizes. Also, air defense artillery (ADA) missile systems are more difficult to integrate into CALFEX.
Therefore, it may be more effective to employ gun systems (Avenger, Bradley Fire Support Team
[BFIST]).
Note. If local conditions preclude live-fire, the supporting ADA unit should still maneuver with
the combined arms team.
19-45. There are several alternatives to exercising ADA systems in CALFEX:
z
Missile systems may be exercised with tracker-trainer systems during assembly area or
reconsolidation operations when the live-fire phase is not in progress, pursuant to local
restrictions.
Note. Radio-controlled miniature aerial targets (RC-MAT) are currently available. However,
the constraints applicable to firing the ballistic aerial target system (BATS) could prove very
cumbersome if integrated into the scenario. Until infrared-capable RC MATs are available,
alternative (tracker-trainer) systems will continue to require live aircraft targets and will be
difficult to employ without disrupting the remainder of the exercise. Future models of RC MATs
will include an infrared source that provides a signature sufficient for tracker-trainer interface.
z
z
MILES/AGES (air-to-ground engagement system)/air defense (AD) equipment may be used

(with laser-interfaced targets, if available).
The Stinger Training Launch/Simulator (STLS) provides a method by which man-portable air
defense system (MANPADS) teams can effectively train their primary mission in conjunction
with a CALFEX. STLS replicates actual launch conditions, and fires a reusable, inert missile
approximately 50 feet. This short range should accommodate 360-degree engagement on all
facilities.
Note. MANPADS gunners will be required to avoid launching in the direction of dismounted
personnel and thin-skinned vehicles, because of the possibility of injury or damage. Projectiles
should be retrieved as soon as possible to avoid damage to the missile by armored vehicles.
Use of gun systems in a ground support role may be exercised, but the appropriate doctrinal
conditions should be accurately portrayed. Gun systems may move with the company team and
engage static helicopters or RC MATs. (Maneuver unit organic weapon systems may be used in
an air defense role, if local conditions permit.)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-7
Chapter 19
Note. Caution must be exercised to ensure that the target remains within the appropriate range
limit with respect to the firing weapons. Gun crews should be aware of their proximity to the
remainder of the company team to ensure safe firing. A realistic technique is to cause the
supporting gun systems to engage an RC MAT off to the side of the maneuver axis. This equates
to an OPFOR aircraft attacking the friendly units flank from a crossing air avenue of approach.
The gun section leader must be prepared to maneuver his element to achieve a clear field of fire.
Scenario cues may be used to facilitate the employment of air defense systems.
ENGINEERS
19-46. The extent and nature of engineer tasks are based, in part, on the type of scenario and range
facility. The task force and engineer unit are involved in the planning, execution, and selection of the
maneuver area prior to the occupation of the range facility.
Countermobility
19-47. Minefields, demolitions, and other obstacles should be planned in support of a defensive exercise.
On some facilities, the actual emplacement of obstacles may be restricted for various reasons. If the
obstacle is to be simulated, it must be emplaced (as much as the situation will allow) on an adjacent
training area. Obstacles that are planned, resourced, and emplaced should be granted obstacle effect by
increasing target engagement times and decreasing the array according to the type of obstacle. If
demolition is authorized on the range, the required safety precautions must be strictly enforced. Except for
Claymores used in defensive scenarios.
Survivability
19-48. Defilade and improved positions may already exist on some range facilities. If not, survivability
may be exercised in the preparation of a defensive position, based on the priority of work established by
the task force commander.
Mobility
19-49. In an offensive scenario, obstacle-breaching tasks may require the employment of organic or
supporting engineer equipment and offensive munitions. Threat doctrine for obstacle employment should
be reflected in the scenario and target array. The obstacle should be realistic, but not so much that it
overwhelms the unit. It must key certain responses, resulting in certain actions to reduce or bypass the
obstacle. Safety constraints for any munitions planned in the operation (bangalore torpedoes, line charges,
mine-clearing line charges [MICLIC], M908 high-explosive obstacle reducing with tracer [HE-OR-T])
must be briefed to all participants (for example, if the MICLIC is to be used to breach a minefield, or an
obstacle reducing (OR) round is to be used to breech a concrete wall all personnel within 1,000 meters and
70 meters on either side of the gun-target line must be buttoned up in a combat vehicle.) The engineers
maneuver with the company team as appropriate to the scenario.
Note. Each range facility has authorized dig areas for training units. Always refer to the local
range standing operating procedures (SOP) for conditions and waiver requests to support
training.
Ground Surveillance Radar

19-50. Radar requires some form of movement to track. Moving targets may be used to provide such a
radar signature. In an offensive scenario, ground surveillance radar (GSR) may be used to vector friendly
elements. Target acquisition and tracking reports that GSR would normally provide for long-range or flank
surveillance might be as effectively portrayed by inputs from the incident list. If GSR is employed, the
protection of the system and personnel should be considered in positioning, setup, breakdown, and
19-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
maneuver to avoid detracting from the firing units operation. GSR should be employed to supplement the
units limited-visibility operation, and can also be used to monitor range boundaries.
Sustainment Unit Support

19-51. The extent to which sustainment unit support is portrayed is again determined from training
objectives. Ammunition and fuel should be dispensed in the tactical assembly area prior to the exercise.
The company combat trains should displace as appropriate in the scenario. If desired, some of the
ammunition allocated may be prestocked in a secondary battle position for a defensive scenario, or
maintained with a logistics package to perform emergency resupply on the objective during consolidation.
Ammunition redistribution should be an integral part of the tactical scenario. Broken-down vehicles or
designated battle-damaged vehicles should be used to exercise maintenance and recovery crews in any
phase of the exercise. Enemy prisoners of war (EPW) processing or casualty treatment should be exercised
throughout the operation.
19-52. A decontamination exercise may also be integrated into the CALFEX during the
reconsolidation/reorganization phase. This will facilitate the participation of CBRN units into the exercise.
Simulation agents will provide realism in portraying a chemical environment. The simulation used must
conform to local regulations. The decontamination exercise will require decontaminating apparatus, other
decontaminators, spare chemical suits for exchange, and mask filters.
Ammunition Requirements
19-53. The ammunition requirements must conform to the allocations in DA Pam 350-38 for the current
FY as much as possible. Ammunition is not resourced for CALFEX, therefore this ammunition must be
provided through harvested ammunition and first round hit savings from previous gunnery tables (GT).
The tables below depict recommended ammunition allocations. Table 19-1 through Table 19-4 are based
on a general assessment of the level of support envisioned for a standard company team level exercise.
These must be resourced from the existing allocation for evaluation or sustainment. DA Pam 350-38
represents rounds per weapon per exercise, and assumes one exercise per year by each system. Table 19-1
through Table 19-4 use an annual company team exercise as the base figure, with some sustainment units
supporting multiple iterations.
Table 19-1. Ammunition allocation for armor/cavalry units (per vehicle)
SABOT
TPCSDS-T
HEAT-TPT
Cal .50
7.62mm
SMK
GRD/RP
MGSS
25mm
TPDS-T
25mm
TP-T
TOW
DODIC
C785/C520
C784/C511
A557
A131
G978
LA06
A940
A976
WH05
M1-series
200
200
20
M2/M3
200
16
24
24
Table 19-2. Ammunition allocation for mortar (per gun)

HE
WP
ILLUM
HE
WP
ILLUM
ILLUM
HE
WP
DODIC
BA16
BA14
B647
C868
C870
C871
C625
C623/CA04
CA03
60mm
24
81mm
24
120mm
16
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-9
Chapter 19
Table 19-3. Ammunition allocation for artillery units (per bn/btry)

HE
WP
ILLUM
SMOKE
HE
WP
ILLUM
SMOKE
DODIC
C445
C454
C449
C479
D544
D550
D505
D528
105 Btry 3X6
71
18
105 Bn 3X6
223
18
155 DS Btry 3X8
83
12
155 DS Bn 3X8
173
18
155 GS Btry 3X8
83
12
155 DS Btry 3X6
77
12
155 DS/GS Bn 3X6
173
18
155 GS Btry 3X6
83
12
155 CAV Btry 1X6
81
155 CAV Bn 1X6
76
16
155 SEP Btry 1X8
95
155 SEP Bn (LI) 1X8
77
18
Table 19-4. Ammunition allocation for infantry units (per gun)

DODIC
A131
A059
A063
A557
AA11
A064
B519
B584
M16A2/M4
110
10
M21/24 Sniper Rifle
10
M249 SAW
200
M60/M240B
200
M2 HB
100
M203 GL
12
MK19
24
Note. This table is not all-inclusive. Refer to the appropriate chapter and weapon systems in DA Pam
350-38 for any questions concerning allocations of ammunition and pyrotechnics not covered in this table.
Range Requirements
19-54. Many military training areas have areas suitable for company-level LFXs. Digital multipurpose
range complexes and supporting digital doctrine are under construction or programmed for most active
training posts. The generic design concept for the DMPRC allows it to support a CALFEX; however, local
conditions and final construction details may necessitate use of adjacent ranges and remote targets with the
DMPRC to establish a realistic company-level exercise.
19-55. Optimally, a CALFEX range maneuver area would be 5 to 10 km deep, 3 to 5 km wide (possibly
smaller for a defensive scenario), with multiple terrain features, and would allow for some cross and
flanking fires. The target array should be capable of portraying a mechanized infantry company or tank
company in the offense or a mechanized infantry company (-) with at least one platoon forward in the
defense. The SDZ required could extend up to 25 km deep and 15 km wide. (This can be smaller if cross
fires are limited and the terrain provides a backstop.) Appropriate sites should be available for the tactical
operation center (TOC), battalion trains, after action review (AAR) site, and company team assembly areas
(AA). The CALFEX range should be supported by suitable areas for a forward arming and refueling point
(FARP), if attack helicopters are included, as well as mortar and FA firing points. Other areas may be
required for decontamination exercises, convoy live-fires, incorporation of mount and other full spectrum
training events to support the CALFEX.
19-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
19-56. Range occupation will involve a series of administrative requirements. Unless the range has a
hard-wired power system, batteries may be required for target lifters. The responsibility for servicing and
emplacing targets and other administrative requirements will rest with a range support organization or the
using unit. Local range regulations and FM 3-20.21 will assist the unit in establishing range
responsibilities. The unit must identify its needs for targets, operators, target operator training,
transportation, lift capability, and engineer support.
COMPOSITE SURFACE DANGER ZONES

19-57. A composite SDZ is an overlay of all the SDZs involved in a given exercise. It considers each type
of weapon to be employed, the scheme of maneuver, and the resulting relationships between each firing
position, firing maneuver boxes and groups of targets. It represents the worst case for each phase of the
operation and is used to coordinate known constraints with realistic training. This process is somewhat
tedious to carry out, but is a necessary step in detailed planning.
19-58. Templates of SDZs must be created for all weapons to be employed. These may be made using
clear acetate, straight edge, compass, protractor, and the data in DA PAM 385-63. See Chapter 13 for
instructions.
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
19-59. Typically, when firing a CALFEX, there will be an overall officer in charge (OIC) of the entire
event, the range OIC. This OIC and his duties, responsibilities and prerequisites are outlined in DA PAM
385-63. The number and type of personnel required to support an exercise depend in part on local range
requirements. Wherever possible, the existing command and control apparatus should accomplish the range
control functions. The training unit chain of command (assisted by evaluator personnel) is responsible for
overall range safety.
COMMAND AND CONTROL

19-60. The battalion task force commander is the senior trainer/evaluator during a company-level
CALFEX. He is assisted by his staff and any external support personnel provided to control the
maneuvering and supporting units and range operations.
EVALUATORS
19-61. As a rule, observer/controllers (O/C) (evaluators) should be assigned to every maneuver platoon
and supporting element. As current roles of the maneuver section and mixed platoon evolve, the unit
should assign additional evaluators as necessary. The existing chain of command should be augmented by
as many evaluators as necessary to assure the safe execution of the exercise, and to observe the
performance of each participating unit. After the exercise, each evaluator will conduct an AAR with the
subunit he observed, then provide input to the senior evaluator for the unit AAR.
19-62. Evaluators should provide coaching and encouragement during pre-exercise training, but remain
as passive and unobtrusive as possible during the actual live-fire maneuver. Units should determine the
evaluator prerequisites and experience level. If necessary, units may wish to request support from other
units within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) to ensure the experience level matches the level
required by the complexity of the exercise.
EQUIPMENT
19-63. All personnel forward of the baseline should be aboard their designated combat vehicles, unless
conducting dismounted operations. Evaluators moving with the maneuver unit should be provided the same
protection, communications, and mobility as the unit being observed. Distinctive markings for evaluators
and their vehicles will help prevent confusion among the exercise participants. Evaluators should select
positions to the rear of the unit (immediately behind the unit or well behind on a suitable vantage point)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-11
Chapter 19
where they can best evaluate tactical movement, fire distribution, and effect and serve as live-fire safeties
as appropriate.
19-64. Communications equipment must be provided to allow all participating units to operate on all
internal frequencies and report and monitor on the appropriate external (task force) frequencies. A separate
frequency must be provided for evaluator use, and evaluators must monitor the training unit. The TOC
must continuously monitor the designated range control frequency as well as primary operational
frequencies. Units digitally equipped will report and monitor digitally to appropriate higher echelons. An
evaluator will be present in the TOC to monitor all digital traffic as required.
SECTION III TRAINING

19-65. Success during a CALFEX depends largely on the preparatory training that a unit conducts. While
CALFEX focuses on gunnery through the direct-fire score, the correct use of terrain and movement enables
the unit to maximize its combat power. Therefore, all aspects of company-level tactical training support the
CALFEX.
19-66. The LFX is not, however, the end goal of training. The ultimate goal of combat training is the
ability to fight and win. CALFEX and company-level force-on-force training with tactical engagement
simulations are the two exercises that most closely replicate the conditions of combat; therefore, are the
most important events in the overall unit training program.
PROGRESSIVE TRAINING
19-67. Training should be conducted in a crawl-walk-run sequence to build on previous training. An
accurate assessment of a units capabilities is imperative to ensure that each event focuses on known
weaknesses and reinforces previous training. Throughout the training program, unit status is continually
updated, and each event is organized to continue the building process. If the CALFEX is seen as the most
stressful, realistic training event in a training program, then a units success depends entirely on
progressive training that increases the level of complexity and causes leaders and Soldiers to learn during
each step of the process.
19-68. The parent battalion trains all subordinate units to section/platoon level in the maneuver and
employment of organic combat and sustainment systems. Training within the maneuver unit includes crew,
squad, section, and platoon drills; weapons qualification; and situational training exercises (STX). Aviation
and FA battalions train to company level in similar fashion. Proficiency at the small unit level is
fundamental. It is the foundation for more complex training, as well as a very valuable tool in a
sustainment program where personnel rotation and support taskings are common distracters.
19-69. An equally important part of the training program is leader training. Units can make extremely
effective use of map exercises (MAPEX), tactical exercise without troops (TEWT), terrain-board exercises,
leaders reconnaissance, and battle simulations to develop and sustain tactical skills. With little
coordination, all elements of the combined arms team can be represented in leader training. This affords
the various players the opportunity to build and reinforce relationships that become critical in combat,
while developing their ability to fight together as a potent combined arms force. Finally, these basic types
of leader training can be accomplished while Soldiers are involved in other types of training or on support
details, allowing the leaders to make the most of training opportunities.
19-70. Maneuver battalions train company team commanders to integrate organic, attached, and
supporting fires and to maneuver their combat forces. Where sustainment unit elements are maneuvered or
controlled by headquarters other than the company team, the battalion level headquarters either coordinates
the support or requires the company team to do so. The emphasis is on training the way the unit intends to
fight or support.
19-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
KEY PERSONNEL TRAINING

19-71. Leader training is a critical element of the training program. Crew commanders and squad-, teamsection-, and platoon-level leaders and sergeants must be afforded the opportunity to participate in leader
exercises that sharpen their tactical skills away from the scrutiny of their subordinates. The exercises
previously mentioned (MAPEX, TEWT, FCX) provide a convenient forum to train leaders at a reduced
cost.
19-72. Evaluator training should include supervised range reconnaissance, rehearsals, and detailed
briefings. Controller-evaluators must be thoroughly familiar with the scenario and range facility. Their
preparation should include a thorough wargaming session that seeks to address all possible problems and
develop appropriate solutions. Evaluators must be able to apply all aspects of mission, enemy, terrain,
(weather), troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) to the units
performance to reinforce strengths as well as identify weaknesses.
19-73. During the evaluator rehearsals, communications are verified on the control net. Evaluators must
thoroughly understand their relationship to the exercising unit. Safety is a command and control function.
Therefore, it is the responsibility of the unit commander and each of his subordinates to control fires and
movement to preclude friendly casualties. Controller-evaluators accompany the maneuvering element and
advise the tower of its progress. The target operator, at the direction of the chief controller, presents targets
that can be engaged safely by the maneuver element. By use of such passive measures, the evaluators
support the chain of command without interfering with its function. Unity of command is achieved by
designating the player units battalion task force commander as the chief controller.
19-74. To increase the training value of CALFEX at battalion staff level, every phase of staff planning
and conduct are evaluated as well. By establishing separate frequencies and call signs to represent other
(notional) units within the battalion task force and brigade, the radio traffic on the command nets is more
realistic, and the staff is exercised in conjunction with the company team. If a separate battalion performs
the control and evaluation function, evaluators are stationed within the TOC and administrative/logistics
center (ALC) to provide feedback to the player headquarters. By using CALFEX as a staff STX, and using
battalion task force level command post exercises (CPX) and FCX, the headquarters sustains its ability to
command and control the combined arms battle.
OBSERVER/CONTROLLER AND EVALUATOR PREPARATION

19-75. All O/Cs, and evaluators must be trained in AAR techniques and prepared to conduct AARs with
subgroups. The chief controller should debrief all controllers and assistants prior to the AARs.
19-76. Commanders and O/Cs should not critique or lecture. They should guide the discussions by asking
leading questions and enter the discussion only to sustain the AAR, to get the discussion back on the right
track, or bring out new points.
SECTION IV EXECUTION
19-77. The sequence of events for the exercise will vary according to local conditions. Whether the
CALFEX is a separate evaluation or an integral part of a larger training exercise, the exercise falls into
three distinct phases.
PHASE ONE PRE-LIVE-FIRE

19-78. The unit receives a warning order, conducts its before-operation checks, receives its OPORD, and
conducts troop-leading procedures. If units are digitized, information will be sent digitally.
19-79. Controller-evaluators must be present throughout to observe the process and provide feedback.
Depending on the units level of proficiency and the objectives of the exercise, the controller-evaluators
should coach and train during the pre-live-fire phase.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-13
Chapter 19
19-80. A pre-exercise rehearsal may be programmed, at the commanders discretion. It may be

accomplished on the range with the same target array as the live-fire, or on adjacent terrain with a
representative array. The rehearsal is a dry-fire training event. It should be accomplished tactically; time
should be allocated at its conclusion for an AAR and final coordination. A walk-through using MILES
CVS/PGS/MILES equipment and interfaced targets increase the target acquisition and the fire distribution
training value of the rehearsal. When operating tempo (OPTEMPO) and mileage inhibits a units ability to
conduct a pre-exercise rehearsal, simulators can be used (Close-Combat Tactical Trainer [CCTT]).
Deficiencies should be identified and corrected. Where specific deficiencies can be related to actual or
potential combat failures, those points should be made and reinforced.
19-81. To allow the company team commander to receive feedback on his concept, he should back-brief
the battalion task force commander before issuing his OPORD. This provides the battalion commander an
opportunity to train his subordinates and ensures that the scenario is followed.
FIRE COORDINATION EXERCISE

19-82. The FCX is a scaled-down CALFEX. It allows the unit commander to integrate direct and indirect
fires using subcaliber munitions, MILES CVS/PGS, and representative portions of the combined arms team
on a scaled range complex. If properly prepared, it is an extremely effective training event, and can be
accomplished at platoon, company, or battalion level. TC 25-4-1 provides additional guidance on the
preparation of an FCX.
DRY-FIRE EXERCISE
19-83. A dry-fire exercise can be used to drill or rehearse the maneuver team prior to live-fire, or as a
separate training event. As a separate event, it allows the unit to practice company and platoon drills, to
shake down communications and SOP, and to establish intervals and sectors of observation/responsibility.
As a final rehearsal, it affords the company and battalion commanders the opportunity to correct lastminute problems in movement techniques and overwatching fires. It also allows the controllers to ensure
that the players will comply with the planned scenario, at least with regard to a safe target sequence. If the
firing unit commander is to be afforded complete freedom of maneuver, the rehearsal allows the exercise
controller to verify the suitability of the target sequence and make necessary corrections.
19-84. Dry-fire exercises involve little or no expenditure of training ammunition, and no impact area is
required; however, a maneuver area, personnel, time, fuel, and a realistic target array are essential to an
effective dry fire exercise.
PHASE TWO TACTICAL MOVEMENT, MISSION EXECUTION

19-85. The unit moves tactically from the AA and performs a forward passage of lines as part of a
movement to contact, or occupies the initial defensive position. On order, weapons are loaded and the first
target sequence is presented. The unit fires and moves against the array, integrating the appropriate
supporting elements. During the battle, emergency ammunition resupply and medical evacuation may be
accomplished. Once the target array is defeated or the training objectives are met, the unit conducts a
rearward passage of lines and clears the range.
PHASE THREE REORGANIZATION AND RECONSTITUTION

19-86. The unit withdraws to a designated AA for reorganization and reconstitution. If required, the unit
is decontaminated. Vehicles are downloaded and ammunition is turned in. Once all training objectives are
attained, AARs are conducted. Figure 19-1 outlines the training strategy for a CALFEX.
19-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure 19-1. CALFEX training strategy
SECTION V EVALUATION
19-87. A fundamental principle of training is that performance is evaluated and feedback is provided to
the unit. The aspect that sets a CALFEX apart from a firepower demonstration is that its objective is to
train the combined arms team to fight together in a synchronized and coordinated effort. The most
important factor in reinforcing that training is an appropriate set of standards (against which the unit is
evaluated) and the application of those standards by qualified evaluators.
19-88. The standards for a CALFEX are extracted from respective CATS and this manual. Those
references are listed at the end of this publication. Conditions and standards discussed in the Army
Training and Evaluation Program (ARTEP) may be modified to reflect local range standards and
limitations.
STANDARDS FOR EVALUATION

19-89. As a minimum, the company team must accomplish the standards, based on the conditions, for an
attack, defense, and movement to contact mission.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-15
Chapter 19
19-90. The general conditions for the attack, defend, and movement to contact missions are
z
Given a general situation in which the battalion task force is attacking, a task organization, a
warning order, and an OPORD.
z
Sustainment unit elements (organic, attached, OPCON, or DS) may support the company team.
z
The target array represents a threat-style mechanized infantry or tank unit in a defensive posture,
grouped in platoon or depleted platoon-size positions in depth (security zone), with a reserve
(counterattack force) up to battalion strength.
z
The mission is conducted under all environmental conditions, day or night. The company team
operates under threat of CBRN attack or in an active (simulated) CBRN environment.
z
A friendly presentation is to be included within the scenario to further enhance controlling of
fires among CALFEX players.
z
The company team may be the lead element or may be following other units and attack through
them. The attack may be hasty or deliberate.
z
A security force may be employed forward of the company team. The company team may
defend in sector or in a battle position or strongpoint.
19-91. The general standards for the attack, defend, and movement to contact missions are
z
Perform troop-leading procedures allowing subordinate units enough time to prepare for the
operation.
z
If digitally equipped, send and receive all reports digitally as required and as the situation
permits.
z
Transfer data and update the situational awareness (SA) digitally.
z
Coordinate the fire support plan and mobility operations with battalion task force headquarters.
z
Resupply, as required, to sustain combat power.
z
Upon gaining contact, develop the situation rapidly and choose an appropriate course of action.
z
Employ all available combat power to suppress or destroy OPFOR weapons and gain a
favorable ratio at the decisive point.
z
Report the situation as required to the battalion task force headquarters. Reports must be secure,
accurate, and timely.
z
Achieve a direct-fire score of 70 percent or better.
z
Extract specific supporting task training and evaluation outlines (T&EOs) from the appropriate
manuals; modify to fit local conditions, as required. Unit SOPs and the battalion task force
orders are sources for standards regarding load plans, specified tasks, and combat priorities.
z
Plan for and rehearse counterattack options.
z
Detect and report OPFOR elements. Reports must be accurate, timely, and secure.
19-92. The standards for the attack mission are
z
Initiate the attack at the specified time.
z
Before gaining contact, select and execute the appropriate movement techniques and combat
formations.
z
Make effective use of terrain, movement, and smoke to minimize exposure of friendly forces to
enemy systems.
z
Breach or bypass OPFOR obstacles encountered during the attack.
z
Destroy, capture, or force the withdrawal of OPFOR encountered during the attack.
z
Seize or secure the designated objective IAW the battalion task force OPORD and FRAGOs.
Consolidate and reorganize on the objective and prepare to continue the mission.
z
Repel enemy counterattacks IAW the defend mission.
z
Accomplish coordination with adjacent and supporting units, as required.
19-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
19-93. The standards for the defend mission are

z
Occupy and prepare initial positions not later than the time specified in the battalion task force
OPORD.
z
Reconnoiter and prepare subsequent positions not later than the time specified in the battalion
task force OPORD.
z
Use obstacles to increase enemy exposure times, slow his advance, turn his flanks, and facilitate
disengagement, IAW priorities in the battalion task force OPORD.
z
Assist the rearward passage of security and engineer elements through the company team
position.
z
Conduct direct-fire engagements IAW the company team fire plan.
z
Prevent the OPFOR attack from succeeding.
z
Make effective use of cover, concealment, and smoke to minimize exposure of friendly forces to
enemy systems.
z
On order, counterattack IAW the attack mission.
19-94. The standards for the movement to contact mission are
z
Initiate movement at the specified time.
z
Before gaining contact, select and execute the appropriate movement techniques and combat
formations.
z
Destroy, capture, or force the withdrawal of OPFOR vehicles during the movement to contact.
z
Make effective use of terrain, movement, and smoke to minimize exposure of friendly forces to
enemy weapon systems.
z
Seize or secure the designated objective IAW the battalion task force OPORD and FRAGOs.
Consolidate and reorganize on the objective and prepare to continue the mission.
z
Repel enemy counterattacks.
SCORING
19-95. Indirect-fire evaluation is applied against time and accuracy standards contained in ARTEP
6-115-MTP. While no points are directly allocated for indirect-fire planning and usage, use of indirect fires
can directly attrite the threat target arrays leading to a potentially higher direct-fire score. Timely and
accurate calls for fire should enable the company team to achieve a higher direct-fire score.
19-96. The direct-fire scoring system provides a way to evaluate the company teams ability to engage a
threat array quickly, efficiently, and effectively. The scoring system developed for the direct-fire portion of
the CALFEX provides both objective, measurable evaluation by established standards and subjective
comments on the tactical and procedural strengths and weaknesses of the evaluated unit. The evaluated unit
will receive a numerical direct-fire score and a subjective tactical proficiency score. The methodology is
threat-based, yielding an objective measurement of direct-fire effectiveness and a subjective measurement
of the units tactical proficiency.
DIRECT-FIRE SCORING
19-97. The direct-fire score for the company team will be expressed as a percentage, based on the number
of target hits divided by the total number of targets presented. A 10-percent penalty will be deducted from
the overall direct-fire score if a friendly presentation is engaged. The purpose of this penalty is to reduce
the platoons overall score one qualification level (for example: If a platoons preliminary score is 95%
[Distinguished], and the platoon engaged the friendly presentation, their overall score would be 85%
[Superior]). Evaluation will be based on the ratings currently applied to all GTs (see Figure 19-2). Overall
scoring will be as follows:
z
Distinguished90 to 100 percent.
z
Superior80 to 89 percent.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-17
Chapter 19
z
z
Qualified70 to 79 percent.
Unqualified0 to 69 percent.
Example:
Gunnery Score
Penalty for Engaging a Friendly Presentation
Overall Score
-98%
-10%
-88%
88%
-10%
78%
76%
-10%
66%
Figure 19-2. Example of direct-fire scoring
DIRECT-FIRE STANDARDS AND APPLICATIONS

19-98. The evaluated units direct-fire effectiveness and distribution are measured by structuring the
threat scenario. The units allocation of ammunition will be limited, forcing the company team commander
to control and distribute his direct-fire weapon systems onto the appropriate targets.
19-99. The target-kill standards are as follows:
z
Tanks and missiles (TOW and Javelin): one round through the target.
z
25mm: at least three rounds through the target.
z
MK19: round impacts within 5 meters of target.
z
Machine guns and small arms: 25 percent hits on each set of troop targets and three rounds
through the respective unarmored vehicles.
19-100. On computerized ranges, target kill sensors should be set for minimum kills according to the
probability of kill (PK) of the weapon systems capable of killing that particular target (for example, the
25mm would register a kill only on certain vehicles such as a personnel carrier [PC] when the vehicle is
within the killing range of the weapon system).
TACTICAL AND PROCEDURAL SCORING

19-101. Units will be evaluated on their tactical and procedural proficiency as well as their direct-fire
proficiency. The tactical and procedural evaluation is rated as trained (T), practice (P), or untrained (U),
based on the judgment of the unit evaluator.
CHECKLISTS AND SCORESHEETS

19-102. Checklists and scoresheets are provided to record aspects of performance during the exercise and
provide feedback after the exercise. Items included in the checklist are doctrinally based and are developed
from CATS standards. Checklists are prepared by the controlling headquarters.
19-103. To calculate a direct-fire score for a combined arms team, determine target hits in two areas
vehicle targets and troop targets. For the score for vehicle targets, divide the total vehicle targets hit by the
total vehicle targets presented (minimum score for qualification is 70 percent). To receive a hit on troop
targets, the combined arms team must hit 25 percent of each individual set of troop targets presented. (See
Table 19-5 for a sample direct-fire computation sheet.)
19-104. Evaluator checklists are used to record key observations that bear on unit performance. The items
on the checklist should directly support exercise objectives and be graded on a GO/NO-GO basis. The
checklist should be self-explanatory, and its use should not detract from the observation of the unit. Items
on the checklist may be used to formulate the AAR; the checklist can be used to outline standards. (See
Table 19-6 for a sample evaluator checklist.)
19-105. The CALFEX summary sheet is a one-page synopsis of unit performance in the seven operations.
An overall rating (Trained/Practice/Untrained) is assigned for each operation, and the weak areas within
19-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
the operation are circled. The standards for each area are applied as outlined in Chapter 4. Additional
comments are entered at the bottom of the summary sheet as required. The summary sheet is used as a
cover sheet for the CALFEX evaluation packet. See Table 19-7 for a sample CALFEX summary sheet.
Note. Many of the operations addressed are not within direct control or the participating
maneuver commander. Consequently, the results of the exercise are not attributed to a single
company team, but to the entire combined arms organization.
Table 19-5. Example of a direct-fire computation sheet
Ammunition
Ammunition Expended
Targets Killed
Offense
Defense
Offense
Defense
Point Targets
120-mm
TOW
Javelin
25-mm
Point Target Totals
Area Targets
(Machine Gun)
Computation:
Targets Presented
Targets
Offense
Defense
Targets Killed
Percentages
Offense
Offense
Defense
Defense
Point
Area
Offense Score:
Defense Score:
Penalty for
Engaging
Friendly Target
Presentation:
10%
Rating: (circle one)

UNQUALIFIED (0 to 69%)
QUALIFIED (70 to 79%)
SUPERIOR (80 to 89%)
DISTINGUISHED (90 to 100%)
Overall Score:
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-19
Chapter 19
Table 19-6. Example of Class V expenditure

Class V Expenditure
Type
Drawn
-
Turned
In
Expended
Plt/Sec_______________ Co Tm_______________
Date______________________________________
Evaluator___________________________________
=
Yes
No
Not Observed
1. Precombat Checks. Overall

evaluation of the platoon/section is
based on observation and spot
checks. Enter comments on reverse.
Note impact on combat operation.
SOP:
Load plans.
Local security.
z
Hotloop.
z
CBRN automatic chemical
agent detection alarms
deployed.
z
Camouflage.
Maintenance:
z
PMCS accomplished per TM.
z
DA Form 2404/5988-E initiated.
z
All subsystems checks.
(Circle exceptions)
Turret
Hull
Crew-served
weapons
Communications
CBRN
Generators
Ammunition
NVGs
PEWs
Personal weapons
Engineer tools
Overall Rating: GO/NO-GO
z
z
2. Troop-Leading Procedures.
Observe the platoon/section leader
and spot check the TCs/squad
leaders. Enter comments in margin or
on reverse.
Time
Co Tm warning order received:
(Digitally if applicable)
z
Plt/sec warning order issued:
z
Co Tm OPORD received:
z
Plt/sec OPORD issued:
z
19-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table 19-6. Example of Class V expenditure (continued)

Yes
No
Not Observed
3. Leaders reconnaissance conducted by

TC.
z
Sqd ldr level.
z
Supervision.
z
Rehearsals conducted.
4. React to indirect fires.
z
Button up.
z
Assume MOPP 4.
z
Report digitally.
5. Employ supporting fires.
z
Digitally request indirect fires.
z
Digitally adjust indirect fires.
6. Employ direct fires.
z
Control Plt/sec fires.
z
Plt/sec fires distributed laterally/in-depth.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-21
Chapter 19
Table 19-7. Example of a CALFEX summary sheet

UNIT ___________________________________________________ DATE ______________________
OPERATION
TRAINED
PRACTICE
UNTRAINED
Maneuver:
z
Offense.
z
Defense.
z
Infantry mounted/dismounted.
z
Tanks.
z
Movement.
z
Direct fire (score _________).
z
Aviation.
z
TOW.
___________
___________
____________
Fire Support:
z
z
z
z
Missions standards achieved.

Mortars _______ _______________.
Field artillery _______ _______________.
Close air support _______________.
Intelligence:
z
Collection.
z
Analysis.
z
Digital reporting.
z
Reporting.
Air Defense:
z
z
z
Small arms.
Dedicated assets.
Passive.
Mobility/Countermobility/Survivability:
z
z
z
Obstacle employment.
Obstacle breaching.
Survivability measures.
Sustainment Maintenance/Recovery:
z
z
z
Resupply.
Medical.
Digital reporting.
Command and Control:

Planning Execution
Notes.
1. Areas circled indicate weak support, both time and accuracy standards must be met for satisfactory
achievement of the objective.
2. Under fire support, both time and accuracy standards must be met for satisfactory achievement of the
objective.
Integration of Indirect and Supporting Fires

19-106. The company team commanders effective integration of the combined arms team should be
reflected with an appropriate attrition rate within the threat array. Many ranges do not support engineer
efforts, indirect fires, or CAS within the target area of the range. Units firing a CALFEX on such ranges
should be evaluated on their ability to plan for, request, and pinpoint supporting fires. (For example, if the
19-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
evaluated unit requests a fire mission that would have achieved target effect, the succeeding target array
presentation should reflect threat losses by presenting fewer targets. An engineer plan that would
effectively structure the engagement area would delay the threat arrays appropriately.)
19-107. The direct-fire score can be affected by the use of available combat multipliers. By effectively
using combat multipliers, the company team commander can attrite the threat array both before it moves
within the effective range of his direct-fire systems and by slowing the threat rate of advance, creating a
more favorable engagement environment for his forces. Commanders who do not make effective use of
their combat multipliers will face corresponding greater numbers of threat targets advancing toward them
at a higher rate, automatically penalizing the evaluated company team. The attrition of the threat target
arrays by planning combat multipliers effectively provides a direct link, readily apparent to the
commander, between the direct-fire fight and the integration of combat multipliers.
After Action Review

19-108. The AAR is the forum for the feedback and discussion of a units performance during an exercise.
The AAR format and procedures may be modified by the actual situation.
19-109. Once the exercise is completed, each subunit evaluator will conduct an AAR with the element he
observed. This review focuses specifically on the performance of that small unit, and should involve all
personnel in the unit. A terrain model of the range or a vantage point overlooking the range will help focus
the discussion.
19-110. Once all subunit AARs are completed, the evaluators, unit commander, and all subordinate and
supporting leaders gather for the overall AAR conducted by the battalion commander. Evaluators gather
first and provide information to help the commander develop a complete picture of the exercise. If video
equipment is used, it should be reviewed beforehand and included in the AAR. Once the commander
organizes his notes, he assembles all participants. The battalion commander conducts the AAR in his role
as senior controller-evaluator. He may require the S-3 or another officer to conduct the AAR but should
actively participate.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
19-23
Appendix A
Abrams Live-Fire Preparation

Appendix A discusses boresighting, pre-fire checks, armament accuracy checks
(AAC), live-fire accuracy screening test (LFAST), zeroing procedures, post-fire
checks, malfunctions, error sources, range determination methods for the Abrams
main battle tanks, ammunition stowage and historical records.
In conjunction with performing regular preventive maintenance, checks, and services
(PMCS) the crew conducts monthly AACs to ensure their fire control system is fully
operational. Before any firing event the crew performs pre-fire checks and boresights
all weapon systems. This ensures all turret weapon systems operate properly and
prevents many of the common malfunctions that can occur during firing. If a
malfunction does occur, the crew tries to correct it; if they cannot, they report the
malfunction to the master gunner. After firing the weapon systems, the crew conducts
a post-fire check.
Contents
Section I Boresighting ...........................A-2
M27A3 Muzzle Boresight Device
Alignment Procedures ........................ A-2
Boresighting the M1A1 ....................... A-9
Boresighting the M1A2 SEP/V2 ........ A-21
Air Temperature and Atmospheric
(Barometric) Pressure ....................... A-40
Section II Abrams Pre-Fire Checks .....A-42
Section III Armament Accuracy
Checks .....................................................A-44
M1A1 Procedures ............................. A-46
M1A2 SEP Procedures ..................... A-61
Expanded AAC Checks .................... A-72
Cam Bracket Operating Cable
Adjustment ........................................ A-82
Section IV Live-Fire Accuracy
Screening Test ........................................A-85
Proofing Team .................................. A-85
Screening Procedures ...................... A-86
Section V Zeroing Tank-Mounted
Machine Guns ..........................................A-99
Boresighting the Caliber .50 Machine
Gun (M1A1) ...................................... A-99
Zeroing the Caliber .50 Machine GunA-104
Zeroing the Coaxial Machine Gun .. A-105
3 September 2009
Section VI Post-Fire Checks ............. A-109

Section VII Abrams Weapons System
Malfunctions ......................................... A-109
Main Gun Malfunction .................... A-110
M240 7.62-mm Coaxial Machine
Gun Malfunction ............................. A-110
M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun
Malfunction..................................... A-111
M250/M257 Smoke Grenades
Malfunction..................................... A-111
Communications Malfunction ......... A-111
Section VIII Error Sources ................ A-111
Fixed Biases .................................. A-112
Variable Biases .............................. A-112
Random Errors ............................... A-116
Section IX M1 Series Specific Range
Determination ....................................... A-116
Range Determination ..................... A-116
Deliberate Range Determination .... A-123
Section X Tank Ammunition Stowage
Plan ........................................................ A-130
Section XI Historical Records........... A-133
General Information ....................... A-133
Electronic DA Form 2408-4 ............ A-133
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-1
Appendix A
SECTION I BORESIGHTING
A-1. Boresighting is the key to tank main gun accuracy. For survival and success on the battlefield, tank
crews must train as they will fight. Boresighting, if not the most critical skill for tank crews, is certainly
one of the most important. Therefore, tank crews must become proficient in boresighting their weapon
system under any circumstance and environmental condition (such as air temperature and barometric
pressure). Platoon sergeants must make sure that crews can, without assistance, boresight accurately and
prepare their tanks to fire in accordance with this manual and the appropriate TM.
M27A3 MUZZLE BORESIGHT DEVICE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES

A-2. The M27A3 muzzle boresight device (MBD) is the latest model MBD for the 120-mm Abrams tank.
It has a fixed-head design, which means the optical head no longer rotates around the operating shaft. This
design will improve the ability of the MBD to retain collimation. Since the optics are now fixed in relation
to the cone, the procedures for inserting and aligning this MBD to the witness marks on the muzzle face of
the tube are different than the previous MBD models. The national stock number (NSN) for the M27A3
MBD is 4933-01-504-6263.
PROCEDURES FOR INSERTING AND ALIGNING

A-3. The purpose of the fixed head MBD is to reduce errors when boresighting. Only use these
procedures with the M27A3 fixed-head boresight device:
z
Step 1. Insert the MBD (see Figure A-1). Do not worry about aligning any marks.
Figure A-1. Step 1 - insert MBD
A-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Step 2. Tighten the MBD finger tight (see Figure A-2).
Figure A-2. Step 2 - tighten MBD finger tight

z
Step 3. Note location of alignment arrow on the marking plate. Place a mark on the cone
adjacent to the arrow (see Figure A-3).
Figure A-3. Step 3 - place a mark on the cone

z
Step 4. Remove the MBD (see Figure A-4).
Figure A-4. Step 4 - remove the MBD

z
Step 5. Reinstall the MBD with the mark on the cone at the 3 oclock position (see Figure A-5).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-3
Appendix A
Note. There is a dimple on the gun tube at the 3 oclock position.
Figure A-5. Step 5 - reinstall the MBD

z
Step 6. Tighten the MBD finger tight (see Figure A-6).
Figure A-6. Step 6 - tighten the MBD finger tight
When the MBD is tight, the alignment arrow will align with the mark on the cone and the 3
oclock mark (see Figure A-7). (If not, restart the procedures.) The eyepiece will also be at
the 3 oclock position. Continue with the MBD collimation or collimation check
procedures.
Figure A-7. Proper alignment of the MBD
A-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Step 7. To flip the MBD 180 degrees, insert the MBD with the mark on the cone at the 9
oclock position. When the MBD is tight, the 9 oclock dimple, the cone mark, the marking
plate arrow, and the MBD eyepiece will align (see Figure A-8).
Figure A-8. MBD flipped 180 degrees to the 9 oclock position

Note. Collimation and boresight procedures remain the same after the M27A3 MBD has been
aligned.
MUZZLE BORESIGHT DEVICE COLLIMATION

A-4. An MBD may be collimated to the particular tank on which it will be used. When an MBD is
collimated to a particular tank, boresighting the tank is faster and more accurate.
Collimation Check
A-5. The tank crew will conduct a collimation check periodically during routine maintenance to make
sure the MBD is correctly collimated and to determine if it needs to be turned in for repair. The vehicle
commander (VC) is responsible for the collimation of his MBD. The platoon sergeant is overall
responsible for ensuring his tank crews are conducting collimation checks periodically and collimating
MBDs when necessary. The crew conducts a collimation check using the following steps:
Notes. Make sure the turret power is on and the turret hydraulic pressure gauge reads between
1,500 and 1,700 psi.
Before conducting a collimation check, select a target with a well-defined aiming point
as close as possible to 1,200 meters. (Use the eyesight parallax shield [optic cover with hole] to
reduce the eyesight parallax. If no parallax shield is available, do not conduct a collimation
check at ranges less than 500 meters.)
Make sure the end of the tube, as far in as the MBD is inserted, is clean.
z
z
z
Step 1. Tell the gunner to lay the gun on the upper left corner of the target.
Step 2. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL.
Step 3. Insert the MBD, and make sure the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 12
oclock position by aligning it with the 12 oclock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.
Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 3 oclock position.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-5
Appendix A
CAUTION
Never hold the eyepiece while turning the operating handle.
Step 4. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle finger tight,
and make sure the eyepiece is positioned at the 3 oclock position.
Note. With the eyepiece at the 3 oclock position, the light port used for night boresighting is
pointed up. During bright days, the sun may shine through this port and cause blurring of the
MBD reticle; use one hand to shield the light port from the sun.
z
Step 5. With a pencil, mark the operating handle at the 12 oclock position (on line with the
index mark) to make sure the operating handle is tightened to the same position each time the
MBD is repositioned. (Once boresighting is complete, erase the mark. A new mark should be
used each time the tank is boresighted or the MBD is collimated.)
Note. Focus the eyepiece and turn it so the reticle lines of the MBD are parallel to the edges of
the boresight target.
z
z
z
Step 6. Without touching the gun or the MBD, sight through the MBD eyepiece and direct the
gunner to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun, using manual controls, to lay the aiming
reticle of the MBD on the target aiming point.
Step 7. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, hold the tapered muzzle cone firmly and loosen
the operating handle two complete turns to unseat the MBD; remove the MBD.
Step 8. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees; make sure that the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone
is at the 6 oclock position by aligning it with the 6 oclock witness mark on the face of the gun
tube.
z
Step 9. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle two turns
until finger tight and the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on
the tapered muzzle cone. (If the device is positioned correctly, the eyepiece will be at the 9
oclock position. If the pencil mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle
cone, erase the pencil mark and start boresight device collimation check procedures over.)
Step 10. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, look through the MBD eyepiece to make sure the
reticle is on the target aiming point.
Note. If the MBD reticle is on the target aiming point, the MBD is collimated (see Figure
A-9 on page A-8). If the reticle is off the target aiming point more than one reticle line width in
azimuth or elevation, collimate the MBD (M26A1, M27A1, or M27A3).
Collimation Procedures (M26A1, M27A1, or M27A3)

A-6. Collimation procedures should be performed on an MBD when it fails the collimation check.
Meticulous adjustments are required during collimation to ensure the MBD reticle is laying directly on the
target aiming point (see Table A-1). Tools required to collimate an MBD are
z
Spline key kit (Part #6257, NSN 5120-00-087-6415).
z
Two jewelers screwdrivers (NSN 5120-00-288-8739).
A-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
A-7. Use the following procedures to collimate an MBD (M26A1, M27A1, or M27A3):
z
Step 1. With the MBD eyepiece still at the 9 oclock position, use the spline key wrench to
loosen the collar (spline) screw behind the optical eyepiece and rotate the collar to expose the
three (or four) collimation screws.
z
Step 2. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, look through the eyepiece and make a mental note
of where the reticle is laying (in relation to the target aiming point) (see Figure A-9).
z
Step 3. Using the jewelers screwdrivers, adjust the collimation screws to move the MBD reticle
half the distance to the target aiming point. (Read the following notes carefully before making
any adjustments.)
Notes. Use two jewelers screwdrivers simultaneously, to adjust collimation screws.
Adjust the collar and collimation screws carefully to make sure the screws are not
stripped while adjusting the MBD.
Reticle movement occurs when an adjustment screw is turned clockwise while an
opposing screw is, simultaneously, turned counterclockwise.
Depending on the tolerance of both the MBD and the gun tube, the collimation screws
may not turn enough to move the reticle close enough to the target aiming point. This does not
necessarily mean that the MBD cannot be collimated; try the MBD on another tank. If an MBD
cannot be collimated on two different tanks, turn the MBD in to maintenance for repair.
Table A-1 provides general guidance for reticle adjustment with either a three-or fourscrew MBD.
Table A-1. Reticle adjustment guide
Desired Reticle
Movement
Adjustment Screw (Turn

Clockwise)
Opposing Screw (Turn

Counterclockwise)
Down and Right
Upper Left
Lower Right
Down and Left
Upper Right
Lower Left
Up and Right
Lower Left
Upper Right
Up and Left
Lower Right
Upper Left
Left
Lower Right
Lower Left
Right
Lower Left
Lower Right
Up
Lower Left or Right
Top
Down
Top
Lower Left or Right
Down and Right
Top
Lower Right
Down and Left
Top
Lower Left
Up and Right
Up and Left
Lower Left
Lower Right
Top
Top
Four Adjustment Screws
Three Adjustment Screws
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-7
Appendix A
Step 4. Once the reticle moves half the distance to the target aiming point use the jewelers
screwdrivers to tighten the collimation screws finger tight before rotating the MBD (see Figure
A-9). (This eliminates further reticle movement.)
Figure A-9. Target aiming point

z
Step 5. With the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone in the 6 oclock position, hold the
tapered muzzle cone firmly and loosen the operating handle two turns to unseat the MBD;
remove the MBD.
Step 6. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees and insert it into the muzzle of the main gun; make sure
the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 12 oclock position.
z
z
z
until finger tight; make sure the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index
mark on the tapered muzzle cone. (If the MBD is positioned correctly, the eyepiece will be at
the 3 oclock position.)
Step 8. Looking through the MBD with the eyepiece at the 3 oclock position (index mark at the
12 oclock position) direct the gunner to use the manual controls to move the gun to the target
aiming point.
Step 9. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, loosen the operating handle two complete
turns to unseat the MBD; remove the MBD.
Step 10. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees and insert it into the muzzle of the main gun; make sure
z
A-8
until finger tight and the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on
the tapered muzzle cone. (If the MBD is positioned correctly, the eyepiece should be at the 9
oclock position.)
Step 12. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, look through the MBD eyepiece to make sure the
reticle is on the target aiming point.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Note. If the MBD reticle is on the target aiming point, the collimation procedures are complete.
If not, repeat the collimation procedures (steps 2 through 12) until the reticle is on the target
aiming point with the muzzle cone in both the 12 oclock (eyepiece at 3 oclock) and 6 oclock
(eyepiece at 9 oclock) positions. Normally, several adjustments have to be made to collimate an
MBD.
z
z
z
z
Step 13. Once collimation is complete, view through the eyepiece, and carefully tighten the
collimation screws without moving the reticle off the target aiming point. (Do not over tighten
and strip the screws.)
Step 14. Perform a final collimation check (page A-5).
Step 15. Rotate the collar to the closed position and tighten the locking screw.
Step 16. Remove the MBD from the tube.
Note. If the MBD loses collimation, these procedures will have to be performed again. Loss of
collimation may be caused by
Loose collimation screws.
Stripped collimation screws.
Inoperative MBD.
Gun tube wear.
Mishandling the MBD.
BORESIGHTING THE M1A1

A-8. Boresighting establishes a definitive relationship between the axis of the bore of the gun and the
sights at zero super elevation, providing a basis for all sight alignment. When the tank is boresighted at a
known range, the fire control system provides system parallax corrections to the gunners primary sight
(GPS) and the thermal imaging system (TIS) at other ranges. It is impossible to fire accurately without
sight alignment; therefore, boresighting is fundamental in tank gunnery.
A-9. The numbers in the computer control panel (CCP) display change as the reticle is adjusted during
boresighting. Using the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch can induce reticle movement of 7.5 mils in any
direction; however, with a cold gun, no more than 2 to 3 mils movement in any direction should be
required to boresight. If the reticle must be moved more than 5 mils off center to reach boresight
alignment, recheck the procedure. Look for uncontrolled reticle drift, and perform a computer self-test.
A-10. The main gun, GPS, TIS, muzzle reference system (MRS), and gunners auxiliary sight (GAS)
should be boresighted each time the gunner or tank commander (TC) is changed, when loss of boresight
occurs, or as the situation permits. In training, perform complete boresight procedures before firing each
table. In combat, boresight before anticipated contact and after extended movement. The gunner should
adjust the browpad to fit his face snugly. This will limit the movement of the gunners head and reduce
sight parallax.
COMPUTER CORRECTION FACTORS AND AMMUNITION SUB-DESIGNATIONS

A-11. Computer correction factors (CCF) refine and improve the computer ballistic solutions, which are
calculated using ballistic data from stationary tanks and fixed gun mount test firings (see Table A-2). These
factors correct the ballistic data for part of the mean jump error not considered during these test firings.
A-12. The Abrams computer electronics unit (CEU) is capable of storing and providing zero information
(CCF) for any ammunition type designed to be fired from the tank. Because the ballistic characteristics of
different models of a particular type of ammunition can vary, the CEU can also store and provide zero
information (CCF) for different ammunition by its sub-designation.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-9
Appendix A
Table A-2. M1A1 computer correction factors

Ammunition
Sub-designation
Azimuth
Elevation
HEAT
0(M830)
-.25(L)
+.37(D)
HEAT
1(M831)
+.15(R)
+.35(D)
HEAT
1 (M831A1)
+.15(R)
-.15(U)
MPAT
0(M830A1)
+.05(R)
-.60(U)
MPAT
1(M1002)
+.10(R)
-.55(U)
HE-OR-T
0(M908)
+.05(R)
-.60(U)
Sabot
0(M829)
-.13(L)
-.65(U)
Sabot
1(M865IP/PIP)
+.15(R)
-.60(U)
Sabot
1(current or T-S1
M865)*
+.15(R)
-.60(U)
Sabot
5(M829A1)
0.0
-.45(U)
M1A1 (120mm)
Sabot
6(M829A2)
-.05(L)
-.85(U)
Sabot
7(M829A3)
-0.1(L)
-0.4(U)
Canister
0(M1028)
0.0
0.0
* See Chapter 4 to determine the most up-to-date marking system.

Notes. These values reflect numeric data entered into the CEU. If the CCFs are entered using the
numeric keypad, the negative values correspond to up and left movements of the reticle (negative values
are entered by pressing the minus [-] key first); positive values correspond to down and right movements.
The CCFs can be toggled into the CEU using the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch. For example, the
M831 HEAT elevation correction of +0.35 can be toggled into the CEU as 0.35 down.
The 120-mm M831A1, HEAT-TP-T is a replacement round for the M831, HEAT-TP-T and is
used by M1A1 tanks to conduct gunnery training exercises. During the LFAST with the M831A1 round,
units should begin with the CCF of right 0.15, and up 0.15. If the first four tanks fail to screen due to low
impacts or all hit very low on the screening panel (within 12 inches of the bottom edge of the target), then
all subsequent tanks should switch to an alternate CCF of right 0.15, down 0.35.
Muzzle Boresight Procedures (M26A1, M27A1, and M27A3 MBD)

A-13. The MBD method of boresighting the main gun is preferred over the two-point (string) method.
Tank cannons are long and heavy; therefore, droop slightly due to gravitational pull. Using the two-point
method of boresighting, this droop error is neither properly measured nor properly compensated for. The
MBD measures the axis of the gun at the muzzle end; therefore, muzzle boresighting compensates for this
droop and more reliably reflects where rounds will impact.
A-14. For best firing consistency, to standardize procedures, and to ensure devices are used properly, the
muzzle boresight procedure must be followed carefully:
Note. Before boresighting, make sure all PMCS have been completed (TM 9-2350-264-10-1
[M1A1], Table 2-1), to include entering the CCF.
z
z
z
z
A-10
Step 1. Position the tank on as level terrain as possible with the gun tube over the front slope.
Step 2. Clear all weapons and leave the main gun breech open.
Step 3. Make sure the end of the gun tube is clean.
Step 4. Select a boresight target with a clearly defined aiming point (always a right angle). Any
part of the boresight panel may be used. Make sure all crew members involved in boresighting
the vehicle know which target aiming point will be used.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Note. In operational situations, the tank may be boresighted at any known distance between
200 and 4,000 meters.
z
z
z
z
z
Step 5. With the engine running, make sure the turret hydraulic pressure gauge shows 1,500 to
1,700 psi. (If unable to operate the engine, move the AUX HYDR POWER switch to ON and
make sure the pressure gauge shows 1,150 to 1,500 psi.)
Step 6. Make sure the GUN SELECT switch is set on MAIN and both ballistic doors are open.
Step 7. Move the GPS MAGNIFICATION to 10X.
Step 8. Move the FLTR/CLEAR/shutter (SHTR) switch to CLEAR.
Step 9. Ensure MBD has been collimated; if not, perform an MBD collimation check (see page
A-5).
Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, make sure proper alignment procedures have been completed
(see pages A-2 through A-4).
z
z
z
z
Step 10. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY, squeeze one of the palm
switches on the gunners power control handles (GPCH), and check for drift. (If more than 0.5
mil of drift in 2 seconds is observed, notify organizational maintenance.)
Step 11. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, squeeze one of the palm
switches on the GPCH, and check for drift. Remove all drift. (Drift should be less than 0.5 mils
in 20 seconds.)
Step 12. With the GPCH, lay the GPS aiming dot on the boresight target, and lase. Make sure
the laser range finder (LRF) is returned to the SAFE position before continuing. If lasing is not
possible, with a palm switch depressed, index the known tank-to-target range into the CCP.
Step 14. Move the THERMAL MODE switch on the TIS to STBY and, if the tank is equipped
with an ANTI-GLARE knob, turn the ANTI-GLARE knob to position 1.
Step 15. Insert the MBD into the muzzle of the main gun and make sure the index mark on the
tapered muzzle cone is at the 12 oclock position by aligning it with the 12 oclock witness mark
on the face of the gun tube.
Notes. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 3 oclock position.
All movements of the main gun will be made using manual controls. The last movement
of the main gun will be up.
Always use a clearly defined right angle on the target as the aiming point.
If a boresight device is not available, refer to Boresight Main GunAlternate method
under Unusual Conditions in the operators manual.
CAUTION
Never hold the MBD eyepiece while turning the operating handle.
Step 16. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle finger tight
and make sure the MBD eyepiece is positioned at the 3 oclock position.
Note. With the MBD eyepiece at the 3 oclock position, the light port used for night
boresighting is pointed up. During bright days, the sun may shine through this port and cause
blurring of the MBD reticle; use one hand to shield the light port from the sun.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-11
Appendix A
MBD is rotated. (Once boresighting is complete, erase the mark. A new mark should be used
each time the tank is boresighted or the MBD is collimated.)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
gunner to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun using manual controls to lay the reticle of
the MBD on the target aiming point, with the last movement being up.
Step 19. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY.
Step 20. Ensure the GUN SELECT switch is set to MAIN.
Step 21. Open the CCP door and turn the PWR switch to ON.
Step 22. Press and release the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP; make sure the
BORESIGHT light comes on.
Step 23. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch to
move the GPS aiming dot to the boresight target aiming point.
Step 24. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses a G pattern to lay off the target manually
and re-lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point, with the last movement being up.
Step 25. Make sure the MBD reticle is on the defined target aiming point. If the reticle aiming
points are still on target, record the boresight readings from the CCP display and proceed to step
26. If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, at least one of the following is true:
The gunner has made an incorrect referral.
The gunner has made an incorrect lay.
The fire control system is faulty.
Note. If any fault is identified, correct it immediately and start boresight procedures over.
CAUTION
Rotating the MBD inside the main gun may damage the gun or leave
the device improperly aligned.
z
z
the operating handle to unseat the MBD (two complete turns); remove the MBD.
Step 27. Rotate the MBD 180 degrees and reinsert it into the muzzle of the main gun; make sure
the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 6 oclock position by aligning it with the 6
oclock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.
A-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
Step 28. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle until finger
tight and the pencil mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on the tapered
muzzle cone. (If the device is positioned correctly, the MBD eyepiece will be at the 9 oclock
position. If the pencil mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone,
erase the mark and start boresight procedures over.)
Step 29. Check the reticle of the MBD to see if it is still on the target aiming point.
If the MBD reticle is on the target aiming point, record the azimuth (AZ) and elevation (EL)
readings from the CCP display on DA Form 2408-4; proceed to step 36.
If the MBD aiming reticle is not within one reticle line width of the target aiming point,
perform collimation procedures (see page A-6). Once collimation is complete, start
boresight procedures over. If collimation procedures are impractical, proceed to step 30 to
determine the mean boresight reading.
Step 30. Direct the gunner onto the target aiming point, as in step 18. (The gunner must use the
manual controls.)
Step 31. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch to
move the GPS aiming dot to the target aiming point.
Step 32. Record the boresight readings from the CCP display.
If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are within .2 mil of the first readings (first
bullet of Step 29), proceed to step 33.
If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are not within .2 mil of the first readings
(second bullet of Step 29), and the MBD has been collimated, start boresight procedures
over.
If the boresight readings for AZ and/or EL are not within .2 mil of the first readings and the
MBD is not collimated, proceed to step 33 to determine mean readings.
Step 33. Determine the mean AZ and EL of the two sets of boresight readings.
Notes. If the azimuth readings are in the same direction, use the same direction calculation
technique below to determine the mean. If azimuth readings are in the opposite direction, use the
opposite direction calculation technique below to determine the mean.
If the elevation readings are in the same direction, use the same direction calculation
technique below to determine the mean. If the elevation readings are in the opposite direction,
use the opposite direction calculation technique below to determine the mean.
3 September 2009
Same direction calculation technique (see Table A-3a [Example 1] and Table A-3b
[Example 2]):
(1) Add the two readings.
(2) Divide the result by 2.
(3) Round off to two digits, if necessary.
Opposite direction calculation technique (see Table A-3b [Example 2], and Table A-3c,
[Example 3]):
(1) Ignore the +, -, L, R, U, and D labels, and subtract the smaller reading from the
larger reading.
(2) Divide the result by 2.
(3) Round off to two digits, if necessary.
(4) The direction will be the same as the larger number from step (1) (+, -, L, R, U, or
D).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-13
Appendix A
Table A-3a. Example 1

EXAMPLE 1
First reading: AZ: +1.8(R), EL: +1.8(D)
Second reading: AZ: +2.0(R), EL: +1.6(D)
Since both azimuth and elevation readings are in the same direction, use same
direction calculation technique for both. For example:
AZ
First reading:
Second reading:
Add (1st + 2d)
EL
+1.8(R)
+2.0(R)
+3.8(R)
First reading:
Second reading:
Add (1st + 2d)
+1.8(D)
+1.6(D)
+3.4(D)
Divide by 2: +3.8(R) 2 = +1.9(R)
Divide by 2:
Mean reading: AZ: +1.9(R)
Mean reading: EL: +1.7(D)
+3.4(D) 2 = +1.7(D)
Table A-3b. Example 2

EXAMPLE 2
First reading: AZ: +.05(R), EL: -.10(U)
Second reading: AZ: -.10(L), EL: -.05(U)
In this case, since the azimuth readings are in the opposite directions, use the
opposite direction calculation technique. Since the elevation readings are in the
same direction, use the same direction calculation technique. For example:
AZ
Larger reading:
Smaller reading:
Subtract (lg -sm)
EL
-.10(L)
+.05(R)
.05
First reading:
Second reading:
Add (lg + sm)
-.10(U)
-.05(U)
-.15(U)
Divide by 2:
.05 2 = .025
Round off to two digits: .025 = .03.
Assign direction taken from larger
number in step 1: -.03(L)
Divide by 2: -.15(U) 2 = -.075(U)

Round off to two digits:
-.075(U) = -.08(U)
Mean reading: AZ: -.03(L)
Mean reading: EL: -.08(U)
Table A-3c. Example 3

EXAMPLE 3
First reading: AZ: +.05(R), EL: -.10(U)
Second reading: AZ: -.15(L), EL: +.05(D)
Since both azimuth and elevation readings are in the opposite direction, use
opposite direction calculation technique for both. For example:
AZ
Larger reading:
Second reading:
Subtract (lg -sm):
A-14
EL
-.15(L)
+.05(R)
.10
Larger reading:
Second reading:
Subtract (lg -sm):
-.10(U)
+.05(D)
.05
Divide by 2:
.10 2 = .05
number in step 1: -.05(L)
Divide by 2:
.05 2 = .025
Round off to two digits: .025 = .03
number in step 1: -.03(U)
Mean reading: AZ:-.05(L)
Mean reading: EL: -.03(U)
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009

z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 34. The gunner uses the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch until the AZ and EL mean
readings are shown on the CCP display.
Step 35. Record the AZ and EL readings from the CCP display on DA Form 2408-4.
Step 36. Press the ENTER push button on the CCP.
Step 37. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP and make sure the proper data is
displayed on the CCP display.
Step 38. Make sure the BORESIGHT light is still illuminated. The gunner, using manual
controls, aligns the GPS aiming dot to the boresight target aiming point.
Step 39. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner aligns the GAS boresight aiming cross to
the boresight target aiming point and, making sure the GAS boresight knobs are fully seated,
slips the scales to 0 and 0.
Step 40. Make sure the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are still aligned on the
target aiming point.
If the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are still aligned on the target aiming
point, continue boresight procedures with step 41.
If a mean boresight reading was not determined in step 33 and the GPS aiming dot, GAS
boresight cross, and MBD are not still aligned on the target aiming point, start boresight
procedures over.
If a mean boresight reading was determined in step 33, the MBD reticle will not be aligned
with the target aiming point.
Step 41. Move the THERMAL MODE switch to ON and the FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to
SHTR.
Note. USMC Abrams go to Step 46.

z
z
z
z
Step 42. Unlock the TIS BORESIGHT knobs. Align the TIS (10X magnification) RETICLE to
the target aiming point.
Step 43. Lock the TIS BORESIGHT knobs and record the settings.
Step 44. Move the THERMAL MODE switch to STBY and the FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to
CLEAR.
Step 45. Remove the MBD from the muzzle of the main gun.
WARNING
Do not use the LRF when operating the MRS.
Note. US Army Abrams go to Step 67.

z
Step 46. Perform firepower enhancement program (FEP) TIS boresight.
Note. Do not superimpose FEP reticle over GPS reticle. FEP TIS reticle will not be accurate.
z
z
z
z
31 May 2010
Step 47. Make sure right (THERMAL) ballistic door is open.

Step 48. Look into the GPS eyepiece and make sure GPS day reticle is on the target aiming
point.
Step 49. Set THERMAL MODE knob to ON.
Step 50. Set FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to SHTR.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-15
Appendix A
z
z
z
z
Step 51. Set SEARCH/STARE knob to STARE.

Step 52. Set MODE knob to NORMAL.
Step 53. Set MAGNIFICATION knob to 12X or 25X.
Step 54. Set FILTER knob to MAN-CLR.
Note. It may be necessary to make adjustments with CONTRAST knob and BRIGHTNESS
knob for best image and identification when BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST knob is in MAN
(manual) position. In normal conditions, the BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST knob should be set in
to AUTO position for best results.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 55. Set BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST knob to AUTO.

Step 56. Set MODE knob to BS (boresight).
Step 57. Look into GPS eyepiece or BICU CRT and use BORESIGHT switch L, R, UP and
DOWN to align FEP TIS boresight reticle on the target aiming point.
Step 58. Press center of BORESIGHT switch to save boresight data.
Step 59. Read data displayed in GPS TIS FOV to ensure new boresight data is updated.
Step 60. Record CURRENT BS settings.
Step 61. Set MODE knob to NORM to exit boresight.
Step 62. Set THERMAL MODE knob to SDBY or OFF as required.
Step 63. Set FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to CLEAR.
Step 64. Close right (THERMAL) ballistic door.
Step 65. Press ENTER pushbutton on CCP.
Step 66. Remove MBD from the end of the gun tube.
Step 67. Press the ENTER pushbutton on the CCP.
Step 68. Perform MRS boresight.
Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL.
*Note. Make sure the LRF is on SAFE.

Move the MRS lever to IN. (The MRS light on the CCP should illuminate and 0.0 should
be displayed on the CCP display; if not, notify organizational maintenance.)
Press and release the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP; make sure the BORESIGHT
light comes on.
Grasp and hold the GPCH for approximately 5 seconds, after the gun goes to zero elevation,
release the GPCH.
Use the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch to align the GPS reticle within the MRS reticle.
(If unable to obtain a clear picture of both the GPS and MRS reticles, notify organizational
maintenance.)
Record the AZ and EL readings from the display on DA Form 2408-4. (If unable to align
the GPS and MRS, notify organizational maintenance.)
Push the MRS lever to OUT; make sure the display has cleared and the BORESIGHT and
MRS lights have gone out.
Step 69. Make sure the KE and HEAT AMMO SUBDES are correct (for example, the
appropriate service round subdesignation for wartime conditions or AMMO SUBDES 1
[training HEAT and training sabot] for the training environment).
Step 70. Make sure the following fire control inputs are correct:
*Air temperature. (If current temperature is not available, see Table A-7 on page A-40).
Ammunition temperature.
*Barometric pressure. Barometric pressure. (If current barometric pressure is not available,
see Table A-8 on page A-41).
CCFs.
Step 71. Conduct precision alignment of the GAS (see steps below).
A-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
PRECISION ALIGNMENT OF THE GAS

z
z
z
z
Step 1. Zero the CROSSWIND: Press the CROSSWIND, 0, and ENTER push buttons; the
CROSSWIND light will stay on.
Step 2. Zero the CANT: Press the CANT, 0, and ENTER push buttons; the CANT light will
stay on.
Step 3. Zero the LEAD: Press the LEAD, 0, and ENTER push buttons; the LEAD light will stay
on.
Step 4. Move the AMMUNITION SELECT switch on the GPS to SABOT. With the palm
switches pressed, re-lase or manually index the range to the boresight target and, using manual
controls, lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point. The boresight panel may be at any
range; however, it should be at battlesight range for the primary ammunition to be used.
Note. The boresight panel must be placed at a range that corresponds to a range line on the
GAS reticle.
z
z
z
Step 5. Without slipping the scales on the GAS BORESIGHT knobs, refer the GAS KE/STAFF
reticle to the range line at which you have boresighted. Record the readings from the GAS AZ
and EL knobs on DA Form 2408-4; be sure to place these readings on the GAS when firing
sabot.
Step 6. Using the GAS AZ and EL knobs, return the settings to 0 and 0. Turn the RETICLE
select knob on the GAS to HEAT.
Step 7. Move the AMMUNITION SELECT switch on the GPS to multipurpose antitank
(MPAT)/HEAT and re-lase or, with the palm switches pressed, manually index the range to the
boresight target. Release the palm switches, then using manual controls, re-lay the GPS aiming
dot on the target aiming point.
Step 8. Without slipping the scales on the GAS BORESIGHT knobs, refer the GAS HEAT to
the range line at which you have boresighted. Record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL
knobs on DA Form 2408-4; be sure to place these readings on the GAS when firing HEAT.
Note. At this point, to use a particular reticle (sabot or HEAT), select the correct reticle and add
the information for that reticle to the GAS BORESIGHT knobs for the ammunition being used.
z
Step 9. To re-enable CROSSWIND, CANT, and LEAD automatic inputs to the computer, press
the CROSSWIND push button, then the CANT push button, then the LEAD push button; the
keys should no longer be illuminated.
Step 10. Turn off the CCP by closing and latching the CCP door.
NIGHT BORESIGHTING
A-15. Night boresighting can be accomplished following normal boresighting procedures. The boresight
target must have an illuminated and heated reference point that can be seen through the MBD, GPS, GAS,
and TIS. The TC can use a chemlight or filtered flashlight to illuminate the MBD aiming reticle. (M26A1
and M27A1 MBDs have a built-in light port to facilitate night boresighting.)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-17
Appendix A
A-16. Most training ranges are equipped with targets that allow the crew to boresight at night. The
following are examples of field-expedient boresight targets for tactical situations:
z
Caliber .50 ammunition can with charcoal (for heating) and a chemlight or flashlight for the
reference point.
z
Any POL container with charcoal (for heating) and a chemlight or flashlight for the reference
point.
z
A small boresight panel (18 inches by 18 inches) quartered, colored with sand and olive drab
paint, with a visible and heated aiming point, and a chemlight or flashlight for the reference
point.
z
Any object in the tanks sector that has a clearly defined right angle for use as a reference point
when viewed through the TIS. Place a chemlight on that point as a reference point for the
MBD, GPS, and GAS.
BORESIGHTING THE GAS (GPS AND TIS INOPERATIVE) USING THE M26A1, M27A1, AND
M27A3 MBD
A-17. In some tactical situations (because of mechanical breakdown or the effects of ballistic shock), the
tank crew must use the GAS. The crew can boresight the tank and, with accurate range determination, still
fire effectively.
Notes. These procedures are only to be used in tactical situations.
The GAS can be boresighted at any range.
The parallax caused by boresighting at any range will be minimal. These procedures are
best used with the boresight panel at the battlesight range for your primary service KE
ammunition.
z
Step 1. Insert the MBD into the muzzle of the main gun, and make sure the index mark on the
on the face of the gun tube. (Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, index mark should be at the 3
oclock position.)
CAUTION
blurring of the MBD reticle; use one hand to shield the light port from the suns rays.
z
z
z
A-18
Step 4. Without touching the gun or the MBD, sight through the MBD eyepiece, and direct the
gunner to use manual controls to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun to lay the reticle of
the MBD on the target aiming point.
Step 5. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner aligns the GAS boresight cross to the
boresight target aiming point, making sure the knobs are fully seated.
Step 6. Slip the AZ and EL scales on the GAS to 0 and 0.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CAUTION
Rotating the MBD inside the gun tube may damage the gun or leave
Step 7. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, hold the tapered muzzle cone, loosen the
operating handle two complete turns to unseat the MBD, and remove the MBD from the gun
tube.
the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 6 oclock position by aligning it with the
6 oclock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
31 May 2010
position. If the mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone, erase the
mark and start boresight procedures over.)
If the MBD reticle is on target, proceed to step 16.
If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, collimate the MBD (see page A-5).
If the MBD cannot be collimated, continue boresight procedures.

Step 11. Direct the gunner onto the target aiming point. (The gunner must use the manual
controls.)
Step 12. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner will align the GAS boresight cross to the
Step 13. The gunner will record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL boresight knobs and
divide the readings by 2.
*Example: AZ(R)0.4 2 = (R)0.2
EL(L)0.6 2 = (L)0.3
Step 14. The gunner will move the AZ and EL boresight knobs on the GAS to the readings
determined in step 13.
Step 15. Without moving the GAS boresight knobs, slip the scales to 0 and 0.
Step 16. Apply the appropriate sight correction factor (SCF) for the round to be fired (see Table
A-4).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-19
Appendix A
Note. To apply new SCFs when changing battlecarry ammunition or firing a different type of
ammunition, return the GAS boresight knobs to AZ and EL readings of 0 and 0 before applying
the new SCF.
Table A-4. M1A1 sight correction factors
Ammunition
Azimuth
Elevation
HEAT (M830)
0.2(R)
0.6(R)
HEAT (M831)
0.2(L)
0.6(R)
HEAT (M831A1)
0.2(L)
0.0
M1A1
MPAT (M830A1)
0.0
0.4(L)
HE-OR-T (M908)
0.0
0.4(L)
Sabot (M829)
0.2(R)
0.8(L)
Sabot (M829A1)
0.0
0.2(L)
Sabot (M829A2)
0.0
1.2(L)
Sabot (M829A3)
0.0
0.2(L)
Sabot (M865IP/PIP)
0.2(L)
0.2(L)
Sabot (current or T-S1 M865)*
0.2(L)
0.2(L)
Canister (M1028)
0.0
0.0

Note. Left (L) and right (R) symbols indicate the direction to turn the GAS
boresight knobs.
BORESIGHT LOSS
A-18. Boresighting is simply an alignment process by which the gun and sighting system are referred to the
same point. Any movement of the gun or sights away from that alignment is a loss of boresight. The gun
may move out of alignment because
z
The gun temperature has changed since boresighting.
z
Firing or other shocks to the system (such as extensive road travel or enemy round impacts)
disturbed the sight alignment.
A-19. For the tank crew in combat, it is not important how boresight loss occurs, just that it does. While the
tank has a system to correct for artificial boresight loss (MRS), the most reliable method of correcting
boresight loss is to re-boresight the system. In training, the system should be boresighted before every firing
table. In a hostile environment, the system should be boresighted whenever the tactical situation permits.
BORESIGHT CHECK
A-20. During the long periods between the time the system is boresighted and the time the tank is fired,
boresight loss may occur due to changes in weather conditions. Crews can check for boresight loss by
conducting a boresight check:
z
Step 1. Select a target as close as possible to the range at which the tank was boresighted.
z
Step 2. Lase or manually index the range to target.
z
Step 3. Place fire control mode into EMERGENCY mode.
z
Step 4. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP.
A-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
z
z
z
Step 5. Lay the GPS reticle on a clearly defined aiming point.

Step 6. Insert the MBD into the gun tube.
Step 7. Note the position of the MBD reticle.
If the MBD reticle is on the same target aiming point determined during boresighting, no
boresight loss has occurred.
If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point and a collimated MBD was used,
boresight has been lost: reboresight the tank.
If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a noncollimated MBD was used,
remove the MBD and rotate it (180 degrees). If the midpoint between the first and second
reticle positions coincides with the gunners aiming point, the tank is still boresighted. If it
does not, boresight has been lost; reboresight the tank.
MRS CONFIRMATION
A-21. An MRS update is used to correct for boresight loss when re-boresighting or a boresight check
cannot be performed. An MRS update can be accomplished only if the tank sights and the MRS have been
properly boresighted.
A-22. Armament accuracy check 6 determines only whether the MRS can correct an artificial boresight
loss induced by the crew.
A-23. During live-fire training, crews can monitor the performance of their MRS to determine if the MRS
performs within tolerance. Upon completion of a live-fire event, perform the following procedures:
z
Step 1. Perform an MRS update and record the readings. (If the MRS update indicates no
change, perform a boresight check.) Move the MRS lever to the OUT position.
z
z
z
Step 4. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP.
z
Step 5. Using manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point.
z
z
If the MBD reticle is on the same target aiming point determined during boresighting, the
MRS performed correctly.
If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a noncollimated MBD was used to
boresight, remove and rotate the MBD 180 degrees. If the midpoint between the first and
second positions of the reticle coincides with the gunners aiming point, the MRS
performed correctly.
If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point as described above, use the RETICLE
ADJUST toggle switch and refer the GPS aiming dot to the target aiming point.
To determine if the MRS is within tolerance, compare the new boresight readings to the
previous boresight readings or MRS update readings established in Step 1. If the difference
in either AZ or EL is greater than .15 mil, the MRS is out of tolerance; notify organizational
maintenance.
EMERGENCY BORESIGHT PROCEDURES

A-24. If immediate return fire is not required, attempt an MRS update; then at the first opportunity, move
the tank to a position where it can be re-boresighted. If boresighting with an MBD is not possible, initiate
emergency boresight procedures using the alternate method described in the operators manual.
A-25. When a component of the fire control system malfunctions or is damaged by fire, the remaining
components should be boresighted.
BORESIGHTING THE M1A2 SEP/V2

A-26. Boresighting establishes a definitive relationship between the axis of the bore of the gun and the
sights at zero super elevation, providing a basis for all sight alignment. When the tank is boresighted at a
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-21
Appendix A
known range, the fire control system provides system parallax corrections to the GPS and the TIS at other
ranges. It is impossible to fire accurately without sight alignment; therefore, boresighting is fundamental in
tank gunnery.
A-27. The numbers in the GCDP change as the reticle adjusts during boresighting. Reticle movements of
7.5 mils in any direction may be induced by using the four-way switch on the GCDP; however, with a cold
gun and the GPS properly mounted, no more than 2 to 3 mils movement in any direction should be
required to boresight. If the reticle must be moved more than 5 mils off center to reach boresight
alignment, recheck the procedure. Look for uncontrolled reticle drift and perform a fire control system test.
A-28. The main gun, GPS, TIS, CITV, MRS, and GAS should be boresighted each time the gunner or TC
changes, loss of boresight occurs, or as the situation permits. In training, perform complete boresight
procedures before each firing table. In combat, boresight before anticipated contact and after movement.
COMPUTER CORRECTION FACTORS AND AMMUNITION SUB-DESIGNATIONS

A-29. CCFs refine and improve the computer ballistic solutions, which are calculated using ballistic data
from stationary tanks and fixed gun mount test firings. These factors correct the ballistic data for part of the
mean jump error not considered during these test firings (see Table A-5).
A-30. Because the ballistic characteristics of different models of a particular type of ammunition can vary,
the turret mission processor unit (TMPU) can store zero information (CCF) for every ammunition type
designed to be fired from the tank.
A-31. To enter the AMMO SUBDES into the Fire Control System (FCS), press the ADJUST push button
on the main menu of the GCDP, then the AMMO SUBDES push button. Use the four-way switch on the
GCDP to highlight the desired ammunition. Press the ENT key on the GCDP numeric keypad to store the
AMMO SUBDES in the TMPU. Repeat this procedure for each type of ammunition to be fired.
A-32. The CCFs and AMMO SUBDES are entered into the FCS manually during before-operation checks.
To apply CCFs, go to the ADJUST menu, press the ZERO push button and, using the four-way switch (or
keypad) on the GCDP, display the desired values in the GCDP window. Press the ENT key on the GCDP
numeric keypad to store the values in the TMPU.
MUZZLE BORESIGHT PROCEDURES (M27A1 OR M27A3 MBD)

A-33. The MBD method of boresighting the main gun is preferred over the old two-point (string) method.
Tank cannons are long and heavy; therefore, droop slightly due to gravitational pull. Using the two-point
method of boresighting, this droop is neither measured nor compensated for. The MBD measures the axis
of the gun at the muzzle end; therefore, muzzle boresighting compensates for this droop and more reliably
reflects where rounds will impact.
A-34. For best firing consistency, to standardize procedures, and to ensure devices are used properly, the
muzzle boresight procedure must be followed carefully.
A-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table A-5. M1A2 SEP computer correction factors

Ammunition
Sub-designation
Azimuth
Elevation
HEAT
M830
-0.25(L)
+0.37(D)
HEAT
M831
+0.15(R)
+0.35(D)
HEAT
M831A1
+0.15(R)
-0.15(U)
MPAT
M830A1
+0.05(R)
-0.60(U)
MPAT
M1002
+0.10(R)
-0.55(U)
HE-OR-T
M908
+0.05(R)
-0.60(U)
TPMP-T
M1002
+0.10(R)
-0.55(U)
M1A2 SEP
Sabot
M829
-0.13(L)
-0.65(U)
Sabot
M829A1
0.00
-0.45(U)
Sabot
M829A2
-0.05(L)
-0.85(U)
Sabot
M829A3
-0.1(L)
-0.4(U)
Sabot
M865IP/PIP
+0.15(R)
-0.60(U)
Sabot
Current or T-S1
M865*
+0.15(R)
-0.60(U)
Canister
M1028
0.0
0.0

Notes. These values reflect numeric data entered into the TMPU. If the CCFs are
entered using the numeric keypad, the negative values correspond to up and left
movements of the reticle (negative values are entered by pressing the minus [-] key
first); positive values correspond to down and right movements. The CCFs can be
toggled into the TMPU using the gunners four-way adjust switch; for example, the M831
HEAT elevation correction of +0.35 can be toggled into the TMPU as 0.35.
The 120-mm M831A1, HEAT-TP-T is a replacement round for the M831,
HEAT-TP-T and is used by M1A2 SEP tanks to conduct gunnery training exercises.
During the LFAST with the M831A1 round, units should begin with the CCF of right 0.15,
and up If the first four tanks fail to screen due to low impacts or all hit very low on the
screening panel (within 12 inches of the bottom edge of the target), then all subsequent
tanks should switch to an alternate CCF of right 0.15, down 0.35.
Note. Before boresighting, make sure all PMCS have been completed (TM 9-2350-388-10-1,
Table 2-1), to include entering the CCFs.
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Position the tank on as level terrain as possible with the gun tube over the front slope.
Step 2. Set FIRE CONTROL switch to MANUAL and clear all weapons and leave the main gun
breech open.
Step 3. Make sure the end of the gun tube is clean.
Step 4. Select a boresight target with a clearly defined aiming point (always a right angle) as
close to 1,200 meters as possible. Any part of the boresight panel may be used. Make sure all
crew members involved in boresighting the vehicle know which target aiming point will be
used.
Note. In operational situations, the tank may be boresighted at any known distance between
200 and 5,000 meters.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-23
Appendix A
z
z
z
z
Step 5. With the engine running, make sure the turret hydraulic pressure gauge shows 1,500 to
1,750 psi. (If unable to operate the engine, move the AUX HYDR POWER switch to ON and
make sure the pressure gauge shows 900 to 1,750 psi.)
Step 6. Make sure the GUN SELECT switch is turned to MAIN and both ballistic doors are
open.
Step 7. Move the GPS MAGNIFICATION switch to 10X.
Step 8. Move the FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to CLEAR.
Step 9. Make sure the MBD has been collimated; if not, perform an MBD collimation check
(see page A-6).
Note. If using the M27A3 MBD, make sure proper alignment procedures have been completed;
see pages A-2 through A-5.
z
z
z
switches on the GCH, and check for drift. If more than 0.5 mil of drift in 1second is observed
null out the EMERGENCY mode drift.
Step 11. Turn on the CITV, make sure the CITV is in CITV GLOS (gunners line of sight)
mode, move the CITV to NFOV 13X, move the FILTERS ANTI GLARE to AUTO, and move
the FRAME INTEGRATION switch to SEARCH.
Step 12. With the GCH, lay the GPS aiming dot on the boresight target, and lase. Make sure the
LRF is returned to the SAFE position before continuing. If lasing is not possible, with a palm
switch depressed, index the known tank-to-target range into the GCDP.
Step 14. Move the THERMAL MODE switch to STBY, turn the ANTI-GLARE knob to AUTO
CLEAR, and turn the SEARCH/STARE knob to SEARCH.
Note. Ensure that you have entered the correct CCFs and that you have returned the GCDP to
MAIN MENU.
z
Step 15. Set the Turret Hull Power Distribution (M1A2) (THPD) VALVE AZ DRIVE and
THPD VALVE EL DRIVE circuit breakers to OFF at the GCDP.
Step 16. Press RETURN twice to return to the MAIN MENU.
Step 17. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, grasp the GCH and attempt
to traverse left/right and elevate/depress the main gun. Ensure the hydraulic solenoids do not
engage and the turret and main gun do not move. If the hydraulic solenoids engage and the
turret and main gun move notify unit maintenance. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch
to MANUAL.
tapered muzzle cone is at the 12 oclock position.
Notes. If using the M27A3 MBD, proceed to step 22.

All movements of the main gun will be made using manual controls. The last movement
of the main gun will be up.
Always use a clearly defined right angle on the target as the aiming point.
If a boresight device is not available, refer to Boresight Main Gun-Alternate Method
under Unusual Conditions in the operators manual.
A-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CAUTION
blurring of the MBD reticle. Use one hand to shield the light port from the sun.
z
z
Step 19. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, tighten the operating handle finger tight
Step 20. With a piece of chalk, mark the operating handle at the 12 oclock position (on line
with the index mark) to make sure the operating handle is tightened to the same position each
time the MBD is repositioned. (Once boresighting is complete, erase the mark. A new mark
should be used each time the tank is boresighted or the MBD is collimated.) Proceed to step 30.
If using the M27A3 MBD, use steps 22 through 28.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 21. Insert the MBD into the muzzle end of the main gun and ensure the tapered muzzle
cone is fully seated into the muzzle end of the main gun.
Step 22. While holding the tapered muzzle cone firmly, rotate the operating handle clockwise
until it is finger tight, to secure the MBD in the gun tube.
Step 23. With a piece of chalk, mark the edge of the tapered muzzle cone parallel with the silver
arrow.
Step 24. While holding the tapered muzzle cone, rotate the operating handle counterclockwise
to loosen the MBD and completely remove the MBD from the gun tube.
Step 25. Insert the MBD into the gun tube ensuring the chalk mark on the edge of tapered
muzzle cone is positioned at 3 oclock relative to the gun tube.
Step 26. While ensuring the tapered muzzle cone is firmly seated in the muzzle end of the gun
tube, rotate the operating handle clockwise until it is finger tight and the silver arrow
corresponds with the chalk mark on the tapered muzzle cone. The optical eyepiece should be at
the 3 oclock position.
Step 27. If the optical unit eyepiece is located at the 3 oclock position, then proceed to step 28.
If not, remove the MBD, erase the chalk mark line and repeat steps 22 through 26.
Step 28. While looking through the optical unit eyepiece, adjust focus until the reticle and target
are sharp and clear then proceed to step 29.
gunner to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun using manual controls to lay the reticle of
the MBD on the target aiming point, with the last movement being up.
Step 31. With the GCDP on the MAIN MENU, press the ADJUST push button.
Step 32. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu.
Step 33. Press the GPS push button on the BORESIGHT menu.
Note. If AZ or EL numbers in GCDP display for GPS MAIN MENU are more than 7.5 mils or
the reticle will not align, notify unit maintenance.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-25
Appendix A
Step 34. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses the four-way switch on the GCDP to move
the GPS reticle aiming dot to the boresight target aiming point.
z Step 35. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses a G pattern to lay off the target manually
and re-lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point with the last movement being up.
z
Step 36. Make sure the MBD reticle is on the defined target aiming point. If the reticle aiming
points are still on target, record AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating
negative values, as displayed on the GPS MAIN menu for future reference and proceed to step
37. If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, at least one of the following is true:
The gunner has made an incorrect referral.
The gunner has made an incorrect lay.
The fire control system is faulty.

A-35. If the MBD reticle still fails to align to upper left corner of the boresight target, or the main gun
drops without GCH or CCHA palm switches depressed, notify unit maintenance.
z
Note. If any fault is identified, correct it immediately and start boresight procedures over.
z
the operating handle two complete turns to unseat the MBD; remove the MBD.
CAUTION
Rotating the MBD inside the main gun may damage the gun or leave
z
z
z
z
A-26
tight and the chalk mark on the operating handle is aligned with the index mark on the tapered
position. If the chalk mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone,
erase the mark and start boresight procedures over.)
If the MBD reticle is on the target aiming point, record the AZ and EL readings from the
GCDP on DA Form 2408-4; proceed to step 47.
If the MBD aiming reticle is not within one reticle line width of the target aiming point,
perform collimation procedures (see page A-5). Once collimation is complete, start
boresight procedures over.
If collimation procedures are impractical, proceed to step 41 to determine the mean

boresight reading.
Step 41. Direct the gunner onto the target aiming point, as in step 29. (The gunner must use the
manual controls.)
Step 42. Viewing through the GPS, the gunner uses the four-way switch on the GCDP to move
the GPS reticle to the target aiming point.
Step 43. Record the boresight readings from the GCDP.
If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are within .2 mil of the first readings (step 37),
proceed to step 44.
If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are not within .2 mil of the first readings (step
36), and the MBD is collimated, start boresight procedures over.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
If the boresight readings for both AZ and EL are not within .2 mil of the first readings and
the MBD was not collimated, proceed to step 44 to determine mean reading.
Step 44. Determine the mean AZ and EL of the two sets of boresight readings.
Note. If the azimuth readings are in the same direction, use the same direction calculation
technique below to determine the mean. If azimuth readings are in the opposite direction, use the
opposite direction calculation technique below to determine the mean.
Same direction calculation technique (see Table A-3a and Table A-3b on page A-14):
Add the two readings.
Divide the result by 2.
Round off to two digits, if necessary.
Opposite direction calculation technique (see Table A-3b and Table A-3c on page A-14):
Ignore the +, -, L, R, U, and D labels, and subtract the smaller reading from the
larger reading.
Divide the result by 2.
Round off to two digits, if necessary.
The direction will be the same as the larger number from step (1) (+, -, L, R, U, or
D).
Step 45. The gunner uses the four-way switch on the GCDP to enter the mean reading for AZ
and EL.
Step 46. Record AZ and EL readings from the GCDP on DA Form 2408-4.
Step 47. Press the ENT key on the GCDP keypad twice to enter the AZ and EL readings; then
verify the boresight numbers on the GPS menu.
Step 48. Using the manual controls, re-lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point.
Step 49. Press the CITV SETUP push button on the VEHICLE SYSTEMS menu.
Step 50. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CITV SETUP menu to enter BORESIGHT
(MAIN) menu.
Step 51. Align the CITV (NFOV) reticle aiming dot to the target aiming point using the fourway switch.
Step 52. Record the AZ and EL readings from the CITV (indicated on the BORESIGHT
(MAIN) menu) on DA Form 2408-4.
Step 53. Press the ENT key twice to enter the AZ and EL readings; then verify the CITV
boresight numbers on the BORESIGHT (MAIN) menu and on GCDP BORESIGHT menu.
Step 54. Prior to boresighting the GAS or TIS, make sure the GPS, CITV, and MBD are still on
the target aiming point.
Step 55. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner aligns the GAS boresight aiming cross to
the boresight target aiming point and, making sure the GAS boresight knobs are fully seated,
slips the scales to 0 and 0.
Step 56. Make sure the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are still aligned on the
target aiming point.
If the GPS aiming dot, GAS boresight cross, and MBD are still aligned on the target aiming
point, continue boresight procedures with step 57.
If a mean boresight reading was not determined (step 44) and the GPS aiming dot, GAS
boresight cross, and MBD are not still aligned on the target aiming point, start boresight
procedures over.
If a mean boresight reading was determined in step 45, the MBD reticle will not be aligned
with the target aiming point.
Step 57. Set FLTR/CLEAR/SHTR switch to SHTR.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-27
Appendix A
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 58. Look in the GPS eyepiece and make sure the reticle is still on the target aiming point of
the boresight panel.
Step 59. Move the THERMAL MODE switch to BIOC OFF position.
Step 60. Move the MODE knob to BS, move the MAGNIFICATION knob to 13X, and move
the POLARITY switch to white/hot (W/H) or black/hot (B/H), as desired.
Step 61. Adjust the picture to the desired levels.
Step 62. Align the TIS reticle aiming dot on target aiming point of the boresight target using the
BORESIGHT switch.
Step 63. Record AZ and EL values, indicating negative values, as displayed on TIS thermal
display on a DA Form 2408-4.
Step 64. Move the MODE knob to NORMAL, and move the THERMAL MODE switch to the
required position.
Step 65. Press RETURN on the CDU to return to VEHICLE SYSTEMS menu.
Step 66. Press the RETURN push button three times on the BORESIGHT menu to return to the
MAIN MENU.
Step 67. Remove the MBD from the muzzle of the main gun.
Step 68. Press the MAINT pushbutton on the GCDP MAIN menu. Press FIRE CONTROL CB
pushbutton on the MAINTENANCE menu. Set THPD VALVE AZ DRIVE and THPD EL
DRIVE circuit breakers to on. Press the RETURN pushbutton on MAINTENANCE menu twice
to return to MAIN menu.
WARNING
Do not use the LRF when operating the MRS.
Step 69. Perform MRS boresight.
Note. Make sure the LRF is on SAFE.

With the GCDP on the MAIN menu, press the ADJUST pushbutton on the GCDP.
Press the BORESIGHT pushbutton on the ADJUST menu.
Press the MRS pushbutton on BORESIGHT menu.
Grasp and hold the GPCH and palm switches for five seconds, then release; the gun will go
to zero degrees elevation.
Use the four-way switch on the GCDP to align the GPS reticle within the black MRS
reticle. (If unable to obtain a clear picture of both the GPS and MRS reticles, notify
organizational maintenance.)
Record the AZ and EL readings from the display on DA Form 2408-4. (If unable to align
the GPS and MRS, notify organizational maintenance.)
Press the ENT key on the GCDP keypad twice to store the AZ and EL readings for the
MRS boresight data.
Press the RETURN push button on the GCDP three times to return to the MAIN menu.
Step 70. Make sure the following fire control inputs are correct:
Air temperature. (If current temperature is not available, see Table A-7 on page A-33.)
Ammunition temperature.
Barometric pressure. (If current barometric pressure is not available, see Table A-8 on page
A-34.)
CCFs.
A-28
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Step 71. To verify data stored in the turret mission processor unit (TMPU), press the ADJUST
push button on the MAIN menu of the GCDP. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the
ADJUST menu and make sure the GPS, CITV, and MRS boresight readings coincide with
previously recorded boresight readings.
Step 72. Make sure the KE and HEAT ammunition sub-designations are correct (for example,
the appropriate service round sub-designation for wartime conditions or AMMO SUBDES 1
[training HEAT and training sabot] for the training environment).
Step 73. Perform precision alignment of the GAS (see steps below).
PRECISION ALIGNMENT OF THE GAS

z
z
z
Step 1. With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, select METRL DATA, CROSSWIND, and
MANUAL, enter the number 0, press the ENT push button on the GCDP keypad, and press
RETURN two times.
Step 2. With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, select SENSORS, press the ATTD and CANT push
buttons, select MANUAL, enter the number 0, and press RETURN three times.
Step 3. With the GCDP at the main menu, press the SENSORS push button. At the sensors
menu, push the LEAD push button and the MANUAL push button. Press the 0 push button and
the ENTER push button on the key pad. Press the RETURN push button twice to return to main
menu.
Step 4. Push the SABOT push button on the AMMUNITION SELECT panel on the GPS. With
the palm switches pressed, re-lase or manually index the range to the boresight target and, using
manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot on the target aiming point. The boresight panel may be
at any range; however, it should be at battlesight range for the primary ammunition to be used.
Note. The boresight panel must be placed at a range that corresponds to a range line on the
GAS reticle.
z
z
z
Step 5. Without slipping the scales on the GAS BORESIGHT knobs, refer to the GAS
KE/STAFF reticle 1,200-meter aiming dot (or the range line at which you have boresighted) to
the target aiming point. Record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL knobs; be sure to place
these readings on the GAS when firing sabot.
Step 6. Using the GAS AZ and EL knobs, return the settings to 0 and 0. Turn the RETICLE
select knob on the GAS to HEAT.
Step 7. Push the HEAT push button on the AMMUNITION SELECT panel on the GPS and relase or, with the palm switches pressed, manually index range to the boresight target. Re-lay the
GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point.
Step 8. Without slipping the scales on the GAS BORESIGHT knobs, refer the GAS
MPAT/HEAT reticle 1,200-meter aiming point (or the range line at which you have
boresighted) to the target aiming point. Record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL knobs; be
sure to place these readings on the GAS when firing HEAT.
Note. At this point, to use a particular reticle (KE/STAFF or MPAT/HEAT), select the correct
reticle and add the information for that reticle to the GAS BORESIGHT knobs for the
ammunition being used.
z
z
z
Step 9. Re-enable CROSSWIND: With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, select METRL DATA,
CROSSWIND, and AUTO, and press RETURN two times.
Step 10. Re-enable CANT: With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, select SENSORS, press the
ATTD and CANT push buttons, select AUTO, and press RETURN three times.
Step 11. Re-enable LEAD: With the GCDP at the MAIN menu, press the SENSORS push
button. At the SENSORS menu, push the LEAD, then AUTO push buttons, and press RETURN
twice to return to the MAIN menu.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-29
Appendix A
Note. After boresighting and before screening, verify plumb and synchronization.
WHAT PLUMB AND SYNCHRONIZATION IS AND WHY WE PLUMB/SYNC THE M1A2SEP/V2
TANK
A-36. Many Master Gunners are asked to explain plumb and sync, and why it must be performed.
Hopefully, the following paragraphs will answer your questions.
Plumb and Synchronization Defined

A-37. Plumb is the vertical alignment (a straight line). M1A2SEP/V2 tank crewmen translate vertical
alignment into the guns vertical range of motion (30 degree of travel equaling +20 degrees to -10 degrees)
and the range of motion of the Dual Axis Head Assembly (DAHA) and the CITV headmirror. In a perfect
world, the gun will move in a vertical straight line throughout its axis. But, due to specification variances
that are allowed for in tank production, this is not always true. The sights and the sight mounts, gun
mounts, gun trunnions, and the cradle are allowed variances that meet production standards, but may not
track along a perfectly straight line through its full range of motion. Now for Synchronization (Sync) it is
defined as moving at the same rate, exactly together. This is because the gun is fixed in its mount and the
vertical line it travels cannot be changed. Because of its variance, as the elevation or depression angle
increases the gun will deviate from vertical center. In other words, the gun, GPS DAHA, and CITV
headmirror need to move together at the same rate and along the same vertical axis on the M1A2SEP
family of tanks. As stated, the gun is fixed in the mount as it travels through its range of motion in a path
that cannot be changed. So, synchronization is made to the DAHA it the GPS and CITV headmirror, thus
making the GPS and CITV follow the gun throughout its full range of vertical motion.
Purpose of Plumb and Synchronization

A-38. When verifying and performing plumb and sync there are three readings taken. The 1st input taken is
as close to zero elevation as possible. The 2nd input is taken after applying 89 mils of elevation, as
measured by the gunners quadrant. The 3rd input is then taken after applying another 89 mils of elevation.
The tanks FCS will then average these three inputs and apply the average into the system. By applying this
average the FCS makes adjustments to the torques in the GPS DAHA, and torques in the CITV headmirror.
Making these adjustments ensures that proper alignment is maintained between the GPS, CITV, and main
gun. This angle is then maintained as the gun moves in its vertical axis in all angles of elevation.
A-39. Why the 3 angles? First any three angles will work. But most tank engagements are fired between
zero and +10 degrees of elevation. In order to achieve a minus elevation measurement it would require a
different type of ramp or berm would have to be designed. The quick fix Army standard existing ramps,
the three angles of 0 degrees, +89 mils and then another +89 mils, was selected and written into the TM
for the three angles for plumb and sync.
A-40. Once plumb and sync is complete, the DAHA in the GPS and CITV headmirror will align
themselves with the gun at the 1,200 meter boresight panel. This causes a refining of the boresight,
meaning the original boresight is now off, and results in a need to reboresight the tank. In addition, the
boresight data, since it has been refined, should seldomif everbe more than 0.05 mils off in either
azimuth or elevation for both the GPS and CITV.
Why You Verify Your Plumb and Synchronization Data

A-41. Tank crews must boresight first prior to verifying plumb/sync data. Tank crews given an opportunity
to lase to various targets at different ranges. Crews can verify that the gun (looking through the GAS),
GPS, and CITV are aligned on the same target aiming point. If the laser cannot be used suggest two
additional targets be emplaced at known ranges so that tank crews can verify plumb and sync after
boresighting. The effects of plumb and sync become more evident when viewing through the CITV,
because of the CITVs location on the turret compared to the gun. In addition, verifying has the added
benefit of building crew confidence in their FCS by showing them that plumb and sync actually works.
A-30
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Verify Plumb and Synchronization

Notes. The purpose of this procedure is to ensure alignment of the main gun, GPS, and CITV at
all angles of elevation.
Fire control accuracy check must be performed prior to doing this procedure.
Fire control system test must be performed prior to doing this procedure.
This procedure requires the use of a muzzle boresight device (MBD), gunners quadrant,
and ramp.
Tank engine must be running before starting procedure.
Boresight should be done at sync ramp using sync target.
Position tank as level as possible with the gun tube over the front slope. The relationship
between gun tube and target must be as close to zero mils as possible (plus or minus 35 mils).
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Boresight tank.

Step 2. Set the THPD VALVE AZ DRIVE and THPD VALVE EL DRIVE circuit breakers to
OFF at the GCDP.
Step 3. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, grasp the GCH and attempt to
traverse left/right and elevate/depress the main gun. Ensure the hydraulic solenoids do not
engage and the turret and main gun do not move. If the hydraulic solenoids engage and the turret
and main gun move notify unit maintenance. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to
MANUAL.
Step 7. Record GPS AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating negative
values, as displayed on the GPS MAIN menu.
Step 8. Press VEH SYS MODE pushbutton on the CDU.
Step 9. Press CITV SETUP pushbutton on VEHICLE SYSTEMS menu.
Step 10. Press BORESIGHT pushbutton on CITV SETUP menu.
Step 11. Record CITV BORESIGHT AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values,
indicating negative values.
Step 12. Index 89 mils on the gunners quadrant and place on the breech pads with LINE-OFFIRE arrow facing toward muzzle end of the gun.
Note. Hold gunners quadrant in place when main gun is being moved.
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 13. Using manual controls, elevate the main gun until bubble centers in level vial on the
gunners quadrant.
Step 14. Remove gunners quadrant from breech pads.
Step 15. While looking through GAS eyepiece, direct driver to back slowly up ramp until GAS
boresight cross is near upper left corner of target. Have driver stop and set parking brake.
Step 17. Using manual controls, align the GAS boresight cross on the upper left corner of target.
Step 18. View through the GPS eyepiece. If the GPS reticle is not on the upper left corner of
target, move 4-way switch on GCDP up/down, left/right to lay GPS reticle on upper left corner
of target.
Step 19. Record AZ values, indicating negative values, and EL values, indicating negative
values as displayed on the GPS MAIN menu.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-31
Appendix A
z
z
z
z
Step 20. Look at the CITV reticle. If CITV reticle is not on the upper left corner of target, move
4-way switch on CDU up/down, left/right to lay CITV reticle on upper left corner of target.
values as displayed on the BORESIGHT MAIN menu.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
A-32
gunners quadrant.
of target.
values as displayed on the GPS MAIN menu.
values as displayed on the BORESIGHT MAIN menu.
Step 33. Direct driver to move vehicle back to level ground.
Step 34. Press RETURN pushbutton on the BORESIGHT MAIN menu two times to return to
VEH SYS mode.
Step 35. Press RETURN pushbutton on GPS MAIN menu three times to return to MAIN menu.
Step 36. Determine plumb and synchronization error by using the boresight values recorded as
the examples below:
If values are in the same direction, subtract the smallest value from the largest value, and
disregard the third value.
As an example, if there are three AZ readings of 1.95, 2.02, and 1.89, subtract 1.89 from
2.02. The plumb and synchronization error would be 0.13.
As an example, if there are three EL readings of 1.81, 1.76, and 2.01, subtract 1.76 from
2.01. The plumb and synchronization error would be 0.25.
If two of the three values are in opposite directions, disregard the smallest value of the same
direction, and add the values of opposite direction. Disregard any plus or minus signs and
direction arrows when adding or subtraction.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
As an example, if there are three AZ readings of -0.13, -0.10, and 0.05, disregard -0.10 and
add - 0.13 and 0.05. The plumb and synchronization error would be 0.18.
As an example, if there are three EL readings of 0.09, -0.13, and 0.11, disregard 0.09 and
add - 0.03 and 0.11. The plumb and synchronization error would be 0.14.
Step 37. If the plumb and synchronization error is less than .3 for GPS and .4 for CITV, go to
step 40.
Step 38. If the plumb and synchronization error is greater than .3 for GPS and .4 for CITV,
perform plumb and synchronization.
Step 39. If after performing plumb and synchronization procedure, the error is greater than .3
for GPS and .4 for CITV, notify unit maintenance.
ON at the GCDP.
Step 41. Verify boresight values and reenter if necessary.
z
z
z
z
z
Perform Plumb and Synchronization

z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Boresight tank.

OFF at the GCDP.
Step 3. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, grasp the GCH and attempt to
traverse left/right and elevate/depress the main gun. Ensure the hydraulic solenoids do not
engage and the turret and main gun do not move. If the hydraulic solenoids engage and the turret
and main gun move, notify unit maintenance. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to
EMERGENCY.
Step 4. With the GCDP on the MAIN MENU, press the MAINT push button.
Step 5. Press SET UP pushbutton on the MAINTENANCE menu.
Step 6. Press PLUMB/SYNC pushbutton on SET UP menu.
Step 7. Press GPS PLUMB/SYNC pushbutton on PLUMB/SYNC menu.
Step 8. Viewing through the GAS eyepiece, make sure the GAS boresight cross is still on the
upper left corner of target. If not, use manual controls to align GAS boresight cross on upper left
corner of target.
of target.
Note. GPS reticle may move off the upper left corner of target when ENT key is pressed. If
GPS reticle moves from the upper left corner of target, ignore reticle movement.
z
Step 10. Press the ENT key on GCDP.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-33
Appendix A
Notes. In the event of a tactical display failure, CITV plumb and synchronization can be
performed by the gunner selecting CITV PLUMB/SYNC function of the PLUMB/SYNC menu.
The vehicle commander would then verbally instruct the gunner to move the CITV reticle in the
required direction.
GPS and CITV plumb and synchronization cannot be performed simultaneously from the
GCDP.
Make sure CITV display has a clear sharp image.
Currently, CITV PLUMB/SYNC numbers are not updated on CDU. Ignore CITV
PLUMB/SYNC numbers displayed on CITV PLUMB/SYNC menu when performing the
following steps. New plumb/sync corrections for CITV will be calculated when step 39 is
completed.
z
z
z
z
Step 11. Press the VEH SYS MODE pushbutton on CDU.

Step 12. Press the CITV SETUP pushbutton.
Step 13. Press PLUMB/SYNC pushbutton on CITV SETUP menu.
Step 14. Look at the CITV display. If CITV reticle is not on the upper left corner of target,
move 4-way switch on CDU up/down, left/right to lay CITV reticle on upper left corner of
target.
Note. CITV reticle may move off the upper left corner of target when ENT key is pressed. If
CITV reticle moves from the upper left corner of target, ignore reticle movement.
z
z
z
Step 15. Press the ENT key on CDU.

z
z
z
z
z
z
gunners quadrant.
of target.
z
z
A-34

FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z

z
z
z
z
z
z
gunners quadrant.
of target.
z
Note. New plumb and synchronization corrections for the GPS are calculated upon pressing
RETURN pushbutton. Failure to press the RETURN pushbutton a total of three times during
this procedure will cause the system to ignore new inputs and default to last calculated data.
z
z
z
Step 36. Press the RETURN pushbutton one time to return to PLUMB/SYNC menu.
Step 37. Press the RETURN pushbutton three times to return to MAIN menu.
z
Note. New plumb and synchronization corrections for the CITV are calculated upon pressing
RETURN pushbutton. Failure to press the RETURN pushbutton a total of three times during
this procedure will cause the system to ignore new inputs and default to last calculated data.
z
z
z
z
Step 40. Press the RETURN pushbutton on PLUMB/SYNC menu to return to CITV SETUP
menu.
Step 41. Press RETURN pushbutton on CITV SETUP menu one time to return to VEH SYS
mode.
Step 42. Direct driver to move vehicle back to level ground.
Step 43. Perform VERIFY PLUMB AND SYNCHRONIZATION.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-35
Appendix A
NIGHT BORESIGHTING
A-42. Night boresighting can be accomplished following normal boresighting procedures. The boresight
target must have an illuminated and heated reference point that can be seen with the MBD, GPS, CITV,
GAS, and TIS. The TC can use a chemlight or filtered flashlight to illuminate the MBD aiming reticle.
(M27A1 MBDs have a built-in light port for night boresighting.)
A-43. Most training ranges are equipped with targets that allow the crew to boresight at night. The
following are examples of field-expedient boresight targets for tactical situations:
z
Caliber .50 ammunition can with charcoal (for heating) and a chemlight or flashlight for the
reference point.
z
Any POL container with charcoal (for heating) and a chemlight or flashlight for the reference
point.
z
A small boresight panel (18 inches by 18 inches) quartered, colored with sand and olive drab
paint, with a visible and heated aiming point using a chemlight or flashlight for the reference
point.
z
Any object in the tanks sector that has a clearly defined right angle for use as a reference point
when viewed through the TIS. Place a chemlight on that point as a reference point for the MBD,
GPS, and GAS.
BORESIGHTING THE GAS (GPS AND TIS INOPERATIVE) USING THE M27A1 OR M27A3
MBD
A-44. In some tactical situations (because of mechanical breakdown or the effects of ballistic shock), the
tank crew must use the GAS. The crew can boresight the tank and, with accurate range determination, still
fire effectively.
Note. These procedures are only to be used in tactical situations. The GAS can be boresighted
at any range. The parallax caused by boresighting at any range will be minimal. These
procedures are best used with the boresight panel at the battlesight range for your primary
service KE ammunition.
z
on the face of the gun tube.
CAUTION
blurring of the MBD reticle; use one hand to shield the light port from the suns rays.
A-36
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009

z
z
z
Step 4. Without touching the gun or the MBD, sight through the MBD eyepiece, and direct the
gunner to use manual controls to traverse the turret and elevate the main gun to lay the reticle of
the MBD on the target aiming point.
Step 5. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner aligns the GAS boresight cross to the
Step 6. Slip the AZ and EL scales on the GAS to 0 and 0.
CAUTION
Rotating the MBD inside the gun tube may damage the gun or leave
Step 7. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, hold the tapered muzzle cone, loosen the
operating handle two complete turns to unseat the MBD, and remove the MBD from the gun
tube.
the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone is at the 6 oclock position by aligning it with the 6
oclock witness mark on the face of the gun tube.
z
z
z
z
position. If the mark does not line up with the index mark on the tapered muzzle cone, erase the
mark and start boresight procedures over.)
If the MBD reticle is on target, proceed to step 16.
If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, collimate the MBD (see page A-5). If
the MBD cannot be collimated, continue boresight procedures.
Step 11. Direct the gunner onto the target aiming point. (The gunner must use the manual
controls.)
Step 12. Using the GAS boresight knobs, the gunner will align the GAS boresight cross to the
Step 13. The gunner will record the readings from the GAS AZ and EL boresight knobs and
divide the readings by 2.
*Example: AZ(R)0.4 2 = (R)0.2
EL(L)0.6 2 = (L)0.3
z
z
z
31 May 2010
Step 14. The gunner will move the AZ and EL boresight knobs on the GAS to the readings
determined in step 13.
Step 15. Without moving the GAS boresight knobs, slip the scales to 0 and 0.
Step 16. Apply the appropriate SCF for the round to be fired (Table A-6).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-37
Appendix A
Note. To apply new SCFs when changing battlecarry ammunition or firing a different type of
ammunition, return the GAS boresight knobs to AZ and EL readings of 0 and 0 before applying
the new SCF.
Table A-6. M1A2 SEP/V2 sight correction factors
Ammunition
Azimuth
Elevation
HEAT (M830)
0.2(R)
0.6(R)
HEAT (M831)
0.2(L)
0.6(R)
HEAT (M831A1)
0.2(L)
0.0
MPAT (M830A1)
0.0
0.4(L)
HE-OR-T (M908)
0.0
0.4(L)
Sabot (M829)
0.2(R)
0.8(L)
Sabot (M829A1)
0.0
0.2(L)
Sabot (M829A2)
0.0
1.2(L)
M1A2 SEP
Sabot (M829A3)
0.0
0.2(L)
Sabot (M865IP/PIP)
0.2(L)
0.2(L)
Sabot (current or T-S1 M865)*
0.2(L)
0.2(L)
Canister (M1028)
0.0
0.0

Note. Left (L) and right (R) symbols indicate the direction to turn the GAS boresight knobs.
BORESIGHT LOSS
A-45. *Boresighting is simply an alignment process by which the gun and sighting system are referred to
the same point. Any movement of the gun or sights away from that alignment is a loss of boresight. The
gun may move out of alignment because
z
The gun temperature has changed since boresighting.
z
Firing or other shocks to the system (such as extensive road travel or enemy round impacts)
disturbed the sight alignment.
A-46. For the tank crew in combat, it is not important how boresight loss occurs, just that it does. While the
tank has boresight retention equipment (MRS), the most reliable method of correcting boresight loss is to
re-boresight the system. In training, boresight before every firing table. In a hostile environment, boresight
whenever the tactical situation permits.
BORESIGHT CHECK
A-47. During the long periods between the time the system is boresighted and the time the tank is fired,
boresight loss may occur. Crews can check for boresight loss by conducting a boresight check:
z
z
z
Step 3. Place fire control mode to EMERGENCY.
A-38
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
Note. To manually index a range, press the SENSORS push button on the MAIN menu of the
GCDP. Press the RANGE push button on the SENSORS menu. Manually index the known
range using the keypad on the GCDP. When the known range is displayed on the RANGE
menu, hold the palm switches on the GPCH and press ENT on the GCDP keypad.
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 4. With the GCDP on the MAIN menu, press the ADJUST push button.
Step 7. Manually lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on a clearly defined aiming point, with last
movement up.
If the MBD reticle is on the same target aiming point determined during boresighting, no
boresight loss has occurred (proceed to step 10).
If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a collimated MBD was used,
boresight has been lost: reboresight the tank.
If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a non-collimated MBD was used,
reticle positions coincides with the gunners aiming point, the tank is still boresighted. If it
does not, boresight has been lost; reboresight the tank.
Step 10. Press the RETURN pushbutton on the GPS MAIN menu three times to return to the
MAIN menu.
MRS CONFIRMATION
A-48. When re-boresighting, or when a boresight check cannot be performed, an MRS update is used to
correct for boresight loss. An MRS update can be accomplished only if the tank sights and MRS have been
properly boresighted.
A-49. Armament accuracy check 6 determines only whether the MRS can correct an artificial boresight
loss induced by the crew.
A-50. During live-fire training, crews can monitor the performance of their MRS to determine if the MRS
performs within tolerance. Upon completion of a live-fire event, perform the following procedures:
z
Step 1. Perform an MRS update and record the readings. (If the MRS update indicates no
change, perform a boresight check.)
z
z
z
Step 4. With the GCDP on the MAIN menu, press the ADJUST push button.
z
z
z
Step 7. Using the manual controls, lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point,
with last movement up.
z
z
a. If the MBD reticle is on the same target aiming point determined during boresighting, the
MRS performed correctly.
b. If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point, and a non-collimated MBD was used,
reticle positions coincides with the gunners aiming point, the MRS performed correctly.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-39
Appendix A
c.
If the MBD reticle is not on the target aiming point (as described in steps 9a or b), use the
gunners four-way adjust switch and refer the GPS aiming dot to the target aiming point.
d. To determine if the MRS is within tolerance, compare the new boresight readings to the
previous boresight readings or MRS update readings established in step 1. If the difference
in either AZ or EL is greater than .15 mil, the MRS is out of tolerance; notify
organizational maintenance.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
A-51. If immediate return fire is not required, attempt an MRS update; then at the first opportunity, move
the tank to a position where it can be re-boresighted. If boresighting with an MBD is not possible, initiate
emergency boresight procedures using the alternate method described in the operators manual.
A-52. When a component of the fire control system malfunctions or is damaged by fire, the remaining
components should be boresighted.
AIR TEMPERATURE AND ATMOSPHERIC (BAROMETRIC)

PRESSURE
A-53. The firing table solutions are simple main gun corrections based on standard environmental
conditions. Air density affects accuracy. Standard air temperature is 59 degrees Fahrenheit and barometric
pressure is 29.92 inches of mercury. As air pressure increases, air density generally increases. This slows
rounds, which may cause them to strike low on the target. Firing when air density is less than average has
the opposite effect. The tanks computer compensates for this effect, using values input into the system.
A-54. Recommended standard inputs for major geographical areas, by seasons, in the Table A-7 should be
used whenever current information is not available. Always use the current, local barometric pressure and
temperature, if it is available (see Table A-8). Temperature should be updated whenever it deviates more
than 10 degrees Fahrenheit from the indexed value; barometric pressure should be updated whenever it
deviates more than one inch of mercury from the indexed value.
Table A-7. Nominal temperature values for M1A1
and M1A2 SEP/V2 fire control input
Location
Season
Air Temp (F)
Central USA
Nov-Apr
42
May-Oct
70
Nov-Apr
59
May-Oct
83
Southeast USA
Nov-Apr
59
May-Oct
77
Central Europe
Nov-Apr
38
May-Oct
59
Nov-Apr
63
May-Oct
77
Southwest USA
Middle East
Korea
A-40
Nov-Apr
41
May-Oct
70
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table A-8. Barometric pressure values for M1A1

and M1A2 SEP/V2 fire control input
Meters Above Sea Level
Barometric Pressure (Inches)
29.92
100
29.57
200
29.22
300
28.87
400
28.53
500
28.19
600
27.85
700
27.52
800
27.19
900
26.86
1,000
26.54
1,100
26.22
1,200
25.90
1,300
25.59
1,400
25.28
1,500
24.97
1,600
24.66
1,700
24.36
1,800
24.06
1,900
23.77
2,000
23.47
2,100
23.19
2,200
22.90
2,300
22.61
2,400
22.33
2,500
22.05
2,600
21.78
2,700
21.51
2,800
21.24
2,900
20.97
3,000
20.71
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-41
Appendix A
A-55. Whenever barometric pressure information is available, but is from a location that is at a
significantly different elevation, the barometric pressure values can be converted. If your elevation is
lower, add 0.30 for each 100 meters of elevation difference. If your elevation is higher, subtract 0.30 for
each 100 meters of elevation difference. For example, if you receive a barometric reading of 30.04 from an
airfield that is at 2,070 feet (631 meters) elevation and your elevation is 1,400 meters, subtract 2.40 from
30.24, which will give you a barometric reading of 27.84. Sample computations are as follows.
z
Step 1. 1,400m (your elevation) -631m (airfield elevation) = 769m (round to 800m) (difference
in elevation).
z
Step 2. 800 100 = 8.
z
Step 3. 8 X 0.30 = 2.40.
z
Step 4. 30.24 (reading from airfield) -2.40 (you are higher, so subtract) = 27.84 (FCS input).
Note. If you get pressure readings from an airfield, make sure you get actual barometric
pressure, not barometric pressure corrected to sea level that pilots require.
SECTION II ABRAMS PRE-FIRE CHECKS

A-56. Before conducting live fire, the crew performs pre-fire checks to reduce vehicle malfunctions on the
firing range.
z
The preferred pre-fire checks are conducted when a crew completes a thorough PMCS as
outlined in TM 9-2350-264-10-1 and TM 9-2350-388-10-1.
z
When time or conditions do not allow for a complete and thorough PMCS tank crews should
conduct the following pre-fire checks as a minimum (Table A-9).
Note. Crews should correct any deficiencies if using the checklist below before conducting any
live fire training.
WARNING
Ensure all weapons are clear before conducting pre-fire checks.
A-42
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table A-9. Abrams pre-fire checklist

Station
Check
Go
Driver
Power up drivers station IAW TM -10.
No-Go
Check CBRN mask and mask microphone.

Loader
Power up loaders station IAW TM -10.

Check CBRN Mask and mask microphone.
Ensure communications system is powered up:
z
Radio frequencies set.
z
Intercom operational.
z
Perform jump radio check.
Conduct function check on loaders M240:
z
Clear weapon.
z
Check weapon.
z
Check mount.
z
Secure ready ammunition.
Conduct breechblock function check.
Check ready ammunition door operation.
Check ammunition storage.
Check coax ammunition ready box and feed chute.
TC
Power up tank commanders station IAW TM-10.

Power up CITV (M1A2 SEP only).
Establish digital communications (if available).
Gunner
Prepare CWS for operations:

z
Mount weapon and check equilibrator.
z
Set headspace and timing.
z
Conduct function check.
z
Boresight CWS (M1A1).
z
Secure ready ammunition.
Power up gunners station IAW TM -10:
z
Main accumulator pressure check.
z
Exercise turret hydraulics.
z
Perform TIS checkout.
z
Null drift.
z
Perform computer self-test/FCS test.
z
Conduct firing circuit check.
z
Conduct computer data check.
Boresight the tank
Conduct function check on coaxial M240:
z
Clear coaxial M240.
z
Conduct function check using electrical triggers).
z
Check spent ammunition can.
z
Check feed chute.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-43
Appendix A
SECTION III ARMAMENT ACCURACY CHECKS

A-57. AACs help to ensure that the fire control system is fully operational and verifies that special inputs
to the ballistic solutions are implemented properly for fire control components and all main gun
ammunition. They also verify that the MRS can correct an artificially induced boresight loss. These checks
are designed to be performed by the crew monthly and should be performed on one vehicle at a time.
A-58. AACs are conducted at 100m +/- 1m and the tank should be positioned as close to the center of the
AAC board as possible. To measure distance, it is recommended that crews use a 100 meter measuring tape
to verify distance once the vehicle is in place. AAC checks should be run on one vehicle at a time to reduce
test set-up errors. If time is critical the maximum allowable vehicles conducting AACs at the same time
should be no more than two. Caution should be used when conducting AACs on more than one vehicle at a
time. Performing AACs on more than one vehicle at the same time on the same panel increases the angle at
which the vehicles look at the board and may cause a false failure or mask an actual system failure. Figure
A-10 shows the proper positioning of the tank while conducting AACs with more than one vehicle at a
time. Vehicle should be parked as close together as safety allows (no less than 2 feet no more than 4 feet)
with the AAC board centered between the two vehicles.
A-59. Before performing the AACs, complete a thorough PMCS (see the operators manual) and bleed the
air from the hydraulic system (grasp the GPCH in one hand and the manual elevation pump handle in the
other hand; turn the manual elevation pump handle fully in one direction and the GPCH in the opposite
direction).
A-60. Perform Checks 1 through 6 in sequence. (For a more thorough check, conduct the expanded AACs
in this Appendix.)
A-61. Record faults found during each check on DA Form 2404, Equipment Inspection and Maintenance
Worksheet, or DA Form 5988-E, Equipment Maintenance and Inspection Worksheet, and notify
organizational maintenance. Further diagnostics require the use of test, measurement, and diagnostic
equipment (TMDE). All faults must be corrected before performing the next check.
A-44
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-10. Crew set up
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-45
Appendix A
Note. Expanded AAC checks have been added to provide more in-depth checks of the main
gun and functioning of FCS components. It is recommended that these checks be performed in
conjunction with the standard AAC checks 1-6, but can also be useful in troubleshooting tanks
that fail LFAST.
M1A1 PROCEDURES
CHECK 1 M1A1MAIN ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE
Purpose
A-62. The main accumulator pressure check ensures that the system can maintain proper hydraulic
pressure.
Conditions
z
z
z
z
All personnel are clear of the main gun.

The engine is off, the TURRET POWER is on.
AUX HYDR POWER is off.
The turret is positioned with the main gun over the number 1 (right) road wheel.
Procedures
z
Step 1. Slowly elevate and depress the main gun with the power controls while watching the
hydraulic pressure gauge needle. The pressure should slowly decrease to 830-550 psi, based on
the ambient temperature as outlined on Table A-10, then drop rapidly to 0 psi.
*Table A-10. Nitrogen gas temperature versus precharge pressure chart
Nitrogen Gas Temperature vs. Precharge Pressure Chart

TEMP (F)
-70
-50
-25
+25
+50
+75
+100
+125
PRECHARGE (PSI)
550
580
620
650
685
720
755
790
830
z
z
z
Step 2. Check the reservoir fluid gauge behind the loaders position beneath the turret ring. If
the fluid level is below the ADD 1 GAL mark, add fluid per the vehicles lubrication order.
Step 3. Make sure the two pop-out indicators to the left above the fluid-level gauge have not
popped out. If they are out, push them in.
Step 4. Turn the auxiliary hydraulic pump on, and watch the pressure gauge needle. If the popout indicators were reset in Step 3, recheck to make sure they did not pop out again; if they did,
notify organizational maintenance.
Note. The auxiliary hydraulic pump should shut off when the pressure reaches 1,500 to 1,700
psi.
A-46
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
CHECK 2 M1A1POWER ELEVATION AND ELEVATION CYLINDER

Purpose
A-63. The power elevation and elevation cylinder check ensure that the main gun elevation cylinder
responds to elevation inputs and is capable of maintaining the lay of the gun on an aiming point.
Conditions
z
z
z
Check 1 has been completed.

Hydraulic system is pressurized to at least 1,500 psi.
The engine is off; TURRET POWER and AUX HYDR POWER are on.
Procedures
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Position the turret with the main gun over the front or side of the hull.
Step 2. Turn the manual elevation handle, depressing the gun until the handle can no longer be
turned easily with one hand.
Step 3. With the FIRE CONTROL MODE set at NORMAL, check for smooth operation of the
gun by raising and lowering the cannon with the GPCH. (Always center the controls before
releasing the palm switches.)
Step 4. Look through the GPS and lay on a distant aiming point.
Step 5. While in NORMAL mode, null out all reticle drift.
Step 6. Set the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL (this will prevent injury to
personnel because of accidental turret movement).
Step 7. Level the gun tube and lay on a distant aiming point. Have one crew member push the
muzzle up and release. Repeat the muzzle movement in vertical and horizontal planes while
observing a distant aiming point through the GPS. (The reticle will move. Upon release of
pressure at the muzzle, the sight should return to its original aiming point.)
Step 8. Record deficiencies on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.
CHECK 3 M1A1FAULT INDICATOR

Purpose
A-64. The fault indicator check verifies that the fire control systems continuous malfunction detection
system and computer self-test have not identified faults that affect direct-fire precision.
Conditions
z
z
z
z
z
Checks 1 and 2 have been completed.

The RANGE switch on the LRF is in the SAFE position.
The TURRET POWER is on and the FIRE CONTROL MODE is in the NORMAL position.
The circuit breakers to the TNB are set at ON and the LAMP RESET button is pressed.
All cable connectors in the fire control system are securely installed.
Note. On the M1A1 tank, TNB CB-3 may be left off.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-47
Appendix A
Procedures
z
z
z
z
Step. 1. Check the displayed data in the GPS field of view. (If the fire control fault symbol [F]
appears, the continuous malfunction detection system has detected one of two faults: Electrical
continuity within the fire control system is interrupted or a malfunction signal has been
generated by the TIS, crosswind sensor, LRF, or computer system. Table A-11 describes the
kinds of faults that can cause an F symbol to be displayed.)
Step 2. If an F symbol is present in the GPS field of view, recheck the conditions for this check.
Turn the TURRET POWER off, then on again, and see if an F symbol appears.
Step 3. Check the TIS fault indicator. If it is on, notify organizational maintenance.
Step 4. Cover up the crosswind sensor, and then call up the crosswind value on the CCP. If the
value is 3 mph or less, uncover the crosswind sensor and proceed to step 5. If the value is 4 mph
or greater, clean the crosswind sensor, and perform the test again. If the crosswind sensor still
does not function properly, notify organizational maintenance. Uncover the crosswind sensor.
Step 5. Run the computer self-test. (In most cases, the self-test will indicate the source of the
fault. Table A-12 describes the kinds of faults that trigger a self-test failure. If, after a self-test
pass, the F symbol shows in the GPS, a problem may exist in the CEU, which controls the
malfunction detection system. Organizational-level test equipment must be used to find this kind
of fault.)
Note. Run the self-test two or three times to ensure consistency of results. The computer selftest evaluates system response based on threshold values preprogrammed into the computer. If
the tank fails two out of three times with the same fault, notify organizational maintenance.)
Table A-11. Causes of fault indication in the GPS field of view
Fault
Electrical continuity interrupted at
Source of Fault
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
TIS fault warning due to
z
z
z
Crosswind fault warning due to
z
z
Computer fault warning due to
z
z
z
z
LRF fault warning due to
z
z
z
A-48
Principal fire control components.

Interconnecting cables.
Power control handles, gyros.
Azimuth and elevation servos.
Loaders knee switch and door-closed sensor.
Coax solenoid.
Zero-degree elevation switch.
Crosswind sensor.
Power supplies out of tolerance.
Disabled scan capability.
Electrical current levels out of tolerance.
Power supplies out of tolerance.
Ion emitter/resistor elements inoperable or dirty.
Analog-digital conversion circuits out of tolerance.
Unexplained changes in stored data values.
Inoperable reticle drive in GPS.
Any failure of last computer self-test.
Laser pulse signal out of tolerance.
Inoperable laser firing circuit.
Range counters not biased. (The LRF continuous
monitor will evaluate the LRF circuit when the laser
button is depressed with RANGE set at SAFE.)
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009

Table A-12. Causes of computer self-test failure
Subsystem
Tested
Fault
Test Code
Seq (CCP)
Test
Seq
Fault
Code
(CCP)
CEU
Tolerance test of known value solutions and power

supplies. A fault here will stop the self-test immediately.
Cant Sensor
Deflects the pendulum and reflects the amount of

movement to ensure the pendulum returns to original
value in one second. If a fault is detected, self-test stops
until the gunner presses CANT, then ENTER.
Crosswind
Sensor
Electrically simulates predetermined wind value, then

checks response. If a fault is detected, self-test stops
until the gunner presses CROSSWIND, then ENTER.
400 Hz
Reference
NA
NA
NA
NA
Ensures 400 Hz reference signal is present. If 400 Hz

signal fails, the self-test stops, and 400 FA is displayed.
Turret Drive
(AZ)
Initializes the lead angle circuits for subsequent ballistic

computations (an important prepare-to-fire check);
causes the turret to move, imparting a deliberate lead
solution, and checks the tolerance of the resulting rate of
traverse. If a fault is detected, self-test stops until the
gunner presses LEAD, then ENTER.
Sight
Stabilization
(EL)
Elevation rate tolerance test in line of sight and

gun/turret drive; checks data link after elevation rate test.
Gunners
Servo
Displaces reticle a fixed amount and checks response

time.
Data Link
(DCT)
The CEU commands an elevation input rate of 5 mils per

second; then checks the output voltage from the digital
control transformer (DCT). The self-test will continue if
this test fails.
LRF
The LRF runs its own internal self-test, verifying that the
counter chains are functioning, power supplies are within
limits, and last transmitted energy output was within
limits. If the LRF is functional, it transmits a known range
to the computer.
Description
CHECK 4 M1A1SPECIAL INPUT

Purpose
A-65. The special input check verifies the proper function of manual and automatic inputs. This check
ensures all individually tested component circuits are operational prior to testing full solution data. Checks
4 and 5 correspond closely to the gunnery checks described in TM 9-2350-264-10-2, Appendix F.
Note. Checks 4 and 5 do not test components of the FCS; they test the ability of the CEU to
compensate for the values received from these components and to determine a ballistic solution
for a given round.
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-49
Appendix A
Conditions
z
z
z
*Prior to beginning the procedures, the crew must verify which version of the ballistic solution
card is in the CEU of their tank. The most up-to-date card will include the M829A3 solution
information, which can be verified by selecting SABOT on the lower panel of the GPS, and then
pressing the AMMO SUBDES push button of the CCP and pressing the number 7 on the keypad
display. If the computer does not flash, then you have the latest version; use the Upgraded CEU
Chart, Table A-14a on page A-55. The ballistic solution board is shown in Figure A-11, Abrams
Combined Solution Board. If the computer flashes, then you do not have the latest version; use
Table A-14b on page A-55.
Checks 1, 2, and 3 have been completed.
*The tank is on level ground with the solution board 100 meters (1 meter) from the front slope
of the tank (see Figure A-10 on page A-45).
Note. A hardwood solution board should be used whenever possible. A vinyl solution board
can expand and contract with weather and environmental conditions. This can affect your
azimuth tolerance. The maximum allowable tolerance for the tank is .25 mils at 1000 meters.
z
The horizontal reference line on the solution board is level with the gun trunnions. (An easy way
to check this is to move the MRS lever to IN and squeeze the palm switches on the GPCH [the
main gun will move to zero elevation]. Move the MRS lever to OUT and align the reference
line on the solution board with the center horizontal reference line in the GPS reticle.) (Figure
A-11, Abrams Combined Solution Board is a scale drawing of the solution board to be used.)
An MBD is available with eyesight parallax shield (optic cover with hole).
Note. Proper use of parallax shield on the MBD will reduce eyesight parallax.
z
The engine is off; the VEHICLE MASTER POWER, TURRET POWER, and AUX HYDR
POWER are on; the CCP power is on; and the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch is in the
NORMAL position.
Note. Checks 4 and 5 must be performed with the AUX HYDR POWER on. Performing
checks 4 and 5 at zero pressure does not test the FCSs ability to apply offsets to the gun.
WARNING
Range solutions must be entered manually with the CCP data key
during checks 4 and 5. Do not use the LRF; it may expose
unprotected personnel to injury.
A-50
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
Table A-13. Abrams combined solution board dimensions

Minimum solution board dimensions are 96 inches wide by 60 inches high.
GUN and GPS squares are 12 inches on each side. The upper right and lower left
quadrants are dark colored.
The 12 solution rectangles are 2 inches by 4 inches, dark colored, with 6 horizontal
lines and 6 vertical lines through the center of each rectangle.
The horizontal reference line should go across the board and be centered through the
GPS box. The line should be no smaller than 1 inch in width and extend along the
entire width of the solution board.
All lettering is at least 4 inches high.
Place the center of the GUN target right 48 inches and up 12 inches from the lower left
corner of the solution board.
All other measurements are from the center of the GUN target:
To center of GPS
Right 22 inches, up 16 inches
To center of BASIC
To center of CANT
To center of CROSSWIND
Left 24 inches, up 39 inches
To center of LEAD
To center of rectangle 1
Note. The vertical reference line runs through the center of the GPS block and should
be at least 1-inch wide. The solution board solution block placement tolerance is 1/16
of an inch.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-51
Appendix A
Figure A-11. Abrams combined solution board (see Table A-13

for dimensions for the solution board)
Procedures
z
z
A-52
Step 1. Record the GPS boresight, zero data (CCF), MRS update, and MRS boresight numbers
from the CCP before conducting check 4.
Step 2. Set zero data for all AMMO SUBDES, MRS update, and MRS boresight to 0.0 and 0.0
before conducting check 4. (Failure to do so may cause a failure of check 4.) For example
a. Index sabot on the ammo select switch.
b. Press AMMO SUBDES on the CCP.
c. Press the ZERO push button.
d. Press ENTER on the CCP.
e. Press the ZERO push button.
f. Enter 0.0 and 0.0.
g. Press ENTER on the CCP.
h. Press AMMO SUBDES on the CCP.
i. Press the numeral 1 key on the CCP.
j. Press ENTER on the CCP.
k. Press the ZERO push button on the CCP.
l. Enter 0.0 and 0.0.
m. Press ENTER on the CCP.
n. Repeat for all sabot AMMO SUBDES 0 through 6.
o. Repeat for all HEAT AMMO SUBDES 0 through 3.
p. Repeat for MPAT AMMO SUBDES 0.
q. For tanks with an upgraded CEU, repeat for CAN SUBDES 0.
r. Repeat steps a through f above for coax ammunition.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Step 3. Grip one of the palm switches; then (with the palm switch pressed) press the RANGE
push button, index 1,200 meters into the CCP, and press the ENTER push button. Hold the palm
switch for five seconds, then release. (When conducting the special input check, the range
values must be entered with the palm switch pressed. Failure to enter range with the palm switch
pressed will result in a failure of check 4.)
Step 4. Put the FCS in the BORESIGHT mode by pressing the BORESIGHT push button on the
CCP.
Note. Do not rotate the MBD while performing checks 4 and 5.

z
Step 5. Insert the MBD and direct the gunner to lay the main gun manually on the center of the
target marked GUN on the solution board, with last movement up.
Note. When using the MBD at this distance, make sure the GPS brow pad is adjusted to the
gunners face to reduce eyesight parallax, and use the MBDs eyesight parallax shield (optic
cover with hole) to reduce eyesight parallax.
z
z
Step 6. When the main gun is properly laid for direction, the gunner toggles the GPS reticle,
using a last movement up pattern, to the center of the target marked GPS on the solution board.
Step 7. Store the boresight data by pressing ENTER on the CCP.
Note. The gunner may refer the GAS boresight cross to the gun box as a reference for gun
position, as well as the MBD.
z
Step 8. Check the boresight solution.

a. Grip the palm switches for five seconds and release.
b. Press the BORESIGHT push button, and using a G pattern and manual controls, re-lay the
sight on the GPS target, with last movement up. (The MBD aiming dot reticle should be
pointing to the original aiming point of the GUN target on the solution board.)
c. Press the ENTER push button to cancel the BORESIGHT mode.
Step 9. Enter the fire control inputs from Table A-14a on page A-46 or Table A-14b.
a. Enter the basic solution.
Note. The basic solution has all manual and automatic inputs set at neutral values. If the basic
solution fails, the crew should check their set-up and rerun the check for a second time, paying
close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is put into the
computer; If the solution fails for the second time notify organizational maintenance.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
3 September 2009
Manually enter the data inputs (except for range) into the CCP.
Index range, squeeze the GPCH, and press the ENTER push button. Hold the GPCH
for five seconds.
Using a G pattern and the manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot back on the
aiming point, with last movement up.
The crewman on the outside views through the MBD and confirms that the gun is on
the correct block.
Push the MAINT DATA push button, index 88, and press the ENTER push button.
Record the readings in the CCP display under the CCP column on Table A-14a or
Table A-14b.
Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 89, and press the ENTER push button.
Record the readings in the CCP display under the CCP column on Table A-14a or
Table A-14b.
Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 90, and press the ENTER push button
(this takes you out of the MAINT DATA mode).
Compare the readings entered in the CCP column with the actual readings on Table
A-14a or Table A-14b.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-53
Appendix A
Notes.
Evaluate each column individually. If the differences for both 88 and 89 are equal to or less
than .02, the tank will pass; however, if the difference for either 88 or 89 is greater than .02, the
tank will fail.
If a solution fails, the crew should check their set-up and then rerun the check a second
time, paying close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is
put into the computer; If the solution fails for the second time notify organizational
maintenance.
The crewman viewing through the MBD should make sure the aiming dot is on the
appropriate block; if it is not, he should note that the MBD was not on the appropriate block.
Failures due to differences of .03 or greater indicate problems with the CEU. If the difference is
.02 or less, but the MBD is not on the appropriate block, possible problems are
Crew set-up.
Incorrect boresight.
Not taking the same sight picture with the MBD that was taken during boresighting.
CCP not zeroed (for example, CCF).
Incorrect entry of check data into the CCP.
Problems with the FCS.
(11)
Record the position of the MBD aiming point (in relation to the target block) on the
Sample M1A1 AAC Data Worksheet for Checks 4 and 5, Figure A-12.
Note. Repeat steps 9a(1) through (11) for each of the remaining solutions (cant, crosswind, and
lead).
A-54
b. Enter the cant solution. (If it fails, the cant value is incorrectly set or the computer is not
processing the cant function.)
c. Enter the crosswind solution. (If it fails, the crosswind value is incorrectly set or the
computer is not processing the crosswind function.)
d. Enter the lead solution. (If it fails, the lead value is incorrectly set or the computer is not
processing the lead function.)
Step 10. After completing check 4 (all faults have been corrected), proceed to check 5.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table A-14a. M1A1 (upgraded CEU chart) ballistic computer inputs for check 4
Subdes
Wind
Cant
Lead
Ammo
Temp
Baro
Press
Air
Temp
*Range
Solution
from
Board
Actual
Solution
EL
88
AZ 89
CCP
Difference
Pass/Fail
HEAT
0.00
0.00
0.10
70
29.92
59.0
1,023
Basic
4.81
0.00
1.10
10.40
0.01
70
29.92
59.0
1,849
Cant
9.86
-1.51
44.50
0.00
0.00
70
33.45
59.0
1,765
Crosswind
9.86
6.02
0.00
0.00
5.44
70
29.92
59.0
1,829
Lead
9.86
11.54
* Range is the last input entered into the computer.
Table A-14b. M1A1 ballistic computer inputs for check 4

Subdes
Wind
Cant
Lead
Ammo
Temp
Baro
Press
Air
Temp
*Range
Solution
from
Board
Actual
Solution
EL
88
AZ 89
CCP
Difference
Pass/Fail
HEAT
0.00
0.00
0.10
70
29.92
59.0
1,027
Basic
4.80
0.00
1.00
10.70
0.02
70
29.92
58.0
1,853
Cant
9.86
-1.51
44.90
0.00
0.00
70
33.00
58.0
1,778
Crosswind
9.86
6.02
0.00
0.00
5.44
70
29.92
58.0
1,832
Lead
9.86
11.54
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-55
Appendix A
Figure A-12. Sample AAC data sheet for Checks 4 and 5

Note. The number in parenthesis on the AAC data sheet indicates the ammunition subdes being
used.
CHECK 5 M1A1BALLISTIC SOLUTION

Purpose
A-66. The ballistic solution check verifies that the FCS is correctly implementing ballistic solutions in all
main gun channels.
Note. Checks 4 and 5 do not test components of the FCS; they test the ability of the CEU to
compensate for values received from these components and determine a ballistic solution for a
given round.
Conditions
z
A-56
Prior to beginning the procedures, the crew must verify which version of the ballistic solution
card is in the CEU of their tank. The most up-to-date card will include the M829A3 solution
information, which can be verified by selecting SABOT on the lower panel of the GPS, and then
pressing the AMMO SUBDES push button of the CCP and pressing the number 7 on the keypad
display. If the computer does not flash, then you have the latest version; use the Upgraded CEU
Chart, Table A-15a on page A-59. The ballistic solution board is shown in Figure A-11, Abrams
Combined Solution Board on page A-52. If the computer flashes, then you do not have the latest
version; use Table A-15b on page A-59.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
The engine is off; the VEHICLE MASTER POWER, TURRET POWER, and AUX HYDR
POWER are on; and the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch is in the NORMAL position.
Note. Checks 4 and 5 must be performed with the AUX HYDR POWER on. Performing
checks 4 and 5 at zero pressure does not test the FCSs ability to apply offsets to the gun
correctly.
Procedures
Note. If the tank passed check 4 and the current boresight is still valid, start at step 7. If
maintenance was performed on the system or the boresight has changed, start at step 1.
z
Step 1. Grip one of the palm switches; then (with the palm switch pressed) press the RANGE
push button, index 1,200 meters into the CCP, and press the ENTER push button. Hold the palm
switch for 5 seconds, then release. (The range values must be entered with the palm switch
pressed. Failure to enter range with the palm switch pressed will result in a failure of check 5.)
Note. Do not rotate the MBD during checks 4 and 5.

z
z
Step 2. Put the FCS in the BORESIGHT mode by pressing the BORESIGHT push button on the
CCP.
Step 3. Insert the MBD and direct the gunner to lay the main gun manually on the center of the
target marked GUN on the solution board, with last movement up.
Note. When using the MBD at this distance, make sure the GPS browpad is adjusted to the
gunners face and the MBD eyesight parallax shield (optic cover with hole) is used to reduce
eyesight parallax.
z
z
Step 4. When the main gun is properly laid for direction, the gunner toggles the GPS reticle to
the center of the target marked GPS on the solution board.
Step 5. Store the boresight data by pressing the ENTER push button on the CCP.
z

a. Grip the palm switches for 5 seconds and release.
b. Press the BORESIGHT push button and, using a G pattern and manual controls, re-lay the
sight on the GPS target, with last movement up. (The MBD reticle should be pointing to the
original aiming point of the GUN target on the solution board.)
c. Press the ENTER push button to cancel the boresight mode.
Note. If the tank failed check 4 and maintenance was performed, make sure the zero data
(CCF) for each AMMO SUBDES is set at 0.0 and 0.0, and the MRS update and boresight
numbers are set at 0.0 and 0.0 before conducting check 5. Failure to do so will result in a failure
of check 5.
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-57
Appendix A
z
Step 7. Check the 12 separate main gun solutions.

a. *Manually index the data inputs (except for range) into the CCP for a given solution as
provided in Table A-15a on page A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60.
b. Grip one of the palm switches; then (with the palm switch pressed) press the RANGE push
button, index the range value into the CCP, and press the ENTER push button. Hold the
palm switch for 5 seconds, then release. (The range value must be entered with the palm
switch pressed. Failure to enter range with the palm switch pressed will result in a failure of
check 5.)
c. Using a G pattern and manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot back on the aiming point,
with last movement up.
d. The crewman on the outside views through the MBD and confirms that the gun is on the
correct block.
e. Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 88, and press the ENTER push button.
f. *Record the readings in the CCP display under the CCP column in Table A-15a on page
A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60.
g. Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 89, and press the ENTER push button.
h. *Record the readings in the CCP display under the CCP column in Table A-15a on page
A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60.
i. Press the MAINT DATA push button, index 90, and press the ENTER push button (this
takes you out of the MAINT DATA mode).
j. *Compare the readings entered in the CCP column with the readings in the actual solution
column in Table A-15a on page A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60.
k. Record the position of the MBD aiming point (in relation to the target block) on the Sample
M1A1 AAC Data Worksheet for Checks 4 and 5, Figure A-12, page A-56.
Notes. Evaluate each column individually. If the differences for both 88 and 89 are equal to, or
less than, .02, the tank will pass; however, if the difference for either 88 or 89 is greater than
.02, the tank will fail.
If a solution fails, the crew should check their setup and then rerun the check a second
time, paying close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is
put into the computer; If the solution fails for the second time, notify organizational
maintenance.
*The crewman viewing through the MBD should make sure the aiming dot is on the
appropriate block; if it is not, he/she should note that the MBD was not on the appropriate block.
Failures due to differences of .03 or greater indicate problems with the CEU. If the difference is
.02 or less, but the MBD is not on the appropriate block, possible problems are
Crew setup.
CCP not zeroed (for example, CCF).
Incorrect entry of check data into the CCP.
Repeat steps 7b-k for each AMMO SUBDES to be checked.
*The solution is correctly implemented if the MBD reticle is within the solution square
identified in Table A-15a on page A-59 or Table A-15b on page A-60.
If a solution fails, the crew should check their setup and rerun the check a second time,
paying close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is put
into the computer. (If a second try produces the same results, record the results on DA Form
2404 or DA Form 5988E and notify organizational maintenance.)
Be sure to reenter previously recorded data for zero (CCF), MRS boresight, and MRS
update back into the CCP upon completion of check 5.
A-58
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
*Table A-15a. M1A1 (upgraded CEU chart) ballistic computer inputs for check 5
Subdes
Wind
Cant
Lead
Ammo
Temp
Baro
Press
Air
Temp
Range*
Solution
from
Board
Actual
Solution
EL 88
AZ 89
CCP
Difference
Pass/Fail
SABOT
0
14.00
0.00
-0.63
75
30.00
75
3,530
6.57
-0.75
6.40
0.00
15.93
100
30.00
100
834
1.77
8.28
-22.00
0.10
-10.69
25
24.00
25
1,579
3.03
-10.79
35.00
0.00
3.08
50
28.00
50
3,975
8.09
9.53
-45.00
0.00
-2.68
25
29.96
25
1,970
5.06
-8.03
22.50
1.00
-0.70
75
30.00
75
3,116
6.57
-0.75
19.00
5.00
-0.41
90
29.60
90
3,700
6.57
-0.75
19.50
-6.00
-6.58
85
25.50
85
2,067
5.06
-8.03
39.00
5.20
-4.60
100
25.00
100
1,802
8.09
-6.02
-9.00
10.00
5.09
100
26.00
100
1,390
7.33
5.52
-7.20
0.00
-5.02
23.92
1,909
10.62
-11.54
-5.20
0.00
-5.13
25.07
1,882
10.62
-11.54
17.80
0.00
2.02
75
28.00
75
2,369
7.33
5.52
18.00
0.00
1.93
75
28.28
75
2065
7.33
5.52
-2.40
0.00
53
29.89
51
400
6.57
-0.75
HEAT
MPAT
CANISTER
0
0.40
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-59
Appendix A
Table A-15b. M1A1 ballistic computer inputs for check 5
Subdes
Wind Cant
Lead
Ammo
Temp
Baro
Press
14.00
0.00
-0.63
75
30.00
6.60
0.00
15.83
100
30.00
-22.0
0.10
-10.69
25
24.00
35.00
0.00
3.08
50
-45.00
0.00
-2.68
25
22.50
1.00
-0.70
19.00
4.80
39.00
-9.00
2
3
Air
Temp
Range*
Solution Actual
from
Solution
Board
EL 88 AZ 89
75
3,530
6.57
-0.75
100
840
1.77
8.28
25
1,579
3.03
-10.79
28.00
50
3,975
8.09
9.53
29.96
25
1,970
5.06
-8.03
75
30.00
75
3,116
6.57
-0.75
-0.41
90
30.80
90
3,700
6.57
-0.75
5.20
-4.60
100
25.00
100
1,802
8.09
-6.02
9.90
5.09
100
25.83
100
1,385
7.33
5.52
-7.20
0.00
-5.02
23.92
1,909
10.62 -11.54
-5.20
0.00
-5.13
25.07
1,882
10.62 -11.54
17.80
0.00
2.02
75
28.00
75
2,369
7.33
CCP
Difference
Pass/Fail
SABOT
HEAT
MPAT
0
5.52
CHECK 6 M1A1MUZZLE REFERENCE SYSTEM

Purpose
A-67. The MRS check determines whether the MRS can correct an artificial boresight loss.
Conditions
z
None.
Procedures
z
z
A-60
Step 1. Boresight the FCS at a known range. The GUN and GPS targets on the 100-meter
solution board may be used if 1,200 meters is indexed into the computer.
Step 2. Boresight the MRS and enter the data.
a. Move the MRS lever to the IN position.
b. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the CCP.
c. Hold the GPCH for 5 seconds, then release.
d. Refer the GPS to the MRS, record the readings.
e. Move the MRS lever to the OUT position.
Step 3. Move the MRS lever to the IN position. (The computer display panel should read zero,
and the GPS reticle should be aligned with the MRS collimator on the muzzle; if not, notify
organizational maintenance.)
Step 4. Move the MRS lever to the IN position and the OUT position several times. The GPS
reticle should align with the collimator each time. If it does not, notify organizational
maintenance.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 5. With the MRS lever turned to the OUT position, press the BORESIGHT push button.
Step 6. Using the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch, move the reticle up .5 mil, and enter the
new value.
Step 7. Move the MRS lever to the IN position, and update the MRS. (The result should have an
elevation value between down 0.65 and down 0.35 and an azimuth value between left 0.15 and
right 0.15.)
Step 8. Using the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch, move the MRS reticle so that the update
display again reads 0.0 and 0.0. Move the MRS lever to the OUT position.
Step 9. Press the BORESIGHT push button and take out the .5-mil error entered in step 6 by
moving the reticle down .5 mil to its original boresight value. Then, introduce an azimuth
boresight error by moving the reticle right .5 mil. Enter the new value.
Step 10. Move the MRS lever to IN and update the MRS. (The result should have an azimuth
value between left 0.65 and left 0.35 and an elevation value between up 0.15 and down 0.15.)
Step 11. Move the MRS lever to the OUT position. Press the BORESIGHT push button and
move the reticle .5 mil to the left. Enter the new value.
Notes. Failing to meet the criteria in steps 7 and 10 may mean the MRS collimator on the
muzzle was not aligned when it was attached to the muzzle, or that the collimator has shifted
since initial alignment. In either case, a turret mechanic must realign the collimator.
Except for realignment of the collimator by maintenance, there is no way to correct a
failure of the MRS to restore a boresight reference. Crews should be aware that MRS updating is
generally not as accurate as total system re-boresighting.
z
Step 12. Record the deficiencies on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.
M1A2 SEP PROCEDURES

CHECK 1 M1A2 SEPMAIN ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE
Purpose
A-68. The main accumulator pressure check ensures that the system is can maintain proper hydraulic
pressure.
Conditions
z
z
z
z

The engine is off, the TURRET POWER is on.
AUX HYDR POWER is off.
The turret is positioned with the main gun over the number 1 (right) road wheel.
Procedures
z
Step 1. Slowly elevate and depress the main gun with the power controls while watching the
hydraulic pressure gauge needle. The pressure should slowly decrease to 830-550 psi, based on
the ambient temperature as outlined in Table A-16, then drop rapidly to 0 psi.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-61
Appendix A
Table A-16. Nitrogen gas temperature vs. pre-charge pressure chart

TEMP (F)
-70
-50
-25
+25
+50
+75
+100
+125
PRECHARGE (PSI)
550
580
620
650
685
720
755
790
830
z
z
z
Step 2. Check the reservoir fluid gauge behind the loaders position beneath the turret ring. If
the fluid level is below the ADD 1 GAL mark, add fluid per the vehicles lubrication order.
Step 3. Make sure the two pop-out indicators to the left above the fluid-level gauge have not
popped out. If they are out, push them in.
Step 4. Turn the auxiliary hydraulic pump on, and watch the pressure gauge needle. If the popout indicators were reset in Step 3, check to make sure they did not pop out again; if they did,
notify organizational maintenance.
Note. The auxiliary hydraulic pump should shut off when the pressure reaches 1,500 to 1,700
psi.
CHECK 2 M1A2 SEPPOWER ELEVATION AND ELEVATION CYLINDER

Purpose
A-69. The power elevation and elevation cylinder check ensure that the main gun elevation cylinder
responds to elevation inputs and is capable of maintaining the lay of the gun on an aiming point.
Conditions
z
z
z
z
Check 1 has been completed.

Hydraulic system is pressurized to at least 1,500 psi.
The engine is off.
TURRET POWER and AUX HYDR POWER are on.
Procedures
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
A-62
Step 1. Position the turret with the main gun over the front or side of the hull.
Step 2. Turn the manual elevation handle, depressing the gun until the handle can no longer be
turned easily with one hand.
Step 3. With the FIRE CONTROL MODE set at NORMAL, check for smooth operation of the
gun by raising and lowering the cannon with the GPCH. (Always center the controls before
releasing the palm switches.)
Step 4. Look through the GPS and lay on a distant aiming point.
Step 5. While in NORMAL mode, null out all reticle drift.
Step 6. Set the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to MANUAL (this will prevent injury to
personnel because of accidental turret movement).
Step 7. Level the gun tube and lay on a distant aiming point. Have one crew member push the
muzzle up and release. Repeat the muzzle movement in vertical and horizontal planes while
observing a distant aiming point through the GPS. (The reticle will move. Upon release of
pressure at the muzzle, the sight should return to its original aiming point.)
Step 8. Record deficiencies on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CHECK 3 M1A2 SEPFAULT INDICATOR

Purpose
A-70. The fault indicator check verifies that the fire control systems continuous malfunction detection
system and computer self-test have not identified faults that affect direct-fire precision.
Conditions
z
z
z
z
z
z
Checks 1 and 2 have been completed.

The RANGE switch on the LRF is in the SAFE position.
The TURRET POWER is on.
FIRE CONTROL MODE is in the NORMAL position.
All the circuit breakers in the CDU and the GCDP are set at ON.
All cable connectors in the fire control system are securely installed.
Procedures
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Check the displayed data in the GPS field of view. (If the fire control fault symbol [F]
appears, the continuous malfunction detection system has detected one or more of the following
FCS malfunctions:
The last fire control system test failed.
There is no LRF power.
The RANGE switch on the LRF was not in the SAFE position when the turret power was
turned on.
There is no thermal imaging system power.
The automatic self test has detected a fault, and a caution message is displayed in the
GCDP. (See TM 9-2350-388-10-1 for a complete list of GCDP caution messages.)
Step 2. If an F symbol is present in the GPS field of view, recheck the conditions for this check.
Turn the TURRET POWER off, then ON again, and see if an F symbol appears.
Step 3. Check the TIS fault indicator. If it is on, notify organizational maintenance.
Step 4. If the F symbol is still present, check the cautions and warnings and proceed to
TM 9-2350-388-10-2, Caution/Warning Verification Procedure, and follow the instructions.
Step 5. If the F symbol is still active, run the built-in-test and notify organizational maintenance.
Step 6. Once the fault has been cleared, perform a fire control system test.
CHECK 4 M1A2 SEPSPECIAL INPUT

Purpose
A-71. The M1A2 SEP special input check verifies the proper function of manual and automatic inputs.
This check ensures all individually tested component circuits are operational prior to testing full solution
data. The M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check correspond closely to the
special gunnery checks described in TM 9-2350-388-10-2, Appendix F.
Note. The M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check do not test
components of the FCS; they test the ability of the TMPU to compensate for the values received
from these components and determine a ballistic solution for a given round.
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-63
Appendix A
Conditions
z
z
z
Prior to beginning the procedures, the crew must verify which software version of the ballistic
solutions is in the fire control electronics unit (FCEU) of their tank.
Commander presses DIAG. Pushbutton.
DIAGNOSTICS menu will appear on CDU.
Press DIAG pushbutton to enter DIAGNOSTICS menu.
Press STATUS pushbutton to enter STATUS menu.
VIEW STATUS - DIAGNOSTICS MODE.
Press C/W pushbutton to enter C/W menu.
Do the following: press PAGE UP pushbutton or PAGE DOWN pushbutton to view current
cautions or warnings.
Press RETURN pushbutton one time to return to STATUS menu, the vehicle software
version will be displayed on SW STATUS menu.
*(Use the appropriate chart at Figure A-14a on page A-69 and Figure A-14b on page A-70 for
your software version to complete Checks 4 and 5 for M1A2 SEP special inputs and ballistic
solution checks).
Checks 1, 2, and 3 have been completed.
*The tank is on level ground with the solution board 100 meters (1 meters) from the front slope
of the tank (see Figure A-10 on page A-45).
Note. A hardwood solution board should be used whenever possible. A vinyl solution board
can expand and contract with weather and environmental conditions. This can affect your
azimuth tolerance. The maximum allowable tolerance for the tank is .25 mils at 1,000 meters.
z
The horizontal reference line on the solution board is level with the gun trunnions. (Level
criterion is achieved when the horizontal reference line on the solution board and the center
horizontal reference line in the GPS are aligned with the gun at zero elevation. An easy way to
check this is to select MRS on the GCDP and squeeze the palm switches on the power control
handles [the main gun will move to zero elevation]. Press the ENT push button on the GCDP
keypad. Align the reference line on the solution board with the center horizontal reference line
in the primary sight reticle.) (The Abrams Combined Solution Board, Figure A-11 on page A-52
is a scale drawing of the solution board to be used.)
An MBD is available with eyesight parallax shield (optic cover with hole).
Note. Proper use of parallax shield on the MBD will reduce eyesight parallax.
z
The engine is off; the VEHICLE MASTER POWER, TURRET POWER, CITV, and AUX
HYDR POWER are on; the GCDP power is on; and the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch is in
the NORMAL position.
Note. The M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check must be
performed with the AUX HYDR POWER on. Performing these checks at zero pressure does not
test the FCSs ability to apply offsets to the gun.
Procedures
WARNING
Range solutions must be entered manually with the GCDP data
key during the M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2 SEP
ballistic solution check. Do not use the LRF; it may expose
unprotected personnel to injury.
A-64
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Record the GPS boresight, zero data, MRS update, and MRS boresight numbers before
conducting the M1A2 SEP special input check.
Step 2. Set zero data for all AMMO SUBDES, MRS update, and MRS boresight to 0.00 and
0.00 before conducting the M1A2 SEP special input check.
Step 3. Grip one of the palm switches; then (with the palm switch pressed) press the SENSOR
push button on the main menu. Press the RANGE push button on the SENSOR menu, index
1,200 meters into the GCDP, and press the ENT push button on the keypad. Hold the palm
switch for five seconds, then release.
Step 4. Put the FCS in the BORESIGHT mode by pressing the ADJUST push button on the
main menu, then pressing the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu.
Step 5. Press the GPS push button.
Note. Do not rotate the MBD while performing the M1A2 SEP special input check and M1A2
SEP ballistic solution check.
z
Step 6. Insert the MBD and direct the gunner to manually lay the main gun on the center of the
target marked gun on the solution board, with last movement up.
Note. When using the M27A1 at this distance, make sure the GPS brow pad is adjusted to the
gunners face to reduce eyesight parallax, and use the MBDs eyesight parallax shield (optic
cover with hole) to reduce eyesight parallax.
z
Step 7. When the main gun is properly laid for direction, the gunner looks through the GPS
eyepiece parallax shield and, using the four-way switch on the GCDP, moves the reticle, using a
last movement up pattern, to the center of solution board target marked GPS.
Step 8. Store the boresight data by pressing the ENT push button on the GCDP keypad.
z

a. Grip the palm switches for five seconds, then release.
b. Press the BORESIGHT push button on the ADJUST menu, and then press the GPS push
button on the BORESIGHT menu (the MBD aiming dot should be pointing to the original
aiming point of the gun target on the solution board).
c. Press the RETURN push button twice to exit the BORESIGHT mode.
Step 10. Enter the fire control inputs using the charts at Figure A-14a on page A-69 and Figure
A-14b on page A-70, depending on the software version for your vehicle.
a. Enter the basic solution.
Note. The basic solution has all manual and automatic inputs set at neutral values. If the basic
solution fails, the crew should check their set-up and rerun the check for a second time, paying
close attention to make sure the correct procedures are used and the correct data is put into the
computer; If the solution fails for the second time notify organizational maintenance.
(1)
3 September 2009
Select MAINT DATA from the main menu, and then select SETUP, BAL/SOLN,
M1A2 SEP version 4.0, enter keypad number 1) on the keypad display, and ENTER.
Grasp the power control handles, select TEST on the GCDP, and wait for the
computer to automatically run the test. Then verify the numbers with the appropriate
chart.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-65
Appendix A
(2)
(3)
Using a G pattern and the manual controls, lay the GPS aiming dot back on the
aiming point, with last movement up.
The crewman on the outside views through the MBD and confirms that the gun is on
the correct block (basic).
Note. Evaluate each column individually. The crewman by the MBD should make sure the
aiming dot is on the appropriate block; if it is not, he should note that the MBD was not on the
appropriate block. If the MBD is not on the appropriate block, possible problems are
Crew set-up.
GCDP not zeroed (for example, CCF).
Incorrect entry of checks data into the GCDP.
(4) Record the position of the MBD aiming point (in relation to the target block) on the
Sample M1A2 SEP Data Worksheet for the M1A2 SEP Special Input Check and
M1A2 SEP Ballistic Solution Check, see Figure A-13.
Note. Repeat steps 10a (1) through (4) for each of the remaining solutions (cant, crosswind,
and lead).
A-66
b. Enter the cant solution. M1A2 SEP enter keypad number 2 on the keypad display, and
ENTER. Grasp the power control handles, select TEST on the GCDP, and wait for the
computer to automatically run the test. Then verify the numbers with the appropriate chart.
c. Enter the crosswind solution. M1A2 SEP enter keypad number 3 on the keypad display,
and ENTER. Grasp the power control handles, select TEST on the GCDP, and wait for the
d. Enter the lead solution. M1A2 SEP enter keypad number 4 on the keypad display, and
ENTER. Grasp the power control handles, select TEST on the GCDP, and wait for the
Step 11. After completing the M1A2 SEP special input check (all faults have been corrected),
proceed to Check 5 (M1A2 SEP)Ballistic Solution.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-13. Sample M1A2 SEP data worksheet for the M1A2 SEP
special input check and M1A2 SEP ballistic solution check
CHECK 5 M1A2 SEPBALLISTIC SOLUTION

Purpose
A-72. The ballistic solution check verifies that the FCS is correctly implementing ballistic solutions in all
main gun channels.
Note. Ballistic solution checks do not test components of the FCS; they test the ability of the
TMPU to compensate for the values received from these components and determine a ballistic
solution for a given round.
Conditions
z
z
z
z
A fire control system test has been completed (see TM 9-2350-388-10-1).

Use the appropriate chart at Figures A-14a on page A-69 and Figure A-14b on page A-70, for
your software version to complete Check 5 for M1A2 SEP ballistic solution checks).
The AUX HYDR POWER is on. The FIRE CONTROL MODE switch is in EMERGENCY
mode.
The commanders station, turret, and gunners station are powered up.
Procedures
z
z
Step 1. Open the GPS left (DAY) ballistic door.

switches on the GPCH, and check for drift. (If more than 0.5 mil of drift in 2 seconds is
observed, press the MAINT push button, then the DRIFT push button, to null out the
EMERGENCY mode drift.)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-67
Appendix A
Step 3. Move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to NORMAL, squeeze one of the palm
switches on the GPCH, and check for drift. (If more than 0.5 mil of drift in 20 seconds is
observed, null out the drift using the AZ and EL DRIFT push buttons.)
Note. If the NORMAL mode drift and EMERGENCY mode drift are not nulled out before
running the ballistic solution tests, false test results may occur.
z
z
z
z
Step 4. Press the MAINT push button on the MAIN MENU screen.
Step 5. Press the SET UP push button on the MAINTENANCE menu.
Step 6. Press the BAL/SOLN push button on the SET UP menu.
Step 7. Use the keypad to enter the solution number from B/S Tests 10 through 22 for version
4.0 (see Figure A-14a or B/S Tests 8 and 10 through 22 for version 4.2 and 4.3). T The other
B/S checks listed on the charts at Figure A-14a and Figure A-14b cannot be verified on the
solution board, however, they will be completed if time allows. We strongly recommend that
you do all 52 checks; however, as a minimum, you must do the ones listed for this step.)
Note. The B/S Test numbers in this step are required to conduct AACs on the solution board on
page A-56.
Step 8. To start the test, squeeze and hold the palm switch, then press the START TEST button.
Notes. After pressing the START TEST push button, hold the palm switch for a minimum of 45
seconds, or until pass/fail results are displayed.
If a FAIL is displayed, rerun the test one time prior to recording the solution number.
Make sure the gun is as close to zero elevation as possible.
Performing ballistic solutions for sabot ammunition may change the sabot ammo subdes
indexed on the GCDP. Check the ammo subdes for sabot after performing the ballistic solutions
checks.
Check the ballistic solution charts for information concerning checks 1 through 52 (see
Figure A-14a, Figure A-14b, and Figure A-14c.
z
Step 9. Repeat steps on BAL/SOLN menu until all required ballistic solutions have been run.
Note. If one or more FAILS were displayed during the test, notify unit maintenance.
z
A-68
Step 10. Press the RETURN push button on the BAL/SOLN menu three times to return to the
MAIN MENU screen.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-14a. M1A2 SEP ballistic solution chart for check 5 (4.0 version)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-69
Appendix A
Figure A-14b. M1A2 SEP ballistic solution chart for check 1 (4.2-4.3 version) (continued)
A-70
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CHECK 6 M1A2 SEPMUZZLE REFERENCE SYSTEM

Purpose
A-73. The MRS check determines whether the MRS can correct an artificial boresight loss.
Conditions
z
None.
Procedures
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Boresight the FCS at a known range. The GUN and GPS targets on the 100-meter
solution board may be used if 1,200 meters is indexed into the computer.
Step 2. Boresight the MRS and enter the data.
a. Press the ADJUST push button at the main menu of the GCDP.
b. Press the BORESIGHT push button at the ADJUST menu.
c. Press the MRS push button at the BORESIGHT menu.
d. Hold the GPCH for five seconds, the release.
e. Refer the GPS reticle to the MRS collimator using the four-way switch, and record the
readings.
f. Press the ENTER push button twice.
g. Press the RETURN push button.
Step 3. With GCDP on MAIN MENU, press COMBAT push button. Press the MRS UPDATE
push button on COMBAT menu. Grasp the GPCH for 5 seconds, then release. (The MRS
UPDATE display should read 0.00 and 0.00, and the GPS reticle should be aligned with the
MRS collimator on the muzzle; if not, notify organizational maintenance.)
Step 4. Press the RETURN push button, then press the MRS UPDATE push button (repeat this
several times). The GPS reticle should align with the collimator each time. If it does not, notify
organizational maintenance. When complete, press the RETURN push button one time to return
to the BORESIGHT menu.
Step 5. Press the GPS push button at the BORESIGHT menu and, using the four-way switch,
move the reticle up .5 mils. Enter the new value by pressing the ENTER push button twice.
When complete, press the RETURN push button three times.
Step 6. Press the COMBAT push button at the main menu, then press the MRS UPDATE push
button. Grasp GPCH for 5 seconds and then release. Update the MRS using the four-way switch
to realign the GPS reticle and the MRS collimator. (The result should have an elevation value
between down .65 and down .35 and an azimuth value between left 0.15 and right 0.15.)
Step 7. Using the four-way switch, move the MRS reticle so that the update display reads 0.00
and 0.00. Press the ENTER push button twice, and then press the RETURN push button.
Step 8. Press the ADJUST push button at the main menu, and then press the BORESIGHT push
button and the GPS push button. Remove the .5 mil error that was entered in step 5 by moving
the reticle down .5 mil to its original boresight value. Introduce an azimuth boresight error by
moving the reticle right .5 mil. Enter the new value by pressing the ENTER push button twice.
When complete, press the RETURN push button three times.
Step 9. Press the COMBAT push button at the main menu, then press the MRS UPDATE push
button. Grasp the GPCH for 5 seconds and then release. Update the MRS. (The result should
have an azimuth value between left .65 and left .35 and an elevation value between up 0.15 and
down 0.15.)
Step 10. Using the four-way switch, move the MRS reticle so that the update display reads 0.00
and 0.00. Press the ENTER push button twice, and then press the RETURN push button.
Step 11. Press the ADJUST push button at the main menu, and then press the BORESIGHT
push button and the GPS push button. Remove the .5 mil error that was entered in step 5 by
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-71
Appendix A
moving the reticle left .5 mil to its original boresight value. Press the ENTER push button twice
to enter the new value.
Notes. Failing to meet the criteria in steps 6 and 9 may indicate that the MRS collimator on the
muzzle was not aligned when it was attached to the muzzle, or the collimator shifted after initial
alignment. In either situation, a turret mechanic must realign the collimator.
Except for realignment of the collimator by a turret mechanic, there is no way to correct a
failure of the MRS to restore boresight reference. MRS updating is generally not as accurate as
total system re-boresighting.
z
Step 12. Record any deficiencies on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.
EXPANDED AAC CHECKS

CHECK 1MAIN GUN RECOIL PISTON SLEEVE POSITION CHECK
Purpose
A-74. The main gun recoil piston sleeve check ensures that the main gun recoil system parts are assembled
correctly. An improperly seated recoil piston may cause abnormal ammunition jump characteristics; that is,
the tank may need a discreet CCF.
Conditions
z
z
z
z
z
z
z

The engine is off and the TURRET POWER is off.
The main gun is in SAFE.
The loaders panel is in MANUAL.
The turret travel lock is locked.
The system hydraulic pressure is reduced to zero.
The main gun is maximum elevated by using the manual control handles.
Procedures
z
Step 1. Check the position of the recoil piston sleeve at the small slot at the 12 oclock position
where the breech butts against the gun mount (see Figure A-15).
Figure A-15. Checking position of recoil piston sleeve

Note. If using the piston seating gauge, go to Step 4.
A-72
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Step 2. For the crew-level check, the maximum allowable is 0.012 inches. Using the 0.012
mechanics feeler gauge, hold the gauge back against the front of the breech and attempt to insert
it into the slot (see Figure A-16).
Figure A-16. Feeler gauge

z
Step 3. If the piston sleeve is in the proper position, the gauge will go down only about an inch.
If the check fails, it will go down further as depicted in Figure A-17.
Figure A-17. Depiction of faulty piston sleeve

Note. If the gauge goes in more than one inch as depicted in Figure A-18, notify maintenance
immediately.
z
Step 4. When using the piston seating gauge 120 mm to check the gap, it will read at the top of
the coax ammunition feed chute. Hold the gauge against the breech ring and insert it into the slot
(see Figure A-18). This check passes if the green or GO portion of the gauge overlaps the top
edge of the feed chute. The check fails if the gauge inserts deep enough so that the red or NOGO portion of the gauge is at the top edge of the feed chute. If the check fails, notify
maintenance and proceed to Check 2, Breech Alignment Block Check.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-73
Appendix A
Note. The piston seating gauge 120mm is locally manufactured. The specifications are in
Appendix D of TM 9-2350-264-20-2-4 and TM 9-2350-388-20-2-4.
Figure A-18. Piston seating gauge, 120 mm

Note. If the gauge goes into the red NO-GO, notify maintenance.
CHECK 2BREECH ALIGNMENT BLOCK CHECK

Purpose
A-75. The breech alignment block check ensures that the tolerance between the breech alignment block and
the breech is correct, which ensures the position of the gun tube is consistent after each round fired.
Conditions
z
z
z
z
z

The main gun is in SAFE. The loaders panel is in MANUAL.
The turret is in TRAVEL LOCK.
The system hydraulic pressure is reduced to zero. The main gun is maximally depressed by
using the manual control handles.
Procedures
z
A-74
Step 1. For the crew-level check, use a .005 feeler gauge to check the distance between the antirotation key and the side of the keyway (see Figure A-19a and Figure A-19b). The keyway is in
the right underside of the breech. If the feeler gauge will not go between the anti-rotation key
and the side of the keyway that is closest to the gunners position, then the breech is rotated fully
clockwise; go to Step 2. If; however, the blade goes between them, notify maintenance, and
proceed to Check 3, Elevation Mechanism Check.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-19a. Starting position for anti-rotation key tolerance check
Figure A-19b. Checking distance between the anti-rotation key and the side of the keyway
z
Step 2. The large white mounting bracket that supports the breech operating cam has a small 45degree ramp on it. This ramp is located near the front, bottom, gunners side of the breechit is
the front end of the anti-rotation keyway that rides up on it. Try to insert the .005 feeler gauge
between the ramp and the breech (see Figure A-20). Be sure to check this distance on both sides
of the anti-rotation keyway. If the blade does not go in on either side, then the breech is rotated
fully clockwise. In other words, if the breech is touching either the gunners side of the antirotation key or the ramp on the mounting bracket, it is fully rotated. If the blade goes between
them, notify maintenance, and proceed to Check 3.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-75
Appendix A
Figure A-20. Checking the distance between the ramp and the breech
z
Step 3. With the breech fully clockwise, measure the distance between the left front bottom of
the breech and the top of the breech alignment block. The gap should be 0.005 inches or less, so
use the 0.006 blade of your feeler gauge (see Figure A-21a and Figure A-21b). If it does not go
in, then the block does not need shimming. If it does go in, shims must be added under the
blocknotify maintenance.
Figure A-21a. Starting position for breech alignment block check
A-76
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-21b. Position for breech alignment block check
CHECK 3ELEVATION MECHANISM CHECK

Purpose
A-76. The elevation mechanism check ensures that the support system is secured properly and does not
have excessive movement. Excessive movement may result in a continual round-to-round dispersion.
Conditions
z
z
z
z
z
z

The main gun is in the SAFE position.
The main gun is in the TURRET position, and the elevation is locked.
The turret is in the TRAVEL LOCK position.
The system hydraulic pressure is reduced to zero.
Procedures
z
Step 1. Above the Gun. With the main gun in the TRAVEL LOCK position, use the manual
elevation crank to raise and lower the gun quickly (rock), as far as the travel lock will allow. At
the same time, a second person should
a. Place his hand across the top of the elevation mechanisms rod end bearing and its
mounting bracket to feel for play (see Figure A-22a).
b. Repeat this at the head of the rod end pin and mounting bracket where it protrudes on the
side (see Figure A-22b).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-77
Appendix A
Figure A-22a. Top view of main gun and elevation mechanism
Figure A-22b. Side view of rod end pin

z
A-78
Step 2. Below the Gun. With the gun still in the TRAVEL LOCK position, use the manual
elevation crank to raise and lower the gun quickly (rock), as far as the travel lock will allow. At
the same time, a second person should look for movement between
a. The elevation mechanism and the yoke (see Figure A-23).
b. Between the yoke and the outside support bracket (see Figure A-23).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-23. Lower elevation mechanism, yoke, and support bracket

z
Step 3. Check the elevation mechanism and forward struts, the struts have two nuts and two
washers apiece. Check the lower ends of the forward and rear struts to ensure all bolts are tight.
Loose mounting bolts will result in excessive round-to-round dispersion (see Figure A-24a and
Figure A-24b).
Note. The forward lower struts, washers, and nuts must be checked from the drivers
compartment.
Figure A-24a. Rear elevation mechanism support strut
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-79
Appendix A
Figure A-24b. Rear elevation mechanism support strut (continued)
SUPERELEVATION AAC CHECK

Purpose
A-77. Using FCS inputs that approximate those used during screening for both KE and HEAT training
rounds, determine if FCS computes and implements the correct superelevation.
Conditions
z
z
Completed prep-to-fire checks.

Passed computer self-test and hydraulic pressure check.
Procedures
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
A-80
Step 1. Zero out automatic inputs, crosswind, lead, cant, and attitude.
Step 2. Zero out boresight, MRS boresight, and MRS update.
a. Press the ADJUST button on the main menu, press BORESIGHT, press GPS, and zero
boresight numbers.
b. Press the ADJUST button on the main menu, press MRS, zero MRS boresight, and MRS
update.
Step 3. Enter the ammunition temperature, 69.8; barometric reading, 29.92; and air temperature,
59.0.
Step 4. Ammunition select to SABOT, AMMO SUBDES for M865A3.
Step 5. Enter the CCF for M865: +0.15 (Right), -0.60 (Up).
Step 6. Ammunition select to HEAT, AMMO SUBDES for M831A1.
Step 7. Enter the CCF for M831A1: +0.15 (Right), -0.15(Up).
Step 8. Select MANUAL mode.
Step 9. Press the ADJUST button on the main menu, press BORESIGHT, and press GPS.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
Step 10. Using the gunners quadrant and manual controls, level the gun to 0 mils. (Use either
the gunners quadrant location pads on the breech or, more safely, the bracket to the left of the
gunners left arm.)
Step 11. Toggle the GPS reticle to a well-defined aim point.
Step 12. Press ENTER twice on the GCDP, and press the return key three times.
Step 13. Select NORMAL mode.
M865IP, TPCSDS-T
z
Step 14. Ammunition select to KE.
z
Step 15. While depressing the palm switch, press the SENSOR key and enter a range 1,500
meters on the CCPhold the palm switch for 5 seconds.
z
Step 16. Release the palm switch.
z
Step 17. Manually lay the GPS reticle on the original aim point.
Note. Maintenance data will not be available for superelevation for the M1A2 SEP until
software version 4.1 is fielded.
z
z
z
Step 18. For tanks without an upgraded CEU (do not have M829A3 or M1028 solution),
depress the MAINT DATA key, and then 9, 1, and ENTER. The number in the CCP display
should be 2.68, +/-0.02 mils. In other words, the reading should be between 2.66 and 2.70. Press
the MAINT DATA key, then 9, 0, and ENTER to clear the display. If the value is not within
tolerance, recheck the manual and automatic inputs. If the value is still not within tolerance, the
fire control computer is not computing the correct superelevation value; notify maintenance.
Step 19. For the tanks with the upgraded CEU, depress the MAINT DATA key, and then 9, 1,
and ENTER. The reading should be 2.65, +/-0.02 mils, or between 2.63 and 2.67. Press the
MAINT DATA key to clear the display. If the value is not within tolerance, recheck the manual
and automatic inputs. If the value is still not within tolerance, the fire control computer is not
computing the correct superelevation value. Notify maintenance.
Step 20. Using the gunners quadrant, measure the elevation of the gun.
Step 21. Whether the tank has the old CEU or the upgraded CEU, the reading should be
between 2.5 and 2.9 mils. If the applied elevation is not within tolerance, notify maintenance.
M831 and M831A1, TP-T

z
Step 22. Ammo select to HEAT.
z
Step 23. While depressing the palm switch, enter a range of 1,500 meters on the CCPhold the
palm switch for 5 seconds.
z
Step 24. Manually lay the GPS reticle on the original aim point.
z
Step 25. For tanks without an upgraded CEU (do not have M829A3 or M1028 solution),
depress the MAINT DATA key, and then press 9, 1, and ENTER. The reading should be 7.46,
+/-0.02, or between 7.44 and 7.48. Press the MAINT DATA key, then 9, 0, and ENTER to clear
the display. If the value is not within tolerance, recheck the manual and automatic inputs. If the
value is still not within tolerance, the fire control computer is not computing the correct
superelevation value; notify maintenance.
z
Step 26. For tanks with the upgraded CEU, depress the MAINT DATA key, and then press 9, 1,
and ENTER. The reading should be 7.52, +/-0.02, or between 7.50 and 7.54. Press the MAINT
DATA key, then 9, 0, and ENTER to clear the display.
z
Step 27. Using the gunners quadrant, measure the elevation of the gun.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-81
Appendix A
z
z
Step 28. For tanks with either the old or upgraded CEU, the gunners quadrant reading should
be between 7.3 and 7.7 mils.
Step 29. Re-enable all automatic inputs, turn off the CCP, and close the door.
Cold and Hot Temperature Checks

A-78. Crews can also conduct superelevation checks at cold and hot temperatures. Use the same
procedures listed above, except enter either 20F or 120F for ammunition temperature. Table A-17a and
Table A-17b depict the desired solutions.
Table A-17a. Temperature checks, old CEU
For tanks with the old CEU:
Maintenance Data 91
M865IP/PIP
M831
Ammo
Temp
Solution
Tolerance
Gunners Quadrant
QE
20F
2.91
2.89 -2.93
2.7 -3.1
120F
2.47
2.45 -2.49
2.3 -2.7
20F
7.88
7.86 -7.90
7.7 -8.1
120F
7.10
7.08 -7.12
6.9 -7.3
Table A-17b. Temperature checks, new CEU

For tanks with the new CEU (has M829A3 and M1028 solutions):
Maintenance Data 91
M865IP/PIP
M831
Ammo Temp
Solution
Tolerance
Gunners Quadrant QE
20F
2.81
2.79 -2.83
2.6 -3.0
120F
2.47
2.49 -2.53
2.3 -2.7
20F
7.88
7.98 -8.02
7.8 -8.2
120F
7.10
6.99 -7.03
6.8 -7.2
CAM BRACKET OPERATING CABLE ADJUSTMENT

PURPOSE
A-79. The cam bracket operating cable adjustment is used to obtain the correct clearance between the
breech crank roller and cam bracket when the distance between the two is less or greater than 0.005-inch to
0.010-inch (0.127mm to 0.254mm).
CONDITIONS
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
A-82
Tools: artillery and turret mechanics tool kit; ordinance (SC 5180-95-CL-A12).
Ammunition box assembly removed.
Engine if off and TURRET POWER is off.
The turret is in travel lock.
The stub base deflector is removed.
Breech is in the closed position.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
PROCEDURES
z
Position cable.
Step 1. Look at the threaded collar of the operating cable at the bracket. If the collar of the
operating cable is not centered between the two jamnuts, proceed to step 4 of Adjust Cable
below.
Step 2. Hold one jamnut and loosen the other jamnut. Center the collar of the operating
cable between both of the jamnuts. Tighten the two jamnuts against the bracket(see Figure
A-25a).
Figure A-25a. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment

z
Adjust Cable:
Step 1. Raise arming handle to the ARM position.
Step 2. Using the breech operating handle, fully open the breechblock.
Step 3. Lower arming handle to the SAFE position. The cam bracket should move enough
to allow breech crank roller to disengage from the cam. Breechblock should now be held
open at extractors.
Step 4. Measure the distance between the face of the breech crank roller (1) and cam
bracket (2). If the clearance is between 0.005-inch to 0.010-inch (0.127mm to 0.254mm),
go to step 8 (see Figure A-25b).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-83
Appendix A
Figure A-25b. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued)

Note. It may be necessary to adjust the operating cable at both ends to obtain correct clearance
between the roller and bracket (2).
Step 5. To move the roller and bracket closer together, loosen the left jamnut and turn the
right jamnut clockwise. To move roller and bracket farther apart, loosen the right jamnut
and turn the left jamnut counterclockwise (see Figure A-25c).
Figure A-25c. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued)
A-84
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Step 6. If correct clearance between the roller and bracket was obtained in step 5 above
then go to step 8.
Step 7. To move roller and bracket farther apart, loosen the bottom jamnut (6) at the
SAFE/ARM handle and turn the top jamnut (8) counterclockwise. To move roller and
bracket closer together, loosen the top jamnut (8) and turn the bottom jamnut (6) clockwise
(see Figure A-25d).
Figure A-25d. Cam bracket operating cable adjustment (continued)

z
z
Step 8. Close breechblock using manual release (9).

Step 9. Install stub base deflector.
SECTION IV LIVE-FIRE ACCURACY SCREENING TEST
PROOFING TEAM
A-80. The commander and master gunner must select the most technically competent TCs and gunners to
act as the proofing team. At home station, the proofing team assists the master gunner with training the
tank crews, as necessary (or directed by the commander). The proofing team must be on hand to help crews
prepare for, and conduct, the screening test. The proofing team also assists the crew in firing the screening
test, if necessary. (When available, direct support contact teams should also participate.) Success of the
screening test depends on the proofing team and crew members eliminating mechanical faults and crew
errors before firing the first round of the screening test. The following must be completed before the
screening test:
z
Collimation checks of the MBD (M26A1 and M27A1).
z
Preventive maintenance checks and services (see appropriate operators manual).
z
ACC.
z
Boresighting with an MBD.
z
Verify plumb and synchronization (M1A2 SEP) (see operators manual).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-85
Appendix A
SCREENING PROCEDURES
A-81. The screening test consists of firing first sabot, then HEAT ammunition at a screening test target at
1,500 meters (M1A1 and M1A2 SEP) (see Figure A-26). (The target must be within [+ or -] 20 meters of
the required range.)
Figure A-26. Screening test target (ST-5)

Note. Units may use a fill color inside the circle to ease in round sensing.
A-82. The TC ensures the gunner makes a precise lay using the power control handles with the FIRE
CONTROL MODE switch in the NORMAL position. The gunner lases to the target and announces the
range to the target. If the correct range cannot be obtained, the known range must be indexed into the fire
control system. Using the power control handles, the gunner makes a precise lay on the target aiming point,
making the last movement up. When firing, the gunner keeps at least one of the palm switches on the
gunners power control handles depressed. To pass the screening test, one of the first two rounds fired for
each ammunition type must hit the target fully within the circle (see Table A-18a and Table A-18b and
Table A-19a and Table A-19b). Targets should be checked physically or confirmed with high-power
optics. There is no time limit for this screening test. The steps illustrated in Figure A-27 outline the
screening test procedures:
Notes. If the tank was given a discrete CCF during the LFAST, and no turret components have
been replaced, fire the LFAST with the discrete CCF.
If the tank fires erratically during the screening test, the proofing team should inspect the
tank. If more than the full width or height of the ST-5 circle separates the round strikes, the tank
is firing erratically, and the problem must be fixed.
A-83. Zero the coax and M2 caliber .50 machine guns in accordance with the operators manual (see also
page A-93).
A-86
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-27. Flow chart for screening test procedures
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-87
Appendix A
Table A-18a. Screening test actions checklist (M1A1)

Action
Item
Alpha
Complete prior to pulling forward to conduct screening test:

Conduct PMCS IAW operators manual.
Conduct prep-to-fire checks.
Verify that the EMERGENCY and NORMAL mode drifts were nulled out.
Make sure the boresight and CCF (zero) data is current.
Verify boresight, if condition warrants.
Bravo
Read back the following:

My GPS boresight data is ___________ and ______________.
My MRS boresight data is ___________ and ______________.
My MRS update data is 0.0 and 0.0.
My AMMO SUBDES for sabot is _______________.
My CCF for sabot is ____________ and _____________.
Crosswind is _________________.
Cant is __________________.
Air temp is _______________.
Barometric pressure is _________________.
Ammo temp is ________________.
Charlie
Make sure no lights are illuminated on the CCP.

Move the GPS MAGNIFICATION switch to 10X.
Load one round of Sabot.
Index Sabot.
Move the GUN SELECT switch to MAIN.
Lase to appropriate ST-5.
Report range to tower.
Report REDCON when complete.
Delta
Fire one round of sabot at designated screening target.

The gunner
Uses the power control handles.
Makes a G pattern.
Makes last movement up.
Announces ON THE WAY to alert tower.
Squeezes GPCH trigger gently; does not flinch or pull.
Takes further instructions from the tower.
Note. If Discreet CCF was determined, go to Golf.
A-88
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table A-18b. Screening test actions checklist (M1A1) (continued)

Action
Item
Echo

Index HEAT.
Read the following back to the tower:
My AMMO SUBDES for HEAT is ______________.
My CCF for HEAT is ___________ and _______________.
Lase to same ST-5; report range to tower.
Foxtrot
Fire one round of HEAT at designated screening target.

The gunner
Makes a G pattern.

Golf
Index Sabot or HEAT.

Move the CCP PWR to ON.
Press the ZERO push button; make sure the ZERO light comes on.
Hotel
Gunner uses the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch to enter data.

Press the ENTER push button on the CCP to enter data into the CEU.
Make sure there are no lights illuminated on the CCP.
Call the tower and read back the CCF data in the computer.
India

Load one round of Sabot or HEAT.
Read back the range displayed in the GPS.
Go back to Delta (for Sabot) or Foxtrot (for HEAT).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-89
Appendix A
Table A-19a. Screening test actions checklist (M1A2 SEP)

Action
Item
Alpha
Complete prior to pulling forward to conduct screening test:

Conduct PMCS IAW operators manual.
Null out EMERGENCY and NORMAL mode drift.
Make sure the boresight and CCF (zero) data is current.
Verify boresight, if condition warrants.
Bravo
Read back the following:

My GPS boresight data is __________ and ____________.
My MRS boresight data is __________ and ____________.
My MRS update data is __________ (or none). (Should be 0.0 and 0.0.)
My AMMO SUBDES for sabot is ______________.
My CCF for sabot is __________ and ____________.
Crosswind is _____________.
Cant is ____________.
Air temp is _______________.
Barometric pressure is _____________.
Charlie

Move the GPS MAGNIFICATION switch to 10X.
Load one round of Sabot.
Index Sabot.
Lase to appropriate ST-5. Report range to tower.
Delta
Fire one round of Sabot at designated screening target.

The gunner
Makes a G pattern.
Takes further instructions from tower.
A-90
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table A-19b. Screening test actions checklist (M1A2 SEP) (continued)

Action
Item
Echo

Index HEAT.
Read back to tower:
My AMMO SUBDES for HEAT is _____________.
My CCF for HEAT is __________ and _____________.
Lase to same ST-5. Report range to tower.
Go back to action Delta.
Foxtrot
Fire one round of HEAT at designated screening target.

The gunner
Makes a G pattern.

Golf
Index Sabot or HEAT.

Press the ZERO push button on the ADJUST menu.
Hotel
Gunner enters data using the GCDP key pad.

Press the ENT push button to enter data into the TEU.
Call the tower and read back the CCF data in the GCDP.
India

Load one round of Sabot or HEAT.
Read back the range displayed in the GPS.
Go back to Delta (for Sabot) or Foxtrot (for HEAT).
DETERMINING THE MEAN POINT OF IMPACT AND INDIVIDUAL TANK CCF

A-84. To ensure the most accurate measurements, the screening test target should be exactly level and at
1,500 meters. A vertical and horizontal line should bisect the center of the target aiming point and extend
out to the edges of the screening test target. These lines are required to measure the strike of the rounds.
Follow the steps below to determine the mean point of impact for each round.
z
Step 1. Measure the distance from the horizontal and vertical lines to the center of the round.
The distance from the horizontal line to center of round is the elevation; the distance from the
vertical line to center of the round is the azimuth. When all rounds have been measured, record
the AZ and EL measurements for each round (in centimeters) with the appropriate positive
(right, down) or negative (left, up) sign.
z
Step 2. Find the mean (average) point of impact (MPI).
Note. When determining the mean with a calculator, make sure all left and up readings are
entered as negative (-) values.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-91
Appendix A
Add all AZ and EL measurements.

1st Round
2d Round
3d Round
Total
-53 cm (Up)
-10 cm (Up)
+20 cm (Down)
-43 cm (Up)
Find the MPI. Divide the AZ and EL totals by the number of rounds fired (3).
Azimuth
Elevation
-125 cm (Left)
-150 cm (Left)
-175 cm (Left)
-450 cm (Left)
-450 3 = -150 cm
-43 3 = -14.3333 cm
Step 3. Convert the MPI to milliradians.

Find 1/10 of the range: 1,500 10 = 150.
Divide each MPI (Step 2b) by 1/10 of the range (Step 3a).
Azimuth
Elevation
z
Step 4. Convert to mils. Multiply results from step 3b by 1.02 and round to two digits. (The
computer accepts two digits, regardless of the position of the decimal [for example, .15 or 1.5].
If the third number is 4 or less, the second number will remain the same. If the third number is 5
or more, the second number will increase by 1.)
Azimuth
Elevation
-150 cm 150 = -1.00

-14.3333 cm 150 = -0.09555
-1.00 x 1.02 = -1.02 = -1.00

-0.09555 x 1.02 = -0.097466 = -0.10
Step 5. Add the AZ and EL from step 4 to the old CCF. The result is the new CCF.
Old CCF (M865-IP)
Result of Step 5
New CCF
A-92
+0.15
-1.00
-0.85 (Left)
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
-0.60
-0.10
-0.70 (Up)
3 September 2009
Figure A-28. Sample discrete CCF worksheet (DA Form 7556-R)
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-93
Appendix A
*ALTERNATE METHODDETERMINING MEAN POINT OF IMPACT AND INDIVIDUAL TANK

CCF
A-85. You may need to determine an approximate MPI when firing on tank gunnery ranges that share a
common impact area (on which you cannot go down range to get the measurements to calculate a CCF).
A-86. Using high-powered optics, such as a ground-mounted TOW sight, is essential. Use the Discrete
CCF Worksheet, DA Form 7556-R (see Figure A-28) for this procedure. The following steps describe the
procedures.
Note. Mark all previous impacts (holes) on the ST-5 using the Discrete CCF Worksheet, DA
Form 7556-R in Figure A-29. Use a Discrete CCF Worksheet for each tank.
z
Step 1. Mark the impact of each round fired with an S for sabot or H for HEAT (this is for later
historical reference), and the sequence (1, 2, 3) in which they were fired (see Figure A-29).
Figure A-29. Target

z
Step 2. Draw a line connecting the center of any two round impacts on the Discrete CCF
Worksheet (see Figure A-30) (S-1 and S-3 were used in this example).
Figure A-30. Targetmark 1/2 way
A-94
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
Step 3. Make a mark on this line halfway between the two impacts (see Figure A-31).
Figure A-31. Targetmark 1/3 way

z
z
Step 4. From the halfway mark, draw a line to the center of the remaining round impact.
Step 5. From the halfway mark, make a second mark one-third the distance to the third impact.
(This mark is the MPI.)
Note. Have gunner look at the Discrete CCF Worksheet, DA Form 7556-R when completed.
This will aid the gunner in recognizing the MPI.
z
Step 6. Have the gunner move the FIRE CONTROL MODE switch to EMERGENCY.
M1A1.
Have the gunner press the ZERO push button on the CCP.
Manually lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point of ST-5, with last
movement up. Using the reticle adjust toggle switch on the CCP, move the GPS reticle
aiming dot to the approximate MPI, as determined on the Discrete CCF Worksheet,
and record.
Make sure the appropriate ammunition is selected; press the ENTER key on the CCP
keypad to store this data in the CEU.
M1A2 SEP.
Have the gunner press the ADJUST push button on the GCDP. Press the ZERO push
button on the ADJUST menu.
Manually lay the GPS reticle aiming dot on the target aiming point of ST-5, with last
movement up. Using the four-way adjust switch on the GCDP, move the GPS reticle
aiming dot to the approximate MPI, as determined on the Discrete CCF Worksheet,
and record. (The tank discrete CCF for this round of ammunition is shown on the
GCDP.)
Make sure the appropriate ammunition is selected; press the ENT key on GCDP
keypad to store this data in the TMPU.
Press the RETURN push button on the GCDP twice to return to the MAIN menu.
Note. The firing tank will fire a confirmation round of the same type and lot number of
ammunition.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-95
Appendix A
SCREENING UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS

A-87. The target dimensions (other than 1,500 meters) shown in Figure A-32 and Table A-20 for 120mm
are to be used only when conditions preclude use of normal screening procedures. (Such instances are
excessive heat shimmer from extreme temperatures or terrain not available to place targets at 1,500
meters.) Targets must be reduced in size to correspond to the range (tank-to-target distance) being fired. If
the range to the ST-5 is 1,000m or less, the tank-to-target range must be within +10 meters.
Note. See pages A-99 through A-102 for screening procedures.
Figure A-32. Screening test target (ST-5) with dimension A

Table A-20. Dimensions of screening targets
under unusual conditions (120mm)
A-96
1,500m
175.0cm
305cm
1,400m
163.4cm
284cm
1,300m
151.6cm
264cm
1,200m
140.0cm
244cm
1,100m
128.4cm
224cm
1,000m
116.6cm
203cm
900m
105.5cm
183cm
800m
93.4cm
163cm
700m
81.6cm
142cm
600m
70.0cm
122cm
500m
58.4cm
102cm
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SCREENING TEST FAILURES

Failures
A-88. The proofing team inspects tanks that fail the screening test for mechanical or crew procedural errors
that might have caused the failure. (When available, direct support contact teams should also participate.)
The proofing team should check the following:
z
What were the failure indicators? (This basic information may help determine if there was an
obvious procedural error.)
Was one round fired so far off the first target that further firing was halted?
What were the sensings from the tower?
Is the crew experienced?
Has the tank performed well (or poorly) in the past?
Have any FCS components been replaced since last live firing?
z
Is the system still boresighted?
Did the crew update the MRS during the test? (They should not have.) Check this by
moving the MRS lever to IN and examining the display numbers on the CCP. (They should
be 0 and 0.)
Verify boresight.
z
Check for possible crew error by asking the crew:
Where did the gunner aim (reticle lay)?
Did the gunner remember to depress the palm switches while firing?
z
Check for possible maintenance problems:
Did the vehicle pass all checks on AACs?
Were the proper ammunition and AMMO SUBDES indexed?
Were the proper CCFs applied?
How was the target range entered in the system?
Were the manual inputs correct?
Press the CROSSWIND key. The value should be close to the estimated wind speed.
Traverse the turret 180 degrees. The crosswind reading should be from the opposite
direction. (Look for obvious differences only.)
Press the CANT key. For level-platform firings, the value should be within 2 degrees of
level.
Press the LEAD key. The value for a motionless turret should be less than 1.
Was the correct ammunition fired? (Look at the bases of the expended shell casings if there
is any doubt.)
Was the hydraulic system pressurized to at least 1,500 psi with the engine running?
Were any of the fire control malfunction lights illuminated?
Were any circuit breakers open?
Was there any normal/emergency mode drift in the fire control system?
Will the computer pass a self-test?

A-89. If a correctable mechanical problem or procedural error is found, it is corrected, and the crew reboresights the tank, with supervision from the proofing team. Then, the tank crew refires the portion of the
screening test the tank failed. If the tank passes the screening test, the crew and tank proceed with combat
operations or training. If a mechanical problem or procedural error was not found, the crew needs to
complete the following checks: (for the M1A1): M1A1 Check 4 (Special Input), page A-49 and M1A1
Check 5 (Ballistic Solution), page A-56; or (for the M1A2 SEP): M1A2 SEP Check 4 (Special Input
Check), page A-63; M1A2 SEP Check 5 (Ballistic Solution), page A-67. If no Abrams Combined Solution
Board is available, crews can perform the Superelevation AAC Check on page A-80.
A-90. If the tank is sent to direct support maintenance or a line replaceable unit is changed, the tank crew
must re-boresight the tank and fire another screening test (when the faults are corrected) using the fleet
CCF, or the tank discrete CCF if one has been established, with supervision from the proofing team.
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-97
Appendix A
Screening Failure Data

A-91. *Results of all proofing tests must be compiled by the firing unit and sent to the U.S. Army Armor
Center (USAARMC) (see address below). The data will enable USAARMC to monitor unit experience
under these calibration policies. Required data includes
z
Type of ammunition.
z
CCF the tank fired and screening round impact measurements.
z
Impact measurements of confirmation round.
z
New CCF.
z
Reason for failure, if known.
z
Follow-on action.
z
Unit identification.
z
Location of firing and environmental conditions.
z
Ammunition lot number.
z
Date fired.
z
Automatic and manual inputs in the computer. (When recording automatic inputs, make sure
that a palm switch on the GPCH is depressed.)
A-92. Mail the data to
Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development, and Experimentation (DTDCD-E)
ATTN: ATZK-TDD-G
204 1st Cavalry Regiment Rd Ste 216
Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123
M1A1/M1A2 Gunners Quadrant End-for-End Test

A-93. *There are occasions when crews or master gunners need to precisely measure the pointing elevation
of a gun. The M1A1/M1A2 gunners quadrant is used to make measurements (see Figure A-33).
Beforehand, the crew must perform an end-for-end test on the M1A1/M1A2 gunners quadrant to make
sure the quadrant is in tolerance. (The quadrant is in tolerance if the end-for-end correction is between +0.4
and -0.4. The quadrant should be turned in for calibration if the end-for-end correction is 0.5 or greater.)
Figure A-33. Gunners quadrant (M1A1 shown)
A-98
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010

z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Inspect the elevation quadrant seats on the weapon.

Step 2. Inspect the quadrant shoes.
Step 3. Zero the micrometer by turning the micrometer knob.
Step 4. Set the index at zero mils.
Step 5. Position the quadrant on the weapon pointing toward the muzzle end.
Step 6. Depress or elevate the tube to center the bubble in the level vial.
Step 7. Reverse the direction of the quadrant (the bubble should center).
If the bubble centers, the test is complete.
If the bubble does not center, go to step 8.

Step 8. Center the bubble with the micrometer knob.
*If the bubble centers

*(1) Divide the micrometer reading by 2 to obtain the positive correction (for example,
0.4 2 = 0.2).
(2) Put the result on the micrometer scale.
(3) Point the quadrant toward the muzzle end of the weapon.
(4) Depress or elevate the tube to center the bubble.
(5) Reverse the direction of the quadrant (the bubble should center).
(6) Record the end-for-end correction on the carrying case.
*If the bubble does not center

(1) Set the index at -10 mils for a negative correction.
(2) Center the bubble in the level vial with the micrometer knob.
(3) Add 10 mils to the micrometer reading (for example, 9.8 + 10 = 19.8).
(4) *Divide the result by 2 (for example, 19.8 2 = 9.9).
(5) Put the result on the micrometer scale.
(6) Point the quadrant toward the muzzle end.
(7) Depress or elevate the tube to center the bubble.
(8) Reverse the direction of the quadrant (the bubble should center).
(9) Subtract 10 from the micrometer reading (for example, 9.9 -10.0 = -0.1). (Since this is
a negative correction, a minus sign must be placed in front of the correction factor.)
(10) Record the end-for-end correction on the carrying case.
SECTION V ZEROING TANK-MOUNTED MACHINE GUNS

A-94. The machine gun is the tanks secondary armament. It allows the crew to engage, suppress, and
destroy personnel and light-armored vehicles. It is imperative that the machine gun is properly zeroed.
BORESIGHTING THE CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN (M1A1)

A-95. The following are conducted in preparation to boresighting:
z
Position the tank on as level terrain as possible, with the gun tube over the front.
z
Select the boresight target with a well-defined right angle, at a range as near 500 meters as
possible.
z
Lase on the target using the commanders handle, if possible, to confirm the range to the
boresight target.
BORESIGHTING WITHOUT THE CALIBER .50 (LENZAR) BORESIGHT DEVICE

z
z
z
z
31 May 2010
Step 1. Clear the machine gun.

Step 2. Remove the rear mounting pin, and lift the rear of the machine gun above the firing
roller.
Step 3. Remove the back plate, and take the bolt group out of the caliber .50 receiver.
Step 4. Lower the rear of the machine gun, and reinsert the rear mounting pin.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-99
Appendix A
z
z
z
Step 5. Look into the back of the receiver and out through the machine gun barrel. Manually
traverse the CWS, and elevate or depress the machine gun to align the center of the barrel on the
targets upper left corner.
Step 6. Without moving the machine gun or CWS, look through the commanders weapon sight,
and align the boresight cross of the reticle on the upper left corner of the target as follows:
Loosen the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to allow the horizontal adjustment
control screw to turn.
Adjust the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the target, using the flat-tip
screwdriver.
Tighten the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to lock the horizontal adjustment
control screw.
Loosen the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to allow the vertical adjustment
Adjust the horizontal line of the boresight cross on the top edge of the target using the flattip screwdriver.
Tighten the setscrew with a 9/64-inch socket head key to lock the vertical adjustment
control screw.
Step 7. Look through the back of the caliber .50 receiver and out the gun barrel. Elevate, and
then depress the machine gun onto the upper left corner of the target, using the elevation crank.
Step 8. Look through the CWS sight to see if the boresight cross is on the upper left corner of
the target.
Notes. If the boresight cross is not on the upper left corner of the target, notify unit maintenance.
If the machine gun and boresight cross are both on the upper left corner of the target, the
machine gun is properly boresighted.
z
z
z
z
Step 9. Remove the rear mounting pin, and lift the rear of the machine gun above the firing
roller.
Step 10. Put the bolt group back into the caliber .50 receiver, and install the back plate.
Step 11. Lower the rear of the machine gun, and reinsert the rear mounting pin.
Step 12. Make sure the roller is over the butterfly trigger.
BORESIGHTING WITH THE CALIBER .50 (LENZAR) BORESIGHT DEVICE

z
z
z
z
A-100
Step 1. Clear the machine gun.

Step 2. Insert the caliber .50 boresight device.
Step 3. Manually traverse the CWS, and elevate or depress the machine gun to align the caliber
.50 boresight device on the target upper left corner.
Step 4. Without moving the machine gun or CWS, look through the commanders weapon sight,
and align the boresight cross of the reticle on the upper left corner of the target as follows:
Adjust the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the target, using the flat-tip
screwdriver.
control screw.
Adjust the horizontal line of the boresight cross on the top edge of the target, using the flattip screwdriver.
control screw.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
z
z
Step 5. Look through the caliber .50 boresight device. Elevate, and then depress the machine
gun onto the upper left corner of the target, using the elevation crank.
Step 6. Look through the CWS sight to see if the boresight cross is on the upper left corner of
the target.
Notes. If the boresight cross is not on the upper left corner of the target, notify unit maintenance.
If the machine gun and boresight cross are both on the upper left corner of the target, the
machine is properly boresighted.
z
Step 7. Remove the caliber .50 boresight device.
BORESIGHT COMMANDERS WEAPON SIGHT (CALIBER .50 THERMAL SIGHT/DAY TV

SYSTEM) TO COMMANDERS WEAPON PRIMARY METHOD
Note. Make sure that the commanders weapon sight reticle has been set for use with the
caliber .50 machine gun. If alternate weapon (M240) is installed alternate boresighting
procedure has to be used.
Position tank on level ground.
Select boresight target with defined right angle at a range as near 500 meters as possible.
Lase on target using commanders handle, if possible, to confirm range to boresight
target.
z
Step 1. Install commanders weapon.
WARNING
Make sure weapon is cleared before boresighting.
z
z
z
Step 2. Insert .50 caliber boresight device adapter into machine gun barrel.
Step 3. Insert .50 caliber boresight device optical unit into caliber .50 boresight device adapter
with optical unit eyepiece at 12 oclock position.
Step 4. Look through optical unit eyepiece while manually traversing CWS and elevating and
depressing machine gun to align boresight devise reticle with upper left corner of boresight
target.
Step 5. Without moving the machine gun or CWS, look through commanders weapon sight and
align boresight cross of reticle on upper left corner of boresight target as follows:
a. Press VID SEL button on CWS Digital Control Monitor (DCM) until day TV image is
displayed.
b. Hold MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM to left until menu is displayed on sight.
c. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down until indicator arrow is
pointing at BORESIGHT. Press the MULTI FUNCTION button to right to select
BORESIGHT.
d. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle up and/or down placing the
horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of boresight target.
e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on the CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing
the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the boresight target. If reticle
displacement displayed in the CWS display is greater than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then move
reticle until it is R 0.00 then go to step f. If less than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then go to step 5i.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-101
Appendix A
f.
z
z
Loosen setscrew with 9/64 inch socket head key to allow control of horizontal adjustment
control screw.
g. Adjust horizontal adjustment control screw with a screwdriver, placing vertical line of
boresight cross on left edge of boresight target.
h. Tighten setscrew with 9/64 inch socket head key. Repeat steps 5d and 5e.
i. Look through optical unit eyepiece and CWS DCM sight to see if boresight cross is on
upper left corner of boresight target.
j. If boresight cross is not on upper left corner of boresight target, start BORESIGHT
COMMANDERS WEAPON SIGHT TO COMMANDERS WEAPON PRIMARY
METHOD with step 4. If boresight cross is still not on upper left and corner of boresight
target, notify unit maintenance.
k. If boresight device reticle and boresight cross are both on upper left corner of boresight
target, machine gun is properly boresighted. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the day TV
boresight and check that BORESIGHT SAVED is displayed in CWS DCM.
a. Press VID SEL button on CWS DCM until thermal image is displayed.
BORESIGHT.
d. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing the
vertical line of the boresight cross on left edge of boresight target.
e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down and/or up placing the
horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of boresight target. If reticle displacement
displayed in the CWS display is greater than U 5.00 or D 5.00 then move reticle until it is
U 0.00 then go to step 6f. If less than U 5.00 or D 5.00 then go to step 6h.
f. Loosen the four bolts on the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Adjust cam
bolt with 7/16 inch socket placing horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of the
boresight target.
g. Tighten the four bolts n the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Repeat steps
6d and 6e.
h. Look through optical unit eyepiece and CWS sight to see if boresight cross is on the upper
left corner of boresight target.
i. If boresight cross is not on upper left corner of boresight target, start BORESIGHT
COMMANDERS WEAPON SIGHT TO COMMANDERS WEAPON PRIMARY
METHOD with step 6.
j. If boresight cross is still not on upper left and corner of boresight target, notify unit
maintenance.
k. If boresight device reticle and boresight cross are both on upper left corner of boresight
target, machine gun is properly boresighted. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the thermal
system boresight and check that BORESIGHT SAVED is displayed in CWS DCM.
Step 7. Remove .50 caliber boresight device machine gun adapter and boresight optical unit
from machine gun barrel.
Step 8. Check head space and timing (see TM 9-1005-213-10).
BORESIGHT COMMANDERS WEAPON SIGHT (CALIBER .50 THERMAL SIGHT/DAY TV

SYSTEM) TO COMMANDERS WEAPON ALTERNATE METHOD
Notes. Make sure that the commanders weapon sight reticle has been set for use with the
caliber .50 machine gun. If alternate weapon (M240) is installed alternate boresighting
procedure has to be used.
Position tank on level ground.
A-102
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Select boresight target with defined right angle at a range as near 500 meters as possible.
Lase on target using commanders handle, if possible, to confirm range to boresight
target.
z
WARNING
Make sure weapon is cleared before boresighting.
Make sure bolt is forward before removing backplate. Springloaded parts may release and injure operator.
z
z
z
z
Step 2. Remove rear mounting pin and lift rear of machine gun above firing roller.
Step 3. Remove backplate and take bolt group out of caliber .50 receiver.
Step 4. Lower rear of machine gun and insert rear mounting pin.
Step 5. Look into back of receiver and out through machine gun barrel. Manually traverse CWS,
and elevate or depress machine gun to align the center barrel on upper left corner of boresight
target.
Step 6. Without moving machine gun or CWS, look through commanders weapon sight and
align boresight cross of reticle on upper left corner of boresight target as follows.
a. Press VID SEL button on CWS DCM until day TV image is displayed.
BORESIGHT.
d. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle up and/or down placing the
horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of boresight target.
e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on the CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing
the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the boresight target. If reticle
displacement displayed in the CWS display is greater than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then move
reticle until it is R 0.00 then go to step 6f. If less than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then go to step 6i.
f. Loosen setscrew with 9/64 inch socket head key to allow control of horizontal adjustment
control screw.
g. Adjust horizontal adjustment control screw with a screwdriver, placing vertical line of
boresight cross on left edge of boresight target.
i. Look through back of caliber .50 receiver and out the gun barrel. Elevate, and then depress
machine gun onto upper left hand corner of boresight target with elevation crank.
j. If boresight cross is not on upper left corner of boresight target, notify unit maintenance.
k. If machine gun and boresight cross are both on upper left corner of boresight target,
machine gun is properly boresighted. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the day TV
boresight and check that BORESIGHT SAVED is displayed on the CWS DCM.
a. Press VID SEL button on CWS DCM until thermal image is displayed.
BORESIGHT.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-103
Appendix A
vertical line of the boresight cross on left edge of boresight target.
e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down and/or up placing the
horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of boresight target. If reticle displacement
f. Loosen the four bolts on the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Adjust cam
bolt with 7/16 inch socket placing horizontal line of the boresight cross on top edge of the
boresight target.
g. Tighten the four bolts n the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Repeat steps
7d and 7e.
h. Look through back of caliber .50 receiver and out the gun barrel. Elevate, and depress
machine gun onto upper left hand corner of boresight target with elevation crank.
Notes. If boresight cross is not on upper left corner of boresight target, notify unit maintenance.
If machine gun and boresight cross are both on upper left hand corner of boresight target,
machine gun is properly boresighted.
i.
z
z
z
z
z
Look through CWS sight to see if boresight cross is on the upper left corner of boresight
target. If it is the machine gun is properly boresighted. Press the E-ZOOM button to save
the thermal system boresight and check that BORESIGHT SAVED is displayed on CWS
DCM.
Step 8. Remove rear mounting pin and lift rear of machine gun above roller.
Step 9. Put bolt group back into caliber .50 receiver and install backplate.
Step 10. Lower rear of machine gun and insert rear mounting pin.
Step 11. Ensure roller is over machine gun butterfly trigger.
Step 12. Check head space and timing (see TM 9-1005-213-10).
ZEROING THE CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN

A-96. Before zeroing the caliber .50 machine gun on the M1A1, make sure the commanders weapon has
been boresighted and is loaded.
z
Step 1. Move the butterfly trigger safety until an F can be seen.
WARNING
If the butterfly trigger on the back plate is pushed, the gun will fire
and could injure or kill someone.
Step 2. Alert the crew by announcing CALIBER .50 on the intercom.
WARNING
If the button on the CWS elevation handle is pressed down, and
the ARMED light is lit, the gun will fire and could injure or kill
someone.
z
A-104
Step 3. Lay the 500-meter aiming point in the commanders weapon sight on the center of the
target, 500 meters out, using the manual controls.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 4. Move the SAFE/ARMED switch to the ARMED (right) position, then let go, and make
sure the ARMED light is lit.
Step 5. Fire a burst of 10 to 15 rounds by pressing the button on the CWS elevation handle.
Release the button to cease firing.
Step 6. Look at the beaten zone on the target in relation to the aiming point on the sight reticle.
Step 7. Move the SAFE/ARMED switch to the SAFE (left) position, then let go, and make sure
the ARMED light is not lit.
Step 8. If the aiming point in the sight reticle is centered on the beaten zone, zeroing is
complete. If the aiming point is not in the center of the beaten zone, go to step 9.
Step 9. Without moving the machine gun or CWS sight, align the aiming point in the sight
reticle to the center of the beaten zone as follows:
Adjust the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the target using the flat-tip
screwdriver.
control screw.
control screw.
Step 10. Repeat steps 3 through 8 until the aiming point on the sight reticle is centered on the
beaten zone.
Step 11. Move the butterfly trigger safety until the S can be seen.
Step 12. Clear the commanders weapon.
ZEROING THE COAXIAL MACHINE GUN

z
z
z
z
Before zeroing the coaxial machine gun

Position the tank on as level terrain as possible with the gun tube over the front.
Select a target with a range as near 800 meters as possible.
Lase on the target, using the gunners power control handle, if possible, to confirm the range to
the target.
M1A1 PROCEDURES
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Sight through the GPS eyepiece. Using the GPCH, lay the reticle aiming point on the
target.
Step 2. Lase on the target, or manually input 800 meters range into the computer.
Step 3. Fire a burst of 20 to 30 rounds. Mentally note the center-of-impact of the bullet strike
area. Do not change the lay of the gun or reticle. Keep the GPCH centered.
Step 4. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, release the gunners handles.
Step 5. Open the CCP door. Move the CCP power switch to the ON position.
Step 6. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, press the BORESIGHT push button; the push
button will illuminate.
Step 7. Move the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch up (U), down (D), left (L), or right (R), as
needed, to center the reticle aiming point to within 3 mils of the strike area.
Step 8. Press the ENTER push button. The BORESIGHT push button light will go out. The
boresight information is stored in the computer.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-105
Appendix A
Step 9. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, press the ZERO push button; the push button will
illuminate.
Note. If the reticle aiming point is not at the center of the bullet strike area, go to step 10. If the
aiming point is centered in the strike area, go to step 14.
z
z
z
z
Step 10. Move the RETICLE ADJUST toggle switch up (U), down (D), left (L), or right (R), as
needed to center the reticle aiming point in the strike area.
Step 11. Press the ENTER push button. The ZERO push button light will go out. The zero
information is stored in the computer. Repeat step 1 only, then go to step 12.
Step 12. Without disturbing the lay of the gun (keep the gunners handles centered), fire another
burst of 20 to 30 rounds.
Step 13. If the reticle aiming point is centered in the strike area, the coax machine gun is zeroed;
repeat step 9. Record the zero setting in the display, and go to step 14. If the reticle aiming point
is not centered in the strike area, repeat steps 9 through 13.
Note. Record the zero setting from the computer display.

z
z
z
Step 14. Press the ENTER push button. The ZERO push button light will go out. The zero
information is stored in the computer.
Step 15. Close and latch the CCP door.
Step 16. Clear the coaxial machine gun.
ZERO COMMANDERS WEAPON DAY TV SIGHT (CALIBER .50 THERMAL SIGHT/DAY TV

SYSTEM)
z
z
z
z

Step 2. Boresight commanders weapon.
Step 3. Load commanders weapon.
Step 4. Move the butterfly trigger safety until F can be seen.
WARNING
Gun will now fire and could injure or kill someone if butterfly
trigger on backplate is pushed.
Step 5. Alert crew on intercom by announcing Caliber .50.
WARNING
If button is pressed down with ARMED light lit, gun will fire and
could injure or kill someone.
A-106
Step 6. Lay 500 meter aiming point in commanders weapon sight (make sure you are in day TV
mode) on center of target 500 meters distant with manual controls.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 7. Set SAFE/ARMED switch to ARMED position then let go and make sure ARMED light
is lit.
Step 8. Fire a burst of 10-20 rounds by pressing button on CWS elevation crank handle. Release
button to cease firing.
Step 9. Look at beaten zone on target in relation to aiming point on sight reticle.
Step 10. Set SAFE/ARMED switch to SAFE (left position and then let go) and make sure
ARMED light is not lit.
Step 11. If aiming point in sight reticle is centered on beaten zone zeroing is complete. If
aiming point is not in center of beaten zone then go to step 12.
Step 12. Without moving machine gun or CWS sight, align aiming point reticle to center of
beaten zone as follows:
a. Make sure that CWS DCM is still ion DAY TV mode.
b. Hold MULTI-FUNCTION button on CWS DCM to left until menu is displayed on sight.
c. Using the MULTI-FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle down until indicator arrow is
pointing at BORESIGHT. Press the MULTI FUNCTION button on the right to select
BORESIGHT.
d. Using MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle up and/or down placing the
horizontal line of aiming point in the center of beaten zone.
e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle left and/or right placing the
vertical line of the aiming point in center of beaten zone. If reticle displacement displayed
in the CWS display is greater than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then move reticle until it is R 0.00 then
go to step 12f. If less than L 5.00 or R 5.00 then go to step 12i.
f. Loosen setscrew with a 9/64 inch socket head key to allow control of horizontal adjustment
control screw.
g. Adjust horizontal adjustment control screw with a screwdriver, and place vertical line of
aiming point in center of beaten zone.
i. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the day TV zero information and check that
BORESIGHTED SAVED is displayed in the CWS DCM.
Step 13. Repeat step 6 thru step 11 until aiming point on sight reticle is centered on beaten zone.
Step 14. Move butterfly trigger safety until S can be seen.
ZERO COMMANDERS WEAPON THERMAL SIGHT (CALIBER .50 THERMAL SIGHT/DAY TV

SYSTEM)
z
z
z
z

Step 2. Boresight commanders weapon.
Step 3. Load commanders weapon.
Step 4. Move the butterfly trigger safety until F can be seen.
WARNING
Gun will now fire and could injure or kill someone if butterfly
trigger on backplate is pushed.
Step 5. Alert crew on intercom by announcing Caliber .50.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-107
Appendix A
WARNING
If button is pressed down with ARMED light lit, gun will fire and
could injure or kill someone.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 6. Lay 500 meter aiming point in commanders weapon sight (make sure you are in thermal
sight mode) on center of target 500 meters distant with manual controls.
Step 7. Set SAFE/ARMED switch to ARMED position then let go and make sure ARMED light
is lit.
Step 8. Fire a burst of 10-20 rounds by pressing button on CWS elevation crank handle.
Release button to cease firing.
Step 9. Look at beaten zone on target in relation to aiming point on sight reticle.
Step 10. Set SAFE/ARMED switch to SAFE (left position and then let go) and make sure
ARMED light is not lit.
Step 11. If aiming point in sight reticle is centered on beaten zone zeroing is complete. If aiming
point is not in center of beaten zone then go to step 12.
Step 12. Without moving machine gun or CWS sight, align aiming point reticle to center of
beaten zone as follows:
a. Make sure that CWS DCM is still ion DAY TV mode.
pointing at BORESIGHT. Press the MULTI FUNCTION button on the right to select
BORESIGHT.
vertical line of aiming point in the center of beaten zone.
e. Using the MULTI FUNCTION button on CWS DCM toggle up and/or down placing the
horizontal line of the aiming point in center of beaten zone. If reticle displacement
f. Loosen the four bolts on the CWS equilibrator bracket with 9/16 inch socket. Adjust cam
bolt with a 7/16 inch socket placing horizontal line of aiming point in center of beaten
zone.
g. Tighten the four bolts on the CWS equilibrator bracket with a 9/16 inch socket. Repeat
steps 12d and 12e.
h. Press the E-ZOOM button to save the thermal sight zero information and check that
BORESIGHT SAVED is displayed in CWS DCM.
Step 13. Repeat step 6 thru step 11 until aiming point on sight reticle is centered on beaten zone.
Step 14. Move butterfly trigger safety until S can be seen.
M1A2 SEP PROCEDURES

z
z
z
z
z
z
A-108
Step 1. Sight through the GPS eyepiece. Using the gunners handles, lay the reticle aiming point
on the target.
Step 2. Lase on the target, or manually input 800 meters range into the computer.
Step 3. Fire a burst of 20 to 30 rounds. Do not change the lay of the gun or reticle. Keep the
gunners handle centered.
Step 4. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, release the gunners handles.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
Step 7. Move the four-way switch on the GCDP (up, down, left, or right) as needed to center the
reticle aiming point to within 3 mils of the strike area.
Step 8. Press the ENT key on the keypad. The boresight information is now stored in the
computer.
Step 9. Press the ZERO push button on the ADJUST menu.
Note. If the reticle aiming point is not at the center of the bullet strike area, go on to step 10. If
the aiming point is centered in the strike area, go to step 14.
z
z
z
z
Step 10. Move the four-way switch on the GCDP (up, down, left, or right), as needed to center
the reticle aiming point in the strike area.
Step 11. Press the ENT key on the keypad. The zero information is now stored; repeat step 1
only.
Step 12. Without disturbing the lay of the gun (keep the gunners handles centered), fire another
burst of 20 to 30 rounds.
Step 13. If the reticle aiming point is centered in the strike area, the coaxial machine gun is
zeroed; repeat step 9. Record the ZERO setting on the ZERO menu, and go to step 14. If the
reticle aiming point is not centered in the strike area, repeat steps 9 through 13.
Note. Record the ZERO setting from the ZERO menu.

z
z
Step 14. Press the ENT key on the keypad. Press the RETURN push button on the ZERO menu
two times to return to the MAIN MENU.
Step 15. Clear the coaxial machine gun.
SECTION VI POST-FIRE CHECKS

A-97. After firing, the crew clears all weapon systems and removes all ammunition residue from the
exterior of the vehicle. Leaders verify that crews clear all weapon systems IAW DA PAM 385-63. On
training ranges, range safety officers verify that crews have cleared all weapon systems. Post-fire checks
prevent many accidents.
DANGER
AFTER FIRING, ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR.
SECTION VII ABRAMS WEAPONS SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS

A-98. Malfunctions cost a lot of firing time on tank ranges. Crew error causes most malfunctions. Crews
must know the possible reasons for a typical malfunction to occur, this way they can take the necessary
steps to correct the malfunction(s) and continue with training. As a precaution, the crew performs standard
misfire procedures before correcting any error.
DANGER
WHEN A MALFUNCTION OCCURS, ALWAYS
PERFORM MISFIRE PROCEDURES BEFORE TAKING
ANY OTHER CORRECTIVE ACTION.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-109
Appendix A
DANGER
WAIT 15 MINUTES BEFORE UNLOADING A MAIN GUN
ROUND THAT HAS MISFIRED TO PREVENT A
HANGFIRE. A HANGFIRE OF THE ROUND COULD
KILL OR SERIOUSLY INJURE CREW MEMBER.
MAIN GUN MALFUNCTION

A-99. Tank main gun malfunctions typically fall into three main categoriesmain gun misfires; aft caps
malfunctions; and breech malfunctions.
z
If the main gun fails to fire
Conduct misfire procedures.
If the round doesnt fire wait 15 minutes and clear the main gun.
Conduct a firing circuit check.
If firing circuit test passes, mark the misfired round as defective and turn it in to the
ammunition NCO when complete with your run.
z
If aft caps from the rounds are hanging up in the aft cap deflector
Check the aft cap deflector for missing/loose/broken parts.
Check that the loader is not disarming the main gun until the gun has returned fully into
battery after firing.
Manually check the operation of the aft cap deflector.

z
If the breach is not opening or closing properly
Manually operate the breech:
Does it open smoothly?
Does it lock in the open position?
Is the breech/breechblock fouled with dust/propellant residue?
Does the breech close automatically?
Adjust the breech operating cam IAW the TM-10 (breeches that dont lock open after firing
typically have the cam speed set too fast).
Check the cam operation by arming the main gun and manually opening the breech. If the
cam tension is properly set the cam will now be in the path of the lug on the breech
operating lever (which automatically opens the gun using the same operating shaft as is
used on the other side of the breech for manual opening).
M240 7.62-MM COAXIAL MACHINE GUN MALFUNCTION

A-100. If none of the following steps corrects the malfunction, notify the master gunner or maintenance
personnel.
z
If the bolt did not go forward, check the following:
z
Is the gun select switch in the COAX position?
z
Is the coaxial machine gun in the F position?
z
Does the coax solenoid move when the triggers are pulled?
z
Is the coax solenoid properly adjusted?
z
If the bolt did go forward, check the following:
z
Is the ammunition belt seated in the feed tray?
z
Is there a round or casing stuck in the chamber?
z
Is the machine gun out of ammunition?
z
Is the coax spent case can full?
A-110
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
Is the coax chute flush with the M240 feed tray cover?
Is the ammunition weight in the coax storage preventing the weapon from feeding?
M2 HB CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN MALFUNCTION

A-101. If none of the following steps corrects the malfunction, notify the master gunner or maintenance
personnel.
z
Is the CWS armed (M1A1)?
z
Is the weapon armed?
z
Does the solenoid move and is it properly adjusted on the butterfly (M1A1)?
z
Does the butterfly trigger bar engage the trigger (M1A2 SEP)?
z
Check for ruptured/deformed cartridges on turret roof.
z
Clear the weapon.
z
Check the headspace and timing.
z
Check that the ammunition is aligned in links and not binding in the feed tray.
M250/M257 SMOKE GRENADES MALFUNCTION

A-102. When smoke grenades fail to launch, perform immediate action, then
z
Use the vehicle intercom system to tell the driver to move the vehicle to a safe area. Make sure
the driver moves it at least 125 meters from the nearest vehicle, building, person, or equipment.
z
Fire the smoke grenades.
z
Look for the smoke through the periscopes.
z
Move the turret power switch to OFF.
z
Move the master power switch to OFF.
z
Check the smoke grenade launcher for misfired smoke grenades.
z
Remove the smoke grenades from the side where the misfire occurred.
z
Move the smoke grenades to a well-marked spot at least 200 meters from the nearest vehicle,
person, or equipment.
z
Notify the chain of command of the exact location, type, and number of smoke grenades that
malfunctioned.
z
Notify unit maintenance that the M250/M257 smoke grenade launchers on the vehicle
malfunctioned.
COMMUNICATIONS MALFUNCTION
A-103. If communications are lost, check the following:
z
Is the master control station power light on?
z
Are the radio cable connections loose?
z
Has BIT failed on the master control station?
z
Is the CVC cord disconnected?
z
Does the VIC1 FBCB2 display a green status?
SECTION VIII ERROR SOURCES

A-104. The greater the range, the lower the probability of hit. This means that, as the range to the target
increases, expectations of first-round hits decrease. Many other factors affect firing accuracy. The system
and environmental and human factors involved in any target engagement comprise what is called the tank
gun error budget. Error budget is defined as the influence of the hardware, environmental conditions and
human factors that affect accuracy and consistency. The three major categories of the error budget are:
fixed biases, variable biases, and random errors. Each error source has varying effects on firing accuracy.
The effect of these errors may be significant when a number of error sources act on the fire control system
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-111
Appendix A
at the same time. Also, the effect of these error sources is magnified when engaging targets at long ranges.
The error sources listed below are not all inclusive; several additional sources of error exist.
FIXED BIASES
A-105. Fixed biases are error sources induced by ammunition, weapon, and fire control system design and
manufacturer that at any given range will cause the ammunition to miss the desired aiming point in a
constant direction. Because they are fixed or built-in, these error sources are predictable and can be
compensated.
SYSTEM PARALLAX
A-106. System parallax is the vertical and horizontal distance between the center line of the main gun and
the optical axis of the sights. When the gun and sights are boresighted, all lines of sight converge at the
boresight range. At ranges less than or greater than the boresight range, the lines of sight differ. Normally,
the ballistic computer compensates for system parallax in the GPS and CITV; a correction is determined
and incorporated into the solution sent to the GPS (daylight or thermal channel) and the CITV. With the
GAS, it is only eliminated at the range boresighted.
BALLISTIC DRIFT
A-107. Drift, the lateral departure of spin-stabilized ammunition from the gun-target line, is the product of
air resistance and projectile spin. Projectiles will drift in the same direction as the spin caused by the rifling
of the main gun. The M68 gun rifling has a uniform right-hand twist; therefore, all spin-stabilized
ammunition fired from it will drift to the right. The computer offsets drift in the ballistic solution. When
firing from the GAS, the ballistic reticles compensate for drift. The current combat sabot, HEAT-T, and
MPAT rounds (for the M1A1, M1A2, and M1A2 SEP tanks) are fin-stabilized and not affected by drift.
The computer takes this into account when the correct ammunition sub-designation is entered into the
computer.
Note. The ballistic drift mentioned above is not to be confused with emergency or normal mode
drift.
MEAN JUMP
A-108. Mean jump is the average difference between the actual impact of a group of rounds fired over
many occasions and the intended strike of those rounds, given that all inputs to the FCS are correct or
within tolerance. As a fixed bias, mean jump error is corrected by entering a CCF or SCF as either a fleet
zero or a discreet computer correction factor.
VARIABLE BIASES
A-109. Variable biases are error sources that remain fairly constant when firing one type of ammunition at
a particular target and a given range, but can change considerably from one engagement to the next.
BORESIGHT/BORESIGHT RETENTION
A-110. Initial boresight errors can occur due to tolerances in the muzzle boresight device, round-off errors
in splitting means, or if the MBD operator and gunner are not sighting on exactly the same target aiming
point. Once an initial boresight is established, errors can occur when the spatial relationship between the
end of the tube and the GPS changes. Two primary causes are gun tube droop or turret deformation (due to
the sun or wind, the turret heats up unevenly and changes the initial alignment). Boresight retention can
also be affected by inaccuracies in performing an MRS update.
A-111. Although initial boresight/boresight retention errors are some of the largest error sources, they are
more easily controlled or corrected by the crew.
A-112
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CANT (TRUNNION TILT)

A-112. Cant occurs when the tank is on uneven ground and one gun trunnion is higher than the other.
When superelevation is applied to the gun, it is applied vertically to an imaginary perpendicular line drawn
between the gun trunnions. When cant is present, superelevation is applied at an angle to the vertical plane,
inducing range and deflection errors. When firing from a stationary tank (M1A1), cant data is supplied to
the computer from the cant unit, and the ballistic solution includes a reticle adjustment to compensate for
cant. On the M1A2/M1A2 SEP, cant is also supplied from the ballistic computer, the hull-turret position
sensor (HTPS), and the POS/NAV unit during offensive posture, and this is called dynamic cant.
CROSSWIND
A-113. Air turbulence (wind) moving laterally to the gun-target line will cause the projectile to deviate
from the gun-target line. The effect of crosswind on any round other than APFSDS-T and APCSDS-T is
significant, regardless of engagement range. The crosswind sensor on the tank measures crosswind at the
rear of the turret and feeds this data to the computer. The computer calculates a correction based on the
assumption that this crosswind is constant all the way to the target. This correction is incorporated into the
ballistic solution sent to the reticle azimuth drive, and is updated continuously.
FIRE CONTROL
A-114. Errors can be induced by certain stresses placed on the fire control system. The fire control system
cannot compensate for most of these stresses, such as design tolerances, metal fatigue, and vehicle
vibrations. however, it can compensate for the following factors:
A-115. Muzzle displacement, or thermal bending is caused by uneven heat distribution along the gun tube.
Gun tube droop is caused by gravity acting on the gun, and can disturb the gun-sight relationship
established through boresighting. The thermal shroud reduces muzzle displacement caused by uneven heat
distribution, but does nothing about the gravitational effect. Frequent boresighting/MRS updates will
reduce the effect of muzzle displacement by reestablishing the gun-sight relationship.
AIR DENSITY
A-116. Air density is the weight of a certain volume of air which consists of the amount of water vapor in
the air, air temperature, and barometric pressure. Air density affects the ballistic characteristics of the
projectile. Air density varies with temperature and altitude. Since the computer accepts data on barometric
pressure and temperature, it compensates for air density.
BALLISTIC SOLUTION
A-117. An incorrect ballistic solution may be computed for various reasons: incorrect ammunition
selected, incorrect range determined, an unknown failure of an automatic input, or an unknown incorrect
computer correction factor. To ensure the computer receives the correct information, the gunner should
double check the ammunition selected on the AMMUNITION SELECT switch or push button after the
loader announces UP. The TC must evaluate the range before firing. If an F appears in the symbology,
and a manual self-test (or FCS test on the M1A2/M1A2 SEP) reveals no primary direct-fire control failure,
a manual self-test (or FCS test on the M1A2/M1A2 SEP) should be performed after every engagement
until turret mechanics can resolve the problem. The crew can detect incorrect ballistic solutions by
conducting special gunnery checks (see operators manual, Appendix F). Conducting the special gunnery
checks requires an M1A1 gunners quadrant. (See pages A-99 through A-101 for the tolerance of the
M1A1 gunners quadrant). They can also detect incorrect ballistic solutions by performing the AACs using
a solution board.
MUZZLE VELOCITY VARIATION

A-118. Changes in the muzzle velocity of the projectile are due to the ammunition or weapon. The
following factors will cause a vertical deviation in the strike of a round:
z
Tube wear.
z
Temperature of the propellant.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-113
Appendix A
Change of loading density.

Tube length.
z
Loss of muzzle velocity when employing the canister round in cold weather.
A-119. Gun tube wear results in lowered muzzle velocity and increased dispersion. When firing from the
GAS, there is no way to compensate for gun tube wear. Gun tube wear is not determined, nor is data input
for the M1A1, M1A2, or the M1A2 SEP.
z
z
RANGE ESTIMATION
A-120. Range estimation errors are errors associated with incorrect determination of a range to a specific
target. Errors associated with range determination are primarily a training problem (see page A-118,
Section IX, M1 Series Specific Range Determination).
OPTICAL PATH BENDING

A-121. The apparent illusion of target displacement is commonly called refraction. Under certain light and
environmental conditions, the path of light (line of sight) may not travel in a straight line. Refraction may
cause problems for tank crews attempting engagements at ranges beyond 1,500 meters. Refraction may
occur under the following conditions:
z
Dayclear sky, flat terrain, winds less than 10 miles per hour (see Figure A-34).
z
Nightclear sky, flat terrain, winds less than 4 miles per hour (see Figure A-35).
Note. Any time heat shimmer is present, refraction may also be present.
A-122. Refraction makes the target appear lower during the day; the sight picture, though it appears center
of visible mass to the gunner, is actually below the target. The result of this may be a short round. At night,
the effects are opposite and may result in an over round.
Note. The laser beam will refract with other light rays and still hit the desired target.
A-123. The most effective measure available to the crew to minimize refraction is an elevated firing
position. A position at least ten meters above intervening terrain will generally negate any effects. When a
crew operating under conditions favorable to refraction misses short during daylight and over during night
with their first round (an elevated position is not available), they should apply the following adjustment:
z
Day. Adjust the sight picture up one-half target form (top of target) (see Figure A-34).
z
Night. Adjust the sight picture down one-half target form (bottom of target) (see Figure A-35).
Note. Under normal conditions, crews do not need to make a correction for refraction at ranges
less than 1,500 meters.
A-124. Boresight does not correct refraction, but crews must make sure that all before-operation checks
and boresighting procedures are done correctly. When a crew is missing targets under these conditions, the
cause may be refraction and not crew error or loss of boresight due to improper procedures.
A-114
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-34. Day refraction (exaggerated view)
Figure A-35. Night refraction (exaggerated view)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-115
Appendix A
VARIABLE JUMP
A-125. Variable jump is the average difference between actual impacts for a particular occasion and the
intended strike of those rounds, given all inputs to the fire control system are correct or within tolerance.
Variable jump may be corrected using standard sight adjustments after subsequent round misses.
RANDOM ERRORS
A-126. Random error sources are those that vary for each round fired. They cannot be predicted from one
round to the next, nor can the crew compensate for them. The TC and gunner must be aware of random
errors and not be unduly influenced by them when they occur.
ROUND-TO-ROUND DISPERSION
A-127. With a perfect gun and ammunition firing under ideal conditions, all rounds would hit the same
spot. In reality, there is a spread of shots around a central point. The area into which these shots fall is
called the dispersion zone. There is no way the crew can compensate for dispersion, but they should be
aware of its effects. As the range to the target increases, so does the size of the dispersion zone. Factors
that may cause dispersion are
z
Crosswinds.
z
Thermal bending.
z
Lot numbers.
A-128. Although there are no compensations for round-to-round dispersion, a re-lay and reengage
technique may achieve a target hit if the round misses by only a slight amount.
GUNNER LAY ERROR

A-129. Gunner lay error is caused when the gunner fails to make a correct lay to the target aiming point
while either boresighting or engaging targets. It is a significant error source and primarily a training
problem. To reduce this error, each gunner must be trained to make his final lay to the correct aiming point,
ending his lay in elevation. This will minimize the effects of gunner lay error. Gunner lay errors are
influenced by the following:
z
Inability to identify the center of the target.
z
Inability to properly superimpose the reticle onto the center of the target.
z
Firing too quickly due to the criticality of time.
z
Optical path bending.
z
Parallax.
SECTION IX M1 SERIES SPECIFIC RANGE DETERMINATION
RANGE DETERMINATION
A-130. Range determination significantly affects target engagement. Errors in range determination cause
more first round misses than errors in deflection. Range errors that cause the first round to go over the
target are particularly serious because observing and adjusting from that round is difficult. Range
determination can be broken down into three broad categoriesimmediate range determination, immediate
range estimation, and deliberate range determination.
IMMEDIATE RANGE DETERMINATION

A-131. Immediate methods of range determination afford the combat crew the most reliable determination
of the range to a given target. The preferred method of immediate range determination is the LRF or
eyesafe laser range finder (ELRF) on those vehicles so equipped. The other methods of immediate range
determination all rely on crew members employing the properties of the sighting systems of their vehicles,
and are preferred to other methods of range determination/estimation. Below are the immediate range
determination methods for the Abrams tank.
A-116
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Abrams Tank Immediate Range Determination

M1A1/M1A2 SEP Laser Range Finder
A-132. The preferred method of range determination on the Abrams tank is the LRF/ELRF. The LRF can
range to targets located 200 to 7,990 meters from the tank. If the range to the target is between 200 meters
and 4,000 meters (5,000 meters on the M1A2 SEP), the range is automatically induced into the fire control
system for a ballistic solution and the range will appear in the GPS symbology. Various conditions can
cause effective use of the LRF to be lost
z
Internal LRF failure.
z
Vehicle failure.
z
Environmental conditions (fog, falling snow, heavy rain).
z
Man-made or battlefield obscurants (smoke).
z
Multiple returns from a target smaller than the LRF beam width with obstructions to the front
and/or rear of the target.
A-133. Abrams gunners and TCs must be familiar with all of the range determination tools that their
system offers them to cope with loss of effective use of the LRF.
M1A2 SEP Commanders Independent Thermal Viewer Stadia Reticle
A-134. The stadia reticle is displayed when the NFOV is selected using the FOV button on the CCHA, the
CITV is in SEARCH mode, and the range/stadia reticle switch is pressed. The stadia reticle can be used to
determine the approximate range to tank-height targets when the LRF is inoperable, or the TC wishes to
avoid traversing the turret to align the LRF. Range is determined by matching the apparent height of the
target with the stadia reticle, which can be made smaller or larger by moving the range/stadia reticle
switch.
z
The range/stadia reticle switch will only operate the stadia reticle when the CITV is in a nonGUN LOS state or in SEARCH mode.
z
The stadia reticle will only appear when in NFOV.
z
There are 11 different reticle sizes that provide ranges from 500 meters to 3,630 meters.
z
Moving the range/stadia reticle switch backward will increase the size of the stadia reticle.
Moving the range/stadia reticle switch forward will decrease the size of the stadia reticle.
z
The stadia reticle will disappear from view after 10 seconds if the range/stadia reticle switch is
not used. The last range input will remain displayed.
z
The stadia reticle is most accurate when used with tank-height targets. Ranges to targets that are
of different heights will be inaccurate.
z
When the stadia reticle is used, the range will be input into the fire control system once the
DESIGNATE button is pushed.
A-135. To determine the range to a full-height target, move the range/stadia reticle switch forward or
backward until the bottom index line rests on the bottom of the target and the top index line rests on the top
of the target. The approximate range is displayed on the CITV display.
A-136. To determine the range to a hull-down target, move the range/stadia reticle switch forward or
backward until the bottom center index line rests on the bottom of the target and the top center index line
rests on the top of the target. The approximate range is displayed on the CITV display (see Figure A-36).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-117
Appendix A
Figure A-36. CITV stadia reticle

Gunners Auxiliary Sight Stadia Reticle
A-137. On the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP, the stadia reticle pattern is included on both GAS reticles. If the
LRF is inoperative, the stadia reticle may be used to determine the range to a target. The pattern has a base
line and a series of range lines for full-height targets, and a series of dots for ranging at a target in hull
defilade (see Figure A-37). The GAS stadia reticle is designed to permit gunners to determine range to the
target if other, more precise, ranging methods are not available. The full-size portion of the reticle is
designed for a 2.30-meter-high target, while the turret portion is for a 0.90-meter-high target (see Figure A38a and Figure A-38b). With practice, gunners using the stadia reticle can consistently determine the range
to within 100 meters.
Figure A-37. GAS stadia reticle
A-118
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-38a. GAS stadia reticle, displaying target
Figure A-38b. GAS stadia reticle, displaying target (continued)

Reticle Relationship Method
A-138. This method is a combination of the range estimation and engagement technique. It provides the
TC a rapid, accurate alternate method of determining range to a target and successfully engaging the target.
The reticle relationship method is based on an average enemy tank with the following dimensions.
z
Width 3.8 meters.
z
Height 2.2 meters.
z
Length 6.9 meters.
A-139. When the reticle of either the GPS or GAS is superimposed over the enemy tank, the properly
trained gunner or TC can rapidly determine if the target is within a pre-selected battlesight range, or if
further range determination is required. The dimensions of the reticles are shown in Figures A-39 through
Figure A-44. The GPS and GAS reticles can also be used to deliberately determine range using the milrelationship method discussed later in this chapter.
A-140. Gunners should also be trained to use the SABOT/STAFF and MPAT/HEAT reticles on the
M1A1 and M1A2 SEP GAS to determine range. Since there is no vertical mil value established for these
reticles, using a vertical measurement is not recommended.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-119
Appendix A
A-141. GPS (Day Channel). The GPS has a dual power capabilitya wide-angle mode (3X magnification
with a 16.5-degree field of view) for acquisition and a high magnification mode (10X magnification with a
6.5-degree field of view) for target identification and engagements. This reticle may also be used to assist
in range determination. Figure A-39 shows the mil values of the GPS reticle for range (vertical line) and
lead (horizontal line).
Figure A-39. Gunners primary sight (daylight reticle)

A-142. GPS (Thermal Channel). The thermal electronics unit provides reticle and display symbols
similar to those of daylight optics. The gunner can select the polarity of the TIS image to help interpret
thermal images. Hot areas in the field of view can be displayed as either white hot or black hot. Crew
members familiar with daylight ranging techniques for the Abrams may be confused by incorrect range
readouts even though the target is clearly visible using the TIS. Incorrect readouts may occur because the
spectrum of particle sizes that can obscure or block the TIS differs from that which affects LRF or daylight
optics. The TIS may be able to see through screening smoke, dust, or camouflage; however, these same
factors can degrade LRF accuracy. Therefore, the tank crew should train on visual range estimation using
the TIS image alone and on manually indexing the range in the computer.
A-143. Forward-Looking Infrared (Thermal Channel). The 2d Gen FLIR (thermal channel) on the
M1A2 SEP provides the crew the ability to detect, recognize, and identify targets at greater ranges. The 2d
Gen FLIR has 3X, 6X, 13X, 25X, and 50X magnification. The 25X and 50X are digital enhancements of
the 13X picture. The 2d Gen FLIR allows the crew to use both the GPS daylight and thermal channels
simultaneously, although they may choose to have the thermal scene projected into the GPS sight to engage
targets. This is totally crew choice, and crews that train to engage targets using the binocular sight should
be able to do so. Crews should be able to detect both hot and cold targets by using the thermal binocular
sight and the GPS daylight channel simultaneously during daylight operations.
A-144. GPS Extension (GPSE). The GPSE provides the TC the same sight picture and symbology
display the gunner receives. However, on an M1A2 SEP, if the gunner is using the GPS daylight channel
and the binocular thermal sight simultaneously, the TC will only be able to see the GPS daylight in his
extension.
A-145. GAS. The GAS is an articulated telescope, coaxially mounted to the main gun. The M1A1 and
M1A2 SEP include illuminated ballistic reticles for KE/STAFF and MPAT/HEAT ammunition. The GAS
offers 8X magnification with an 8-degree field of view. It is filtered to protect the gunners vision from
laser reflections (see Figure A-40 through Figure A-43).
A-120
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-40. Abrams gunners auxiliary

sight reticles (MPAT/HEAT)
Figure A-41. Abrams gunners auxiliary sight

reticles (MPAT/HEAT) lead pattern
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-121
Appendix A
Figure A-42. Abrams gunners auxiliary sight

reticles (KE/STAFF) example
Figure A-43. Abrams gunners auxiliary sight reticles (KE/STAFF)
A-122
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
A-146. CWS. The CWS includes a 3X, fixed-focus periscope. This periscope contains a ballistic reticle
graduated for caliber .50 ammunition out to a range of 1,800 meters. The sight can be oriented
independently of the turret by power or manual rotation of the CWS and by elevating or depressing the
TCs machine gun. If the M240 machine gun is mounted in the CWS, there is an aiming data chart for the
TC on the side of the periscope (see Figure A-44).
Figure A-44. Commanders weapon station sight reticle

Tank Commanders Machine Gun Method
A-147. The TCs machine gun with sight reticle gradation can be used to determine range out to 1,800
meters (see Figure A-45). The TCs machine gun allows him to suppress the target and determine range at
the same time. To aid the gunner in target identification and to reduce engagement time, the CWS should
be aligned with the main gun. The disadvantage of this method is that the tanks position will be disclosed.
(This method cannot be used on the M1A2 or M1A2 SEP.)
A-148. *To use this method, the TC initiates the fire command (for example, GUNNER HEAT
ANTITANK, CALIBER FIFTY RANGING). The TC places his sight reticle aiming point on the
target, and fires. He then observes the tracers and adjusts their impact until they strike the target. Once the
tracers impact on, or near, the target, the TC reads the corresponding aiming point of the reticle and
announces the range to the gunner, (for example, ONE EIGHT HUNDRED or INDEX ONE EIGHT
HUNDRED) followed by the execution element (FIRE).
*Note. If the tank is in a turret-down defensive position, it should move to a hull-down position;
the commands DRIVER MOVE OUT and DRIVER STOP must be issued before the
execution command.
A-149. The TCs initial aiming point should correspond with the battlesight range for the ammunition
announced in the fire command. By applying the battlesight range to the TCs sight, if the initial burst is
observed over the target, the TC can engage immediately by announcing the battlesight range.
DELIBERATE RANGE DETERMINATION

A-150. The mil relation may be used in deliberate range determination. When using the mil relation
method the crew must use binoculars or a sight system with a calibrated mil-scale to measure the target.
A-151. The basis of the mil relation method is that one mil or equals a width (or height) of 1 meter at a
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
A-123
Appendix A
(height) between the sides remains constant. Figure A-45 shows the constant relationship as the angle
A-152. Standard Army measurements are completed and expressed in the metric system. Other units of
Figure A-45. Constant mil-angle relationship

A-153. To use this method, the crew member must know the width, height, and length of the target. He
determines the known dimension with the binoculars mil scale or a nonballistic sight reticle, substitutes
the mil relation, and computes the range (see Table A-21). When measuring the frontal width, he measures
measures the entire vehicle (see Figure A-46). Accuracy of this method depends on knowing the target
dimensions and the commanders ability to make precise measurements with binoculars or the sight reticle.
A-154. Using Table A-21 and by achieving proper vehicle identification, a crew member can properly
determine the standard mil size of the vehicle. This can be used into the calculation of the mil relationship
method of range determination. Figure A-46 through Figure A-51 shows the frontal and flank view of a
BMP-2 and where the information in the table applies.
Table A-21. Mil relation for various targets
BMP-2
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 6.75 meters
1400
1500
1700
1900
2300
2700
3400
4500
6800
Front 3.0 meters
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
1500
2000
3000
Height 2.3 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 5.5 meters
1100
1200
1400
1600
1800
2200
2800
3700
5500
Front 2.35 meters
500
500
600
700
800
1000
1200
1600
2400
Height 2.3 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
BRDM-2
HAVOK
A-124
Target Width (mils)
22.5
20
17.5
15
12.5
10
7.5
2.5
Flank 17.01 meters
800
900
1000
1100
1400
1700
2300
3400
6804
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Front 4.81 meters
1000
1100
1200
1400
1600
1900
2400
3200
4800
Height 3.82 meters
800
800
1000
1100
1300
1500
1900
2500
3800
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
HIND-D HELICOPTER
Target Width (mils)
22.5
20
17.5
15
12.5
10
7.5
2.5
Flank 17.25 meters
800
900
1000
1200
1400
1700
2300
3500
6900
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Height 3.9 meters
800
900
1000
1100
1300
1600
2000
2600
3900
Front 6.9 meters
1400
1500
1700
2000
2300
2800
3500
4600
6900
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 7.1 meters
1300
1500
1700
1900
2200
2700
3400
4500
6700
Front 3.4 meters
700
800
900
1000
1100
1400
1700
2300
3400
Height 2.3 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 7.0 meters
1400
1600
1800
2000
2300
2800
3500
4700
7000
Front 3.6 meters
700
800
900
1000
1100
1400
1700
2300
3400
Height 2.2 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 6.9 meters
1400
1500
1700
2000
2300
2800
3500
4600
6900
Front 3.8 meters
800
900
1000
1100
1300
1500
1900
2500
3800
Height 2.2 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
T-72 TANK
T-80 TANK
T-90 TANK
Note. This table is a quick reference for determining the range of widely sold
vehicles at various ranges. The ranges have been rounded-off to the nearest
hundredth.
Figure A-46. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-125
Appendix A
Figure A-47. Flank BMP-2 dimensions
Figure A-48. Frontal Hind-D dimensions
A-126
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-49. Flank Hind-D dimensions
Figure A-50. Frontal T-72 dimensions
Figure A-51. Flank T-72 dimensions
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-127
Appendix A
A-155. Since the relationship of the target width in mils ( and meters (W) is constant at varying
distances, accurate range determination is possible. The mil relation holds true whether the W factor is
width, height, or length. Therefore, the range can be determined provided the target dimensions are known.
Target height may be the most consistent measurement, because length and width are changing as targets
move on the battlefield.
A-156. There are two WORM formulas beneficial to crew members that can be used to determine
which formula will be used based on known information gathered (see Figure A-52).
A-157. The first formula should be used to determine range. This formula will need both the width and
mil value of the vehicle.
Figure A-52. Measuring width with binoculars

Example: Step 1. The BMP is 6.75 meters long (W). Using binoculars, the commander determines
that the BMP measures 10 mils in length (see Figure A-53).
Step 2. The individual determining range substitutes known information into the formula.
or
Step 3. Since R is expressed in thousands of meters, multiply by 1,000; and round off to
the nearest tenth. For example: 0.675=0.7 so 0.7 x 1,000 = 700 meters, the range to the
BMP.
A-128
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
A-158. The second formula is used to determine the width (width, length, height) of an object. This is
important to determine the width of a bridge for example, that has not been previously identified. The
formula carries the same basic concept as the first formula for determining range. The operator will need to
know the range to the target and the mil size.
Example: Step 1. The gunner has determined that the range to a bridge is 1,200 meters. The vehicle
commander, looking through his binoculars, determined the mil value to be 2.5 mils.
or
Maps/Digital Maps Method

A-159. The vehicle crew must have a map to navigate. They must constantly know where they are and
where they are going. (The [precision lightweight GPS receiver] PLGR or any other GPS navigational
system will not eliminate the need for maps.) The vehicle crew can also use the map to determine range.
Besides computing distances on a traditional map, special features on the FBCB2 allow the crew to plot
points on the digital map and find the distance between them. A map also allows them to determine the best
battlecarry range setting for the terrain and enemy situation and to adjust the battlecarry range when the
situation changes.
z
capability to determine range rapidly when contact is made.
z
TRPs are used as both direct and indirect fire control measures. These are entered in the sector
sketch for the vehicle commander to control his fires and ensure that his reports of enemy
sightings are accurate. Since the range to each TRP is known, this will assist in range
determination.
Known Range (Range/Sketch Cards) Method

A-160. The primary use of the range or sketch card is to assist the crew in engaging targets during limited
visibility or when effective use of the LRF has been lost. The vehicle commander may also use the range or
sketch card to assist in determining range, since range data is recorded on the card. The range to a
previous target engagement is also classified as a known range.
Adjacent Vehicle Method

A-161. Range information can be obtained from an adjacent vehicle that has an operable LRF. If the
vehicle providing the range data is relatively close (lateral distance) to the receiving vehicle, then it will be
at the same range from the target.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-129
Appendix A
Flash-To-Bang Method
A-162. Sound travels through the air at a fairly constant speed, about 330 meters (approximately 1,100
feet) per second. This makes it easy to estimate range, if you can see and hear the action. For example,
when you see the flash or smoke of a weapon, or the dust it raises, immediately start counting at a rate of
one count per second. When you hear the report of the weapon, stop and multiply the number you were
counting when you heard the report by the constant 330. This will be the range to the weapon in meters. If
you stop on the number 3, the range is about 990 meters.
A-163. Practice timing the speed of your count. The best way to do this is to practice with pyrotechnics
fired at known distances. If this is not possible, have someone time you while you count; start over when
the count reaches a number higher than 10. Counting numbers such as 12 and 13 will throw your timing
off. With practice, you can estimate range more accurately with this method than by eye alone.
SECTION X TANK AMMUNITION STOWAGE PLAN

A-164. The ammunition stowage plan for all tanks within the HBCT is part of the unit SOP. The stowage
plan should include the location of all ammunition authorized for the basic load, by type and number of
rounds. During darkness, when lights inside the turret will reduce the crews night vision or give away the
tanks position, a standardized stowage plan will help the loader rapidly locate the ammunition announced
in the initial fire command. The stowage plan also helps the crew keep track of the number of rounds (by
type) that have been fired (see Figure A-53 and A-54).
A-165. Crew members must ensure that only the KE or canister rounds are stowed in the upper and outer
tubes in the ammunition racks. Stowage of chemical energy rounds in these tubes can result in injury or
death if the rounds explode in the rack.
A-130
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-53. Ammunition stowage plan, 16 and 18 round racks
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-131
Appendix A
Figure A-54. Ammunition stowage plan, 17 round rack
A-132
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SECTION XI HISTORICAL RECORDS
GENERAL INFORMATION
A-166. Historical records are kept on specific items of equipment. They show the required information
and events in the life of the equipment. These records must be controlled and kept safe from loss or
damage. These records give commanders information on equipment transfers, gains, losses, usage,
modifications, and firing data. Historical records may be sent on dispatch, however these forms are
normally sent on dispatch only when they will be needed during the dispatch. Commanders and master
gunners will consolidate historical records in one or more binders. Historical records will always be filled
out in ink (blue or black) or typed, unless specific instructions for the form tell you to use pencil.
ELECTRONIC DA FORM 2408-4

A-167. The electronic 2408-4 is the preferred method for recording all firing and nonfiring data for tank,
artillery, and mortar tubes and is maintained by the company or troop master gunner. The electronic gun
card can be accessed from the Army Electronic Product Support home page at
https://aeps.ria.army.mil/aepspublic.cfm. The electronic 2408-4, used with TB 750-231 and TM 9-1000202-14, provides commanders with an estimated remaining life of the gun tube, tube serial number, cannon
serial number (breech ring), and the weapon on which they are mounted. The electronic 2408-4 allows the
same data to be recorded online on a real time data base system. Use of the electronic 2408-4 negates the
requirement to mail the completed 2408-4 to TACOM, Rock Island Arsenal, as outlined in DA PAM 7508. This form is used to figure the total equivalent full charge (EFC) for the rounds fired. The electronic
2408-4 calculates EFC and remaining life of the tube. TCs can use a second DA Form 2408-4 solely to
note zeroing and boresight information on the M1A1/A2. The DA Form 2408-4 and electronic form is used
to enter non-firing data such as borescope and pull over gauge readings.
A-168. A hard copy of DA Form 2408-4 is maintained with the gun, cannon, or mortar tube for
operational purposes (when in use); to document rounds fired, to keep up with services pulled on a tube or
capture other periodic maintenance inspections or actions taken. The commander maintains hard copies of
DA Form 2408-4 in a logbook binder for the purpose of keeping a working copy for dispatch, for firing or
maintenance. The permanent record is entered into the electronic site by the master gunner each occasion
the tube is fired or a non-firing action is performed. A hard copy may be printed from the electronic
database as necessary. If historical information is needed from a DA Form 2408-4, it may be accessed from
the Army Electronic Product Support (AEPS) database to obtain firing and non-firing data from previously
submitted information. If the information needed cannot be found, an e-mail is sent to tacom-ri-gun-cardarmor@ria.army.mil for tank information. When inquiring about a specific cannon, the following
information is included
z
Tube serial number.
z
Cannon size, model or series.
z
Cannon serial number.
A-169. When the serial number, size, or model number is not available, all other information on hand is
provided.
A-170. Entries on DA Form 2408-4 are made in blocks 10a through 10j by the section chief, crew chief,
or someone designated in writing by the unit commander. These entries are made within 24 hours of firing.
The information on this form is critical to safety. All entries must be correct, add up, and be readable. The
electronic 2408-4 makes the calculations. If access to the AEPS Web site is not possible, a hard copy of
DA Form 2408-4 is completed and mailed to TACOM, Rock Island, ATTN: AMSTA-LC-CIPPA, Rock
Island, IL 61299-7630. Cards should be mailed in accordance with the following schedule.
z
Active Army units send in the form on 10 April and 10 October each year.
z
Reserve and National Guard units send in the forms on 10 October each year.
A-171. When mailing in a card, a note is entered in the remarks block (column I) why the form is being
sent in, such as (April 1 report or condemned and the reason for the condemnation), if the tube is
condemned.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-133
Appendix A
A-172. When the weapon is put in storage, transferred or turned in, the card is mailed if data cannot be
entered into the AEPS system and a copy printed to forward with the weapon. A copy of DA Form 2408-4
is kept showing all the data from the form sent. A copy of DA Form 2408-4 goes with the weapon when it
is evacuated for repair or maintenance, even if the data are entered in the AEPS database. Support
maintenance units enter the data into the electronic 2408-4 or mail in DA 2408-4 when
z
The tube or cannon is condemned.
z
The tube, cannon, or weapon is lost to the Army inventory for any reason.
A-173. If access to AEPS is not possible, and before mailing DA Form 2408-4 to TACOM, Rock Island,
the following must be done:
z
A note in column i (Remarks) should be entered explaining why the form is being sent in. For
example, 10 April report is written in column i for forms sent in on that date. Condemned is
printed along with the reason in column i if the tube has been condemned. The date sent is
entered in column a. The unit commander signs in column j.
z
A new DA Form 2408-4 is started by bringing forward all necessary information. The unit
commander signs in column j (see DA Form 2408-4 on pages A-139 through A-141).
A-174. A DA Form 2408-4 that shows only boresight and zero data, or Measured Correction and AFCS
Offsets, is held until filled. When it is filled, the last boresight and zero information are entered on a new
DA Form 2408-4. Boresight and Zero are printed in the top and bottom margins of the new DA Form
2408-4 (see DA Form 2408-4 on pages A-139 through A-141). The old DA Form 2408-4 is discarded.
A-175. Completion Instructions DA Form 2408-4 (Each number corresponds to the block number for the
DA Form 2408-4):
(1) Tube serial number. Enter the gun tube serial number. TM 9-1000-202-14 and Figure
A-55 shows you the location of the gun tube serial number.
(2) Cannon type, model or series. Enter the gun tube nomenclature (120mm M256A1).
(3) Organization (UIC). Owning organization and unit identification code (PENCIL ENTRY
ONLY).
(4) Special life data. Enter special life data on the specific weapon system.
z
Use this space to record EFC round life and other tube life information.
z
Compare the remaining EFC life of the gun tube in column 10h to the remaining life of
the breechring. If the EFC life of the breechring is less than the entry on column, print in
column 10g Do not exceed (whatever the remaining breech mechanism EFC life is).
Example: Dual condemnation criteria, 1500 EFC rounds or 5mm wear into the base
metal. Borescope every 150 EFC rounds. Breechring life 4500 EFC rounds or 2
retubings.
(5) End item identification. Enter the weapon end item identification, type, series or model and
the chassis serial number. Example: Tank Combat M1A1 SN D12112.
(6) RDS/EFC computation. Enter equivalent full charge factors for the various rounds fired.
TM 9-1000-202-14 gives you the EFC factor values. Example: M829 A1/A2 = 1.0.
(7) Cannon serial number. Enter the breech ring serial number with breech ring in parenthesis.
TM 9-1000-202-14 and Figure A-56 show the location of the breech ring serial number.
A-134
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-55. Gun tube serial number
Figure A-56. Breech ring serial number

(8) Retubings. Divide this block into two sections by drawing a diagonal line from the upper
right to the lower left corner.
z
In the upper section enter the number of times the installed breechring has been retubed.
z
In the lower section enter the total number of EFC rounds fired on the installed
breechring.
(9) Rebushings. Leave blank.
(10) This block is divided into ten columns a. through j.
z
Date. Write the calendar date of when the action occurred.
z
Projectile type. Enter the type of projectile and cartridge model.
z
Zone or charge. Leave blank.
z
Rounds fired. Write the number of rounds actually fired.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-135
Appendix A
z
z
z
z
z
A-136
EFC rounds fired. Multiply the number of rounds fired in column 10d by the EFC
factor for that round in block 6.
Cumulative rounds fired. Add the number of rounds fired in column 10d to the last
entry in column 10f.
Cumulative EFC rounds fired. Add the number in column 10e to the last entry in
column 10g.
Remaining life. Subtract the EFC rounds fired in column 10e from the last entry in
column 10h. The difference is the remaining life of the gun tube.
Remarks. Enter any remarks you need on the operation or maintenance of the weapon.
This includes borescope and recoil exercise data. Example: Borescope 4 JUN 07 1270
efc rds, RE 4 JUN 07.
Signature. The person designated by the unit commander to make entries on the DA
Form 2408-4 will sign this column. Put your name, rank, title and signature here. When
support personnel make entries, put support unit identity under signature and rank. The
unit commander will sign on the column on the first line and last line entries (see Figure
A-57 and Figure A-58).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure A-57. DA Form 2408-4 with firing and maintenance data
Figure A-58. DA Form 2408-4 condemning gun tube
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-137
Appendix A
TRANSFERRED DATA TO NEW FORM

A-176. Before you send a form to Watervliet Arsenal, the following information must be transferred to the
new card:
z
All the information contained in blocks 1 through 7.
z
Block eight enter number of times the breech ring has been retubed if it has changed. Enter the
total number of EFC rounds fired on the breech ring. Add the difference between the first entry
of column 10g. and the last entry in column 10g. to the EFC rounds fired in block 8 of the old
DA Form 2408-4. This will give you the new total EFC rounds fired on the breech ring for the
new DA Form 2408-4.
z
Block 10a. Enter current date.
z
Block 10b. through 10e. Leave blank.
z
Block 10f. Cumulative rounds fired. Enter the total rounds fired from the last entry in column
10f. of the form to be sent in.
z
Block 10g. Cumulative EFC rounds. Enter the total EFC rounds fired from last entry in column
10g of the form to be sent
z
Block 10h. Remaining life in EFC rounds. Enter the remaining life in EFC rounds. Make sure
this entry matches the last entry in column 10h of the previous DA Form 2408-4.
z
Block 10i. Transfer any needed remarks from the previous form. Enter the last borescope and
recoil exercise data.
z
Signature. The unit commander signs in this column on the first line and the last line entries.
The unit commanders signature shows that all the information has been transcribed to a new
DA Form 2408-4 (see Figure A-59).
Figure A-59. DA Form 2408-4 transfer to new form
A-138
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
BORESIGHT AND ZERO DATA DA FORM 2408-4

z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Tube serial number. Leave blank.

Cannon type, model or series. Leave blank.
Organization (unit identification code [UIC]). Enter the unit identification code (PENCIL
ONLY)
Special life data. Leave blank.
End item identification. Enter the weapon and item identification type and model.
RDS/EFC computation. Leave blank.
Cannon serial number. Leave blank.
Retubings. Leave blank.
Rebushings. Leave blank.
This block is divided into 10 columns. Date: Entered when action occurred; Projectile type:
Enter the type of projectile and cartridge model; Block 10c through 10h: Leave Blank; Block 10i
remarks: Enter boresight and zero data for different types of ammo being fired (see Figure A60).
Note. Change boresight and zero data whenever the gun tube, periscope, telescope, range
finder or computer are changed; Block 10j: Signature of TC.
Figure A-60. DA Form 2408-4 boresight and zero data
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
A-139
Appendix B
Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation

Appendix B discusses the dual feed system, pre-fire checks, boresighting,
malfunctions, post-fire checks, Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) range determination,
zeroing procedures and tube-launched, optically-tracked, wide-guided (TOW)
limitations for the BFV family of systems. Before zeroing, the crew boresights all
weapon systems to ensure they align correctly before firing. They also conduct a
thorough pre-fire check to ensure that the turret and all turret weapon systems operate
properly. This prevents many of the common malfunctions that can occur during
firing. If a malfunction does occur, the crew tries to clear it. If they cannot, they
report the malfunction to the Master Gunner. After firing the weapon systems, the
crew conducts a post-fire check.
Contents
Section I Dual-Feed System ................. B-1
Section II Boresighting ......................... B-4
Visibility Conditions ............................. B-4
Restricted Areas ................................. B-4
Preparation ......................................... B-5
Indications .......................................... B-5
Equipment Testing Procedures........... B-5
Boresighting the 25-mm Gun ............ B-12
Boresighting and Weapon Checks
with the Close-In Panel ..................... B-35
Section III Pre-Fire Checks ..................B-51
Pre-Fire Checklist for ODS and
Below ................................................ B-52
Bradley A3 Gunners Pre-Fire
Checklist ........................................... B-53
Bradley A3 Commanders Pre-Fire
Checklist ........................................... B-54
Section IV Zeroing Procedures ...........B-54
Procedures for Zeroing the 25-mm,
ODS, and Below ............................... B-54
Procedures for Zeroing the Coax,
ODS, and Below ............................... B-55
Procedures for Zeroing, A3 Only ...... B-55
Section V Bradley Weapons System

Malfunctions ........................................... B-57
25-mm Gun ...................................... B-57
M240C 7.62-mm Coaxial Machine
Gun .................................................. B-58
M257 Smoke Grenades ................... B-58
Turret Drive ...................................... B-58
Communications .............................. B-59
Section VI Post-Fire Checks ............... B-59
Section VII BFV Range Determination B-59
BFV Laser Range Finder ................. B-59
ISU Horizontal Ranging Stadia
(Choke Sight) ................................... B-61
ISU Reticle Lead Line and Mil
Relation ............................................ B-62
BFVA3 IBAS/CIV Reticle and
Horizontal Ranging Stadia ............... B-65
Backup Sight (Auxiliary Sight) .......... B-67
Section VIII TOW Limitations .............. B-69
SECTION I DUAL-FEED SYSTEM

B-1. A dual-feed system uses sprockets and extractor grooves to control rounds (see Figure B-1). A
system of clutches allows either sprocket to engage and feed either an armor-piercing (AP) or highexplosive (HE) cartridge. The ammunition ready box contains 300 rounds of mixed ammunition. One
ammunition box holds 70 rounds, and the other holds 230 rounds. Each box can hold either AP- or HE-
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-1
Appendix B
type ammunition. A single 1.5 horsepower volts direct current (VDC) motor externally powers the 25mm.
The enhanced gun uses a 1.0-horsepower VDC motor. For all 25-mm guns, unit maintenance replaces
inoperable 1.5-horsepower VDC motors with the newer 1.0-horsepower VDC motors.
B-2. The gunner can choose from three rates of fire:
z
Single Shot. The vehicle commander (VC) or gunner can shoot as fast as he can squeeze the
trigger.
z
Low Rate. The VC or gunner can shoot 100 rounds a minute, plus or minus 25 rounds.
z
High Rate. The VC or gunner can shoot 200 rounds a minute, plus or minus 25 rounds.
Figure B-1. Dual-feed system
B-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CYCLES OF FUNCTION
B-3. The 25-mm automatic gun has eight cycles of function that relate to the bolt position indicator (BPI)
(see Figure B-2). The BPI shows the crew where the bolt is located the whole time the gun moves through
its eight cycles of function:
z
Step 1Sear or charge. The bolt is 25mm forward of its rear-most position. The sear engages
the master link. As a safety measure, the firing pin remains uncocked. The bolt position arrow
points to SEAR.
z
Step 2Feed. Linked ammunition enters the 25-mm gun feeder. The feed sprockets strip the
rounds from the links and move the round into the round positioner one at a time. The round
positioner pushes the round into the ready position. During the feed cycle, the bolt moves about
25mm to the rear of the sear position. The feeder rotor rotates one-third of a turn, allowing the
round positioner to place a round into the rotor. The position arrow points to FEED or to
DONT REMOVE FEEDER. Absolute hang-fire protection activates in this position.
z
Step 3Chamber or ram. The rotor stops moving counterclockwise once the round is
positioned on the bolt face. The bolt, bolt carrier, and round move forward until the round seats
fully in the chamber. The position arrow points to RAM.
z
Step 4Lock. The bolt is in the full forward position and the bolt carrier is still moving forward.
The cam pin moving in its channel causes the bolt to rotate counterclockwise. This allows the
lugs on the bolt to engage in the recesses of the breech, making a solid lock. Before the round
fires, the position arrow points at the red zone.
z
Step 5Fire. The final rotation of the bolt pushes the firing pin tang off the firing pin pawl in
the track assembly. This causes the firing pin spring to push the firing pin forward. In its full
forward position, the firing pins tip protrudes 2 millimeters through the bolt face. The indicator
arrow points to FIRE. Although the gun requires no gas to operate, it does use 12 mm of recoil
to deactivate mechanical interlock. If the breech fails to recoil, the gun stops cycling with the
bolt still locked in the breech. The position arrow points to MISFIRE.
z
Step 6Unlock. Once past the MISFIRE position, the master link and slider start to the rear. The
slider pulls the bolt carrier with it. The cam pin rotates the bolt clockwise, causing it to unlock
from the recesses in the breech. As the bolt unlocks, the arrow points to EXTRACT.
z
Step 7Extract. As the bolt moves to the rear, the fixed T-slot extractors remove the cartridge
case from the chamber. The case remains positioned on the face of the bolt. The bolt continues
to the rear until it locks in the sear position. As this happens, the position arrow moves from
EXTRACT to SEAR.
z
Step 8Eject. The expended case remains in the bolt face until the gunner pulls the trigger to
fire another round. When that happens, the bolt moves to the FEED position. The rotor rotates
one-third of a turn, feeding a round onto the bolt face and sweeping the expended case into the
feeder ejection chute. As the bolt moves forward to chamber the round, the eject arm on the bolt
carrier pushes the expended case from the receiver cartridge eject port.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-3
Appendix B
Figure B-2. The M242 25-mm guns eight cycles of function
SECTION II BORESIGHTING
B-4. Boresighting aligns the Integrated Sight Unit (ISU) or Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem
(IBAS) and weapon systems to a common point of aim and simplifies the task of zeroing the turret weapon
systems (see Figure B-3). The crew must ensure that boresight kits meet the accuracy standards in this
appendix before using them to boresight the weapon systems. They must turn in to unit maintenance any
kits that fail the accuracy test. They perform accuracy tests during semiannual servicing of vehicles, or
whenever they detect problems during zeroing. They can swap telescopes and adapters to form complete
kits that meet the standards, if needed. Specific boresighting instructions follow.
VISIBILITY CONDITIONS
B-5. During good visibility, boresight the guns daysight using the convenient-target method. During
limited visibility, for all but the A3, use the buddy boresight method to boresight the daysight (Technical
Manual [TM] 9-2350-252-10-2, TM 9-2350-284-10-2 and TM 9-2350-294-10-2). Only after completing
this step can you boresight the thermal sight to the daysight. Before boresighting, reset the boresight knobs
to zero.
RESTRICTED AREAS
B-6. For restricted or confined areas, such as a motor pool, use the close-in boresight panel to boresight
the turret weapons. In such areas, you can boresight the Bradley A3 sights to a point of aim as near as 200
meters.
B-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-3. Reticle for boresight telescope NSN 4933-00-867-6607
PREPARATION
B-7. Select the boresight mode from the menu on the Commanders Tactical Display (CTD) (A3 only).
The boresight menu takes you step-by-step through aligning the IBAS, the Commanders Independent
Viewer (CIV), and the backup sights line of sight (LOS) to the weapon systems. Before entering the
boresight mode on the CTD, ensure the vehicle is stationary and level. Adjust the IBAS and CIV
(brightness, contrast, focus, and polarity), then collimate in accordance with (IAW) TM 9-2350-294-10-21.
INDICATIONS
B-8. Boresight all turret weapon systems before you fire any crew live-fire exercise. Boresight again only
if you remove either the 25-mm receiver or the M240C, 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun (the coax), or
unless another member of the crew stands on or pulls either weapon system from outside of the vehicle.
EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

B-9. Accurate boresighting is critical in combat situations. The crew must master boresighting procedures
and the use of boresighting equipment. Boresighting aligns the sight to the aiming point of the 25-mm gun
bore. Zeroing then aligns the sights with the point of round impact. A skilled crew can boresight and zero
accurately with only a few sight adjustments and rounds.
EQUIPMENT
B-10. Boresighting the 25-mm gun requires a boresight telescope (national stock number [NSN] 4933-00867-6607) and one of two 25-mm adapters, depending on the BFV model. The adapter fits into the gun
bore, and the telescope fits into the adapter.
Note. Boresight telescope (NSN 4933-00-867-6607) is being phased out currently throughout
the US Army. The newer 1-1000 boresight telescope assembly (NSN 1240-01-490-5099) will
become the primary boresight telescope used to boresight the BFV. Due to this change taking
place, all photos referencing the boresight telescope in the end of the 25-mm barrel will be the
1-1000 boresight telescope assembly.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-5
Appendix B
Boresight Telescope
B-11. Figure B-4 shows the reticle of the telescope. The reticle has crosshairs, a 2-mil circle, and a 10-mil
circle. The azimuth (AZ) crosshair is the vertical line; the elevation (EL) crosshair is the horizontal line.
Use the 2-mil circle to test the accuracy of the 25-mm boresight kit.
z
The telescope's 5X magnification allows the viewer to focus on any target between 5 meters and
infinity. After you have properly focused the telescope, the aiming point of the reticle stays put,
even if you move your head while looking at it.
z
Adjust the telescope's two focusing rings (see Figure B-4) in the following order:
Reticle-Focus Ring. Point the telescope at the sky or toward any other evenly lit field of
view. This forces you to look at the reticle rather than at a target. To focus, turn the reticlefocus ring until the reticle appears sharp and clear.
Target Objective-Focus Ring. TM 9-2350-252-10-2 calls this ring a "vernier focus dial."
To adjust it, turn it back and forth until its reticle aiming point remains the same when you
move your head back and forth above the eyepiece.
Figure B-4. Boresight telescope NSN 4933-00-867-6607

z
z
Avoid unscrewing or disassembling the telescope itself. It is not waterproof. If it does get wet,
dry it at once. Water inside the telescope fogs the view.
A plate on the base of the telescope lists the federal ordnance number and the serial numbers.
The serial number is the bottom (last) number listed.
1-1000 Boresight Telescope Assembly and Integral 7.62-mm Adapter

B-12. The tapered stem of the A3 boresight telescope (NSN 1240-01-490-5099, see Figure B-5) fits a 7.62mm coax gun bore. The 25-mm adapter (NSN 1240-01-441-5410, see Figure B-6) fits the 25-mm gun
B-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
bore. Together, these two parts comprise the boresight telescope assembly (BTA). When used properly,
this 12X telescope offers a fast, easy, and accurate way to align the gunner's sight to the axis of the gun
bore. Figure B-7 shows the reticle, which has a vertical crosshair (for AZ), horizontal crosshair (for EL),
and a 1-mil circle (for testing the accuracy of the boresight kit).
Note. If after five or six rotations you cannot collimate the 25-mm gun using the 1-1000
telescope, then turn in the telescope to unit maintenance.
Figure B-5. The 1-1000 boresight telescope
Figure B-6. Adapter for the 1-1000 boresight telescope
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-7
Appendix B
Figure B-7. Reticle for 1-1000 telescope

z
z
z
z
z
Objective Assembly. The objective assembly has an objective lens, an objective cell assembly,
and a lens cap with a parallax-reduction hole.
Diopter-Adjustment Knob. The diopter-adjustment knob allows you to adjust the image to
plus or minus 4 diopters.
Knurled Handle. Grasp the knurled handle (end) of the 25-mm adapter to install, rotate, or
remove it from the gun bore.
Tapered Muzzle Cone. Each piece has a tapered muzzle cone to fit the appropriate gun bore.
Spring-Loaded Fingers. These center and secure the telescope to the adapter and the adapter to
the gun bore.
CAUTION
Only rotate the telescope itself when using it with the 7.62-mm
coax, that is, when using it without the 25-mm adapter.
When using the 25-mm adapter, do not turn the telescope itself;
instead, grasp and rotate the knurled end of the 25-mm adapter.
z
z
z
z
z
z
B-8
Purging Valve Assembly. The telescope has a valve assembly to purge and charge nitrogen.
Outlet Port Screw. This allows for nitrogen purging.
Index Mark. Align the red index mark (dot) on the 25-mm adapter with the muzzle face of the
gun bore.
Shroud Protector. A shroud protects the collimation knobs.
Collimation Knobs. Use these knobs (AZ, EL) to adjust the reticle during collimation. The light
port is exposed in both positions.
Adapter Interface. This refers to the juncture of the 7.62-mm stem and the adapter.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Slotted Hole. This is where you will insert the drift key if the 7.62-mm stem gets stuck in the
adapter.
CAUTION
If the telescope stem gets stuck in the adapter, insert the drift key
in the slotted hole. To loosen the stem from the adapter, work the
key gently, without forcing it into the slot. Pushing too hard
would damage the fingers on the end of the adapter stem.
Older 25-mm Adapter

B-13. Figure B-8 shows the older 25-mm adapter (part number [PN] 12524010). The knob inserts into the
25-mm gun barrel. The adapter is fully inserted when the tapered stop contacts the end of the gun barrel.
Insert the adapter slowly with a slight twisting motion to keep it from locking in the barrel. The adapter is
fully inserted when the tapered stop contacts the end of the gun barrel.
z
The newer adapter (PN 12524144) offers improved accuracy over the older model, (see Figure
B-9). On the newer one, both the plated knob and plated, tapered stop reduce wear. Although
the knob's diameter exceeds that of the bore, slots in the knob allow it to compress (in diameter)
to fit into the gun barrel.
z
The telescope fits into the telescope receptacle on the adapter. When inserting the telescope,
hold it at the base without touching the glass lens. Insert the telescope firmly by using a slight
twisting motion. If the telescope is stuck in the adapter, gently hit the telescope knockout rod.
Hard hits on the rod could damage the telescope shaft.
CAUTION
Be careful hitting the telescopeknockout rod too hard could
damage the telescope shaft.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-9
Appendix B
Figure B-8. Older 25-mm adapter, PN 12524010, fits 25-mm

barrel on all BFVs through A2 ODS
Figure B-9. Newer 25-mm adapter, PN 12524144, fits 25-mm barrel on all BFVs
KIT ACCURACY TEST

B-14. Test the 25-mm kit for accuracy before you boresight the gun with it. To prepare for testing, follow
Steps 1 through 18 in the section entitled "Boresight 25-mm Gun" in TM 9-2350-252-10-2.
B-15. The kit rotation test described in this appendix differs from the turret TMs accuracy test. The TM
prescribes two 90-degree rotations of the telescope to test its accuracy. The 180-degree kit-rotation test
described in this appendix tests the entire kit.
B-16. To test the accuracy of the kit, follow these steps rather than those in the TM:
z
Focus the telescope reticle using the reticle-focus ring.
z
Focus on the target using the target objective-focus ring.
z
Rotate the telescope so that the eyepiece faces right. If when you rotate the telescope it slips in
the adapter, hold both so that it does not.
B-17. Tell the gunner to lay the gun so that the telescope reticle aims at a target with a corner such as a
boresight panel or building. Figure B-10 shows an 8-foot-square boresight panel at 1,200 meters.
B-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-10. Telescope reticle aimed at a corner of boresight panel

B-18. Rotate the telescope and adapter together 180 degrees until the telescope faces left (see Figure B-11).
Figure B-11. Telescope facing to the left

B-19. Score accuracy. The kit meets standards if the original aiming point stays in or on the 2-mil circle of
the telescope reticle (see Figure B-12). It fails the standards if the original aiming point moves outside the
2-mil circle.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-11
Appendix B
Figure B-12. Aiming point in the 2-mil circle
BORESIGHTING THE 25-MM GUN

B-20. After identifying an accurate kit, boresight weapons as described in TM 9-2350-252-10-2, beginning
with Step 23. Use both the boresight telescope and the 25-mm adapter.
PREPARATION TO SCREEN EQUIPMENT

B-21. A 25-mm boresight kit could be inaccurate due to the telescope, adapter, or both. If a 25-mm kit did
not meet standards of the kit-accuracy field test, then test the telescope and 25-mm adapter separately. If a
large number of kits fail to meet the standards, then the unit must screen all of its telescope and 25-mm
adapters (see Figure B-13). Then, it puts each accurate adapter with an accurate telescope to form accurate
25-mm kits. Before screening equipment:
BFV AND TESTING PERSONNEL

B-22. Use one BFV to test boresight equipment. The 25-mm gun barrel should have fired no more than
5,000 rounds, because gun erosion can affect testing results.
z
Two Master Gunners at unit level should conduct testing. Testers should know correct
boresighting procedures. They should also know how to accurately obtain, record, and score the
boresight data. One tester observes aiming points of tested equipment and the other tester
records data on a standardized scoresheet (discussed later).
z
To prevent eyestrain, testers should alternate between testing and recording. Screening all of the
boresighting equipment in a unit may take from three to five days.
B-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-13. Preparations before screening equipment
TESTING AREA
B-23. Conduct testing close to where the boresight equipment is stored or secured. This will help facilitate
movement of equipment to and from the test vehicle. You will need a 52-meter line of sight from the end
of the 25-mm gun barrel to the test panel.
BORESIGHT TEST PANEL

B-24. Use a special test panel to test the equipment. The panel is a scoring grid of 2-inch squares. Figure
B-14 shows an example panel. Your local Training Activity Support Center (TASC) must produce the
actual-size drawing. With the panel 52 meters from the end of the 25-mm gun barrel, each 2-inch square of
the scoring grid, as seen through the boresight telescope, measures 1 mil high and wide. This grid allows
the tester to observe the location of the boresight aiming point. The tester then records the aiming point on
the score sheet.
Figure B-14. Example boresight test panel

B-25. The test panel has a white background. Solid 1/8-inch-wide black lines mark squares on the panel.
The length of each side of a square is 2 inches (5 centimeters). Numbers measure 1 1/2 to 2 inches tall.
B-26. If you waterproof the drawing like a map, you can staple it to a piece of plywood and use it as a test
panel. Lean it against a fence or any other rigid structure for support. To keep the wind from knocking it
down, tie the panel to the support structure in the upright position. Be sure to locate the panel 52 meters
from the 25-mm gun. It does not need to sit at gun level.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-13
Appendix B
SCORESHEET
B-27. Use DA Form 7523-R, Boresight Telescope Accuracy Test, to record and score boresight data as
well as to screen all equipment-adapters, telescopes, and 25-mm boresight kits. Figure B-15 shows an
example of a completed Boresight Telescope Accuracy Test.
B-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-15. Example of a completed DA Form 7523-R
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-15
Appendix B
B-28. Use the information section at the top of the scoresheet to record your (the tester's) name, when
testing occurred, what you tested, and what results you obtained (GO or NO GO). Record test data in the
two screening blocks labeled Test 1 and Test 2, one for each screening subtest. For equipment to pass the
screening test, it must receive a GO on both the subtests.
B-29. Before testing begins, you must know how to record and plot boresight-aiming points on the
scoresheet.
B-30. Before recording an aiming point, align the telescope reticle with the scoring grid of the test panel. If
the reticle is out of alignment, rotate the telescope until you see the correct sight picture (see Figure B-16).
Figure B-16. Reticle alignment

z
B-16
Marking the Aiming Point on the Scoring Grid. One technique for observing and plotting the
telescope's aiming point is to draw an "X" on the scoring grid where the telescope reticle aims at
the panel (see Figure B-17). However, the clutter between the reticle and grid lines can make
using this technique difficult.
Determining Grid Coordinates for Each Aiming Point. The second technique resembles that
of using grid coordinates on a map. Determine grid coordinates for each aiming point using the
numbers along the bottom and right sides of the test panel. Read the coordinates to the right and
up, starting from the lower left-hand corner of the grid. Take two readings for each aiming point
of the telescopean AZ coordinate and an EL coordinate.
Read the right AZ coordinate where the AZ crosshair crosses the scale at the bottom of the
grid. In the example shown in Figure B-18, the AZ coordinate is 3 3/4 mils. Record this in
the RIGHT AIMPOINT COORDINATES blank in data section 1 of the scoresheet.
Read the right EL coordinate where the EL crosshair crosses the right side of the grid. In the
example shown in Figure B-19, the EL coordinate is 3 1/2 mils. Record this in the RIGHT
AIMPOINT COORDINATES blank in data section 1 of the scoresheet.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-17. Sight picture and scoring grid
Figure B-18. Azimuth for right aim-point coordinates
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-17
Appendix B
Figure B-19. Elevation for right aim-point coordinates

z
Plotting Aiming Point on Scoring Grid. Plot the aiming point on the scoring grid of the
scoresheet. In this case, go right 3 3/4 mils and up 3 1/2 mils (see Figure B-20). You and another
tester can practice recording boresight aiming points with this technique by laying the 25-mm
gun on different parts of the test panel. Practice observing and recording the AZ and EL
coordinates for the same aiming point. You should be able to obtain AZ and EL readings to at
least the nearest 1/4 mil. However, taking readings to the nearest 1/8 mil produces optimal
testing results and aiming point accuracy.
Figure B-20. Plotted aiming point
B-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Gun Lay
B-31. Before testing begins, aim the gun near the center of the test panel. This increases the likelihood that
aiming points will fall on the grid during testing. Aiming points off the grid are difficult to record and
score. Lay the gun with boresight equipment and with the turret in manual operational mode. You will
need boresight equipment score sheet and pencil. You can lay a gun accurately with a boresight kit, if you
have one, using the following procedures:
z
Insert the adapter into the gun barrel.
z
Insert the telescope into the adapter with the eyepiece facing up.
z
Tell the gunner to lay the gun so that the telescope reticle aims at the center of the panel.
z
Focus the telescope (see Figure B-21).
Focus the reticle using the reticle-focus ring.
Focus on the target using the target objective-focus ring.
Figure B-21. Reticle aimed at center of panel
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-19
Appendix B
z
z
z
The telescope is now aiming at the center of the target, but if the boresighting equipment is
inaccurate, the gun will not be aiming at the center of the target.
Rotate the kit (telescope plus adapter) until the eyepiece faces to the right.
Mark the aiming point on scoring grid 1 (see Figure B-22).
Figure B-22. Kit right aiming point

z
z
z
B-20
Rotate the kit until the telescope eyepiece faces left.

Mark the left aiming point on scoring grid 1 (see Figure B-23). Taking right and left aiming
points is like using a shot group to zero a weapon.
To determine the middle of the two aiming points, so you can estimate where the gun is aiming,
lay the gun on the estimated center of the panel.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-23. Kit left aiming point

z
Determine aiming point of gun.
Draw a line between the two aiming points marked on the scoresheet.
Mark the middle of the line. This is where the gun is aiming (see Figure B-24).
Figure B-24. Aiming point
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-21
Appendix B
z
z
z
z
Lay the gun on the estimated center of the panel.

Draw an arrow from the middle of the line to the center of the panel. The arrow shows the
distance and direction of the gun to target center (see Figure B-25).
Helper tells the gunner to lay the gun the distance and direction shown by the arrow from the
last lay of the telescope (see Figure B-26).
The example shows the start and stop points of a gun lay with the telescope starting in the left
position. In this case, the gun was moved about 1 1/4 mils in the direction of one o'clock. You
can lay the gun with the telescope in any position (left or right), but you must move the gun the
distance and direction indicated by the arrow.
Figure B-25. Distance and direction from center
Figure B-26. Adjusted aim point
B-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
ADAPTER-SCREENING TEST
B-32. Adapters are tested first using an accurate telescope. New telescopes usually meet accuracy
requirements, so they are preferable for use. A new telescope can be obtained from a new vehicle or from
direct exchange for a defective telescope. A new telescope is easy to identify as such if it is still wrapped in
shipping material. However, some new telescopes have been unwrapped, but remain unused. These will
still have tape over the eyepiece. An inspection for scratches, dirt, and fingerprints on the lens also gives a
good estimate of prior use.
B-33. Mark adapters before screening. Wrap a piece of 1-inch-wide masking tape around the telescope end
of the adapter. Make position marks ("A" and "B") on the tape to align the adapter in the barrel and the
telescope with the adapter. You can use an adapter-marking template for this (see Figure B-27). If you use
the template, you can also tape it to your clipboard to hold scoresheets during testing. Place the telescope
end of the adapter on the template and on the position marks. Adapters have no permanent identification
marks, so you must add them yourself. Then you must mark an identification number for each adapter on
the tape. The example adapter shown in Figure B-28 is marked with the number "4."
Figure B-27. Adapter-marking template
Figure B-28. Marked adapter

B-34. Begin testing when you have emplaced the vehicle and panel, aimed the gun at the panel, marked the
adapters, and obtained an accurate telescope. The data recorder must have a set of scoresheets and a
clipboard.
z
Before testing each piece of equipment, record the date, time, unit, test type, telescope serial
number, adapter number, and your name on the scoresheet. Test type indicates whether tester is
checking an adapter, telescope, or kit.
z
Test the adapters using the same kit-rotation procedure that you used for the kit-accuracy field
test. Begin testing with the telescope facing right. Observe and record the reticle's aiming point
on the scoresheet. Rotate the adapter and telescope together one-half turn (180 degrees), until
the eyepiece faces left. Record this aiming point on the scoresheet.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-23
Appendix B
Test each adapter twice. This provides a more reliable estimate of accuracy. Record data for the
first test in the Test 1 section of the scoresheet; record data for the second test in the Test 2
section. The tests differ only in the adapter's position in the gun barrel. The following describes
a sample test:
Insert the 25-mm adapter into the gun barrel with the position mark "A" facing right.
Insert the telescope into the adapter with the eyepiece facing right.
Estimate the AZ and EL coordinates for the aiming point. For this example, the AZ
coordinate is 3 3/4, and the EL coordinate is 2 3/4 (see Figure B-29).
Figure B-29. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the right, at mark "A"
Record the AZ and EL coordinates in the RIGHT AIMPOINT COORDINATES block of

scoring grid 1 on the scoresheet.
Plot the right aiming point for Test 1 on scoring grid 1 (see Figure B-30).
Figure B-30. Right aiming point as recorded on scoresheet
B-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Ideally, plot an aiming point after recording its AZ and EL coordinates in the data section on the
scoresheet. Two testers collect data and record the aiming points.
The tester observing the aiming point reads the AZ and EL coordinates to the other tester,
who records them on the scoresheet.
Using the AZ and EL data on the scoresheet, the observer plots the aiming point on the
scoring grid.
The observer compares the scoresheet and sight picture to check the accuracy of the
recorded aiming point data.
Now that the testers have taken Test 1's right reading, they must take the left reading. During kit
rotation, maintain the position of the telescope in the adapter. If the telescope slips in the adapter
while rotating the kit, make sure that the adapter's position mark "A" faces left before you record
the aiming point.
Rotate both the telescope and the adapter until the eyepiece faces left (see Figure B-31).
Record the AZ and EL coordinates of the aiming point in the LEFT AIMPOINT
COORDINATES blank in data section 1 of the scoresheet. In the example, the AZ
coordinate is 2 1/2, and the EL coordinate is 2 1/2.
Figure B-31. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the left, at mark "A"
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-25
Appendix B
Plot the left aiming point for Test 1 on the scoring grid 1 (see Figure B-32).
Figure B-32. Left aiming point as recorded on scoresheet

z
B-26
Test 1 of the adapter is now complete. Conduct Test 2 just like Test 1, except that, before
testing, you must align the telescope with the adapter's position mark "B."
Rotate the adapter until mark "B" faces right.
Rotate the telescope to the right. In this example, the AZ coordinate reads 3 1/2, and the EL
coordinate reads 2 1/4 (see Figure B-33).
Estimate and record the AZ and EL coordinates in the RIGHT AIMPOINT

COORDINATES item in the Test 2 section of the scoresheet.
Plot the right aim point on scoring grid 2 (see Figure B-34).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-33. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the right, at mark "B"
Figure B-34. Right aim point coordinates, Test 2
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-27
Appendix B
Rotate both the adapter and telescope to the left. Position the adapter's "B" mark so that it
faces left. AZ and EL coordinates should read 2 1/4 and 2 1/4, respectively (see Figure
B-35).
Estimate and record the AZ and EL coordinates in the LEFT AIMPOINT

COORDINATES blank in data section 2 of the scoresheet.
Plot the left aim point on scoring grid 2 (see Figure B-36).
You have now collected all of the data for one adapter. Continue testing until you have tested all
of the adapters from the unit. Testing one adapter takes about 2 to 3 minutes, so you can test 13
adapters in about an hour. Test the adapters one troop at a time until you have tested all of the
equipment in the unit, then score the adapters.
Figure B-35. Azimuth and elevation with adapter to the left, at mark "B"
Figure B-36. Left aiming point, Test 2
B-28
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
B-35. The distance between the two aiming points is the criterion used to measure accuracy during one
iteration of a test. For the adapter to receive a GO, the distance between the telescope's two aiming points
must measure 1 mil or less. On the scoring grid, 1 mil equals 1/2 inch. Use a standard ruler to measure the
distance between points. For an adapter to score a GO, the distance must measure no more than 1/2 inch.
To pass the screening test, it must score a GO on both Tests 1 and 2. The following steps for scoring the
adapter are based on the previous example:
z
Use a ruler that has markings every 1/16 of an inch. A 1/16-scale allows measurement to the
nearest 1/8 mil of the scoresheet.
z
Measure the distance between the two aiming points marked on scoring grid 1. The distance in
this example is 7/16 inch.
z
Record the measured distance in the DISTANCE BETWEEN AIM POINTS block of
data section 1.
z
Score Test 1.
Circle GO in data section 1 if distance is 1/2 inch or less.
Circle NO GO in data section 1 if distance is more than 1/2 inch.

z
Record distance in mils between aim points (see Figure B-37). See the conversion chart in Table
B-1.
Figure B-37. Distance between aim points, Test 1

Table B-1. Inch-to-mil conversion chart
Inches
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
Mils
1/4
1/2
3/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 3/4
Measure the distance between aiming points marked on scoring grid 2. The distance in this
example is 5/8 inch. Record this distance in the DISTANCE BETWEEN AIM POINTS block in
data section 1.
Score Test 2 (see Figure B-38).
Circle GO in data section 1 if distance is 1/2 inch or less.
Circle NO GO in data section 1 if distance is more than 1/2 inch.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-29
Appendix B
Figure B-38. Distance between aim points, Test 2

z
Score the screening test.
Circle PASS at top of scoresheet if telescope received a GO on both Test 1 and Test 2.
Circle FAIL at top of scoresheet if one or both tests yield a score of NO GO. Figure B-15
on page B-14 shows an example of a completed scoresheet for this data. In Figure B-15, the
adapter received a GO score for Test 1 and a NO GO for Test 2. Therefore, the adapter in
the example failed the screening test.
TELESCOPE-SCREENING TEST
B-36. After adapter screening, telescopes are paired with a highly accurate adapter and are tested for
accuracy. The most accurate adapter is the one proven by testing to have the shortest distance between
right and left aiming points.
B-37. Each telescope has a serial number stamped on the base plate near the shaft. Mark the serial number
on a piece of tape, then apply the tape to the 7.62-mm boresight kit container. This simplifies the task of
sorting accurate and inaccurate telescopes after testing.
B-38. Test telescopes using telescope-rotation procedures. After inserting the adapter into the gun barrel,
insert the telescope with the eyepiece facing to the right. Observe and record the aiming point on the
scoresheet. Rotate the telescope only until the eyepiece faces to the left. The telescope meets the standards
if the aiming point changes 1 mil or less after you rotate the telescope. To pass the screening test, each
telescope must meet the standard on two iterations of it. The following describes the screening procedure
for telescopes. Because you record data for, plot, and score the telescope test the same as you did for the
adapter test, this list need not repeat the sample data:
z
Record date, time, tester, unit, telescope serial number, adapter assigned number, and test type in
information section of scoresheet.
z
Insert an accurate 25-mm adapter into the gun barrel with the position mark facing up.
z
Insert telescope into adapter with the eyepiece facing right (see Figure B-39).
z
Record AZ and EL coordinates in the RIGHT AIMPOINT COORDINATES item in the Test 1
section of the scoresheet.
z
Plot the right aim point on the scoring grid.
B-30
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-39. Mark "A" facing up, telescope to the right

Rotate only the telescope 180 degrees so that the eyepiece faces left. Ensure that the adapter's
mark "A" faces up (see Figure B-40).
z
Record the AZ and EL coordinates in the LEFT AIMPOINT COORDINATES item in the Test
1 section of the scoresheet.
z
Plot the left aim point on scoring grid 1. Test 1 is now complete. Test 2 is like Test 1 except that
the adapter's mark "B" faces up.
z
Rotate the adapter until the "B" faces up.
z
Rotate the telescope to the right. Ensure "B" still faces up.
z
Record right aim point in data section 2.
z
Plot right aim point on scoring grid 2.
z
Rotate telescope to the left. Ensure that "B" faces up.
z
Record aim point in the LEFT AIMPOINT COORDINATES item in the Test 2 section of the
scoresheet.
z
Plot left aim point on scoring grid 2. You have now tested one telescope. Continue until you
have tested all of the telescopes in the unit.
B-39. Score the telescopes after you collect the accuracy data for all telescopes. Score them the same as
you did the adapters. Score a "GO" on an iteration of the test procedure when the distance between right
and left aiming points measures no more than 1/2 inch on the scoring grid. To pass the screening test, the
telescope must earn a GO score on both iterations. It fails if it receives a NO GO on either one. Circle
PASS or FAIL in the information section of the scoresheet.
z
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-31
Appendix B
Figure B-40. Mark facing up, telescope to the left
ACCURATE BORESIGHT KITS

B-40. The objective is to form accurate 25-mm boresight kits from accurate telescopes and 25-mm
adapters. The crew screens kits using the same procedures and standards used for the adapters: namely,
they use the kit-rotation procedure with a 1-mil standard. They pair and test individual adapters and
telescopes that meet the required standards, then they issue accurate kits to the squad.
B-41. You can only form accurate kits from pairs of accurate adapters and telescopes. If the number of
accurate telescopes exceeds the number of accurate adapters, then start kit testing with the telescopes,
specifically, start with the ones that have the least distance between the left and right readings.
B-42. After you form an accurate kit, keep it together. Use an electrical etching tool to mark the telescope's
serial number on the adapter.
QUALITY DEFICIENCY REPORTS

B-43. The unit Master Gunner reports telescopes and 25-mm adapters that fail the screening tests on the
Standard Form (SF) 68, Product Quality Deficiency Report. He can complete a separate QDR for each
defective piece of equipment, but completing one form for all defective or inaccurate telescopes and
another for all defective or inaccurate adapters is easier. Figure B-41 on page B-33 shows an example
completed QDR reporting defective and inaccurate telescopes. This form is available electronically. Users
can complete it electronically, copy it from the back of the book and complete it manually, or some of
each. For example, the unit Master Gunner can complete common data electronically and print copies to
finish later manually.
B-32
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Telescope
B-44. The unit Master Gunner reports defective or inaccurate telescopes using SF 368, Product Quality
Deficiency Report, as follows:
z
Block 1a. Enter your unit designation, address (including zip code), and the Department of
Defense Ammunition Code (DODAC) for the defective equipment.
z
Block 1b. Enter your name and duty phone number, then, in the same block, sign your name to
signify that you completed the QDR.
z
Block 2a. Enter the name and address of the manager who will receive the QDR.
z
Blocks 2b and 2c. Leave blank.
z
Block 3. This block has exactly twelve places. In the first six, enter the DODAC again; in the
next two, enter the last two digits of the calendar year; in the last four places, enter how many
QDRs you are submitting for your unit at this time.
z
Block 4. Enter the dates when the equipment was examined and tested.
z
Blocks 5 and 6. Enter on this form the NSN and nomenclature from the boresight telescope's
data plate.
z
Block 7. Enter the telescope's manufacturer.
z
Block 8. Enter the part number, which you will find on the telescope's base plate.
z
Block 9. Enter the serial, lot, batch number, or any of these that you know for the telescope
adapters.
z
Blocks 10a and 10b. Enter "UNKNOWN."
z
Block 11. If telescopes are either new or repaired, check the appropriate box in Block 11.
z
Block 12. Enter manufacturing and repair dates, if you know them.
z
Block 13. Enter "NA."
z
Block 14. Check the NO square.
z
Block 15. Complete Block 15a if appropriate. In Block 15b, enter the number of items that were
examined and tested. In Block 15c, enter the total number of telescopes that were found
defective or inaccurate. Complete Block 15d if appropriate.
z
Block 16. In Block 16a(1), enter the BFV's NSN. In all the other parts of Block 16, enter "NA."
z
Blocks 17 and 18. Enter "UNKNOWN."
z
Block 19. Check UNKNOWN.
z
Block 20. Enter the letter "O," since defective items were detected and reported at the
organizational level.
z
Block 21. Check and write "45" in the blank for HOLDING EXHIBIT FOR ____ DAYS, so
that defective items will be held 45 days pending disposition instructions.
z
Block 22. This is the most important blockhere you describe the problem in detail. Be sure to
write what data suggests or indicates that a problem exists, for example, "excessive ammunition
expenditure during zeroing." Here you must also describe how the equipment was examined or
tested to detect the problem, for example, telescope rotation test, and the results of testing. If you
need more space, include another sheet, and write the report control number on it to indicate that
it goes with your completed SF 368 (see Figure B-41).
Adapter
B-45. Instructions for filling out a QDR for a defective or inaccurate adapter follow (see Figure B-42).
Since this is a separate QDR from the one reporting telescopes, this report will have its own control
number:
z
Blocks 1 and 2. Complete the same as for telescopes.
z
Block 8. The part number depends on the design of the adapter.
z
Blocks 9 through 21. Complete as described for telescopes.
z
Block 22. Complete this, the most important part of the QDR, as described for telescopes, but
write in how many adapters you are reporting as defective (from Block 4).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-33
Appendix B
Repair
B-46. Either depot maintenance or the manufacturer must repair boresight kits, depending on the
deficiency.
Figure B-41. Example completed SF 368 (telescopes)
B-34
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-42. Example completed SF 368 (adapters)
BORESIGHTING AND WEAPON CHECKS WITH THE CLOSE-IN

PANEL
B-47. This portion describes how a crew uses the close-in boresight panel. It then describes how they use
the panel to boresight the BFV turret weapons in a restricted or confined area like the motor pool.
DESCRIPTION OF PANEL
B-48. Five of the reference crosses bear the labels TOW, ISU, AUX, 25mm, and COAX. A sixth, "T"shaped reference is made of metal to allow boresighting of the thermal sight. The panel's background color
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-35
Appendix B
is white. The ISU cross and "T" are black; and the TOW, 25mm, COAX, and AUX crosses are orange (see
Figure B-43).
Figure B-43. Close-in panel
WEAPON CHECKS
B-49. The close-in boresight panel also tests backlash, equilibrator, drift, and boresight retention. These
tests allow the BFV crew to identify weapon system errors that decrease firing accuracy as well as to learn
their weapons. Before firing live, while they are still in the motorpool, the crew tests backlash,
equilibration, and drift.
PANEL PLACEMENT
B-50. Depending on the positioning of vehicles and the placement of the boresight panel, the unit should
be able to boresight all of their vehicles utilizing one, centrally placed panel. The panel may be emplaced at
ground level or when utilizing existing structures, no more than 25 meters off of the ground. Vehicles must
be placed within 30 meters left or right of the centerline from the boresight panel at distances between 100
and 120 meters from the panel. Between 120 and 150 meters from the panel, they may be placed as far
away as 50 meters to the left or right of the centerline.
B-51. Figure B-44 shows an example of an overhead view of panel placement and location of vehicles
relative to it.
B-36
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-44. Panel placement

B-52. Determine direct-line distance when the panel is first placed in the motor pool. Insert a boresight kit
into the 25-mm gun of a vehicle positioned on a direct line with the panel. Align the boresight reticle with
the 25-mm cross on the panel. Use ranging gaps in the 25-mm cross to determine the panel's distance.
Vehicles are at a correct distance if the 2-mil circle of the boresight reticle is on the edge, or in the gaps of
the 25-mm cross. Figure B-45 shows examples of vehicles located at the correct distances for boresighting.
Figure B-45. Correct distance alignment for boresighting
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-37
Appendix B
PREPARATION
B-53. Crews should know the boresight procedures described in TM 9-2350-252-10-2. All turret weapons
must be mounted and operational. A boresight kit and turret tool kit is required. Crews use the following
checklist to prepare for boresighting with the close-in boresight panel:
z
Master power ON.
z
Turret power ON.
z
Night vision switch ON.
z
Turret, gun, and TOW select levers in POWER (to raise TOW launcher).
z
TOW launcher raised.
z
Turret AZ selection lever in MANUAL.
z
Gun EL selection lever in MANUAL.
z
TOW EL drive selection lever in POWER.
z
Day and thermal ballistic sight cover doors open.
z
Sensor select switch set on NEUTRAL.
z
Range control knob set at "0."
z
Reticle brightness turned all the way to the right.
z
Magnification set on HI.
z
AP or HE selected on weapons control panel.
z
Status indicator displays ammunition and range index.
z
Gun reticle displayed.
z
Turret travel lock disengaged.
WEAPONS AND SIGHT ALIGNMENT

B-54. The crew aligns weapons and sight as follows:
z
Perform the boresight kit accuracy test before aligning the sight and weapon.
z
To control backlash, lay the 25-mm gun so that the gun-lay pattern ends in EL.
(Helper) rotate the telescope until the eyepiece faces upward.
(Helper) align the boresight reticle with the 25-mm cross on the panel.
Tell gunner to align the top of the 10-mil circle of the boresight reticle with the 25-mm
cross on the panel (see Figure B-46).
Tell gunner to align the boresight reticle with the 25-mm cross on the panel (see Figure
B-47).
Note. Traverse the turret, or elevate or depress the gun, only after aligning the TOW weapon
system.
z
Align the ISU day reticle. The neutral sensor-select setting works better on bright, sunny days.
Move the sensor select switch to CLEAR or NEUTRAL for the best view of the ISU reticle
and panel.
Align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel using the AZ and EL boresight
adjustment knobs.
B-38
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-46. 10-mil circle aligned with the 25-mm cross
Figure B-47. Boresight reticle aligned with the 25-mm cross
3 September 2009
Adjust the browpad (see Figure B-48). When the panel is 100 to 150 meters away, head
movement on the browpad changes the aim of the reticle. For example, moving the head to
the left shifts the aim to the left. Correct adjustment of the browpad is important.
Move head to the left until the sight begins to black out. Note the aiming point of the
reticle; this aiming point is called the left limit.
Move head to the right and note the right limit of the reticle.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-39
Appendix B
Move head up and note the upper limit of the reticle.

Move head down and note the lower limit of the reticle.
Adjust the browpad so that the reticle appears centered between the left, right, upper,
and lower limits.
Figure B-48. Reticle centered between left, right, and lower limits
If after adjusting the browpad the ISU reticle is no longer aligned with the ISU cross,
realign the reticle using the AZ and EL boresight knobs.
Align the auxiliary sight.
Focus sight with the eyepiece diopter.
If necessary, align the cross of the auxiliary sight with the AUX cross on the panel.
Loosen locknut.
Adjust thumbscrews (see Figure B-49) to align the level (horizontal) line of the reticle
crosshair with the level line of the AUX cross on the panel.
Tighten the locknut.
Loosen horizontal adjustment lock screw by about one-half turn to the left.
Turn the horizontal adjustment screw to align the vertical line of the reticle. Crosshair
with the vertical line of the AUX cross on the panel.
Tighten the horizontal adjustment lock screw (see Figure B-50).

Align the 7.62-mm coax machine gun.
Select ammunition.
Press the 7.62 button on the weapon control box.
Ensure that "7.62" appears on the status indicator.
B-40
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-49. Locknut, crank, and thumbscrews
Figure B-50. Horizontal adjustment lock screw and horizontal adjustment screw
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-41
Appendix B
(Helper) insert the 7.62-mm adapter and boresight telescope into the coaxial machine gun.
He then tells the gunner to align the boresight reticle with the COAX cross on the
panel.
Tell the gunner to use the AZ knob on the gun to align the boresight AZ crosshair
(vertical) with the vertical line on the COAX cross.
Tells the gunner to use the EL knob on the gun to align the boresight EL crosshair
(horizontal) with the level line on the COAX cross.
Align the ISU night reticle.
Move sensor select switch to NIGHT.
Use black hot (BH) to make the ISU reticle more visible on the "T" of the panel, so set the
polarity (PLRT) switch to that BH.
Adjust the thermal sight until you can see the "T" clearly:
Turn the CON knob all the way to the right.
Turn the BRT knob all the way to the left.
Turn the BRT knob to the right until you can see the "T" on the panel.
Focus on the "T" using the focus ring.
Turn the CON knob left about one-quarter turn.
Turn the BRT knob to the right until the "T" becomes clearer.
Repeat focus ring, CON knob, and BRT knob adjustments, if necessary.
Align the ISU reticle with the "T" on the panel using the night boresight EL and AZ knobs
(see Figure B-51).
Align the TOW weapon system.
Move the sensor select switch to CLEAR or NEUTRAL.
Place the 25-mm gun EL select lever in the POWER mode.
Place the TOW elevation lever in the MANUAL mode.
(Helper) insert the boresight telescope into the alignment hole between the TOW launcher
bores.
Press the TOW button.
Check that the TOW indicator light goes out when the self-test finishes.
Ensure that "TOW" appears on the status indicator.
(Helper) align the boresight reticle with the TOW cross on the panel.
Tell gunner to traverse to align the boresight AZ crosshair (vertical) with the vertical
line of the TOW cross.
Tell gunner to elevate or depress to align the boresight EL crosshair (horizontal) with
the level line of the TOW cross.
Align the TOW reticle EL crosshair (horizontal) with the level line on the ISU cross of the
panel using the TOW boresight screw.
Traverse to align the TOW reticle with the ISU cross on the panel (see Figure B-52).
Determine launcher alignment error.
Observe the aiming point of the boresight reticle on the TOW cross of the panel.
Estimate distance (mils) between the boresight reticle and TOW cross using the 2-mil
circle of the boresight reticle.
Adjust the launcher if the error is more than 1 mil.
B-42
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-51. ISU reticle aligned with "T"
Figure B-52. Alignment of TOW cross and 2-mil circle
BACKLASH TEST
B-55. When the direction of gun elevation is reversed, such as when the gun is depressed after being
elevated, the sight may not immediately move with the gun. This slack between the sight and gun is called
backlash. Backlash is controlled during boresighting by using a gun-lay ending in elevation. To prevent
gunnery errors due to backlash, gunners should also engage targets using a gun lay ending in elevation.
This paragraph describes the separate backlash-testing procedures for the ISU and auxiliary sight.
Boresight
B-56. Before testing the backlash, boresight the 25-mm gun, ISU day reticle, and auxiliary sight as
previously described. Set the weapon, sight, and turret controls the same as at the start of boresighting.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-43
Appendix B
MEASUREMENT OF ISU BACKLASH

B-57. If necessary, select armor-piercing-single shot (AP-SS) on the weapon control box. Avoid moving or
removing the 25-mm boresight kit until you complete backlash testing.
z
Insert the 25-mm adapter and boresight the telescope in the 25-mm gun. If necessary, focus the
telescope.
z
Use the gun and turret handwheels to align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel.
z
Use the gun elevation handwheel to depress the gun until the top of the ISU reticle touches the
bottom of the ISU cross on the panel (see Figure B-53).
Figure B-53. Position of ISU reticle below the 25-mm cross

z
z
z
z
z
z
B-44
Elevate the gun to align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel.
(Helper) note the aiming point of the boresight reticle.
Elevate the gun. Use the gun handwheel to elevate the gun until the bottom of the ISU reticle
touches the top of the ISU cross on the panel.
Depress the gun to align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel.
Measure backlash. The helper
Notes the location of the boresight reticle and the 25-mm cross.
Uses the 2-mil circle of the boresight reticle to estimate the distance (in mils) between
aiming points observed in elevation and depression. The backlash measures 1.5 mils for the
example shown in Figure B-54.
Notifies unit maintenance if backlash measures more than 2 mils.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-54. Distance between aiming points
Measurement of Auxiliary Sight Backlash

B-58. Insert the 25-mm adapter and boresight telescope into the 25-mm gun.
z
Align the auxiliary sight reticle with the AUX cross on the panel using the turret and gun
handwheels.
z
Use the gun's handwheel to depress the gun until the top of the auxiliary sight reticle touches the
bottom of the AUX cross on the panel (see Figure B-55).
Figure B-55. Auxiliary sight reticle positioned below the AUX cross
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-45
Appendix B
z
z
z
Elevate the gun to align the auxiliary sight reticle with the AUX cross on the panel.
Use the gun handwheel to elevate the gun until the bottom of the auxiliary sight reticle touches
the top of the AUX cross on the panel (see Figure B-56).
Figure B-56. Auxiliary sight reticle positioned above the AUX cross
z
z
z
Depress the gun to align the auxiliary sight reticle with the AUX cross of the panel.
Measure backlash as described for the ISU.
EQUILIBRATOR TEST
B-59. When the ISU reticle is laid on target in power mode, the aiming point should not change when the
gunner releases the palm switches. If when he releases the switches the sight and the gun drop, then the
weapon might have a faulty equilibrator. This test follows boresighting and the backlash test. Turret and
gun select levers remain on POWER during this test.
z
Using the gunner's handstation, align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel.
z
Release the palm switches.
z
Notify unit maintenance if the ISU circle and ISU cross fail to align after the gunner releases the
palm switches. Either a faulty equilibrator or a faulty gun elevation brake can cause the weapon
to fail the equilibrator test.
DRIFT TEST
B-60. Drift is tested after the equilibrator test. Switch settings and vehicle conditions are the same as at the
end of the equilibrator test. With stabilization on, the gunner depresses the palm switches. The BFV
remains stationary throughout the test, and the 25-mm and coax reticle may drift away from the aiming
point no more than 0.1 mil per second. To conduct a 5 second drift test
z
Turn stabilization on. Stabilization indicator light should come on.
z
Press the drift button. Conduct the test within the one minute after you press the drift button.
z
Using the gunner's handstation, align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel.
B-46
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Start the five-second test.

(Helper) use your watch to signal the start of the test.
(Gunner) press the palm switches, while keeping the handstation in the NEUTRAL
position.
Stop the test.
(Helper) signal end of five-second test.
(Gunner) release palm switches on helper's signal.

Score the drift.
The drift standard is met if the ISU cross of the panel falls on or within the 1-mil circle in
the ISU reticle (see Figure B-57).
Notify unit maintenance if the ISU cross of the panel falls outside the 1-mil circle of the
ISU reticle.
Figure B-57. Drift within 1-mil circle
BORESIGHT-RETENTION TEST
B-61. After the 25-mm gun and ISU are boresighted, sight alignment should change no more than 0.25 mil
for vehicle operation up to 50 miles. This holds true only as long as the ambient temperature remains
within 54 degrees, plus or minus, from what it was when boresighting occurred. If boresight retention
requirements are met, the weapon can be boresighted in the motor pool and the vehicle moved to a fighting
position without having to re-boresight before zeroing.
B-62. Test vehicles to ensure that they meet boresight retention requirements. Use your most accurate
boresighting equipment to test boresight retention. Due to the extent of boresight equipment errors, the
retention standard for field-testing is strictly held to 1 mil.
B-63. You can measure boresight retention during a tactical road march or any other movement exercise
that requires no adjustment of the boresight knobs. You can measure it after moving any distance; you need
not travel 50 miles.
B-64. Boresight retention testing helps crews learn what conditions typically affect boresight retention on
their vehicle. They must know this so they can determine when to re-boresight their weapons.
z
Obtain a 25-mm boresight kit that passes the kit accuracy test.
z
Prepare, lay the 25-mm gun, and align the ISU day reticle as described in previously.
z
Tape the covers of the boresight knobs to prevent accidental movement or adjustment.
z
Record distance traveled and temperature variations during the vehicle operations. For example,
record extreme temperatures and precipitation.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-47
Appendix B
Test boresight retention.
Return vehicle to same position it was in when the weapons were last boresighted.
Prepare to test boresight retention as previously described.
Insert the boresight kit into the 25-mm gun.
Align the ISU reticle with the ISU cross on the panel using a gun lay pattern ending in
elevation.
Determine boresight retention.
The weapon meets the 1-mil field standard if the 25-mm cross on the panel falls on or
within the 2-mil circle on the boresight telescope (see Figure B-58).
The weapon fails to meet the standard if the 25-mm cross on the panel falls outside the 2mil circle on the boresight telescope.
Figure B-58. Boresight retention met
PANEL CONSTRUCTION
B-65. The panel can be constructed locally.
Panel Dimensions and Features

B-66. The close-in boresight panel is 4 feet by 8 feet. Measure the location of the center of each cross from
the lower left corner of the panel (see Table B-2).
Table B-2. Distance (in inches) between crosses and lower left hand
corner or close-in boresight panel
Reference Cross
Direction
Right
Up
TOW
19
35
ISU
41
31
AUX
49
31
63
31
25-mm
64
14
COAX
74
19
B-67. The lines of all crosses, except the "T," measure 1/2 inch long. The 1-inch lines of the "T" are made
of steel. They are screwed onto the panel to enhance the image for thermal boresighting. Lines are either
B-48
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
black or orange. Crosses viewed through a black reticle (boresight telescope and auxiliary sight) are
orange. The two references, ISU and "T," are black when viewed through the 25-mm reticle (see Table B3).
Table B-3. Cross colors and line widths
Reference Cross
Feature
Color
Width (Inches)
TOW
ISU
Orange
1/2
Black
1/2
AUX
Black
1
25-mm
Orange
1/2
Orange
1/2
COAX
Orange
1/2
B-68. Table B-4 shows the length of each arm on the crosses. The 8-inch upper and lower lines of the 25mm cross have ranging gaps from 4 to 6 inches from the center of the cross.
Table B-4. Length of lines on crosses
Reference Cross
ARM
TOW
Upper
Lower
Right
Left
8
8
8
8
ISU
10
10
4
8
AUX
0
8
4
4
6
6
6
6
25-mm
COAX
8
8
6
6
8
6
6
6
Supplies
B-69. If the names of crosses are not painted on, then use 3-inch vinyl stick-on letters to spell TOW, ISU,
AUX, 25-mm, and COAX. You will need
z
One eachplywood, exterior, 4- by 8-foot sheet, 3/4-inch.
z
One eachsheet steel, 1-inch wide, 15 1/2-inches long.
z
Four eachscrews, wood, flat-head, size 6, length 3/4 inches.
z
One eachwhite paint primer, exterior, quart (oil or alkyd base).
z
One eachwhite paint, exterior, quart (latex or oil base).
z
One eachblack paint, exterior, pint (latex or oil base).
z
One eachorange paint, exterior, pint (latex or oil base).
z
One eachpaint thinner or brush cleaner.
z
One eachpackage of medium-grit sandpaper.
Equipment
B-70. You will also need the following equipment:
z
One eachstraightedge, 8 feet long.
z
Two eachC-clamps.
z
One eachframing square.
z
One eachtape measure at least 8 feet longer.
z
Severalpaint pads, 6 inch or 8 inch; or paint brushes; or both.
z
One eachpaint brush, 3/8 inch.
z
One eachrouter.
z
One eachbit, router, straight, 1/2 inch.
z
One eachpower drill.
z
One eachbit, drill, 1/4 inch.
z
One eachjigsaw.
z
One eachpencil.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-49
Appendix B
Procedures
B-71. If you can measure, paint, and use a jigsaw, router, and drill, then you can construct the panel
yourself. Use a router to cut grooves for the crosses. This simplifies painting them, because all you have to
do is to paint in the grooves:
z
Sand the front, back, and edge of the plywood to remove dirt and grease.
z
Mark the words "LOW, LEFT" on the lower left-hand corner of the panel.
z
To mark the TOW cross, use a pencil and the 8-foot long straightedge (see Figure B-59).
Mark 19 inches to the right "A" of the lower left edge of the panel. (Figure B-59 shows that
the TOW cross is 19 inches from the left edge of the panel.).
Mark 19 inches to the right "B" of the upper left edge of the panel.
Draw a line connecting the two marks made at "A" and "B".
Mark (C) 35 inches up from the bottom edge of panel (along 8-foot side).
Mark (D) 35 inches up from the lower right edge of the panel at "D".
Draw a line connecting the two marks made at "C" and "D".
Mark "E," "F," "G," and "H" at a distance of 8 inches from the center of the cross formed by
the lines drawn. Table B-4 shows the length of each arm.
z
Mark the ISU, AUX, 25-mm, and COAX crosses as follows:
Using the data from the RIGHT direction row of Table B-2, mark the vertical lines of the
crosses as previously described for the TOW cross.
Using the data from the UP direction row of Table B-2, mark the horizontal lines of the
crosses as previously described for the TOW cross.
Mark the length of each arm of each cross using the data from Table B-4.
z
Rout each cross as follows:
Set the router's depth shallow, at either 1/32 inch or 3/64 inch. This keeps the router from
cutting through the first layer of the plywood.
Clamp the straightedge to the wood to make a jig (guide) for the router.
Use the router to cut grooves between the tick marks for the lines of the cross.
z
Apply a coat of primer to the front, back, and edge of the panel. Avoid letting the paint build up
in the grooves. Let the primer dry.
z
Apply a coat of white paint to the entire panel. Let the paint dry.
B-50
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-59. Position of TOW cross

z
z
Paint the crosses using a 3/8-inch paintbrush and colors described in Table B-3. Let this paint
dry also.
Make the "T" as follows:
Use a jigsaw and cut the steel strip into two sections, one 8 inches long and the other 7
1/2inches long.
In each section, drill a 1/4-inch hole 1 1/2 inches from each end, so each section will have
two holes in it.
Apply a coat of primer to each section. Let the primer dry.
Apply a coat of black paint to each section. Let the paint dry.
Mount the "T" as follows:
Lay a straight edge along the right arm of the ISU cross.
Start at the edge of the right arm and draw a 9-inch line along the straightedge.
Align the 8-inch strip of steel on the line. The left edge of the strip must touch the right
edge of the right arm of the ISU cross.
Mount the strip using two wood screws.
Center the 7 1/2-inch strip crossways beneath the 8-inch strip to form the letter "T".
Mount the 7 1/2-inch strip using two more wood screws.

Label the crosses using vinyl letters and numbers. Apply labels as shown in Figure B-43.
SECTION III PRE-FIRE CHECKS

B-72. Before conducting live fire, the crew performs pre-fire checks.
z
The crew uses a checklist similar to that shown in Table B-5 and to the turret preventative
maintenance checks and services (PMCS) outlined in TM 9-2350-252-10-2 or TM 9-2350-28410-2 to reduce vehicle problems on the firing range.
z
Bradley A3 crews can make a pre-fire checklist using the example shown in Table B-6 on page
B-52 and Table B-7 on page B-53; and in the PMCS provided in TM 9-2350-294-10-2-1.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-51
Appendix B
PRE-FIRE CHECKLIST FOR ODS AND BELOW

Table B-5. Example format for pre-fire checklist
GNR
BC
STEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
GUNNERS CHECKS
Ensure the 25-mm gun is cleared.
Ensure that before-operation PMCS has been completed on the hull and the turret.
Ensure the barrel is locked in (grab it and twist, remove the muzzle brake plug).
Ensure the receiver is locked in, and that the breech is properly lubricated.
Ensure the bolt and track are lubricated, and that the track hook is locked.
Ensure the bolt is locked in sear.
Ensure the manual SAFE is on.
Verify the timing and install the feeder.
Ensure the BPI is locked in sear.
Ensure the straight drive shaft is locked in.
Ensure the power cable is properly attached and securely fastened.
Ensure the feeder handle locks in place without resistance.
Ensure the AP and HE feed and link eject-chutes are secure (front, back, top and bottom).
Ensure the sear retractor is in the outmost position (flush with receiver).
Ensure the feed shaft stops neither protrude nor bend.
Ensure the feed-select solenoid operates manually.
Manually cycle the 25-mm gun in the AP and HE.
Ensure that the feed-select solenoid operates properly in power mode (select AP and HE SS, LO,
HI).
Power cycle the 25-mm gun AP and HE. Use the gunners, VCs and manual handwheel triggers.
Ensure the gun fan activates when you squeeze each trigger.
Manually check the turrets ability to elevate, depress, and traverse.
Elevate and traverse the gun. Traverse the turret 360 degrees in normal and fast turret modes.
Raise and lower the TOW launcher. Ensure the launcher elevates and depresses properly.
Ensure that the ISU operates properly:
a. Clean the optics (the eyepieces and outside lens).
b. Ensure the correct reticle appears when you select AP, HE, TOW, and the coax.
c. Ensure the superelevation changes as you rotate the range-select knob.
d. Ensure the ammunition and range settings are correct.
e. Ensure you can focus the thermal sight in high magnification.
f. Ensure the defogger is operating.
Ensure you can null the drift out of the system.
Boresight the 25-mm gun, the coax, the TOW, the auxiliary sight, and the LRF, as required.
Ensure chemical, biological, radiological, nuclear (CBRN) operates.
Ensure the 25-mms ready boxes upload with no more than two rounds above the forwarder.
VEHICLE COMMANDER CHECKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B-52
Ensure the coax is cleared and that the barrel is securely locked in the receiver.
Ensure the azimuth (AZ) and elevation (EL) knobs turn freely.
Install the coax. Ensure that it locks with the front and rear pins.
Ensure the coax feed chute fastens at both ends.
Charge the coax. Check the chamber and manually ride the bolt forward.
Power cycle the coax from the VCs, gunners, and manual handwheel triggers.
Charge the coax ready box and place it on SAFE.
Ensure the coax ready box is on board.
Check communications.
a. Ensure the red, yellow, and green flags are on board.
b. Conduct radio checks:
Administration net.
Firing net.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
BRADLEY A3 GUNNERS PRE-FIRE CHECKLIST

Table B-6. Example format for Bradley A3 gunners pre-fire checklist, part 1
GNR
STEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3 September 2009
GUNNERS CHECKS
Ensure the pre-operational PMCS has been completed on the hull and turret.
Ensure the receiver is locked in.
Ensure the barrel is locked in (grab it and twist, remove the muzzle brake plug).
Ensure the bolt and track are lubricated and locked in the receiver.
Ensure the bolt is locked in sear.
Ensure the manual safe is on.
Ensure the BPI is locked in sear.
Ensure the straight drive shaft is locked in.
Ensure the AP and HE quick-release link guides are locked in (top and bottom).
Ensure the AP and HE feed and link eject-chutes are secured (front, back, top and
bottom).
Ensure the manual sear retractor is out (flush with receiver).
Ensure the feed shaft stops neither protrude nor bend.
Ensure the weapons power cable is properly attached and securely fastened.
Ensure the feeder handle locks in place.
Ensure the feed select-solenoid operates properly in the manual mode.
Ensure the sear light is on, but not flashing.
Manually cycle the 25-mm gun in the AP and HE.
Ensure the feed-select solenoid operates properly in power mode (select AP and HE
SS, LO, HI).
Power cycle the 25-mm gun AP and HE. Use the GHS and manual handwheel triggers.
Ensure that the fans activate (and operate for about 75 seconds) after one trigger pull.
In the power mode, using the GHS, elevate and depress the gun, and traverse the
turret.
Raise and lower the TOW launcher. Check the SCB to ensure the TOW launcher UP
indicator lamp lights. Check with the driver to ensure the launcher UP indicator lamp
lights up on his instrument panel.
Adjust the IBAS binocular displays brightness and contrast.
Adjust the IBAS day TV (DTV) focus in WFOV and NFOV.
Ensure the DVO is focused.
Adjust the FLIRs focus, gain, and level in WFOV and NFOV.
Adjust and ensure symbology is present in the gunners binocular display, with no
flashing M.
Select the FLIRs polarity and zoom.
Ensure all of the reticles for the DTV, FLIR, and DVO are adjusted for the desire
brightness.
Ensure the TAS is nulled and aligned.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-53
Appendix B
BRADLEY A3 COMMANDERS PRE-FIRE CHECKLIST

Table B-7. Example format for Bradley A3 commanders pre-fire checklist, part 2
CDR
STEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
COMMANDERS CHECKS
Ensure the front and rear mounting pins are seated properly.
Ensure the coax feed chute is fastened at both ends.
Charge the coax and check the chamber for obstructions.
Power cycle the coax from the GHS, CHS, and manual handwheel triggers, manually
riding the bolt forward.
Charge the coax and place it on SAFE.
Ensure the coax ready box is uploaded.
Ensure all indicators and displays operate by performing a lamp test.
Ensure the system built-in test is 100% complete as indicated on the CTD.
Acknowledge all CTD pop-up messages and check the malfunction (MAL) advisory menu
for failure messages.
Ensure the CIV is unstowed.
Select CIV video on the commanders RBD.
Move the CIV in elevation and depression and traverse under control of the CHS.
Ensure the commanders RBD is adjusted for FLIR and day TV for all models of
operation using the CSCP.
Adjust and ensure that symbology is present in the CIV binocular display.
Ensure the CIV drift is nulled out.
Ensure IBAS video is selectable on the commanders RBD. Ensure that the
commanders override symbology is present when the commander elevates or depresses
the gun and traverse the turret using the CHS.
Ensure the ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS are set to the days-estimated values.
Update it if significant weather occurs or if the temperature changes.
Ensure all weapon systems are boresighted IAW with the instructions provided in the
boresight menu on the CTD.
Ensure the RED and GREEN range flags are displayed.
Ensure the battlecarry (range ammo and weapon) is selected.
Digital communication setup. Ensure the
z
FFCS initial setup follows unit SOP.
z
MASTER CONTROL STATION setup follows unit SOP.
z
EPLRS is set up for operation.
z
SINCGARS is set up for operation.
z
FBCB2 is green on COMMS and PLGR.
SECTION IV ZEROING PROCEDURES

B-73. Zeroing the 25-mm gun allows the gunner to confirm the weapon systems boresight and to adjust
the sight reticle relative to the impact of the round. Whereas boresighting aligns the ISU LOS and the
weapon systems point of aim, zeroing allows finer alignment (TM 9-2350-252-10-2, TM 9-2350-284-10-2,
and TM 9-2350-294-10-2).
PROCEDURES FOR ZEROING THE 25-MM, ODS, AND BELOW

B-74. After boresighting the 25-mm gun, zero it manually. Zero the Bradley on a level surface. Zero the
25-mm gun at 1,200 meters and the coax at 800 meters. Use the most accurate ammunition available.
Avoid switching between HE and AP ammunition, because that changes superelevation in the ISU. (If any
problems with superelevation occur during firing, notify unit maintenance.) Both the gunner and the VC
B-54
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
must observe the strike of the round through their respective primary sights. To fire a round, lay the reticle
on the target and squeeze the manual trigger switch. If the round strikes within the center of the reticle
circle, the 25-mm gun is zeroed. If the round does not strike within the center of the reticle circle, adjust
the boresight control knobs to align the reticle with the round impact. Then, re-lay the reticle and fire
another round. Repeat this procedure until either the 25-mm gun is zeroed or three rounds are fired. If the
three rounds are fired before the gun is zeroed the gun, then the Master Gunner must check the system to
determine if the problem is mechanical. After zeroing the 25-mm gun to the daysight, leave the gun aimed
at the same point on the target. The crew will adjust the nightsight and auxiliary sight reticles to the
daysights point of aim. This does not require the crew to fire any more zeroing rounds.
Note. After zeroing, record the boresight control knob numbers. Then, should something jostle
the weapon boresight control knobs, the crew can simply reset them.
PROCEDURES FOR ZEROING THE COAX, ODS, AND BELOW

B-75. The gunner and VC should work together to zero the coax. Fire a short burst of 10 to 15 rounds and
use your primary sight to observe the impact of the tracer. The VC watches through his sight extension.
After the tracer impacts, the VC moves the AZ and EL knobs to adjust the impact to the reticle aiming
point. Repeat this procedure until the coax is zeroed.
Note. After zeroing, Bradley Operation Desert Storm (ODS) crews must ensure that they
realign the reticles of the laser range finder (LRF) and of the gun.
PROCEDURES FOR ZEROING, A3 ONLY

B-76. Zero the Bradley A3 on a level surface. Zero the 25-mm to a target at 1,200 meters and the coax to a
target at 800 meters in front of and at the same elevation as the vehicle. Once the vehicle is zeroed, the
vehicles computer will remember the zero until someone changes it or until the system suffers a
catastrophic memory loss. The Bradley A3 crew can save their calculations in vehicle records or
commander notes. Then, to avoid having to boresight and zero again in the future, they can simply verify
their calculations before range operations.
Note. If procedures in this manual differ from CTD procedures, follow the CTD procedures.
Zero IBAS to 25-MM Gun

B-77. To zero the gun in the daytime, refer to the A3 zero screens on the CTD.
z
If the crew cannot zero the 25-mm gun within three rounds, notify the Master Gunner.
z
Do not press CONTINUE. This would close the 25-mm screen, which would in turn cause the
A3 system to move to the next screen during zeroing procedures, leaving the 25-mm improperly
zeroed.
Step 1. Use the direct-view optics (DVO) (preferred) or the TV or forward looking, infrared
(FLIR) (using FLIR or TV switch on the gunners handstation (GHS) to select TV or FLIR)
for best viewing.
Step 2. Select HI MAG (narrow field of view [NFOV]) using the HI/LO switch on the
GHS.
Step 3. Center the Target Acquisition System (TAS) reticle on the target using the traverse
and elevation (T&E) handwheels.
Step 4. Range target using the LRF, or enter range manually on the Gunners Sight Control
Panel (GSCP).
Step 5. Repeat Step 3 if required.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-55
Appendix B
Step 6. Cycle a ghost round.

Step 7. Have the commander observe the impact of the round.
Step 8. Fire one tracer round at the target.
Step 9. Ensure the TAS reticle still aligns with the zero target. Re-aim as needed.
Step 10. Press AIM POINT.
Step 11. Enter the TAS reticle at the impact point using the CHS or the GHS.
Step 12. Press CALCULATE.
Step 13. To use the new values, press SAVE. Repeat Steps 7 through 14 until you have
zeroed the 25-mm gun or until you have fired three rounds.
Step 14. Center the TAS reticle on the target using the T&E handwheels.
Zero Auxiliary Sight to 25mm. To verify the zero using the backup sight (AUX), follow the
steps shown below. If you cannot align the auxiliary sight to the 25mm within two rounds,
notify the unit Master Gunner.
Step 1. Verify that the TAS reticle aligns with the zero target.
Step 2. Check the backup sight reticles center vertical line aligns with the target. (To move
reticle in AZ, loosen horizontal adjustment lockscrew and turn horizontal adjustment screw.
Use screwdriver).
Step 3. Align reticle so that the AP range line aligns with the target at the appropriate range.
(To move reticle in elevation, loosen locknut on elevation lever and adjust thumbscrews.
Use wrench and socket).
Step 4. Verify that the TAS reticle and the AUX reticle range line are both on target.
Step 5. Have commander observe round impact point.
Step 6. Fire one confirmation tracer round at the zero target.
Step 7. If round does not hit the target, verify TAS reticle is center mass of zero target.
Zero Auxiliary Sight to Coax. To zero the coax, use the checklist shown below.
Step 1. Ideally, use the DVO. If you use the TV FLIR, do so only at night.
Step 2. Select HI MAG (NFOV) using the HI/LO switch on the GHS.
Step 3. Using the T&E handwheels, center the AUX sight on the target. Use the HE range
line (the outer, broken range lines) for the range displayed in the DVO (800-meter target).
Step 4. Range the target using the LRF or manually index it on the GSCP.
Step 5. Using the T&E handwheels, center the AUX sight on the target using the HE range
lines for the range displayed in the DVO (800 meters).
Make the following adjustments with the coax knobs, not with the AUX sight.
Step 6. Have the commander observe the round impact.
Step 7. Fire one burst of 10 to 15 rounds at the target.
Step 8. Open the coax access doors. Manually move the coax AZ and EL knobs. This will
move the strike of the rounds to center mass of the coax target.
Step 9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 until you zero the coax. If you cannot zero the coax in
three bursts, notify the unit Master Gunner.
Zero Coax to TAS. To zero the coax to the TAS, use the checklist shown below.
Step 1. Ensure that the AUX reticle still aligns with the zero target. Re-aim as needed.
Step 2. Press AIM POINT.
Step 3. Center the TAS reticle on the point of round impact using the CHS or the GHS.
Step 4. Press CALCULATE.
Step 5. To use the new values, press SAVE.
Step 6. Verify the coax zero through the TAS by firing a burst at the zero target.
B-56
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CONFIRMATION
B-78. The crew zeroes during Gunnery Table (GT) IV, Basic Main Gun. They confirm the zero during GT
V, Basic Crew Practice, and GT VI, Basic Crew Qualification. Confirming the zero allows them to ensure
the vehicle's weapon systems have retained their zero. Normally, confirmation only requires firing one or
two rounds. During confirmation, the crew might need to make some adjustments. If so, they follow the
steps previously described. Environmental parameters and TAS alignment are critical to accuracy of the
Bradley A3 weapon system. The crew aligns the TAS and adjusts for applicable environmental parameters
IAW TM 9-2350-294-10-2-1.
DANGER
SECTION V BRADLEY WEAPONS SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS

B-79. Malfunctions cost a lot of firing time on BFV ranges. Crew error causes most malfunctions. Crews
misfire procedures before correcting any error. If they are not sure that the 25mm is clear, they can use the
cleaning rod to ensure that it is clear.
DANGER
WHEN A MALFUNCTION OCCURS, ALWAYS PERFORM MISFIRE
PROCEDURES BEFORE TAKING ANY OTHER CORRECTIVE
ACTION.
25-MM GUN
B-80. If none of these steps corrects the malfunction, notify the Master Gunner or maintenance personnel.
z
If the gun did not cycle, check the following:
Is the ARM-SAFE-RESET switch on SAFE?
Is the ammunition selected?

z
If the gun cycled to misfire, check the following:
Is the manual safety switch set to SAFE?
Is the tension released from the ammunition belt?
Is the gun out of ammunition?

z
If the gun cycled, but not to SEAR or MISFIRE, check for the following. Then, use the hand
crank to manually cycle the gun back to SEAR, and try again:
Is the tension released from the ammunition belt?
Is the sear retractor out?
Is the straight drive shaft down?

z
If you cannot clear a weapons malfunction IAW the TM, then you must clear it by removing the
feeder and physically inspecting the chamber for unfired ammunition.
z
If the straight drive shaft has dropped after a malfunction, remove the feeder from the receiver
and visually check the weapon for unfired ammunition.
z
The 25-mm ammunition can double feed if the protective nose caps are broken, cracked, or
missing; or if a weapon stoppage occurs and is cleared improperly.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-57
Appendix B
M240C 7.62-MM COAXIAL MACHINE GUN

z
If the bolt did not go forward, check the following:
Is the ARM-SAFE-RESET switch set to SAFE?
Is the manual safety switch set to SAFE?
Is the LO AMMO OVRD light flashing?
Is the coax solenoid plug connected?
Is the ammunition selected?

z
If the bolt did go forward, check the following:
Is the ammunition belt seated in the feed tray?
Is there a round or casing stuck in the chamber?
Is the machine gun out of ammunition?
M257 SMOKE GRENADES

B-82. When smoke grenades fail to launch, perform immediate action, then
z
Use the vehicle intercom system to tell the driver to move the vehicle to a safe area. Ensure the
driver moves it at least 125 meters from the nearest vehicle, building, person, or equipment.
z
Move the grenade launch switch to ON.
z
z
z
Move the smoke grenade-launcher switch to OFF.
z
Open the commanders hatch cover.
z
z
Have helpers leave the vehicle.
z
z
z
z
Tell the gunner that the smoke launchers are clear; have helpers clear the turret area.
z
z
malfunctioned.
z
Notify unit maintenance that the M257 smoke grenade launchers on the vehicle malfunctioned.
TURRET DRIVE
z
If the turret will not traverse, check the following:
Is the turret travel lock locked?
Is the drive motor in manual?
Is the turret drive on? If so, turn it off for 30 seconds, then back on.
z
If the gun will not elevate or depress, check the following:
Is the drive motor in manual?
Is the turret drive on? If so, turn it off for 30 seconds, then back on.
B-58
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
COMMUNICATIONS
B-84. If you lose communications, check the following:
z
z
z
Has the built-in test (BIT) failed on the master control station?
z
Is the combat vehicle crewman (CVC) cord disconnected?
z
Does the VIC1 Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) display a green
status?

B-85. After firing, the crew clears all weapon systems and removes all ammunition residue from the
exterior of the vehicle. Leaders verify that crews clear all weapon systems IAW AR 385-63. On training
ranges, range safety officers verify that crews have cleared all weapon systems. Post-fire checks prevent
many accidents.
SECTION VII BFV RANGE DETERMINATION

B-86. Range determination greatly affects target engagement. Range-determination errors cause more firstround misses than do deflection errors. Those that cause the first round to fly beyond the target present the
greatest challenge, because observing and adjusting from a round that lands out of sight is hard. The VC
bears the main responsibility for determining range. He has more ways to do so than do other crew
members. Also, he knows more than they do about the terrain and tactical situation.
BFV LASER RANGE FINDER

B-87. Eye-safe laser range finder (ELRF) (BFV A2 ODS and BFV A3). The ELRF allows the commander
or gunner to rapidly and accurately determine the target range. The four-digit range display is in 5-meter
increments from 190 to 9,990 meters plus or minus 10 meters. See Figure B-60 through Figure B-62 for
examples of BFV sight reticles.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-59
Appendix B
Figure B-60. 25-mm sight reticle (M2/M3)
Figure B-61. 25-mm sight reticle (ODS)
B-60
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-62. BFVA3 reticle selection
ISU HORIZONTAL RANGING STADIA (CHOKE SIGHT)

B-88. The ISU has a choke sight that can be used to estimate the range to BMP-type targets, that is, any
target that measures 1.8 meters high. Since the hull of a BMP is a standard hull that is used on various
vehicles throughout the world, the ranging stadia can be used for accurately ranging to these different
vehicles (see Figure B-63).
z
To use the choke sight, the gunner moves the turret until the ranging stadia line appear to touch
the vehicle in the following manner:
z
Align the horizontal line to the bottom (track) of the target vehicle.
z
Move the turret horizontally along the target until the top of the hull appears to touch the stadia
line. The range is read from the stadia line at the point where the top of the hull touches. If this
point is between the tick marks, estimation must be made, and the range is then indexed into the
ISU. Then, the gunner or commander should re-lay the reticle on the target.
z
The choke sight can be used to estimate range to targets in turret-down positions. The gunner
aligns the bottom horizontal line to the bottom of the target and aligns the stadia line until the
top of the target appears to touch the lines. The gunner reads this range and divides that number
in half. This technique is less accurate than ranging a fully exposed target.
Note. Choke only the hull, not the whole vehicle. Do not choke weapons or lights mounted on
top of the turret.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-61
Appendix B
Figure B-63. Choking a hull-down vehicle
ISU RETICLE LEAD LINE AND MIL RELATION

B-89. Lead lines of the reticle can be used to determine the range to a target, since each lead line is 2.5 mils
from the center of the reticle. First, the gunner must classify the target as a frontal or a flank view. (see
Figure B-64). This is accomplished by comparing the appearance of the front and side of the vehicle.
Figure B-65 illustrates the relative amount of front and side that can be seen as a BMP rotates from a full
front view (0 degrees) to a full flank view (90 degrees).
B-62
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure B-64. Frontal and flank views of a BMP
Figure B-65. Full frontal and full flank views of a BMP
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-63
Appendix B
Accurate measurement of vehicle width in mils is required when determining range with the 25mm gun reticle. The BFV reticle provides greater magnification and smaller graduated markings
on the reticle. The gunner can use the 25-mm gun reticle for range determination by using the
reference markings, which measure 2, 2.5, 3, and 5 mils.
Note. No zoom applies for the BFVA3 gun reticle.)

z
z
z
z
Determining the critical target range is based on the size of the target. Size of the target is
estimated using the mil-relation formula (see page 7-10 for a discussion of how to determine the
mil relation).
When firing armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer (APDS-T), 1,400 meters is the
maximum range for an index setting of 12.
The recommended maximum engagement range for APDS-T is 2,000 meters.
Maximum engagement range determination for the TOW is critical. Another vehicle can provide
the range or the 25-mm or coax reticle can be used. Using the 25-mm reticle, the sight picture
for TOW when the target is at the maximum engagement range (3,750 meters) is as shown in
Figure B-66.
Figure B-66. Determine TOW maximum engagement range
B-64
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Note. On ODS vehicles, the ELRF cannot be used with the TOW selected. If the ELRF must be
used to determine range to the TOW target, the crew uses the ELRF with 25mm or 7.62mm
selected. After determining the range, the crew selects the TOW. On Bradley A3 vehicles, the
gunner or VC can use the ELRF with the TOW selected.
BFVA3 IBAS/CIV RETICLE AND HORIZONTAL RANGING STADIA

B-90. The BFVA3 IBAS reticle and CIV reticle have the capability to select the default reticle, gun reticle,
air defense reticle, and horizontal ranging stadia through the CTD (see Figure B-67).
z
To estimate the range to a BMP-type target with the BFVA3 horizontal ranging stadia, refer to
horizontal ranging stadia on page 7-9.
z
To estimate the range to a BMP-type target with the aid of the BFVA3 gun reticle, see the reticle
lead line and mil relation in Table 7-4 on page 7-13.
Note. On both the IBAS and CIV, the gun reticle, air defense reticle, and horizontal ranging
stadia only display in high magnification of the Day TV and FLIR. On the IBAS, the DVO sight
will display the selected reticle in both high and low magnification (IBAS only).
z
*The BFVA3 default reticle lead lines can be used to determine the range to a target by using
the same technique discussed in TM 9-2350-252-10-2. The gunner or commander can use the
default reticle for range determination by using the reference markings (see Figure B-67). These
reference marks measure 1.2, 1.3, 2.5, and 5 mils (see Figure B-68). Reference marks 13.72 and
12.38 are not used for this technique.
Figure B-67. BFVA3 default reticle lead line and mil relation
31 May 2010
FM 3-20.2/MCWP 3-12.21, C1
B-65
Appendix B
TARGET 1
TARGET 2
Figure B-68. Determine ranges for a BMP at target 1

(1,400 meters) and target 2 (1,800 meters)
Note. For a quick reference to determine range of threat vehicles, see Table 7-4 (mil relation
for various targets) on page 7-13.
z
B-66
Using the BFVA3 default reticle, the sight picture for TOW when the target is at the maximum
engagement range (3,750 meters) is shown in Figure B-69.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2, C1
31 May 2010
Figure B-69. Determine TOW maximum engagement range for a BFVA3 default reticle
BACKUP SIGHT (AUXILIARY SIGHT)

B-91. The backup sight, known as the auxiliary (aux) sight, is used when the ISU/IBAS is not operational
or turret power has failed. The auxiliary sight has stadia lines for range determination and application of
the correct superelevation based on range. There are stadia lines for APDS-T and high-explosive
incendiary with tracer (HEI-T) ammunition. This system is used to determine the range and to engage the
frontal or flank view of a BMP.
z
The auxiliary sight has two range scales. The HE scale is on the left side of the reticle and is
represented by broken lines that extend to 3,200 meters. The AP scale is on the right side
represented by a solid line that extends to 3,400 meters (see Figure B-70). The numbers 4 and 6
represent 400 meters and 600 meters, respectively. The HE range scale continues to 32 (not
shown in figure).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-67
Appendix B
The range to a flank target is determined by elevating the gun until both the front and rear of the
target appears to be touching the AP stadia lines, as shown in Figure B-70. The range to a flank
HE target is choked in the same manner, using the HE lines.
To determine the range to a frontal target, the gunner uses the half stadia method of aligning the
center vertical ranging lines with one side of the target and aligns the appropriate ammunition
stadia line on either side of the target (see Figure B-70). When using the coax, the gunner uses
the HE stadia lines.
Figure B-70. Determine range using the auxiliary sight
B-68
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SECTION VIII TOW LIMITATIONS

B-92. Some conditions limit the TOW's firing and engagement capabilities and effectiveness. The
following is a consolidated list of the TOWs limitations:
z
Firing over water. The following should be considered when employing the TOW over water:
Firing across bodies of water wider than 1,100 meters can reduce the range of the TOW.
Signals traveling through the command-link wires short out when a large amount of the
wire falls in the water. At ranges less than 1,100 meters, submersion of the wire does not
affect missile range.
A TOW position should sit as high above and as far back from the water as the tactical
situation will allow. As soon as the vehicle occupies the position, the commander should
analyze the sector to determine if water will affect the employment of the TOW.
z
Firing over electrical wires. Contact between the command-link wires and a live high-voltage
power line can kill or injure personnel, cause a loss of control of the missile, and damage
launcher electronics.
z
Firing in windy conditions. Gusty, flanking, or quartering winds can move the missile around
during flight. As long as the crosshairs remain on the center mass of the target, the weapon
system will compensate for wind effects.
z
Firing through smoke. For the firer to maintain a proper sight picture, he must be able to see
the target. Smoke can obscure the line of sight and hide the target. TOW missiles have a xenon
beacon for tracking. In addition to the xenon beacon, TOW 2, TOW 2A, and TOW 2B missiles
also have a thermal beacon. This thermal beacon allows the gunner to track through most smoke
obscuration. When a target disappears into a smoke cloud, the firer should hold a smooth
tracking rate so that the missile will still be on target.
z
Firing through area fires. The firer follows the same visibility and target-tracking instructions
that apply to firing through smoke. The firer should also avoid firing through or over fire if he
thinks that the fire could touch the wires before missile impact. A fire can burn through the
command-link wire, causing the firer to lose control of the missile.
Precautions
B-93. Soldiers need to take the following precautions:
z
Back-Blast. The TOW weapon system has a back-blast area that extends 75 meters to the rear
of the vehicle in a 90-degree cone (see Figure B-71). This area comprises both a 50-meter
danger zone and a 25-meter caution zone. The vehicle moves so that no personnel, unarmored
vehicles, or obstructions (such as walls, embankments, or large trees) remain in the back-blast
area for its missile.
Danger zone. Flying debris can cause serious injury or damage equipment. Keep all
personnel and equipment out of the back-blast area.
Caution zone. In all training situations, keep all personnel and equipment clear of the
caution zone.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
B-69
Appendix B
Figure B-71. TOW back-blast area

z
B-70
Firing. Do not fire a damaged encased missile such as one with large dents or cracks in the
launch container. If the missile has minor bending of the end rings only, this is not serious, and
can be fired without danger. Make sure the litmus in the humidity indicator is blue-pink indicates
possible degradation in missile condition. If this happens in a training environment, return the
missile to the supply point. If it happens during combat, you can fire the missiles.
Handling Precautions. The electrolyte in the emergency battery assembly is highly corrosive. If
the battery sustains damage, electrolytes might leak out and cause serious injury, especially to the
eyes.
Report all duds or defective missiles to an explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) team.
In training, wait 30 minutes before removing a misfired missile from the launcher. (TM
9-2350-252-10-2, TM 9-2350-284-10-2, TM 9-2350-284-10-2-1, and TM 9-2350-294-102-1 provide more information.)
The command link wires are strong. Move carefully through areas where missiles were
fired.
Do not move or handle duds or defective missiles except to remove a misfire from the
launcher and place it a safe distance from the vehicle (200 meters).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Appendix C
Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation

The success of U.S. forces on the battlefield depends on the effective use of the
appropriate weapons systems against threat targets. Appendix C discusses the
procedures for employing the weapon systems on the light trucks that are available
within the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT). This includes the sights available
for each weapon system, pre-fire checks, zeroing, malfunctions, sight offsets, postfire checks, and the implementation of the Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance
System (LRAS3).
Contents
Section I Weapons Sights Available..... C-1
AN/PEQ-2A Target
Pointer/Illuminator/Aiming Light .......... C-2
AN/PAQ-4C Aiming Light ................... C-3
M145 Machine Gun Optic ................... C-3
AN/PVS-4 Individual Served Night
Vision Weapon Sight .......................... C-4
AN/TVS-5A Crew-Served Night
Vision Weapon Sight .......................... C-5
AN/PAS-13B (V)2 MWTS) and (V)3
HWTS ................................................. C-7
Section II Pre-fire Checks .................... C-15
Section III Zeroing ................................ C-15
M249 Squadron Automatic Weapon . C-16
M240B Machine Gun ........................ C-17
M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun ...... C-20
MK19 Grenade Machine Gun ........... C-22
Section IV Weapon System

Malfunctions ............................................C-23
M249 5.56-mm Squad Automatic
Weapon ............................................C-23
M240B 7.62-mm Machine Gun .........C-24
M2 HB Caliber .50 Machine Gun ......C-24
MK19 Machine Gun ..........................C-24
Communications ...............................C-25
Section V Sight Offset Information .....C-25
Borelight Dry-Zero Procedure ...........C-25
Sight Offsets for Crew-Served
Weapons ..........................................C-30
Section VI Post-fire Checks .................C-33
Section VII Long-Range Advanced
Scout Surveillance System.....................C-33
Sight Sensor Reticles .......................C-33
Boresighting ......................................C-35
SECTION I WEAPONS SIGHTS AVAILABLE

C-1. This section illustrates the sights that are available for each weapon system. This section includes
information on the most commonly used optics for crew-served weapons. The charts included in this
section outline which sights can be used with each weapon and describe their capabilities. This list is not
all-inclusive; it is not meant to replace the information in the applicable technical manuals (TM) (see
Figure C-1).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-1
Appendix C
Figure C-1. Machine gun to night vision sight matrix
AN/PEQ-2A TARGET POINTER/ILLUMINATOR/AIMING LIGHT

C-2. Target pointer/illuminator/aiming light (TPIAL) is a laser sight for use on rifles fitted with a
Picatinny rail system. The AN/PEQ-2A has two infrared laser emittersone narrow beam used for aiming
the rifle, and one wide beam used for illuminating targets, like a flashlight. The beams can only be seen
through night vision goggles. Each beam can be zeroed independently, and the illuminators radius is
adjustable. The two lasers are tied into one six-mode switch, as shown in Figure C-2.
Figure C-2. AN/PEQ-2A
C-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
AN/PAQ-4C AIMING LIGHT

C-3. This is used in conjunction with night vision goggles to direct weapon fire at night, enables highly
accurate laser aiming in darkness at maximum firing distances. The AN/PAQ-4 provides an invisible,
continuous infrared beam along the weapons line of fire, highlighting the point of impact on the target (see
Figure C-3).
Figure C-3. AN/PAQ-4C
M145 MACHINE GUN OPTIC

C-4. This is a 3.4x28 scope (see Figure C-4). A tritium-illuminated reticle provides for sighting in normal
and low-light conditions. The scope itself is nitrogen-purged to prevent fogging and is covered with an
armored coating of rubber. It can be mounted to a variety of light machine guns using standard rail mounts.
The M145 Machine Gun Optic is commonly mounted on M240 and M249 machine guns. The M145 is
unusual when compared with other optical sights in use with the U.S. military in that ballistic
compensation is in the reticle, rather than in the mount. Figure C-5 shows the ballistic reticle of the M145
MGO. The reticle is illuminated by a battery-powered LED with varying intensity settings. The mount fits
directly to any MIL-STD-1913 Picatinny rail or receiver. The optic remains zeroed despite repeated
removal from and reattachment to the weapon. The M145 is extremely resistant to shock and water
immersion and has an antireflection device and rubber lens caps. For low-light operations, the reticle can
be illuminated to show the 300-, 500-, 700-, and 800-meter aiming marks as shown in Figure C-6. The
sight is equipped with variable intensity LED illumination of the reticle. It has 10 positionsone OFF
position and 9 positions for different reticle intensity settings.
Figure C-4. M145 machine gun optic (MGO)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-3
Appendix C
Figure C-5. M14 MGO reticle
Figure C-6. M145 MGO illuminated reticle
AN/PVS-4 INDIVIDUAL SERVED NIGHT VISION WEAPON SIGHT

C-5. The AN/PVS-4 is a portable, battery-operated, second-generation image intensification device used
for observation and aimed fire of weapons at night designed for the 7.62-mm machine gun (see Figure
C-7). Figure C-8 provides an example of the AN/PVS-4 reticle.
C-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure C-7. AN/PVS-4
Figure C-8. AN/PVS-4 reticle
AN/TVS-5A CREW-SERVED NIGHT VISION WEAPON SIGHT

C-6. The AN/TVS-5A is a portable, battery-operated; Generation Three Image Intensifying (GEN III I2)
device used for observation and aimed fire of weapons at night (see Figure C-9). The AN/TVS-5A can be
tripod mounted for surveillance; however, it is generally used as a crew-served weapon sight. The
AN/TVS-5A is used with the M2 caliber .50 and the MK19 40-mm machine guns. The AN/TVS-5 has two
different reticles based upon the sights date of manufacture. The older style reticle is a ballistic reticle for
the M2 HB only (see Figure C-10). The newer style reticle is a ballistic reticle for the M2 HB and the
MK19 (see Figure C-11).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-5
Appendix C
Figure C-9. AN/TVS-5A
Figure C-10. AN/TVS-5A earlier reticle
C-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure C-11. AN/TVS-5A newer reticle
AN/PAS-13B (V)2 MWTS) AND (V)3 HWTS

C-7. The thermal weapon sight (TWS) is a lightweight, low-power, high-performance forward looking
infrared (FLIR) device that will augment existing crew-served night vision sights. The TWS is completely
passive. Although primarily designed for target detection and engagement with individual and crew-served
weapons, it can also be used for all weather surveillance. The medium weapon thermal sight (MWTS) can
effectively engage targets out to 1,100 meters (see Figure C-12). The heavy weapon thermal sight (HWTS)
can effectively engage targets out to 2,200 meters (see Figure C-13).
Figure C-12. AN/PAS-13 (V) 2 MWTS
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-7
Appendix C
Figure C-13. AN/PAS-13 (V) 3 HWTS

C-8. Figure C-14 illustrates the common display in the AN/PAS-13 family of thermal sights.
Figure C-14. TWS common display
C-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
C-9. Figure C-15 and Figure C-16 illustrate the wide field of view (WFOV) and the narrow field of view
(NFOV) of the M249 reticles in the MWTS. They also illustrate the mil reticle relationship of each reticle.
Figure C-15. MWTS M249 WFOV aim points
Figure C-16. MWTS M249 NFOV aim points
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-9
Appendix C
C-10. Figure C-17 and Figure C-18 illustrate the WFOV and the NFOV of the M240 reticles in the
MWTS. They also illustrate the mil reticle relationship of each reticle.
Figure C-17. MWTS M240 WFOV aim points
Figure C-18. MWTS M240 NFOV aim points
C-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
C-11. Figure C-19 and Figure C-20 illustrate the WFOV and the NFOV of the M2 HB reticles in the
HWTS. They also illustrate the mil reticle relationship of each reticle.
Figure C-19. HWTS M2 HB WFOV aim points
Figure C-20. HWTS M2 HB NFOV aim points
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-11
Appendix C
C-12. Figure C-21 illustrates the MK19 reticle in the HWTS. Its also illustrates the mil reticle relationship
of the reticle.
Figure C-21. HWTS MK19 aim points

C-13. Following are figures that show which sights can be used with each of the truck-mounted weapon
systems in the HBCT. The chart for each weapon also shows the maximum effective range of the weapon
and its respective sights.
Note. Because the Army is constantly improving its equipment, these charts are not meant to be
all-inclusive or a replacement for the appropriate TMs.
C-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
C-14. Figure C-22 shows available sights for the M249 Squad Automatic Weapon (SAW).
Figure C-22. Available sights for M249 SAW

C-15. Figure C-23 shows available sights for the M240B machine gun.
Figure C-23. Available sights for M240B
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-13
Appendix C
C-16. Figure C-24 shows available sights for the M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun.
Figure C-24. Available sights for M2 HB machine gun

C-17. Figure C-25 shows available sights for the MK19 grenade machine gun.
Figure C-25. Available sights for MK19 machine gun
C-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SECTION II PRE-FIRE CHECKS

C-18. Pre-fire checks of the armed truck weapon systems are important crew tasks. They help the crew
eliminate all deficiencies associated with cleaning, maintenance, and functioning of the weapon systems,
ensuring that each weapon is safe to operate.
Note. Post-fire checks, which are required after firing of a weapon system to detect any
maintenance problems incurred during firing, are covered later in this appendix.
C-19. The pre-fire checklist is used, along with the appropriate operators manuals, to prepare vehiclemounted crew-served weapons for use (see Table C-1). These weapons are the M240B 7.62-mm machine
gun (TM 9-1005-313-10), M2 HB caliber .50 machine gun (TM 9-1005-213-10), and MK19 40-mm (TM
9-1010-230-10). Crew members should ensure they reference the appropriate TM when conducting pre-fire
checks.
Table C-1. Pre-fire checklist
Weapon
Pre-fire Action
Ammunition
Check all ammunition against TB 9-1300-385.

Inspect the link alignment.
Check for long or short rounds.
Check the cleanliness. Report and turn in any corroded or damaged
rounds.
M249 5.56-mm
Squad Automatic
Weapon
Ensure the M249 is cleaned IAW TM 9-1005-201-10.

Ensure the M249 is secured to the mount.
Ensure the bore is wiped dry.
Conduct a function check of the M249.
M240B 7.62-mm
Machine Gun
Ensure the M240B is cleaned and lubricated IAW TM 9-1005-313-10.

Ensure the machine gun is installed and secured to the mount.
Ensure the machine gun is clear of ammunition.
Conduct a function check of the M240B.
M2 HB Caliber .50
Machine Gun
Ensure the M2 HB is cleaned and lubricated IAW TM 9-1005-213-10.

Ensure the machine gun is secured to the mount.
Ensure the headspace and timing are set.
Conduct a function check of the M2 HB.
MK19 40-mm
Grenade Launcher
Machine Gun
Ensure the MK19 is cleaned IAW TM 9-1010-230-10.

Ensure the MK19 is secured to the mount.
Conduct a function check of the MK19.
SECTION III ZEROING

C-20. The concept of zeroing is simple; it is no more than the method to adjust the sights of the weapon so
the point of aim of the sights and the point of impact of the rounds are the same at a given range. Before
zeroing, the crew conducts thorough pre-fire checks to ensure that the turret and weapon system operate
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-15
Appendix C
properly. This prevents many of the common malfunctions that can occur during firing. If a malfunction
does occur, the crew tries to clear it. If they cannot, they report the malfunction to the unit Master Gunner
and/or maintenance team chief as appropriate. After firing the weapon systems, the crew conducts a postfire check.
M249 SQUADRON AUTOMATIC WEAPON

C-21. This discussion provides information on how to set the sights for elevation and windage for the
M249 SAW. It also includes information on how to make corrections if the initial setting on the windage
knob or peep sight is not accurate. Figure C-26 shows the rear sight of the M249 SAW. On a 10-meter
target, each paster is 1 cm. Therefore, two clicks on the windage knob in either direction moves the strike
of the round left or right 1 cm, and two turns on the peep sight moves the strike of the round up or down 1
cm. For example, if the shot group was 2 cm above and 1 cm to the right of the paster, sight corrections are
made first by correcting the windage. In this case, the windage knob is rotated two clicks toward the
buttstock (clockwise). The elevation knob is rotated four turns toward the buttstock (clockwise) to lower
the strike of the round.
Figure C-26. M249 SAW rear sight
ELEVATION
C-22. Adjustments for elevation (range) require the automatic rifleman to turn the elevation knob (closest
to the buttstock) on the rear sight to the desired range setting. Range settings are graduated increments
from 300 to 1,000 meters. Even-numbered settings are on the left side of the scale wheel and are numbered
4, 6, 8, 10, which represent 400, 600, 800, and 1,000 meters, respectively. Odd-numbered settings are on
the right side of the scale wheel and are marked with the number 3 and three index lines, which represent
300, 500, 700, and 900 meters, respectively. Rotation of the elevation knob toward the muzzle
(counterclockwise) increases the range, while rotation toward the buttstock (clockwise) decreases the
range. Fine adjustments, like zeroing, are made by adjusting the peep sight. Each 180-degree turn equals a
half-mil change in elevation, which equals a half-cm change in impact at a range of 10 meters. Clockwise
(to the right) rotations decrease elevation, while counterclockwise (to the left) rotations increase elevation.
The peep sight can be turned nine 180-degree turns from top to bottom. To make the peep sight easier to
grasp, the elevation knob is turned to its highest point (1,000 meters). The appropriate adjustment is made
for the peep sight, and then the sight is returned to the desired range. Whenever the range is readjusted, the
point of aim is never changed. The point of aim is the center base of the target.
C-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
WINDAGE CORRECTION
C-23. Adjustments for windage are made by traversing the rear sight right and left along the sliding scale.
The sliding scale is marked or graduated with index lines. Each index line is equal to a half-mil change in
direction or a half-cm change of impact at 10 meters. Rotation of the windage knob (closest to the muzzle
end) toward the muzzle (counterclockwise) moves the rear sight aperture right, which moves the strike of
the rounds right. Rotation toward the buttstock (clockwise) moves the aperture left, which moves the strike
of the rounds left.
10-METER ZEROINGSETTING OF THE SIGHTS (MECHANICAL ZEROING)

C-24. The gunner indexes or places the elevation knob on a range of 700 meters. He centers the rear peep
sight by rotating it clockwise (right) as far as it will go, then rotating counterclockwise (left) five clicks or
half-turns. He rotates the windage knob toward the muzzle until the peep sight is completely to the right,
then rotates the windage knob toward the buttstock twelve clicks to the left. This places the peep sight in
the approximate center of the sight. Each sight may vary as to how many clicks are needed. To check the
sight, the gunner starts with the sight all the way to the right and, while counting the clicks, rotates the
windage knob until it stops on the left side. He divides the clicks by two. If the click is an uneven number,
he rounds it up. To center the sight, he rotates the windage knob toward the center (right) while counting
the appropriate number of clicks. He adjusts the sliding scale at the rear of the sight to center the large
index line under the zeroed windage mark on the sight. Two threads should be showing on the front sight
post. If more or less are showing, the gunner turns in the weapon for maintenance. Procedures for windage
and elevation corrections for the M249 are summarized in Table C-2.
Table C-2. Windage and elevation (peep sight) correction
chart for the M249 SAW
Range
Movement of the Sight
Inches
Centimeters
100 m
1 Click =
5 cm
200 m
1 Click =
10 cm
300 m
1 Click =
15 cm
400 m
1 Click =
20 cm
500 m
1 Click =
10
25 cm
600 m
1 Click =
12
30 cm
700 m
1 Click =
14
35 cm
800 m
1 Click =
16
40 cm
900 m
1 Click =
18
45 cm
Note. The primary and spare barrels are zeroed by making adjustments on the front sight.
M240B MACHINE GUN

C-25. This discussion provides information on how to make corrections if the initial setting is not accurate.
At a 10-meter target, each paster is 1 cm. Therefore, 10 clicks on the adjusting screw (windage) of the front
sight assembly in either direction moves the strike of the round left or right 1 cm. One complete turn on the
front sight blade moves the strike of the round up or down 1 cm. Figure C-27 shows the rear sight for the
M240B.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-17
Appendix C
Figure C-27. M240B rear sight
ELEVATION CORRECTION
C-26. If the shot group is above or below the point of aim, the front sight posts must be adjusted using the
front sight-adjusting tool. Unlock the front-sight retaining strap and rotate it up. If the shot group is above
the point of aim, rotate the sight post counterclockwise. If the shot group is below the point of aim, rotate
the sight post clockwise. Rotating the front sight post counterclockwise brings the point of impact down on
the target. Rotating the front sight post clockwise brings the point of impact up on the target. At a range of
10 meters, one-half turn of the front sight post blade will move the point of impact by 5 mm (.5 cm). One
full turn of the front sight post blade moves the point of impact by 1 cm. After rotating the front sight post
blade the desired amount, lower the retaining strap, but do not lock it down until elevation is confirmed. If
the front sight post blade must be rotated counterclockwise to a point where its base is past flush (Number
2 blade), it should be replaced with a Number 1 front sight blade, which is shorter than a Number 2 blade.
If the front sight post blade must be rotated counterclockwise to a point where its base is more than one full
turn past flush (Number 1 blade), it should be replaced with a Number 2 front sight blade, which is taller
than a Number 1 blade.
WINDAGE CORRECTION
C-27. If the shot group is to the left of the point aim, move the front sight assembly to the right to shift the
point of impact to the left (towards the point of aim). Using the front sight adjusting tool, loosen (turn
counterclockwise) the adjusting screw on the front sight assembly the desired amount. Then tighten (turn
clockwise) the opposite side screw on the left exactly the same number of clicks. At a range of 10 meters,
one complete rotation of the adjusting screws will move the point of impact 8 mm (.8 cm). As the adjusting
screws are turned, noticeable clicks (eight per revolution) should be detected. Each click is 1 mm (.1 cm).
If this is not the case, have the armorer repair it. The front sight windage adjusting procedure is the
combination of creating slack on one side and then taking up that slack from the opposite side. The front
sight protector assembly should always be clamped between the heads of the two opposing screws.
Remember, each time one screw is loosened or backed off, the opposite screw must be turned exactly the
same amount. Check for play in the front sight assembly by lightly clamping it between finger and thumb
and attempting to move the sight assembly laterally. If you feel no play, the windage adjustment is
completed. If play is evident, carefully check both screws for looseness.
C-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
10-METER ZEROING (MECHANICAL ZEROING)

C-28. Ten-meter zeroing (mechanical zeroing) is the standardized starting point for all weapons in the U.S.
Army. The gunner places the range scale on a range of 500 meters on the rear sight. He gets the front sight
post blade approximately centered for both elevation and windage. The gunner identifies what number
blade is on the weapon for elevation, using the following considerations:
z
Number 1 blade (low9.8 mm). Unlock the retaining strap and unscrew (counterclockwise) until
the base of the blade is flush with the front sight protector surface, then make one full turn
(counterclockwise). This should put the base of the blade past the base of the protector. Screw in
(clockwise), counting the number of turns it takes until it stops, making sure the blade is on line
with the barrel. If needed, back off until the blade is in line. Unscrew (counterclockwise) half
the number of turns. This brings the blade to about the center.
z
Number 2 blade (high11.8 mm). Unlock the retaining strap and unscrew (counterclockwise)
until the base of the blade is flush with the front sight protector surface. Screw in (clockwise);
counting the number of turns it takes until it stops, making sure the blade is in line with the
barrel. If needed, back off until the blade is in line. Unscrew (counterclockwise) half the number
of turns. This procedure brings the blade to about the center. Assume the prone position and
sight on the target. Ensure windage is accomplished by making sure the front sight protector is
centered left and right on its base.
C-29. Procedures for windage and elevation corrections for the M240B are summarized in Table C-3 and
Table C-4.
Table C-3. Elevation correction chart for the M240B
Range
Inches
Centimeters
100 m
1 Full Turn =
4.25
10.8 cm
200 m
1 Full Turn =
8.5
21.6 cm
300 m
1 Full Turn =
12.75
32.4 cm
400 m
1 Full Turn =
17
43.2 cm
500 m
1 Full Turn =
21.25
54 cm
600 m
1 Full Turn =
25.5
64.8 cm
700 m
1 Full Turn =
39.75
75.6 cm
800 m
1 Full Turn =
34
86.4 cm
900 m
1 Full Turn =
38.25
97.2 cm
Table C-4. Windage correction chart for the M240B

Range
Inches
Centimeters
100 m
1 Full Turn =
3.15
8 cm
200 m
1 Full Turn =
6.3
16 cm
300 m
1 Full Turn =
9.45
24 cm
400 m
1 Full Turn =
12.6
32 cm
500 m
1 Full Turn =
15.75
40 cm
600 m
1 Full Turn =
18.9
48 cm
700 m
1 Full Turn =
22
56 cm
800 m
1 Full Turn =
25.2
64 cm
900 m
1 Full Turn =
28.35
72 cm
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-19
Appendix C

C-30. This discussion provides information on how to set the sight for elevation and windage for the M2
HB machine gun. Figure C-28 shows an example of the adjustable rear sight of the M2. A properly zeroed
M2 gives the gunner the highest probability of hit for most combat targets with the least adjustment to the
point of aim. There are three methods of zeroing/targeting used with the caliber .50 machine gun:
z
Ten-meters range zeroing.
z
Field zeroing.
z
Night or limited visibility zeroing.
Figure C-28. M2 HB rear sight
10-METER RANGE ZEROING

C-31. Setting the zero for the 10-meter range allows the gunner to learn basic traverse and search
techniques with the M2 machine gun while using the standard machine gun target. As with other weapons,
the sight on the M2 must also be set at an initial start point. The following procedures apply:
z
Rear Sight. The rear sight is set at 1,000. Use these guidelines:
Set elevation. Raise the rear sight by lifting straight up until it snaps into the upright
position. Adjust the range scale to 1,000 yards by rotating the elevation screw knob in the
necessary direction. (Clockwise moves the scale up; counterclockwise moves the scale
down).
Set windage. Rotate the windage knob until the zero index mark on the base rear sight is
aligned with the index mark on the top of the receiver. (Clockwise moves the windage scale
to the left; counterclockwise moves it to the right.)
Note. Obtain the proper sight picture by looking through the zero aperture and centering the
front sight blade in it. Once the sight alignment is obtained, place this combination on the center
base of the selected target.
C-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Three-Round Group. The gunner fires three single rounds, loaded individually, at the center
base of the aiming points on the basic machine gun marksmanship target. He fires the three
rounds without making any adjustments to the sights. The shot group must be in a 4-centimeter
circle or smaller to establish the center of the group in relation to the center base of the aiming
paster.
Grid Square Overlay. For a more accurate adjustment, the gunner moves downrange and
places the grid square overlay over pasters 1 and 2. He ensures that he aligns the overlay with
the pasters and squares. These guidelines apply:
The gunner counts the number of squares it will take to move the shot group to the aiming
paster.
Upon completion, he returns to the firing line to make corrections to the weapon. Figure
C-29 illustrates a zero group size on which adjustment can be made and a group that is too
loose for adjustments. If a group is too loose, the gunner checks his position and group.
Figure C-29. Zero group size
Note. Large shot groups are usually caused by incorrect position and grip. Incorrect sight
alignment, sight picture, or zeroing usually causes small shot groups outside the scoring space.
If the center of the group is to the left or right of the black aiming paster, the gunner must
correct for windage.
If the center of the shot group is above or below of the black aiming paster, the gunner must
correct for elevation.
Confirmation. The gunner fires another three-shot group (loaded individually) after making his
corrections for windage and elevation. If the center of the group is still off the aiming point, he
adjusts further until the group is centered on the point of aim.
Recording of Zero. There is no reason to record the 10-meter zero because it applies only to
firing at the 10-meter basic machine gun target.
FIELD ZEROING
C-32. Field zeroing is another method of obtaining a zero. When preparing to field zero, make sure the M2
is mounted securely on the M3 tripod, make sure the traverse and elevation (T&E) mechanism is working
properly, and finally, know the distance to your zero target. The only difference in initial sight setting for
field zeroing is range setting on the scale. The gunner must also remember that the range scale on the M2 is
indicated in yards; therefore, to get as close to the target as possible, you may have to convert the meters to
the target into yards so you can set the range on the rear sight. Conversion of meters to yards is
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-21
Appendix C
accomplished by multiplying the number of meters by 1.094. For example, 600 meters x 1.094 = 656.4
yards; the gunner would set his range scale at 650 yards.
NIGHT OR LIMITED VISIBILITY ZEROING

C-33. To bring accurate fire onto the target at night or during limited visibility, night optics must be zeroed
to the weapon, which requires the optic to be properly mounted and boresighted. The zero can then be
confirmed by firing at a target at engagement ranges. All of the night optics are zeroed for 500 meters on
the 10-meter range. M16A2/A4 25-meter zeroing targets, specially marked with each of the optics offsets,
are used.
MK19 GRENADE MACHINE GUN

C-34. Zeroing procedures for the MK19 are crucial for hitting targets during limited visibility from a
stationary vehicle. Figure C-30 shows the adjustable rear sight of the MK19. It is strongly recommended
that a target at 400 meters be used to zero. FM 3-22.27 (Chapter 3) discusses the correct way to install the
mounted T&E mechanism to the High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV).
Figure C-30. MK19 rear sight

C-35. To zero the MK19 using the T&E device, follow these steps:
z
Loosen the range plate screw. Move the range plate to the midpoint between the two studs.
Tighten the range plate screw. Move the rear sight slide to the meter mark that represents the
distance to the target. For example, move to the 400-meter mark to zero on a target known to be
400 meters away. Set the windage knob at the zero index line.
z
Align the sights on the base of the target.
z
Fire a single round and spot the impact of the round. If it is on the target, fire another short burst
to confirm the zero. If the round is not on target, go to the next step.
C-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Adjust as needed. To adjust for a round that is not on target, do the following:
If the impact of the round is short or over, adjust the elevation knob. Estimate how short or
over the round is. If the round is short, use this estimate to adjust the elevation knob
clockwise, which moves the sights up onto the knob counterclockwise to bring the sights
down to the target. For example, if the rounds impact 10 mils short, adjust the elevation
knob 10 mils up by turning it clockwise. Realign the sights and adjust the gun back on
target using the T&E mechanism before the next round is fired.
Note. If the adjustment was correct, the second round should be on target. If so, fire another
short burst to confirm the zero. If not, repeat the previous step. If the impacts are not observed,
bold adjustments may be necessary.
If the round is to the right or left, adjust the windage knob. Estimate how far to the right or
left the sight needs to move to bring the rounds on target. Turn the windage knob clockwise
to adjust to the right; turn the windage knob counterclockwise to adjust to the left. For
example, if the rounds impact 10 mils to the right, adjust the sight 10 mils to the left by
turning the windage knob counterclockwise. Realign and adjust the sights back on target
using the T&E mechanism before firing the next round.
Once the zero is completed, align the range plate scale at the exact range of the target used
to zero, and tighten it.
When the gunner maintains the same sight picture, the type of firing position does not alter the
zero.
SECTION IV WEAPON SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS

C-36. Malfunctions cause a loss of firing time on gunnery ranges. Crew error is the primary cause of most
malfunctions. Crews must know the possible reasons that typical malfunctions have occurred to take the
necessary steps to correct the malfunctions and continue with training. As a precaution, the crew performs
standard stoppage procedures before correcting any error.
DANGER
When a malfunction or stoppage occurs, always perform misfire
procedures before taking any other corrective action.
M249 5.56-MM SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON

C-37. If immediate action fails to correct a stoppage, use the following procedure:
z
Clear the weapon.
z
Check for a ruptured cartridge.
z
Check ammunition and links (alignment and orientation).
z
Check feed pawls and springs for damage or weakness.
z
Check operating rod assembly for damage.
z
Check gas plug and port for excessive carbon buildup.
z
Inspect the extractor to ensure its not damaged or broken
z
If none of these steps corrects the stoppage, notify the unit Master Gunner or maintenance
personnel.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-23
Appendix C
M240B 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN

z
Clear the weapon.
z
Check for a ruptured cartridge.
z
Check ammunition and links (alignment and orientation).
z
Check feed pawls and springs for damage or weakness.
z
Check drive spring rod assembly for damage.
z
Check gas plug and port for carbon buildup.
z
Inspect the extractor to ensure it is not damaged or broken.
z
personnel.

z
Check to ensure the weapon is armed.
z
Check for ruptured or deformed cartridges on the HMMWV roof.
z
Clear the weapon.
z
Check headspace and timing.
z
Check to ensure ammunition is aligned in links and not binding in feed tray.
z
Check for damaged feed pawls and springs.
z
Check for damaged firing pin.
z
personnel.
MK19 MACHINE GUN

z
Clear the weapon.
z
Check for bad ammunition. (If the primer of a round is dented, the ammunition is bad, if not, the
firing pin may be damaged.)
z
Check for damaged firing pin.
z
Check for ammunition jammed in feeder:
Check for proper attachment of the feed throat.
Check for rounds that are crooked or not seated firmly.
Check for broken links.
Check for links that are off the rotating band.
Check for female links that are not first.

z
Check for defective feeder or feed slide assembly:
Check for broken or worn feed pawls.
Check for badly worn or gouged link guides.
Check for binding feed slide assembly.

z
personnel.
C-24
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
COMMUNICATIONS
C-41. If you lose communications, check the following:
z
Is the master control station power light ON (if equipped)?
z
z
Has the built-in test (BIT) failed on the master control station (if equipped)?
z
Is the CVC cord disconnected (if equipped)?
z
Does the VIC1 Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) display a green status
(if equipped)?
SECTION V SIGHT OFFSET INFORMATION

C-42. This section provides the procedures to zero truck-mounted machine guns and their respective sights
with a borelight. Also provided in this section is the sight offset information for machine guns and the
different types of mounts and sights that can be attached to them.
BORELIGHT DRY-ZERO PROCEDURE

C-43. This discussion covers the borelight dry-zero procedure for the M249 SAW and M240B machine
gun with AN/PEQ-2 sight.
WARNING
Before inserting the borelight into the weapon, clear the machine
gun, perform PMCS, and visually inspect the chamber to ensure
that it is empty and no ammunition is in position to be
chambered. Additionally, inspect the bore and muzzle to ensure
there are no obstructions. Clean the weapon if necessary.
PREPARATION
C-44. Begin the procedure by performing the following steps:
z
Attach/mount AN/PEQ-2 IR pointer to the weapon and ensure the device is secured tightly. On
the M240B, the AN/PEQ-2 is attached to the rail on top of the feed cover. On the M249 SAW,
the AN/PEQ-2 is attached to the rail on top of the M249 TWS bracket.
z
Stabilize the machine gun. This can be accomplished by placing the weapon on a tripod. If no
tripod is available, stabilize the weapon using an open bipod and with sand bags or rucksacks.
z
An unobstructed line of sight of 10 meters is required. Using the 10-meter length of cord
included with the laser borelight kit, measure 10 meters measured from the barrel carrying
handle.
WARNING
Do not turn on the laser borelight at this time.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-25
Appendix C
Wipe the laser borelight mandrel with a clean cloth and apply a light film of oil on the mandrel.
Insert the laser borelight mandrel in the machine gun muzzle using light, steady force until the
mandrel taper seats in the muzzle.
CAUTION
Do not apply excessive inward force to the laser borelight once the
tapered end of the mandrel has seated in the muzzle.
ZEROING THE BORELIGHT

C-45. This procedure for zeroing the borelight to the machine gun requires a minimum of three people.
One person stabilizes the weapon by applying firm pressure downward with two hands on the barrel; the
second person rotates and adjusts the borelight; and the third person is positioned at the target board to call
out adjustments. Use the steps below.
C-46. Select/place the proper 10-meter dry-zeroing target at a 10-meter distance from the carrying handle
of the machine gun barrel. When used for zeroing the borelight laser, the target board MUST be kept level.
Ignore machine gun orientation at this time.
C-47. Turn on the laser borelight. With the help of an assistant, hold a target at 10 meters and place the
target board so that the laser dot strikes the center of the laser borelight dot on the selected target board.
DANGER
All individuals MUST wear ballistic laser eye protection (BLEPS)
during this procedure.
DO NOT look directly into the laser beam, whether with the
unaided eye, through binoculars or telescopes, or using BLEPS.
DO NOT point the laser at mirror surfaces.
DO NOT point the laser in the vicinity of another individuals eyes.
Note. Rotate the borelight tool clockwise. Rotating the laser borelight housing counterclockwise may cause the borelight to unscrew from mandrel.
z
C-26
Slowly rotate the borelight while watching the dot made by the laser on the target area. If the dot
remains stationary the borelight is aligned and boresighted to the weapon. Proceed to the
procedure for zeroing the machine gun.
If the laser dot rotates in a circular pattern, the borelight windage or elevation or both MUST be
adjusted. This procedure can be done at the 10-meter distance, or the target can be moved to as
close as 2 meters. Use the following procedures:
Slowly rotate the borelight one-half turn. Note the new location of the laser dot. Adjust the
borelight windage and elevation until the laser dot moves one-half the space from its
original location.
Continue the procedure until the laser dot remains stationary when the borelight is rotated.
If the target board was moved closer to the borelight, move target back to a distance of 10
meters and re-check the boresight. If the boresight is correct, the weapon is ready to be dryzeroed.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
ZEROING THE MACHINE GUN

C-48. This procedure is for boresighting the weapon for a 300-meter dry-zero. Use the AN/PEQ-2 infrared
aiming/illumination lights.
Notes. Do not touch or bump the borelight.
Night vision equipment is required when using the AN/PEQ-2 light.
ZEROING FROM BIPOD

C-49. Use the following steps when using a bipod:
z
Remove the machine gun from the tripod or from sandbags or rucksacks.
z
From the same 10-meter location, shoulder the machine gun in a prone firing position with
bipod legs in contact with the ground.
z
Manually stabilize the weapon without cant and orient the selected target board in a levelvertical position.
Note. Proper positioning of the target is CRITICAL for accurate boresighting results.
ZEROING FROM TRIPOD

C-50. Use the following steps when using a tripod:
z
From the same 10 meter location, stabilize the weapon without cant.
z
Orient the selected target board in a level-vertical position.
Notes. Proper positioning of the target is CRITICAL for accurate boresighting results.
If the machine gun is zeroed from the tripod and fired from the bipod, the center of the
cone of fire will be approximately 18 inches high (+2 mils) from the center of the target at 300
meters. If the machine gun is zeroed from the bipod and fired from the tripod, the center of the
cone of fire will be approximately 18 inches low (-2 mils) from the center of the target at 300
meters.
USE OF TARGET BOARDS

C-51. Follow these instructions for the target boards (see Figure C-31 and Figure C-32):
z
Aim/place the borelight at the proper figure on the chart and adjust the windage and elevation
controls on the AN/PEQ-2 infrared aiming lights until they are centered on their labeled spot(s).
z
(Optional) Rotate the borelight one-half turn and again aim at the proper device(s) target. If
properly boresighted, the laser borelight spot should still be centered on its spot even after a half
turn rotation. If not centered, repeat the steps to center the borelight.
z
Turn off the laser borelight (LBL) tool and remove it from the machine gun. The machine gun is
now dry-zeroed for 300 meters. The 300-meter dry-zero should be confirmed by live fire.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-27
Appendix C
Figure C-31. Target board for dry-zeroing
C-28
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure C-32. Example of DA Form 7476-R, 10-Meter Boresight Offset Target
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-29
Appendix C
SIGHT OFFSETS FOR CREW-SERVED WEAPONS

C-52. See Table C-5 for sight offset information for machine guns and the different types of mounts and
sights that can be attached to them.
Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data
Weapon
M249
Accessory
Mount
Iron Sight
N/A
M249
AN/PAQ-4C
M249
AN/PAQ-4C
M249
AN/PAQ-4C No Feed
Tray Cover Rail or
Forward Rails
M249
AN/PAQ-4C Left Rail
M249
AN/PAQ-4C Right Rail
M249
AN/PAQ-4C Left Rail
M249
AN/PAQ-4C Right Rail
M249
AN/PAS13A/B(V)2
(MWTS)
M249
C-30
AN/PEQ-2A on Feed
Tray Cover Rail
Range
Zeroed
400m
Mounting Bracket/Picatinny Rail

Grabber &
AN/PAQ-4C Spacer
NSN: 5340-01-458-0473
Part No: 12598109
Rail Grabber Mounting Bracket
Insight
NSN: 5340-01-458-0990
Part No: ITP-090
Adapter Bracket
NSN: 5340-01-362-9873
Part No: A3186952 With
Mounting Bracket Assembly,
M249
NSN: 5340-01-387-0866
Part No: A3187016 and
Mounting Knob Assembly,
M16A1/A2
NSN: 5355-01-039-2834
Part No: SM-D-850500-1
Grabber & AN/PAQ-4C Spacer
NSN: 5340-01-458-0473
Part No: 12598109
Grabber & AN/PAQ-4C Spacer
NSN: 5340-01-458-0473
Part No: 12598109
Rail Grabber
Mounting Bracket Insight
NSN: 5340-01-458-0990 Part
No: ITP-090
Rail Grabber
NSN: 5340-01-458-0990
Part No: ITP-090
Mount Assembly, Rail Grabber
NSN: 1240-01-490-0737
Part No: A3281312-1
Rail Grabber
NSN: 5340-01-458-0990 Part
No: ITP-090
25m M16A2/A4
Target Zero Offset
Squares
AZ
EL
0.0
5.1U
10m Boresight
Target Offset cm
AZ
0.0
EL
1.7U
400m
AZ
1.8R
EL
0.0
AZ
1.8L
EL
5.4U
400m
AZ
1.8R
EL
2.0U
AZ
1.8L
EL
4.7U
400m
AZ
2.5R
EL
1.5D
AZ
4.1L
EL
6.1U
400m
AZ
7.5R
EL
14.0D
AZ
7.6L
EL
8.3D
400m
AZ
7.6L
EL
10.7U
AZ
7.7R
EL
4.0D
400m
AZ
5.9R
EL
14.0D
AZ
6.0L
EL
8.3D
400m
AZ
5.8R
EL
10.7D
AZ
5.9L
EL
4.0D
400m
AZ
0.0
EL
2.8D
AZ
0.0
EL
8.6U
400m
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
AZ
2.0L
EL
1.3U
Aiming
AZ
EL
2.0R
4.8U
Flood
AZ
EL
2.0L
4.8U
3 September 2009
Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data (continued)

Weapon
M249
Range
Zeroed
Accessory
Mount
AN/PEQ-2A Feed
Tray Cover with no
Rail
Adapter Bracket
NSN: 5340-01-362-9873
Part No: A3186952 and
Mounting Bracket Assembly,
M249 NSN: 5340-01-387-0866
Part No: A3187016
25m M16A2/A4
Target Zero
Offset Squares
10m Boresight
Target Offset cm
Aiming
400m
AZ
5.0R
EL
4.0D
AZ
0.5L
EL
6.5U
Flood
AZ
4.5L
EL
6.5U
Aiming
M249
AN/PEQ-2A on Left
Rail

Insight NSN: 5340-01-458-0990
Part No: ITP-090
400m
AZ
5.9R
EL
10.0D
AZ
6.0L
EL
4.4D
Flood
AZ
6.6L
EL
8.4D
Aiming
M249
AN/PEQ-2A on
Right Rail
M249
AN/PVS-4 on Feed
Tray Cover Rail
M249
AN/PVS-4 on Feed
Tray Cover with no
Rail
M249
M145 on Feed Tray

Cover Rail
M240B
Iron Sights
M240B
AN/PAQ-4C on
Feed Tray Cover
Rail
M240B
AN/PAQ-4C on
Feed Tray Cover
Rail
M240B
AN/PAQ-4C on Left
Rail
3 September 2009

Insight NSN: 5340-01-458-0990
Part No: ITP-090
400m
Adapter AN/PVS-4 (Spacer)

NSN: 5365-01-447-8991 Part
No: 12598098 and Bracket
Mounting
(Rail Grabber)
NSN: 5340-01-449-8533
Part No: 12598120
400m
AZ
0.0
AZ
6.0L
EL
14.0U
AZ
6.1R
EL
7.6D
Flood
AZ
6.1R
EL
3.6D
EL
4.2D
AZ
0.0
EL
10.0U
Mounting Bracket, M249 NSN:

3040-01-233-0352
Part No: A3079160
Uses integral M145 Grabber. No
special bracket or mount is
required.
400m
AZ
2.5R
EL
4.9D
AZ
2.3L
EL
11.3U
All Ranges
Use 10mZ
Reticle
N/A
N/A
AZ
0.0
EL
0.0
N/A
500m
AZ
0.0
EL
9.2U
AZ
0.0
EL
2.5U
500m
AZ
1.8R
EL
2.2D
AZ
1.5L
EL
3.5U
500m
AZ
1.8R
EL
8.3U
AZ
1.8L
EL
0.8U
500m
AZ
7.8R
EL
17.7U
AZ
7.9L
EL
8.1D

Grabber &
AN/PAQ-4C Spacer
NSN: 5340-01-458-0473
Part No: 12598109
Insight
NSN: 5340-01-458-0990
Part No: ITP-090
Grabber &
AN/PAQ-4C Spacer
NSN: 5340-01-458-0473
Part No: 12598109
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-31
Appendix C
Table C-5. Machine gun sight offset data (continued)

Weapon
Accessory
M240B
AN/PAQ-4C on Right
Rail
M240B
AN/PAQ-4C on Left
Rail
M240B
AN/PAQ-4C on Right
Rail
M240B
AN/PAS13A/B(V)2
(MWTS)
Range
Mount
Zeroed
Mounting Bracket/Picatinny
Rail Grabber & AN/PAQ-4C
Spacer
NSN: 5340-01-458-0473
Part No: 12598109
Insight NSN: 5340-01-4580990 Part No: ITP-090
Insight NSN: 5340-01-4580990
Part No: ITP-090
Mount Assembly, Rail Grabber
NSN: 1240-01-490-0737
Part No: A3281312-1
25m M16A2/A4 Target

Zero Offset Squares
10m Boresight
Target Offset cm
500m
AZ
7.8L
EL
13.5U
AZ
7.5R
EL
4.4D
500m
AZ
6.2R
EL
17.7U
AZ
6.2L
EL
8.1D
500m
AZ
5.9L
EL
13.5U
AZ
6.0R
EL
4.4D
500m
AZ
0.0
EL
2.3U
AZ
0.0
EL
8.0U
Aiming
AZ
EL
1.7R
2.2U
Flood
AZ
EL
2.3L
2.2U
Aiming
AZ
EL
6.2L
4.1D
Flood
AZ
EL
6.2L
8.1D
Aiming
AZ
EL
6.2R
7.9D
Flood
AZ
EL
6.2R
3.9D
AN/PEQ-2A on Feed
Tray Cover Rail

Insight NSN: 5340-01-4580990
Part No: ITP-090
500m
AZ
1.7L
EL
6.0U
M240B
AN/PEQ-2A on Left
Rail

Insight NSN: 5340-01-4580990
Part No: ITP-090
500m
AZ
6.2R
EL
13.5U
M240B
AN/PEQ-2A on Right
Rail

Insight NSN: 5340-01-4580990
Part No: ITP-090
500m
AZ
6.1L
EL
17.7U
M240B
AN/PVS-4 on Feed
Tray Cover Rail
Adapter AN/PVS-4 (Spacer)

NSN: 5365-01-447-8991
Part No: 12598098 and
Bracket Mounting (Rail
Grabber)
NSN: 5340-01-449-8533
Part No: 12598120
500m
AZ
0.0
EL
6.2D
AZ
0.0
EL
6.0U
M240B
M145 MGO on Feed

Tray Cover Rail
Uses integral M145 Grabber.

No special bracket or mount is
required.
N/A
N/A
AZ
0.0
EL
0.0
M240B
M2
Iron Sights
M2
AN/PAS13A/B(V)3
(HWTS)
C-32
N/A
Bracket Assembly, M2
NSN: 5340-01-502-7233
Part No: A3170570
All
Ranges
Use
10mZ
Reticle
500m
500m
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
TBD
AZ
0.0
TBD
EL
12.8D
AZ
0.0
EL
16.3U
3 September 2009

C-53. After firing, the crew clears all weapon systems and removes all ammunition residue from the
exterior of the vehicle. Leaders verify that crews clear all weapon systems in accordance with AR 385-63.
On training ranges, range safety officers verify that crews have cleared all weapon systems. Post-fire
checks prevent many accidents. As always after firing, the crew will perform proper PMCS and cleaning in
accordance with the applicable technical manual.
DANGER
After firing, ensure all weapons are clear.
SECTION VII LONG-RANGE ADVANCED SCOUT SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

C-54. The LRAS3 is a long-range multisensor system for the U.S. Army, providing scouts with the realtime ability to detect, recognize, identify, and geo-locate distant targets. The LRAS3 is the premier ground
combat reconnaissance and surveillance system on the modern battlefield. It enables Soldiers to conduct
24-hour reconnaissance and surveillance missions, remaining outside threat acquisition and engagement
ranges. The LRAS3 replaces obsolete systems that require Soldiers to close within direct fire range of the
threat they seek to detect.
SIGHT SENSOR RETICLES

C-55. The LRAS3 sight sensor uses seven reticlesfive FLIR reticles and two day TV reticlesmost of
which are illustrated in this discussion. Common mil reticle relationships are shown in Figure C-33.
Figure C-33. Common reticle

FORWARD LOOKING, INFRARED RETICLES
C-56. The FLIR has an NFOV reticle with three electronic zoom positions (1X, 2X, and 4X).
Magnification power for NFOV is 16.6X. The FLIR also has a WFOV with two electronic zoom positions
(1X and 2X). Magnification power for WFOV is 5.5X. Figure C-34 through Figure C-37 show four types
of FLIR reticles (WFOV 1X and 2X and NFOV 1X and 4X).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-33
Appendix C
Figure C-34. FLIR WFOV reticle (1X)
Figure C-35. FLIR WFOV reticle (2X)
Figure C-36. FLIR NFOV reticle (1X)
Figure C-37. FLIR NFOV reticle (4X)
C-34
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
DAY TV RETICLES
C-57. The day TV has a WFOV reticle (magnification 5.5X), shown in Figure C-38, and an NFOV reticle
(magnification 16.6X), shown in Figure C-39.
Figure C-38. Day TV WFOV reticle
Figure C-39. Day TV NFOV reticle
BORESIGHTING
C-58. This discussion covers boresighting procedures for LRAS3 devices equipped with either FLIR or
day TV sight sensors. Figure C-40 illustrates the main menu tree for LRAS3 boresighting.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-35
Appendix C
Figure C-40. LRAS3 boresight main menu tree
FORWARD LOOKING, INFRARED BORESIGHTING

Note. Whenever there is a change of 20 degrees or more in sight sensor operating temperature,
a BORESIGHT REQUIRED message will appear. When the FLIR is not ready and the NOT
COOL indicator is displayed, FLIR boresighting cannot be selected.
C-59. Use the following steps for FLIR boresighting:
z
Install the sight sensor lens cover.
z
Using the main menu, select MODE and then BOTH EO SENSORS.
z
Using the SGT SEL push button on the left hand grip, select FLIR. FLIR-WH is displayed in
operational parameter block.
z
Using the main menu, select BORESIGHT and then select BORESIGHT FLIR. The
ABORT/DONE menu appears. A message is displayed in the message area stating FLIR
BORESIGHTING IN PROGRESS. The boresight reticle is displayed.
Note. The boresight dot can be hard to see. Prior to boresighting, install the lens cover. If the
sight sensor is not far out of boresight, the boresight reticle may already be on top of the
boresighting dot, making the boresighting dot difficult to see. Move the boresight reticle off
center. If the boresighting dot is still hard to see, use the BCF menu to adjust focus and to turn
reticle brightness down and display brightness and contrast up. If necessary, adjust FLIR
contrast/brightness to improve boresight dot visibility.
z
C-36
The boresighting dot will appear on the display. Using the BA switch on the right-hand grip,
move the reticle aim point on top of the boresighting dot.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Note. If FLIR boresighting cannot be completed within three minutes, BORESIGHT

TIMEOUT appears in the message area.
z
When boresighting is accomplished, select DONE from the ABORT/DONE menu. The FLIR
BORESIGHTING IN PROGRESS message disappears from the message area, and the main
menu is displayed.
Note. After completion of boresighting, the boresighting dot may appear to briefly jump out
from underneath the reticle. This is a normal behavior and does not indicate a loss of boresight.
z
To exit the BORESIGHT menu without making or saving changes, select ABORT from the
ABORT/DONE menu. The BORESIGHT ABORT message is displayed in the message area for
approximately 30 seconds.
DAY TV BORESIGHTING
Note. Whenever there is a change of 20 degrees or more in sight sensor operating temperature,
a BORESIGHT REQUIRED message may appear.
C-60. Use the following steps for day TV boresighting:
z
Install the sight sensor lens cover.
z
Using SGT SEL push button on left-hand grip, select DAY TV. DAY TV is displayed in
operational parameter block.
z
Using the main menu, select BORESIGHT and then select BORESIGHT DAY TV. The
ABORT/DONE menu appears. A message is displayed in the message area stating DAY TV
BORESIGHTING IN PROGRESS. The boresight reticle is displayed.
Note. If the sight sensor is not far out of boresight, the boresight reticle may already be on top
of the boresighting dot, making the boresighting dot difficult to see. Move the boresight reticle
off center. If the boresighting dot is still hard to see, install the lens cover, and use the BCF
menu to adjust reticle brightness down and display brightness and contrast up.
z
z
The boresighting dot will appear on the display. Using the BA switch on right-hand grip, move
the reticle aim point on top of the boresighting dot.
To exit the BORESIGHT menu without making or saving changes, select ABORT from the
ABORT/DONE menu. The BORESIGHT ABORTED message is displayed in the message area
for approximately 30 seconds.
Note. If day TV boresighting cannot be completed within three minutes, BORESIGHT

TIMEOUT appears in the message area. After completion of boresighting, the boresighting dot
may appear to briefly jump out from underneath the reticle. This is a normal behavior and
does not indicate a loss of boresight.
C-61. When boresighting is accomplished, select DONE from the ABORT/DONE menu. The DAY TV
BORESIGHTING IN PROGRESS message in the message area and the BORESIGHT REQUIRED
message disappear, and the BORESIGHT menu is displayed. Select CANCEL to return to the main menu.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
C-37
Appendix D
Rifle Squad Gunnery

Rifle squad gunnery is a necessary stage of training that teaches rifle squad leaders to
control organic fires in a live-fire exercise (LFX). This chapter provides information
necessary for developing a rifle squad gunnery training program, whereas FM 321.71 provides the information necessary for the tactical employment of the rifle
squad. STP 7-11 B1-SM-TG provide the tasks, conditions, and standards for both the
tactical and gunnery situational training and live-fire training exercises. Training
must be battle focused, challenging, and must emphasize infantry skills. Live-fire
training for the rifle squad starts with the buddy team/fire and maneuver exercise and
progresses through rifle squad live-fire exercise.
Integration of the Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) or BFV section should begin with
execution of Rifle Squad Table IV. The BFV(s), if not Combat Table IV qualified, can
execute these tables dry-fire or using appended training devices. Mounted and
dismounted elements training as a team must start at the earliest opportunity.
Contents
Section I Considerations ...................... D-1
Weapons and Equipment Training
and Preliminary Marksmanship
Instruction .......................................... D-2
Section II Rifle Squad Fire Control
and Distribution .......................................D-13
Principles ..........................................D-13
Fire Control Measures ......................D-15
Engagement Techniques ..................D-16
Direct Fire .........................................D-17
Sector Sketches................................D-18
Section III Exercise Development....... D-19

Prerequisites .................................... D-20
Evaluation ........................................ D-20
Rifle Squad Gunnery Training
Program ........................................... D-20
Preliminary Rifle Squad Gunnery
Training ............................................ D-20
Basic Rifle Squad Gunnery Training D-21
SECTION I CONSIDERATIONS
D-1. Tough standards help build infantrymen who can win on the battlefield. Leaders and trainers should
review their training responsibilities for planning and execution in FM 3-21.71 and FM 3-90.1. When
conducting rifle squad training, they must consider
z
Fundamentals. Shoot, move, communicate, sustain, and secure.
z
Simplicity. Ensure proficiency in basics before moving to more complex tasks.
z
Prerequisites. Certify crew and battle drills before executing collective live-fire tasks.
z
Realism. Expose leaders and Soldiers to unexpected and challenging situationsgood and bad.
z
Conditions. Replicate battlefield conditions for live-fire training.
z
Risk. Assess risk before training.
z
Evaluations. Conduct after action reviews (AAR) as part of training.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-1
Appendix D
WEAPONS AND EQUIPMENT TRAINING AND PRELIMINARY

MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTION
D-2. Weapons and equipment training consists of preliminary weapon training and qualification. All
squad members must establish their proficiency with their assigned weapons and equipment before moving
on to collective task training. During preliminary weapons training, squad members learn and demonstrate
their proficiency in disassembly, assembly, preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS), and
operation of their weapons and all other squad equipment. Preliminary weapons training and
marksmanship instruction should include the following equipment:
z
M4 carbines.
z
M16A2 rifles.
z
M203 grenade launchers.
z
M249 light machine guns.
z
M240B machine gun.
z
Javelins.
z
AT-4s.
z
Night-vision devices.
z
Weapons optics and lasers.
z
Mines and demolitions.
z
Squad communication equipment.
M4 CARBINE/M16A2 RIFLE
D-3. The M16/M4-series weapons are 5.56-mm, magazine-fed, gas-operated, air-cooled, shoulder-fired
weapons. They are the infantrymans primary weapons. See Table D-1 and Table D-2 for technical and
ammunition data.
Table D-1. M16A2/M4 carbine rifle technical data
Weight
Maximum effective rate of fire:
Semiautomatic (rounds per minute).
Burst (3 rounds per minute).
Sustained (rounds per minute).
Range:
Maximum range (meters).
M16A2
M4
7.78 lbs
6.49 lbs
45
90
12-15
45
90
12-15
3,600 meters
3,600 meters
550 meters
800 meters
500 meters
600 meters
7
3,100 ft/sec
700-900 rds/sec
7
2,970 ft/sec
700-900 rds/sec
Maximum effective range.

Point target (meters).
Area target (meters).
Operational Characteristics:
Barrel (rifling-right hand 1-inch twist).
Muzzle velocity.
Cyclic rate of fire.
References:
FM 3-22.9.
D-2
TM 9-1005-319-10.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
Table D-2. M4/M16-series weapons ammunition

Ammunition
DODIC
Use
M855 Ball
A059
The M855 cartridge has a 62-grain gilded, metal-jacketed, lead alloy

core bullet with a steel penetrator. The primer and case are waterproof.
This ammunition is also linked and used in the M249. (Green tipped.)
M856 Tracer
A063
The M865 tracer cartridge has characteristics similar to the M196 tracer
with a slightly longer tracer burnout distance. This cartridge has a 63.7grain bullet. The M856 does not have a steel penetrator. (Red tipped;
also orange when linked 4 to 1 for the M249.)
M200 Blank
A080
The M200 blank cartridge has no projectile. The case mouth is closed
with a seven-petal rosette crimp. (Violet tipped.)
M199
Dummy
A060
The M199 dummy cartridge is used during dry firing and other training.
It can be identified by the six grooves along the side of the case
beginning about 1/2 inch from its tip. It contains no propellant or primer.
The primer well is open to prevent firing-pin damage.
M862 SRTA
A065
The M862 short-range training ammunition (SRTA) is designed

exclusively for training. It can be used in lieu of service ammunition on
indoor ranges and by units that have a limited range fan that does not
allow the firing of service ammunition. SRTA ammunition must be used
with the M2 training bolt.
M203 40-MM GRENADE LAUNCHER

D-4. The M203 grenade launcher is a lightweight, single-shot, shoulder-fired weapon that attaches to the
M16-, M4 carbine- (M203A1), or M4 carbine- (with rail system) series rifles. The grenade launcher is
breech-loaded with a pump-action sliding barrel. See Table D-3 for technical data on the M203 grenade
launcher.
Note. The M203 grenade launcher must be mounted to the M16-series rifles by the units
armorer. The M203A1 must be mounted to the M4 carbine-series rifles by the forward support
element of the Brigade Support Battalion (BSB).
D-5. The M203 grenade launcher fires several fixed-type, low-velocity 40-mm rounds. Ammunition
includes HE, illuminating, signaling, sustainment, training, and multipurpose. See Table D-4 for a
description of the most commonly used M203 rounds.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-3
Appendix D
Table D-3. M203 40-mm grenade launcher technical data

Feature
Data
Weight:
Launcher, unloaded.
Launcher, loaded.
Rifle and grenade launcher, both fully

loaded.
3.0 lbs (1.4 kg).

3.5 lbs (1.6 kg).
11.0 lbs (5.0 kg).
Operational characteristics:
Action.
Sights:
1.
2.
3.
Single shot.
Front.
Rear.
PSQ-18A Day Night Sight (DNS).
Leaf sight assembly.

Quadrant sight.
Replaces both the leaf and quadrant sights.
Muzzle velocity.
76 mps (250 fps).
Maximum range.
About 400 meters (1,312 feet).
Maximum effective range:

1.
2.
Fire-team sized area target.

Vehicle or weapon point target.
350 meters (1,148 feet).

150 meters (492 feet).
Minimum safe firing range (HE):

1.
2.
Training.
Combat.

Minimum arming range.
About 14 to 38 meters (46 to 125 feet).
Rate of fire.
5-to-7 rounds per minute.
Maximum combat load.
36 HE rounds (or per SOP).
References:
FM 3-22.31.
D-4
TM 9-1010-221-10.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
Table D-4. M203 40-mm grenade launcher ammunition

Ammunition
DODIC
Use
High-Explosive,
Dual-Purpose
(HEDP) Round
B546
The HEDP round has an olive-drab aluminum skirt with a steel

cup attached, white markings, and a gold ogive (round head). It
penetrates at least 5 cm (2 inches) when fired straight into steel
armor at 150 meters or less. The round arms between 14 and 27
meters, causes casualties within a 130-meter radius, and has a
kill radius of 5 meters.
High-Explosive
(HE) Round
B568,
B569,
B574,
B575
The HE round has an olive-drab aluminum skirt with a steel

projectile attached, gold markings, and a yellow ogive. It arms
between 14 and 27 meters, produces a ground burst that causes
casualties within a 130-meter radius, and has a kill radius of 5
meters.
Star Parachute
Round
Green
B504
Red B505
White B535
This round is white impact or bar alloy aluminum with black

markings. It is used for illumination or signals, is lighter and more
accurate than comparable handheld signal rounds, and lowers on
an attached parachute at 7 feet per second. The candle burns for
about 40 seconds. A raised letter on the top of the round denotes
the color of the parachute.
White Star
Cluster Round
B536
This round is white impact or bar aluminum alloy with black

markings. Also used for illumination or signals, this rounds
attached plastic ogive has five raised dots for night identification.
It is lighter and more accurate than comparable handheld signal
rounds, and burns for about 7 seconds during free fall. Individual
stars distinguish its use.
Ground Marker
Round
Red B506
Green
B508
Yellow
B509
This round is light green impact aluminum with black markings.

Used for aerial identification and marking the location of Soldiers
on the ground, it arms between 15 and 45 meters. If a fuze fails
to function on impact, the output mixture provided in the front end
of the delay casing backs up the impact feature. The color of the
ogive indicates the color of the smoke.
Practice Round
B577,
B567
Used for practice, this round is blue zinc or aluminum with white
markings. It produces a yellow or orange signature on impact,
arms between 14 and 27 meters, and has a danger radius of 20
meters.
CS Round
B537,
B567
This round is gray aluminum with a green casing and black

markings. This multipurpose round has proven most effective for
riot control and during urban operations. It arms between 10 and
30 meters and produces a white cloud of CS gas on impact.
Multiple
Projectile Round
B534
This round is olive drab with black markings, has proven to be

very effective in thick vegetated areas, and for room clearing. It
contains over 2,000 pellets that cast a cone of fire 30-meters
wide and 30-meters high at a velocity of 269 meters per second.
Always aim multiple projectile rounds at the foot of the target.
This round has no mechanical-type fuze.
M249 SAW 5.56-MM MACHINE GUN

D-6. The M249 machine gun is a gas-operated, air-cooled, automatic weapon that fires from the open-bolt
position. It is belt or magazine fed. Ammunition is fed into the weapon from a 200-round ammunition box
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-5
Appendix D
that contains a disintegrating metallic split-link belt or a 100-round ammunition soft pack. As an
emergency means of feeding, the M249 can use a 20- or 30-round M16 rifle magazine; however, use of the
M16 magazine increases the chance of stoppages. This gun can be fired from the shoulder, hip, or
underarm position; from the bipod-steadied position; or from a tripod-mounted position. The machine gun
uses several types of 5.56-mm standard military ammunition. Soldiers should use only authorized
ammunition that is manufactured to U.S. and NATO specifications. See Tables D-5 and Table D-6 for
technical and ammunition data.
Table D-5. M249 SAW 5.56-mm machine gun technical data
Feature
Data
Weight:
M249.
M122A1 tripod w/T&E mechanism and

pintle.
16.41 lbs
23.7 lbs
Maximum range
3,600 meters

Area:
1,000 meters w/tripod and T&E
Tripod.
Bipod.
Point:
Tripod.
Bipod.
Suppression.
Rates of fire:
Sustained.
Rapid.
Cyclic.
Basic load, ammunition
1,000 meters
800 meters
800 meters
600 meters
1,000 meters
85 rpm - fired in 3- to 5-round bursts with 3 to 5
seconds between bursts (change barrel every 10
minutes)
200 rpm - fired in 6- to 8-round bursts with 2 to 3
seconds between bursts (change barrel every 2
minutes)
850 rpm - continuous burst (change barrel every
minute)
600 rounds (in 200-round drums)
References:
FM 3-22.68.
D-6
TM 9-1005-201-10.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
Table D-6. M249 SAW 5.56-mm machine gun ammunition

Ammunition
DODIC
Use
Cartridge,
5.56-mm ball
M855
A059
The M855 cartridge has a gilding, metal-jacketed, lead-alloy core bullet

with a steel penetrator. The primer and case are waterproof. A
disintegrating metallic split-linked belt links this ammunition so it can
feed from the ammunition box. It is identified by a green tip, has a
projectile weight of 62 grains, and is 2.3 cm long. This is the NATO
standard round. It is effective against personnel and light materials, not
vehicles.
Cartridge,
5.56-mm
tracer, M856
A064
(see
note
below)
This cartridge has a projectile weight of 63.7 grains and lacks a steel
penetrator. It is identified by an orange tip. The tracer is used for
adjustments after observation, incendiary effects, and signaling. When
tracer rounds are fired, they are mixed with ball ammunition in a ratio of
four ball rounds to one tracer round.
Cartridge,
5.56-mm
dummy M199
A060
This cartridge can be identified by the six grooves along the side of its
case, beginning about one-half inch from its head. It contains no
propellant or primer. The primer well is open to prevent damage to the
firing pin. The dummy round is used during mechanical training, dry-fire
exercises, and function checks.
Cartridge,
5.56-mm blank
M200
A075
(M2 link)
This round has no projectile and is used during training when simulated
live fire is desired. Its case mouth is closed with a seven-petal rosette
crimp and has a violet tip. The M249 blank-firing attachment (NSN
1005-21-912-8997) must be used to fire this ammunition.
Note. Four-and-one mix (four M855 ball and one M856 tracer) for training and combat has the
DODIC A064.
M240B 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN

D-7. The M240B machine gun is a tripod-mounted or bipod-supported 7.62-mm machine gun. Designed
for ground force use, the M240B is a fully automatic machine gun; fires from the open-bolt position; and is
belt fed, gas operated, and air cooled with fixed headspace and timing. This weapon has a butt stock that
can be grounded on the M122A1 tripod mount (see TM 9-1005-245-13&P) or integral bipod. See Table D7 and Table D-8 for ammunition and technical data.
Table D-7. M240B 7.62-mm machine gun ammunition
Ammunition
DODIC
Use
M61 ArmorPiercing
A120
Against light-armor targets.
M62 Tracer
A146
For observation of fire, incendiary effects, signaling, and training.
M80 Ball
A130
Against light, material targets and personnel, and for range

training.
M172 Dummy
A159
During mechanical training.
M82 Blank
A111
During training when simulated live fire is desired. (A blank firing

attachment must be used to fire this ammunition.)
Note. Four-and-one mix (four M80 ball and one M62 tracer) for training and combat has the
DODIC A131.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-7
Appendix D
Table D-8. M240B 7.62-mm machine gun technical data

Feature
Data
Weight of M240B.
27.6 lbs
Weight of M122A1 tripod w/flex-mount

complete.
25 lbs
Maximum range.
3,725 meters

Area:
1,100 meters w/tripod and T&E

1,100 meters
800 meters
Tripod.
Bipod.
Point:
800 meters
600 meters
1,800 meters
Tripod.
Bipod.
Suppression:
Maximum extent of grazing fire obtainable

over level or uniformly sloping terrain.
600 meters
Rates of fire.
Sustained: 100 rpm fired in 6- to 9-round bursts and

4 to 5 seconds between bursts (barrel change every
10 minutes)
Rapid: 200 rpm fired in 10- to 13-round bursts and 2
to 3 seconds between bursts (barrel change every 2
minutes)
Cyclic: 650-to-950 rounds continuous burst (change
barrel every minute).
References:
FM 3-22.68.
TM 9-1005-313-10.
M136 AT4 LIGHTWEIGHT ANTI-ARMOR WEAPON

D-8. The M136 AT4 is a lightweight, self-contained, anti-armor weapon that fires a free flight, finstabilized, rocket-type cartridge. Packed in an expendable, one-piece, fiberglass-wrapped tube, the manportable M136 AT4 is designed for right-shoulder firing, and is constructed with a watertight launcher for
ease of storage and transportation. Though it can be employed in limited visibility, the M136 AT4 firer
must see and identify the target to estimate its range. Unlike the M72-series light anti-tank weapons
(LAW), the M136 AT4 launcher does not need to be extended before firing.
D-9. The integral, rocket-type cartridge fired by the M136 AT4 consists of a fin assembly with tracer
element; a point-initiating, base-detonating, piezoelectric fuze; a warhead body with liner; and a precisionshaped explosive charge.
D-10. The M136 AT4s warhead has excellent penetration ability and lethal after-armor effects. The
extremely destructive 440-gram shaped-charge explosive penetrates more than 14 inches of armor. See
Table D-9 and Table D-10 for technical data and warhead actions and effects.
D-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
Table D-9. M136AT4 lightweight anti-armor weapon technical data

Feature
Data
Weight (complete system)
14.8 lbs (6.7 kg)
Rear sight
Range indicator, graduated in 50-meter increments.
Caliber
84 mm
Minimum range:
Training.
Combat.
Arming.
30 meters (100 ft)

10 meters (33 ft)
10 meters (33 ft)
Maximum range
2,100 meters (6,890 ft)
Maximum effective range
300 meters (985 ft)
References:
FM 3-23.25.
TM 9-1315-886-12.
Table D-10. M136 AT4 lightweight anti-armor weapon actions and effects
Action
Effect
Impact
The nosecone crushes; the impact sensor activates the fuze.
Ignition
The piezoelectric fuze activates the electric detonator. The booster

detonates, initiating the main charge.
Penetration
The main charge fires and forces the warhead body liner into a
directional gas jet that penetrates the armor plate.
After-Armor Effects
(Spalling)
The projectile fragments and incendiary effects produce blinding light

and destroy the interior of the target.
Color-Coding
M136 AT4 launchers are marked with color-coded bands. A black with
yellow band indicates an HE anti-armor round (early models had a solid
black band). A gold or yellow band indicates a field-handling trainer. No
band indicates an M287 9-mm tracer bullet trainer.
JAVELIN ANTITANK GUIDED MISSILE

D-11. The Javelin is a fire-and-forget, man-portable, medium, anti-armor, shoulder-fired weapon designed
with a reusable M98A1 command launch unit (CLU). The CLU houses the daysight, night-vision sight
(NVS), controls, and indicators. The round consists of the missile, launch tube assembly (LTA), and
battery coolant unit (BCU). The missile contains the guidance section, mid-body section, warhead section,
propulsion section, and control actuator section. The LTA serves as the launch platform and missile
carrying container.
Basic Skills Trainer

D-12. The basic skills trainer (BST) is an indoor training device that consists of a student station (SS) and
instructor station (IS). The student station consists of a simulated command launch unit (SCLU) and a
missile simulation round (MSR). The IS incorporates a desktop computer, monitor, keyboard, mouse,
interconnect cable, and a surge suppressor. BST training exercises use real terrain models, actual visible
and infrared (IR) imagery, and matching three-dimensional target models for natural target movements.
The gunner sees a realistic, simulated, battlefield.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-9
Appendix D
Field Tactical Trainer

D-13. The FTT is an outdoor force-on-force trainer used in conjunction with a tactical CLU and simulated
round (SR). The FTT includes an IS to monitor the student. The SR is equipped with Multiple Integrated
Laser Engagement System (MILES).
Missile Simulation Round

D-14. The MSR, issued with a simulated launch tube, is a field-handling round used to train gunners proper
maintenance and handling of a Javelin round. Its replicated weight and balance are precise, so simulated
training is accurate for feel. FTT contains no MSR instruments to monitor this aspect of training
Capabilities and Features

D-15. The missile has two gunner-selectable attack modestop attack or direct attack. Each mode has its
own flight path or profile for reaching the target.
Top-Attack Mode
D-16. Top attack is the default mode when the missile seeker is first activated. In top-attack mode, the
missile approaches from above to impact and detonate on top of a target. This capacity allows the gunner to
attack a target from the front, rear, or side with increased kill probability. Armored vehicles usually have
less protective armor on top. The minimum engagement distance is 150 meters.
D-17. The exact profile of the missile flight path depends on the range to the target and is determined
automatically by the missiles on-board software. When firing at a 2,000-meter target, the missile reaches a
height of around 160 meters above the battlefield. If a target is under a protective structure, firing in topattack mode will cause the missile to detonate on the structure instead of on the target. The gunner can
select the direct-attack mode to counter targets hiding under protective cover.
Direct-Attack Mode
D-18. Direct-attack mode can be selected only after seeker cool-down, and before lock-on. The gunner
pushes the ATTACK SELECT (ATTK SEL) switch on the right handgrip to change attack modes. In
direct-attack mode, the missile flies along a more direct path to the target. The missile impacts and
detonates on the targets front, side, or rear. The minimum engagement distance is 65 meters.
D-19. The exact profile of the missile-flight path shown in a general configuration depends on the range to
the target, and is determined automatically by the missiles on-board software. With a 2,000-meter target,
the missile reaches a height of about 60 meters above the battlefield. This path allows the missile to reach a
target under a protective structure. See Table D-11 for technical data for the Javelin.
D-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
Table D-11. Javelin antitank guided missile technical data

Javelin Missile System
Surface attack guided missile and M98A1 command launch unit
Type of System
Fire and forget
Crew
One- to three-Soldier teams based on TO&E
Missile modes
Top attack (default), direct attack
Ranges
Top-attack mode minimum effective

engagement
150 meters
Maximum effective engagement range

(direct-attack and top-attack modes)
2,500 meters
Direct-attack mode minimum effective

engagement range
65 meters
Flight Time
About 14 seconds at 2,000 meters
Backblast Area
Primary danger zone extends out 25 meters at a 60-degree (cone

shaped) angle
Caution zone extends the cone-shaped area out to 100 meters
PropulsionTwo Stage
Motor
Firing from Inside
Enclosures
Complete Round
(Launch tube assembly
with missile and BCU)
BCU
Launch motor ejects the missile from the LTA

Flight motor propels the missile to the target
Minimum room length
15 feet
Minimum room width
12 feet
Minimum room height
7 feet
Weight
35.14 lb (15.97 kg)
Length
47.60 in (120.90 cm)
Diameter with end caps
11.75 in (29.85 cm)
Inside diameter
5.52 in (1.32 kg)
Weight
2.91 lb (1.32 kg)
Length
8.16 in (20.73 cm)
Width
4.63 in (11.75 cm)
Type
Lithium, non-rechargeable
Life
4 min of BCU time
Coolant gas
Argon
References:
FM 3-22.37.
TM 9-1425-687-12/TM 9-1425-688-12.
D-20. Soldiers need to follow the following precautions with the Javelin:
z Backblast Area. The backblast of the Javelin comes from the firing of the launch motor and the
flight motor (see Figure D-1). The Javelin has little recoil because the propellant gases escape to
the rear of the weapon. This backblast can damage equipment or seriously injure personnel who
are too close to the rear of the LTA at time of firing. The Javelin backblast area extends 100
meters to the rear and up to 25 meters to the sides of the launcher and forms a 60-degree danger
area. It is divided into a primary danger zone and two caution areas.
Primary Danger Area. The primary danger area is a 60-degree included sector, with the
apex of the sector at the aft end of the missile launch motor. The primary danger area
radius of curvature is 25 meters. Serious injury or fatality is possible for personnel in the
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-11
Appendix D
primary danger area during firing. A portion of the primary danger area has been extended
forward to the firing line. This portion is within the range of 1 to 5 meters left and right of
launch tube centerline.
Caution Area 1. Caution area 1 is an area extending radially (25 meters) from each side of
the primary danger zone to the firing line. Serious hearing impairment or damage from
frequent exposure could occur to personnel in this area during firings. Personnel should
always wear the approved hearing and eye protection when positioned in caution area 1.
Caution Area 2. Caution area 2 is identified as a 100-meter radius, aft of the launcher and
within the 60-degree sector. This area is affected by the activation of the FM pressure relief
system. Caution area 2 is an extension to the rear of the primary danger area. Hearing
impairment and eye damage could occur to personnel that are 10 meters beyond the primary
danger area during firing. Personnel should always wear the approved hearing and eye
protection when positioned in caution area 2.
Figure D-1. Javelin backblast safety zones
DANGER
KEEP ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR OF THE BACKBLAST AREA.
FLYING DEBRIS PRODUCED BY FIRING A JAVELIN MISSILE
COULD INJURE OR KILL ANYONE REMAINING IN THE
BACKBLAST AREA.
CAUTION
Remove all equipment and debris from the backblast area. Flying
debris produced by firing a Javelin missile could badly damage any
equipment remaining in the backblast area.
D-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
Javelin Missile
D-21. The Javelin missile uses a dual-charged warhead (see Figure D-2). The warhead has a precursor
charge and main charge.
z
Precursor. The precursor charge is a high-explosive antitank (HEAT) shaped charge. Its
purpose is to cause reactive armor on the target to detonate before the main charge reaches the
armor. Once the reactive armor is penetrated, the targets main hull is exposed to the warheads
main charge. If the target is not equipped with reactive armor, the precursor provides additional
explosives to penetrate the main armor.
z
Main. The main charge is the second charge of a dual-charge warhead and is also an HEAT
shaped charge. The primary warhead charge is designed to penetrate the targets main armor to
achieve a target kill.
Figure D-2. Javelin missile
WEAPONS QUALIFICATION
D-22. Leaders will evaluate squad members individual proficiency in using their assigned weapons every
6 months during weapon qualifications. (For detailed training strategies, see the applicable weapon FMs
and DA Pam 350-38.)
SECTION II RIFLE SQUAD FIRE CONTROL AND DISTRIBUTION
PRINCIPLES
D-23. Effective direct-fire control requires a rifle squad to acquire the enemy rapidly, mass effects of fire,
and achieve decisive results in the close fight. The squad and fire team leader must know how to apply
several fundamental principles when planning and executing direct fires. The purpose of these direct-fire
principles is not to restrict the actions of subordinates. Applied correctly, they will help the squad
accomplish its primary goal of acquiring first and shooting first in any direct-fire engagement. They also
give riflemen, machine gunners, and grenadiers the freedom to act quickly upon acquisition of the enemy.
The principles of direct-fire control are discussed below.
MASS EFFECTS OF FIRE

D-24. The squad masses the effects of its fires to achieve decisive results. Massing entails focusing fires at
critical points, distributing the effects, and shifting to new critical points as they appear. Random
application of fires is unlikely to have a decisive effect. (Example: Concentrating a squads fires at a single
target might ensure its destruction or suppression, but probably would not achieve a decisive effect on the
enemy formation, personnel, or position.)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-13
Appendix D
TASK ORGANIZE
D-25. When determining task organization, leaders consider the capabilities and limitations of individual
Soldiers. In both offensive and defensive positions, the squad leader selects a position where he can best
control his fire teams.
DESTROY THE GREATEST THREAT FIRST

D-26. The squad engages targets from most to least dangerous. If two or more equally threatening targets
appear, the squad engages the nearest first. Leaders determine specific threat conditions from command
guidance for that operational area.
EMPLOY THE BEST WEAPON FOR THE TARGET

D-27. The squad has many weapons. Choosing the best weapon for a particular threat increases the
likelihood of rapidly destroying or suppressing that threat.
AVOID OVERKILL
D-28. Using too many weapons against single targets wastes ammunition and decreases a squads ability to
acquire and engage multiple targets effectively. Properly distributing squad fires also prevents overkill by
keeping the squad from using more ammunition and effort than needed to destroy or suppress a single
target. To best distribute direct fire among infantry squads, the squad leader divides his engagement areas
(EA) into sectors of fire for each of his fire teams.
MINIMIZE FRIENDLY EXPOSURE

D-29. To increase survivability, rifle squads avoid exposure to threat observation and fire, except when
they must engage it. Using natural and man-made defilade positions for cover and concealment helps
reduce exposure. Additionally, it is important for the squad leader to know how to identify and hand off
enemy targets to the Bradley crews.
PLAN FOR EXTREME LIMITED VISIBILITY

D-30. Limited visibility fire-control equipment enables a squad to engage enemy forces at nearly the same
ranges, day and night. Fog, smoke, blowing sand, and other obscurants can reduce visibility and prevent
night-vision-equipped systems from covering their surveillance responsibilities. Such obscurants can also
restrict target engagements at normal ranges. Every limited visibility plan relies on coordinating and using
the BFVs thermal capabilities to assist rifle squads, even though rifle squads have their own internal nightvision devices and illumination. Squad leaders must be ready and plan for the need to adjust their fire plans
based on visibility conditions and on the acquisition capabilities of their systems.
FRATRICIDE PREVENTION
D-31. Leaders use 11 tools to prevent the platoon from causing friendly and civilian casualties (fratricide):
z
Rules of engagement (ROE).
z
Weapons control status (WCS).
z
Weapons safety postures.
z
Weapons safety procedures.
z
Combat vehicle and aircraft identification training.
z
Situational awareness.
z
Positional awareness.
z
BFV commander confirmation.
z
Vehicle recognition markings.
z
Combat identification panels.
z
Graphic control measures.
D-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
DEVELOP CONTINGENCIES FOR DIMINISHED CAPABILITIES

D-32. Leaders develop engagement plans based on maximum capabilities. They also incorporate backup
plans that allow for casualties and damaged or inoperable weapons. Though every possible problem cannot
be planned for, leaders can plan for the most likely ones.
FIRE CONTROL MEASURES

D-33. To establish a direct-fire standing operating procedures (SOP), the squad leader applies fire control
measures. He modifies the direct-fire plan based on mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and
support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) conditions and as reconnaissance
permits. Fire control and distribution measures consist either of physical control measures or of simple,
concise, clearly written weapons control instructions.
TARGET REFERENCE POINT

D-34. The squad leader designates recognizable terrain features as target reference points (TRP). He uses
TRPs to control both direct and indirect fire in support of the engagement plan. During movements, halts,
and hasty actions, he selects and adjusts TRPs, depending on the terrain he can see at the time. In defense,
he assigns TRPs along likely enemy avenues of approach wherever he wants elements to mass fire.
SECTOR OF FIRE
D-35. To cover the entire area of responsibility, the squad leader divides it into sectors of fire. He assigns
each sector to a fire team, a crew-served weapon crew, or an individual soldier. Sector assignment means
responsibility for acquiring and engaging targets in that area. The squad leader must ensure that sectors
overlap for complete coverage with the direct-fire plan; the leader can use TRPs, clock directions, terrainbased quadrants, and friendly-based quadrants. The squad leader can also assign secondary sectors of fire
to increase mutual support.
PRIMARY DIRECTION OF FIRE

D-36. When time is short or reference points are too few to assign a sector of fire, the leader assigns a
primary direction of fire (PDF) instead of a TRP. The leader uses the closest TRP, clock direction, cardinal
direction, tracer on target, or IR laser pointer to orient the fire teams, crew-served weapon system, or
Soldier to a particular battlefield area.
TRIGGER LINE
D-37. The trigger line is a prominent feature, natural or man-made, such as a ridge, stream, road, or
railroad track. The squad leader uses this feature as a trigger line to initiate an engagement or to distribute
fires in depth within a sector.
WEAPONS CONTROL STATUS

D-38. There are three levels of WCS that define the conditions (based on target identification criteria) in
which friendly elements engage targets. The platoon leaders set and adjust WCS based on the disposition
of friendly and enemy forces and on the clarity of the situation; however, squad leaders apply the status
within their squad. In general, any mission-anticipated fratricide should be counteracted with heightened
restrictive weapons control. The three levels of WCS, in descending order of restriction are
z
Weapons hold. Engage only if engaged or ordered to engage.
z
Weapons tight. Engage only those targets positively identified as enemy.
z
Weapons free. Engage any targets not positively identified as friendly.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-15
Appendix D
ENGAGEMENT PRIORITIES
D-39. Engagement priorities are set by the platoon leader and commander. Squad leaders use these
priorities as fire control measures to adequately engage and kill the enemy in accordance with the platoon
leaders plan. Engagement priorities serve three functions:
z
Identify what type(s) of targets to engage first.
z
Distribute fire among the various types of targets.
z
Match weapons and ammunition to target type.
CEASE FIRE CRITERIA

D-40. Cease fire criteria consists of instructions the squad leader gives to prevent overkill and free the
greatest number of systems to acquire and engage other targets.
FIRE PATTERNS
D-41. The squad leader distributes and adjusts the fire of the rifle squads into one or more of three basic
fire patternsfrontal, cross, and depth. He does this to best cover a threat formation of multiple or
simultaneous targets.
Frontal Fire
D-42. When targets appear in front of the squad in a lateral configuration, the squad leader initiates frontal
fire. The squad members engage targets to their fronts. The left-most flank of the squad engages the leftmost target. The right-most flank of the squad engages the right-most target. As targets are destroyed, the
squad shifts their fires toward the center of the enemy formation.
Cross Fire
D-43. The squad leader initiates cross fire when targets position themselves laterally in front of the squad,
or when obstructions prohibit frontal fire. With cross fire, each squad engages the farthest target on the
opposite side of the EA. The right-most flank of the squad engages the left-most target. The left-most
flank of the squad engages the right-most target. Firing diagonally across the EA gives the squad the
desired flank shots with antitank (AT) weapons and leaves enemy infantry unaware of their compromised
positions. If the threat keeps moving forward, cross fire increases the chance of kills and reduces the
chance of detection. As the squad destroys its targets, it shifts fire toward the center of the enemy, and from
near to far.
Depth Fire
D-44. Leaders use depth fire for targets dispersed in columns or column-like formations. The center of the
squad engages the closest target while the flanks of the squad engage deeper targets. As the platoon
destroys targets, the squad shifts their fires toward the center of the enemy formation.
ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUES
D-45. The squad leader can apply any of eight engagement techniques to destroy or suppress enemy
targets, while minimizing friendly exposure. Techniques include alternating, simultaneous, sequential,
volley, point, and area fire; time of suppression; and reconnaissance by fire.
ALTERNATING FIRE
D-46. The rifle squad alternates fire into an area or onto a specific target. This technique
z
Provides constant suppressive fires.
z
Keeps the enemy from acquiring friendly elements.
D-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
z
z
Minimizes rifle squad exposure.

Presents multiple points of fire.
SIMULTANEOUS FIRE
D-47. All rifle squad members fire into their assigned sectors at the same time. Simultaneous fire achieves
maximum destruction and fire superiority.
SEQUENTIAL FIRE
D-48. A single soldier fires multiple AT4s in sequence, correcting each subsequent round until he achieves
the desired target effect. Firing sequentially lets the Soldier correct his fire based on previous rounds.
VOLLEY FIRE
D-49. The squad fires volleys to rapidly mass the effects of their fire or to gain fire superiority. (Example:
A squad could initiate a support-by-fire operation with volley fire, and then use alternating or sequential
fire to maintain suppression.) Firing in volleys also increases the chance that certain anti-armor weapons
will hit and kill their targets. (Example: To rapidly destroy a BMP that is engaging a friendly position, the
rifle squad can volley AT4 fire onto it.)
POINT FIRE
D-50. This process directs all weapons fire onto a specific target such as a machine gun or antitank guided
missile (ATGM) position. Spreading out the squad on the ground improves point fire because the squad
can then hit the target from multiple directions.
AREA FIRE
D-51. For numerous or less obvious enemy positions, the squad distributes fire over a large area. The squad
leader assigns each fire team a sector of fire within the target area. This ensures that the squad covers the
entire target area with fire and observation.
TIME OF SUPPRESSION
D-52. This is the time period, specified by the squad leader, when the squad must suppress an enemy
position or force. Both the platoons rifle squads and BFVs receive the task to suppress an area in support
of another elements assault.
RECONNAISSANCE BY FIRE
D-53. This is the process of engaging possible enemy locations to elicit a tactical response such as return
fire or movement. This response helps the squad leaders acquire targets accurately and mass fires against
an enemy element.
DIRECT FIRE
D-54. A well rehearsed direct-fire SOP ensures that all members of the squad react quickly and predictably.
The squad leader bases each element of a direct-fire plan on anticipated conditions, squad capabilities, and
in support of the platoons plan.
D-55. Choosing a standard, respective position for TRPs allows the squad leader to quickly establish and
communicate his location (for example, the squad leader might number all reference points from left to
right). One or two TRPs usually suffice for a squad during movements, halts, and hasty actions.
D-56. The squad leader assigns sectors and identifies engagement priorities to ensure the squad acquires all
targets and distributes fires effectively. One technique incorporates the squad leader and his squads in a
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-17
Appendix D
search to engage near-range troops while the mounted section observes for mid- to long-range light-armor
fighting vehicles.
D-57. The platoon leader designates a weapons-readiness posture for established sectors and engagement
priorities. The squad leader is responsible for executing the weapons-readiness posture for established
sectors and engagement priorities.
D-58. Executing a standing fire pattern enables the squad to distribute fire while engaging multiple, similar
targets. When implemented, the squad leader engages all close-range targets while working their way
through the enemy formation. At the same time, the mounted section engages all mid- to long-range targets
while working their way through the enemy formation ensuring interlocking fields of fire.
D-59. It is the platoon leader who sets standard engagement techniques to achieve desired target effects and
minimize friendly exposure. (Example: One infantry squad suppression pattern technique engages initially
with simultaneous fires, then sustains suppression with alternating fires as each weapon fires or bursts a
given number of rounds. On the squad leaders command, the squad initiates simultaneous fire, and then
reverts to alternating fires.)
D-60. It is also the platoon leaders responsibility to select an initial WCS that restricts the chance of
fratricide while engaging the enemy. Weapons tight is a good initial WCS.
D-61. The platoon SOP should implement signals for shifting fire that all members can hear and see. The
SOP could use a green pyrotechnic with a certain code word to shift fires, and a red pyrotechnic with
another assigned code word to adjust or cease fires. It is his responsibility for all platoon members to
possess the knowledge of the signals before execution.
D-62. The squad leader must plan for degraded capabilities and loss. (Example: If an automatic rifleman or
anti-armor (M249, M240B) gunner becomes a casualty, the squad leader must reorganize immediately,
ensuring the most casualty producing weapons are manned first. Additionally the squad leader may need to
readjust or reassign sectors of responsibility.
SECTOR SKETCHES
D-63. The squad leader uses sector sketches to make sure he covers his acquisition and engagement
responsibilities to orient subordinate elements, provide information to higher leaders, and control fires.
After confirming weapons positions, he sketches his own engagement plan (see Figure D-3).
z
Each position prepares sector sketches or range cards (for crew-served weapons) on acetate
overlays to a scale established by the squad leader.
z
Each fighting position submits their completed sector sketch or range card to their team leader
for approval. The squad leader consolidates the sketches, prepares his sector sketch, and submits
one of two copies to the platoon leader. If approved, the second copy is the sketch from which
the squad leader fights.
z
Every sector sketch must show
Main terrain features.
TRPs.
Primary and alternate positions.
Primary and secondary sectors of fire and maximum engagement lines.
Primary directions of fire or final protective lines.
Dead spaces.
Observation post(s).
Obstacles.
Indirect fires associated with the engagement plan.
Adjacent element positions.
Remount point(s).
Alternate fighting positions for BFVs and squads.
D-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
Figure D-3. Sector sketch
SECTION III EXERCISE DEVELOPMENT

D-64. The principle focus of LFXs is weapon integration in a tactical operation. Squads must learn the
procedures to command, control, and distribute well-aimed, effective fires, including small arms, indirect
fire support assets, and other weapons, demolitions, and pyrotechnics.
D-65. The commander determines which STP 7-11B1-SM-TG collective task will be evaluated based on
his mission-essential task list (METL) and command guidance.
D-66. The commander, with help from his master gunner, selects enemy target arrays that the rifle squad
can expect to see in combat. These target arrays are developed based on threat analysis and command
emphasis. Enemy scenarios must include the ability for all organic weapons for the squad to be employed,
to include AT targets.
D-67. Commanders should include night and chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN)
conditions into scenarios. Soldiers should wear the complete individual MILES for situational training
exercises and dry and blank runs. They should wear the harnesses during live-fire exercises, which allow
exercise controllers to cause a near miss or to kill personnel for tactical errors or to induce stress.
Sustainment (casualty evacuation [CASEVAC] and resupply) can be added to the scenario.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-19
Appendix D
PREREQUISITES
D-68. Squads must meet the following prerequisites before an LFX:
z
Each soldier must have qualified with his individual weapon (M16A2, M16A4, M4, M203,
M240B, and M249) within the previous six months.
z
Javelin gunners must have certified with the Javelin within the past three months.
EVALUATION
D-69. Commanders will assess each squad with a rating of T for trained, P for needs practice, or U
for untrained. Commanders and observer/controller (O/C) trainers use T&EOs from STP 7-11B1-SM-TG,
the dismounted infantry target exposure matrix in Chapter 8, and the evaluation procedures from Chapter 9
to assist them in accurately assessing the squad.
RIFLE SQUAD GUNNERY TRAINING PROGRAM

D-70. Units must develop training programs that train and evaluate infantry squads. Successful training
programs use the individual tasks that serve as building blocks to support identified collective tasks.
Collective tasks build upon each other beginning with fire team, then squad, and finishing with platoon
collective tasks. Integration of the BFV or BFV section should begin with execution of Rifle Squad Table
IV. The BFV(s), if not Combat Table VI qualified, can execute these tables dry-fire or using appended
training devices. Mounted and dismounted elements training as a team must start at the earliest
opportunity. This gets them both prepared to take part in integrated training during the advanced gunnery
tables.
PRELIMINARY RIFLE SQUAD GUNNERY TRAINING

D-71. Preliminary rifle squad gunnery training consists of fire and maneuver training as a buddy team
(Rifle Squad Table I) and as an infantry fire team (Rifle Squad Table II). Preliminary rifle squad gunnery
tables, as with all rifle squad live-fire tables should be conducted using the crawl (dry fire), walk (blank
fire with MILES) and run (live fire) method of training.
RIFLE SQUAD TABLE I, BUDDY TEAM/FIRE AND MOVEMENT EXERCISE

D-72. The purpose of Table I is to train and evaluate individual movement techniques as part of a buddy
team in a live-fire and maneuver exercise. Table I should be conducted as a crawl (dry fire) walk (blank
fire) and run (live-fire exercise) event. Tasks evaluated include
z
Individual. Movement under Direct Fire (071-326-0502).
High crawl.
Low crawl.
Rush.
Select Temporary Fighting Positions (071-326-0513).

z
Buddy Team.
Move Over, Through, or Around Obstacles (Except Minefields) (071-326-0503).
React to Indirect Fire while Dismounted (071-326-0510).
D-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Rifle Squad Gunnery
RIFLE SQUAD TABLE II, FIRE TEAM MANEUVER EXERCISE

D-73. The purpose of Table II is to train and evaluate a fire teams ability to live fire and maneuver. This is
the first table that the fire team leader is able to maneuver and control the fire of his team in a live-fire
event. Table II should be conducted as a crawl (dry fire) walk (blank fire) and run (LFX) event. Tasks
evaluated include
z
Move as a Member of a Fire Team (071-326-0510).
z
Control Movement of a Fire Team (071-326-5605).
z
Conduct the Maneuver of an M2 BFV Section/Squad (071-420-0007-A).
BASIC RIFLE SQUAD GUNNERY TRAINING

D-74. Basic rifle squad gunnery training consists of
z
Squad Battle Drill Exercise (Rifle Squad Table III).
z
Squad Situational Training Exercises (Rifle Squad Table IV).
z
Rifle Squad Practice (Rifle Squad Table V).
z
Rifle Squad Live Fire Exercise (Rifle Squad Table VI).
D-75. Preliminary rifle squad gunnery tables should be conducted using the crawl (dry fire), walk (blank
fire with MILES) and run (live fire) method of training. Once a squad has completed the battery of rifle
squad tables in the basic rifle squad gunnery training, it is ready for advanced gunnery training. Rifle
Squad Table VI is a prerequisite for Combat Table XII.
RIFLE SQUAD TABLE III, SQUAD BATTLE DRILL EXERCISES

D-76. The purpose of Table III is to train and evaluate a rifle squads ability to exercise battle drills in a
field setting. A battle drill is a collective action executed by a platoon or smaller element without applying
a deliberate decision-making process and generally supports other collective tasks. Battle drills that are
identified as a platoon battle drill can and should still be executed either as a platoon in Combat Table X
and XI or conducted as a squad as part of a larger element. Tasks evaluated include
z
Battle Drill 1. Platoon Attack (Dismounted).
z
Battle Drill 1A. Platoon Attack (Mounted).
z
Battle Drill 2. React to Contact (Platoon or Squad) (Dismounted).
z
Battle Drill 2A. React to Contact (Section or Platoon) (Mounted).
z
Battle Drill 3. Break Contact (Platoon or Squad) (Dismounted).
z
Battle Drill 3A. Break Contact (Section or Platoon) (Mounted).
z
Battle Drill 4. React to Ambush (Platoon or Squad) (Dismounted).
z
Battle Drill 4A. React to Ambush (Platoon) (Mounted).
z
Battle Drill 5. Enter Building/Clear Room/Building (Platoon).
z
Battle Drill 6. Enter/Clear a Trench (Platoon).
z
Battle Drill 7. Knock Out Bunkers (Platoon).
z
Battle Drill 8. Conduct Initial Breach of a Mined Wire Obstacle (Platoon).
RIFLE SQUAD TABLE IV, SQUAD SITUATIONAL TRAINING EXERCISES

D-77. The purpose of Rifle Squad Table IV is to train and evaluate a squads ability to execute collective
tasks in an STX. This is the first opportunity for new squad leaders to maneuver both fire teams as an
evaluated event. Tasks evaluated include, but are not limited to, those found in STP 7-11B1-SM-TG.
Collective training events for the rifle squad should be organized as part of a larger element.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
D-21
Appendix D
RIFLE SQUAD TABLE V, SQUAD PRACTICE

D-78. The purpose of Rifle Squad Table V is to train and evaluate a squads ability to execute collective
tasks in a live-fire training exercise. This is the first opportunity for squad leaders to fire and maneuver
both fire teams during a new gunnery density as an evaluated event. Tasks evaluated include, but are not
limited to those found in STP 7-11B1-SM-TG. Collective training events for the rifle squad should be
organized as part of a larger element. This table is the building block to Rifle Squad Table VI (Squad
Qualification) and should focus on collective tasks or battle drills identified as a firing task for subsequent
tables.
RIFLE SQUAD TABLE VI, SQUAD QUALIFICATION

D-79. The purpose of Rifle Squad Table VI is to qualify rifle squads. Rifle Squad Table VI should
encompass an entire operation from troop-leading procedures through consolidation and reorganization.
Rifle squads should be evaluated on their ability to effectively move tactically, control organic fires, and
report/communicate as a squad and as part of a BFV platoon. Well-prepared squad qualification tables are
interactive (forces squad and team leaders to make clear, decisive decisions) and multi-echeloned (trains
platoon leaders to fight both dismounted and mounted elements).
D-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Appendix E
Engineer Squad Qualification Tables

As the engineer regiment transforms into a modular force, maneuver commanders are
responsible for the training and readiness oversight of their embedded engineers. It is
the engineer regiments responsibility to provide maneuver commanders with the
tools to qualify their engineer platoons and companies, to provide quality training
oversight, and to validate engineer training. Engineer Qualification Tables (EQT)
play an important role in this process. Commanders can use the 12 EQTs to
determine which tasks to train, qualify, and certify based on their assessment and
mission analysis.
Note. Training is resourced only by DA Pam 350-38.
Appendix E explains the use of the EQTs, which are intended to assist maneuver
commanders and the engineer regiment by providing a standard methodology
required to train individuals, squads, and platoons. Sequentially, each EQT
encompasses the tasks required for Brigade Combat Team (BCT) mission success at
those three levels. The commander can then focus the EQT on the units mission by
adding or deleting tasks based on the units capabilities, mission analysis, and
modularity build.
Appendix E is organized in a manner parallel to the infantry and armor qualification
tables. This organization provides a common-sense approach to training by echelon.
Individual tasks are trained and tested first, followed by squad and platoon tasks. This
appendix includes introductory information about the EQT concept. Commanders are
encouraged to develop a local scenario that is tactically sound for the range layout
available and that directly reflects their units capabilities and missions. The training
strategy provides the actual tables and the tasks that create a foundation for the
commanders training scenario. As units select tasks, their methodology should
follow. A platoon collective task drives a squad collective task that drives an
individual task.
Each engineer squad/team must have a qualified squad leader who can exercise sound
judgment based on his ability to perform the leader/individual tasks that support the
units mission-essential task list (METL). In accordance with (IAW) DA Pam 350-38,
the squad/team must have Soldiers who meet the standard for individual weapons
qualification, mines, and demolitions, and it must be able to man assigned crewserved weapons (M2, M240B, MK19) with qualified gunners. M2A2 ODS-Eequipped units must be qualified on Bradley Table VI. The vehicle commander (VC)
must meet crew qualification IAW Chapter 9 and DA Pam 350-38.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
E-1
Appendix E
Contents
Section I Concept ...................................E-2
Section II Training Strategy ...................E-2
Section III Proposed Engineer
Qualification Tables ..................................E-3
Conduct of Table IIndividual and
Crew Weapons Qualification ...............E-3
Conduct of Table IILeader
Demolition, Munitions, and Explosive
Hazards Certification...........................E-3
Conduct of Table IIIIndividual
Demolition, Munitions, and Explosive
Hazards Certification...........................E-4
Conduct of Table IVIndividual
Certification .........................................E-4
Conduct of Table VSquad React to
Contact ...............................................E-4
Conduct of Table VISquad Sapper
Training ...............................................E-4
Conducts of Table VIISquad
Training (Dry) ......................................E-5
Conduct of Table VIIISquad
Qualification ........................................E-5
Conduct of Table IXPlatoon React
to Contact ...........................................E-5
Conduct of Table XPlatoon Sapper
Training ...............................................E-5
Conduct of Table XIPlatoon
Training (Dry) ......................................E-5
Conduct of Table XIIPlatoon
Qualification ........................................E-5
Evaluation Guidance .......................... E-5

Standards and Training Commission
Resources .......................................... E-6
Unit Status Report .............................. E-6
Section IV List of Individual Tasks for
Engineer Qualification Tables I through
IV ................................................................ E-6
Table ITasks that Support
Individual and Crew Weapons
Qualification ....................................... E-7
Tables II Through IVLeader and
Individual Training and Certification ... E-7
Section V List of Collective Tasks for
Engineer Qualification Tables V
through VIII................................................ E-9
Table VSquad React to Contact ....... E-9
Table VISquad Sapper Training ....... E-9
Table VIISquad Training (Dry)........ E-10
Table VIIISquad Qualification ......... E-11
Section VI List of Collective Tasks for
Engineer Qualification Tables IX
through XII............................................... E-11
Table IXPlatoon React to Contact .. E-12
Table XPlatoon Sapper Training .... E-12
Table XIAdvanced Training (Dry) ... E-13
Table XIIAdvanced Qualification .... E-13
SECTION I CONCEPT
E-1. The EQTs are designed to establish a common standard for skills that are unique to combat engineers
in a BCT unit or separate company. These qualification tables add structure to unit training plans, articulate
combat readiness, and help units compete for installation ranges and resources. The tables also assist the
unit by outlining a strategy for evaluating training readiness for individuals, squads, and platoons.
Establishing these training and evaluation standards allows commanders to make efficient use of training
resources, to articulate readiness, and most important, to ensuring consistent battlefield results regardless of
which engineer unit is in support.
SECTION II TRAINING STRATEGY

E-2. Maneuver commanders must resource qualification training IAW DA PAM 350-38, this includes
coordination and evaluation of engineer training. Engineer unit commander must have the flexibility to
identify particular tasks to qualify their Soldiers based on the units mission and future deployments. The
EQTs are designed to permit preliminary training, proficiency training, and qualification of engineer units.
They are designed to develop and test the proficiency of individual, squad and platoon techniques at the
basic, intermediate and advanced levels for both active and reserve components. The series of combat
engineer tasks or engagements in each table is intended to duplicate typical battlefield tasks under realistic
E-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
conditions, against likely situations and target arrays, and within safety and resource constraints of live-fire
ranges. The tables are to be accomplished sequentially.
E-3. The EQTs enable commanders to determine squad and platoon training readiness ratings. Leaders
and Soldiers must qualify CMF 21Bs assigned to the Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) with slight
variances. The HBCT engineer company is equipped with the Engineer Bradley Fighting Vehicles
(EBFV). During the preliminary and basic phases, the EBFV crew will train and qualify on EQTs I through
VIII first, then conduct the Gunnery Tables (GT) I through VIII IAW standards in this manual. All other
21Bs in squads/platoons assigned to the HBCT will train and qualify on EQTs I through VIII. During the
advanced phase of gunnery, engineer platoons will conduct EQTs IX through XII.
SECTION III PROPOSED ENGINEER QUALIFICATION TABLES
CONDUCT OF TABLE IINDIVIDUAL AND CREW WEAPONS

QUALIFICATION
E-4. Table I is designed to train each member of a combat engineer squad on his basic weapon. These
tasks develop coordination skills and provide the Soldier with an opportunity to identify individual
strengths and weaknesses. The crew section of Table I will be conducted with an existing crew. Table I
tasks are constructed to support the remainder of the EQTs. Units will man assigned individual and crewserved weapons with qualified gunners and assistant gunners IAW DA PAM 350-38.
CONDUCT OF TABLE IILEADER DEMOLITION, MUNITIONS, AND

EXPLOSIVE HAZARDS CERTIFICATION
E-5. All leaders in the combat engineer platoon must be certified on demolitions, munitions, and
explosives hazards within 90 days of assignment. All leaders will recertify annually. They must complete
Table II tasks within a three-week period before executing Tables III and IV. Companies determine which
tasks to train and certify based on their training assessment and mission analysis. At a minimum, leaders
will certify on the following common core Sapper tasks:
z
Demolitions:
Determine safe distance when firing explosives.
Direct placement of timber, steel, breaching, and cratering charges.
Calculate timber, steel, breaching, and cratering charges.
Prepare demolition reconnaissance report.
Calculate field expedient explosives.
Clear misfires.
z
Reconnaissance:
Prepare a route reconnaissance overlay.
Determine the radius of curves.
Determine stream velocity.
Determine the percent of slope.
Determine gap width.
Conduct road, tunnel, ford, bridge, and engineer reconnaissance.
Determine the rapid field classification of a fixed bridge.

z
Explosives hazards:
Direct construction of wire entanglements.
Conduct a breach of a minefield.
Determine logistical requirements for wire obstacles.
Conduct route sweep operations.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
E-3
Appendix E
Supervise operational minefield clearing operations.

Supervise minefield breaching operations.
CONDUCT OF TABLE IIIINDIVIDUAL DEMOLITION, MUNITIONS,

AND EXPLOSIVE HAZARDS CERTIFICATION
E-6. Squad leaders conduct individual training of their squads on demolitions, munitions, and explosive
hazards using inert training devices. This is a hands-on, performance-oriented table that requires the
Soldier to demonstrate proficiency in mine and demolition procedures using inert training aids. All leaders
in the platoon are responsible for ensuring that they and their subordinate leaders are qualified in Table II
before executing Table III or IV tasks. At a minimum, squad leaders will certify their Soldiers on the
following common core Sapper tasks:
z
Demolitions:
Construct demolition firing systems.
Prime military explosives.
Construct demolition initiating system.

z
Explosives hazards:
Perform detection operations with the AN/PSS-12, and AN/PSS-14 mine detectors.
Install wire obstacle materials.
CONDUCT OF TABLE IVINDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATION

E-7. The platoon certifies squad members on demolitions, munitions, and explosive hazards using live
demolitions (if available).
Note. The commander must use collective training ammunition IAW DA PAM 350-38.
CONDUCT OF TABLE VSQUAD REACT TO CONTACT

E-8. This table is designed to train all members of the combat-engineer squad on fire control and
distribution in offensive and defense engagements. Squads train under locally developed scenarios that are
tactically sound and supported by the existing range layout using the following drills:
z
React to ambush.
z
React to indirect fire.
z
Break contact.
z
React to an improvised explosive device (IED).
z
Evacuate injured person.
CONDUCT OF TABLE VISQUAD SAPPER TRAINING

E-9. Squads train on the following Sapper tasks:
z
Conduct reconnaissance.
z
Create a lane in an obstacle.
z
Clear obstacles using demolitions.
z
Construct wire obstacles.
z
Breach a passageway into a building.
E-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
CONDUCTS OF TABLE VIISQUAD TRAINING (DRY)

E-10. Squads execute Sapper tasks in a tactical scenario using blank ammunition, simulated demolitions,
and inert munitions.
CONDUCT OF TABLE VIIISQUAD QUALIFICATION

E-11. Squads execute Sapper tasks in a tactical scenario using live ammunition, demolitions, and inert
munitions. The engineer company commander will evaluate and qualify squads.
Note. The commander must use collective training ammunition IAW DA PAM 350-38.
CONDUCT OF TABLE IXPLATOON REACT TO CONTACT

E-12. Platoons conduct advanced react to contact training and practice shoot, move, and communications
skills at the platoon level. Commanders determine which tasks will be trained and certified based on their
assessment and mission analysis.
CONDUCT OF TABLE XPLATOON SAPPER TRAINING

E-13. Platoons train on four Sapper missions:
z
Breach obstacles.
z
Detect, neutralize, and mark explosive hazards.
z
Emplace situational obstacles.
z
Conduct clearing operations (obstacle, route, and area).
CONDUCT OF TABLE XIPLATOON TRAINING (DRY)

E-14. Platoons execute missions in a tactical scenario using blank ammunition, simulated demolitions, and
inert munitions.
CONDUCT OF TABLE XIIPLATOON QUALIFICATION

E-15. Platoons execute missions in a tactical scenario using live ammunitions, demolitions, and inert
munitions. Battalion/maneuver commanders evaluate and qualify platoons. If resources are available, the
ideal platoon qualification scenario entails conducting this table as part of a combined arms training
exercise/qualification event.
TRAINING FREQUENCY
E-16. Table I through Table VIII are designed to be conducted semiannually, while Tables IX through XII
are designed to be conducted annually. A company commander or maneuver commander may increase the
frequency based on his own assessment of unit proficiency and training requirements.
EVALUATION GUIDANCE
E-17. The training and evaluation outlines are provided for the collective tasks identified in this EQT. The
field manual (FM) 5-Drill provides the information needed to train to standard for drills. EQTs IX through
XII will be evaluated IAW Chapter 11, Section II.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
E-5
Appendix E
STANDARDS AND TRAINING COMMISSION RESOURCES

E-18. Analysis shows that current Standards and Training Commission Resources (STRAC) requirements
are sufficient. Details are the following:
z
Table I. Usage rates for small arms are resourced IAW DA Pam 350-38.
z
Table II. Certification will be completed with inert Class V.
z
Table III. This entails inert training only.
z
Table IV. DA Pam 350-38 does not resource this certification. Use of inert training aids is
recommended.
z
Table V. This training should be conducted with blanks (Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement
System [MILES] gear) and pyrotechnics. Statistics show blanks usage rates are very low
throughout the Army and are projected to remain low.
z
Table VI. Urban breaching is resourced for infantry only by DA. See TC 90-1 for guidance in
developing training.
z
Table VII. No Class V issues are applicable in the walk phase. Blanks are plentiful.
z
Table VIII. All training is resourced in DA Pam 350-38.
z
Table IX. The following considerations apply:
Walk phasedry fire 2.
Crawl phaseblanks 3.
Run phaseuse live rounds and SRTA when applicable.

z
Table X. All training is resourced in DA Pam 350-38.
z
Table XI. All training is resourced in DA Pam 350-38.
z
Table XII. Class V is allocated for collective training. All Class V should be harvested when
retraining and extra qualification is required by platoons.
Note. Live ammunition is resourced for qualification and collective training only IAW DA
Pam 350-38. Commanders have the option to assess their annual allocation of ammunition early
in the training process to determine whether use of live ammunition for individual certification
(Table III) will improve soldier readiness and build confidence.
UNIT STATUS REPORT

E-19. The unit commander uses EQTs as a tool to assist in developing the units annual training and in
providing input to determine the units T-Rating in the unit status report (USR).
SECTION IV LIST OF INDIVIDUAL TASKS FOR ENGINEER QUALIFICATION

TABLES I THROUGH IV
E-20. Table I is designed to train each member of a combat engineer squad on his basic weapon. These
tasks develop coordination skills and provide a Soldier with an opportunity to identify individual strengths
and weaknesses. The crew section of Table I should be conducted with an existing crew. Table I tasks are
constructed so they will support the remainder of the tables. Tables II through IV are individual and leader
training and certification. Squad leaders conduct PMI for individual and crew-served weapons and qualify
with their assigned weapons. They also certify and conduct individual training on munitions, explosive
hazards, and demolitions. Squads train on tasks covering preliminary react to contact, react to ambush,
react to indirect fire, break contact, react to an IED, and evacuate injured personnel. Refer to the attached
individual tasks supporting the EQT training. These baseline skills will be reinforced throughout the
training events.
E-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
E-21. Each engineer squad/team must have a qualified squad leader (commanders judgment based on the
Soldiers ability to perform the leader/individual tasks that support the units mission/capabilities). Units
must have Soldiers who meet the standards for individual weapon qualification, mines, and demolitions
training IAW DA Pam 350-38. Units must be able to man assigned individual and crew-served weapons
(M2, M136, M240B, M249, MK19) with qualified gunners and assistant gunners IAW DA Pam 350-38.
TABLE ITASKS THAT SUPPORT INDIVIDUAL AND CREW

WEAPONS QUALIFICATION
E-22. This table is designed to train all members of an engineer platoon on individual/crew weapons. It
will be executed using standard weapons and ranges according to the appropriate FMs, which are listed
with the applicable weapon systems:
z
FM 3-22.9, M16A1 rifle and M16A2 rifle marksmanship.
z
FM 3-22.68, M249 light machine gun.
z
FM 3-22.37, Javelin medium anti-armor weapon system.
z
FM 3-22.27, MK19, 44-mm grenade machine gun.
z
FM 3-23.30, grenade and pyrotechnic symbols.
z
FM 3-22.31, 40-mm grenade launcher, M203.
z
FM 3-23.35, combat training with pistols and revolvers.
z
FM 3-22.65, Browning machine gun, caliber .50, M2.
TABLES II THROUGH IVLEADER AND INDIVIDUAL TRAINING

AND CERTIFICATION
DEMOLITIONS
E-23. Training tasks are the following:
z
052-193-1310, Construct demolition firing systems.
z
052-193-1311, Prime military explosives.
z
052-193-1312, Construct demolition initiating system.
z
052-193-2014, Determine the safe distance when firing explosives.
z
052-193-2015, Direct placement of timber-cutting charges.
z
052-193-2016, Direct placement of steel-cutting charges.
z
052-193-2017, Direct placement of breaching charges.
z
052-193-2018, Direct placement of cratering charges.
z
052-193-3022, Calculate timbercutting charges.
z
052-193-3023, Calculate steelcutting charges.
z
052-193-3024, Calculate breaching charges.
z
052-193-3025, Calculate explosive requirements for road craters.
z
052-193-3054, Prepare a demolition reconnaissance report.
z
052-193-3070, Calculate concrete-stripping charges.
z
052-193-2030, Clear misfires.
z
052-221-1008, Construct a door breaching charge.
z
052-221-1010, Place explosive urban breaching charges.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
E-7
Appendix E
RECONNAISSANCE
z
052-196-2002, Determine the radius of curves.
z
052-196-2004, Determine stream velocity.
z
052-196-2101, Determine the percent of slope.
z
052-196-2103, Determine gap width.
z
052-196-3030, Prepare a road reconnaissance report.
z
052-196-3031, Prepare a tunnel reconnaissance report.
z
052-196-3032, Prepare a ford reconnaissance report.
z
052-196-3033, Prepare a bridge reconnaissance report.
z
052-196-3035, Prepare an engineer reconnaissance report.
z
052-196-3065, Prepare a route reconnaissance overlay.
z
052-196-3150, Conduct a route reconnaissance.
z
052-196-4022, Determine the rapid field classification of a fixed bridge.
EXPLOSIVES HAZARDS
z
071-325-4407, Employ hand grenades.
z
071-325-4425, Employ an M18A1 claymore mine.
z
071-325-4426, Recover an M18A1 claymore mine.
z
052-192-1270, React to a possible IED.
z
052-192-1271, Identify visual indicators of an IED.
z
052-192-3261, React to an IED attack.
z
052-192-3262, Prepare for an IED threat prior to movement.
z
052-192-1141, Load a multi-delivery mine system (Volcano).
z
052-192-1231, Perform preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) on the mine
clearing line charge (MICLIC).
z
052-192-1232, Prepare a modular pack mine system (MOPMS) for operation in the hardwired
mode.
z
052-192-1233, Identify the components of a multi-delivery mine system (Volcano).
z
052-192-2077, Operate a ground Volcano system.
z
052-192-2080, Perform Volcano bit and arm test.
z
052-192-2081, Perform a Volcano mine canister test.
z
052-192-2082, Operate a Volcano dispenser control unit.
z
052-192-2083, Perform troubleshooting procedures on a Volcano.
z
052-192-2030, Operate a MOPMS.
z
052-192-1251, React to explosive hazard visual indicators.
z
052-192-1253, Perform self-extraction from an explosive hazard area.
z
052-192-1254, Perform casualty extraction from an explosive hazard area.
z
052-192-1258, Conduct a booby trap search.
z
052-192-1266, Locate mines by probing.
z
052-192-1269, Detect explosive-hazard indicators by visual means.
z
093-401-5040, React to unexploded ordnance hazards.
z
052-193-1101, Install an M142 multipurpose firing device.
z
052-193-1102, Remove an M142 multipurpose firing device.
z
052-195-1020, Install wire obstacle materials.
E-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
052-192-2026, Direct a minefield marking party.

052-192-2084, Direct a MICLIC loading team.
052-195-2101, Direct construction of wire entanglements.
052-192-3060, Conduct a breach of a minefield.
052-192-3140, Direct the mounting of a Volcano dispenser on a ground vehicle.
052-192-3141, Direct the removal of a Volcano dispenser from a ground vehicle.
052-192-3142, Direct the operation of a ground Volcano system.
052-192-3165, Supervise the installation of Volcano minefield.
052-192-3166, Supervise the installation of a MOPMS minefield.
052-192-3177, Supervise MICLIC operations.
052-195-3067, Determine logistical requirements for wire obstacles.
052-192-4045, Conduct route sweep operations.
052-192-4052, Supervise operational minefield clearing operations.
052-192-4053, Supervise minefield breaching operations.
052-192-4110, Determine Volcano minefield logistical requirements.
052-192-4112, Determine MOPMS minefield logistical requirements.
052-221-1006, Perform a ballistic breach with a 12-gauge shotgun.
SECTION V LIST OF COLLECTIVE TASKS FOR ENGINEER QUALIFICATION

TABLES V THROUGH VIII
E-26. Tables V through VIII are conducted under locally developed scenarios that are tactically sound and
supported by the existing range layout and the units capabilities. These tables are designed to be
progressive in nature in that the conditions change for each table while the tasks remain the same. Table V
is designed to train all members of the combat engineer squad on fire control and distribution in offensive
and defense engagements. Tables VI through VIII begin at the basic level to provide the engineer squad
with training in developing mobility assessments, detecting and neutralizing explosive hazards, and
supporting mobility through urban terrain.
TABLE VSQUAD REACT TO CONTACT

E-27. Squads train on the following battle drills:
z
Conduct action on contact (platoon/squad), 07-3-9013.
z
Evacuate casualties, 0 8-2-0004.
z
React to a possible ground-emplaced IED, 05-2-3091.
z
React to an IED attack, 052-192-3261.
TABLE VISQUAD SAPPER TRAINING

E-28. Squads train on the following Sapper battle drills:
z
Perform an obstacle and restriction reconnaissance, 05-3-1004.
z
Create a lane through an obstacle using mechanical techniques, 05-3-1001.
Create a lane through an obstacle using manual techniques, 05-3-1003.

z
Clear obstacle using demolitions.
Clear a footpath through an obstacle with a Bangalore torpedo, 05-4-D0003.
Create a footpath through an obstacle with an APOBS, 05-4-D0014.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
E-9
Appendix E
Create a lane with a MICLIC, 05-4-D0005.
Create a lane through an obstacle using explosive techniques, 05-3-1000.

Identify/neutralize explosive hazards.

Emplace munitions and sensors.
Reload the Volcano (ground), 05-4-D0001.
Emplace a disrupt/fix Volcano (ground) minefield, 05-4-D0008.
Emplace a MOPMS, disrupt, or fix minefield, 05-3-2012.

Construct a wire obstacle, 05-3-2019.
Breach a window, door, and wall.
Breach a door with explosive techniques, 05-4-0821.
Breach a door with manual techniques, 05-4-0822.
Breach a window with explosive techniques, 05-4-0823.
Breach a window with manual techniques, 05-4-0824.
Breach a wall with explosive techniques (non-RWBK), 05-4-0825.
Breach a wall with manual techniques, 05-4-0826.
z
z
TABLE VIISQUAD TRAINING (DRY)

E-29. Squads execute Sapper battle drills in a tactical scenario using blank ammunition, simulated
demolitions, and inert munitions. Drill Updated in 2005 located on the Reimer Digital Library (RDL) or
Army Training Information Architecture (ATIA) on Army Knowledge Online (AKO). Execution is done
with inert devices.
E-30. Squads train on the following Sapper battle drills:
z
z

z

z

z
Emplace a MOPMS, disrupt, or fix minefield, 05-3-2012.

z
z
E-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009

TABLE VIIISQUAD QUALIFICATION

E-31. Squads execute Sapper battle drills (5-Drill) in a tactical scenario using live ammunition,
demolitions, and inert munitions:
z
z

z

z

z
Emplace a MOPMS disrupt or fix minefield, 05-3-2012.

z
z
SECTION VI LIST OF COLLECTIVE TASKS FOR ENGINEER

QUALIFICATION TABLES IX THROUGH XII
E-32. Tables IX through XII are conducted under locally developed scenarios that are tactically sound for
the existing range layout. Table IX is designed to qualify all members of a combat engineer platoon on fire
control and distribution in offensive and defensive engagements. Target array is based on the threat
situation and the scenario developed by a commander. Target arrays must realistically represent mission,
enemy, terrain (weather), troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC)
conditions and provide realistic tactical scenarios. A unit should rehearse the table to maximize proficiency
in fire distribution, control techniques, and platoon standing operating procedures (SOP) before expending
ammunition. Tables X through XII are designed to train all members of a combat engineer platoon at an
advanced level in providing mobility assessments, detecting and neutralizing explosive hazards, and
supporting mobility through urban terrain.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
E-11
Appendix E
TABLE IXPLATOON REACT TO CONTACT

E-33. Platoons train to shoot, move, and communicate at platoon level by performing the following drills:
z
Conduct action on contact (platoon/squad) 07-3-9013.
z
Evacuate casualties, 08-2-00046.
z
z
TABLE XPLATOON SAPPER TRAINING

E-34. Platoons train on four platoon missions (with supporting tasks):
z
Breach obstacles.

z

z
Emplace situational obstacles, 05-3-2001.

z
Conduct clearance operations (obstacle, route, and area).
Provide engineer support to clearing operations, 05-2-1700.
Breach obstacles, 05-2-0114.
Conduct clearance operations, 05-2-1700.
E-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
TABLE XIADVANCED TRAINING (DRY)

E-35. Platoons train on platoon missions in a tactical scenario using blank ammunition, simulated
demolitions, and inert munitions. Platoons train on four platoon missions:
z
Breach obstacles.

z

z

z
Provide engineer support to breaching operations, 05-2-0114.
Create a footpath through an obstacle with APOBS, 05-4-D0014.
TABLE XIIADVANCED QUALIFICATION

E-36. Platoons execute the platoon missions in a tactical scenario using live ammunition, live demolitions,
and inert munitions. Maneuver commanders evaluate and qualify platoons on four platoon missions:
z
Breach obstacles.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
E-13
Appendix E




Provide engineer support to breach operations, 05-2-0114.
E-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Appendix F
Safety
Risk is the chance of injury or death for individuals and damage to or loss of vehicles
and equipment. Risks, and/or the potential for risks, are always present in every
combat and training situation a platoon faces. Risk management must take place at all
levels of the chain of command during each phase of every operation; it is an integral
part of tactical planning. The platoon leader, his noncommissioned officers (NCO),
and all other platoon soldiers must know how to use risk management, coupled with
fratricide reduction measures, to ensure that the mission is executed in the safest
possible environment within mission constraints.
The primary objective of risk management is to help units protect their combat power
through accident prevention, enabling them to win the battle quickly and decisively,
with minimum losses. This appendix outlines the process that leaders can use to
identify hazards and implement a plan to address each identified hazard. It also
includes a detailed discussion of the responsibilities of the platoons leaders and
individual soldiers in implementing a sound risk management program. See FM
100-14 for additional information on risk management.
Contents
Section I Risk Management
Procedures ................................................ F-1
Step 1 - Identify Hazards .................... F-2
Step 2 - Assess Hazard to
Determine Risks ................................. F-3
Step 3 - Develop Controls and Make
Risk Decisions .................................... F-3
Step 4 - Implement Controls ............... F-4
Step 5 - Supervise and Evaluate ........ F-4
Section II Implementation
Responsibilities .........................................F-5
Abrams Tank.......................................F-6
Bradley Fighting Vehicle ...................F-12
SECTION I RISK MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

F-1. This section outlines the five steps of risk management. Leaders must always remember that the
effectiveness of the process depends on situational awareness. They should never approach risk
management with one size fits all solutions to the hazards their element will face. Rather, in performing
the steps, they must keep in mind the essential tactical and operational factors that make each situation
unique.
F-2. There are two types of hazardstactical and accident. Tactical hazards deal with hazards imposed
upon us by the threat (such as antitank guided missiles [ATGM] positions or untemplated threat positions
on our flanks). Accident hazards are those hazards imposed upon us due to terrain, weather, or mission
requirements (such as traveling an unimproved road at night in a snow storm).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
F-1
Appendix F
STEP 1 - IDENTIFY HAZARDS

F-3. A hazard is a source of danger. It is any existing or potential condition that could entail injury,
illness, or death of personnel; damage to or loss of equipment and property; or some other sort of mission
degradation. Tactical and training operations pose many types of hazards.
F-4. The platoon leader must identify the hazards associated with all aspects and phases of the platoons
mission, paying particular attention to the factors of mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and
support available, time available (METT-TC). Risk management must never be an afterthought; leaders
must begin the process during their troop-leading procedures and continue it throughout the operation.
F-5. Table F-1 lists possible sources of risk that the platoon might face during a typical tactical operation.
The list is organized according to the factors of METT-TC.
Table F-1. Examples of potential hazards
Sources of Battlefield Risk
Mission
Duration of the operation.
Complexity/clarity of the plan. (Is the plan well developed and easily
understood?)
Proximity and number of maneuvering units.
Enemy
Knowledge of the enemy situation.
Enemy capabilities.
Availability of time and resources to conduct reconnaissance.
Terrain and Weather
Visibility conditions, including light, dust, fog, and smoke.
Precipitation and its effect on mobility.
Extreme heat or cold.
Additional natural hazards (broken ground, steep inclines, and water
obstacles).
Troops and Support Available
Equipment status.
Experience the units conducting the operation have working together.
Danger areas associated with the platoons weapon systems.
Soldier/leader proficiency.
Soldier/leader rest situation.
Degree of acclimatization to environment.
Impact of new leaders and/or crew members.
Time Available
Time available for troop-leading procedures and rehearsals by subordinates.
Time available for precombat checks (PCC)/precombat inspections (PCI).
Civil Considerations
Applicable rules of engagement (ROE).
Potential stability and/or civil operations involving contact with civilians (such as
nongovernmental organizations (NGO), refugee or disaster assistance, or
counterterrorism).
Potential for media contact/inquiries.
F-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Safety
STEP 2 - ASSESS HAZARD TO DETERMINE RISKS

F-6. Hazard assessment is the process of determining the direct impact of each hazard on an operation (in
the form of hazardous incidents). Use the following steps:
z
Determine which hazards can be eliminated or avoided.
z
Assess each hazard that cannot be eliminated or avoided to determine the probability that the
hazard can occur.
z
Assess the severity of hazards that cannot be eliminated or avoided. Severity, defined as the
result or outcome of a hazardous incident, is expressed by the degree of injury or illness
(including death), loss of or damage to equipment or property, environmental damage, or other
mission-impairing factors (such as unfavorable publicity or loss of combat power).
z
Taking into account both the probability and severity of a hazard, determine the associated risk
level (extremely high, high, moderate, and low). Table F-2 summarizes the four risk levels.
z
Based on the factors of hazard assessment (probability, severity, and risk level, as well as the
operational factors unique to the situation), complete the risk management worksheet. Table F-3
outlines the risk assessment matrix used to determine the level of risk. FM 100-14 contains a
risk management worksheet that can be used in lieu of the risk assessment matrix.
Table F-2. Risk levels and impact on mission execution
Levels of Risk
Extremely
High
Someone will die or suffer permanent

disability.
High
More often than not, someone will suffer an

injury that requires less than 3 months to heal.
Moderate
More often than not, someone will require first

aid or minor medical treatment.
Low (Worst
Case)
Someone is likely to need first aid or minor

medical treatment.
Table F-3. Risk assessment matrix
Risk Assessment Matrix
Probability
Severity
Catastrophic
Frequent
Likely
Occasional
Seldom
Unlikely
Critical
Marginal
Negligible
E - Extremely High Risk

H - High Risk
M - Moderate Risk
L - Low Risk
STEP 3 - DEVELOP CONTROLS AND MAKE RISK DECISIONS

DEVELOPING CONTROLS
F-7. After assessing each hazard, develop one or more controls that will either eliminate the hazard or
reduce the risk (probability and/or severity) of potential hazardous incidents. When developing the
controls, consider the reason for the hazard and not just the hazard by itself.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
F-3
Appendix F
MAKING RISK DECISIONS

F-8. A key element in the process of making a risk decision is determining whether accepting the risk is
justified or, conversely, is unnecessary. The decision-maker (the tank platoon leader, if applicable) must
compare and balance the risk against mission expectations. He alone decides if the controls are sufficient
and acceptable and whether to accept the resulting residual risk. If he determines the risk is unnecessary, he
directs the development of additional controls or alternative controls; as another option, he can modify,
change, or reject the selected course of action for the operation.
STEP 4 - IMPLEMENT CONTROLS

F-9. Controls are the procedures and considerations the unit uses to eliminate hazards or reduce their risk.
Implementing controls is the most important part of the risk management process; this is the chain of
commands contribution to the safety of the unit. Implementing controls includes coordination and
communication with appropriate superior, adjacent, and subordinate units and with individuals executing
the mission. The tank platoon leader must ensure that specific controls are integrated into operational plans
(OPLAN), operation orders (OPORD), standing operating procedures (SOP), and rehearsals. The critical
check for this step is to ensure that controls are converted into clear, simple execution orders understood by
all levels.
F-10. If the leaders have conducted a thoughtful risk assessment, the controls will be easy to implement,
enforce, and follow. Examples of risk management controls include the following:
z
Thoroughly brief all aspects of the mission, including related hazards and controls.
z
Conduct thorough precombat checks (PCC) and precombat inspections (PCI).
z
Allow adequate time for rehearsals at all levels.
z
Drink plenty of water, eat well, and get as much sleep as possible (at least 4 hours in any
24-hour period).
z
Use buddy teams.
z
Enforce speed limits, use of seat belts, and driver safety.
z
Establish recognizable visual signals and markers to distinguish maneuvering units.
z
Enforce the use of ground guides in assembly areas and on dangerous terrain.
z
Establish marked and protected sleeping areas in assembly areas.
z
Limit single-vehicle movement.
z
Establish SOPs for the integration of new personnel.
STEP 5 - SUPERVISE AND EVALUATE

F-11. During mission execution, it is imperative for leaders to ensure that risk management controls are
properly understood and executed. Leaders must continuously evaluate the units effectiveness in
managing risks to gain insight into areas that need improvement.
SUPERVISION
F-12. Leadership and unit discipline are the keys to ensuring that effective risk management controls are
implemented. All leaders are responsible for supervising mission rehearsals and execution to ensure
standards and controls are enforced. In particular, NCOs must enforce established safety policies as well as
controls developed for a specific operation or task. Techniques include spot checks, inspections, situation
reports (SITREP), confirmation briefs, buddy checks, and close supervision.
F-13. During mission execution, leaders must continuously monitor risk management controls, both to
determine whether they are effective and to modify them as necessary. Leaders must also anticipate,
identify, and assess new hazards. They ensure that imminent danger issues are addressed on the spot and
that ongoing planning and execution reflect changes in hazard conditions.
F-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Safety
EVALUATION
F-14. Whenever possible, the risk management process should also include an after action review (AAR)
to assess unit performance in identifying risks and preventing hazardous situations. Leaders should then
incorporate lessons learned from the process into unit SOPs and plans for future missions.
SECTION II IMPLEMENTATION RESPONSIBILITIES

F-15. Leaders and individuals at all levels are responsible and accountable for managing risk. They must
ensure that hazards and associated risks are identified and controlled during planning, preparation, and
execution of operations. The tank platoon leader and his senior NCOs must look at both tactical risks and
accident risks. The same risk management process is used to manage both types. The platoon leader alone
determines how and where he is willing to take tactical risks. With the assistance of his platoon sergeant,
NCOs, and individual soldiers, the platoon leader manages accident risks.
F-16. Sometimes, despite the need to advise higher headquarters of a risk taken or about to be assumed, the
risk management process may break down. Such a failure can be the result of several factors; most often, it
can be attributed to the following:
z
The risk denial syndrome in which leaders do not want to know about the risk.
z
A soldier who believes that the risk decision is part of his job and does not want to bother his
platoon leader or section leader.
z
Outright failure to recognize a hazard or the level of risk involved.
z
Overconfidence on the part of an individual or the unit in the capability to avoid or recover from
a hazardous incident.
z
Subordinates not fully understanding the higher commanders guidance regarding risk decisions.
F-17. The tank platoon leader gives the platoon direction, sets priorities, and establishes the command
climate (values, attitudes, and beliefs). Successful preservation of combat power requires him to embed
risk management into individual behavior. To fulfill this commitment, the platoon leader must exercise
creative leadership, innovative planning, and careful management. Most importantly, he must demonstrate
support for the risk management process. The tank platoon leader and others in the platoon chain of
command can establish a command climate favorable to risk management integration by taking the
following actions:
z
Demonstrate consistent and sustained risk management behavior through leading by example
and by stressing active participation throughout the risk management process.
z
Provide adequate resources for risk management. Every leader is responsible for obtaining the
assets necessary to mitigate risk and for providing them to subordinate leaders.
z
Understand their own and their soldiers limitations, as well as their units capabilities.
z
Allow subordinates to make mistakes and learn from them.
z
Prevent a zero defects mindset from creeping into the platoons culture.
z
Demonstrate full confidence in subordinates mastery of their trade and their ability to execute a
chosen course of action (COA).
z
Keep subordinates informed.
z
Listen to subordinates.
F-18. For the platoon leader, his subordinate leaders, and individual soldiers alike, responsibilities in
managing risk include the following:
z
Make informed risk decisions; establish and then clearly communicate risk decision criteria and
guidance.
z
Establish clear, feasible risk management policies and goals.
z
Train the risk management process. Ensure that subordinates understand the who, what,
when, where, and why of managing risk and how these factors apply to their situation and
assigned responsibilities.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
F-5
Appendix F
z
z
Accurately evaluate the platoons effectiveness, as well as subordinates execution of risk

controls during the mission.
Inform higher headquarters when risk levels exceed established limits.
ABRAMS TANK
F-19. Various components of the Abrams fire control system may become damaged if an enemy round hits
the tank; however, that need not render the tank or its crew powerless. The emergency procedures in this
chapter identify actions the crew can take to survive a direct hit and continue to fight.
Notes. When the operational status of the tank changes significantly, the tank commander (TC)
should report to the platoon leader or platoon sergeant.
The phrase immediate return fire is required in this chapter refers to a situation in
which failure to fire will result in a subsequent hit on your tank.
AMMUNITION COMPARTMENT HIT

F-20. The Abrams tank was designed with crew survivability as a primary consideration. Part of this
design is the compartmentalization of the ammunition away from the crew. Numerous tests of fully loaded
bustle and hull ammunition compartments show the crew can survive when the tank is hit in an
ammunition compartment. The ammunition compartment doors protect the crew from the fire and blast of
the exploding propellant and the multipurpose antitank (MPAT) or high-explosive antitank (HEAT)
warheads. The safest place for the crew during an ammunition compartment fire is inside the tank. If
crewmen attempt to evacuate the tank while the propellant is still burning, they could be injured by the
extreme heat and flame outside the turret.
Bustle Ammunition Compartment Fires

F-21. When an incoming round ignites ammunition stored in the bustle compartment, the explosion will
cause the turret blow-off panels to fly off. The force of the explosion, therefore, is vented away from the
crew compartment. The 120-mm combustible case cartridges will be consumed in about one minute; some
unburned primers may pop off within the next minute.
CAUTION
Do not stow or strap equipment on blow-off panels. This could prevent
proper functioning of panels during bustle compartment fire.
F-22. Following the initial explosions, there will be a two-minute period of haze or light dust around the
turret. This will be followed by a lull of about 5 minutes, then some of the MPAT or HEAT warheads may
cook off. Although a cook off is unlikely, it is possible that MPAT or HEAT warheads will cook off for
nearly an hour after the fire. After that hour, the turret will have cooled sufficiently to preclude further
cook off.
F-23. If ammunition in the bustle compartment ignites, crewmen must react quickly to ensure their safety
and the continued operation of the tank. M1A1 and M1A2 System Enhancement Package (SEP) crews
should use the tanks overpressure system rather than the gas particulate filter system to help clean the
turret of toxic fumes and smoke. The M1A1s and M1A2s gas particulate filter system draws air from
outside the vehicle in the vicinity of the turret bustle and may pump flame or toxic fumes into the turret. If
the overpressure system is inoperative on the M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tank, the crew should use their
protective masks only.
F-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Safety
F-24. The turret should be rotated to get the gun tube over the side of the tank, if possible. This action
protects the engine and limits the amount of flame and hot air being pulled into the engine air cleaner and
overpressure system.
F-25. If the tank automotive system is operational, the crew should seek a turret-down protected position
and wait inside the tank for at least 60 minutes. (After 60 minutes, the possibility of secondary explosions
will have passed.) The tank should then be driven, with the hatches open to ventilate the turret, to a
maintenance collection point. While the crew is in the sustainment area, they should replace their
protective mask filters and tank filters.
F-26. If the tank is inoperative and the TC determines it should be evacuated, the crew should evacuate
between two and five minutes after the initial explosion. Evacuating during this time window reduces the
possibility of the crew being hurt from secondary warhead detonations. The crew should wear gloves as
they exit, to protect their hands from hot metal and sharp edges.
Note. Because the crew may have been exposed to smoke and toxic fumes before they masked,
they should avoid strenuous exercise after a bustle fire. Strenuous exercise may worsen injury
from toxic gases; therefore, for the next 24 hours, the crew should be as physically inactive as
possible. Problems with severe coughing, difficulty in breathing, and chest pain are most likely
to start within a few hours of exposure. Anyone having such symptoms should be promptly
evacuated for medical attention, by stretcher if possible. If no such problems arise within 24
hours, the local commander may return soldiers to full duty with little risk of residual harmful
effect.
Hull Ammunition Compartment Fires

F-27. When an incoming round ignites the ammunition propellant in the rounds stored in the hull, the hull
blow-off panels will fly off. Only trace amounts of toxic fumes will enter the crew compartment. The
propellant fire will last for about 15 seconds. Because the fire is short-lived, there is no danger of HEAT
warheads exploding.
F-28. In the heat of battle, the crew may not notice an explosion. The proper crew action is to continue the
mission.
CREW COMPARTMENT AMMUNITION FIRES

F-29. The fire suppression system is designed to suppress hull and crew compartment fires (fuel, hydraulic
fluid); the system will not suppress ammunition propellant fires. The propellant contains its own
oxygenating agent and will continue to burn, even under water. To minimize the chance of an ammunition
fire in the crew compartment, it is important that the loading procedures described in this manual and in the
operators manual be followed.
Note. Ammunition doors must remain closed, except when the loader is removing a round to
load immediately into the empty chamber, or returning a round to the compartment after it has
been removed from the chamber. All guards and safety devices must be in place before firing.
Exit an M1A1 or M1A2 SEP Tank during an Ammunition Fire

F-30. The following procedures are used to evacuate an M1A1 and M1A2 SEP tank during an ammunition
fire in the crew compartment. Assume the tank has just completed an engagement, and the main gun is
loaded with HEAT and considered hot. The TC has issued the command BATTLECARRY SABOT. As
the loader removes the HEAT round, the alert AMMO FIRE is given. (The removed round is smoldering
or burning.)
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
F-7
Appendix F
F-31. The following conditions are assumed for these procedures:

z
Vehicle.
A fully equipped, operational M1A1 or M1A2 SEP tank in a hull-down position or on the
move.
All safety guards are in position.
The main gun is loaded and considered a hot gun.

Note. A hot gun is defined as one or more rounds fired in the previous minute.
z
Crew. All crewmen are in the prescribed uniform with combat vehicle crewman (CVC) cords
hooked up.
Note. Prescribed uniform is complete Nomex, if available. If not, it is coveralls with gloves. If
coveralls are not available, it is Army combat uniform (ACU) (with collar up and buttoned,
sleeves down and buttoned) and gloves.
z
TCs station.
The command has been given for a change of ammunition.
The TCs stand is adjusted for standing position.
Seats and platforms are adjusted in accordance with (IAW) the operators manual.
The TCs hatch is in open-protected or closed position.

Loaders station.
The loaders hatch is in the locked position (closed).
The GUN/TURRET DRIVE switch is in the POWERED position.
The main gun is loaded and the ARM/SAFE lever is in the SAFE position; make sure the
MAIN GUN STATUS white SAFE light is lit.
Gunners station. The gunners seat is adjusted.
Drivers station.
The drivers hatch is in the closed position.
The T-bar is fully extended.
The night vision viewer and power cable are installed (at night).
The engine is running.
z
z
Note. A proficient crew should be able to execute these procedures within 15 seconds (25
seconds if the night-vision viewer is installed).
F-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Safety
Table F-4. M1A1/M1A2 SEP ammunition fire exit procedures

TC
Gunner
Loader
Driver
Stops breathing.
Stops breathing.
Announces AMMO
FIRE, and stops
breathing.
Stops breathing.
If moving, commands
DRIVER, STOP.
Disconnects CVC
cord.
If round is only
partially out of
chamber when fire is
noticed, attempts to
rechamber once; if
unsuccessful, leaves
it alone.
If moving, stops tank,

pushes T-bar to
stowed position,
loosens AN/VVS-2
mounting wing nuts,
and drops sight to left
side of drivers seat.
Disconnects CVC
cord and opens
loaders hatch.
Opens hatch and

disconnects CVC cord.
Exits the tank.
Exits the tank.

Moves to cover behind
the vehicle.
Traverses the main

gun to allow the
driver to exit the
tank.
Opens TCs hatch
and disconnects
CVC cord.
Moves FIRE
CONTROL MODE
switch to MANUAL
mode.
Exits the tank.

Helps the gunner exit
the tank.
Exits the tank

through the TCs
hatch.
Helps the gunner exit

the tank.
Moves to cover
behind the vehicle.
Moves to cover
behind the vehicle.
Moves to cover
behind the vehicle.
Notes. The gunner escapes his position by grabbing the TCs sight extension, turret handhold
and pulls himself up and out while facing forward. He does not have to turn around and face the
TCs position.
The TC must be able to open the hatch while sitting (closed-hatch mode) or standing
(open-protected mode).
In the closed-hatch mode, the TC is sitting. The seat must be adjusted IAW the operators
manual; seat adjustment is critical so the right arm is not over-extended. The TC unlocks the
hatch with his left hand, then moves his left hand to the locking lever and places his right hand,
palm up, on the under side of the hatch. In one motion, he should unlock the hatch with his left
hand and push it to the full-open position with his right hand, then exit the tank.
When in the open-protected mode, the TC should always be standing. The upper and
lower platforms must be adjusted IAW the operators manual; it is critical that his platforms are
adjusted so his arm is not over-extended. He follows the same procedures (as in closed-hatch
mode) for opening the hatch (it should not lock in the open-protected position).
Make sure the CVC cord going to the commanders weapon station fire control handle is
out of the way so the gunner does not become entangled in it.
The CVC cords should never be tied, taped, or looped together; this may prevent escape.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
F-9
Appendix F
LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS
F-32. A malfunction or the impact from an enemy round may cause one or more members of the tank crew
to lose communications. Within the turret, a loss of communication is easily handled. However, a loss of
communication between the TC and the driver presents a serious problem with increasing severity under
combat conditions.
F-33. If the TC senses something is wrong with the intercom system, he initiates a crew report. If all
stations hear the command, they will report their status, and the crew will continue the mission.
F-34. If the problem is in the TCs intercom, he tries to locate the problem and fix it. If he cannot, he takes
the gunners CVC helmet and gives his helmet to the gunner. The crew continues the mission with the TC
operating off the gunners intercom box.
F-35. If the gunner or loader loses communication, the TC shouts his instructions, ensuring they are
understood.
F-36. If the driver does not report that he is ready, the TC must relay instructions to him through the
gunner or loader. After ensuring that the driver is clear of the turret ring, the TC directs the gunner to
traverse the turret so the gunner or loader can get the drivers attention. The gunner or loader then relays
the TCs instructions to the driver.
F-37. If the driver notices a loss of communications with the turret, he should
z
In training, stop the tank, tell the TC that he has no communication, and get it fixed.
z
In combat, attempt to locate the problem by checking the following items:
Mike connection at helmet.
CVC cord connections.
Drivers control box.

z
In combat, if the driver cannot locate the problem, he must follow the crew SOP established by
the TC and decide whether to
Continue under the TCs last instructions.
Seek a hide position.
CREW EVACUATION
F-38. If one of the turret crewmen is wounded and immediate return fire is required, you must adjust
controls and crew positions, and fire. When the situation permits, move to a covered position, report the
crews status, request medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) (if required), evaluate wounded crewman, and
begin first aid.
F-39. If the wounded crewman is the driver and immediate return fire is required, return fire. When the
situation permits, report the crews status, request MEDEVAC (if required), traverse the turret to gain
access to the driver from the turret, evaluate the drivers wounds, and begin first aid.
Note. If under hostile fire, when the situation permits, traverse the turret and evacuate the
driver through the turret; move to a covered position as soon as possible.
WARNING
Before traversing the turret, make sure the drivers body is clear
of the turret, or you could kill him.
F-40. If immediate return fire is not required, report the crews status, request MEDEVAC (if required),
traverse the turret, evaluate the drivers wounds, and begin first aid.
F-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Safety
TANK ROLLOVER
F-41. During fast-paced combat operations, the tank may roll over. The procedures in Table F-5 allow the
crew to exit the overturned tank safely and prevent a subsequent fire. The TC must decide, based on
METT-TC, whether to remain with the vehicle and await recovery.
F-42. If the external fire extinguisher does not shut off the engine, once the danger of a fire has passed or
the fire has been extinguished, the crew should secure personal weapons and protective masks.
Note. The crew member who first notices that the tank is beginning to roll over announces
ROLLOVER.
Table F-5. Tank rollover procedures
TC
Gunner
Loader
Driver
Drops inside the turret and

braces for impact.
Braces for impact.
Drops inside the turret and

braces for impact.
Braces for impact.
Note. Tank is turned over on its side.

Once the tank has stabilized,
directs the driver to shut down
the engine. If a turret fire
exists, uses a portable fire
extinguisher to fight the fire.
Once the tank has

stabilized, moves the main
gun select switch to the
TRIGGER SAFE position.
Once the tank has

stabilized, moves the
SAFE/ARM handle to the
SAFE position.
Once the tank has

stabilized, on TCs order,
shuts down the engine. If
a fire exists and the first
shot bottle has not
extinguished the fire,
activates the second shot
switch.
Checks the crew for injuries,

administers first aid if critical
condition exists, and radios
for assistance.
Checks self and crew for

injuries.

injuries.

injuries.
If evacuation is possible,
orders the crew to evacuate
the tank. If the driver cannot
exit through the drivers hatch,
and a life threatening situation
exists, the TC orders the
gunner to traverse the turret,
first manually then with
power, to allow the driver to
exit through the drivers hatch.
Ensures turret traverse lock is
locked before the driver or
crew exit.
On order from the TC,

clears the turret of
obstructions and traverses
the turret, first manually
then with power, to gain
access to the drivers
compartment. (One or
more screens may need to
be removed to access the
drivers compartment.)
Orders the loader to lock
the turret traverse lock and
assist the driver into the
turret.
Assists the gunner clearing

obstructions, locks the turret
traverse lock when ordered
from the gunner, and assists
the driver into the turret.
Opens hatch, if possible,

and tells the TC whether
he can exit through the
hatch.
Orders the crew to evacuate

the tank through the hatch
closest to the ground, and
designates an assembly area
30 meters behind the tank.
Exits the tank through the

hatch closest to the
ground.

hatch closest to the ground.

drivers hatch or, if
directed by the TC, moves
into the turret and exits
through the hatch closest
to the ground.
Reports to the assembly area.
Reports to the assembly

area.

area.

area.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
F-11
Appendix F
BRADLEY FIGHTING VEHICLE

LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS
F-43. A malfunction or the impact from an enemy round may cause one or more members of the Bradley
Fighting Vehicle (BFV) crew to lose communications. Within the turret, a loss of communication is easily
handled. However, a loss of communication between the vehicle commander (VC) and the driver presents
a serious problem with increasing severity under combat conditions.
F-44. If the VC senses something is wrong with the intercom system, he initiates a crew report. If all
stations hear the command, they will report their status, and the crew will continue the mission.
F-45. If the problem is in the VCs intercom, he tries to locate the problem and fix it. If he cannot, he takes
the gunners CVC helmet and gives his helmet to the gunner. The crew continues the mission with the VC
operating off the gunners intercom box.
F-46. If the gunner loses communication, the VC shouts his instructions, ensuring they are understood.
F-47. If the driver does not report that he is ready, the VC must relay instructions to him through the
gunner or squad leader.
F-48. If the driver notices a loss of communications with the turret, he should
z
In training, stop the tank, tell the VC that he has no communication, and get it fixed.
z
In combat, attempt to locate the problem by checking the following items:
Microphone connection at helmet.
CVC cord connections.
Drivers control box.

z
In combat, if the driver cannot locate the problem, he must follow the crew SOP established by
the VC and decide whether to
Continue under the VCs last instructions.
Seek a hide position.
CREW EVACUATION
F-49. If one of the turret crewmen is wounded and immediate return fire is required, you must adjust
controls and crew positions, and fire. When the situation permits, move to a covered position, report the
crews status, request MEDEVAC (if required), evaluate wounded crewman, and begin first aid.
F-50. If the wounded crewman is the driver and immediate return fire is required, return fire. When the
situation permits, report the crews status, request MEDEVAC (if required), Open drives hatch to gain
access to the driver, evaluate the drivers wounds, and begin first aid.
Note. If under hostile fire, evacuate the driver through the squad compartment; move to a
covered position as soon as possible.
F-51. If immediate return fire is not required, report the crews status, request MEDEVAC (if required),
open drivers hatch, evaluate the drivers wounds, and begin first aid.
F-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Safety
BRADLEY ROLLOVER
F-52. The Bradley can roll over in rough terrain. This paragraph explains how crews can get out of the
vehicle quickly and safely, depending on the situation. The first crew member to notice the vehicle starting
to roll over should announce "Rollover" and act IAW Table F-6.
z
Equipment Stowage. Proper stowage of equipment prevents unnecessary injuries. Crew
members must stow all equipment IAW published TMs and unit SOPs.
z
Fire-Suppression System. When a vehicle rolls over while still running, fuel and oil pouring
from the engine can start a fire. The internal fire-suppression system trips only when the flame
sensors detect a blazing fire. The system dispenses large amounts of carbon dioxide into the
crew compartment, which can suffocate the crew. Consequently, during operation, the driver
can leave the system set to the manual mode, and exiting crew members can activate the system
themselves. He generally leaves the system in automatic mode when the vehicle is unmanned. If
the crew exits a burning vehicle, they should try to take all weapons and protective gear, if they
can do so safely.
Table F-6. Bradley rollover procedures
Vehicle Commander
Gunner
Driver
Squad Member
Braces for
impact by
holding the
bottom of seat.
Braces for impact by placing

hands on walls of driver
compartment.
Braces for impact by

placing hands on
inside of troop
compartment;
maintains control of
weapon.
Begins crew checks

to ensure no fires
have started, and to
account for
personnel.
Ensures weapon
system is on
electrical and
manual SAFE.
Pulls fuel shutoff and turns off Checks for injuries

accessories. If needed, sets off and reports to the VC.
internal (CO2) fire-suppression
system in engine
compartment.
Checks for injured

personnel.
Reports rollover.
Helps the VC
evacuate the
vehicle.
Exits vehicle through hatch, if Exits vehicle through

unobstructed; or, if driver hatch clear hatch.
is blocked, exits through the
crew compartment.
BFV is rolling over:

Drops inside turret
and braces for
impact.
BFV has rolled over:
Note. Sometimes the crew should remain in the vehicle and wait for recovery.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
F-13
Appendix G
Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation

The Guardian Armored Security Vehicle (ASV) enables MP forces to observe the
battlefield and engage the enemy while remaining secure behind vehicle armor. This
includes boresighting, pre-fire checks, zeroing procedures, post-fire checks, range
determination, ASV weapons malfunctions.
In conjunction with performing regular preventive maintenance, checks, and services
(PMCS) the crew conducts weekly to ensure their fire control system is fully
operational. Before any firing event the crew performs pre-fire checks and boresights
all weapon systems. This ensures all turret weapon systems operate properly and
prevents many of the common malfunctions that can occur during firing. If a
malfunction does occur, the crew tries to correct it; if they cannot, they report the
malfunction to maintenance. After firing the weapon systems, the crew conducts a
post-fire check.
Contents
Section I Boresight................................ G-1
Boresight Procedure: Minor
Boresighting Using the Laser
Boresight ........................................... G-1
Boresighting the 40mm Machine
Gun using Night Sight ........................ G-5
Boresighting the M48 ......................... G-6
Section II Pre-Fire Checks .................... G-7
Section III Zeroing ASV-Mounted
Machine Guns ........................................... G-8
Zeroing the Turret Weapon Systems . G-8
Zeroing the M48 Caliber .50
Machine Gun ................................... G-10
M36E Sight ...................................... G-12
Section IV Post-Fire Checks ............... G-13

Section V Range Determination ......... G-14
Deliberate Range Determination ...... G-14
Section VI ASV Weapons System
Malfunctions ........................................... G-20
Stop a Runaway Gun MK19 and
M48 .................................................. G-20
Immediate Action to Clear a
Jammed Bolt MK19 .......................... G-20
Action Upon Misfire, Hang-Fire or
Jam Procedures for MK19 ............... G-21
Action Upon Hang Fire , Misfire or
Jam For M48 Caliber .50.................. G-22
M257 Smoke Grenades Malfunction G-22
Communications Malfunction ........... G-22
SECTION I BORESIGHT
BORESIGHT PROCEDURE: MINOR BORESIGHTING USING THE

LASER BORESIGHT
Notes. Crew will accomplish boresighting. Both day and night sights will be boresighted. Steps
listed below are provided for ASV use of boresight kit for 40/50 turret components not covered
in the kits operator manual.
The borelight must be zeroed prior to boresighting your weapons.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-1
Appendix G
WARNING
Visible laser beam can cause eye Injury. Avoid direct exposure to
the beam. Do not stare into the laser beam. Do not look into the
laser beam through binoculars or telescopes. Do not point laser
beam at reflective surfaces. Do not shine laser beam into eyes of
personnel.
Note. If unit does not have the issued boresight target construct boresight target to the exact
dimensions shown in Figure 1 of Technical Bulletin ASV024 or TM 9-2320-309-10, Page
#2-19.
z
Step 1. Erect boresight target 30 ft. (10) meters from turret. The 40 mm alignment boresight
aiming point on boresight target should be at the same height as 40mm barrel with mantles at 0
elevation (see Figure G-1).
Figure G-1. Boresight panel dimensions

z
G-2
Step 2. Check that AA battery is installed in laser boresight (LBS). Assemble bore light to
5.56mm mandrel (see Figure G-2).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure G-2. Mandrel and borelight assembly

z
Step 3. Position vehicle on level terrain. Using angle meter gauge, ensure level gauge shows
zero degrees, front to back and side to side. Vehicle and weapons need to be at same degree on
angle meter gauge (see Figure G-3).
Figure G-3. Angle gauge

z
z
z
Step 4. Insert LBS and mandrel into 40mm mandrel adapter, and insert adapter assembly into
barrel of 40mm machine gun.
Step 5. Place LBS in the START position in a vertical plane with battery compartment facing
up.
Step 6. Turn LBS on using the low switch position, adjust position of target to place laser dot
from LBS on center of 40mm boresight target boresight aiming point (lower left corner of
target).
Step 7. The half turn position places the LBS in a vertical plane with the battery compartment
facing down.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-3
Appendix G
Notes. Rotating the LBS must always be in a counter clockwise direction as viewed from above
and behind the LBS.
The LBS must be zeroed before initiating boresight procedures. The terms START and
HALF TURN shall be used as standard commands.
z
z
Step 8. Rotate LBS to half turn position and mark LBS dot.
Step 9. Use adjusters to move laser to half the two dots, rotate bore light back to start position.
If laser strike point is still on reference point, bore light zeroing is completed. If not, repeat steps
so that the laser strike point stays in the same location when bore light is in both start and half
turn positions.
Notes. Proper positioning of boresight target is critical for accurate boresight results. Turret
must remain stationary throughout boresight alignment procedures. Personnel not involved in
boresighting should be kept off of and away from vehicle. This will move the point of aim and
will cause the crew to begin boresight procedures again.
Sight alignment will be inaccurate if the Reticle control adapter lever is not down against
the eccentric stop screw on the sight drive arm.
z
Step 10. Ensure that Reticle control adapter lever is down against eccentric stop screw on sight
drive arm (see Figure G-4).
Figure G-4. Reticle control adapter lever

z
z
G-4
Step 11. Use angle gauge to ensure weapon system is level with the vehicle.
Step 12. With 40mm machine gun aligned on boresight target 40mm boresight aiming point
look through day sight.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Step 13. If day reticle does not align with 40mm day sight boresight aiming point on boresight
target in azimuth, pull out azimuth adjustment knob on day sight and rotate knob until proper
alignment is achieved.
Step 14. If reticle does not align with 40mm day sight Boresight aiming point on boresight
target in elevation, pull out elevation adjustment knob on day sight and rotate knob until proper
alignment is achieved (see Figure G-5).
Figure G-5. Night sight azimuth/elevation adjustment
CAUTION
Boresight filter must be properly installed before night switch is moved
to ON position. If night sight is turned on during daylight hours without
filter, image intensifier tube will be severely damaged. Failure to follow
this caution will result in damage to image intensifier in the night sight.
If boresight filter is not available, boresighting should take place just
after sunset or just before sunrise. Twilight conditions will allow night
sight to be used while boresight target is still visible.
BORESIGHTING THE 40MM MACHINE GUN USING NIGHT SIGHT

z
z
z
z
Step 1. Place night sight cover over night sight head assembly and secure in place.
Step 2. Rotate handle fully clockwise to darkest setting.
Step 3. Move night sight switch to ON position.
Step 4. Rotate night sight cover handle counter clockwise, one click at a time until target
becomes visible through the night sight optic.
Notes. Rotate disk on boresight filter to larger pinhole only if necessary to see boresight target.
To aid in focusing on target, turn tube brightness and the reticle brightness adjustment
knobs as required. Under most conditions the low setting will result in clearest Image. If,
necessary, turn diopter ring for a clear focus of target.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-5
Appendix G
Step 5. With 40mm machine gun aligned on boresight target 40mm boresight aiming point,
sight through night sight eyepiece and focus on night sight boresight aiming point (upper right
boresight aiming point).
Step 6. If night Reticle does not align with night sight boresight aiming point on boresight target
in azimuth, pull out azimuth adjustment knob on night sight and rotate knob until proper
alignment is achieve.
Step 7. If night sight Reticle does not align with night sight boresight aiming point in elevation,
pull out elevation adjustment knob on night sight and rotate knob until proper alignment is
achieved.
Notes. If target cannot be aligned with sight adjustment knobs, major boresighting required.
Notify maintenance personnel IAW TM 9-2320-309-24.
Azimuth and elevation adjustment knobs on both day and night sights are spring loaded
and held in position by serrations on knobs and sight assemblies. Make sure knobs are securely
seated before completing bore-sighting procedures.
Do not leave night sight reticle ON when not being used. Excessive exposure of reticle to
light will damage Image Intensifier tube.
z
z
z
z
Step 8. Move night sight switch to OFF position.

Step 9. Turn LBS OFF, and remove 40mm mandrel adapter assembly from 40mm machine gun
barrel.
Step 10. Remove 5.56mm mandrel adapter.
Step 11. Remove LBS from 5.56mm mandrel.
BORESIGHTING THE M48

z
z
Step 1. Assemble LBS to the caliber .50 mandrel, and insert mandrel assembly into barrel of
caliber .50 machine gun.
Step 2. Turn the LBS on. Re-zero the LBS in accordance with MK19 procedures.
Note. Caliber .50 boresight adjustments are made at rear gun mount of the caliber .50 cradle
using a 7/16 inch wrench.
z
G-6
Step 3. Loosen azimuth-locking screw and turn azimuth adjustment Reticle screw until sight
Reticle bore sight cross is aligned in azimuth, with caliber .50 boresight aiming point on
boresight target (lower right boresight aiming point). Tighten azimuth-locking screw.
Step 4. Loosen elevation-locking screw. Turn elevation adjustment screw until sight reticle
boresight cross is aligned with .50 boresight aiming point on boresight target (lower right
boresight aiming point). Tighten elevation-locking screw (see Figure G-6).
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure G-6. Daylight sight azimuth/elevation adjustment

z
z
z
Step 5. Check that all screws are tightened securely.

Step 6. Turn LBS OFF, and remove caliber .50 mandrel assembly from caliber .50 machine gun
barrel.
Step 7. Remove LBS from caliber .50 mandrel.
Note. Verify boresight retention by manually rotating turret and elevation mantel. Look through
day sight and move back onto day sight boresight aiming point on boresight target. Check to
ensure 40mm, caliber .50 and night sight are still aimed at their respective butterflies.
G-1. Look into sight eye piece. You will not see your target.
z
Step 1. While looking into sight, slowly move the Reticle control adapter lever up until the
target is back into and even with the boresight cross. (Point to boresight cross on the slide.)
z
Step 2. Now you must compensate for spin drift. Rotate turret until target is on the 14 on the
horizontal line. (Point to the 14 on the horizontal line.)
SECTION II PRE-FIRE CHECKS

G-2. Before conducting live fire, the crew performs pre-fire checks to reduce vehicle malfunctions on the
firing range.
G-3. The preferred pre-fire checks are conducted when a crew completes a thorough PMCS as outlined in
TM 9-2320-307-10 and TM 9-2320-309-10.
G-4. When time or conditions do not allow for a complete and thorough PMCS ASV crews should
conduct the following pre-fire checks as a minimum (see Table G-1).
Note. Crews should correct any deficiencies if using the checklist below before conducting any
live fire training.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-7
Appendix G
WARNING
Ensure all weapons are clear before conducting pre-fire checks.
Table G-1. ASV pre-fire checklist

Station
Check
Go
Driver
Power up drivers station IAW TM -10.
No-Go
Establish communications with crew members.

Establish Communications with higher echelons.
Establish communications with crew members.
TC
z
z
z
z
z
z
Gunner
Prepare ASV Crew for operations:

Mount weapons.
Set solenoid.
Conduct function check.
Power up turret IAW TM -10.
Boresight Weapons (MK19/M48).
Power up turret.
Establish communication with crew members.
Mount weapons.
Set solenoid (M48).
Conduct functions check.
Boresight weapons (MK19/M48).
Check feed chute (MK19).
SECTION III ZEROING ASV-MOUNTED MACHINE GUNS
ZEROING THE TURRET WEAPON SYSTEMS

G-5. Before zeroing the MK19 and the M48 on the ASV, make sure the weapons have been boresighted
and are loaded (see Figure G-7).
Notes. Ensure the reticle control adapter lever is completely down when firing the MK19 at
distances below 800 meter and is in the up position when firing at targets 800 meters and
greater. When firing the M48 the reticle control adapter lever is always in the down position.
The unit MUST have two targets for zeroing. One placed at 550m for the .50 Cal and
one placed at 400m for the MK19.
Purpose. The ASV has a graduated sight and there is an offset that takes into account flight
trajectory of each round.
G-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure G-7. Reticle control adapter

z
z
z
z
Step 1. Load and ready the MK19.

Step 2. Power up turret.
Step 3. Alert the crew by announcing MK19 on the intercom.
Step 4. On the MK19 move selector to fire position.
WARNING
Power to weapons firing relay is interrupted if ASV drivers, team
leader or gunners hatches are not latched in the closed position.
Close and latch all hatches before attempting to fire weapons.
Firing machine guns with turret override selected, will allow fired
rounds to strike ASV deck in certain azimuth positions. Turret
override will also override hatch safety interlocks allowing
weapons to be fired with vehicle or turret hatches open.
Operation of machine guns while in override may damage vehicle
or cause personal injury or death.
z
z
z
z
Step 5. Lay the 400-meter aiming point in the gunners weapon sight (MK19) on the center of
the target, 400 meters out, using the manual controls (see Figure G-8).
Step 6. On the gunners control panel move the selector to the left for the MK19. The red light
should come on indicating the weapon is armed and ready to fire.
Step 7. Fire one round by pressing the button on the elevation handle. Release the button to
cease firing.
Step 8. Observe the beaten zone on the target in relation to the aiming point on the sight reticle.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-9
Appendix G
z
z
z
z
Step 9. On the gunners control panel move the selector to the center position, then let go, and
make sure the ARMED light is not lit.
Figure G-8. Daylight reticle

Step 11. Using the elevations and azimuth adjustment knobs move sight reticle for 40mm to the
center of the beaten zone. Re-acquire the target in the sights by traversing and elevating the
weapons until the target is properly acquired and fire another round. Observe the beaten zone
rounds should impact on target.
Step 12. On the MK19 move selector switch to safe.
Step 13. Clear the weapon.
ZEROING THE M48 CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN

z
z
z
z
Step 1. Load and ready the M48.

Step 2. Power up turret.
Step 3. Alert the crew by announcing M48 on the intercom.
Step 4. On the M48 move selector to fire position.
WARNING
Power to weapons firing relay is interrupted if ASV drivers, team
leader or gunners hatches are not latched in the closed position.
Close and latch all hatches before attempting to fire weapons.
Firing machine guns with turret override selected, will allow fired
rounds to strike ASV deck in certain azimuth positions. Turret
override will also override hatch safety interlocks allowing
weapons to be fired with vehicle or turret hatches open.
Operation of machine guns while in override may damage vehicle
or cause personal injury or death.
G-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 5. Lay the 550-meter aiming point in the gunners weapon sight (M48) on the center of the
target, 550 meters out, using the manual controls.
Step 6. On the gunners control panel move the selector to the right for the M48. The red light
should come on indicating the weapon is armed and ready to fire.
Step 7. Fire a 5 to 7 round burst by pressing the button on the elevation handle. Release the
button to cease firing.
Step 8. Observe the beaten zone on the target in relation to the aiming point on the sight reticle.
Step 9. On the gunners control panel move the selector to the center position, then let go, and
make sure the ARMED light is not lit.
Figure G-9. Caliber .50 mount and AZ/EL adjust

z
z
z
z
Step 11. Without moving the machine gun or sight, align the aiming point in the sight reticle to
the center of the beaten zone as follows (see Figure G-9):
Adjust the vertical line of the boresight cross on the left edge of the target using the flat-tip
screwdriver.
control screw.
control screw.
Step 12. Repeat steps 3 through 8 until the aiming point on the sight reticle is centered on the
beaten zone.
Step 13. Move the selector on the weapon to safety until the S can be seen.
Step 14. Clear the weapon.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-11
Appendix G
M36E SIGHT
G-6. Using the M36E sight unique to other sighting systems due to the reticle control adapter lever
z
Step 1. Caliber .50.
WARNING
Be certain that Reticle Control Adapter is down against stop
screw when firing the caliber .50 machine gun. Failure to follow
this warning could result in injury or death.
All rounds drop as they travel. The reticle has a scale that calculates the drop for you.
The caliber .50 scale is on the left.
Estimate distance to target.
If target is 1,400 meters, elevate mantled so that the target is even with 14 on the scale (see
Figure G-10 and Figure G-11) (point to 14 on the scale). If target is 1,600 meters elevate to
the 16 on the scale (point to the 16 on the scale).
Figure G-10. Daylight reticle
G-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure G-11. Night sight reticle

Fire weapon.
Step 2. 40mm, 800 meters or less.
The 40mm rounds travel much slower so they drop more than the caliber .50. The rotation
of the rounds also causes them to drift to the right as they travel. The 40mm scale calculates
the drop and "spin drift" for you.
The 40mm scale is on the right.
Estimate distance to target.
If target is 600 meters elevate the weapon so that the target is even with the 6 on the scale.
Notice that the vertical line curves right as the distance gets farther. This is compensating
for the spin drift.
Fire weapon.
SECTION IV POST-FIRE CHECKS

G-7. After firing, the crew clears all weapon systems and removes all ammunition residue from the
exterior of the vehicle. Leaders verify that crews clear all weapon systems IAW DA PAM 385-63. On
training ranges, range safety officers verify that crews have cleared all weapon systems. Post-fire checks
prevent many accidents.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-13
Appendix G
DANGER
SECTION V RANGE DETERMINATION
DELIBERATE RANGE DETERMINATION

G-8. The mil relation may be used in deliberate range determination. When using the mil relation method
the crew must use binoculars or a sight system with a calibrated mil-scale to measure the target.
G-9. The basis of the mil relation method is that one mil or equals a width (or height) of 1 meter at a
(height) between the sides remains constant. Figure G-12 shows the constant relationship as the angle
G-10. Standard Army measurements are completed and expressed in the metric system. Other units of
Figure G-12. Constant mil-angle relationship

G-11. To use this method, the crew member must know the width, height, and length of the target. He
determines the known dimension with the binoculars mil scale or a nonballistic sight reticle, substitutes
the mil relation, and computes the range (see Table G-2). When measuring the frontal width, he measures
measures the entire vehicle. Accuracy of this method depends on knowing the target dimensions and the
commanders ability to make precise measurements with binoculars or the sight reticle.
G-12. Using Table G-2 and by achieving proper vehicle identification, a crew member can properly
determine the standard mil size of the vehicle. This can be used into the calculation of the mil relationship
method of range determination. Figure G-13 through Figure G-18 shows the frontal and flank view of a
BMP-2 and where the information in the table applies.
G-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table G-2. Mil relation for various targets

BMP-2
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 6.75 meters
140
0
1500
1700
1900
2300
2700
3400
4500
6800
Front 3.0 meters
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
1500
2000
3000
Height 2.3 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 5.5 meters
1100
1200
1400
1600
1800
2200
2800
3700
5500
Front 2.35 meters
500
500
600
700
800
1000
1200
1600
2400
Height 2.3 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
Target Width (mils)
22.5
20
17.5
15
12.5
10
7.5
2.5
Flank 17.01 meters
800
900
1000
1100
1400
1700
2300
3400
6804
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Front 4.81 meters
1000
1100
1200
1400
1600
1900
2400
3200
4800
Height 3.82 meters
800
800
1000
1100
1300
1500
1900
2500
3800
Target Width (mils)
22.5
20
17.5
15
12.5
10
7.5
2.5
Flank 17.25 meters
800
900
1000
1200
1400
1700
2300
3500
6900
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Height 3.9 meters
800
900
1000
1100
1300
1600
2000
2600
3900
Front 6.9 meters
1400
1500
1700
2000
2300
2800
3500
4600
6900
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 7.1 meters
1300
1500
1700
1900
2200
2700
3400
4500
6700
Front 3.4 meters
700
800
900
1000
1100
1400
1700
2300
3400
Height 2.3 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 7.0 meters
1400
1600
1800
2000
2300
2800
3500
4700
7000
Front 3.6 meters
700
800
900
1000
1100
1400
1700
2300
3400
Height 2.2 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
Target Width (mils)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
Flank 6.9 meters
1400
1500
1700
2000
2300
2800
3500
4600
6900
Front 3.8 meters
800
900
1000
1100
1300
1500
1900
2500
3800
Height 2.2 meters
500
500
600
700
800
900
1200
1500
2300
BRDM-2
HAVOK
HIND-D HELICOPTER
T-72 TANK
T-80 TANK
T-90 TANK
Note. This table is a quick reference for determining the range of widely sold
vehicles at various ranges. The ranges have been rounded-off to the nearest
hundredth.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-15
Appendix G
Figure G-13. Frontal BMP-2 dimensions
Figure G-14. Flank BMP-2 dimensions
Figure G-15. Frontal Hind-D dimensions
G-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Figure G-16. Flank Hind-D dimensions
Figure G-17. Frontal T-72 dimensions
Figure G-18. Flank T-72 dimensions
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-17
Appendix G
G-13. Since the relationship of the target width in mils ( and meters (W) is constant at varying distances,
accurate range determination is possible. The mil relation holds true whether the W factor is width, height,
or length. Therefore, the range can be determined provided the target dimensions are known. Target height
may be the most consistent measurement, because length and width are changing as targets move on the
battlefield.
G-14. There are two WORM formulas beneficial to crew members that can be used to determine
which formula will be used based on known information gathered.
G-15. The first formula should be used to determine range. This formula will need both the width and mil
value of the vehicle (see Figure G-19).
Figure G-19. Measuring width with binoculars

Example: Step 1. The BMP is 6.75 meters long (W). Using binoculars, the commander determines
that the BMP measures 10 mils in length (see Figure G-18).
or
Step 3. Since R is expressed in thousands of meters, multiply by 1,000; and round off to
the nearest tenth. For example: 0.675=0.7 so 0.7 x 1,000 = 700 meters, the range to the
BMP.
G-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
G-16. The second formula is used to determine the width (width, length, height) of an object. This is
important to determine the width of a bridge for example, that has not been previously identified. The
formula carries the same basic concept as the first formula for determining range. The operator will need to
know the range to the target and the mil size.
Example: Step 1. The gunner has determined that the range to a bridge is 1,200 meters. The vehicle
commander (VC), looking through his binos, determined the mil value to be 2.5 mils.
or
MAPS/DIGITAL MAPS METHOD

G-17. The vehicle crew must have a map to navigate. They must constantly know where they are and
where they are going. (The precision lightweight GPS receiver [PLGR] or any other GPS navigational
system will not eliminate the need for maps.) The vehicle crew can also use the map to determine range.
Besides computing distances on a traditional map, special features on the Force XXI Battle Command
Brigade and Below (FBCB2) allow the crew to plot points on the digital map and find the distance between
them. A map also allows them to determine the best battlecarry range setting for the terrain and enemy
situation and to adjust the battlecarry range when the situation changes.
z
capability to determine range rapidly when contact is made.
z
Target reference points (TRP) are used as both direct and indirect fire control measures. These
are entered in the sector sketch for the VC to control his fires and ensure that his reports of
enemy sightings are accurate. Since the range to each TRP is known, this will assist in range
determination.
KNOWN RANGE (RANGE/SKETCH CARDS) METHOD

G-18. The primary use of the range or sketch card is to assist the crew in engaging targets during limited
visibility or when effective use of the laser range finder has been lost. The VC may also use the range or
sketch card to assist in determining range, since range data is recorded on the card. The range to a
previous target engagement is also classified as a known range.
ADJACENT VEHICLE METHOD

G-19. Range information can be obtained from an adjacent vehicle that has an operable LRF. If the vehicle
providing the range data is relatively close (lateral distance) to the receiving vehicle, then it will be at the
same range from the target.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-19
Appendix G
FLASH-TO-BANG METHOD
G-20. Sound travels through the air at a fairly constant speed, about 330 meters (approximately 1,100 feet)
per second. This makes it easy to estimate range, if you can see and hear the action. For example, when
you see the flash or smoke of a weapon, or the dust it raises, immediately start counting at a rate of one
count per second. When you hear the report of the weapon, stop and multiply the number you were
counting when you heard the report by the constant 330. This will be the range to the weapon in meters. If
you stop on the number 3, the range is about 990 meters.
G-21. Practice timing the speed of your count. The best way to do this is to practice with pyrotechnics fired
at known distances. If this is not possible, have someone time you while you count; start over when the
count reaches a number higher than 10. Counting numbers such as 12 and 13 will throw your timing off.
With practice, you can estimate range more accurately with this method than by eye alone.
SECTION VI ASV WEAPONS SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS

G-22. Malfunctions cost a lot of firing time on tank ranges. Crew error causes most malfunctions. Crews
misfire procedures before correcting any error.
DANGER
WHEN A MALFUNCTION OCCURS, ALWAYS PERFORM MISFIRE
PROCEDURES BEFORE TAKING ANY OTHER CORRECTIVE
ACTION.
STOP A RUNAWAY GUN MK19 AND M48

z
Step 1. Continue to keep weapons within the range fans, do not attempt to break the ammunition
belt let the weapon fire until is stops. (Sometimes, due to a delay in the cycle of operation, the
weapon will appear to fire one round after the trigger is released.)
Step 2. After the weapon has stopped firing, unload, and clear it. Then attempt to determine and
correct the cause. Do not fire the weapon until the malfunction is corrected.
WARNING
Never attempt to twist the ammunition belt to stop a runaway
gun. Injury could result to the gunner and damage to the weapon
system.
IMMEDIATE ACTION TO CLEAR A JAMMED BOLT MK19

z
z
z
z
G-20
Step 1. Place the weapon on safe.

Step 2. Keep weapons within the range fans.
Step 3. Wait 10 seconds then crank charging handle clockwise until machine gun bolt comes all
the way to the rear.
Step 4. While holding charging handle back, and chain in position keeping the bolt to the rear,
have assistant crew personnel open machine gun feed cover.
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
z
z
z
z
Step 5. Remove any ammunition from the bolt face, and from the receiver.
Step 6. Ride the bolt forward.
Step 7. Index the feed slide assembly.
Step 8. Close the feed cover.
ACTION UPON MISFIRE, HANG-FIRE OR JAM PROCEDURES FOR

MK19
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Gunner moves weapons selector switch to the center position.

Step 2. Gunner moves turret over top deck of vehicle keeping weapons pointed down range and
within the range fans at all times.
Step 3. Gunner moves turret power switch to the off position.
Step 4. VC moves the master turret power switch to the off position, and ensures the turret override switch is engaged.
Step 5. Gunner waits 5 minutes to allow for a possible delay of the round firing.
Step 6. Assistant gunner exits the vehicle from either a side or rear door exit, and gains access to
the top of the vehicle from a point behind the weapons.
Step 7. Gunner rotates the charging handle clockwise, locking the bolt to the rear and maintains
pressure on the handle.
Step 8. If the bolt will not go the rear, gunner will rotate the charging handle clockwise as far as
possible, and maintain pressure on the handle in order to prevent the bolt from going forward
when the feed tray is opened.
Step 9. Assistant gunner removes the 40mm mantlet cover, and feed chute cover.
Step 10. Assistant gunner disconnects the feed chute from the 40mm machine gun.
Step 11. Assistant gunner opens the feed tray cover and removes linked rounds from weapon
and checks the chamber for obstruction, blockage, live or expended rounds.
Step 12. Assistant gunner clears blockages, and/or obstructions, and removes any live or
expended rounds remaining in weapon.
Step 13. Once weapon has been cleared assistant checks barrel for obstructions, utilizing bore
obstruction device from the rear of the weapon (chamber side) or barrel rod from the front.
Step 14. Once barrel has been checked for obstructions and cleared. Assistant gunner directs
gunner to slowly ride the bolt forward.
Step 15. Gunner rides bolt forward and assistant gunner reloads weapon
Step 16. Assistant gunner replaces weapon cover, and feed chute cover and re-enter the vehicle.
Step 17. Gunner charges and fires weapon
WARNING
Do not allow bolt to slam forward when feed cover is open.
Damage to the weapon may occur. Be sure gun is clear of all
ammunition and bolt is forward before removing back plate pin.
Be prepared to catch dropped/ejected live round. Failure to follow
these procedures could result in death or severe injury.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
G-21
Appendix G
ACTION UPON HANG FIRE , MISFIRE OR JAM FOR M48 CALIBER

.50
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Step 1. Gunner moves weapons selector switch to the center position.

Step 2. Gunner moves turret over top deck of vehicle keeping weapons pointed down range and
within the range fans at all times.
Step 3. Gunner moves turret power switch to the off position.
Step 4. VC moves the master turret power switch to the off position, and ensures the turret over
-ride switch is engaged.
Step 5. Gunner waits 5 minutes to allow for a possible delay of the round firing.
Step 6. Gunner elevates mantlets to gain access to feed tray. Keep all personnel clear of line of
fire in case round goes off.
Step 7. Assistant gunner exits the vehicle from either a side or rear door exit, and gains access to
the top of the vehicle from a point behind the weapons.
Step 8. Gunner opens feed tray cover and removes ammunition from weapons.
Step 9. Gunner pulls down and back on charging handle, locking bolt to the rear.
Step 10. Gunner observes chamber and removes any obstructions, clears all ammunition, brass,
or links from the weapon.
Step 11. Assistant gunner rods the barrel of the M48 ensuring the rod enters the chamber far
enough for the gunner to observe it.
Step 12. Assistant gunner re-enters the vehicle.
Step 13. Gunner pulls down and back on charging handle and slowly rides bolt forward.
Step 14. Gunner reloads weapon, charges and fires.
M257 SMOKE GRENADES MALFUNCTION

G-23. When smoke grenades fail to launch, perform immediate action, then
z
Use the vehicle intercom system to tell the driver to move the vehicle to a safe area. Make sure
the driver moves it at least 125 meters from the nearest vehicle, building, person, or equipment.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
malfunctioned.
z
Notify unit maintenance that the M257 smoke grenade launchers on the vehicle malfunctioned.
COMMUNICATIONS MALFUNCTION
G-24. If communications are lost, check the following:
z
z
z
Has the built-in test (BIT) failed on the master control station?
z
Is the CAPS cord disconnected?
z
Does the VIC3 FBCB2 display a green status?
G-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Appendix H
120-mm Mortar Gunnery

Commanders determine how to train their units and the manner chosen becomes the
commanders training strategy. The mortar gunnery sustainment training tables
provide a comprehensive list of gunnery tasks, both firing and nonfiring, that
commanders can use to help develop their mortar training strategy. The tables
provide the structure for a progressive and sequential gunnery training strategy using
dry-fire exercises with gunnery and fire direction center (FDC) examinations as
certification prior to live-fire qualifications. The intent is to align mortar gunnery
training and qualification with the direct fire platforms of the Heavy Brigade Combat
Team (HBCT) using these tables.
Contents
Section I References ............................. H-1
Section II Features ................................ H-1
Section III Description........................... H-2
Critical Gates ..................................... H-3
Phases ............................................... H-5
Qualification Scenarios....................... H-6

Mortar Table Execution ...................... H-6
SECTION I REFERENCES
H-1. The references are
z
Field Manual (FM) 3-22.91.
z
FM 3-22.90.
z
FM 7-90.
z
FM 3-22.65.
z
FM 3-22.68.
z
Soldiers Training Publication (STP) STP 7-11B1-SM-TG.
z
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG.
z
Technical manual (TM) 9-1015-250-10 (C6).
z
TM 9-1220-248-10.
z
TM 9-1220-249-10.
SECTION II FEATURES
H-2. Mortar Tables (MT) provide a consolidated menu of individual and collective gunnery tasks.
Commanders choose the battle tasks from this menu to support his mission-essential task list (METL)
requirements while operating within training environment and resource constraints.
H-3. MTs provide a descriptive gunnery training strategy. As always, the commander must decide how to
best use his resources to accomplish training goals. Commanders can modify the MTs to meet unique
METL requirements.
H-4. DA PAM 350-38 specifies the ammunition required for each firing task and table.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-1
Appendix H
SECTION III DESCRIPTION

H-5. MTs provide the structure, frequency, and sequence for the individual and collective training events
for mortar sustainment training and qualification. They identify the tasks for dry fire training, examinations
for certification as well as live fire qualification. Units should train using training aids, devices, simulators,
and simulations (TADSS), when available for the dry fire portion of the tables. Authorization for the use of
TADSS in lieu of live fire qualification based on ammunition limitations or availability of impact areas is
at the commanders discretion. Table H-1 through Table H-17 and Figure H-1 depicts the frequency and
levels for MT 1 through MT 12.
Table H-1. Mortar Table frequency
Mortar Table
Description
Frequency
Individual Training (Dry-Fire)
Quarterly
2*
Individual Qualification (Dry-Fire)
Quarterly
Squad Training (Dry-Fire)
Quarterly
4*
Squad Qualification (Dry-Fire)
Quarterly
M2/M240B/M249 Training/Qualification (Dry-/Live-Fire)
IAW Readiness
Requirements
Section Training (Dry-Fire)
Quarterly
7*
Section Qualification (Dry-Fire)
Quarterly
8**
Section Qualification (Live-Fire)
Semiannually
9**
Mortar Section/Platoon STX Lanes (Dry-/Live-Fire)
Semiannually
10
Section/Platoon Training (Dry-Fire)
Semiannually
11*
Section/Platoon Qualification (Dry-Fire)
Semiannually
12**
Section/Platoon Qualification (EXEVAL-LFX)
Semiannually
* Indicates a critical gate.

** Indicates boresight, misfire procedures, and safety checks must be to standard prior to
execution of this table.
H-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
MT 3
MT 6
MT 7*
MT 8**
MT 9**
MT 10
MT 11*
MT 12**
MT 4*
MT 9** (Optional)
SECTION/PLATOON
MT 1
MT 5
SECTION
MT 2*
SQUAD
INDIVIDUAL
Note. MT 9 (Mortar STX Lanes) can be conducted at section and/or platoon level.
* Indicates a critical gate.
** Indicates boresight, misfire procedures, and safety checks must be to standard prior to execution
of this table.
Figure H-1. Mortar table levels
CRITICAL GATES
H-6. Critical gates are tasks or events that Soldiers and units must perform to standard before they
progress to subsequent tasks or events. MTs 2, 4, 7, and 11 are critical gates.
MORTAR TABLE 2
H-7. MT 2 (Individual Qualification Dry) is the critical gate preceding squad training.
z
The goal is to achieve 90 percent or better on all of the MT 2 tasks. To be qualified, all
personnel must perform to the standard in accordance with (IAW) FM 3-22.90.
z
All MOS 11C personnel assigned to the task force mortar platoon or cavalry squadron mortar
section, to include the platoon leader (task force mortars) and troop executive officers (XO)
(cavalry squadron troop XO) are required to complete MT 2 (guns) to standard listed above.
Section leaders, FDC personnels (FDC chief, check computer, and driver/radio/telephone
operator [RTO] as well as each gun squad leader must also complete MT 2 (FDC M16 plotting
board) with a passing score goal of 90 percent, and a score IAW with the Army Standard
minimum passing score of 70 percent as established by the United States Army Infantry Center
(USAIC).
z
Units will train MT 2 quarterly, or as required to certify new personnel.
z
Squad leaders and section leaders will serve as observer/controllers (O/C) evaluators for MT 1
Guns. Section leaders/platoon sergeants will serve as O/C evaluators for MT 1 FDC M16
plotting board. The HBCT S-3 should develop and control the administration and dissemination
of the FDC Examination IAW FM 3-22.91, Appendix E.
z
MT 2 (FDC M16 plotting board) is also a critical task for the squad leaders assigned to mortar
carriers.
MORTAR TABLE 4
H-8. MT 4 (Squad Qualification Dry) is the squads critical gate preceding the section and platoon
qualification.
z
The goal is to achieve 90 percent or better on all of the MT 4 tasks performed to standard IAW
the mission training plan (MTP)/DRILL standard. Squads must meet or exceed the standard to
be qualified.
z
Squads must successfully qualify MT 4 before participating in live-fire exercises (LFX).
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-3
Appendix H
z
z
z
z
Mortar squads/crews/FDCs must be qualified before proceeding to the section qualification.

Crew stabilization is critical.
Each squad has critical personnel who must be present during the qualification. Commanders
can designate additional personnel as critical. If new critical personnel are assigned to a squad,
that squad will be retrained and qualified (MT 1 through 4) proceeding to section level tables.
The minimum critical personnel are squad leader, gunner, and assistant gunner. FDC critical
personnel are the FDC chief and check computer.
The weapon system TM establishes minimum crew size. Commanders should use this guidance,
in conjunction with critical personnel changes, to determine if a crew can perform expected
tasks and retain its qualification.
Units will train MT 4 not less than once per quarter.
O/C evaluators for MT 4 (guns) will be the section leader. O/C evaluators for MT 4 (FDC
Mortar Fire Control Systems [MFCS]) will be the platoon sergeant/platoon leader. The HBCT
S-3 should develop and control the administration and dissemination of the MFCS examination
IAW FM 3-22.91 Appendix. E.
MT 4 (FDC MFCS) is also a critical task for the squad leaders assigned to units with (MFCS).
MORTAR TABLE 7
H-9. MT 7 (Section Qualification Dry) is the sections critical gate to proceed to the Section Live Fire
(MT 8) or Platoon Qualification Dry (MT 11).
z
FM 3-22.90. Sections must meet or exceed the standards to be qualified.
z
The section must be qualified dry (MT 7) prior to participation in dry fire section/platoon
qualification (MT 11).
z
The section has an additional critical leader position that must be present during qualification.
The same critical leader must be present during the section/platoon qualification (MT 11) for the
section to retain its qualification. The additional critical leader position is the section leader.
Commanders can designate additional positions as critical.
z
Units will train MT 7 not less than once per quarter.
z
O/C evaluators will be the platoon sergeant, and platoon leader.
MORTAR TABLE 11
H-10. MT 11 (Section/Platoon Qualification Dry) is the sections/platoons critical gate to proceed to the
Section/Platoon Qualification EXEVAL/Live Fire (MT 12).
z
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG standards. Sections/platoons must meet or exceed the standard to be
qualified.
z
The section/platoon must be qualified dry (MT 11), prior to participating in the Section/Platoon
EXEVAL/Live Fire (MT 12).
z
The sections/platoons have critical leader positions in addition to the squad and section critical
personnel that must be present during qualification. The critical leader positions are the platoon
leader, platoon sergeant, and FDC personnel. Commanders can designate additional positions as
critical.
z
Units will train MT 11 not less than semiannually.
z
An O/C evaluator package for MT 11 will come from a different units mortar section/platoon. It
will consist of a platoon leader/troop XO and/or platoon sergeant, section leader, FDC
representative, and squad leader.
H-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
SAFETY NOTE
Prior to each and every live-fire training event, regardless of the level of collective
training, mortar squads are required to demonstrate mastery of three critical tasks.
They are as follows:
(1) Remove a Misfire (MTP Task 7-4-9294) using the 120mm mortar inert training
round (NSN 6920-01-383-2939) as outlined in the TM with the most current change
and Safety of Use Message (SOUM).
(2) Conduct Boresighting (071-090-0003) in the manual mode and when operating
digitally with the Mortar Fire Control System (M95, MFCS), Conduct Pointing Device
and Boresight IAW the TM Work Package (WP 0010 00).
(3) Perform Safety Checks (071-090-0001). The squad must demonstrate they can
perform these tasks to standard in a dry situation before they can execute live fire
missions. Simulation or merely talking through the sequences or procedures for
these three critical tasks is not sufficient to certify this process.
PHASES
H-11. MTs divide the sustainment training plan into at least three phases for each echelon above individual.
They are training, qualification (dry), and qualification (live). Multiechelon training is the simultaneous
training of more than one echelon on different tasks, the conduct of different exercises by a unit, or the
training of different tasks by elements of the unit. Multiechelon training occurs whenever an element
conducts collective training. Anytime training above Soldier level is conducted, that is multiechelon
training. MTs, by their collective nature, are considered multiechelon training. Training, dry qualification,
and live fire qualifications are designed to help train or evaluate training at the individual, squad, section,
and platoon levels. All MTs sustain individual military occupational specialty (MOS) proficiency.
TRAINING MORTAR TABLES

H-12. Training MTs prepare individuals, squads, sections, and platoons for dry fire qualification. The
emphasis is on leader training and performing the gunnery and FDC tasks safely to standard without using
mortar ammunition.
H-13. Units train by using these tables with dry fire procedures. The training tables are MT 1 (individual),
MT 3 (squad), MT 5 (crew), MT 6 (section), and MT 10 (section/platoon).
H-14. These tables require little training land and operating tempo (OPTEMPO) and no mortar
ammunition, only 5.56-mm, 7.62-mm, and caliber .50 ammunition and a firing range once the crew has
successfully completed all preliminary marksman instruction (PMI) and dry fire exercises to standard.
DRY QUALIFICATION MORTAR TABLES

H-15. Dry qualification MTs prepare individuals, squads, sections, and platoons for maneuver and live-fire
qualification. The emphasis is to certify that the unit can perform the maneuver, gunnery and FDC tasks
safely to standard before live-fire qualification.
H-16. Units train by using these tables with dry-fire procedures. The dry-fire qualification tables are MT 2
(individual), MT 4 (squad), MT 7 (section), and MT 11 (section/platoon)
H-17. These tables minimize the use of training resources.
LIVE QUALIFICATION MORTAR TABLES

H-18. Live qualification MTs allow the platoon leader/troop XO, company/troop commander, and
battalion/squadron commander the ability to assess and evaluate that the platoon can perform all maneuver,
gunnery, and FDC tasks safely to standard in support of the units METL.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-5
Appendix H
H-19. Units train by using these tables with live-fire procedures. The live-fire qualification mortar and
situational training exercise (STX) tables are MT 8 (section), MT 9 (section/platoon STX Lanes), and MT
12 (section/platoon).
H-20. The live-fire qualification MTs require extensive use of training land, OPTEMPO, and ammunition.
QUALIFICATION SCENARIOS
H-21. Leaders at the squad, section, and platoon levels must develop a METL based scenario when using
the STX/qualification tables. These scenarios will help make the qualification tables more meaningful, thus
making the training more beneficial.
MORTAR TABLE EXECUTION

MORTAR TABLE 1
H-22. MT 1 will be conducted quarterly, prior to the execution of MT 2. MT 1 is designed to prepare
personnel for the successful execution of the Gunners Examination and FDC Examination for section
leaders, FDC personnel, and gun squad leaders (MT 2). MT 2 FDC focuses on manual fire control using
the M16 plotting board. The duration of training of MT 1 is not specified and can be conducted during
sergeants time or as the commander deems necessary.
MORTAR TABLE 2
H-23. MT 2 will be conducted quarterly or as required to certify new personnel. All MOS 11C personnel
assigned to the task force mortar platoon or cavalry squadron mortar section, to include the platoon leader
(task force mortars) and troop XO (cavalry squadron troop XO) are required to complete MT 2 (guns) to
standard IAW FM 3-22.90. MT 2 (FDC) will examine the section leader, FDC personnel, and gun squad
leaders on the M16 plotting board. Squad leaders and section leaders will serve as O/C evaluators for MT 2
gunnery tasks; the platoon sergeant/platoon leader will administer the FDC certification examination.
MORTAR TABLE 3
H-24. MT 3 will be conducted quarterly, prior to the execution of MT 4. MT 3 is ideal training for
sergeants time, and will facilitate crew drill training in conjunction with specific tasks associated with this
table. MT 3 FDC transitions from manual fire control to automated and digital fire control using the MFCS
M95/M96.
MORTAR TABLE 4
H-25. MT 4 will be conducted quarterly. MT 4 is the critical gate for MT 7 and all squads must qualify MT
4 (guns and FDC both using MFCS) prior to conducting any live-fire training. Mortar squads and FDCs
must meet the established standards on all tasks to be considered qualified. Section leaders will O/C the
gunnery portion of the table; the platoon sergeant/platoon leader will administer the FDC certification
examination. In the maneuver task forces, their respective mortar platoon sergeants, and platoon leaders
certify the squads. In the cavalry squadron, the troop commanders certify his mortar squads on this table.
MORTAR TABLE 5
H-26. MT 5 is conducted IAW crew-served weapons readiness standards. MT 5 is designed to orient,
familiarize, and train personnel on the M2/M240B/M249 crew drill. MT 5 will be used as a part of the unit
PMI prior to any M2/M240B/M249 familiarization/qualification range.
H-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
MORTAR TABLE 6
H-27. MT 6 is conducted at the section level quarterly. MT 6 is mandatory for the training progression of
cavalry squadron mortar sections. Task force mortar platoons are encouraged to train this table to ensure
success and competency at section/platoon operations (MT 10 through MT 12).
MORTAR TABLE 7
H-28. MT 7 will be conducted quarterly if possible and semiannually at a minimum. MT 7 is a critical gate
for MT 8 and section or higher echelon live-fire training. All tasks must be accomplished to the established
standards IAW the appropriate manuals. Sections that successfully complete MT 7 will be considered
qualified (dry). MT 7 is mandatory for the training progression of cavalry squadron mortar sections.
Although optional for task force mortar platoons, they are highly encouraged to train this table to ensure
success and competency at platoon operations (MT 10 through 12). In the cavalry squadron, section leaders
from a different troops mortar section will O/C this table. In the maneuver task forces, the mortar platoon
sergeant or platoon leader will O/C this table. In the cavalry squadrons, the respective troop commanders
will certify their mortar sections. In the task forces, the S-3 will certify this training.
MORTAR TABLE 8
H-29. MT 8 will be conducted semiannually. MT 8 will be a live-fire section field training exercise (FTX).
Focus on maximizing the responsiveness of fires and streamlining mortar maneuver. MT 8 is mandatory
for the training progression of cavalry squadron mortar sections. Sections that successfully complete MT 7
will be considered qualified for live-fire. Although optional for task force mortar platoons they are highly
encouraged to train this table to ensure success and competency at section/platoon operations (MT 10
through MT 12). In the cavalry squadron, section leaders from a different troops mortar section will O/C
this table. In the maneuver task forces, the mortar platoon sergeant or platoon leader will O/C this table. In
the cavalry squadrons, the respective troop commanders will certify their mortar sections. In the task
forces, the S-3 will certify this training.
MORTAR TABLE 9
H-30. MT 9 will be conducted semiannually. MT 9 will be a dry- or live-fire section/platoon STX and can
be conducted at section or platoon level. The STX lanes will focus on the conduct of tasks in the following
areas:
z
Deploy/conduct maneuver.
z
Employ fire power.
z
Develop intelligence.
z
Protect the force.
z
Exercise command and control.
z
Perform sustainment.
MORTAR TABLE 10
H-31. MT 10 will be conducted at section/platoon level semiannually. MT 10 is mandatory for the training
progression of task force mortar platoons. Cavalry squadron mortar sections are encouraged to train to this
table given competent section operations (MT 6 through MT 8).
MORTAR TABLE 11
H-32. MT 11 will be conducted semiannually. MT 11 is the critical gate for MT 12 (EXEVAL/LFX).
Sections/platoons that successfully complete MT 11 will be considered qualified (dry). MT 11 is
mandatory for the training progression of both the cavalry squadron mortar sections and task force mortar
platoons prior to any EXEVAL LFX. Another troop XO/section sergeant from within the squadron, or
mortar platoons platoon leader and platoon sergeant from within the brigade are required to O/C this table.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-7
Appendix H
The certifier for this table is the task force commander for task force mortars or the cavalry squadron
commander for cavalry squadron mortar sections.
MORTAR TABLE 12
H-33. MT 12 will be conducted semiannually. MT 12 will be a live-fire platoon maneuver FTX. MT 12
will be used to conduct section/platoon EXEVAL for each mortar section/platoon. Sections/platoons that
successfully complete MT 11 will be considered qualified for live-fire. MT 12 is the culminating event for
both the task force mortar platoons and cavalry squadron mortar sections for use in deployability
certification rating. Another troop XO/section sergeant from within the squadron, or mortar platoons
platoon leader and platoon sergeant from within the brigade are required to O/C this table. The certifier for
this table is the task force commander for task force mortars or the cavalry squadron commander for
cavalry squadron mortar sections.
EXECUTION NOTES
H-34. Tables 6 through 8 will be executed in the conventional (or degraded) mode (simulating the digital
MFCS is completely inoperable) as noted by the tasks for each table. Units will use manual fire control (the
M16 plotting boards, M2 compasses/aiming circles, M67 sights, and aiming stakes) to execute their
training/qualification, just as they would in the event of catastrophic systems failure. These skill sets are
highly perishable and have been shown as fundamentally deficient throughout the force.
H-35. Tables 9 through 12 will be executed in the digital mode (full functionality/slight degradation). Units
will use all functions within the MFCS digital packages (M95/M96) to execute their training/qualification.
The slight degradation element will be the receipt of calls for fire via FM (simulating unit elements
requesting fires without Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS), or software/hardware
incompatibility issues within AFATDS). Units will also execute missions with fully functional digital
systems using AFATDS if available.
H-8
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table H-2. Mortar Table 1 FDC examination

Mortar Table 1 (Individual Training - Dry)
Fire Direction Center Examination Training

Reference
Task Title
Task Number
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Operate a Fire Direction Center
07-3-5072
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Process a Call For Fire
07-3-5090
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Record Information on Firing Records
071-283-0002
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Use Mortar Firing Tables
071-321-4011
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Prepare a Plotting Board for Operation Using the Pivot-Point

Method
071-078-0001
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Prepare a Plotting Board for Operation Using the Below the

Pivot Point Method
071-078-0002
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Angle T
071-076-0010
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Apply No-Fire Data (Safety Fan) to a Plotting Board
071-076-0008
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Grid Mission Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0012
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Mark-Center-of-Sector Mission Using a

Plotting Board
071-078-0013
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Shift Mission Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0016
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Polar Mission Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0004
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Registration Corrections Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0019
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Sheaf Adjustment Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0006
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Re-registration Corrections Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0003
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Record Data Using Meteorological Data Sheet
071-076-0003
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Meteorological Firing Corrections
071-076-0004
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
*Compute Data for an Illumination Mission Using a Plotting

Board
071-078-0008
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
*Compute Data for a Coordinated Illumination Mission Using a

Plotting Board
071-078-0009
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
*Compute Data for a Traversing and/or Searching Mission

Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0007
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
*Compute Data for a Quick-Smoke Mission Using a Plotting

Board
071-078-0011
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
*Compute Data for a Split-Section Mission Using a Plotting

Board
071-078-0017
FM 3-22.91
*Compute Data for Final Protective Fires (FPF)
Page 14-20
This training will enhance the section leaders, FDC personnels (FDC chief, check computer, and
driver/RTO) and the gun squad leaders ability to perform basic FDC tasks using the M16 plotting board.
Note. Tasks with an asterisk (*) are considered advanced FDC tasks/special missions and are not required
to be tested during MT 2 FDC.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-9
Appendix H
Table H-3. Mortar Table 1 gunner's examination

Mortar Table 1 (Individual Training - Dry)
Gunner's Examination Training - Track Mounted M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
FM 3-22.90
Place the Mortar into a Firing Position from the Traveling

Position
9-15
FM 3-22.90
Small Deflection Change
9-17
FM 3-22.90
Referring the Sight and Realigning the Aiming Posts
9-18
FM 3-22.90
Large Deflection and Elevation Change
9-19
FM 3-22.90
Reciprocal Laying
9-20
Table H-4. Mortar Table 2 FDC examination

Mortar Table 2 (Individual Qualification - Dry)
Fire Direction Center Examination
Reference
Task Title
Task Number
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
07-3-5072
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Process a Call For Fire
07-3-5090
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Record Information on Firing Records
071-283-0002
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Use Mortar Firing Tables
071-321-4011
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Prepare a Plotting Board for Operation Using the Pivot-Point

Method
071-078-0001
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Prepare a Plotting Board for Operation Using the Below the

Pivot Point Method
071-078-0002
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Angle T
071-076-0010
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Apply No-Fire Data (Safety Fan) to a Plotting Board
071-076-0008
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Grid Mission Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0012
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Mark-Center-of-Sector Mission Using a

Plotting Board
071-078-0013
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Shift Mission Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0016
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Polar Mission Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0004
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Registration Corrections Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0019
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Data for a Sheaf Adjustment Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0006
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Re-registration Corrections Using a Plotting Board
071-078-0003
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Record Data Using Meteorological Data Sheet
071-076-0003
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG
Compute Meteorological Firing Corrections
071-076-0004
This examination tests the section leaders, FDC personnels (FDC chief, check computer, and driver/RTO)
and the gun squad leaders ability to perform basic FDC tasks using the M16 plotting board.
H-10
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table H-5. Mortar Table 2 gunner's examination

Mortar Table 2 (Individual Qualification - Dry)
Gunner's Examination - Track Mounted M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
FM 3-22.90
Place the Mortar into a Firing Position from the Traveling

Position
9-15
FM 3-22.90
Small Deflection Change
9-17
FM 3-22.90
Referring the Sight and Realigning the Aiming Posts
9-18
FM 3-22.90
Large Deflection and Elevation Change
9-19
FM 3-22.90
Reciprocal Laying
9-20
Table H-6. Mortar Table 3 FDC training

Mortar Table 3 (Squad Training Dry)
FDC Training (Dry) - Mortar Fire Control System (MFCS)
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
TM 9-1220-248-10
Initialization and Setup as FDC
WP 0039 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Ammo Status
WP 0040 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Grid Mission
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Shift Mission
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Polar Mission
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Quick Fire
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Fire for Effect
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Store Safety Fan
WP 0050 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Store Fire Support Coordination Measures (FSCM)
WP 0049 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Store Meteorological (MET) Data
WP 0045 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Registration
WP 0046 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Converged Sheaf
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Special Sheaf
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Simultaneous Missions
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Final Protective Fire (FPF)
WP 0044 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Illumination and Coordinated Illumination
WP 0043 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Immediate Smoke
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Quick Smoke
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Digital Missions for all Missions as Listed Above
WP 0042 00
This training enhances the section leaders, FDC personnels (FDC chief, check computer, and driver/RTO)
and the gun squad leaders ability to perform manual and digital FDC tasks using the MFCS.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-11
Appendix H
Table H-7. Mortar Table 3 squad training

Mortar Table 3 (Squad Training Dry)
Squad Training (Dry) - Track/Ground Mounted, M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
FM 3-22.90
Place a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar Into Action
5-26
FM 3-22.90
Perform Safety Checks on a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar
5-28
TM 9-1220-248-10
Pointing Device and Boresight
WP 0010 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators
WP 0004 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Startup, Daily Checks, Self Test, and Shutdown Procedures
WP 0007 00
FM 3-22.91
Initialization and Configuration of the MFCS
Chapter 15
TM 9-1220-248-10
Alerts
WP 0009 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Ammo Status
WP 0011 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Navigation and Emplacement
WP 0012 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Fire Command
WP 0013 00
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Lay Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar for Direction with the M2

Compass
3-3
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Reciprocal Lay with Aiming Circle
3-6
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Reciprocal Lay Using Mortar Sight
3-14
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Perform Hasty Lay for Hipshoot Carrier Mounted
3-41
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Perform Direct Lay Carrier Mounted
3-42
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Perform Direct Alignment Carrier Mounted
3-30
FM 3-22.91
Execute Standard Fire Missions
16-1
FM 3-22.91
Execute Basic Fire Missions
16-5
FM 3-22.91
Execute Special Fire Missions
16-15
FM 3-22.90
Lay for Small Deflection and Elevation Change Carrier Mounted
5-29
FM 3-22.90
Lay for Large Deflection and Elevation Change Carrier

Mounted
5-29
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Load and Fire the Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar
3-44
TM 9-1015-250-10 C-6
Removal of a Misfire on a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar
2-148.16
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Take the Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar out of Action
3-49
FM 3-22.90
Mount the Mortar from a Carrier to a Ground-Mounted Position
5-27
FM 3-22.90
Perform Safety Checks on a Ground Mounted 120-mm Mortar
5-11
TM 9-1015-250-10 C-6
Removal of a Misfire on a Ground-Mounted 120-mm Mortar
2-148.16
FM 3-22.90
Taking the Mortar Out of Action (Ground-Mounted to M1064A3

Carrier-Mounted)
5-37
FM 3-22.90
Subcaliber Insert, M303; Characteristics, Maintenance, Misfire

Procedures
B-14
FM 3-22.90
Subcaliber Trainer, M313; Characteristics, Maintenance, Misfire

Procedures
B-16
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Reconnoiter a Firing Position
5-8
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Occupy a Firing Position
5-54
H-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table H-8. Mortar Table 4 FDC qualification

Mortar Table 4 (Squad Qualification Dry)
FDC Qualification (Dry) - Mortar Fire Control System
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
TM 9-1220-248-10
Initialization and Setup as FDC
WP 0039 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Ammo Status
WP 0040 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Grid Mission
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Shift Mission
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Polar Mission
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Quick Fire
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Fire for Effect
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Store Safety Fan
WP 0050 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Store Fire Support Coordination Measures (FSCM)
WP 0049 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Store Meteorological (MET) Data
WP 0045 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Registration
WP 0046 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Converged Sheaf
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Special Sheaf
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Simultaneous Missions
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Final Protective Fire (FPF)
WP 0044 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Illumination and Coordinated Illumination
WP 0043 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Immediate Smoke
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Manual Quick Smoke
WP 0041 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Digital Missions for all Missions as Listed Above
WP 0042 00
This examination tests the section leaders, FDC personnels (FDC chief, check computer, and driver/RTO)
and the gun squad leaders ability to perform manual and digital FDC tasks using the MFCS.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-13
Appendix H
Table H-9. Mortar Table 4 squad qualification

Mortar Table 4 (Squad Qualification Dry)
Squad Qualification (Dry) Track/Ground Mounted, M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
FM 3-22.90
Place a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar into Action
5-26
FM 3-22.90
Perform Safety Checks on a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar
5-28
TM 9-1220-248-10
Pointing Device and Boresight
WP 0010 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators
WP 0004 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Startup, Daily Checks, Self Test, and Shutdown Procedures
WP 0007 00
FM 3-22.91
Initialization and Configuration of the MFCS
Chapter 15
TM 9-1220-248-10
Alerts
WP 0009 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Ammo Status
WP 0011 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Navigation and Emplacement
WP 0012 00
TM 9-1220-248-10
Fire Command
WP 0013 00
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG

Compass
3-3
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
3-6
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
3-14
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Perform Hasty Lay for Hipshoot Carrier Mounted
3-41
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
3-42
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
3-30
FM 3-22.91
Execute Standard Fire Missions
16-1
FM 3-22.91
Execute Basic Fire Missions
16-5
FM 3-22.91
Execute Special Fire Missions
16-15
FM 3-22.90
Lay for Small Deflection and Elevation Change Carrier Mounted
5-29
FM 3-22.90
Lay for Large Deflection and Elevation Change Carrier

Mounted
5-29
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Load and Fire the Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar
3-44
TM 9-1015-250-10 C6
Removal of a Misfire on a Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar
2-148.16
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Take the Carrier Mounted 120-mm Mortar out of Action
3-49
FM 3-22.90
Mount the Mortar from a Carrier to a Ground-Mounted Position
5-27
FM 3-22.90
Perform Safety Checks on a Ground Mounted 120-mm Mortar
5-11
TM 9-1015-250-10 C6
Removal of a Misfire on a Ground-Mounted 120-mm Mortar
2-148.16
FM 3-22.90
Taking the Mortar Out of Action (Ground-Mounted to M1064A3

Carrier-Mounted)
5-37
FM 3-22.90
Subcaliber Insert, M303; Characteristics, Maintenance, Misfire

Procedures
B-14
FM 3-22.90
Subcaliber Trainer, M313; Characteristics, Maintenance, Misfire

Procedures
B-16
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
5-8
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
5-54
H-14
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table H-10. Mortar Table 5 machine gun crew training/qualification

Mortar Table 5 (Machine Gun Crew Training/Qualification - Dry/Live)
Machine Gun Training/Qualification (Dry/Live) - M2/M249/M240B
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
FM 3-22.68
Perform Operator Maintenance on the M249
1-21
FM 3-22.68
Perform Operator Maintenance on the M240B
3-22
FM 3-22.68
Operate the M249
1-30
FM 3-22.68
Operate the M240B
3-30
FM 3-22.68
Load, Correct Malfunction, Unload the M249
1-30
FM 3-22.68
Load, Correct Malfunction, Unload the M240B
3-30
FM 3-22.68
Engage Targets with the M249
Appendix D
FM 3-22.68
Engage Targets with the M240B
Appendix D
FM 3-22.68
Disassemble and Reassemble the M249
1-13
FM 3-22.68
Disassemble and Reassemble the M240B
3-11
FM 3-22.65
Perform Operator Maintenance on the M2 HB, .50 Caliber
2-10
FM 3-22.65
Set Headspace and Timing on the M2 HB, .50 Caliber
3-11
FM 3-22.65
Operate the M2 HB, .50 Caliber
3-1
FM 3-22.65
Load, Correct Malfunction, Unload the M2 HB, .50 Caliber
3-1
FM 3-22.65
Engage Targets with the M2 HB, .50 Caliber
Chapter 5
FM 3-22.65
Disassemble and Reassemble the M2 HB, .50 Caliber
2-1
FM 3-22.68
Qualify Crews with assigned Machine Guns (M249/M240B)
Appendix D
FM 3-22.65
Qualify Crews with assigned Machine Guns (.50 Caliber)
Chapter 5
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-15
Appendix H
Table H-11. Mortar Table 6 section training - dry/conventional mode

Mortar Table 6 (Section Training - Dry/Conventional Mode)
Section Training (Dry) Track Mounted, M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Prepare for Combat

Conduct Tactical Road march (Mounted)
Prepare for a Chemical Attack
Conduct Troop Leading Procedures
Conduct Passive Air Defense Measures
Employ Protective Obstacles
Perform Resupply Operations
Maintain Operations Security
Conduct a Rehearsal
Conduct Risk Management
Process Call for Fire
Fire Hipshoot (Adjust)
Compass
Fire Adjust Fire (Mark Center of Sector MCS)
Register and Adjust a Parallel Sheaf
Fire Adjust Fire (Grid/Shift/Polar)
Fire for Effect
Fire Immediate Suppression/Smoke
Fire Priority Target
Fire Time on Target
Fire Quick Smoke
Fire Simultaneous Missions
Defend Against a Ground Attack
Fire Hipshoot (Immediate Suppression/Smoke)
Treat and Evacuate Casualties
Handle Enemy Prisoners of War
Process Captured Documents and Equipment
Displace by Echelon
Adjust Final Protective Fire
Fire Final Protective Fire
Fire Illumination
Fire Coordinated Illumination
5-190
5-37
5-140
5-182
5-132
5-124
5-160
5-136
5-171
5-179
5-12
5-8
5-187
5-197
5-87
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
3-3
3-14
5-54
3-6
5-94
5-121
5-94
5-100
5-105
5-109
5-118
5-112
5-115
5-46
3-41
3-42
5-168
5-157
5-166
5-51
3-30
5-175
3-41
5-80
5-85
5-147
5-102
5-97
Note. MT 6 is mandatory for cavalry squadron mortar sections and optional for task force mortar platoons.
H-16
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table H-12. Mortar Table 7 section qualification - dry/conventional mode

Mortar Table 7 (Section Qualification - Dry/Conventional Mode)
Section Qualification (Dry) Track Mounted, M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Prepare for Combat

Conduct Tactical Road march (Mounted)
Conduct a Rehearsal
Compass
Fire for Effect
Fire Time on Target
Fire Quick Smoke
Displace by Echelon
Fire Illumination
5-190
5-37
5-140
5-182
5-132
5-124
5-160
5-136
5-171
5-179
5-12
5-8
5-187
5-197
5-87
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
3-3
3-14
5-54
3-6
5-94
5-121
5-94
5-100
5-105
5-109
5-118
5-112
5-115
5-46
3-41
3-42
5-168
5-157
5-166
5-51
3-30
5-175
3-41
5-80
5-85
5-147
5-102
5-97
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-17
Appendix H
Table H-13. Mortar Table 8 section qualification - live/conventional mode

Mortar Table 8 (Section Qualification - Live/Conventional Mode)
Section Qualification (Live) Track Mounted, M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Prepare for Combat

Conduct Tactical Road March (Mounted)
Conduct a Rehearsal
Compass
Fire for Effect
Fire Time on Target
Fire Quick Smoke
Displace by Echelon
Fire Illumination
5-190
5-37
5-140
5-182
5-132
5-124
5-160
5-136
5-171
5-179
5-12
5-8
5-187
5-197
5-87
3-3
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
3-14
5-54
3-6
5-94
5-121
5-94
5-100
5-105
5-109
5-118
5-112
5-115
5-46
3-41
3-42
5-168
5-157
5-166
5-51
3-30
5-175
3-41
5-80
5-85
5-147
5-102
5-97
H-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table H-14. Mortar Table 9 mortar section/platoon STX lanes - dry/live/digital mode
Mortar Table 9 (Mortar Section/Platoon STX Lanes - Dry/Live/Digital Mode)
Mortar Section/Platoon STX Lanes (Dry/Live) - Track Mounted, M121
Reference
Task Title
LANE: DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Displace by Echelon
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Conduct a Passage of Lines as the Passing Unit
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
LANE: EMPLOY FIRE POWER
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Fire Adjust Fire
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Fire for Effect
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Fire Time on Target
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Fire Quick Smoke
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Fire Illumination
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
LANE: DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
LANE: PROTECT THE FORCE
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
LANE: PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
LANE: EXERCISE COMMAND AND CONTROL
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Conduct a Rehearsal
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Prepare for Combat
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Page Number
5-51
5-54
5-37
5-22
5-46
3-41
5-87
3-42
3-30
5-121
5-94
5-100
5-80
5-85
5-109
5-118
5-105
5-112
5-102
5-97
5-115
5-12
5-8
5-124
5-132
5-136
5-140
5-147
5-157
5-160
5-166
5-168
5-171
5-175
5-179
5-182
5-187
5-190
5-197
Note. MT 9 is mandatory for both the cavalry squadron sections and task force mortar platoons.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-19
Appendix H
Table H-15. Mortar Table 10 section/platoon training - dry/digital mode

Mortar Table 10 (Section/Platoon Training - Dry/Digital Mode)
Section/Platoon Training (Dry) - Track Mounted, M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Prepare for Combat

Conduct a Rehearsal
Fire Adjust Fire (Grid/Shift/Polar/Quick Fire)
Fire for Effect
Fire Immediate Suppression / Smoke
Fire Time on Target
Fire Quick Smoke
Displace by Echelon
Fire Illumination
5-190
5-37
5-140
5-18
5-132
5-124
5-160
5-136
5-171
5-179
5-12
5-8
5-187
5-197
5-87
5-54
5-94
5-121
5-94
5-100
5-105
5-109
5-118
5-112
5-115
5-46
3-41
3-42
5-168
5-157
5-166
5-51
3-30
5-175
5-80
5-85
5-147
5-102
5-97
Note. MT 10 is mandatory for task force mortar platoons and optional for cavalry squadron mortar sections.
H-20
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Table H-16. Mortar Table 11 section/platoon qualification - dry/digital mode

Mortar Table 11 (Section/Platoon Qualification - Dry/Digital Mode)
Section/Platoon Qualification (Dry) - Track Mounted, M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Prepare for Combat

Conduct a Rehearsal
Fire for Effect
Fire Time on Target
Fire Quick Smoke
Displace by Echelon
Fire Illumination
5-190
5-37
5-140
5-182
5-132
5-124
5-160
5-136
5-171
5-179
5-12
5-8
5-187
5-197
5-87
5-54
5-94
5-121
5-94
5-100
5-105
5-109
5-118
5-112
5-115
5-46
3-41
3-42
5-168
5-157
5-166
5-51
3-30
5-175
5-80
5-85
5-147
5-102
5-97
Note. MT 11 is mandatory for both the task force mortar platoons and cavalry squadron mortar sections prior
to the any EXEVAL LFX.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
H-21
Appendix H
Table H-17. Mortar Table 12 section/platoon qualification - EXEVAL/LFX/digital mode

Mortar Table 12 (Section/Platoon Qualification - EXEVAL/LFX/Digital Mode)
Section/Platoon Qualification (EXEVAL/LFX) - Track Mounted, M121
Reference
Task Title
Page Number
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG
Prepare for Combat

Conduct a Rehearsal
Fire for Effect
Fire Time on Target
Fire Quick Smoke
Displace by Echelon
Fire Illumination
5-190
5-37
5-140
5-182
5-132
5-124
5-160
5-137
5-171
5-179
5-12
5-8
5-187
5-197
5-87
5-54
5-94
5-121
5-94
5-100
5-105
5-109
5-118
5-112
5-115
5-46
3-41
3-42
5-168
5-157
5-166
5-51
3-30
5-175
5-80
5-85
5-147
5-102
5-97
Note. MT 12 is the culminating event for both the task force mortar platoons and cavalry squadron mortar
sections for use in deployability certification rating.
H-22
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Glossary
SECTION I ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AA
assembly area
AAC
armament accuracy checks
AAR
after action review
ABC
air battle captain
ABFIST
AC
Advanced Bradley Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer

active component
ACA
airspace coordination area
ACR
Armored Cavalry Regiment
ACU
Army combat uniform
AD
ADA
admin
AFATDS
AFI
air defense
air defense artillery
administrative
Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System
Air Force Instruction
AFIST
Abrams Full-Crew Interactive Simulator Trainer
AGES
Air-to-Ground Engagement System
AGTS
Advanced Gunnery Training Systems
AHA
ammuntion holding area
AIM
Abrams integrated management
AIN
ammunition information notices
aka
also known as
AKO
AL
ALC
AMSAA
ANCD
AP
APC
Army Knowledge Online

Alabama
Administrative/Logistics Center
Army Materiel Systems Analysis Activity
automated network control device
antipersonnel; armor piercing
Armored Personnel Carrier
APDS-T
armor-piercing discarding sabot with tracer
APFSDS
armor-piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot
APFSDS-T
API
API-T
APOBS
AP-SS
3 September 2009
armor-piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot with tracer

armor-piercing incendiary
armor-piercing incendiary-tracer
Antipersonnel Obstacle Breaching System
armor-piercing-single shot
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Glossary-1
Glossary
ARNG
ARS
ARTEP
Armored Reconnaissance Squadron

Army Training and Evaluation Program
ASP
ammunition supply point
ASV
Armored Security Vehicle
ATGM
ATIA
antitank guided missile

Army Training Information Architecture
ATO
air tasking order
ATT
aided target tracker
ATTK SEL
ATWESS
attack select
antitank weapon effect signature simulation
aux
auxiliary
A/V
audiovisual
AVCATT
AZ
BATS
aviation combined arms tactical trainer

azimuth
Bradley Advanced Training System
BB
bunker buster
BC
Bradley commander
BCPS
Bradley Crew Proficiency Course
BCT
brigade combat team
BCU
battery coolant unit
BDA
battle damage assessment
BDAR
bde
BELRF
BFIST
battle damage assessment and repair

brigade
Bradley eyesafe laser range finder
Bradley Fire Support Team
BFT
blue force tracker
BFV
Bradley Fighting Vehicle
BGST
Bradley Gunnery Skills Test
B/H
black/hot
BII
basic issue items
BIT
built-in test
BMO
bn
BOT
BPI
BRMS
BRT
BS
BSB
Glossary-2
Army National Guard
battalion maintenance officer

battalion
burst on target
bolt position indicator
Battlefield Reference Marking System
brightness
boresight
brigade support battalion
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Glossary
BSS
BT
ballistic solution software

Bradley tables
BTA
boresight telescope assembly
btry
battery
C2
CAB
C-AGTS
cal
CALFEX
can
CAS
CASEVAC
command and control

Combined Arms Battalion
Computerized Advanced Gunnery Training System
caliber
canister
close air support
casualty evacuation
CATS
Combined Arms Training Strategies
CATT
Combined Arms Tactical Trainer
CAUGEX
cav
CBRN
CCF
CCHA
combined arms urban gunnery exercise

cavalry
chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear
computer correction factors
commanders control handle assembly
CCP
computer control panel
CCS
critical crew skills
CCTT
CCTT-RVS
CDF
CE
Close-Combat Tactical Trainer

Close-Combat Tactical Trainer Reconfigurable Vehicle Simulator
close defensive fires
chemical energy
CEU
computer electronics units
CFF
call for fire
CFL
coordinated fire line
CFFT
Call for Fire Trainer
CFV
CG
Cavalry Fighting Vehicle

Commanding General
CGE
command guidance electronics
CGF
computer generated forces
CHS
commanders handstation
CID
combat identification
CIP
combat identification panels
CITV
commanders independent thermal viewer
CIV
commanders independent viewer
CLU
command launch unit
CMETL
3 September 2009
core mission-essential task list
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Glossary-3
Glossary
COA
COFT
conduct-of-fire trainers
COLT
combat observation and lasing team
Comm
commercial
COMSEC
con
CONUS
communications security
control
Continental United States
COP
common operational picture
co tm
company team
COTS
commercial off-the-shelf
CPC
crew proficiency course
CPP
convoy protection platforms
CPX
command post exercise
CROWS
CSCP
Commanders Remotely Operated Weapon System

commanders sight control panel
CSE
commanders sight extension
CST
crew-station trailer
CT1
combat table 1
CT
combat table
CTC
combat training center
CTD
commanders tactical display
CTT
common task test
CVC
combat vehicle crewman
CVS
Combat Vehicle System
CWS
commanders weapon station
D3A
decide, detect, deliver, and assess
DA
DAHA
dual axis head assembly
DCGE
digital command guidance electronics
DCIMS
Dismounted Combat Identification Marking System
DCM
digital control monitor
DCS
digital compass system
DCT
digital control transformer
DECU
digital electronics control unit
desig
designate
DEU
digital electronics unit
DIDEA
dly
Glossary-4
course of action
detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess

delay
DMETL
directed mission-essential task list
DMPRC
digital multipurpose range complex
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Glossary
DODAC
Department of Defense Ammunition Code
DODIC
Department of Defense Identification Code
DPICM
dual purpose improved conventional munitions
DS
DSN
DTDCD-E
direct support
Defense Switched Network
Directorate of Training, Doctrine, Combat Development and Experimentation
DTG
date, time, group
DTV
day television
DU
depleted uranium
DVE
drivers vision enhancement
DVO
direct-view optics
dvr
driver
EA
engagement area
EBFV
Engineer Bradley Fighting Vehicle
ED
embedded diagnostics
EFC
equivalent full charge
EFP
explosively formed penetrators
EFST
EL
ELF
ELRF
essential fire support task

elevation
eyesafe laser filter
eyesafe laser range finder
EOD
explosive ordnance disposal
EPD
environmental parameter data
EPLRS
Enhanced Position Location Reporting System
EPW
enemy prisoner of war
EQT
engineer qualification tables
ERA
explosive reactive armor
EST
engagement skills trainer
FA
FAC
field artillery
forward air controller
FARP
forward arming and refueling point
FART
fuselage armament, rotors, and tails
FATS
Field Artillery Training System
FBCB2
FCEU
Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below

fire control electronics unit
FCS
fire control system
FCX
fire coordination exercise
FDC
fire direction center
FEA
fuze escapement assembly
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Glossary-5
Glossary
FEP
FFCS
fuel-function crew station
FFE
fire for effect
FFI
full frontal impact
FH/M
FIST
FIST-V
FLIR
FM
FMC
FO
FOSD
frequency hopping/master
fire support team
Fire Support Team-Vehicle
forward looking, infrared
field manual
fully mission capable
forward observer
fire-over, shoot-down
FOV
field of view
FPF
final protective fires
FPL
final protective line
FPW
firing port weapon
FRAGO
fragmentary orders
FRPR
FSC
full range practice round

federal supply code
FSCL
fire support coordination line
FSCM
fire support coordination measures
FSCOORD
FSO
FT
FTX
GA
GAS
GCDP
fire support coordinator

fire support officer
firing table
field training exercise
Georgia
gunners auxiliary sight
gunners computer display panel
GEU
guidance electronics unit
GHS
gunners handstation
GLOS
gunners line of sight
GMC
grenade machine gun
gnr
gunner
GPCH
gunners power control handles
GPM
ground precautionary messages
GPS
GPSE
Global Positioning System; gunners primary sight

GPS extension
grd
grenade
GS
general support
GSCP
Glossary-6
firepower enhancement program
Gunners Sight Control Panel
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Glossary
GSR
ground surveillance radar
GST
gunnery skills test
GT
GTLF
G/VLLD
gunnery table
gate to live fire
ground/vehicular laser locator designator
HA
heavy armor
HB
heavy barrel
HBCT
Heavy Brigade Combat Team
HCPC
HMMWV crew proficiency course
HE
HEAT
HEAT-MP-T
HEAT-T
HEAT-TP-T
HEDP
HEI
HEI-T
HEMTT
HE-OR-T
hi
HMMWV
high explosive
high-explosive antitank; HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer
high-explosive, antitank-multipurpose-tracer
high-explosive, antitank-tracer
high-explosive, antitank-target practice-tracer
high-explosive dual-purpose
high-explosive incendiary
high-explosive incendiary with tracer
heavy expanded mobility tactical truck
high-explosive obstacle reducing with tracer
high
High-Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle
HOB
height of burst
HPT
high-priority target
HPTL
high-payoff target list
HQ
headquarters
HT
HMMWV tables
HTPS
HTU
HVCC
hz
hull-turret position sensor

handheld terminal unit
high velocity canister cartridge
hertz
IAW
in accordance with
IBAS
Improved Bradley Acquisition Subsystem
IC3
ICWS
ID
integrated communications, command, and control

improved commanders weapon station
identification
IED
improvised explosive devices
IFV
Infantry Fighting Vehicle
IL
illum
3 September 2009
Illinois
illumination
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Glossary-7
Glossary
IMP
init
INU
initialize
inertial navigation unit
I/O
instructor/operator
IOS
instructor/operator station
IR
infrared
IS
instructor station
ISU
Integrated Sight Unit
IUH
instructor utilization handbook
JAAT
Joint Air Attack Team
JCIMS
Joint Coalition Identification Marking System
JMEM
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual
JTAC
Joint Tactical Air Controller
KE
kinetic energy
kph
kilometers per hour
KSI
kill status indicator
KY
Kentucky
LAN
local area network
LAW
light anti-tank weapons
LBL
laser borelight
LBS
laser boresight
LC
line of contact
LCU
line control unit
LD
line of departure
ldr
leader
LED
LFAST
LFX
LI
LIN
light emitting diode

live-fire accurate screening test
live-fire exercise
light armor
line item number
LMTS
Laser Marksmanship Training System
LMTV
Light Medium Tactical Vehicle
ln
line
lo
low
LOS
LRAS3
Glossary-8
impact
line of sight
Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance System
LRF
laser range finder
LTA
launch tube assembly
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Glossary
LTI
LTID
LZ
MAGTS
mal
MAM
MANPADS
MAPEX
MAX ORD
lower tactical internet

laser target interface device
landing zone
Mobile Advanced Gunnery Training System
malfunction
maintenance advisory messages
Man-Portable Air Defense System
map exercise
maximum ordinate
MBA
main battle area
MBD
muzzle boresight device
MC-AGTS
MCOFT
Mobile Configuration of Computerized Training System

mobile conduct-of-fire trainer
MCS
missile control subsystem
MDL
mission data loader
MEDEVAC
medical evacuation
MEL
maximum engagement line
MEP
mission equipment package
MER
maximum effective range
METL
mission-essential task list
METT-TC
MGO
mission, enemy, terrain (weather), troops and support available, time available,
civil considerations
machine gun optics
MGRS
Military Grid Reference System
MGSS
Main Gun Simulator System
MICLIC
MILES
mm
MOPMS
MOPP
MOS
MP
MPAT
mine-clearing line charges

Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System
millimeters
Modular Pack Mine System
mission-oriented protective posture
military occupational specialty
military police
multipurpose antitank
mph
miles per hour
mps
meters per second
MPI
mean (average) point of impact
MPL
minimum proficiency levels
MPRC
multipurpose range complex
MRAP
mine resistant ambush protected
MRS
3 September 2009
muzzle reference system
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Glossary-9
Glossary
m/s
MSR
MT
MTO
MTOE
meters per second

missile simulation round
mortar table
message to observer
modified table or organization and equipment
MTV
medium tactical vehicle
NAR
notification ammunition reclassification
NATO
NCO
NCOIC
NCS
NFOV
NG
North Atlantic Treaty Organization

noncommissioned officer
noncommissioned officer in charge
net control station
narrow field of view
National Guard
NGF
naval gunfire
NIIN
national item identification number
NJ
NOHD
New Jersey
nominal ocular hazard distance
NSB
near-surface burst
NSN
national stock number
NTC
National Training Center
NVG
night-vision goggles
NVS
night-vision sight
O/C
observer/controller
ODS
Operation Desert Storm
ODS-E
OE
OIC
Operation Desert Storm-Engineer

operational environment
officer in charge
OPCON
operational control
OPFOR
opposing forces
OPLAN
operational plan
OPORD
operations order
OPTEMPO
operating tempo
OR
ORSA
OT
OVD
PAAR
PC
Glossary-10
obstacle reducing
Operations Research Analyst
observer-target
over ride
platoon after-action review
personnel carrier
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Glossary
PCC
PCI
PCPC
PD
PDF
PEWS
PGS
PH
PIBD
precombat checks
precombat inspections
Preliminary Crew Proficiency Course
point detonating
primary direction of fire
platoon early warning system
Precision Gunnery System
probability of hit
point initiating, base detonating
PJS
pulse jet-air system
PK
probability of kill
PL
phase line
PLGR
plrt
PMCS
PMI
PN
POL
POSNAV
PRX
PZ
QDR
RAGTS
RATELO
RBD
RC
RC-MAT
RDL
REDCON
RF
precision lightweight GPS receiver

polarity
preventive maintenance checks and services
preliminary marksman instruction
part number
petroleum, oils, and lubricants
position navigation
proximity
Pickup zone
quality deficiency report
Relocatable Advanced Gunnery Training System
radio-telephone operator
remote biocular display
reserve component
radio-controlled miniature aerial targets
Reimer Digital Library
readiness condition
radio frequency
RFA
restrictive fire area
RFL
restrictive fire line
RH&TNB
ROC-V
revised hull and turret network boxes

recognition of combat vehicles
ROE
rules of engagement
RPG
rocket-propelled grenade
RPO
radiation protection officer
RSO
range safety officer
RTO
radio/telephone operator
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Glossary-11
Glossary
S-1
adjutant
S-2
intelligence officer
S-3
operations and training officer
S-4
supply officer
SA
situational awareness
SAF
SAW
SCATMINE
semi-automated forces
squad automatic weapon
scatterable mine
SCB
system control box
SCF
sight correction factor
SCLU
SDZ
sec
SEP
SF
shtr
SIMNET
simulated command launch unit

surface danger zone
section
system enhancement package
standard form
shutter
Simulations Network
SIMNET-T
Simulations Network-Trainer
SINCGARS
Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System
SIO
SITREP
SLAP
SLAP-T
situation report
saboted light armor penetrator
saboted light armor penetrator with tracer
SLD
squad leaders display
SME
subject matter expert
smk
SMTC
SOP
SOUM
SPOTREP
smoke
Soldiers Manual of Common Tasks
standing operating procedures
safety-of-use messages
spot report
SQ
super quick
sqd
squad
SR
simulated round
SRTA
short-range training ammunition
SS
student station; single shot
ST
special text
STANAG
STLS
STP
STRAC
Glossary-12
senior/instructor operator
standardized agreement
Stinger Training Launch/Simulator
Soldier Training Publication
Standards and Training Commission
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Glossary
STX
SU
SUBDES
TACNAV
situational training exercise

situational understanding
subdesignations
tactical navigation system
TACOM
Tank-Automotive Command
TACSOP
tactical standing operating procedures
TADSS
TAMIS-R
TAS
TASC
training aids, devices, simulations, and simulators

Total Ammunition Management System-Redesigned
target acquisition system
Training Activity Support Center
TB
technical bulletin
TC
tank commander; training circular
TCGST
TCP
TCPC
tank crew gunnery skills test

traffic control point
tank crew proficiency course
TDA
table of distribution and allowance
TDIP
training device interface panel
TDS
turret drive system
T&E
traverse and elevation
T&EO
training and evaluation outlines
TEWT
tactical exercise without troops
TFT
tgt
TGT
THPD
TI
TIGER
tabletop full-fidelity trainer

target
tabletop gunnery trainer
Turret Hull Power Distribution (M1A2)
technical inspection
total integrated engine revitalization
TIP
tank/infantry phone, thermal identification panel
TIS
Thermal Imaging System
TM
technical manual
TMPU
TNT
turret mission processor unit

trinitrotoluene
TO&E
tables, organization, and equipment
TOE
table of organization and equipment
ToT
time on target
TOT
tracer-on-target
TOW
TOW BB
TP
TPCSDS-T
3 September 2009
tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided

TOW bunker buster
target practice
target practice cone stabilized discarding sabot-tracer
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Glossary-13
Glossary
TPDS-T
target practice discarding sabot with tracer
TPMP-T
target practice multipurpose-tracer
TP-T
TRADOC
trk
TRP
TSFO
TSV
TT
target practice with tracer

United States Army Training and Doctrine Command
track
target reference point
target set forward observer
thru-sight video
tank tables
TTP
tactics, techniques, and procedures
TTT
time to target
TUSK
UAAPU
UAS
Tank Urban Survivability Kit

under-armor auxiliary power unit
Unmanned Aircraft System
UCOFT
Unit Conduct of Fire Trainer
UGS
Unattended Ground Sensors
UK
ULT
United Kingdom
universal laser transmitter
UN
United Nations
US
United States
USAF
USAIC
USAR
USR
UTCP
UXO
VA
VBIED
VC
VCCT
United States Air Force

United States Army Infantry Center
United States Army Reserve
unit status report
upgraded tank commanders panel
unexploded ordnances
vertical angle
vehicle born improved explosive device
vehicle commander
Virtual Combat Convoy Trainer
VCCT-L
Virtual Combat Convoy Trainer (Lockheed)
VCCT-R
Virtual Combat Convoy Trainer (Raydon)
VCE
VCEEP
VCOT
VDC
VIP
VISMODS
Glossary-14
vehicle crew evaluator

Vehicle Crew Evaluator Exportable Package
Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer
volts direct current
very important person
visual modification sets
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Glossary
VMS
VT
vehicle motion sensor

variable time
WCB
weapons control box
WCS
weapon control status
WFOV
W/H
WHAT
WP
WRP
XO
3 September 2009
wide field of view

white/hot
wheels, hull, armament, track
white phosphorous
weapon reference point
executive officer
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Glossary-15
References
SOURCES USED
These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication.
AIR FORCE PUBLICATIONS
AFI 13-212, Range Planning and Operations, 16 November 2007.

ARMY PUBLICATIONS
AR 75-1, Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives, 4 Novembe 2008.

AR 350-1, Army Training and Leader Development, 3 August 2007.
AR 385-63, Range Safety, 19 May 2003.
AR 746-2, Combat Vehicle Marking System, 1 August 1993.
ARTEP 6-115-MTP, Mission Training Plan for the Field Artillery Cannon Battalion Command and Staff
Section, Headquarters and Headquarters Battery, and Service Battery, 1 April 2000.
DA Pamphlet 350-38, Standards in Training Commission, 13 May 2009.
DA Pamphlet 385-40, Army Accident Investigation and Reporting, 6 March 2009.
DA Pamphlet 385-63, Range Safety, 4 August 2009.
DA Pamphlet 385-64, Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards, 15 December 1999.
FM 3-09.8, Field Artillery Gunnery, 31 August 2006.
FM 3-09.32, Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Joint Application of Firepower,
20 December 2007.
FM 3-21.71, Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad (Bradley), 20 August 2002.
FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship M16-/M4-Series Weapons, 12 August 2008.
FM 3-22.27, MK19, 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun, MOD 3, 28 November 2003.
FM 3-22.31, 40-mm Grenade Launcher, M203, 13 February 2003.
FM 3-22.34, TOW Weapon System, 28 November 2003.
FM 3-22.37, JavelinClose Combat Missile System, Medium, 20 March 2008.
FM 3-22.65, Browning Machine Gun Caliber .50 HB, M2, 3 March 2005.
FM 3-22.68, Crew-Served Weapons, 21 July 2006.
FM 3-22.90, Mortars, 7 December 2007.
FM 3-22.91, Mortar Fire Direction Center Procedures, 17 July 2008.
FM 3-23.25, Shoulder-Launched Munitions, 31 January 2006.
FM 3-23.30, Grenades and Pyrotechnics Signals, 7 June 2005.
FM 3-23.35, Combat Training with Pistols, M9 and M11, 25 June 2003.
FM 3-90.1, Tank and Mechanized Infantry Company Team, 9 December 2002.
FM 4-30.13, Ammunition Handbook: Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Munitions Handlers
1 March 2001.
FM 6-20, Fire Support in the Airland Battle, 17 May 1988.
FM 6-30, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Observed Fire, 16 July 1991.
FM 7-0, Training for Full Spectrum Operations, 12 December 2008.
FM 7-90, Tactical Employment of Mortars, 9 October 1992.
ST 3-20.12-7, M1028 120-mm Canister Characteristics and Capabilities for the M1A1, M1A2, and M1A2
SEP Abrams Tanks, 23 March 2007.
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG, Soldiers Manual and Trainers Guide, MOS 11B, Infantry, Skill Level 1,
6 August 2004.
STP 7-11C14-SM-TG, Soldiers Manual and Trainers Guide MOS 11C, Indirect Fire Infantryman, Skill
Levels 1/2/3/4, 6 August 2004.
TB 9-1300-385, Munitions Restricted or Suspended, 31 July 2006.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
References-1
References
TB Med 524, Occupational and Environmental Health Control of Hazards to Health from Laser
Radiation, 1 January 2006.
TC 25-4-1, How to Plan, Prepare, and Conduct a Fire Coordination Exercise, 18 January 1984.
TC 25-8, Training Ranges, 5 April 2004.
TC 25-20, A Leaders Guide to After Action Reviews, 30 September 1993.
TC 90-1, Training for Urban Operations, 19 May 2008.
TM 3-1040-268-20&P, Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools
List for Launcher, Grenade, Smoke: Screening, RP, M250 (NSN 1040-00-000-0138), 14 May 1982.
TM 9-1000-202-14, Evaluation of Cannon Tubes, 1 February 1999.
TM 9-1005-200-23&P/TM 08672A-23&P, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual (Including
Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Gun, Automatic: 25-mm, M242
W/Equipment (NSN 1005-01-086-1400) (EIC: 4TE) and Gun, Enhanced Automatic: 25-mm, M242
W/Equipment (NSN 1005-01-454-0396) (EIC: 4TE), 11 June 2001.
TM 9-1005-201-10/TM 08671A-10/1A/TO 11W3-5-5-51, Operators Manual for Machine Gun, 5.56-mm,
M249 W/Equip (NSN 1005-01-127-7510) (EIC: 4BG), 26 July 1991.
TM 9-1005-213-10/TM 02498A-10/2/TO 11W2-6-3-161/SW361-AB-MMO-010, Operators Manual for
Machine Guns, Caliber .50; M2 Heavy Barrel Flexible, W/E (NSN 1005-00-322-9715) (EIC: 4AG)
M48 Turret Type (1005-00-957-3893) (EIC: 4BB) Soft Mount (1005-01-343-0747) (Navy) Fixed Right
Hand Feed (1005-00-122-9339) (Navy) Fixed Type Left Hand Feed (1005-00-122-9368) (Navy), 1
June 2001.
TM 9-1005-245-13&P/T.O. 11W2-8-1-322/TM 1005-13A&P/1, Operators, Unit, and Direct Support
Maintenance Manual with Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL) for Machine Gun Mounts and
Combinations for Tactical/Armored Vehicles M122 Machine Gun Tripod (NSN 1005-00-710-5599)
(EIC: 4EF) M122A1 Machine Gun Mount (1005-00-433-1617) M192 Machine Gun Tripod (1005-01503-0141) M3 Machine Gun Tripod (1005-00-322-9716) (EIC: 4EA) M142 Machine Gun Mount
(1005-00-854-4463) 6650, .50 Caliber, Machine Gun Mount (1005-00-704-6650) M197 Machine Gun
Mount (1005-01-413-4098) MK64 Machine Gun Mount Mod 5 (1010-01-180-9319); Mod 9 (1010-01412-3159) MK93 Mod 0 Machine Gun Mount (USMC only) (1005-01-383-2949) MK93 Mod 1
Machine Gun Mount (1005-01-383-2757) MK93 Mod 2 Machine Gun Mount (1005-01-502-7547), 17
April 2005.
TM 9-1005-309-10, Operators Manual for Submachine Gun, 5.56-mm: Port Firing, M231 (NSN 1005-01081-4582) (EIC: 4BE), 5 August 1997.
TM 9-1005-313-10 (M240 series)/T.O. 11W2-6-5-1/TM 08670A/09712A-10/1B/SW360-AH-OPI-010,
Operator's Manual for Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240 (NSN 1005-01-025-8095); M240B (1005-01412-3129); M240C (1005-01-085-4758); M240D (1005-01-418-6995); M240E1 (1005-01-252-4288);
M240G (1005-01-359-2714); M240H (1005-01-518-2410) M240N (1005-01-493-1666), 15 November
2002.
TM 9-1010-221-10/TO 11W3-9-4-1/TM 07700B-10/SW370-AE-OPI-010, Operators Manual Grenade
Launcher, 40mm: M203, (1010-00-179-6447) Grenade Launcher, 40mm: M203A1 (1010-01-4349028); Headquarters, Department of the Army, Air Force, Marine Corps, and Navy, 1 August 2001.
TM 9-1010-230-10/TM 08521A-10/1A/TO 11W2-5-16-1/SW 363-C3-MMM-010, Operator's Manual for
Machine Gun, 40mm, MK19, Mod 3 (NSN 1010-01-126-9063) (EIC: 4AE), 30 May 2001.
TM 9-1010-230-23&P/TO 11W2-5-16-2/TM 08521A/09761A-23&P/2A/SW363-C3-MMM-020, Unit and
Direct Support Maintenance Manual (Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Machine
Gun, 40 mm, MK 19 MOD 3 (NSN 1010-01-126-9063) (EIC 4AE) and Machine Gun, MK 19, 40 mm,
Upgunned Weapons Station (UPWS) (1010-01-362-6513), 30 November 2005.
TM 9-1015-250-10, Operators Manual for Mortar, 120mm: Towed M120 (NSN 1015-01-226-1672)
(EIC:4SL) and Mortar, 120mm: Carrier-Mounted M121 (1015-01-292-3801) (EIC:4SE),
19 August 1996.
TM 9-1040-267-20&P, Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools
Lis) for Launcher, Grenade, Smoke: Screening, RP, M243 (NSN 1040-01-059-0560), M257 (1040-01070-1213) AND M259 (1040-01-107-7501), 1 February 1984.
TM 9-1220-248-10, Operators Manual for Mortar Fire Control System, M95 (NSN 1230-01-503-7784)
(EIC: 3QT) (With Version 3 Software), 31 October 2005.
References-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
References
TM 9-1220-249-10, Operators Manual for Mortar Fire Control System, M96 (NSN 1230-01-503-7783)
(EIC: 3QS) (With Version 3 Software), 31 October 2005.
TM 9-1315-886-12/TO 11L2-4-10-2, Operators and Unit Maintenance Manual for Launcher and
Cartridge, 84 millimeter: M136 (AT4), 15 May 1990.
TM 9-2350-252-10-2, Operators Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2 (NSN 2350-01-048-5920)
(EIC: APA) M2A1 (2350-01-179-1027) (EIC: ALE) and Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry M3 (2350-01-0492695) (EIC: APB) M3A1 (2350-01-179-1028) (EIC: ALF) Turret, 22 September 1986.
TM 9-2350-264-10-1/TM 08953A-10/1-1, Operators Manual for Operator Controls, PMCS, and
Operation Under Usual Conditions Volume 1 of 2 Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked: 120-mm Gun,
M1A1(NSN 2350-01-087-1095) General Abrams, 5 March 2003.
TM 9-2350-264-10-2/TM 08953A-10/1-2, Operators Manual for Operation Under Unusual Conditions,
Emergency Procedures, Troubleshooting, and Maintenance Volume 2 of 2 Tank, Combat, FullTracked: 120-mm Gun, M1A1 (NSN 2350-01-087-1095), General Abrams, 5 March 2003.
TM 9-2350-284-10-2, Operators Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A2 (NSN 2350-01-248-7619)
(EIC ALG) and Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry M3A2 (2350-01-248-7620) (EIC ALH) Turret,
30 April 2001.
TM 9-2350-284-20-2-1, Unit Maintenance for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A2 (NSN 2350-01-248-7619)
(EIC: ALG) Fighting Vehicle, Infantry, M2A2 Operation Desert Storm (2350-01-405-9886) (EIC:
APE) Fighting Vehicle, M2A2 w/ODS for Engineers (2350-01-494-9960) Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry,
M3A2 (2350-01-248-7620) (EIC: ALH) Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry, M3A2 Operation Desert Storm
(2350-01-405-9887) (EIC: APF) Turret, 19 July 2002.
TM 9-2350-294-10-1, Operator's Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A3 (NSN 2350-01- 436-0005)
(EIC: APG) Fighting Vehicle, Calvary M3A3 (2350-01-436-0007) (EIC: APH) and Fighting Vehicle,
M3A3 BFIST (2350-01-506-0132) Hull, 30 March 2007.
TM 9-2350-294-10-2-1, Operator's Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A3 (NSN 2350-01-436-0005)
(EIC: APG); Fighting Vehicle, Calvary M3A3 (2350-01-436-0007) (EIC: APH) and Fighting Vehicle,
M3A3 BFIST (2350-01-506-0132) Turret, 15 September 2000.
TM 9-2350-294-10-2-2, Operator's Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A3 (NSN 2350-01-436-0005)
(EIC: APG) and Fighting Vehicle, Calvary M3A3 (2350-01-436-0007) (EIC: APH) and Fighting
Vehicle, M3A3 BFIST (2350-01-506-0132) Turret, 15 September 2000.
TM 9-2350-294-20-2-1, Unit Maintenance Manual for Fighting Vehicle, Infantry M2A3 (NSN 2350-01436-0005) (EIC APG) and Fighting Vehicle, Cavalry M3A3 (NSN 2350-01-436-0007) (EIC APH) and
Fighting Vehicle, M3A3 BFIST (NSN 2350-01-506-0132) Turret, 15 September 2000.
TM 9-2350-388-10-1, Operator's Manual for Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked: 120-MM GUN M1A2 System
Enhancement Package (SEP) (NSN 2350-01-328-5964) (EIC: AAF) GeneraL Abrams Volume 1 of 3, 6
February 2009.
TM 9-2350-388-10-2, Operator's Manual for Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked: 120-mm Gun, M1A2 System
Enhancement Package (SEP) (NSN 2350-01-328-5964) (EIC: AAF) General Abrams Volume 2 of 3, 6
February 2009.
JOINT PUBLICATIONS
JP 3-0, Joint Operations, 17 September 2006.
DOCUMENTS NEEDED
These documents must be available to the intended users of this publication.
DA Form 581, Request for Issue and Turn-In of Ammunition.
DA Form 1594, Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officers Log.
DA Form 2028, Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms.
DA Form 2404, Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet.
DA Form 2408-4, Weapon Record Data.
DA Form 5988-E, Equipment Inspection Maintenance Worksheet (EGA).
DA Form 7476-R, 10-Meter Boresight Offset Target.
DA Form 7523-R, Boresight Telescope Accuracy Test.
3 September 2009
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
References-3
References
DA Form 7556-R, Discrete CCF Worksheet.

DA Form 7558-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Individual Roll-Up.
DA Form 7657-R, Crew Gunnery Scoresheet.
DA Form 7658-R, Gunnery Tables X, XI, XII Scoresheet (Platoon Qualification).
DA Form 7659-R, Gunnery Tables VII, VIII, IX Scoresheet (Section Qualification).
DA Form 7660-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I Crew Critical Skills Test Platoon Roll-Up.
DA Form 7661-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I Crew Critical Skills Test Company Roll-Up.
DA Form 7662-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Platoon Roll-Up.
DA Form 7663-R, Crew Gunnery Roll-Up Sheet.
DA Form 7664-R, HBCT Gunnery Table I Crew Critical Skills Test Scoresheet.
DA Form 7665-R, HBCT Gunnery Skills Test (GST) Company Roll-Up.
SF 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report.
References-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
Index
A
Abrams, preface, 1-2, 1-3, 1-5,
1-6, 1-7, 2-1, 2-2, 2-6, 2-7,
2-9, 3-4 through 3-6, 3-9,
3-12 through 3-15, 5-3,
5-11, 5-16, 6-14, 6-16, 7-l3,
7-5, 8-1 through 8-43, 11-2,
11-8 through 11-35, 12-2,
12-5 through 12-23, 13-4
through 13-6, 13-15, 13-27,
16-1, 16-4 through 16-6,
16-19, 16-31, 18-5 through
18-18, 19-2, A-1 through
A-142, F-6 through F-12
ammunition stowage plan,
A-133 through A-135
(AAC), A-1 through A-142
boresighting, A-1 through
A-40
dead space, 5-4
error sources, A-114
fuel consumption, 1-7, 1-8
Full-Crew Interactive
Simulator Trainer
(A-FIST), preface, 11-2,
11-21, 11-22, 11-28, 12-6
historical records, A-136
through 142
integrated management
(AIM), 2-1, 2-2, 2-4, 2-9,
live fire accuracy screening
test, A-87 through A-102
live-fire preparation, A-1
through A-142
M1A1, 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-4
through 2-9, 4-40, 4-42,
4-47, 4-49, 4-51, 7-6, 7-8,
8-13, 8-23, 8-29, 8-35,
8-40 through 8-43, 9-15,
11-13, 11-21, 11-22, 19-9,
A-90 through A-121, F-6
through F-8
Mobile Conduct-of-Fire
Trainer (MCOFT), 11-9
post-fire checks, A-112
pre-fire checklist, A-42,
A-43
recoil system, 3-12
3 September 2009
specific range determination,

A-119 through A-133
stadia reticle, 7-8
System Enhancement
Package (SEP), 2-1, 2-5
through 2-9, 4-40, 4-42,
4-47, 4-49, 4-50, 5-3, 5-8,
7-5, 7-6, 7-8, 8-12, 8-23,
8-29, 8-32, 11-13, 11-21,
A-23, A-30, A-37, A-40,
A-41, A-43, A-63 through
A-93, A-99 through A-123,
F-6 through F-8
weapons system
malfunctions, A-112
through A-114
zeroing tank-mounted
machine guns, A-102
through A-119
active component, 12-2, 12-20
through 12-22
Advanced
Bradley Full-Crew
Interactive Simulator
Trainer (AB-FIST) (also see
Bradley), preface
Field Artillery Tactical Data
System (AFATDS), H-8
Gunnery Training Systems
(AGTS), preface, 11-20,
11-21, 12-6, 12-7, 12-23
after action reviews (AAR),
11-8, 11-14 through 11-34,
12-9 through 12-16, 13-1,
13-3, 13-22, 14-5, 14-13,
16-10, 17-4, 18-5, D-1, F-5
aided target tracker (ATT),
2-11
air
air battle (ABC), 13-18
search techniques, 5-12
aircraft vehicle identification,
6-9 through 6-12
engine mounting, 6-10
fenestron tail rotor, 6-11
key identification features,
6-12
rear horizontal stabilizer
wings, 6-12
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
rotary wing external sensors,

6-10
tail rotor, 6-11
airspace coordination area
(ACA), 9-26
air tasking order (ATO), 9-22
ammo holding area (AHA),
12-23
ammunition, preface, 1-3, 2-1,
4-1, 4-22, 4-24, 4-29
through 4-58, 4-65, 4-66,
4-71, 4-97, 4-103, 11-17
caliber .50, 1-3, 1-6, 2-9,
2-18, 2-19, 4-1, 4-9, 4-11,
4-16 through 4-18, 4-100,
7-3, 8-5, 8-9, 8-10, 8-16,
8-32, 8-33, 8-40 through
8-43, 8-57, 11-2 through
11-35, 12-21, 13-27, 14-6,
16-3, 16-11, 17-12 through
17-20, 18-9 through 18-18,
19-4, 19-9, 19-10, A-18,
A-36, H-15
5.56mm, 1-3, 3-1, 4-1, 4-10
through 4-13, 4-100, 7-3,
13-26, D-5 through D-7
7.62 mm, 1-3, 2-9, 2-13,
2-16, 3-4, 4-1, 4-10, 4-14,
4-15, 4-100, 7-3, 8-33,
8-40, 11-17, 11-18, 11-30,
11-31, 13-12, 13-26, 13-27,
16-19, 16-21, 16-23, 18-11
through 18-18, 19-4, 19-9
25mm, 1-3, 4-1, 4-19
through 4-31, 4-98, 4-100,
7-3, 7-4, 8-11, 11-3, 11-26,
13-26, 16-3, 16-8, 16-10,
16-15, 16-27 through
16-35, 18-5 through 18-18,
19-4, 19-9, 19-18, 19-19
types,
M791, 4-19 through 4-23
M792, 4-19 through 4-28
M910, 4-19, 4-29, 4-30
M919, 4-19 through 4-23
40mm, 1-3, 4-1, 4-32
through 4-37, 4-100, 7-3,
11-31, 13-26, 16-3, 16-8,
16-10, 16-15, 16-27
Index-1
Index
through 16-35, 17-12

through 17-16, 17-18,
17-20, 18-9 through 18-18,
D-3 through D-5
types,
M385, 4-32 through 4-35
M430, 4-32 through 4-37
M918, 4-32 through 4-35
M1001, 4-32 through
4-37
MK281 MOD O, 4-32
through 4-37
120mm, 1-3, 1-7, 2-9, 4-1,
4-37 through 4-61,
4-98, 4-100, 7-3, 8-11,
8-40, 11-3, 13-26, 16-3,
16-8 through 16-35, 18-11
through 18-18, A-10, F-6
holding area (AHA), 4-36
information notices (AIN),
1-3
Javelin, 4-1, 4-92 through
4-97, 4-100, 8-11, 9-11,
12-20, 19-4, 19-18, 19-19,
D-3 through D-20
M172, 11-30
M196, 3-1
M242, 25mm, 4-19
M256, 4-37, 4-45, 4-49,
4-51, 4-52, 4-54
MK19, 4-1, 4-32, 4-33, 4-37
120-mm mortar, 4-1, 4-57,
4-58, 4-62, 4-66, 4-100
HE M933, 4-57 through
4-61
HE M934, 4-57 through
4-61
illum M930, 4-57
through 4-60
illum M983, 4-58
through 4-61
markings, 4-3
practice M931, 4-57
through 4-61
smoke M929, 4-57
through 4-60
information notices (AIN),
4-102
smoke grenades, 4-69, 4-70
stowage plan, A-134, A-135
weapon, 7-3, 7-4
supply point (ASP), 4-31,
4-36, 4-53, 4-54, 4-97
TOW missiles,
Index-2
TOW 2A, 4-71 through

4-82
TOW 2B, 4-71 through
4-89
TOW BB, 4-73, 4-77, 4-89
through 4-92
120-mm (tank),
M829A1, 4-39 through
4-44
M829A2, 4-39 through
4-44
M829A3, 4-38, 4-39, 4-41
through 4-43
M830, 4-38, 4-39, 4-44,
4-45, 4-50
M830A1, 4-38, 4-39, 4-45,
4-46, 4-51
M831A1, 4-39, 4-49
through 4-53
M865, 4-39, 4-49 through
4-53
M908-HE-OR-T, 4-38,
4-45, 4-46
M1002, 4-38, 4-39, 4-49,
4-51
M1028, 4-38 through 4-41,
4-46, 4-48, 4-53
TOW missiles, 4-78, 4-83
analog electronics unit
(AEU), 4-75
AN/GVS-5, 7-5
AN/PAQ-4C, C-2, C-3, C-9
AN/PAS-13B, C-5, C-9, C-10
AN/PAS-13 (V) 2 MWTS,
C-2, C-5
AN/PAS-13 (V) 3 HWTS,
C-2, C-5
AN/PEQ-2A, C-2, C-10, C-20,
C-21, C-23
AN/PSS-14, E-4
AN/PVS-4, C-2, C-4, C-9
AN/TV-5A, C-5, C-10
antipersonnel, 7-4, 7-6
obstacle breaching system
(APOBS), E-10 through
E-14
antitank
guided missile (ATGM),
3-1, 3-4, 3-5, 4-10, 4-19,
4-23, 5-6, 5-7, 7-3, 8-33,
9-13, 13-18, F-1
weapon effect signature
simulation (ATWESS), 18-9
AN/VVS-2, 2-7, 2-19
area of
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
interest, 13-19
operations, 13-19
(AAC), 8-26, 12-17, 16-12,
A-1 through A-142
armor, 2-1, 2-2, 2-4, 2-7, 2-17
heavy, 2-1, 2-2
piercing (AP), 3-8, 4-3,
4-10, 4-11, 4-13, 8-3
through 8-6, 8-60, 10-3,
11-25, 18-8 through 18-18,
B-1, B-37, B-43, B-51
through B-55, B-66, B-67
-piercing discarding sabot
with tracer (APDS-T),
4-21, 4-22, 4-29, 7-5,
8-6, 13-13, B-63
-piercing, fin-stabilized,
discarding sabot with tracer
(APFSDS-T), 4-3, 4-10,
4-11, 4-17, 4-22, 4-23,
4-42, 4-43, 4-52, 8-6,
A-116
-piercing incendiary (API),
4-11, 4-17, 7-4
piercing incendiarytracer (API-T), 8-40
piercing with tracer (AP-T),
4-13, 4-15
protection, 2-1 through 2-4,
2-10, 2-16
Armored
Cavalry Regiment (ACR),
preface, 1-1, 1-2
Security Vehicle (ASV),
1-6, 2-14, 2-15, 2-16, 8-32,
8-43, 8-62, 8-64, 16-1,
16-6, 16-7, 16-21, 16-23,
16-26, 18-8 through 18-16,
G-1 through G-22
vehicles, 10-2
kill indicators, 10-2
kill standard, 10-2
Army
combat uniform (ACU), F-8
Electronic Product Support
(AEPS), A-136, A-137
Knowledge Online (AKO),
1-6, 4-102, E-10
Materiel Systems Analysis
Activity (AMSAA), 11-33
National Guard of the
United States (ARNGUS),
preface, 2-1, 11-10
3 September 2009
Index
armored truck live-fire

preparation, C-1 through
C-32
LRAS3, C-28 through
C-32
post fire checks, C-27,
C-28
pre-fire checks, C-11
sight offset information,
C-20 through C-27
weapon sights, C-1 through
C-10
weapon system
malfunctions, C-19, C-20
zeroing, C-11 through C-19
AT4, 7-3, 9-11, 9-13, 12-20
attack select (ATTK SEL),
D-10
audio/visual (AV), 13-3
aviation
Army, 13-18
Combined Arms Tactical
Trainer (AVCATT), 11-15
azimuth (AZ), A-1 through
A-94, B-15 through B-17,
B-23 through B-30, B-37,
B-39, B-41, B-51 through
B-55
B
backblast area danger zone,
4-92
ballistic firing tables, 13-12,
13-13
bandoleer, 4-11
basic machine gun, 1-6
basic skills trainer (BST), 4-92
D-9
battalion maintenance officer
(BMO), 19-3
battle
damage assessment (BDA),
16-10, 17-4, 18-7
focus, 12-2
roster changes, 12-20
battlecarry, 1-4, 8-2 through
8-8
battlefield, 1-1, 1-4, 2-1
through 2-14
Reference Marking System
(BRMS), 6-17, 6-18
battery coolant unit (BCU),
4-92, 4-94, D-9, D-11
binoculars, 7-10, 7-16
black/hot (B/H), A-28
3 September 2009
blue force tracker (BFT), 2-4

BMP-2/3, 7-12, 7-13, 7-14,
7-17, 9-13, 18-12 through
18-18, A-126 through
A-131, D-17
bolt position indicator (BPI),
B-3, B-51, B-52
borelight, C-20 through C-24
boresighting, A-1 through
A-42, A-102, A-103, A-115
through A-117, B-4 through
C-18 through B-34, C-31
equipment testing
procedures, B-5 through
B-12
indications, B-5
preparation, B-4
day and night refraction,
A-118
restricted areas, B-4
telescope assembly (BTA),
B-7, B-8
visibility conditions, B-4
weapons checks with the
close-in panel, B-34
through B-50
Bradley, preface, 1-2, 1-4, 1-5,
1-6, 1-7, 2-9 through 2- 14,
3-1, 3-5, 3-8, 3-9, 3-15,
3-16, 5-3, 5-5, 5-8, 5-11,
6-15, 7-5, 7-6, 7-9, 8-1
through 8-61, 9-9, 11-2,
11-9, 11-20, 11-25, 12-2
through 12-20, 13-4 through
13-6, 13-27, 16-4, 16-5,
16-21, 16-23, 18-5 through
18-18, 19-2, 19-3, 19-7,
F-12, F-13
Advanced Bradley FullCrew Interactive Simulator
Trainer (AB-FIST),
preface, 11-2, 11-27,
11-28, 12-6, 12-14
Advanced Training System
(BATS), 11-10, 11-27,
12-7, 12-14
boresighting, B-4 through
B-50
Crew Proficiency Course
(BCPC), 1-6
dead space, 5-5
dual-feed system, B-1
through B-4
Engineer Bradley Fighting
Vehicle (EBFV), 18-6
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
eye safe range finder

(BELRF), 7-5
Fighting Vehicle (BFV),
preface, 1-2, 2-9, 2-10,
2-11, 2-12, 2-13, 2-14, 3-1,
3-5, 3-16, 5-8, 5-15, 7-1,
7-6 through 7-9, 8-1,
8-29, 9-10, 9-11, 9-14,
11-2, 11-14, 11-23, 11-26,
11-27, 11-28, 11-35, 12-4,
12-6, 12-7, 12-9, 12-22,
13-6, 18-6, 18-7, B-1, B-5,
B-9, B-10, B-12, B-13,
B-32, B-34, B-35, B-45,
B-56, B-58, B-60, B-63
through B-66, D-1, D-14,
D-17 through D-22, F-12,
F-13
Fire Support Team (BFIST),
2-10, 2-14, 12-2, 12-14,
18-6, 18-8, 18-13, 18-18
Gunnery Skills Test
(BGST), 1-5
Improved Bradley
Acquisition Subsystem
(IBAS), 2-11, 3-17, 5-11,
5-15, 7-6, 8-13, 8-14,
8-23, 8-26, 8-30, 8-35,
8-41, 8-43, B-4, B-5,
B-52 through B-54, B-64
through B-66
M2A2 Operation Desert
Storm (ODS), 3-1, 3-16,
7-4, 8-35, 11-2, 11-10,
11-27, 11-28, 18-7, B-51
through B-54
M2A2/M2A3, 1-4, 2-9,
2-10, 2-13, 2-14, 3-1, 4-36,
5-3, 5-8, 5-11, 5-12, 5-15,
5-16, 7-4, 9-15, 11-26,
13-6, 19-3, 19-9
post-fire checks, B-58
pre-fire checks, B-50
through B-53
range determination, B-58
through B-67
stadia reticle, 7-7
TIP, 6-15
TOW limitations, B-68,
B-69
weapons system
malfunctions, B-56 through
B-58
zeroing procedures, B-53
through B-56
Index-3
Index
BRDM, 7-13, 18-16 through

18-18, A-123, A-128
brigade support battalion
(BSB), D-3
BRMS, 6-18
BTR-80, 18-16 through 18-18
built-in-test (BIT), 2-12, 3-9,
8-26, A-114, B-58
burst on target (BOT), 11-9,
11-22, 11-25, 12-21
C
call
for fire (CFF), 1-4, 9-19
for fire trainer (CFFT),
11-10, 11-11
CAM bracket, A-84 through
A-87
casualty evacuation
(CASEVAC), D-19
Cavalry Fighting Vehicle
(CFV), 2-9
chemical, biological,
radiological, and nuclear
(CBRN), 2-2, 2-12, 2-19,
5-15, 12-2, 16-11, 16-34,
18-7, 19-3, 19-9, 19-16,
19-20, A-43, D-19
chemical energy (CE), 4-19,
4-20, 4-32, 4-37, 4-38, 4-40,
4-45, 4-56, 4-81, 4-82,
16-19 through 16-36, A-134
claymore mine, E-8
close
air support (CAS), 13-18,
13-19
Combat Tactical Trainer
(CCTT), 12-3, 12-7, 12-23,
17-8
Combat Tactical Trainer
Reconfigurable Vehicle
Simulator (CCTT-RVS),
11-2, 11-15, 11-31
defensive fires (CDF),
9-21
combat
identification (CID),
1-1, 5-2
identification panels (CIP),
6-13, 6-14, D-14
observation and lasing team
(COLT), 9-22
tables, VII, VIII, IX, X, XI,
XII, 1-7
training, 1-1
Index-4
Training Center (NTC), 12-3

vehicle crewman (CVC),
A-114, B-58, F-8 through
F-12
Combined Arms
Live-Fire Exercise
(CALFEX), 1-7, 2-1, 12-1,
12-8, 12-14, 13-20, 16-2,
17-2, 18-1, 19-1 through
19-24
Tactical Trainer (CATT),
11-2, 11-14, 11-15
Training Strategies (CATS),
12-6, 13-15, 18-1, 18-2,
19-2, 19-15, 19-18
Urban Gunnery Exercise
(CAUGEX), 13-20
command
and control, 2-4, 2-7, 2-11,
2-12
and control vehicle (C2V),
17-1, D-19
guidance electronics (CGE),
3-16
launch unit (CLU), D-9,
D-10
commanders
assessment, 12-3, 12-4
Control Handle Assembly
(CCHA), 2-5, A-120
guidance, 12-16, 12-17
handstation (CHS), B-53,
B-55
Independent Thermal
Viewer (CITV), 2-5, 2-6,
5-3, 5-4, 5-8, 5-11, 5-16,
8-12, 8-13, 8-22, 8-29,
8-32, 8-42, 11-5, A-24
through A-43, A-115
through A-121
Independent Viewer (CIV),
2-11, 5-3, 5-4, 5-8, 5-11,
5-15, 5-16, 8-12, 8-13,
8-22, 8-29, 11-5, B-5,
B-53, B-64
intent, 13-2 through 13-15
remotely operated weapon
station (CROWS), 8-42
sight control panel (CSCP),
B-53
sight extension (CSE), 5-15
tactical display (CTD), 2-12,
5-15, B-5, B-53, B-54,
B-64
training, 12-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
training goals, 12-17

training plans, 12-18
training requirements, 12-18
weapon station (CWS), 5-8,
8-35, 8-40, 8-42, 16-15,
16-17, A-102 through
A-126
Commanding General (CG),
preface
commercial, off-the-shelf
(COTS), 1-5
common
launch unit (CLU), 4-92
operational picture (COP),
9-3
task test (CTT), 11-3
communications security
(COMSEC), 13-22
company team, 9-2 through
9-13, 13-16, 13-17, 13-20
computer
control panel (CCP), 8-13,
A-9 through A-21, A-48
through A-60, A-83, A-84,
A-90 through A-109
correction factors (CCF),
A-9, A-10, A-16, A-22
through A-29, A-52
A-115
electronics unit (CEU), A-9,
A-10, A-48 through A-97
Generated Forces (CGF),
11-11, 11-15
Computerized Advanced
Gunnery Training System
(C-AGTS), 11-21, 12-6,
12-23
Conduct-of-Fire Trainers
(COFT), preface, 11-2,
11-22, 11-28, 12-6, 12-14
convoy protection platforms
(CPP), 17-1
coordinated fire line (CFL),
9-23
core mission-essential task list
(CMETL), 17-3
countermobility, 13-18
course of action (COA), F-5
crawl, walk, run, 16-3
crew,
critical skills test, 1-5, 1-6
evaluation, 1-6
3 September 2009
Index
Proficiency Course (CPC),

12-4, 12-7, 12-17, 16-1,
16-2, 17-2, 17-10
qualification, 1-6
-served weapons, 1-1, 1-3,
1-6, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 9-4, 9-5,
9-10, 9-11
Station Trailer (CST), 11-33
D
DA Form
581, 11-18, 11-23, 11-30,
11-31
2028, preface
2404, A-44, A-47, A-58
through A-62, A-74
2408-4, 12-19, A-13, A-15,
A-28, A-136 through
A-142
2408-4 (electronic), A-136
through A-142
3151-R, 4-8
5988E, A-44, A-47, A-58
through A-62, A-74
7523-R, B-14
7556-R, A-95, A-97
date, time, group (DTG), 9-28,
9-25
day night sight (DNS), D-4
decide, detect, deliver, and
assets (D3A), 9-20, 9-22
decision-making procedures,
1-4
detect, identify, decide,
engage, and assess
(DIDEA),
1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 5-1
6-19, 8-40, 16-12
assess, 1-5, 10-1 through
10-6
engagement assessment,
10-2
engagement termination,
10-2 through 10-4
reports, 10-4, 10-5
decide, 1-4
deliberate range
determination, 7-11
through 7-18
immediate range
determination, 7-5 through
7-11
3 September 2009
target determination, 7-1

through 7-4
detect, 1-3, 5-1 through 5-18
crew search, 5-2
detect, 5-2 through 5-15
engagement process, 5-1
ground and air search tips,
5-15, 5-16, 5-17
through 5-14
sectors of responsibility,
5-3, 5-4
target detection, 5-5 through
5-7
target location, 5-7, 5-8
identify, 1-4, 6-1 through
6-19
classification, 6-1, 6-2
discrimination, 6-13
through 6-19
identification, 6-2 through
6-12
engage, 1-5, 9-1 through
9-30
company/platoon/section
fire commands, 9-14
through 9-18
collective, 9-1 through
9-27
direct and indirect fires
(crew), 8-1 through 8-82
direct fire planning and
execution, 9-13 through
9-18
engagement techniques,
8-33 through 8-43
fire commands, 8-8
through 8-32
fire control measures, 9-3
through 9-14
fire planning, 9-19, 9-22
fire support planning for
offensive operations,
9-20, 9-21
fire support planning for
defensive operations, 9-21
through 9-26
indirect fire, 8-65 through
8-82
indirect fire planning and
9-27
indirect fire team, 9-18,
principles of fire control,
9-2, 9-3
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
sample fire commands,

8-43 through 8-64
section, platoon, and
company fire control, 9-1
through 9-13
target attack, 9-26, 9-27
assess, 1-5, 10-1 through
10-6
engagement assessment,
10-2
engagement termination,
10-2 through 10-4
reports, 10-4, 10-5
Department of Defense
Ammunition Code
(DODAC), 4-2, 4-8, B-31,
B-32
Identification Code
(DODIC), 4-2, 4-6 through
4-21, 4-29, 4-32 through
4-37, 4-41, 4-49, 4-58,
4-77 through 4-91, D-5,
D-7
Digital
Command guidance
electronics (DCGE), 3-16
Compass System (DCS),
2-10
control transformer (DCT),
A-49
electronic control unit
(DECU), 2-2, 2-3, 4-70,
4-75
multipurpose range
complexes (DMPRC),
19-1, 19-10
directed mission-essential task
list (DMETL), 17-3, 17-12,
17-14, 17-16, 17-18, 17-20
direct fire (also see fire)
engagement process, 1-1
through 1-3
SOP, 9-15
direct-view optics (DVO),
2-11, B-54, B-55, B-64
discrimination definitions,
6-13
dismounted troops and antiarmor systems,
kill standard, 10-3
doctrine, preface
drivers vision enhancement
(DVE), 2-4, 2-5, 2-7, 2-11,
5-15
Index-5
Index
dual axis head assembly

(DAHA), A-30
dual-purpose improved
conventional munition
(DPICM), 8-68
E
elevation (EL), A-13 through
A-68, B-6 through B-56,
C-12 through C-18
elevation uncouple (EL
UNCPL), 8-29
embedded diagnostics (ED),
2-1
emergency directions, 13-26,
13-27
Master Gunners range box,
13-26
vehicle flags, 13-26
engagement,
area (EA), 9-4, 9-7, 9-16,
9-23, D-16
Skills Trainer (EST), 11-2,
11-12, 11-13, 17-8
techniques, 1-4, 8-33
through 8-43
engineers, 1-1
Bradley Fighting Vehicle
(EBFV), E-3
qualification tables (EQT),
E-1 through E-15
squad, 1-7
Enhanced Position Location
Reporting System (EPLRS),
B-53
equipment, 13-23, 13-24
equivalent full charge (EFC),
A-136 through A-142
essential fire support task
(EFST), 9-22
explosive ordnance disposal
(EOD), 13-17, B-69
explosively formed penetrators
(EFP), 4-83
eyesafe
laser filter (ELF), 13-24,
13-25
laser range finder (ELRF),
2-3, 8-3, 8-48, A-119,
A-120, B-58, B-64
F
federal supply classification
code (FSC), 4-2, 4-6, 4-8
Index-6
field
artillery (FA), 1-1, 2-14,
8-74, 9-19, 9-21, 9-26,
13-16, 13-17
Artillery Training System
(FATS), 11-10
of view (FOV), 2-11, 5-6,
5-7, 5-12, 5-13, 7-6, A-120
tactical trainer (FFT), 4-93,
D-10
training exercises (FTX),
12-3, H-7
final
protective fires (FPF), 9-7,
9-20 through 9-25, H-9
through H-13
protective line (FPL), 9-7,
9-21, 9-25
fire,
alternating, 9-12, 9-13
area, 9-12, 9-13
close defensive (CDF), 9-21
commands, 1-4, 5-1, 8-17
through 8-65, 9-15
alert, 8-8, 8-9
description, 8-11, 8-12
direction, 8-12
8-16
range or elevation, 8-13,
8-14
termination, 8-16
weapon ammunition, 8-10
control, 2-1
control measures, 4-47, 9-4,
9-8
Control System, A-21, A-22,
A-82 through A-115
coordination exercise
(FCX), 13-20, 19-2, 19-13,
19-14
cross-fire command, 9-19
depth fire command, 9-20
destructive, 9-27
direct, 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4,
1-5, 10-2, 10-3, 12-7, 12-8,
12-15, 13-16
direction center (FDC),
4-66, 8-65, 8-66, 8-67,
8-71, 8-72, 8-74, 8-77,
8-81, 8-82, 9-19, 9-26,
12-15, H-1 through H-22
final protective (FPF), 9-7,
9-20 through 9-25
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
final protective line (FPL),

9-7, 9-21, 9-25
for effect (FFE), 8-66, 8-68,
8-78, 8-81, 8-82
frontal fire command, 9-18
indirect, 1-1, 1-4, 1-5, 3-16,
9-20 through 9-30, 10-3,
10-4, 12-1, 12-2, 12-8,
12-15, 18-1
destruction, 10-4
neutralization, 10-4
suppression, 10-4
linear, 9-7
long-range, 9-21
mission example, 8-73, 8-74
neutralization, 9-27
observed, 9-13
planning, 9-21
patterns, 9-8, 9-9, D-16
point, 9-12, 9-13
reconnaissance, 9-13
reduced, 1-4
sequential, 9-13, 9-14
simultaneous, 9-12, 9-13
support, 1-1, 2-1, 9-20
through 9-26, 13-16
support coordination line
(FSCL), 9-25, 9-26
support coordination
measures (FSCM), 9-20,
9-22, 9-25, H-11 through
H-13
support elements (FSE),
9-20
support officer (FSO), 2-14,
8-68, 10-2, 10-4, 13-16,
13-18, 14-1
support team (FIST), 2-14,
9-19, 9-25, 9-26, 12-14,
13-17, 17-3
Support Team-Vehicle
(FIST-V), 2-14, 11-14
suppression, 9-27
time of suppression, 9-13,
9-14
firing
port weapon (FPW), 3-1
table (FT), 4-51, 8-7, 11-28,
13-10, 13-12, 13-26
task, 18-2
Force XXI Battle Command
Brigade and Below
(FBCB2), 2-7, 2-11, 5-8,
6-17, 6-19, 7-4, 7-17, 10-5,
11-15, 13-3, 13-27, 13-28,
3 September 2009
Index
16-12, 18-7, A-114, A-132,

B-53, B-58
Forward
Air Controller (FAC), 13-18
Looking Infrared (FLIR),
2-4, 2-7, 2-11, 5-11, 6-16,
7-5, 11-3, A-123, B-52,
B-54, B-64, C-5, C-28
through C-31
observer (FO), 8-40, 9-19,
9-22
fragmentary orders (FRAGO),
6-19, 13-15, 13-19, 19-2,
19-16, 19-17
fratricide, 1-4
frequency hopping/master
(FH/M), 13-28
friend, foe, or noncombatant,
6-13
fuel consumption chart, 2-8
full-fidelity trainer (TFT), 11-2
full function crew station
(FFCS), B-53
full range training round
(FRTR), 4-57, 4-62
fully mission capable (FMC),
12-21
fuselage, armament, rotors,
and tail (FART), 6-9 through
6-12
G
GEN three Image Intensifying
(GEN III I2), C-11
Global Positioning System
(GPS), 2-7, 8-28, 8-41
grenade,
launchers, 3-7, 3-14, 3-15,
4-71 (also see Armored
Security Vehicle [ASV] and
HMMWV)
M250, 3-14, 3-15
MK19, 8-54, 17-10
machine gun (GMG), 4-32
smoke, 4-66 through 4-70
launchers,
M250, 4-67
M257, 4-67
types,
L8A1, 4-68, 4-69
L8A3, 4-68 through 4-70
M76, 4-69, 4-70
M82, 4-70
ground vehicle,
armored reactive tiles, 6-8
3 September 2009
boat shaped hull, 6-4

bore evacuator, 6-5
box shaped hull, 6-5
fording kit, 6-8
gun mantle, 6-7
hydrojet, 6-6
key recognition features
(enhanced), 6-9
precautionary messages
(GPM), 4-102
supported, 6-4
unsupported, 6-3
trim vane, 6-5
ground/vehicular laser
locator designator (G/VLLD),
8-82, 12-14
gunners
auxiliary sight (GAS), 7-8,
7-10, 8-13, 8-27, 8-40,
8-41, 8-48, 8-52, 13-15,
A-115 through A-125
computer display panel
(GCDP), 8-13, A-22, A-25,
A-29, A-33, A-35, A-39,
handstation (GHS), B-52
through B-54
line of sight (GLOS), A-24
through A-29
power control handles
(GPCH), A-11, A-16,
A-25, A-44, A-47, A-50,
A-100, A-108
primary sight (GPS), 5-3,
5-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-17, 8-13,
8-14, 8-35, 8-51, 13-15,
sight control panel (GSCP),
B-54, B-55
surveillance radar (GSR),
13-19
gunnery,
collective, 1-2, 1-7, 12-1
through 12-23, 13-16,
17-19, 18-1 through 18-18
evaluation, 18-1 through
18-8
platoon, 18-13 through
18-18
section, 18-9 through 18-13
crew, 12-7, 12-8
crew practice crew (CPC),
16-14, 16-15
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
cross-training strategy, 12-9

digital, 16-10
exercises, 13-1
extended range machine
gun,
17-15, 17-16
individual, 12-1 through
12-23
integrated training strategy,
12-9 through 12-16
mortar, 1-7
phase, 17-2
plans, 12-18 through 12-23
rifle squad (see rifle squad)
scenarios, 16-10, 16-11
skills tests (GST), 1-2, 1-5,
11-3, 12-1, 12-3, 12-9,
12-16, 12-17 through
12-20, 13-21, 13-26, 14-1
through 14-9,16-2, 16-12,
17-3, 17-9, 17-13, 17-17
stabilized (also see
platform), 16-1 through
16-38
tables (GT), preface, 1-1,
1-2, 1-5, 1-6, 11-3 through
11-36, 12-4, 12-8, 12-9,
12-17, 12-20, 12-23, 13-1,
13-28, 14-1 through 14-16,
16-1 through 16-38, 17-1
through 17-25, 18-1, 18-6,
18-7, 18-8, 19-9, 19-17,
B-55
basic crew practice, 16-16,
17-17, 17-18
basic machine gun, 16-16
through 16-21, 17-13,
17-14
crew practice course,
16-14, 16-15
crew qualification course,
17-18 through 17-20
critical crew skills, 17-9
through 17-12
extended range machine
gun, 17-15, 17-16
scoresheets, 18-3, 18-4
training, 1-1 through 1-6,
12-1 through 12-23
training program, 12-1
through 12-23
unstabilized (also see
platform), 17-1 through
17-20
gun-target line, 13-12
Index-7
Index
H
handheld terminal unit (HTU),
12-14
Havok, 7-13, A-128
hazard classification, 4-11,
4-21, 4-24, 4-29, 4-32, 4-41,
4-49, 4-58, 4-77, 4-98, 4-99
heavy weapon thermal sight
(HWTS), C-5, C-8, C-10
Heavy expanded mobility
tactical truck (HEMTT),
11-2, 11-15
height of burst (HOB), 8-77
high
-explosive (HE), 3-8, 4-20,
4-57, 4-61, 4-94, 7-6,
7-7, 8-4, 8-5, 8-11, 8-48,
9-13, 9-26, 9-27, 10-3,
11-25, 18-8 through 18-18,
19-9, A-10, A-16 through
A-20, A-23, A-29, A-38,
A-52, A-55, A-59, A-60,
A-82, A-83, A-88, A-91,
A-93, A-96, A-115, A-122
through A-135, B-1, B-66,
B-67, D-3 through D-9
-explosive antitank (HEAT),
4-44, 4-50, 4-52, 7-6, 8-4,
8-5, 8-11, 8-41, 8-48,
11-18, 11-19, A-10, A-17,
A-20, A-23, A-29, A-38,
A-59, A-60, A-82, A-88,
A-91, A-96, A-122
through A-134, D-13, F-6,
F-7
-explosive antitank
multipurpose-tracer
(HEAT-MP-T), 4-44, 4-51,
4-52, 8-7, 8-11
-explosive antitank-target
practice-tracer (HEAT-TPT), 4-49, 19-9, A-10, A-23
antitank-tracer (HEAT-T),
A-115
-explosive dual-purpose
(HEDP), 4-32, 4-33, 4-98,
9-11, D-5
-explosive incendiary with
tracer (HEI-T), 4-21 through
4-30, 7-6, 8-7,
9-14, B-66
-explosive obstacle reducing
with tracer (HE-OR-T),
4-38, 4-53, 8-7, 8-11,
Index-8
A-10, A-20, A-23, A-38,

A-134, A-135
-payoff target lists (HPTL),
9-22
-priority targets (HPT), 9-9,
9-22
High-Mobility Multipurpose
Wheeled Vehicle
(HMMWV), preface, (see
also ASV) 1-2, 1-7, 2-16,
2-17, 2-18, 3-3, 3-4, 3-6,
3-7, 3-15, 5-3, 5-12, 7-5,
8-1, 8-12, 8-19, 11-2, 11-3,
11-11, 11-15, 11-29, 11-31,
11-33, 11-35, 17-1, 17-3,
17-5, 18-7 through 18-16,
C-18, C-20
armed, 2-16, 2-17
enhanced up-armored, 2-17,
2-18
M1025A2, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18
M1026A1, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18
M1114, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18
M1151, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18
up-armored, 2-17
high velocity canister cartridge
(HVCC), 4-32, 16-7
Hind-D, A-128 through A-130
historical records, A-136
through A-142
hull-turret position sensor
(HPTS), A-116
I
illumination, 19-9
Improved
Bradley Acquisition
Subsystem (IBAS), see
Bradley
commanders weapon
station (ICWS), 5-4
improvised
conventional munitions
(ICM), 8-68, 8-74
explosive devices (IED),
5-5, 8-10, E-4, E-8 through
E-14
individual and crew live-fire
prerequisite testing, 14-1
through 14-16
gunnery skills test (GST),
14-1 through 14-10
conduct of the GST, 14-5
evaluation procedures,
14-2, 14-3
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
planning considerations,
14-3 through 14-5
requirements, 14-1, 14-2
safety precautions, 14-2
test stations, 14-6 through
14-9
gunnery table I, crew critical
skills test, 14-10 through
14-16
conduct of gunnery table I,
14-13
evaluations procedures,
14-10 through 14-12
requirements, 14-10
safety precautions, 14-10
test stations, 14-13 through
14-16
inbore device, preface,
11-19, 11-20, 12-8, 12-22,
13-3, 14-2, 18-10, 18-14
indirect fire (also see fire)
inertial navigation unit (INU),
2-12
improvised explosive device
(IED), 11-31
Infantry, preface, 1-1, 2-1
Fighting Vehicle (IFV), 2-9,
3-9
infrared (IR), 2-7, 4-78, 5-9,
6-19, 9-3 through 9-5, D-9
instructors
/operators (IO), 12-7, 12-14,
12-18
/operators station (IOS),
11-22, 11-28, 11-33, 11-34,
D-9
station (IS), 4-49
utilization handbook (IUH),
16-13
Integrated
communications, command,
and control (IC3), 2-7,
2-11, 2-12
Sight Unit (ISU), 2-10, 3-17,
5-15, 7-6 through 7-10,
8-13, 8-14, 8-41, B-4, B-34
through B-64
J
Javelin, 4-1, 4-92 through
4-97, 4-100, 8-11, 9-11,
12-20, 19-4, 19-18, 19-19,
D-3, D-9 through D-20
Joint
3 September 2009
Index
Air Attack Team (JAAT),

19-5
Combat Identification
Marking Systems (JCIMS),
6-13 through 6-19
K
kill
indicators, 10-2, 10-3
standards, 10-2
kinetic energy (KE), 4-19,
4-20, 4-22, 4-37, 4-40, 4-53,
7-6, 9-3, 16-26 through
16-36, A-17, A-29, A-82,
L
L8A1, 4-68, 4-69
L8A3, 4-68, 4-69
laser boresight, C-23
laser range finder (LRF), 1-4,
7-5 through 7-18, 8-3, 8-12,
8-27, 8-29, 8-31, 8-40, 8-41,
8-48, 8-82, 13-10, 16-1,
A-11, A-28, A-50, A-63,
A-118 through A-123, B-51,
B-54, B-58, B-59
laser target interface device
(LTID), 11-2, 11-7, 11-8,
11-20
launch tube assembly (LTA),
4-92
light anti-tank weapons
(LWA), D-8
light-armor vehicles, 3-6
Light Medium Tactical
Vehicle (LMTV), 1-6, 17-1,
17-5, 17-11
line of
contact (LC), 9-20
departure (LD), 9-20, 13-12
sight (LOS), 3-16, 13-12,
17-5, B-5, B-53
live-fire
accuracy screening test
(LFAST), 1-2, 13-23, 13-27,
16-12, A-1, A-10, A-23,
exercise (LFX), 1-6, 1-7,
12-15, 12-20, 13-25, 14-1,
14-10, 19-1, 19-5, 19-6,
19-10, 19-12, H-11 through
H-13
load, assemble, and packaging
(LAP), 4-4
3 September 2009
local area network (LAN),

11-14
Long-Range Advanced Scout
Surveillance System
(LRAS3), 5-11, 5-12, 7-5,
7-6, C-1, C-28 through
C-32
lot number 4-1, 4-2, 4-4, 4-10,
4-19, 4-38, 4-102, 4-103
lower tactical internet (LTI),
13-27
M
M2 (.50 cal), 7-3, 8-11, 11-30,
14-7 through 14-9, H-1
through H-14
M2 HB, 4-1, 4-16, 8-35, 14-8,
14-9, 19-10, A-114, C-16,
C-17, C-18, C-20, E-1
M4, 11-33, 12-16, D-2, D-3
M9, 12-16, 12-23
M12, C-2
M16, D-6
M16A2/M4, 19-10, D-2, D-3
D-20
M16A4, D-20
M18A1 claymore mine, E-8
M24D, 4-1 through 4-14
M26A1, 12-23, A-6 through
A-18, A-87
M27A1, A-6 through A-22,
A-36, A-65, A-87
M27A3, A-2, A-5 through
A-26, A-36, A-37
M48, 14-7 through 14-9
M60, 19-10
M61, D-7
M62, D-7
M76, 4-69, 4-70
M80, D-7
M82, 4-70, D-7
M88A1 recovery vehicle, 3-7
M95, H-8
M96, H-8
M98A1, D-9, D-11
M113 family of vehicles, 3-7,
13-19
M121 120-mm mortar, 3-12,
3-13
M122A1, D-7
M136, D-8
M136 AT4, D-9
M142, E-8
M145 machine gun optic, C-2
through C-4
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
M150 grenade launcher (also

see grenade launcher), 3-14,
3-15
M172, 11-19, 11-23, 11-30,
11-31, D-7
M199, D-3, D-7
M200, D-3, D-7
M203, 12-20, 19-10, D-3
through D-5
M203A1, D-3
M240 (7.62mm), 4-1, 4-14,
7-3, 8-11, 8-40, 8-41, 8-42,
14-6 through 14-9, A-103
through A-113, C-7
M240B, 12-20, 14-7 through
14-9, 19-10, C-9, C-11,
C-13 through C-15, C-19,
C-21, D-7, D-8, D-18, D-20,
H-1 through H-22
M240C, 8-11, 14-7 through
14-9, B-5, B-57
M242 25mm, 4-19, 4-31, 11-3,
11-23, 14-6 through 14-11
M249 (5.56 mm), 4-1, 4-10
through 4-12, 4-33, 7-3,
8-11, 12-2,14-8, C-2, C-7
through C-13, C-19 through
C-21, D-2 through D-20,
H-1 through H-22
M250/M257 smoke grenades
malfunction, 4-67, 4-68,
A-114, B-57
M256 120-mm smoothbore
cannon, 4-37, 4-45, 4-49,
4-51 through 4-54, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11, 11-3, 11-16
M256A1, 14-11, A-137
M257, 4-67
M303, H-12, H-14
M313, H-12, H-14
M385 target practice, 4-32
through 4-35
M430, 4-32, 4-33
M430A1, 4-32 through 4-37
M548, 4-33
M734, A-64, A-65
M745, A-65
M758, 4-24 through 4-28
M776, 4-62, 4-63
M791, 4-19, 4-29, 8-6
M792, 4-19, 4-24 through
4-28, 11-23
M792 HEI-T, 8-7
M793, 4-19, 4-29, 4-30, 11-23
M794, 11-23
Index-9
Index
M829A1, 4-39 through 4-42,

4-49, 8-6
M829A2 APFSDS-T, 4-39
through 4-44, 8-6, 11-17
M829A3, 4-38 through 4-42,
4-43, 8-6
M830 HEAT, 4-37, 11-17
M830 HEAT-MP-T, 4-41,
4-45, 8-7
M830A1 HEAT-MP-T, 4-41,
4-46, 8-7
M830A1 MPAT, 4-41, 4-45,
4-53, 11-17
M831A1, 4-50
M831A1-TPT, 4-49
M855, D-3, D-7
M856, D-7
M862, D-3
M865 APCSDS-T, 4-49, 11-17
M908, 4-45, 13-17
M908 HE-OR-T, 4-38, 4-41,
4-45, 8-7
M910, 4-19, 4-29, 4-30
M918 target practice, 4-32
through 4-35
M919, 4-19
M922, 4-32, 11-30
M922A1, 4-32, 11-30, 11-31
M929, 4-63, 4-64
M929 WP, 4-58, 4-59, 4-60
M930, 4-60
M931, 4-61
M931 FRTR, 4-58
M933, 4-57, 4-58
M933A1, 4-58
M934, 4-57, 4-58
M934A1 HE, 4-58
M934 HE, 4-58, 4-59
M935, 4-63, 4-64
M962, 11-19
M983, 4-60, 4-61
M983 illum, 4-58
M1001 HVCC, 4-32 through
4-34
M1002 TPMP-T, 4-49
M1028 canister, 4-41 through
4-49, 11-17
MK281 MODO target
practice, 4-32, 4-36
machine gun,
25mm, 3-9, B-5 through
B-56
5.56mm, D-5
7.62mm, 14-6, 18-6, B-5,
B-6
Index-10
automatic, 3-1, 3-8

basic, 7-13, 7-14
characteristics, 3-3
caliber .50, 1-5, 1-6, 2-16,
2-18, 3-5, 3-6, 8-10, 11-33,
18-6, 18-7 through 18-16,
A-102 through A-110, C-6
coaxial, 8-41, A-108
through A-113
grenade, C-10, C-18
grenade launcher, C-11
main gun, 8-1
M2 HB, 3-5, 3-6 through
3-11, 11-3, 11-16, 11-18,
11-29, 11-30, 19-10, A-113
M9, 12-16, 14-6
M16, 3-2, 12-16, 12-20
M203, 12-20
M231, 3-2
M240, 3-4, 3-5, 8-10, 8-11,
8-41, 8-42, 11-16, 11-18,
11-23, 11-25, 11-29, 11-31,
12-16, 12-20, A-113
M240B, 14-6, C-13
M240C, 8-11, B-57
M242 25-mm automatic
gun, 3-8, 3-9, B-4
M249 squad automatic
weapon (SAW), 3-2, 3-3,
8-10, 8-11, 12-16, 12-20,
19-10, C-9, C-12, C-13,
C-21
M2131 5.56mm, 3-1
MK19 MOD3 40-mm (also
see machine gun), 3-7, 3-8,
8-5, 8-10, 8-11, 8-39,
11-3, 11-29, 11-31, 12-16,
13-19, 14-6 through 14-9,
17-10, 18-6 through 18-16,
19-4, 19-10, 19-18, C-5,
C-8 through C-11
sight offset data, C-25
through C-27
soft targets, 8-33 through
8-43
techniques, 8-41
main battle area (MBA), 9-22
maintenance advisory
messages (MAM), 4-102
maneuver box on an offensive
engagement, 13-7 through
13-9
manufacturers identification
code (MIC), 4-4
maps/digital maps, 7-17, 7-18
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
mark center of sector (MCS),

H-16 through H-22
marking system, 1-4, 6-13
through 6-19
Master Gunner, preface, 1-3,
1-5, 1-6, 4-2, 4-53, 4-97,
4-102, 11-20, 12-3, 12-9,
12-16 through 12-21, 13-2,
13-12 through 13-25, 16-2,
16-7, 16-11, 16-26, 16-29,
17-6, 18-5, 18-6, B-1, B-12,
B-31, B-54 through B-56,
C-12, C-19, C-20
maximum
effective range (MER), 4-12,
4-14, 4-16
engagement line (MEL),
9-4, 9-7
ordinate (MAX ORD), 8-8
medical evacuation
(MEDEVAC), 12-2, 13-21,
16-8, 16-12, 17-3, F-10,
F-12
mean (average) point of impact
(MPI), A-93 through A-97
mechanized infantry, 1-1
medium weapon thermal sight
(MWTS), C-5 through C-7
message to observer (MTO),
8-67
meteorological (MET), H-11,
H-13
Mi-24 Hind, 7-14, 7-15
Mi-24 Hind-D, 7-13, D-128
through D-130
Mi-28 Havok, 7-13
military
occupational specialty
(MOS), 14-1, 14-10
police (MP), 1-6,
2-15, 8-12, 17-1, 17-15
standard (MIL-STD), 4-2,
4-5, 4-8, 4-9
mine
-clearing line charges
(MICLIC), 13-17, E-8,
E-13 through E-15
Resistant Ambush Protected
(MRAP), 5-12, 16-7
minimum proficiency levels
(MPL), 1-6, 16-4 through
16-38 17-3, 17-6, 18-2
missile
control subsystem (MCS),
3-16
3 September 2009
Index
data loader (MDL), 13-27

Hellfire, 13-18
simulation round (MSR),
4-92, 4-93, 11-24, D-9,
D-10
TOW characteristics, 4-77
missiles, 4-1, 4-71 through
4-97, 4-100
mission
enemy, terrain and weather
troops ad support available,
time available, and civil
considerations (METT-TC),
5-13, 6-16, 8-5, D-15,
E-12, F-2, F-11
equipment package (MEP),
2-14
-essential task list (METL),
11-27, 12-3, 12-18, 12-20,
13-2, 13-15, 17-6, 18-5,
19-3, D-19, E-3, H-1, H-6
MK19, 1-3, 2-15, 2-16, 2-18,
3-7, 3-8, 4-1, 4-19 through
4-21, 4-31, 4-32, 4-37, 4-36,
4-98, 4-100, 7-3, 11-3,
11-29, 11-31, 12-16, 13-19,
17-10, 18-6 through 18-16,
19-4, 19-10, 19-18, C-5, C-8
through C-11 (also see
machine gun)
MK19 grenade machine gun,
C-18, C-19
Mobile
Advanced Gunnery Training
System (MAGTS), 11-21
Conduct-of-Fire Trainer
(MCOFT), 11-9
Configuration of
Computerized Advanced
(MC-AGTS), 11-21
mobility, 13-17
modified
table of organization and
equipment (MTOE),
12-2
work order (MWO), A-71
modular pack mine system
(MOPMS), E-8 through
E-15
month codes, 4-5
Mortar Fire Control System
(MFCS), H-4 through H-22
mortars,
3 September 2009
M106A3 Self-Propelled
120-mm Carrier, 2-18, 2-19
M121 120-mm, 3-12, 3-13
tables (MT), H-1 through
H-22
Multiple Integrated Laser
Engagement System
(MILES), 11-2, 11-7
through 11-26, 12-7, 12-20,
12-21, 12-22, 13-3, 13-24,
17-11, 18-9 through 18-14,
D-19 through D-21
multipurpose antitank
(MPAT), 4-38, 4-45, 4-49,
4-53, 4-93, 6-13, 7-6, 8-5,
8-11, 8-23, 11-17, A-10,
A-20, A-23, A-38, A-52,
A-59, A-60, A-115, A-122
through A-135, F-6
muzzle
boresight device (MBD),
A-2 through A-88, A-115
boresight device
collimination, A-5 through
A-9
reference sensor (MRS),
3-11, 8-43, 11-22, 14-6
through 14-9, A-9, A-15
A-38 through A-40, A-44,
A-92, A-99, A-115, A-116
N
narrow field of view (NFOV),
7-5, 13-5, A-23, A-27,
A-120, B-52, B-54, B-55,
C-7, C-8, C-28 through C-30
national
item identification number
(NIIN), 4-6
stock number (NSN), 4-2,
4-6, 4-78, 4-79, 4-84, 4-98,
4-99, 4-102, 4-103
Training Center (NTC), 11-11,
19-2
naval gunfire (NGF), 8-72,
9-26
net control station (NCS),
13-27
night vision
devices, 5-9, 6-19, D-2,
D-14
goggles, 6-16
sights, C-2, D-9
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
nitrogen gas temperature,

A-46, A-62
nominal ocular hazard distance
(NOHD), 13-10
noncommissioned officer
(NCO), 1-3
nongovernmental
organizations (NGO), F-2
North Atlantic Treaty
Organization (NATO), 1-3,
3-3, 3-9, 4-1, 4-3, 4-9, 4-12
through 4-16, 4-51, D-10
notification of ammunition
reclassification (NAR),
4-102
O
observer
/controller (O/C), 19-11,
19-13, D-20, H-3 through
H-8
-target (OT), 8-75 through
8-78
off-center vision method, 5-12
offensive engagement
example, 13-7 through 13-9
officer in charge (OIC), 1-3
operating tempo (OPTEMPO),
H-5, H-6
Operation
Desert Storm (ODS), 2-9
through 2-14
Engineer (ODS-E), 2-9,
2-13
orders, 6-19, 12-22, 13-15,
13-23, 18-5 through 18-15,
19-3, 19-13 through 19-20
operational
control (OPCON), 6-19
environment (OE), preface,
1-1, 5-2, 11-31, 13-6,
13-15, 13-23, 18-5
order (OPORD), 6-19,
12-22, 18-5, 18-9 through
18-15, 19-3, 19-13 through
19-17, 19-20, F-4
plan (OPLAN), F-2
opposing forces (OPFOR),
13-24
orientation, 1-5
P
paratrooper, 8-39
Index-11
Index
personnel carrier (PC), 3-1,

5-1, 5-8, 5-17, 6-1, 8-11,
8-15, 9-10, 9-15, 17-1
petroleum, oils, and lubricants
(POL), 13-25, 19-3, A-18,
A36
phase line (PL), 9-15, 9-21,
13-28
phoenix beacons, 6-16, 6-17
planning gunnery exercises,
13-1
platform
stabilized (also see
gunnery), 1-6, 18-1
through 18-38
unstabilized (also see
gunnery), 1-6, 17-1
through 17-20
weapon systems, 1-1, 1-2,
1-3, 3-1
platoon after-action review
(PAAR), 11-21
point initiating base detonating
(PIBD), 4-33
position navigation
(POSNAV), 2-4, 2-7, 2-12,
A-116
post-fire check, A-1, A-112,
C-27, C-28, B-58
Precision
Gunnery System (PGS),
11-2, 11-7 through 11-9,
11-20, 11-25, 11-26, 12-7,
12-20 through 12-22
lightweight GPS receiver
(PLGR), 2-10, 7-17, A-132
precombat
checks (PCC), F-2
inspections (PCI), F-2
pre-fire checks, 1-2, A-1, B-50
through B-53, C-11
Bradleys A3 Commanders
Pre-Fire Checklist, B-53
Bradley A3 Gunners prefire
checklist, B-52
Checklist for ODS and
Below, B-51
Preliminary Crew Proficiency
Course (PCPC), 1-5, 17-2
preliminary marksmanship
instruction (PMI), 12-7,
12-23, H-5, H-7
preventative maintenance
checks, and services
Index-12
(PMCS), 2-12, 12-15, 12-17,

16-12, 17-3, A-1, A-10,
A-23, A-42, A-44, A-90
through A-92, B-50
through B-52, C-27, D-2,
E-8
primary direction of fire
(PDF), D-15
probability
of hit (PH), 11-27
of kill (PK), 11-27
Pulse jet-air system (PJS), 2-4
Q
quadrant, 9-4 through 9-8,
9-10, 9-12, 9-14, 9-15
friendly-based, 9-4 through
9-7
terrain-based, 9-5, 9-6
quality
assurance specialist
(QASAS), 4-31, 4-38,
4-53, 4-54, 4-97
deficiency report (QDR),
B-31, B-32
R
radio frequency (RF), 4-31,
4-53
radio/telephone operator, H-9
through H-22
range
communications, 13-24
control, 13-22
determination, 7-5
equipment, 13-22, 13-23
operations, 1-5, 13-1
through 13-28
conducting range
operations, 13-24 through
13-27
digital range set up, 13-27,
13-28
planning range operations,
13-1 through 13-24
overlay, 13-27
safety officer (RSO), 1-3,
12-7, 13-20 through 13-26,
17-13 through 17-19
spotting, 8-76
Reimer Digital Library (RDL),
14-1, 14-2, 14-10, E-10
readiness condition
(REDCON), A-91 through
A-93
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
Recognition of Combat
Vehicles (ROC-V), 11-2
through 11-28, 16-12, 17-3
Relocatable Advanced
(RAGTS), 11-21
reconnaissance, preface, 1-1,
2-1
refraction,
day, A-118
night, A-118
remote binocular display
(RBD), 2-11, B-53
reports
battle damage assessment
(BDA), 10-4
situation report (SITREP),
10-4, 13-15, F-4
spot report (SPOTREP),
10-5
reserve component (RC), 12-2,
12-17 through 12-22, 16-2,
17-3, 18-8
restrictive fire
area (RFA), 9-26
line (RFL), 9-4, 9-7, 9-26
reticles, 8-49, 8-50, A-6
through A-127
revised hull and turret network
boxes (RHNB&TNB), 2-2
rifle squad gunnery (also see
gunnery)
considerations, D-1 through
D-13
control and distribution,
D-13 through D-18
exercise development, D-19
through D-22
risk management, F-1 through
F-5
assess hazard to determine
risks, F-3
develop controls and make
risk decisions, F-3, F-4
identify hazards, F-2,
implement controls, F-4
supervise and evaluate, F-4,
F-5
rocket-propelled grenade
(RPG), 4-10, 5-7, 7-3, 8-33,
18-12 through 18-18
rules of engagement (ROE),
8-10, 9-3, 9-4, 9-10, D-14,
F-2
3 September 2009
Index
S
saboted
light armor penetrator
(SLAP), 4-11, 4-18
light armor penetrator-tracer
(SLAP-T), 4-11, 4-18,
11-19, 18-15
safe separation distance (SED),
4-53
safety, 1-7
Abrams, F-6 through F-12
Bradley, F-12, F-13
assess hazard to determine
risks, F-3
develop controls and make
risk decisions, F-3, F-4
identify hazards, F-2
implement controls, F-4
implementation
responsibilities, F-5
through F-13
-of-use messages (SOUM),
1-3, H-5
supervise and evaluate, F-4,
F-5
-of-use messages (SOUM),
4-102
scaled ranges, 13-14, 13-15
scatterable mines
(SCATMINE), 9-21, 9-22
scout, 1-5, 1-6
screening test, A-89 through
A-101
search techniques,
air search, 5-12, 5-13
detailed, 5-9, 5-11, 5-12
estimated of upper search
limits, 5-14
ground, 5-9
ground and air search tips,
5-15
off-center vision method,
5-12
rapid, 5-9
sector
divided, 5-16
overlapping, 5-15, 5-16
slow (50 meters), 5-10, 5-11
sector of fire, 9-4
sectors of responsibility, 5-3
through 5-5
semi-automated forces (SAF),
11-14
3 September 2009
senior instructor/operator
(SIO), 12-18
sheaf, 8-68 through 8-71
converged, 8-69
open, 8-70
parallel, 8-71
special, 8-70
standard, 8-69
short-range training
ammunition (SRTA), D-3
sight
correction factor (SCF),
A-19, A-20, A-38, A-115
offset, C-25 through C-28
simulated
command launch unit
(SCLU), 4-92
round (SR), 4-93, D-10
Simulation Network
(SIMNET), 11-2, 11-14,
12-3, 12-23
simulations, preface
Single Channel Ground and
Airborne Radio System
(SINCGARS), B-53
situation report (SITREP), (see
reports)
situational
awareness, 2-1, 2-4, 2-7,
2-9, 2-11, 2-12, 5-2, 5-12,
5-13, 6-2, 6-13, 6-17, 6-19,
7-2, 8-22, 9-1, 10-1, 12-2,
18-7, 19-16, D-14, F-1
training exercises (STX),
11-14, 12-4, 12-14, 12-15,
12-20, 12-21, D-21, H-1,
H-6, H-7, H-19
understanding, 9-15
smoke grenades (see grenades)
smoothbore cannon, 3-9, 3-10,
3-11, 3-12
spot report (SPOTREP), see
reports
squad
automatic weapon (SAW),
1-3, 9-11, C-9 through
C-13, C-19, C-21, D-5
through D-7
leaders display (SLD),
2-12, 5-12, 5-15, 7-4
stabilized platform gunnery,
16-1 through 16-38
crew gunnery, 16-16
through 16-25
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
example gunnery tale VI,

16-26 through 16-38
gunnery instruction and
live-fire prerequisites,
16-11 through 16-15
requirements, 16-1 through
16-11
standard form 368, B-31
through B-34
Standardized Agreement
(STANAG) 2316 and 2322,
1-3, 4-2, 4-3, 4-9
standing operating procedures
(SOP), 4-56, 6-17, 8-17,
8-68, 9-5, 9-13, 9-14, 10-4,
13-3, 13-19, 13-20 through
13-26, 14-1, 14-12, 16-10,
17-6, D-4, D-15 through
D-18, E-12, F-5, F-12,
F-13
Stinger, 8-11
Stryker, 16-7
student station (SS), 4-92
surface danger zone (SDZ)
diagrams, 4-9, 13-3, 13-10
19-11
survivability, 13-18
sustainment
training tables, 1-7
unit, 1-6, 1-7, 12-1, 12-8,
12-9, 12-16, 17-1, 17-3,
18-1
system
control box (SCB), B-52
Enhancement Package
(SEP), (see Abrams)
T
T-55, 6-9
T-72, 6-9, 7-13, 7-15, 7-16,
11-4, A-128 through A-130
T-80, 7-13, A-128
T-90, 7-13, 18-12 through
18-18, A-128
table of
assessment, 18-2
distribution and allowances
(TDA), 12-2
organization and equipment
(TO&E), 4-94, 13-24, D-11
Tabletop
Full-Fidelity Trainer (TFT),
11-28, 11-29
Index-13
Index
Gunnery Trainer (TGT),

preface, 11-2
Tactical Navigation System
(TACNAV), 2-10
tactical
operation center (TOC),
19-10 through 19-13
standing operating
procedures (TACSOP),
13-28
tactics, techniques, and
procedures (TTP), 1-1, 6-13,
9-4, 9-7
tank
ammunition stowage plan,
A-133 through A-135
commander (TC), A-36,
A-126, F-6 through F-11
crew gunnery skills tests
(TCGST), 1-5
Crew Proficiency Course
(TCPC), 1-6
Urban Survivability Kit
(TUSK), 16-4, 16-10,
16-11, 16-37
target, 1-5
Acquisition System (TAS),
8-26, B-52 through B-56
array, 9-8, 9-9
close-range, 7-2
conditions, 7-11
detection, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7
detection challenges, 5-6,
5-7
frontal, 7-2
planned, 9-23 through 9-25
pointer/illuminator/aiming
light (TPIAL), C-2
practice (TP), 4-9, 4-19,
4-29 through 4-38, 4-49,
4-51, 4-52, 4-61,17-14,
17-15
M385, 4-34, 4-35
M918, 4-35
MK281 MODO, 4-36
practice cone stabilized
discarding sabot tracer
(TPCSDS-T), 11-18, 19-9
practice discarding sabot
with tracer (TPDS-T), 4-20,
4-29, 4-30, 19-9
practice multipurpose-tracer
(TPMP-T), 4-49
Index-14
practice with tracer (TP-T),

4-29, 4-30
prioritization, 7-2
reference point (TRP), 5-8,
6-17, 7-17, 8-13, 9-4, 9-5,
9-14, 9-15, 9-24, 13-28
schedule, 9-20
set forward observer (TSFO),
11-10
signature, 5-5, 5-6
stationary, 7-2
thermal sights, 5-7
tasks, conditions, standards,
1-2
technical
inspection, 12-23
manual (TM), 1-2
test, measurement, and
diagnostics equipment
(TMDE), A-44
testing,
prerequisite, 1-5
thermal identification panel
(TIP), 6-13 through 6-16
markings, 6-16
Phoenix beacons, 6-16, 6-17
Phoenix NSN listing, 6-17
Thermal
Imaging System (TIS), 5-11,
6-14, 8-14, 8-27, 8-41, A-9
A-28, A-36, A-48, A-63,
A-123
Weapon Sight (TWS), C-5,
C-6, C-21
threat
levels, 7-2
targets, 1-1, 1-3, 1-4,
Thru-Sight Video (TSV), 11-2,
11-8, 12-7
time
on target (TOT), 8-72
to target (TTT), 8-72
Total Ammunition
Management Information
System-Redesigned
(TAMIS-R), 12-23
tracer-on-target (TOT), 3-1,
4-14, 4-16, 4-19, 11-9,
11-25, 12-21
traffic control point (TCP),
16-4, 16-32, 16-38
training
Activity Support Center
(TASC), B-13
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
aids/devices/simulations and
simulators (TADSS), 1-2,
11-1 through 11-36, H-2
and evaluation outlines
(T&EO), 13-15, 18-2, 18-5,
D-20
assessment, 12-1 through
12-4
commanders guidance,
12-17, 12-18
devices 1-5, 11-1 through
11-36
Devices Interface Panel
(TDIP), 11-26
gunnery, 12-18 though
12-20
long-range, 12-20
near-term, 12-22
plans, 12-18 through 12-23
short-range, 12-21
Support Center (TSC), 11-7,
11-18
strategy, 12-4 through 12-16
vehicle identification, 11-4
traverse and elevation (T&E),
8-4, 8-5, B-54, B-55, D-6
tube-launched, optically
tracked, wire-guided missile
(TOW), 3-16, 3-17, 4-71
through 4-97, 8-11, 8-30,
9-9, 9-11, 9-14, 10-3, 11-3,
11-5, 11-23 through 11-26,
12-5, 12-18, 14-11, 19-4,
19-9, 19-18, 19-22, A-96,
B-1, B-34 through B-52,
B-63 through B-69
missile types,
TOW 2A, 4-71 through
4-82
TOW 2B, 4-71 through
4-89
TOW bunker buster
(TOW BB) 4-77, 4-89
4-89 through 4-91
turret
Drive System (TDS),
2-12
mission processor unit
(TMPU), A-22, A-23,
A-29, A-97
U
3 September 2009
Index
unarmored vehicles, 10-3

kill standard, 10-3
Unattended Ground Sensors
(UGS), 5-2
unexploded ordnances (UXO),
5-5
United States
Air Force (USAF), 13-18
Army Infantry Center
(USAIC), preface
Army Reserve (USAR),
preface
Unmanned Aircraft Systems
(UAS), 5-2, 13-19
United Nations (UN), 6-13
unstabilized platform gunnery,
17-1 through 17-20
basic crew practice, 17-17
crew gunnery, 17-13
through 17-18
crew qualification course,
17-18 through 17-25
gunnery training program,
17-2
upgraded tank commanders
panel (UTCP), 2-3
urban cluster, 13-6
V
variable time (VT), 13-17
vehicle
borne improvised explosive
device (VBIED), 8-10
3 September 2009
cargo capacity, 4-101

commander (VC), 2-4, 2-5,
2-7, 3-17, 5-2 through
5-10, 5-15 through 5-17,
7-1, 7-4, 7-6, 7-10, 7-11,
7-17, 8-2, 8-3, 8-8 through
8-42, 10-1 through 10-5,
11-4 through 11-27, 12-5,
12-8, 12-9, 12-18, 13-4,
13-5, 13-26, 13-28, 14-13,
15-3, 15-6, 15-12 through
15-21, 16-1 through 16-38,
17-3 through 17-12, 18-6,
A-5, E-1
Crew Evaluator Exportable
Package (VCEEP), 1-6,
12-16
Crew Evaluators (VCE),
11-26, 12-18, 12-19, 13-22,
13-23, 13-26, 13-28, 16-10,
17-4, 18-5
motion sensor (VMS), 2-12
Virtual
Combat Convoy Trainer
(VCCT), 11-2, 11-28,
11-31, 12-7, 12-16
Convoy Operations Trainer
(VCOT), 11-2, 11-34,
11-35
Lockheed, 11-31, 11-32
Raydon, 11-31 through
11-33
visual modification sets
(VISMOD), 13-3, 13-24
Volcano, E-8, E-12 through
E-15
volts direct current (VDC),
B-1, B-2
FM 3-20.21/MCWP 3-12.2
VS-17 panel, 6-18

W, X, Y
warfighting skills, 12-2
weapon,
control box (WCB), 8-29
control status (WCS), 1-5,
9-3, 9-4, 9-14, 9-15, D-14,
D-15
optics and lasers, D-2
platform systems, 2-1
ready posture, 9-4
safety posture levels, 9-12
systems, 1-1, 2-1, A-1
systems malfunctions, C-19,
C-20
wheels, hull, armament, truck
(WHAT), 6-2
white/hot (W/H), A-28
white phosphorous (WP),
4-57, 4-66, 8-68, 9-26, 19-9
wide field view (WFOV), 5-4,
7-5, 13-6, B-52, C-7, C-8,
C-28, C-29
WORM formula, A-131,
A-132
Z
zeroing, B-53 through B-58,
C-11 through C-19
procedures for 25-mm,
ODS and below, B-53
procedures for A3 only,
B-54
procedures for coax, ODS,
and below, B-54
Index-15
FM 3-20.21
MCWP 3-12.2
3 September 2009
By order of the Secretary of the Army:
GEORGE W. CASEY, JR.

General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0922504
By Direction of the Commandant of the Marine Corps:
GEORGE J. FLYNN
Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps
Deputy Commandant
Combat Development and Integration
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the
initial distribution number (IDN) 110469, requirements for FM 3-20.21.
PIN: 085783-000

Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery FM 3-20.21

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery FM 3-20.21

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

FM 3-20.

Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Distribution authorized to US Government agencies and

Headquarters, Department of the Army

This publication is available at

Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

This page intentionally left blank.

Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery

Introduction ....................................................................................................... 1-1

Platform Systems Characteristics .................................................................. 2-1

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Distribution authorized to US Government agencies and

Section II Bradley Fighting Vehicle Systems .............................................. 2-9

Platform Weapon Systems Capabilities ......................................................... 3-1

Ammunition ....................................................................................................... 4-1

Safety Information ............................................................................................ 4-31

Detect ................................................................................................................. 5-1

Identify ............................................................................................................... 6-1

Decide ................................................................................................................ 7-1

Target Prioritization ............................................................................................. 7-2

Engage Direct and Indirect Fires (Crew) ..................................................... 8-1

Engage Collective .......................................................................................... 9-1

Training Devices ............................................................................................. 11-1

Gunnery Training Program ............................................................................ 12-1

Range Operations........................................................................................... 13-1

Individual and Crew Live-Fire Prerequisite Training ................................... 14-1

Crew Evaluation .............................................................................................. 15-1

Section V Common Crew Scoresheet ..................................................... 15-22

Stabilized Platform Gunnery ......................................................................... 16-1

Unstabilized Platform Gunnery ..................................................................... 17-1

Gunnery Table III, Basic Machine Gun ........................................................... 17-15

Collective Gunnery ......................................................................................... 18-1

Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise .............................................................. 19-1

Abrams Live-Fire Preparation......................................................................... A-1

Bradley Fighting Vehicle Live-Fire Preparation ............................................ B-1

Armed Truck Live-Fire Preparation ................................................................ C-1

Rifle Squad Gunnery ........................................................................................ D-1

Engineer Squad Qualification Tables ............................................................. E-1

Safety ................................................................................................................. F-1

Guardian ASV Live-Fire Preparation ..............................................................G-1

120-mm Mortar Gunnery .................................................................................. H-1

Figure 3-13. Smoke grenade launcher ................................................................................ 3-14

Figure 4-37. 25 mm sabot petal danger area ....................................................................... 4-31

Figure 4-78. Setting the M734 multi-option fuze .................................................................. 4-66

Figure 4-117. HBCT common vehicle cargo capacity ........................................................ 4-102

Figure 6-27. VS-17 panel ..................................................................................................... 6-18

Figure 8-23. Multiple target fire command example ............................................................. 8-46

Figure 9-4. Examples of fire patterns ..................................................................................... 9-8

Figure 13-2a. Example maneuver box on an offensive engagement .................................. 13-7

Figure 16-11. Engagement 67 example ............................................................................ 16-33

Figure A-6. Step 6 - tighten the MBD finger tight ...................................................................A-4

Figure A-36. CITV stadia reticle ......................................................................................... A-119

Figure B-15. Example of a completed DA Form 7523-R..................................................... B-15

Table 8-9. Deviation computations ....................................................................................... 8-78

Table 16-2. Gunnery table ammunition allocation ............................................................... 16-3

Table 18-14. Table XIIAmmunition allocations per vehicle .............................................. 18-18

Table B-4. Length of lines on crosses ................................................................................. B-49

TRADOC Capabilities Manager for HBCT, TCM-HBCT, DSN 464-7955 or Commercial

DTDCD-E, ATZK-TDD-ORSA, DSN 464-3042 or Comm (502) 624-3042.

Reconnaissance gunnery doctrine: DTDCD-E, ATZK-TD, DSN 464-4453 or Comm (502)

This page intentionally left blank.

Section III General Changes .................. 1-2

SECTION III GENERAL CHANGES

1-9. Below is a synopsis of the chapters and their content.